Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
AND
FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Dr. K.R. Arora
SOIL MECHANICS
AND
FOUNDATIONENGThlliEmNG
[ IN SI UNITS 1
o K.R, ARORA
Exclusive rights by St,1ndard Publishen; DistribulOn;, Delhi for publication, distribution and eJl:port. All righlS reserved. No
parI of lllis publication in general and diagrams in particulil[ may be reproduced or transrrutted in any fonn or by any
mean~, electronic. mechnnical. photo copying, recording or any information storage and retrieval system. without tbe prior
written permission of the publisher and author.
ISBN, 81-8014-028-8
Soil mcdtanics and Foundation engineering (gcolcchniClI engineering) is a [asl developing discipline of
civil engineering. Considerable work: has been done in [he field in the last 6 dcc.'ldes. A student finds it
difTiOJII to have access to the latest literature in the field. The author b.1S tried to collect the material from
various sources and [0 prescnt in the form of a lext.
The text bas been divided into twO parts. The first pan dc.'lls with the fundamentals of soil mcchanics.
The second pout dc.lIs with earth rCUlining structures and foundat ion engineering. 'nle subject matter has been
presented in a logical :lntl org:mi.scd manner such liwi it may be laken up serially without llny loss of
continuity. ' :hc book covers the syllabi of undergraduate courses inn Soil Mechanics <lod Foundation
Engineering prescribed by most Indian universities and institutes.
An aucmpt has bccn made to explnin the fundamentals in a simple. lucid language. Da<;ic co~epts have
been emphasised throughout. The author. who has about 25 years of 1C<1ching experience. has paid specia l
'attention to the difficulties experienced by students. A large number of illustrative examples have been given
to show the application of the theory to field problems. Numerical problems, with answers, have been givell
for practice. Some objcctive type questions have also been given at the cnd of each Chapter. l11c. text Is
profusely illUStWled with diagwms ~d charts. Latest IS codes have been followed. as far as possible.
References are given at the end of each chapter. As complete switch over to 51 units has not taken place in
-India, bolh MKS nnd SI units hove been used.
The book will be uscrui for the undergraduate students. The student,,> appearing for various competitive
examinations and AMlE will :llsa find the text useful. A large number of ch•• rts and tables have been included
to make the text useful (or'pmctising engineers.
lbc author is grateful to Prof. Alam Singh of Jodhpur University who introduced the subjcct to him
about 3 decades ago as a student :1t M.B.M. Engineering College, Jodhpur. lbe author is indebted to Prof. A.
Varadarnjan of nT, Delhi, who helped him in understanding some of lhe intricate problems during his
doctoral programme. The author thanks the faculty of Geotechnical Division of liT, Delhi. for the help
extended. '[be author al<;o thanks his fellow research scholars, Dr. K.K, Gupta, Dr. D. Shankcriah, Dr. T.S.
Rekhi, Dr. 8.S. Salija, and Dr. R.N. Shahi for the fruitful discussions.
Ihe autbor is grateful to Prof. A.V. Ramanujam. Principal, Engineering College, Kola for constant
encouragement. 'Ibe author thanks his colleagues at Engineering COllege, Kota, especially Sh. Amin Uddin,
Drnughtsman. 'Il1e author also thanks his wife Mrs. Rani Arora who helped in proof reading and other works
related with this tex!. 'Ille help received from his daughter Sangeela Arora and son Sanjeev Arora is also
acknowledged.
In spite of every care Inken to cnsure acx:uracy. somc errors might have crept in. The author will be
grateful to readers for bringing such errors to his notice. Suggestions for improvement of the text wilt be
acknowledged wilh lhanks.
KOTA(Raj.) -K.II.AROUA
January 4,1981
NOTATIONS
The notations have been explained wherever they appear. The following notations have been more
commonly used.
A .. Pore p~ure parameter P,,; Activeprcssureforce w...... Weigh t of water
'" Actlvjtyofsoils Pp z: Passive pressure force W,,,, WeighlofsoHds
A,,= Arcaofvoids p= Pressure Wq ", Wotertablcfactor
A"". Angstrom p"", Activeprcssure Wy '" Water Illble factor
A .. ::: Air conlcnt Pp'" PlL'iSiveprcssure IV '" Water content
/'
CONVERSION FACTORS
(a) MKS to SI Units
F~ To Multiply by Equivalence
kgf N 9.81 1 kgf .. 9.81 N
gmf N 9.81)( 10-3 lsmf .. O.00981N
kN 9.81 11 .. 9.81 kN
""'"'
k~flcm2 kN/m2 98.1 1 kgf/cm2 .. 98.1 kN / m2
2 N/mm2 9.81 x 10- 2 1 kgf/cm2 .. 0.0981 N/mrn2
kg£Jcm
gmflcm 2 N/m2 98.1 1 gmflcm2 .. 98.1 N/m2
Ilm
2
kN/m 2 9.81 I I/m2 .. 9.81 kN/ml
kgfiln 3 tN/m) 9.81 x 10- 3 1 legUm) .. 0.00981 kN/ mJ
Vm' kNlm' 9 ... , Illm J .. 9.8L kN/ml
gl""Jtcm) kN/m) 9.81 1 gm£lcml .. 9.1:U kN/mJ
kgflrn Nl m 9.81 I k,grlm .. 9.81 N/ m
kg£.m N·m 9.81 1 kgf-m ... 9.81 N-m
kgf_seclm2 N_s/m2 9.81 1 kgC_sec/m 2 .. 9.81 N-s/m2
CONTENTS
Chapter' Page No.
PART I. FUNDAMENTALS OF SOIL MECHANICS
1. Introduction 3 -12
1.1. Definition of soil, 1; 1.2. Definition of soil mechanics, 2; 1.3. Definition of Soil Engineering ond
Geotechnical Engioecring, 1; 104. Scope of soil Engineering, 2; 1.5. Origin of Soils, 4; 1.6. Fonnution of
Soils, 5; 1.7. Transportation of Soils, 6; 1.8. Major Soil Deposits of India, 7; 1.9. Comparison of Soils with
a:her materials, 8; 1.10. Umltation.s of Soil Engineering 8; 1.11. Thrminology ofdiffeR:n1 types of soils, 9;
1.12. Cohesive and CohesionJess Soils, IU; 1.1:\. Brief History of Soil Engineering, li; Problems, 11.
2. Basic DerrniUons and Simple Tests 13 - 44
21. Introduction, 13; 2.2 Volurnetrjc Relationships. 14; 2.3 WIlter content, 15; 204. Units, 1; 2.5 Volume
Mass Relationship, 16; 26. VoluriJe..Weight Relationships, 17, 2.7.lnter-relalion between Mass and Weight
Units, 18; 2.8. Specific Gravity of Solids, 19; 2.9. Three-Phase Diagram inn Terms of Void ratio, 10; 210.
Three-Phase Oiagrom in Terms of Porosify, 22; 211. Expressions for Mass Density in Terms of WJter
Cantant, 23; 2.12. Expression fa- mass density in tenns of water rontent, 24; 2.13. Relationship between
Dry Mass Density and Percentage Air \bids, 25; 2.14. Water Content Determination, 26; 2.15. Specific
Gravity Determinatlon, JO; 2.16. Measurement of Mass Density, 32; 2.11. ~ennination of Void Ratio,
Porosity and Degree of Saturation, 36; illustrative Examples, 37; Problems, 42.
3. Particle Size Analysis 4S - 68
3.1. Introduction, 45; 3.2 Mechanical Analysis. 46; 33. Sieve Analysis, 46; 3.4. Stokes' Ulw, 47; 3.5.
Preparation of suspeMion for sedimentation analysis, 49; 3.6. Theory of Sedimentation, 50; 3.7. Pipette
Method, 51; 3.8. Hydrometer Method, 52; 3.9. Relationship Between Percentage Fiocr and Hydrometer
Reading, SS; 3.10. Limitation of Sedimentation Analysis, 57; 3.11. Combined Sieve and ScdimentllIion
Analysis, 57; 3.12 Panicle Size Distribution Curve, 57; 3.13. Uses of Particle Size Distribution Curve, 59:
3.14. Shape of Partideo>, 59; 3.15. Relative Density, 60; 3.16. Determination of Relative Density, 61;
lIIustrative Examples. 62; Problems, 66.
4. Plasticity Cbaracterlstlcs of Solis 69 - K8
4.1. Plaslicity of Soils, 69; 4.2. Consistency limits, 69; 43. Uquid Limit, 70; 4..4. Cone Pcoclromctcr
Method, 73; 4.5. Plastic Limit, 73; 4.6. Shrinkage limit, 74; 4.7. Alternative Method for determination of
shrintage limit, 75; 4.8. Shrinkage Parameters, 76; 4.9. Plasticity, Uquidity and Consistency Indexes, 78:
4.10. Flow Index, 78; 4.11. Toughness Index, 79: 4.12 Mea<>urement of Consistency, 80; 4.13. Sensitivit)
80; 4.14. Thixotropy, 81; 4.15. Activity of Soils, 81; 4.16. Uses or consistency Limits, 82; Illustrative
Examples,83; Problems, 87.
5. SoD Classification 89 -106
S.1. Introduction, 89: 5.2. Pllrtide Size Oassification, 89; 5.3. Thxtural Oassification, 91; SA. AASlrfO
OassHication System, 92; 5.5. Unified soil Oassifiallion System, 72; 5.6. Compari:-;on of AASlim and
USC systems, 95: 5_7. Indian Standar.d Oassifiemion System, 98; 5.8. Boundary O[l$ificrltion, 99; 5.9.
Field Identification of Soils, 101; 5.10. General ClJarnderiSlics of Soils or Different Groups. 103;
lII~trBtive Examples, 103; Problems, 105.
111; 6.7. lsomot:phous Substitution, 112; 6.8. Kaolinite Mineral , 112; 6.9. Mo ntmorillonite Mineral , 112;
6.10. Illite Mineral, 113; 6.11. Electrical charges on clay minerals, 113; 6.12.11ase E;(change Capm.i ty, 114;
6.13. Diffuse Double Layer, 114; 6 14. Adsorbed Wl11 er, 116; 6.15. Soil Structurcs.1l6, ProbJem~ , 118.
575; 22.6, Ditch conduits. 575; 22.7. Positive Projecting Conduil~. 577; 22.8. Negative Projecting
Conduits, 580: 22.9. Im perfect Ditch Condui!. 582; 22. 10. Tunndcd Conduits. 51:12: 22.11. Loads on
Conduits Due 10 Surface Loads, 583: 22.1 2. COnSlmCI10n of Conduits. 583; Illustrative ElIamp1cs. 584:
Problems. 585.
t.
spread fOOling.~. 644: 24.9. Combined Footings. 645: 24. 10. Rcctangular Combined Footings. 645 24.11.
Trapezoidal Foot ing 647: 24. 12. Strap Footings. 648: 24. 13. Principles (If Dc~ign of Mat Found:uions. 649:
24.14. Common Typt.o:- of Mat Foundmion. 651: 24.15. Design M cthod~ for M~t Foundmion. 653: 24.16.
Convention:!1 Design of R:lft Found:ltions. 653: 24. 17. Destgn of combinl.'(l footing by Elru;tic Line
MC'lhod. 655: 24. 18. finlle Diflercncc Method for combined Footing.~. 656; 24. 19. Elastic Plate Method.
657: 24.20. Finlll.: Din·crcn.:c Method fur Mats. 65N: 24.21. Cocffkient {If Subgrn<k: Rc;Lction. 659:
Illustra tive Example~. 660; Problems. 669.
1
Static Method f()r Driven Piles in SllIUr.'lIt:d Clay. 681 : 25.10. Stalic Method tor Bored Piles. 683; 25. 11.
Factor of Safet y. 684: 25.12. Negative Skin Friction. 684 25. 13. Dynamic Fommillc, 685; 25. 14. Wave
Equation A naJ Y~t~. 61:17: 25. 15. In-loitu penetr.'llion tests for Pile capllcity, 688: 25. 16. Pile Load Tcst. 688:
25.17. Other tYJ>cs uf Pile Luad IcSt. 690: 25. 18. Gmup Aclion of Piles. 690 25.19. Pile Groups in Sand
aod gr.'lve1. 691 : 25.20. Pile G roups in day. 692: 25.21 . Seulcment of Pile Groups. 692: 25.22 Sharing of
Loads in It Pil e Group. 694 25.23. Tcn~ioll PiJc ~. 694; 25.24. Laterally Lunded Piles . 696; lIIustrativc
Examples. 697; Problems. 70....
00 the Well Fououmion. 724: 27.5. Tel7.aghi's Analysis, 725: 27.6. B;mcrjee and Gangopadhyay's
r\nalysis. 728: 27.7. Si lllplilicu Antlly~is lor Heavy Welts, 733: 27.8. IRe method, 734: 27.9. Individual
Components of the welt. 739: 27,10. Sinking of Wells, 742: 27.1 I. Mca~urc,~ for Rectification o f Tilts nnd
Shins, 744: IJl U.,tr,lIl\·C Examplc!>. 746: Pmbkms. 754.
28. Machine Foundations
755-772
28. 1. Introduction. 755: 28.2. 'TYpes of Machine Foundations. 755: 28.3. Bllsic Definitions. 756; 2~.4.
Degrcc of Frc ...'<iOIll ofa Block Foun<mtlo n. 757: 28.5. Gcncrnl COlen a for design of M,lchi ne fou ndations.
758; 2X.6. Free Vibr,ltlon 759; 28.7. Forced Vibmtion. 76 1: 2K8. Vibmllon An:llysis of a Machine
Foundmion. 763: 28.9. IXlermination of Natuml Frequency, 765: 29. 10. DeSIgn Crifen a for Foundiltions
of Reclprocming M<lchine!>. 766: 2S. 11 . Reinforcement and Con~truction Dcrails. 767: 28. 12. Weight of
Found:lt iun. 767: 2tU3. Vibration IsolatlU n and Control. 767; l1lustrJtive EX:llllples. 76H ; Problems. 771.
29. Pavement Design
773 -787
29.1 Typc~ of PavemcnT~. 773; 21).2. Bask Requirements of P:lvemCnls . 175: 29.3. Functions of Different
Components of a Pave ment. 774: 29.4. Fm:tors Affecting Pnvement Design, 775: 29.5. California Bcaring
Rutio T~'st. 775: 29.6. Design of Flexihle Pavcmcnts. 777; 2<;.7. GroUI' Index Mcthod. 777 29.8. CBR
MCIJlOd. 17M: 2Y.'J. Culifornla Resiswnce Value Method 778; 29. 10. MeLeod Mo.: thod. 779: 29. I I. Triaxial
T..::st Method. 7HO: 21). 12. Blirmister's Metbud. 780: 29. 13. Coefficient oj 'iubgrade Reaction, 781 : 29. 14.
Westergaard's Analysis . 782: 29. 15. Temperature ~trcsscs in Rigid Pn"emcnh. 784: 29.16. Combined
Stressc.~ In Rigid P:lVclllellts. 785: ltIuSlrative EX;lmplcs. 785: Problems. 786:
30. Laboratory Experiments
788 - 816
30.1. To determine Ihe watcr cOlltelil of a sample hy ovendrying met hod. 788: ~O.2. To determine tb e water
content of a soil hy pyonomcter method. 789: 30.3. To determ ine the !>pt.'Cilic gravity of M)lids by the
dcnslIY holl!c l11elhO<l. 7M9: 30.4. To determloc t,le !>pccilic gravity of solids by pycnomcter method. 79J :
30.5. To determine th e dry den.~ity of the soil by core cutter method. 792: 30.6. To dt.'tcrmioe the in.situ dry
density by the sand repilicement method. 793; 30.7. To determ ine Ihe dry densi ty of ;1 soil by
water-(lisplacclllent method. 795: 3O.S. To determine the particle sil.e dlst ributi(1O of a soil by sieving, 796:
30.9. To dCh!nnmc the p:trt icle size distri but ion by the hydrometer m...1hOO. 797: 30.10. To determine the
hqmd Illllit of II ~()iJ !>pcclll1Cn. MOO; 30. 11 . To delennine the pla~tlc limit of a ~oil specimen. 801 ; 30.12.
To detemline the .\ Imnkngc limit of a spc!Clmen of the rernouldt:d soil, 802: 30. 13. To determine the
pcrm..-ahiJity of a !toil spt.'Clmcn by the constant· head pcnneamctcr. 804; 30.14. To determinc the
permeahi lity o f II ~()!I specimcn by th..: vanable head pcrmc:l1netcr. X05: 30. 15. To detemline the
conslJlkl;ltroll chal',l!;teri~tic~ of or soil spedmen. 807; 30. 16. To detcnnioe the shear parametcrs of a sandy
soi l by direct ~hcar le~t. X09: 30.17. To dO:lenmne th e unconlined eomprc.~sivc stren gth of a cohesive soi t.
811 : JO. It\. Tu dctcnnmc the compaction Ch;lr:tClcristjc of a soil specime n by Proctor's test. S12: 30. 19. To
detemlinc the Culi forrlra Bcnring Ratio (CBR) of a soil specimen. 813.
31. Introduction to Rock Mechanics
817 - 837
3 1. 1. Introduetkm, 8 17: 3 1.2. Geologic,ll Classification o/' Rocks, 1:117: 3 I .3. 9,lsic Tenninolagy. 818: 3 1.4.
Index Properties of Rocks. H19: 31.5. Uni t weight (ar ma~s density), 819: 31.6. Porosity. H20; 31.7.
Permeability, H20: 3 1.8. Point loud strength. 821: 31.9. Slaking and Durahility. H22: 3 UO. Sanic Velocity,
823; 4 1.1 I. Cli..~silicmian of Rock.~ for Engineering pmperties. 824: 31.12. Strength c1assifiention of Intac t
Rocks, K27: 3 1.13 . LH borlltary tests lilr determination of strength of Rocb, 1:128: 31.14. Stre.~s.strain
curve~. K29: 3 1.15. Modes of Failure of Rocks. 1'131; 31.16. Mohr-Coulomb Criterion lor Rocks. 832:
31.17. Shear Strength of Rocks. K33: 31. 18. H<rrdness of Rocks, M34: 31. J9. In.situ Slres.~e..~ in Rocks. 834:
31.20. Measurement of in-situ ~lrcsses.1:I36: Problems. 837.
\I iii)
I.
PART-I
FUNDAMENTALS OF
SOIL M'ECHANICS
1
Introduction
1
Rock
~RO'k
(a) Nomandalura in Grlology (b) Nomt.nclalure in Soil Engintaring
Fig. 1.1. Nomendature.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
and in l Soil Engineering. It may be noted that the material which is called mantle (regolith) in geology is
known:as soil in Soil Engineering.
1.2. DEFINITION OF SOIL MECHANICS
The tenn 'soil mechanics' was coined by Dr. Karl Terzaghi in 1925 when his book Erdballmecllanic on
the subjcct was published in Genn:m. According to Terz.:1ghi, 'Soil mechanics is the appliCltion of the laws
of mechanics and hydraulics to cnginccring problems dealing with sediments and other unconsolidated
accumulations of solid particles produced by the mechanical and chemical disintegration of rock, regmdlcss
of whether or not they contain an admixture of organic constituents'. Soil mechanics is, therefore, a branch
of mechanics which dC.1is with the action of forces on soil and with the flow of water in soil.
The soil consists of discrete solid pmtic1es which arc neither strongly bonded as in solids nor they nrc as free
as p::!rtic1cs of lluids. Consequently, the behaviour of soil is somewhat intermediate between tiM of a solid and
a nuid. It is not; therefore, surprising th:1I soil mechanics draws hctlvily from solid mechanics and fluid
mechanics. As the soil is inherently a IXlrIiculate system. soil mcch:mics is also caBcd paniell/me mechanics.
Rock mechanics is the science de:.lling with thc mechanics of rocks.
1.3. DEFINITION OF SOIL ENGINEERlNG ANI) GEOTECHNICAL ENGlNEERING
Soil engineering in :m appUed science dealing with the applic<ltions of principles of soil mechanics to
prtlctical problems. It has n much wider scope than soil mcchlmics, as it deals with all engineering
problems relmed with soils. It includes site in'Jcstigmions, design and construction or foundations,
earth-retaining struClurcs and c.:1rth structures.
Gcotechnical engineering is a broader term which includes soil engineering, rock mechanics and geOlogy.
This term is used synonymously with soil cngincering in this text.
1.4. SCOI'E OF SOIL ENGINEERlNG
Soil engineering has vast application in the construction of various civil engineering works. Some of the
important applications arc as undcr :
Lo~d
Load
--Column
_Column
5 0 i I.
~ooting Soit
So i I
(a) Shallow foundation
i\ra 51ratum
(b) Pile foundation
Fis. 1.2. DiITel'l:ntlypts ofrOLlI\li-llions.
INTRODUcnON
Dredge level
Earth
Soil pressure'
~ay
~bilnkm.nt
slope
Soil
(a)
Soil
Excavation slopq;
(b)
Fig. 1.4. Slopes in (Q) filling and (b) cutting.
tends to move it downward and thus causes instability of slope. The slopes may be natural or man-made Fig.
1.4 shows slopes in filling and culting. Soil engineering provides the methods for checking the stability of slopes.
(4) Underground Structures-The design and construction of underground structures, such as tunnels,
sbafts, and oonduits, require evaluation of forces exerted by the soil on these structures. These forces are
discussed in soil engineering. Fig. 1.5 shows a tunnel oonstructed below the ground surface and a oonduit laid
below the ground surfaCe. .
o
SOIL MECHANICS ANI) FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
~
-:."
..' .~". ~
..•...
-:-
. --
hard crust placed on soil (subgrnde) Cor the . . ... _ . -.' - '.' , .', " - , ,' Sa
: :.!:.,: ub base
~~~~:~~~~ ~~~ue~g:i~::~~I~ ~~~~;s ~ns~~~~: Subgrade (50i~)
in soil engineering. Fig. 1.6. Pavement del:tlls.
(6) Eurth Dam-Earth dams arc huge structures in which soil is used as a construction material (Fig.
1.7). The earth dams arc bu ill for cfc::lling water reservoirs. Since the failure of an earth dam may cause
widespread catastrophe, extreme care is taken in its design and construction. It requires a thorough knowledge
of soil enginccring.
Sh~ l\
(Pervious so il )
the equilibrium of forces on the earth and causes large scale earth movemcnts and upheavals. 1l1is process
results in further CX(Xl')'Ure of rocks and Ihe geologic·cydc gelS repeated.
If the soil stays at the place of its formation just above the parent rock, it is kllOwn as residual soil or
sedentary soil. When the soil has been deposited at a place away from the place of its origin, it is called a
transported soil. The engineering properties of residual soils vmy considernbly from the top layer to the
bollom layer. Residua! soils Iwve a grndual trnnsition from relalively fine material near the surface to large
frJgments of stones al greater depth. 'nle properties of the bottom layer resemble that of the parent rock in
many respects. The thickness of the rcsidu::li soil fonnation is generally limited to a few metres.
The enginccring properties of transported soils arc entirely different from the properties of the rock at the
place of deposition. Deposits of transported soils are quite thick and are usually uniform. Moot of the soil
deposits with which a geotechnical engineer has to deal arc transported soils.
1.6. FORMATION OF SOILS
As mentioned above, soils are formed by either (A) physical disintcrgration or (0) chemical
decomposition of rocks.
A. IJhysicul Disintcgrntion-Physical disintegmtiOO or mech:mic.ll weathering of rocks occurs due to the
following physical proc'CSScs :
(1) Temperature changes-Different minerals of:J rock huve different coefficients of thennal cxprlOsion.
Unequal cXlxmsion and contraction of these minerllis occur due 10 temperature changes. When the slresses
induced due to such changes arc repe"lIcd many times, the particles gcl dctached from the rocks and the soils
arc formed.
(2) Wedging action of Ice-Water in the pores and minute crncks of rocks gets frozen in very cold
climates. As the volume of icc formed is more than that of water, expansion occurs. Rocks get broken into
pieces when large stresses develop in the cracks due to wedging action of the icc formed.
(3) Spreading of roots of phm1s-As the roots of trees and shrubs grow in the cracks and fISSUres of
the rocks, forces act on the rock. The segments of the rock arc forced apart and disintegration of rocks occurs.
(4) Abrasion-As water, wind :Jnd glaciers move over the surface of rock, abrasion :Jnd scouring takes
place. It results in the formation of soil.
In all the processes of physical diSintegration, there is no change in the chemical composition. 1llc soil
formed has the properties of the parent rock. Coarse grained soils, such as grnvel and sand, 3re fonned by the
process of physical disintegration.
B. Chemical Decomposition-When chemical decomposition or chemical weathering of rocks takes
place, original rock minerals arc transformed into new minerals by chemica] reaction.<>. The soils (onned do
not have the properties of the parenl" rock. The following chemical proc:csses generally OCOJr in nature.
(1) Hydration-In hydmtion, water combines with the rock minerals and results in the formation of a
new chemicnl compound. loe chemical reaction causes a dmnge in volume and decomposition of rock into
small particles.
(2) Carbonation-It is a type of chcmical decomposition in which carbon dioxide in the atmosphere
combines with water to form carbonic xid. Ibe c.lrbonic acid reacts chemically with rocks and causes their
decomposition.
(3) Oxidation--Oxidation occurs when oxygen ions combine with minerals in rocks. Oxidation results in
decomposition of rocks. Oxidmion of rocks is somewhat similar to rusting of steel.
(4) Solutlon-Somc of the rock minernls fonn a solution with water when they get dissolved in water.
Chemical reaction t:Jkes place in the solution and the soils are formed.
(5) Hydrolysis-It is a chemical process in which water gets dissociated into W and Olr ions. The
hydrogen cal ions replnc:c the metallic ions such as calcium, sodium :Jnd potassium in rock minerals and soils
are formed with a new chemical dccompa:>ition.
Chemical dccomposit.ion of rocks results in form:Jtion of clay minerals. These clay minerals impart plastic
properties to soils. Oayey soils are fonned by chemical decomposition.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
,
Eroded ') _ ....
grou nd-./" ........ ,
Still · walen
"
.'
.. -. ,.
Gr ound moraine
Fig. 1.10. Glader Deposited Soils.
INTRODUcnON
During their advancement, glociers tr.msport soils. At the lenninus, a melting glacier drops the material in
the fonn of ridges, known as terminal moraine (Fig. ] .10). '1l1e land which was once covered by glaciers and on
which till has been deposited after melting is called ground moraine. lbe soil carried by the melting water
from the front of a glacier is termed out-wash.
Glaciofluvial deposits arc fanned by glaciers. The material is moved by glaciers and subsequently
deposited by streams of melling water. These deposits have stratification.
Deposits of glacial till arc generally well-graded and can be compacted to a high dry density. lbcse have
generally high shearing strength.
(4) Gravity-deposited soil.<;-Soils C<'ln be transported through short distances under the action of gravity.
Rock fragments and soil masses collected at the foot of the cliffs or steep slopes had fallen from higher elevation
under the action of the gravitational force . Colluvial soils, such as talus, have been dcposited by the gravity.
Talus consists of irreguJar, coarse particles. It is a good source of broken rock pieces and coarse-grained
soils for many engineering works.
(5) Soils tr"ansporled by combined IIction-Somelimes, two or morc agenrs of transportation aCI jointly
and tr.lnsport the soil. For example, a soil portiele may fall under gravity and may be carried by wind to a
for off place. It might by picked up again by flowing waler and deposited. A glacier may carry it still further.
1.8. MAJOR SOIL DEPOSITS OF INOlA
The soil deposits of India may be classified in the following five major groups :
(1) Alluvial Deposils-A large part of north india is oovered with alluvial deposits. lhe thickness of
alluvium in the Indo-Gangctic and Drnhmputra flood plains varies from a few mctn:s to more than one
hundred metres. Even in the pcninsul:lr India, ll11uvi'll deposits occur at some places.
The distinct characteristics of alluvial deposits is the existence of alternming layers of sand, silt and clay.
The thickness of each layer depends uiX>n the local terrain and the nature of floods in the rivers causing
deposition. The deposits are generally of low density and are liable to liquefaction in earthquake-prone areas.
(2) Black Cotton Soils-A large part of cenlral India and a portion of South India is oovered with black
cotton soils. These soils are residual deposits fonned from basalt or trap rocks. The soils are quite suitable for
growing collon.
Black cotton soils are clays of high plasticity. 'Ihey contain essentiaUy the clay mineral montmorillonite.
The soils have high shrinkage and sweUing eharncteristics. The shearing strength of the soils is extremely low.
The soils are highly compressible and have very low bearing capacity. It is extremely diffiadt to work with
such soils.
(3) Lateritic Soils-Lateritic soils arc formed by decomposition of rock. removal of bases and silica, and
accumulation of iron oxide and -aluminium oxide. The presence of iron oxide gives these soils the
characteristic red or pink colour. Thcsc are residual soils, formed from basalt. Lateritic soils exist in the
central. southern and c..1stem India.
The lateritic soils are soft and can be cut with a chisel when wet. However, these harden with lime. A
hard crust of gravel size particles, known as laterite, exists ncor the ground surface. The plasticity of the
lateritic soils decreases with depth as they approach the parent rock. These soils, especially thaie which
contain iron oxide, have relatively high specific gravity.
(4) Desert Soils-A large part of Rajasthan and adjoining states is covered with sand dunes. In this area,
arid conditions exist, with practically lillie mineaU.
Dune sand is uniform in gradation. lhe size of the particles is in the range of fine sand. The sand is
non-plastic and highly pervious. As the sand is gcncnltly in loose condition. it requires dcnsi[ic.1tion 10
increase its strength.
(5) Marine Deposits-Marine depooilS arc mainly confined along a narrow belt ncar the coast. In the
south-west coost of India, there are thick layers of sand above deep deposits of soft marine clays.
The marine deposits have very low shearing strength and are highly oomprcssible. They contain a large
amount of organiC mailer. The marine days are soft and highly plastic.
SOIL MECllANICS AND FOUNDl\nON ENGINEERING
(19) Loess-It is a wind blown deposit of siJL II is generally of uniform gradation, with the particle size
between 0.01 to 0.05 mm. It consists of quartz and feldspar particles, cemented with calcium carbonate or
iron oxide. When wet, it becomcs soft and compressible because cementing action is loot. A loess deposit has
a loose structure with numerous roo! holes which produce vertical cleavage. The permeability in the vertical
direction is generally much greater than thaI in the horizontal direction.
(20) Marl-It is a stiff, marine calcareous clay of greenish colour.
(21) Moorum-ll1c word moorulII is derived from a Tamil word, meaning powdered rock. It consists of
small pieces of disintegrated rock Of shale, with or without boulders.
(22) Muck-It denotes a mixture of fmc soil particles and highly deoomposed organiC matter. It is black
in colour and of extremely soft consistency. It caonot be used for engineering works. The organic matter is in
an advanced stage of decomposition.
(23) Peat-It is an organic soil having fibrous aggregates of macroscopic and microscopic particles. It is
fonned from veget.'ll matter under conditions of excess moisture, such as in swamllS. It is highly compressible
and not suitable for foundations.
(24) Sund-It is a coarse-grained soil, having particle size between 0.075 mm to 4.75 mm. The particles
are visible to naked eye. The soil is cobesionless and pervious.
(25) Silt-It is a fine-grained soil, with particle size between 0.002 mm and 0.075' mm. The particles are
not visible to naked eyes.
Inorganic silt consists of bulky, equidimensional grains of quartz. It has little or no plasticity, and is
cohesionless.
Organic silt contains an admixture of org<lOic malter. IL is n plastic soil and is cohesive.
(26) Till-It is an unstrntified deposit formed by melting of a glacier. The deposit consists of particles of
different sizes, ranging from boulders to clay. The soil is generally well-graded. It can be ea<>ily dcnsified by
compaction. Till is also known as boulder-clay.
(27) Top soils-Top soils are surface soils that support plants. They contain a large quantity of organic
matter and nrc not suitable for foundations.
(28) Tuft-It is a fine-grained soil composed of very small particles ejected from volcanoes during its
explosion and deposited by wind or water.
(29) Thndru-It is a mat of peat and shrubby vegetation that oovers clayey subsoil in arctic regions. The
deeper layers are permanently frozen and are called permafrost. lbe surface deposit is the active layer which
alternately freezes and thaws.
(30) Varved clays-These are Sedimentary deposits consisting of alternate thin layers of silt and clay.
The thickness of each layer seldom exceeds 1 cm. These clays are the results of deposition in lakes during
perioos of alternately high and low waters.
[Note. For glossary of technical terms, sec APPENDIX A].
1.12. COHESIVE AND COHESIONLESS SOILS
Soils in which tbe adsorbed water and particle attraction act such that it defonns plastically at varying
water contents are known as cohesive soils or clays. This cohesive property is due to presence of clay
minerals in soils. Therefore, the term cohesive soil is used synonymously for clayey soils.
The soils composed of bulky grains are cohesionlcss regardless of the fineness of the particles. The rock
flour is cohesionless even when it hac; the particle size smaller than 21l size. Non-pla'ltic s ilts and coarse-
grnined soils are oohcsionlcss.
[Nofe. 1 Il = 1 micron = 1O~ m = 10-3 mmJ.
Many soils are mixture of bulky grains and clay minerals and exhibit some degree of plasticity with
varying water content. Such soils are termed cohesive if the plasticity effect is significant; otherwise,
cobesionless,
Obviously, there is no sharp dividing line between cohcsionless and cohesive soils. However, it is
sometimes convenient to divide the soil into above two groups.
INTRODUCfION II
111e term cohesive-soil is used for clays and plastic silt, and the term cohcsionlcss-soil, for non·plastic
silts. sands and gravel
1.13. BRIEF mSTORY OF SOIL ENGINEERING
According to the author, the history of soil engineering can be divided into three periods, as described
below:
(1) Ancient to Mediey,,1 perlod-Man's first contact with soil was when he placed his foot on the earth.
In ancient times, soil was used as a construction material for building huge earth mounds for religious
purposes, burial places and dwellings. Caves were built in soit 10 live in.
ExceUent pavements were construded in Egypt and India much before the OI.ristian era. Some earth
dams have been storing water in India for more than 2000 years. Remnants of various underground waler
structures. such as aqueducts. tunnels and large drains. found in the excavation at the sites of early civilisation
at Mohenjodaro and l-Iarrappa in the Indian subcontinent indicate the use of soil a.<; foundation and
construction material. Egyptian used caissons for /Jeep foundations j::vcn 2000 D.C. I hmging gClrden at
Babylon (Iraq) was also built during that period. The city of D.1bylon was built on fills above the adjoining
flood plains.
During Roman times, heavy structures, such as bridges, aqueducts, harbours and buildings, were built.
Some of these works are in existence even today. After the collapse of the Roman Empire, tbe construction
activities declined. However, some heavy city walls and forts were built from the strategic considerations.
Cathedrals. casLJes and campaniles (bell towers) were also constructed. lbe famous tower of !lisa. known as
the leaning tower of Pisa, was also built. The tower has leaned on one side because of the diITerentiai
sctllement of its base.
The famous Rialto Bridge was constructed in Venice (Italy) in the seventeenth century. Leonardo da Vinci
constructed a number of structures in France during the same perioo. The famous London Bridge in England
1 was also built. The mausoleum Thj Mahal at Agra (India) was constructed by the emperor Shah Jehan to
commemorate his favourite wifc Mumtaz Mahal. It is built on masonry cylindrical wclls sunk into the soil at
close intcrvals.
11 is certain that early builders. while constructing such huge structures, encountcred and successfully
tackled many challenging problems. However, no record in available about the methods adopted. No scientific
study seems to have been made. The builders were guided by the knowledge and experience passed down
from generation to generation.
(2) Period of Early Developments-The eighteenth century caD be considered as the real beginning of
soil engineering when early developments in soil engineering look place. In 1773, a French engineer Coulomb
gave a thcory of earth pressure on retaining walts. 1be theory is used by the gcotechniall engineers even
today (chapter 19). Coulomb also introduced the concept thill the shearing resistance of soil consists of two
components, namely, the cohesion compunent ~md the rric.1ion component (ch.1plcr 13). Culmann gave a
geneI"dl gT'dphical solution for the earth pressure in 1866. Ibmkine. in 1857, published a theory on earth
pressure considering the plastic equilibrium of the earth mass. In 1874, Rehbann gave a graphical method for
computaHon of earth pressure based on Coulomb's theory.
Darcy gave the law of the permeability of soils in 1856. Darcy's law is used for the computation of
seepage through soils (chapters 8 and 9). In the same year, Stokes gave tbe law for the velocity o[ fall of
solid particles through fluids. The law is used [or determining the particle size, as disoJssed in chapter 3.
Q-Mohr gave the rupture theory for soils in 1871. He also gave a graphical method of representation of
slresses, popularly known as Mohr's circle. II is extremely useful for delerminalion of stresses 00 inclined
planes (Chapter 13).
Boussinesq, in 1885, gave the theory of stress distribution in a semi·infmile, homogeneous, isotropic,
elastic medium due to an externally applied load. The theory is used for detennination of stresses in soils due
to loads, as discussed in Chapter 11. .
In 1908, Marston gave the theory for the load carried by underground conduits (chapter 22).
Atlerberg. in 1911, suggested SOQl~ simple tests for characterizing consistency of cohesive soils. The
12 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
limits, commonly known as Altcrbcrg's limits, are useful for identification and classification of soils, as
discussed in chaplers 4 and 5.
Swedish Geotechnical Commission of the Siale Railways of Sweden appointed a committee headed by
Prof. Fellcnius in 1913 \0 study the st.'lbility of slopes. The commillee gDvC the Swedish circle method for
checking the stability of slopes, dcsaibcd in ch.'lptcr 18. In 1916, Petterson gllvc the friction circle method for
the stability of slopes.
(3) Modem Era-The modem em of Soil Engineering I;Icgan in 1925. with the publicaliOl) of the book
E,dballmechanic by KJolri TCL,taghi. The contribution made by Tcrzaghi in lhe development of soil engineering
is immense. He is fittingly called the father of soil mechanics. For the first time, he adopted a scientific
approach in the study of soil mechnnics. His theory of consolidation of soils (chapler 12) and the effective
stress principle (chapler 10) gave a new direction.
ProcIor did pioneering work on compaction of soils in 1933. ~ discussed in chapter 14.
Taylor made major contributions on consolidation of soils, shear strength of clays and the stability of slopes.
Casagmnde made significant contributions on classification of soils, seepage through earth masses and
consolidation.
Skempton did pioneering work on the pore pressures, effective stress, bearing capacity and the stability
of slopes.
Meyerhof gave the theories for the bearing capacity of shallow and deep foundatioos.
Hvorslcv did commendable work on subsurface exploration and on shear strength of remouldcd clays.
The above list is far from complete. Many other distinguished geotechnical engineers have made a mark
on the development of soil engineering. Because of space limitation, their mention could not be made in the
above list.
A. Oescripllve
1.1. DefiDC the term 'soil', 'soil mcchaniu;' and soil engineering. What are limillltions of soil engineering?
1.2. Whot is geologic eycle ? Expl;)jn the phenomena of formation and ltaosporUition of soils.
13. What arc the major soil deposits of India? Explain their characteristics.
1.4. Write D bricf history of soil engineering.
n. Multiple·Choice Questions
1. Colluvial soils (talus) are transported by:
(a) Water (b) Wind
(e) Grovity (d) Ice
2. Water-tronsponed soils are termed:
(a) Aeoline (b) Alluvial
(e) Colluvial (d)1i1l
3. Glacier-dcpositcd soils are called:
(a) Talus (b) Loess
(e) Drin (d) None of above
4. Cohesionlcss soils ate fonned due to:
(a) Oxidation (b) Hydration
(e) Physical disintegration Cd) Chemical decomposition
5.. When the prcxluCiS of rock wC<lthcring are nottmnsponed but remain at the place of formation, the soil is called:
(a) Alluvial soil tb) Thlus
(e) Residual soil (d)Acoliansoil
6. The follOWing type or soil is nOl glacler-depositcd.:
(a) Drift (b) Till
(e) Outwash (d) T1cnlonitc. (Am. I (el. 2 (bl. 3 (e), 4 (e), 5 eel. 6 (11)1
2
Basic Definitions and Simple Tests
2.1. INTRODUcnON
A soil mass consists of solid particles which form a jXlrous structure. The voids in the soil mass may be
filled with air. with water or partly
with air and partly wiLh water. In Air
general.., a soil mass consists of solid
particles, water and air. The three Wat/i!f
constituents are blended together to
form a complex material (Fig. 2.1.
a). However, for OJnvcnicncc, aU
the solid particles are segregated and Solid
placed in the lower layer of the
three-phase diagram (Fig. 2.1b).
Ukewise, water and air particles are
placed separately. as shown. The
3-phase diagram is alSo known as (a) (b)
Block diagram.
It may be noted that the three
constituents cannot be actually Fig. 2.1. Conlititueflts of Soil.
segregated, as shown. A 3-phase diagram is :10 llrtince ll.<>ed for easy understanding Dnd convenience in
cairuIalion.
Although the soil is a three-phase system, it becomes a two-phase system in the following two cases: (1)
::f2r~~~~~~~Eli~i;"~:~ T~
saturated, there is no air phase
(Fig. 2.2b). It i, the <elative
It\10 .
tI rtr I-::-:;;~;:
T
Mo"O
v
Vw
tI
:-:-:-:-:-:-:::- - T
- ~- = -= -: -=- =-: Mw
~T~~~:Cl~;~::; lV
The phase diagram is a simple,
diagrnmmetic representation of a
1
Vs
1Ms 1" 1L v,
I
- - - - - - -
11"
",
r
In a 3-phase diagram, it is conventional to write volumes 00 the left side and the mass on the right side (Fig.
2.3 0). The t~otal
volume of , gwen soil m"j.in designatal as V. h e of solids (V,~
equal to the sum of ' nvolume
f
~,,~.,.:,:,~~c ~ T 11 '=''''''~o:' f
"e Air Mo=O '4:J Air 'No:0
"" .. --.-.------.-.. T "" T ----- --.-- T
J "" fI 11 ~" 11
1'
(0) (b)
Fig. 2_1. 'I1m:c-phasc lIiagram.
the volume of water (V...) ilnd the volume of air (V,,). '11m volume of voids (V,.) is equal (0 the sum of the
volumes of water and air.
lbe lotal mass of the soil mass is represented as M. lllC mass of air (MIJ) is very small and is neglected.
lbcrcfOfc. the lotlll mass of the soil is equal to the mass of solids (M,) and the mass of water (M..,).
Fig. 2.3b shows the 3-phase diagram in which the weights are written on the right side.
2.2. VOLUME'I1UC RELATIONSHIPS
'Jbe following five volumetric relationships are widely used ip soil engineering.
(1) Void Rutio (e)-ll is defmed as the ratio of the volume of voids to the volume of solids. Thus
< - i .. (2.1)
The void ratio is expressed as a decimal, such as 0.4, 0.5, etc. For coarse-grained roils, the void ratio is
gcncr.llly smaller than that for fine-grained soils. For some soils, it may have a value even greater than unity.
(2) l'orosity (n)-It is defined as the ratio of the volume of voids to the total volume. Thus
n· ~ ... (2.2)
Poror;ity is gcneraUy expressed as percentage. However, in equations. it is used as a ratio. For example,
a porosity ' of 50% will be used as 0.5 in equations. The porosity of a soil cannot exceed 100% as it woukl
mean V~ is greater than V, which is absurd. 10 fact, it will have a much smaller value. Porosity is aJso known
as percentage voids.
Doth porosity and void ralio are mea'iurcs of the denseness (or loosencs..'9 of soils. As the soil becomes
more and more dense, their values dc<'T~sc. The lenn porosity is more oommunly used in other disciplines
such as agricultural enginccring. In soil engineering. lhe term void mHo i"i more popular. It is more
convenient to use void ratio Ihan porosity. When the volume of a soil mass changes., only the numerator (i.e.
V~) in the void ratio changes and the denominator (i.e. V,) remains constant. However, if the lenn porosity is
used, both the numerator and the denominator change and it becomes inconvenient.
An inter-relationship can be found between the void ratio and the porosity as under.
1 V V" + V,
From Eq. 2.2,
ii·~·-V;-
e .. 1 :n .. (2.4)
In Eqs. (2.3) and (2.4), the porosity should be expressed as a ratio (and not pcrentagc).
(3) Degree of Saturation (5)-The degree of saturation (S) is the ratio of the volume of water to the
volume of voids.
percentage. To avoid confusion. it is a<.Ivis<lbJc to express all quantities as a r.atio (or a decimal) in
comput3lions. lbe final result should be expressed ..s a pcrccnt<lgc for the qu:mtitics which ore defined as a
percentage and as decimal for other quantities.
2.4. UNITS
In this lexl, SI wnilS arc used. In Ihis system, mass (M). length (L) and lime (1) arc the basic dimensions.
The mass b: expressed in kilogrnmmc (kg) units. the length in metre (M) units and the time in seronds (sec
or $) units.
The most important derived unit is the force unit. The force is expressed in newton (N). One newton is
2
the force which is required to give an accelcraLion of 1 m/sec to a ma5S of 1 kg. Thus
IN=lkgxlrn/scc2
In addition [0 kg mass and N force, the following multiples and submultiples are also frequently used.
1 milligrnmmc (mg) = 10-3 gram (gm or g)
1 kilogrnmme (kg) = tOl gm
1 mcgagrammc (Mg) = 106 gm = 103 kg
Likewise,
1 millinewton (mN) = 10--3 newton (N)
1 lcilonewton (kN) = 103 N
1 meg<lnewton (MN) '" 106 N = 103 kN
2.5. VOLUME· MASS RElA'110NSIIWS
'(be volume-mass n;l;ltiornhip ure in tenns or mass density. 'Ibe rna..... of soil per unit volume is known
as mass density. In soil cngin\:cring. the fullowing 5 dilTerent muss densities arc usct.I.
(1) Bulk Muss Den.. Uy-l11e bulk mao;s density (p) is defined m the total mass (M) per unit lotal
volume (Y). Thus, from Fig. 23 (a),
M
P -- ... (2.11)
V
The bulk mass densily is also known as the wei mass density or simply bulk density or density. It is
expressed in kg/ml, gm/ml or Mg/ml.
Obviously. 1 Mg/m 3 1000 kg/m l
= =
1 gm/ml
(2) Dry Mass DensUy-The dry mass density (p.,) is defined as the mass of solids per unit lotal volume.
Thus
M,
Pd- V ... (2.12)
As the soil may shrink during drying. the mass density may not be equal to the bulk mass density of the
soil in the dried condition. '(be lotal volume is measured before drying.
The dry mas... density is also known as the dry density.
The dry mass density is used to express the denseness of the soil. A high value of. dry mass density
indicates that the soil is in a compact condition.
(3) Saturated Mass DensJty-The saturated mass density (PS<Ii) is the bulk mass density of the soil when
it is fully saturated. Thus
M_
P,. - I I ... (2.13)
(4) Submerged Muss liel\.~Uy-When Ihe soil cxisL" beluw water, it is in II submerged condition. Wheo
a volume V of soil is Submerged in water, it displaces an equal volume of water. Thus the net mass of soil
when submerged is reduced (Fig. 2.4 (o)}.
The submerged mass density (p') of the soil is defined as the submerged rna<>s ~ unit of total volume.
Thus
BASIC DEFINITIONS AND SIMPLE TESrS 17
~ equal 10 Ihe
which have a volume of V, arc buoyed up
by Ihe walec. The uplhrusl
1 I
1
v,
v, G
I
~
M,
11
1 Vs
~
v, G'W
Ws
1
mass of water diplaced by the solids. I I
Thus U _ V,P", u:VsJ'w U:Vs'6w
(o) (b)
Therefore,
Fig. 2.4. Submerged mass.
- V, Gp ... - VsP ...
, V;p.(G-l)
From Eq. 2.14, P - - -v- - ... (2.15)
Alternatively, we can also consider the equilibrium of the entire volume M. In this case. the total
downward mass, including lhe mass of water in the voids, is given by
M'Ol - M,+V~ p ...
The total upward thrust, including that on the water in voids, is given by
U _ Vp.
Therefore, the submerged mass is given by
M.•"h = (M,,' + V" p".) - V p".
From Eq. 2.14, p' = (M., + V,. ~".) - V p", =_
M_,,,,_~_v_P_".
or
Using Eq. 2.13 p' - r'aI - p... ...(2.16)
The submerged density p' is roughly one-half of the saturated density.
(5) Mass Density of Sollds-1be mass density of solids (p,) is equal to the ratio of thc mass of solids
to the volume of solids. Thus
M,
p, - V, ... (2.17)
(2) Dry Unit Wdght-The dry unit weight (Yd) is defined as the weight of solids per unit total volume.
W,
Thus 'fd""-Y ... (2.12(a)J
(3) Sutur-lled Unit Wcight-The saturated unit weight (llol1') is the bulk unit weight when the soil is fully
saturated.
lYr ....
Thus y,« - II ... (2.13(a)J
(4) Submerged Unit Weight-When Ihe soil exists below water. it is in a submerged condition. A
buoyant Corce acts on the soil solids. According to Archimedes' principle, the buoyant [orce is equal to the
wcighi of water displaced by Ihe solids. The net mass of the solids is reduced. The reduced mass is known
as the submerged mass or the buoyant mass.
lltc submerged unit weight (y') of the soil is defined as the submerged weight per unit of total volume.
, lVslIh
Tbus y.--y ... (2.14(a)l
Fig. 2.4 (b) shows a soil mass submerged under water. lbc soil solids which have a volume of V, are
buoyed up by the water. The buoyant force (U) is equal to the weight of wuter displaced by the solids.
U - Viy ...
The weight of water in the voids has a zero weight in water, as the weight of water and the buoyant force
just balance c.'lch other. When submerged, all voids can be assumed 10 be filled with water.
lltercforc, w. ....... w,-u
- V,Gy. - V, y. - V,y.(G - 1)
• V,y.(G - 1)
From Eq. 2.14. Y ---V-- . .. [2.15(a)J
We can also consider the equilibrium of the entire volume (Y). The lotal downward force, including the
wight of water in the voids, is given by
W..'" .. W, + V" Y...
The tOial upward force, including that on the water in voids, is given by U .. Vy",
Therefore, the Submerged unit weight is given by
W,uh = (W~ + V,.y",).- Vy"
From Eq. 2.14, i = ( ~, + V,. ~,,) - Vy". = ~.." ~ VYw
When a force of one newton (N) is applied to a mass of one kilogrammc (kg), the acceleration is 1
mlsec2. The weight of 1 kg mass of material on the surface of earth is 9.81 N hecausc the acceleration due
to gravity (g) is 9.81 mlsec". Thus we can ('{)Overt the mass in kg into weight in N by multiplying it by g. In
otberwards, W = Mg.
Because the unit weight '( is expressed as 1VIV and the mass density (p) as MIV. the two quantities can
be related as
y-*- Y -pg
Thus unit weight in Nlml = mass density in kglm l )C 9.81
For example, for water Pw is 1000 kglm 3.
Therefore, '(W - 1000 )C 9.81 _ 9810 Nlm 3 =: 9.81 kNlml _ 10 kNlm 3
Sometimes, the mass density is expressed in Mgfm 3 or glml. The corresponding unit weight in kNlm 3 is
equal to 9.81 p. For example, for water Pw is 1 Mg/m3 or 1 glml. The corresponding unit weight is 9.8l
kN/ml.
Likewise. mass density of 1600 kglm l corresponds to a unit weight of 1600 x 9.81 N/ml = 15696 Nlml
'" 15.696 kNlm 3. In the reverse order, a unit weight of 18 kNlml corresponds to a mass density of 1800019.81
l
= 1834.62 kglm .
It will not be OUI of place to give a passing reference to the MKS unils still prelevant in some fields . In
MKS units, the weight is expressed in kilogram me force (kgf). It is equal to the force exerted on a mass of
1 kg due to gravity. As the same force is also equal to 9.81 N, we have
1 kgf= 9.81 N
G - Ii: ..
(2.18)
The mass d~nsity of water pw at 4°C is one gmlm l, 1000 kglm 3 or 1 Mg/ml.
[Note. In some texts, the specific gravity is represented as Gs .]
The specific gravity of solids (or most natural soils falls in the general range of 2.65 to 2.80; the smaller
values are for the coarse-grained soil... Table 2.1 gives the average values for different soils. It may be mentioned
that the specific gravity of different panicles in a soil mass may not be the same. Whenever the specific
gravity of a soil mass ~ indicated, it is the average value of all the solid particles present in the soil mass.
SpecifiC gravity of solids is an important parameter. It is used for determination of void ratio and particle size.
roll MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
In addition to thc standard tcrm of specific gravity as defined, thc following two tcnns related with the
specific gravity are also occasionally used.
(1) Muss Specific Gravity (G",~1t is defined as the ratio of lhe mass density of the soil to the ma<iS
density of water.
. .. (2.\9)
Obviously. the value of the mass specific gravity of a soil is much smaller than the value of the specific
gravity of solids.
The mass specific gravity is also known as the apparent specifte gravity or the bulk specific gravity.
(2) Absolute SpeciOc Gravity (G.,)-1be soil solids are Dot perfect solids but contain voids. Some of
these voids are pcnneable through which water can enter, whereas others are impenneable. Since the
permeable voids get filled when the soil is wet, these are in reality a part of void space in the totol mass and
nOi a part of soil solids. If both the pcnncable and impenneabJe voids are excluded from the volume of
solids, the remaining volume is the true or absolute volume of the solids.
The mass density of the absolute solids (Ps).. is used for the detenninalion of the absolute specific gravity
of solids as under. Thus
... (2.20)
The absolute specific gravity is not of much practical use, as it is difficult to differentiate between the
permeable and impcnneable voids. In most cases, the impcnneable parts are taken as the part of solids. In this
text, the tenn specific gravity of soil solids (G) is ~ to denote the specific gravity of soil solids inclusive
.1J ill.
of the impermeable voids. In Eq. 2.18, the soil solids therefore mean the solids with their impenneable voids.
ill --
Z.9. THREE· PHASE DIAGRAM IN TERMS OF VOID RATIO
The relationships developed in the preceding sections are independent of the actual dimensions of the soil
"'l"G'W
voids to the volume of solids, the volume of voids in Fig. 2.5 (0) becomes equal to e. The total volume ('\I)
is obviously equal to \1 + e). 1be volume of air is shown bye" and the volume of water, bye....
The volumes are shown on the left side and the mrresponding mass on the right side in Fig. 2.5 (a). 1be
volumetric relationships developed in Sect. 2.2 can be written direaly in tenns of void ratio as under:
Poru;ity, n .. ~ .. ~
Degree of saturation, s .. ~_~
V. e
The volume of water (V...) is shown as Se in Fig. 2.5(0). Obviously, the volume of air (V,,) is equal
to (e - Se) = e(1 - S).
Various mass densities discussed in Sect. 2.4 can be expressed in terms of the void rotio from Fig. 2.5
(a).
M M~+M... Gp ... + Sep ...
From Eq. 2.11, p .. V .. I-:;e .. --1-.-e-
(G + Se)p ...
p - -l-.-e- ".(2.21)
M, Gp...
From Eq. 2.12 Pd-V-~ ".(2.22)
M_
From Eq. 2.13, P,... ----y-
As the degree of saturation for a saturated soil is l.0 (i.e. 100%), Eq. 2.21 gives
(G. e)p.
P,... .,~ ".(2.23)
, (G. ')P.
From Eq. 2.16 P .. p- - P..... -1-.-.- - P.
, (G - 1)
or P"~P ... ".(2.24)
In case the soil is not fully saturated, the submerged mass density is given by p' .. P - P...
(G • Se) p. - (1 • e) p.
1 • e
, [(G - 1)- e(l - S)] P.
p .. 1 + e ".(2.25)
Eq. 2.25 reduces to Eq. 2.24 when the soil is fully saturated (S = 1.0).
Equations In Weight Units
Eqs. 2.21 to 2.25 can be expressed in terms of weights. Equations can be derived comidering the
vOlume-weight phase diagrams [Fig. 2.5 (b)] or simply by multiplying both sides of the equations by g and
remembering thaI 1 .. pg. Thus
22 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(G + Se)l..,
Eq. 2.21 be<omos y - -1-+-.- [2.21(a)1
Gy..,
Eq. 2.22 becomes 'td" I-:;:-; ... [2.12 (a)1
(0) (b)
Fig. 2.6. Ph.1se-dillgram in terms of porssity.
n-~_~_vv
Thcremre, the volume of voids in shown as n.
Obviously, the volume of solids is (1 - n).
Void ratio, n
• - ~ (same as Eq. 2.4)
or p - IG (I - n) + Sn] P. . .. (2.26)
From Eq. 2.12, Pd _ *" _ GP",~l-n)
Pd - Gp",(l-n) ... (2.27)
BASIC DEFINITIONS AND SI¥I'LE TESrs 23
kl';
An extremely useful relationship between the void ratio (e) and the water content (w) can be developed
as under.
Fig. 2.7 (a) shows the three-phase diagram.
t
VW
!~I';
-------------
------.-----~ t t ------------ t
Mw~Vwfw l'w ------------ Mw~S'Yw
1 1 T~WG IYw
(bl
Fig. 2.7. Three-phase ddiagram .
M -
From Eq. 2.9 w - M;
w _ V... P...
V,PS
From Eq. 2.5, V... • SV~
(G - I)r.
Eq. 2.34 becomes 'tlub-~ . .. [2.34(a)[
2.13. RE1ATIONSIIII' BETWEEN OUY MASS DENSITY AND PERCENTAGE AIU VOIDS
In the study o[ compaction of soils (Chapter 14), a relationship between the dry mass density and the
percentage air voids is required. The relationship can be developed from the 3·phase diagram shown in
Fig. 2.8 (a).
Now
ill t"·, 1111 (0)
v ..
Fig. 2.8. Three-phase diagram
V, + V ... + V"
lb)
l-~+Yv+~
V.
Bul v-n" CEq. 2.6)
Therefore
(1 - n,,) .. ~ + .f
(1 _ n,,) .. M, /~GP ...) + M",:pw
_ k. + (wM,)/pw
Gp,., V
26 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
... (2.38)
When the soil becomes fully saturated at a given water rootent, II" - 0, and Eq. (2.38) can be written as
(Pd)". - 0 - 1 ~P:o
A little refieaioo win show that (Pd)/I~ _ 0 and (P.d.... represent the same oondil ion.
In lenns of unit weights Eq. 2.38 becomes [Fig. 2.8 (b)]
(1 - a.)Gy.
Yd - - - 1-.-e- . .. [2.38 (a)]
Table 2.2 gives a summary of the various relationships. The reader should make these equations as a pan
of his soil engineering vocabulary.
Thble 2.2. Dasic Relationships
(Note. p...... 1(0) kg/m 3 _ 1.0 glml. ,/",'" 9810 N/m2 ... 9.81 kN/mJ _ 10 kN/mll
2.14. WATER CONTENT DETERMINATION
The waler content of 8 soil is an important parameter that controls its behaviour. It is a quantitative
measure of the wetness of a soil mass. 'Ibe water content of a soil can be determine<! to a high degree of
precision, as it involves only mass which can be determined more accurately than volumes. The water oonlent
of soil is determined as a routine matter in most of the other tests.
The water content of a soil sample can be determined by anyone of the following methods:
(1) Oven Drying method (2) Torsioo Balance method (3) Pycnometer method
(4) Sand Bath method (5) Alcohol method (6) Ca lcium Carbide method
(7) Radiation method.
(1) Oven Drying method. Tbe oven drying method is a sUlndard, laboratory method. lbis is a very
accurate melhod.
BASIC DI!flNnlONS AND SIMPLE 'f'ESTS 27
The soil sample is taken in a smaU. non-corridible, ainighl container. The mass of the sample and that of
the container are obtained using an aex:urate weighing balance. According to IS : 2720 (pan 1I}-1973, the
mass of the sample should be taken to an accuracy of 0.04 per cent. The quantity of the sample to be taken
for the test depends upon the gradation and the maximum size of the panicles and the degree of wetness of
the soil. The drier the soil. tbe more shall be the quantity of the specimen. Table 2.3 gives the minimum
quantity of soil specimen to be taken for the test.
The soil sample in the container is then dried in an oven at a temperature of 110° ::t SoC for 24 hams.
The temperature range selected is suitable for most of the soils. The temperature lower than 110° ::t 5°C may
not cause oomplete evaporation of water and a temperature higher than this temperature may c.'1use the
breaking down of the crystalline structure of the soil panicles and laiS of chemic.'111y bound. st ructural water.
However, oven-drying at 110° ::t 5°C does not give reliable resulLS for soils oontaining gypsum or other
minerals having loooely bound waler of hydration. This temperature is aL~ not suitable for soils containing
significant amount of organic matter. for all such soils, a temperature of 60° to 80°C is recommended. At
higher tempcraturt; gypsum loses its waler of crystaUine and the organic soils tend to decompose and get
oxidized.
'lhble 2.3. Minimum Quantity of Soil for Water Content Detenninatlon
S. No. Size of Particles more tilan 90% passing Millimum Qualltity (gm)
l. 425--micron IS sieve 25
, 2.
3.
2mm IS sieve
4.75 mmlSsieve
50
200
~.
The drying pcriod of 24 hours has been rccommemled for normal soils, as it has been found that this
period is sufficient to cause complete evaporation of water. lbc sample is dried till it attains a constant mass.
The soil may be deemed to be dry when the difference in successive wcighings of the cooled sample docs
nol exceed about 0.1 percent of the original mass. The soils oontaining gypsum and organic matter may
require drying for a period longer Ihan 24 hours.
The water content of the soil sample is caiCUl.1tcd from the following equation.
w .. ~_M2-MJ)(lOO ... (2.39)
M, M)-MI
where M 1 - mass of container, with lid
M2 - mass of container, lid and wet soil
M) - mass of container, lid and dry soil
The water content of the soil is reponed to two Significant figures.
(Refer to Chapter 30, Sect. 30.1 for the laboratory experiment)
(2) Torsion Balance Method. lbe infra-red lamp and torsion balance moisture meter is used for rapid
and accurate determination of the water content. The equipment has two main parts: (I) the infra-red lamp,
and (il) the torsion balance. The infra-red mdiation is provided by a 250 W t.1mp built in the torsion balance
for use with an alternating current 220--230 V, 50 cycles, single- phase main supply (IS : 2720 (part
0)--1973].
As the moisture meter is generally calibrated for 25 gm of soil, the maximum size of particle in the
specimen shall be k!ss than 2 mm. The sample is kept in a suitable container so that its water content is not
affected by ambient cooclitions. lbe torque is applied to one end of the torsion wire by means of a calibrated
drum to balance the loss of weight of the sample as it dries out under infrared lamp. A thermometer is
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
provided for recording the drying temperature which is kept at 110° :!: SoC. Provision is made to adjust Ihc
input vOltage to the infra·red lamp to conlrol the beat for drying of the specimen.
The weighing mechanism, known as a torsion balance, has a built· in magnetic damper which reduces
pan vibration<> for quick drying. TIle balance scale (drum) is divided in terms of moisture content (m') based
on wet mass. lbe water mnlent (w), based on the dry mass, can be determined from the value of m' as under.
~ _ Ms ;wM
", _ ~ + 1
)~~~~~-screw
remains constant. The pycnometer method for the
determination of water content can be used only if the - type c.over
specific gravity of solid (G) particles is known.
A sample of we' soil, about 200 to 400 g, is taken in the
pyalOmeter and weighed. Water is then added to the soil in
the pycnometer to make it about hllif full. The mntents are
GlilSS jar
thoroughly mixed using a glass rod to remove the entrapped
air. More and more water is added and stirring process
continued till (he pycnometer is fiUed flush with the hole in
the conical cap. The pycnometer is wiped dry and weighed.
The pycnometer is then completely emptied. It is washed
thoroughly and filled with water, flush with the lOp hole. 1bc
pycnometer is wiped dry and weighed. Fig. 2.9 PyCllomelcr.
Let MI - mass of pycnom<aer
M2 - mass of pycnometer + wet soil
M) - mass of pycnometer + wet soil + water
M4 - mass of pycnometer filled with water only.
Obviously, the mass M4 is equal to mass M) minus the mass of solids Ms plus the mass of an equal
volume of water (see Fig. 2.10).
Thus M,
M4 - M) - Ms + (G P...) . P...
M4 - M)- Ms + ~
BASIC DEF1NmONS AND SIMI'LE TESrS
- M, - M, ( I - b)
or Mz - eM) - M4 ) • ( G ~ 1)
Now, mass of wet soil = M2 - Mi
_ [(M, - M (Q.::..!.)
(M,-M,) G
I)_ I] x 100 ... (2.41)
This method for the detcnnination of the water OJOtCDt is quite suitable for roarse-grained soils from
which (he entrapped air can be easily removed. If a vacuum pump is available, the PYOlometcr can be
connected 10 II for about 10 to 20 minutes to remove the entrapped air. 11lc rubber tUbing of the pump shoukl
be held tightly with the pYOlometcr 10 preveDt leakage.
(Refer to Dlapter 30. Sect. 30.2 for the laboratory experimcot)
(4) Sand Bath Method. Sand balh method is a field method for the determination of water content. The
method is ropid, but not very accurate. A sand bath is a large, open vessel oontaining sand filled to a depth
of 3 em or more.
The soil sample is taken in a troy. The sample is crumbled and placed loosely in the tray. A few pieces
of white paper are also placed on the sample. The tray is weighed and the mass of wet sample i£ obtained.
The tray is then placed on the sand-bath. The sand bath is heated over a stove. Drying takes about .20 to
60 minutes, depending upon the type of soil. During heating, the specimen is tumed with a palette knife.
Overheating of soil should be avoided. The white paper turns brown when overheating occurs. The drying
should be continued till the sample attains a constant mass. When drying is oomplete, the tray is removed
from the sand bath. cooled and weighed. ]be water content is determined using Eq. 239.
(5) Alcohol Method. The soil sample is taken in an evaporating dish. urge lumps of soil, if any. should be
broken and crumbled. The mass of the wet sample is taken. The sample is then mixed with methylated spirit
(alcohol). The quantity of methylated spirit required is about one millilitre for every gram of soil. The
methylated spirit and the soil should be turned several times, with a palette knife, to make the mixture uniform.
The methylated spirit is then ignited. The mixture is stirred with a spatula or a knife when ignition ~
talciog place. After the methylated spirit bas bumt away completely, the dish 'is allowed 10 be cooled, and the
mass of the dry soil obtained. 1bc metbod takes about 10 minutes.
Methylated spirit is extremely volatile. Care shall be taken to prevent fire. 1be method cannot be used if
the soil contains a large proportion of clay, organic maller, gypsum or any other caJcareous materiaL The
method is quite rapid, but not very accurate.
30 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENINEERING
(6) Calcium Cllrbide Method. This method of the dctcnninalion of water contenl makes use of the fact
that when water reacts wiLh calcium carbide (c., C:z). acetylene gas (Cz Hi) L<.; produced.
Cay + 2H 20 - CzH 2 + Ca (Ollh
The water rooteol of the soil is determined indirectly from the pr<ssure of the acetylene gas formed. 1be
instrument used is known as moisture tester.
TIle wei soil sample is plared in a sealed container containing calcium carbide. lbc samples of sand
require no special prepamtion. 'me soil sample is ground and pulverised. However, cohesive and plastic soils
are tested after addition of steel balls in the pressure vessels. The test requires about 6 g of soil.
The pressure of the acctylene gas produced acts on the diaphragm of the moisture tesler. The quantity of
gas is indicated on a pff$Ure gauge. From the calibrntcd scale of the pressure gauge, the water oontent (m') based
on the total mass is determined. The water content (w) b..'tSed on the dry mass is dctennined using Eq. 2.40 (a).
~ calcium carbide is highly susceptible to absorption of moisture. il should not be exposed 10
atmosphere. lbc lid of the container should be finnly fixed.
(7) Radiation Method. Radio-active isotopes are used for the determination of water content of soits. A
device containing a radio-active isotopes material. such as cobalt 60, is pL.'l.cOO in a capsule. It is then lowered
- SO,tt
51 pet casing Stezezl cdsing
A 8
Fig.2. 1l .
in a steel casing A, placed in a bore hole as shown in Fig. 2.11. The steel casing has a small opening on its
one side through which rays can come out. A detector is placed inside another steel casing B, which also has
an opening facing that in casing A.
Neutrons are emitted by the radio-active material. The hydrogen atoms in water of the soil cause
scattering of neutrons. As these neutrons strike with the hydrogen atoms,they lose energy. The loss of energy
is proportional to 'he quantity of water present in the soil. The detector is calibrated to givc directly the water
content
The mcthod is extremely useful for tbe determination of water cootcnl of a soil in the in-situ conditions.
The methcx:l should be very carefully used, as it m3Y lead to radiation problems if proper shielding
precautions are not taken.
2.15. SPECIHC GRAVny DETERMINATION
The specific gravity of solid particles is determined in the laboratory using the following mcthods:
(1) Density boule method (2) Pycnometer method (3) Measuring flask mcthod
(4) Ga<> jar mcthod (5) Shrinkage limit mcthod.
The last method of determining thc specific gravity of solid particles from thc shrinkage limit is
discussed in Sect. 4.6.
BASIC DEFINmONS AND SIMPLE TESrs 31
(I) Density Bottle Method. TIle specific gravity of solid particles can be
determined in a laboratory using a density botlle filled with a stopper having a hole
(Fig. 2.12). The density bottle of 50 ml capacity is generally used [IS : 2720 (Pan
II) 1980].
The density bottle is cleaned and dried at a temperature of 105° to 110°C and
cooled. 'The mass of the bottle. including that of stopper. is taken. About 5·10 g of
oven dry sample of soil is taken in the bottle and weighed. If the sample contains
particles of large size, it shall be ground to pass a 2·mm sieve before the test.
Distilled water is then added to cover the sample. The soil is allowed to soak
water for about 2 hOurs. More water is added until the bottle is half full. Air
entrapped in the soil is expelled by applying a V3aJum pressure of about 55 em of
mercury for about one hour in a vacuum dcssicalor. Alternatively. the entrapped air
can be removed by genqe heating. More water is added to the bottle to make it full.
111e slopper is inserted in the bottle and its mass is taken. The temperature is also
recorded.
The bottle is emptied. washed and then refilled with di'itilled water. The bottle Fig. 212 Density bottle.
must be filled to the; same mark as in the previous case. The mass of the botLle filled with water is taken. The
temperature should be the same as before.
Let MI .. massofemptybottle
l"C sp. gf. I·e sp. gr. I·C sp. gr. I"C sp. gr.
1 0.9999 11 0.99% 21 0.9980 31 0.9954
2 0.9999 12 0.9995 22 0.9978 32 0.9951
3 1.0000 13 0.9994 23 0.9976 33 0.9947
4 1.0000 14 0.9993 24 0.9973 3. 0.9944
5 1.0000 15 0.9991 25 0.9971 35 0.9941
6 1.0000 16 0.9990 26 0.9968 36 0.9937
7 0.9999 17 0.9988 27 0.9965 37 0.9934
•• 0.9999
0.9998
I•
19
0.9986
0.9984
2J3
29
0.9963
0.9%0
38
3.
0.9930
0.9926
10 0.9997 20 0.9982 30 0.9957 40 0.9922
Sometimes, other liquids, such as paramo, alcohol and benzene. arc also used.
Density bottle method is suitable for fine-grained soils, with more than 90% passing 2 mm-IS sieve.
However the method can also be used for medium and coarse-grained soils if they are pulverised such that
the particles pass 2 mm-IS sieve.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 30.3 for the laboratory experiment).
(2) Pycnometer Method. The method is similar to the density boute method. As the capacity of the
pYOlometer is larger, about 200-300 g of oven-dry soil is required for the test. The method can be used for
all types of soils, bul is more suitable for medium-grained soils, with morc than 90% passing a 20 mm IS
sieve and for ~rse-grained soils with more Ihan 90% passing a 40 mm IS sieve.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 30.4 for the laboratory experiment).
(3) Measuring Flask Method. A mea'iuring nask is of 250 ml (or 500 ml) capacity. with a graduation
mark at Ihat leveL It is fitted with an adaptor for connecting it to a vacuum line for removing entrapped air.
The method is similar 10 the density bottle method. About 80--100 g of oven dry soil is required in Ihis case.
The method is suitable for fine-grained and medium grained1soits.
Rubber bung
(4) Gus Jar Method. In this method. a ga.. jar of about I litre
capacity is used. The jar is fitled with a rubber bung (Fig. 2.13). The
gas jar serves as a pycnometer. The method is similar to the pycnometer
method.
, LItre
2.16. MEASUREMENT OF MASS DENSITY glass jar
The bulk mass density of a soil sample, as per Eq. 2.11, is the·mass
per unit volume. Allhough lhe mass of a soil sample can be determined Soil
to a high degree of precision, it is rather difficult to determine the
volume of the sample accurately. The methods discussed below
basically differ in the prOCedure for the measurement of the volume.
Once the bulk mass density has been detennincd. the dry mass density
is found using Eq. 2.36. Thus Fig. 2.13. Gas Jar.
BASIC DEFlNn10NS AND SIMPLE 1T:SrS 33
p • M- and
V
The volume of the specimen used in various tcsts can be computed from the measured dimensions. as
Ihey have regular shapes, such as a cylinder or a cube. Ilowever, precise measurements arc not possible. If
the sample is made in a container of known dimensions. much more accurate measurements arc possible.
The following methods are genemlly used for the detennination of mass density.
(1) Water Displacement Method (2) Submerged mass density Method
(3) Core Cutler Method (4) Smld Replacement Method.
(5) Water Balloon Method (6) Radi:ltion Method.
The methods are discussed below. 1lIc first two methods arc laboratory methods and the !'CSt, field
methods.
(I) Water Dl~placement Method. The volume of the
specimen js dClcnmned in Ihis method by waler
displacement, As the soil mass disintegrates when it comes
in contact with water, the sample is cooted with paraffin
wax to make it impervious. A Icst specimen is trimmed to
more or less a regular shape and weighed. It is then coated Valva
with a trun lay.er of .paraffin wax by dipping it. in molten ~
wax. The specimen IS allowed to cool and weighed. 1llc Mtasurrng . =-
difference between the two observations is equal 10 the
mass of the paraffin.
'llie waxed specimen is then immersed in a water-
displacement container shown in Fig. 2.14. Thc volume of
the specimen is equal 10 the volume of WOlter which comes
out of the outflow lube. The actual volume of the soil
specimen is less th3I1 the volume of the waxed specimen. Fig. 2.14. WIlICr di~placemcnl cont.,incr.
The volume of the wax is determined from the mass of the wax peeled orr from the specimen afler the test
and the mass density of wax.
T
the mass of water. I
Bulk mass density,
where M 2 :: mass of culter, with soil,
... (2.41)
Cutter __
I
13 0 rr.m
M I = mass of empty cutter, I
1
V:: intCITh'l1 volume of cutter.
lhe method is quite suitable for son, fine grnined soils.
It cannot be used for stoney, graven), soils. The method is
i
practicable only at the places where the surface of the soil
is exposed and the cutter con be easily driven.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 30.5 for the experiment). Fig. 2.15. Core.Culler with dolly.
(4) Sand Replacement Method. Fig. 2.16 shows a sand-pouring cylinder, which has a pouring cone at
its base. TIle cylinder shown is placed with its base at the ground level. There is a shutter between the
cylinder and the rone. The cylinder is firsl calibrated to delennine the mass density of sand. For good results,
the $and used should be uniform, dry and clean, passing a 600 micron sieve and rctuined on a 300 micron
sieve.
(0) Callbrntlon of appurotus-The cylinder is filled with sand and weighed. A calibrating oontainer is
then placed below the pouring cylinder and the shutler is opened. The sand fills the calibrating container and
the cone. The shutter is closed, and the mass of the cylinder is again laken. lbe ma5S of Ihe sand in the
container and the cone is equal to the dirl'crencc or the two observations.
The pouring cylinder is again filled 10 the initial mass. The sand is allowed 10 run 001 of the cylinder,
equal to the volume of the calibrating cootaincr and the shutler is closed. The cylinder is then placed over a
pt.!in surface and the shutler is opened. 'Ihe sand runs Oul of the cylinder and fills the cone. The shutler is
closed when no further :novement of sand takcs place. 1nc t.)'linder is removed and the sand filling the rone
is collected and weighed (Mi).
"he mass density of the sand is dctennincd as under:
All - M2 -M)
P. .. V ... (2.49)
t
where M 1 = initial mass of cylinder with sand,
BASIC DEFINITIONS AND SIMPLE TFSrs
from the hole through the opening in the base plate. All loose material is removed. llle soil removed is
collected and weighed. The cylinder is <lg:lin pl:K:oo over thc opening in thc plate and pressure is applied to
the balloon till it fills the holc. lhe volumc of Wolter in the cylinder is observed. '[be volume of thc hole is
fou:1.d from the initial and finnl observntion of wmer volume.
The method is general and is suit:Jble for t:1I types of soils. However, it is not so accurate, as it is difficult
to fit thc balloon eXrlctly in an irregular hole.
rs : 2720 (Part XXXIV)-1972 describes the method in detail.
(6) Radiation Method. The bulk mass density of in-situ soil can be determined ~ing the radiation
method. The meter consists of twO probes, one containing a radio isotope source and the othcr a gamma my
detcctor. 1lle meter is placed on thc surface which had been carefully cleaned and levelled. The probe extends
to a maximum depth of 200 mm to 300 mm into the ground. and, therefore, gives an average mass density
for that depth. The detector record<; the amount of radiation which passes through the soil from lhc probe
attached to the meter when inserted into thc ground. The denser the soil, the greater is the absorption of
gamma rays, and the lc.sscr will be the gamma mys energy at the detector. The method is known as the direct
transmission me/hod
'l1lere is another method, known as the back scalier method. Both the sourcc and the detector are
contained in one probe. The detector records radiations which had been reflected by the soil. The bulk mass
density of the soil is determined from the rndiation roum over a fixed lime period. The mass density obtained
is for the top 40 to 50 mm. '[be method is simpler thrln the direct transmission method, but it requires a
greater source strength.
Radiation methods for determination of the m:lss density of soils are quick and oonvenient and are
gaining popularity. However, precautions must be taken again~ thc mdiatioo ila7.ard.
2.17. DETERMINATION O}O' vom RATIO, l'OnOSITY AND DEGREE 0.' SATURATION
The void ratio of a soil s.1mp!e is a measure of its den'lcncss. It is one of the important parameters of
soils. Engineering properties of soils depend upon void mtio 10 a large extent. The void mHo is determined in
the labordtory indirectly from the dry mass density. From I3q. 2.22.
e _ Gp•. _ 1 .. . (2.51)
p,
The methods for determin:ltion of the spccilic gravity of solids G and the dry density Pd have been
discussed in the preceding sections.
For a saturated soil. the void ratio is determined using Eq. 2.31, e .. ~. This method is a very
convenient and accurate method. as the water content of a soil can be determined quite easily and acaJrnlcly.
The specific gravity of soil (G) can also be determined in the laboratory.
Once the void mlio hns been detennined. other volumetric relationships such as porosity and degree of
saturation can be determined using Eqs. 2.3 and 2.30, respectively.
Percentage air voids are determined indirectly, using Eq. 2.38,
(l-n.)Gp.
Pd"~
Thble 2.5. lypical Values or Void Ratio lind Dry Denl;ily lind Dry Unll'i: Weights
S.No. Soil type Slale oj soil Void PorosilY Dry defLSity Dry unit weight
J J
Ratio ('!o) (kglm ) (kNlm )
Gravel """",,
2. Coarse sand.
"''''''',
"""",,
0.60
0.30
0.75
'"
23
42
''''"
2000
1S00
10
'"
IS
Medium sand Densest 035 2. 1900 I.
3. Unifonn, fine """",, 0.85 40 1400 14
4.
",'
Coorse silt
"',"'"
"""",,
0.4
1.0
29
50
1900
1300
I.
13
S. Fine silt
"'''''',
Softest
0.45
1.00
31
SO
1800 I.
1300 13
IIDrcicsl 0.4 29 1900 I.
O. Lean Clay Softest 1.20 55 1300 13
IIDrdCSI OAO 29 1900 I.
7. fm clay Sortesl 2.20 69 1000 10
Ilnrd(.'$l OAO 29 2000
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
'"
1II1J.~lruti't'e EXlIIIlpie 2 .1. 71u: mass of a clwnk of moist soil is 20 kg, and its volume is 0.011 ml. After
drying in an oven, the mass reduces 10 16.5 kg. Determine the water content, the density of moist soil, tile
dry density. void rario, porosity and the degree of saluration. Take G = 2.70.
Solulion. Mass or water. AI... = 20.0 - 16.50 = 3.50 kg
IIIustratl't'e Example 2.2. A ~Qil specimen has a water content of }O% and a wet unit weighl of 20
kN/nl If the specific gravity oj solids is 2.70, determine the dry unit weight, void ratio, and the degree of
samra/;OIL Take 't ... = 10 /eN/m .
Illustrative Example 2.3. A sample of dry soil 'Weighs 68 gm. Find the volum~ of voids if t.he tOla
volume of the sample is 40 ml and the specific gravity of Solids is 2.65. Also determine the void ratio.
Volume of solids, M, 68
V~ .. Gp", .. ~ .. 2S.66ml
Volume of voids, V~ .. V - V, .. 40.00 - 25.66 .. 14.34 ml
illustrative Example 2.5. A soil has a porosity of 40%, the SpecIfIC gravity of solids of 2.65 and a WQter
content of 12%. Determine the mass of water reqllired to be added to 100 m) o/tltis .foil for /ull saturation.
Solution. Let us take unit volume of solids, i.e. V, .. 1.0 ml.
Mass of solids., M, .. G P ..... 2.65 x 1000 .. 2650 kg
From Eq. 2.9, mass of water, M", .. 0.12 x 2650 .. 318 kg
Volume of water .. 13~ .. 0.318m l
Volume of water required for 100 013 of soil .. ~:!:~ x 100 .. 20.94 013
Mass of water required = 20940 kg.
Illustrative Example
1 2.6. A sample 0/ saturated soil has a water content of 25 percent and a bulle unit
weight of 20 kN/m . Determine dry density, void ratio and specific gravity of solid particles.
BASIC DEFINITIONS AND SIMPLE TESfS 39
What would be the bulk uni, weight of the same soil at the same void ratio hut at a degree of saturation
of 80% ? Ta/ce y", = 10 leN/mJ.
From Eq. 2.30, laking S = 1.0, e ... M-G _ 0.25 )( 2.67 .. 0.67
From Eq. 2.22 (a~ Yd'" IG ;"'e . . 2i6: ~.;~ .. 15.99 kN/m
J
In the scoond case, as e :; 0.67 and S = 0.80, Eq. 2.21 (a) gives
lIIustrallve EXllmple 2.7. A sample of clay was coated wl'tll paraffin wax and its mass, including the
mass of wax, was found to be 697.5 gm. The sample was immersed in water and the volume of the water
displaced was found to be 355 1111. The mass of the sample wit/JO/d wax was 690.0 gill, and the water content
of the representative specimen was 18%.
Determine the bllik densil){ dry density, void ratio and the degree of saturation. The specific gravity of .
the solids WQS 2.70 and that of tite wax was 0.89. .
Solution. Mass of wax ... 697,5 - 690,0 ... 7.5 gm
From Eq. 2.36, dry density ... 1 !'~18 ... 1.69 gm/ml
illustrative Example 2.8. (a) During a lesl for water content determination on a soil sample by
pycnometer, the following observations were recorded
(1) Mass of wet soil sample = 1000 gm
(2) Mass of pycnometer with soil and filled with water ·2000 gm
(3) Mass of pycnometer filled with water only = 1480 gm
(4) Specific gravity of solids ·2.67
Determine the water content.
(b) If the b/Jlk density of the soil is 2.05 gm/ml, determine the degree of saturation.
(l-n.)G·p.
From Eq. 2.38. p, -
1 + wG
or 1 - nQ _ 1692.21 ;~l x+ l~ )( 2.(8) .. .0.9022
n. - 0.0978 (9.78%)
Illustrative Exumple 2 .U . A compacted cylindrical specimen, 50 111m dia and 100 111111 length, is to be
prepared from oven-dry soil. If the specimen is required to have a waler contenl of 15% and the percentage
air voids of 20%, calClilate the //lass of the soil and water required for the preparation of tlte sample. Take
G = 2.69.
Solution. Let M, be the mass of solids in kg.
Mass of water, .. wM# _ 0.15 M#
M, _ 0.301 kg
Mass of water .. 0 .15 x 0.301 _ 0.045 kg
llJustrnUve Example 2.12. A borrow area soil has a lIatural water comem of 10% and a bulk density of
1.80 Mg/l,r. The soil is used for an embankment to be compacted at 18% moisture content to a dry density
of 1.85 Mg/m J• Determine the amount of water to be added to 1.0 m J of borrow soil. flow nJllI1Y cubic metres
of excavation is required for I nl of compacted embankment ?
Solution. Borrow area A. p" == 2~6: ~. ~OO =: 1.47 g/ml (14.44 kN/mJ)
Let us consider I m.l of borrow soil. W, .. Dry weightlm 1 .. 14.44 kN
PROBLEMS
A. NumeriCllI
:U. (D) Deline the [elTI1S void ralio, specific gravit), of particles, degree of saturation and dry densit)'.
(b) Develop a relationship between the void rolio, water cootem, specific gravity of particles and the degree of
saturation.
Z.Z. (0) Describe ovcn.(lrying method for the delenninmion of waler oooten! of a soil sample in a laboratory.
l
(b) A sample of wei soil has a volume of 0.0192 m and a mass of 32 kg. When the sample is dried oul in an
oven, its mass reduces to 28.S kg. Determine (I) Bulle. density. (il) Wllter rontcnl, (;il) Dry density, (iv)
:I~~~~ dcngty, ([~~:,dl:~6jV~):~;i~;); ~:: ~~:)~~~~·.5~a~~:~;sr,:~ ;4~i~~:~~~~
l
2.3. (a) A $lmple of saturated soil hOlS a water content of 2."S percent and a bulk unil weight 0£20 kN/m , Determine
the dry unit weight, void ratio and the specific gravity of solids.
(b) What would be the bulk unit weighL of the soil in en) if it is compacted LO the same void ratio but hos I)
degree of saLUration of 90% ? (Ans. 16 kNIm\ 0.667, 2.667 19.60 kNlmll
2.4. A sample of soil has a volume of 65 ml and weighs 0.96 N. After oomplete drying, its weight reduces 10 0.78.'i
N. If the specific gravity of solid particles is 2.65, determine the degree of saturation. [Ans.51%J
2.5. A saturated soil sample has 0. water content of 40%. If the specific gravity of solids is 2.67, dctennine lhe void
ratio, saturated denSity, and submerged density. [An!i. 1.07 i 1807 kg/m l i 807 kg/mll
2.6. (a) Define the terms void ratio, dry density, submerged density and mass specific gravity.
(b) Derive on expression for bulk density in tenTIS of its water content, void ralio, specific gravity of solids and
density ofwatet.
l
2.7. A partially saturated sample of a soil has a density of 1950 kg/m and a water content of 21%. If the specific
gravity of solids is 2.65, ClIlculate the degree of saturation and void ratio.
If the sample subsequently gets saturoted, determine its saturated density. (Ans. 86%; 0.645 ; 2003 kglmlJ
2.S. A sample of soil has a volume of 1 litre and lL wcight of 17.5 N. The specific gruvity of the solids is 2.68. If
the dry unit weight of the soil is 14.8 leN/ml, determine (a) water content, (b) void ratio, (e) porosity, (d)
saturated unit weight, (e) submerged density and (j) degree of saturation.
[Ans. 18.2% : 0.811 : 44.8% ; 19.28 kN/ml, 9.28 kN/ml and 60.2%1
2.9. A fully saturated day sample has a mass of 130 gm and hos a volume of 64 anl . The sample mass is 105 gm
nfler oven drying. Assuming thaI the volume docs not change during drying, dC1ennine the following; (,)
specific gravity of soil solids. (il) void ratio, (iii) porosity, (iv) dry density.
[Ans. 269 ; 0.64 i 39% and 1.641 gm/cn?]
2.10. Prove thnt the water content (w) of a p3nially saturated soil can be expressed as
1 - (011010)
\I' - (0",/5) _ 1
where Gm "" mass specific gravity, G "" specific gravity of solids and S '" degree of salUralion.
2,11 (a) Prove that the degree of saturation of 8 panially saturtlled soil ClIn be expressed os
S _ ::--''-----;-
~(l+W)-t
where p .. bulk densilY, G .. specific gravity of solids nnd w water content.
(b) A eyliodrical specimen oC soil is 7.50 em long and 3.75 em in diameter and has a mMS of 175 gm. If the
water content is 18 percent and the specific gravity of solids is 2.68, detennine the degree of saluration.
What 'NOuld be the error in the degree of saturation if there has been an error of 1 mm in measuring the length ?
(An&. 96.7%, 4.62%)
1.12. A pycnometer having a mass of 600 gm was used in the following measuremenls of three samples of soil.
Sample No.1 was ovendricdi sample no. 2 wos partially saturated and sample no. 3 was Cully saturated. The
bulk density of the sample no. 2 was 2.05 gmfml.
Sample No. 1 No.2 No.3
Muss of samples (gm) 960 970 1000
Mass of sample + water. pycnometer (gm) 2080 2050 2010
BASIC DEFTNI1l0NS AND SIMPLE TESTS 43
If the mass of pycnometer when filled with water only was 1475 gm, dClermine the specifie gravity of solids.
(b) Also determine the water content and void ratio of samples no. 2 and 3, and the degree of saturation of
sample no. 2. IAns. 2.70; 6.3%, 0.40; 11.70: 0.32 and 41.85%1
2.13. An undisturbed specimen of clay was tested in a laboratory and the following results were obtaine<!.
Wet mass '" 210 gm
Oven dry mass '" 175 gm
Specific gravity of solids '" 2.70
What was the totuJ volume of the original undiswrtx:d spccimcn ns..c;uming that the specimen was 50% !Illturatcd ?
(Ans. 134.8 ml]
2.14. A soil deposit to be used for construction of an eanh embankment has an average dry density of 1.62 gmJmI . If
the compacted embankment is to havc an average dry densi ty of 1.72 gmlmI, determine the volume of soil to
be ex:cavated for 1000 m) of embankment. The water content of the soil in the bonow pit is 10%.
lAos. 1.06] x 10) mll
2.15. Determine the specific gravity of solids from the following observations:
(i) Mass of dry sample '" 0.395 kg
(ij) Mass of pycnometer full of water '"' 1.755 kg
(iii) Mass of pycnometer containing soil and full of watet ::::I 2.005 kg. IAns.2.72J
2.16. A sample of clay having a mass of 675 gm was coaled with paramn wax:. 1be combined mass of the clay and
the wax was found to be 682 gm. The volume was found by immersion in water as 345 mt. The sample was
then broken open and the water content and the specific gravity of solids were found 10 be 15% and 2.70,
respeaively. calculate the bulk density of soil, its void ratio, and degree of saturation. Thke specific gravity of
wax: as 0.89. {Ans. 2.002 gmlml, 0.551 and 735%J
2.17. In order to determine the bulk density of a soil insi tu, 4.7 kg of soil was e."~tractcd from a hole al the surface of
the soil. The hole required 3.65 kg of loose dry s:lnd for its filling. If il takcs 6.75 kg of the SlIme sand to fin
a calibrating can of 4.5 lilre capacity, dl!termine the bulk density of the soil. [An.... 1932 kglm)l
2.18. A litre capadty cullcr of mass I kg WIlS pu.<;hed into an emban~cnt under construction and the mass of the
culler with soil was found to be 2.865 kg. If the sample had wnter content of 11 %, determine the void ratio of
the soil in embankment. G:: 2.67. rAm•. 0.59J
8. Descriptive and Objective lYpes
2.19 What is a block diagrom ? WhDl is its use ?
2.20. Differentiate between :
(a) Percentage air voids and air content,
(b) Void ratio and porosity.
(c) Specific gravity of solids and mass specific gravity.
(d) Watcr content based on solid material and that based on total mass.
(e) Saturated density and bulk density.
2.21. How do you determine the void ratio of a soil?
2.22. Discuss various methods for detcrmination of water content in a laboratory.
2.23. Describe a method for dctermination of the specific-gravity of solids of fine.grained soils.
2.24. How would you determi ne the bulk: density of a soil specimen in a laboratory ?
2.2S. Discuss various methods for the determination of bulk density of a soil in field.
2.26. Slllte whether the following statements are true or false
(a) The water content of a soil can be more than 100%.
(b) The porosity of a soil can be more than 100%
(e) The specific gravity of particles of coarse-grained is seldom greater than 2.70.
(d) Thc submerged density is about onc·half of the SlltUrnted density.
(e) For dcterminmion of water coment of all types of soils, the oven temperature Is 1000 :t 5°C.
fAns. True (a),(c), (d)J
2.27. (a) Which of the following relation is nOi correct ?
44 SOIL. MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENINEERJNG
I
(h) Which of the (o llowing S1;lICl11cnls is wrong '!
(n The void rml0 of u snlunucd soil can ~ determined from its wmer COntent.
(il) The dry density is 1thc bu lk density of soil in dried condition.
(iii ) 100% .5>iltumtioo linc lind zero percent air void lines are identicaL IAns.(ii»)
C. Multiple-Choice Questions
1. TIle waler L-on lenl of ;\ highly organic soil i~ dctcrmmed in tin o~'e n III II temperature of:
(ti) lOSoC (b) 800C
Ce) 60 0 e (dJ 27°C
2. Pycnometer method I'M water conte nt dclCmlin:llion i~ more suitan le for:
((I) Clny (b) Loess
Ie) Sand (If) Silt
3. The gas formed by lhe rem,lion 01' calcium carbide with water is:
(a) Carboy dhlXldc (b) Sulphur dioxide
(e) Ethane (dJ Acetylene
4. The rmin of the volume til' voids to the total volume of soil is:
(a) Voids r.ltlO (b) Degree of saturlllion
(e) Ai r content «(I) Porosity
5. Dry density of soil is equal to the:
(lI) Mass of solids to Ihe volume of solids.
(h) Mass of solids to th e tot al vo lume of soil.
Ie) Density of soi l in the dried condition.
(tI) No ne of the above.
6. The most accurate method for th e determination of water content in the laboratory is:
«(/) Sand hm h method. (b) Oven-dryi ng melh·od.
Ie) Pycnometer method. (d) Calcium carbide method.
7. A soil ha~ a bulk. density of 1.80 g}cm"J a~ a ~llter content of 5%. If the void r:llio remai ns constant then the
~:)lk2.:n;:':fr a water L'On!cnt o f 10% ~~; ~S8 glcm3
(e) 1.82 glcmJ (tl) 1.95 glcm)
8. In a wet soil mas!>, air occupies one·sixth of ils vol ume and WilIer occupies one-third of its volume. The void
ratio of the soil is
(n) 0.25 (b) 0.50
~) 1 .5 0 (0)1.00
9. A soil sample has a specific gravity of 2.60 and a void rat,io of 0 .78. The water contenl required to fu lly saturale
the soil at that vuid nltio will be
ta) 20% ....{-b")30%
(el40% (tl) 60%
[_I .~~~1~ ~~~~~~~~L~a~
3
Particle Size Analysis
3.1. INTRODUC!lON
(u) Engineering Propertles-lhc main engineering properties of soils are penncabilily, comprcs.<;ibility.
and shear strength. Pcnncability indicates the facility with which water can flow through soils. It is requiroo
for estimation of seepage discharge through earth m~. Compressibility is related with the deformations
produced in soils when they are subjected to compressive loads. Compression chanlClCrislics arc required for
computation of the settlements of Structures founded on soils. ShC..lf strength of a soil is ils ability to resist
Shc.1r stresses. l11c shear strength determines the stability of slopes. bearing capacity of soils and the earth
pressure on retaining structures. Engineering properties of soils are discussed in latter Ch..1pICrs.
(b) Index Properties-The tests required [or determination of engineering properties arc generally
elaborate and time-consuming. Sometimes, the gcotechnical engineer is interested to h'lve some rough
assessment of the enginccring properties without conducting elaborate testS. This is possible if index
properties are determined. The properties of soils which are not of primary interest to the geotechnical
engineer but which are indicative of the engineering properties are caned index properties. Simple tests which
are required to determine the index properties are known as classification tests. The soils arc cJ:tSSified and
identified based on the index properties. as discussed in Chapter 5. The main index properties of coarse-
grained soils ace panicle size and the relative density. which are described in this chapter. for finc-grained
soils, the main index propcnics are Ancrberg's limits and the consistency (chapter 4).
The index properties arc sometimes divided into two categories. (I) Properties of individual particles. and
(2) Properties of the soil mass. also known as aggregate properties. The properties of individual particles can
be dctennined from a remouldcd. disturbed sample. These depend upon the individu.,l grains and are
independent of the manner of soil formation. 1llc soil aggregate properties depend upon the mode of soil
fonnmion, soil history and soil structure. lbese properties should be determined from undisturbed samples or
preferably from in-situ tests. lbe most important properties of the individual particles of coarse- grained soils
arc the particle size distribution and grain shape. The aggregate property of the coarse-grained soils of great
prnctical importance is its relative density.
lbe index properties give some infonnation about the engineering properties. It is IaciUy assumed that
soils with like index properties have identical engineering properties. However, the correlation between index
properties and engineering properties is not perfe,,;. A liberal factor of safety should be provided if the design
is b.ascd only on index properties. Ocsign of large. imponant struau[CS should be done only aRer
ddenninalion of engineering properties.
The mechanical analysis is done in two stagcs : (1) Sieve Analysis. (2) Sedimentation Analysis. 1nc first
analysis is meant for coarse-grained soils (particle Si7.c greater Ulan 75 micron) which can easily pass through
a set of sievcs. 'Ine second analysis is used for fine-grained soils (size smaller than 75 microns).
Sedimentation analysis is also known £IS wet lJJJQlysis. As a soil mass may contain the pm1iC\cs of both types
of soils, a combined analysis comprising both sieve analysis and sedimentation analysis may be required for
such soils.
Particle size smaller than 0.2 micron cannot be determined by the sedimentation method. These can be
determined by an electron microscope or by X-ray diffraction techniques. However, such analysis is of lillie
practical importance in soil engineering.
3.3. SIEVE ANALYSIS
lbe soil is sieved through a sct of sieves. Sieves are generally made of spun brass and phosphor bronz
(or stainless steel) sieve clolh. According to IS : 1498--1970. the sieves are designated by the size of square
= = 3
opening, in mm or microns (1 micron 10-6 m 10- mm). Sieves of various sizes ranging from 80 mm to
75 microns arc available. '(he diameter of the sieve is generally between 1510 20 em.
As mentioned before, the sieve analysis is done for coarse-grained soils. 1nc coarse-grained soils can be
further sub-divided into gravel fmction (sizc > 4.75 mm) and sand fraction (751' < size < 4.75 mm), where
Greek leiter I' is used to represent microo. A set of coarse sieves, consisting of the sieves of size 80 mm, 40
mm, 20 mm, 10 mm and 4.75 mm, is required for the gravel fmction. 'Ille second set of sieves, ronsisting of
the sieves of size 2 mm, I mm, 600 ",. 415 1',212 ",. ISO I' and 75 "', is used for sieving minus 4.75 mm
fraction. However. all the sieves may not be required for a particular soil. The selection of the required
number of sieves is done to obtain a good particle size distribution curve. The sieves are stacked one over the
other, with decreasing size from the top to the bottom. Thus the sieve of the largest opening is kept at the
top. A lid or co..-er is placed at the top of the largest sieve. A receiver, known as pan, which has no opening,
is placed at the bottom of the smallest sieve.
(a) Dry Sieve Analysis-The soil sample is taken in suitable quantity. as given in Table 3.1, The larger
the particle size, the greater is the quantity of soil required.
The soil should be oven-dry. It should not contain any lump. If necessary, it should be pulverized. If the
soil contains organic matter, it can be taken air-dry inste..'1d of oven dry.
The sample is sieved through a 4.75 mm [S sieve. loe portion retained on the sieve is the gravel fraction
or plus 4.75 mm material. The gravel fraction is sieved through the set of
coarse sieves manually or using a mechanical shaker. Hand sieving is
nonnally done. The weight of soil retained on each sieve is obtained. 2·0mm
The minus 4.75 mm fraction is sieved through the set of fine sieves.
The sample is placed in the top sieve and the set of sieves is kept on a '·Omm
mechanical shaker (Fig. 3.1) and the machine is started. Nonnally, 10 GOOr
minutes of shaking is sufficient for most soils. The mass of soil retained
on each sieve and on pan is obtained to the nearest 0.1 gm. The mass of (. 25,..
the retained soil is checked against the original mass.
212 r-
Dry sieve analysis is suitable for c:ohesionlcss soils, with little or no
fines. If the sand is sieved in wet conditions. the surface tension may 150r-
cause a slight increase in the size of the particles and the particles smaller
than the aperture size may be retained on the sieve and. the results would 7S ~
be crroneol.1';.
Pan
Thble 3.1. Quantity of Soil for Sieve Anulysls
Maximum Size Quall/ily (kg) lSi ... ,ha'"
SOmm
ZOmrn
60
6.5
I
4.75 mm 0.5 Fig. 3.1. StackingoC Sieves.
PARnCLE S17.£ ANAlYSIS 47
(b) Wet Sieve Anulysis-Ir the soil contains a substuntial quantity (say. more than 5%) of fine particles,
a wet sieve analysis is required. All lumps arc broken into individual purticlcs. A representative soil sample
in the required quantity is taken, using a rimer. and dried in an oven. Tbe dried sample is taken in a tray and
soaked with water. If denocculalion is required. sodium hex.:,meta-phosphate, at the mte of 2 g per litre of
water, is added. lbc sample is stirred and left for a soaking period of at leas( one hour. '!be slurry is then
sieved through a 4.75 mm IS sieve, and washed with a jet of water. 1lle material retained on the sieve is the
gravel fraction. It is dried in an oven, and sieved through SCI of ~ sieves.
'llie material passing through 4.75 mm !iieve is sieved through a 75 1.1. sieve. The material is washed until
tile wash water becomes clear. 'Ibe material retained on the 75 1.1. sieve is collected and dried in an oven. It
is then sieved through the sel of fine sieves of the size 2 mm, 1 mm, 600 1.1., 425 1.1., 212 ~ 150 lA, and 75 IA.
The material retained on each sieve is oollCCled and weighed. The material that would have been retained on
pan is equal to the tOlal mass of soil minus the sum of the masses of material retained on all sieves.
Computation of I'ercentage Finer
For determination of the p.orticle si ...c distribution (:urve, percentage of particles finer than a p..or1icular size
is required. This om be found as under:
Let us consider the case when the sieving has been done through seven sieves, no I (coarsest) to no. 7
(fincst). Let the mass of soil retained on the....e sievC-I; be respectively. M I , M2 ... ,M7 , and the mass of soil
retained on the JXln (receiver) be Mil' The sum of all these masses is, obviously. equal to the tottll mass of
samplcM.
Eltprcsscd as percentage. the materials retained on the sieves and pan are
attained is known as terminal velocity. The expression for leonina! velocity can be obtained from the
equilibrium of the particle.
The drag force, F D • experienced by a sphere of radius r when it falls through a fluid of viscosity" is
given by
... (a)
where v is the velocity.
The other two forces acting on the sphere arc the weight (W) of the sphere and the buoyant force (U).
W .4/3 .? y, • 4/3 .? (p,g) ... (b)
where 1, is the unit weight of the material of sphere
and U. 4/3 .? y.' 4/3 '?(P.g) ... (e)
From equilibrium of [orces in vertical direction.
W .. U + PD
4/3lt?-y... 4/31try ... + 6 llTlrv
4/31t,3 gp, .. 4/31t,}gp ... + 61tTJTV
2 ,>
V- ":;:J(p,-p",)g
9
, • .l... gd'(G-I)p.
. .. (3.1)
18 ~
where D is the diameter of the sphere, G is the specific gravity of the material of sphere, and g is the
;)cceieration due to gravity.
If a spherical particle falls Ihrough a height Ht! centimeters in t minutes,
v .. He an/sec .. .(3.2)
60,
From Eqs. (3.1) and (3.2),
11, I gd'(G-I)P.
60t - 18 --~-- . .. (3.3)
..
3.
5.
0.006
0.002
0.001
51.36 mm
7.70 hr
JO.81 hr
wanned to a temperature nor. exceeding 60°C. Hydrogen peroxide causes oxidation of organic maHer and gas
is Ubernled. When no more gas comes out. the mixture is boiled to decompose the remaining hydrogen
peroxide. The mixture is then cooled.
(2) Calcium compounds in the soil arc removed by adding 0.2 N hydrochloric acid at the rate of 100 ml
for every 100 g of soil. When the reaction is oomplete, the mixture is filtered. The filtrate is washed with
distilled water until it is free from the acid. The damp soil on the filler is placed in a evaporating dish and
dried in an oven to constant mass.
3.6. THEORY OF SEDIMENTATION
AI the commenIXmenl of the sedimentation, the soil particles arc unifoonly dispersed throughout the
suspenSion, and the concentration of particles of different sizes is th~ same at all depths. After a lime period,
at a particular depth, only those particles remain which have nol settled. Because all particles of the same size
have the same velocity, the particles of a given size, if they exist at any level, are in the same concentration
as at the beginning of sedimentation. In other words., all particles smaller than a particular size D will be
present at a depth 1I~ in the same degree of concentration as at the beginning. All panicles larger than the
size D would have settled below that depth.
For illustration, let us assume that the soil is composed of particles of only three sizes, which have
terminal velocities in the ratio of 1:2:3. The three types of panicles. two at each level. are shown in the kfi
Level A A
Th
Level B B
t .1.
~. 2
S 2.
t
level C- C 7
00 0 0
h
Levctl 00
Levilli E E
+
1.
h
10
13
Jb
14
~~
15
V3 = 3 V1
V2 = 2 V,
7
10.J3.
5
00
S'g~g 6:9~~:5
(.) (b)
Fig. 3.2. Settlement of particles.
column, middle column and the right column in Fig., 3.2 (a). At the beginning of the sedimentation, the
concentration of particles is the same at all levels.
After some time, the particles take the position as shown in Fig. 3.2 (b). The particles of the smallest size
have settled to a depth h, those of the intermediate size and the largcst size to 2h and 3h, respectively. At
lever B-B, only the particles of the smallest size exist, and the concenlratjon of these particles is the same
as at the beginning, viz. 2 particles. At level C-C, the concentration of the particles of the smallest and
intermediate sizes is the same as at beginning. Likewise, at level D-D, the particles of all the three sizes
exist with the same concentration.
If mD is the mass of parCdes per ml of.suspcnsion at depth fie after time t, and m, is the mass of partida.
per ml of suspension at the beginning of sedimentation. the percentage finer than the size D is given by
N. !!'!.Q x 100 ... (3.6)
m.
The particle size D is detennined using Eq. 3.4(a).
PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS 51
0·995 _ -,
\·000 =0 Stem
1.005 = '5
B -.l."t1
1
--- B
I
H+~
B
TA
H,
B
L A
~
L
TlH
1
Bulb h TA
I
(0)
(0)
Fig. 3.4. Hydrometer Method
sedimentation, the specific gravity of suspension is uniform at all depths. When the sedimentation takes place,
thee larger particles settle more deept:r than the smaller oncs. This results in non-uniform specific gravity of
Ihe suspension at different depths. The.lower layers of the suspension have specific gravity greater than thai
of the upper layers.
Casagrande has shown that the hydrometer measures the specific gravity of suspension at a point
indicat~d by the centre of the immersed volume. If the volume of the stcm is neglected. the centre of the
immersed volume of the hydrometer is the same as the centre of the bulb. Thus, the hydrometer gives the
specific gravity of the suspension at the centre of the bulb.
PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS
"
(a) Calibration of hydrometer
To determine the depth al which the specific gravity is measured, calibration of the hydrometer is done.
The volume of the hydrometer, V", is fimt determined by immeming it in a graduated cylinder partly filled
with water and noting down the volume due to the rise in water level The volume of the hydrometer can also
be determined indirectly from its mass. The volume of hydrometer in ml is approximately equal 10 the mass
of hydrometer in grdms, assuming that the specifK: gravity of hydrometer is unity.
The depth of any layer A·A from the free surface 8-0 is lhe effective depth at which the specific gravity
is mca')ured by the hydrometer ((Fig. 3.4 (b)]. As soon as the hydrometer is inserted in the jar, the layer of
suspension whieh was at level A· A rises to the level A' -A', and that at level B· B rise to the level B' - B'.
TIle effective depth He is given by
where H = depth from the free surface B' - B' to the lowest mark on the stem,
h = height of bulb,
V" = volume of hydrometer,
A "" cross·sectional area of jar.
In Eq. (a), it has been assumed that the rise in suspension level from A -A to A' -A' at the centre of the
bulb is cqu.11 to half the total rise due to the volume of the hydrometer.
lbe markings on the hydrometer stem give the specific gravity of the suspension at the centre of the
bulb. The hydrometer readings are recorded after subtracting unity from the value of tlle specific gravity and
multiplying the remaining 1 BO
digit by 1000. Thus, a
~
specific gravity of 1.015 is
represented by a hydrometer
'SO
reading R,.of (1.015 - 1.000) x
1000 15. The
graduations on the right side k1I. 0
... (3.10)
ComJ:lQ!lite Correction-Inslcad of finding the corrections individually, it is convenienl to find one
composile correction. The composite correction (C) is the algebraic sum of all the corrections. Thus,
n.R,.C .. .(3.11)
The composite correction is found directly from the readings taken in a comparison cylinder, which has.
distilled waler and the dispersing agenl in the same concentrntion. and has the same temperature. As the
hydrometer has been calibrated at 27°C to indicate a specific gravity of 1.(X)J, the difference between the
reading taken at the top of meniscus and 1.(X)J is in magnitude equal 10 the composite oorrcct,ion. The
negative of the hydrometer reading in the comparison cylinder is equal LO the composite oorrection. The
composile correction can be positive or negative. For example. if the hydrometer reading is +2 (i.e. 1.002),
the correction is -2, and if the reading is -3 (Le. 0.997), the rorrection is +3.
The composite correction is found before the start of the test and at every 30 minute interval.
3.9. RELATION BETWEEN PERCENTAGE FINER AND IIYDROMETER READING
The corrected hydrometer reading R can be related to the percentage finer N than any size D as under:
Let M$ be the mass of dry soil in a sLl'>pension of volume V. At the commencement of the sedimentation,
the soil-water suspension is uniform, and. therefore, the mass of solids per unit voluQe of suspension at any
depth is M,!V.
The initial density of suspension is given by
M$ + mass of water in suspension
p;' V
The mass of water per unit volume of suspension can be detennined from the volume of water per unit
volume of suspension. as explained below.
M,
Mass of solids/volume of suspension ·v
M,
Volume of solidslvolume of suspension
• V(G P.)
-P ... M,
+-y (1- I)
0
or M,
p;.p..,+-y----c;- (G-I) ... (3.12)
If MD is tbe mass of solids in volume V at that depth after time t, Eq. 3.12 gives the density of
suspcru;ioo at that depth as
MD
po. P... + V (G-I)
----a- ... (3,13)
,. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
From Eq. 3.6, the percentage liner N than any size is given by
N- !!!Q)( 100
Ills
N ' m,
"'0 - """"iOO
where /liD" MolV and III, . AI/ V
lbereforc, Eq. 3.13 becomes
P-Pw" ~; (G~l)
N . (~) (p - Pw) x 100 ... (3.15)
G- I Ills
As the hydrometer reading R is cqUll1 to (P - P..,) It 1000. Eq. 3.15 can be written as
~100~
~ 80
~ 60
g 40
C
~ 20
&01.0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
- - Par ticle size (mm)
(a)
~1DO~
E 80
1l>60
~ 40
~ 20
& 0 .001
0
0.01 0.10 1.0 16.0
Particle size (mm)-
(b)
Fig. 3.7. Pnrlide Size Curve.
.18 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
leO 10 right, whereas in Fig. 3.7 (b), the particle size increases from left \0 right. Both the methods are
prclevant. The reader should carefully observe the horizontal scale of the particle size distribution curve. In
this lexl, tbe particle size distribution is shown as in Fig. 3.7 (b), i.e., the particle sizc i~ from left to
righI, which is also the usual convention. ,
The semi-log plol for the particle size distribution, as shown in Fig. 3.7, has lhe following advantages
over nalural plots.
(1) The soils of equal uniformity exhibit the same shape, irrespective of the adual particle si1.c.
(2) A<; the range of the particle sizes is very large, for better representation. a log scale is required.
Grading of Soils-The distribution of particles of differcOi sizes in a soil mass is called grading. The
grading of soils can be determined from the particle size distribution curves. Fig. 3.8 shows the patlicle size
distribution curves of different soils.
100
9<J I / ill I
~ "'c:.!~1l9~ VI
70
~Fio, rained V II
60 I "so,0..,. .I
50
Am f I I
uop grad
/
'" I ./
/0, j-cCXJrsegrOined
30
7lJ
~O
~O.oo'mm
__
I~
-f""" A,
y.--- L
_______
;f1fo-
.o.61'mm
UO
where D6fJ = particle size such that 60% of the soil is finer than this size, and
DIO = particle size such that 10% of the soil is finer than this size.
D IO size is also known as the effective size. In Fig. 3.8, Dw and DIO (or the soil B are, respectively. 0.08
=
m.m and 0.004 mm. Therefore, Cu 0.0810.004 20 =
The larger the numerical value of Cu. Ihe'more is Ihe range of particles. Soils wilh a value of C u less
PARTICLE SIZE ANALYSIS ,.
tban 2 are uniform soils. Sands with a value of C" of 6 or . more, are wcll·graded. Gravels with a value of
CIl of 4 or more are weU·graded.
The general shape of the particle size distribution curve is described by another coefficient lrnown as the
coefficient of curvature (Cc) or the coefficient of gradation (Cg ).
(D",l'
Cc • D(IJ x DIO ... (3.19)
where D)(J is the particle size corresponding 10 30% finer.
For a well-graded soil, the value of the coefficient of curvature lies between 1 and 3.
It may be noted that the gap grading of the soil cannot be detected by C" only. The value of C c is also
required to detect. it.
For the soil shown by curve B in Fig. 3.9. the particle size D:Jo is 0.025 mm. Therefore,
Cc - o.:·~~~~ . 1.95
particles arc highly compressible. These soils deform easily under SIHtic lo.'K1s, like dry leaves or loose papers in
a b~kcl subjected to a pressure. However, such soils arc relatively morc stable when subjected to vibrations.
The shape of tbe coarse-grained soils can be described in terms of sphericity, flatness or angularity.
Sphericity (S) of the particle is defined as
S. D,IL
wbere D.. is equivalent diameter of tbe particle assuming It to be a sphere, given by D.. - (6V/a)Vl, where V
is the volume of the particle and L is the length of the particle.
The particles with a high value of sphericity (more roundness) are easy [0 manipulate in construction and
their tendency to fracture is low.
Flatness (/') and elongation (E) are defined as
as F-BIT and E-LI8
where L. Band T are. respectively. length. widlh and thickness.
The higher the value of the flatness or the elongation. the morc is the tendency of the soil to fracture.
loe angularity (R) of a particle is defined as
R.. average radius of comers and edges
radius of maximum inscribed circle
Depending upon angUlarity. the panicles are qualitative ly divided into 5 shapes (Fig. 3.9).
00000
AnguLar Subangular Subrounded Rounded Will[ rounded
The angularity of particles has great influence on the behavior of marse-grained soils. The particles with
a high value of angularity lend to resist the displacement, but have more tendency for fracturing. On the o ther
hand, the particles with low angularity (more roundness) do not crush easily under loads. but have low
resistance to displacements as they have a tendency to roll. In general. the angular particles have good
engineering properties, such as shear strength.
3.15. RELATIVE DENSllY
The most important index aggregate propeny of a cohesionlcss soil is iLS relative density. 1lle engineering
properties of a mass of cohesionless soil depend to a large extenl on its relative density (D,). also known as
density index (Iv). The relative density is defined liS
... (3.20)
where emu = maximum void ratio of the soil in the loosest condition.
emin = minimum void ratio of the soil in the densest condition.
e = void ratio in the naturaL state.
The relative density of 3 soil gives a more clear idea of the denseness than does the void ratio. 1Wo types
of sands having the same void ratio may have entirely different state of denseness and engineering properties.
However, if the two sands have the same relative density. they usually behave in identical manner.
. 11lC relative density of a soil indicates how it woukl behave under loads. If the deposit is dense, it can
take heavy loads with very little settlements. Depending upon the relative density, the soils are generally
divided into 5 categories (Thble 3.3).
PARl'ICLE SIZE ANALYSIS 61
( b) (e)
(a)
Fig. 3.10
e.Gpw_1
Pd
Representing the dry density in the loosest, densest and natural oon<litions as Pm;"" PDl/lX and Pd , Eq. 3.20
becomes
GP __ ) _ (GP __ )
I I
( Pm,n Pd
D,- (GP__ ) _ (GP _ _ )
I I
Pm;n Pmruc
The maximum dry density is detennined either by the dry method or the weI method. In the dry method,
the mould is filled with thoroughly mixed oven-dry soil. A surcharge load is placed on the soil surface, and
the mould is fixed to a vibrntor deck. The specimen is vibrated for 8 minutes. 'Ibe mass and volume of the
soil in the compacted state are found. The m3:ltlmum dry density is given by
M.~
Pmu- --v;:-
where Mm11% = mass of dry soil and
V... = volume of mould.
The maximum dry density of a soil can be determined also in the saturated state. In this method. the
mould is filled with wet soil and water is added till a small quantity of free water accumulates on the free
surface of the soil. During and just after filling the mould. vibrntion is done for a total of six minutes. Water
appearing on the surface of soil is removed. A surcharge mass is placed on the soil and the mould is vibrated
again for 8 minutes. The volume (\1,;.) of the soil is determined. Ibe mass Mmnx of the soil is determined after
oven drying the sample.
Note. If the sand is vibrated under more severe conditions, it may have a relative density of more than
100%.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
lliustrallve Example 3.1. The results 0/ a sieve analysis 0/ a soil are given below:
lOtal mass 0/ sanlple = 900 gm.
IS Sieve Pan
Mnssofsoil
retained (gm) 75
Draw the partick size distribution cun.oe and hence determine the uniformity coefficient and lhe
coeffICient 0/ curvature.
Solution. The calQJlatioos for percentage finer N than different sizes are shown (fable 3.1).
Tuble E-3.1
IS M~, Percenlage Cumu/QJive Pereenlage
S;"" retained retailled perr:nuage Finer(N)
-~xlOO
mained = 100 - (4)
D60 1.55
From &j. 3.18 e.... D
10
.. 0.115 .. 13.48
C _ (D,,)2 _ ~ _ 1.58
From Eq. 3.19,
~ Doo X D 10 1.55 X 0.115
Illustrative Example 3.2. The following observations we~ IiJJren during a pipette analysis for the
determination of particle size distribution of a soil sample.
(a) Depth below the water surface at which the sample was taJcen = 100 mm
(b) Capacity of pipette = 10 ml
(c) Mass of sample when dried = 03 gm
Cd) Tune of talcing sample = 7 minutes after tM start.
(e) \-illume of soil suspension in the sedimentation tube = 500 mi.
if) Dry mass of soil used in making suspension = 25 gm.
Determine the e'"IOrdinate of the point on the particle size distribution curve corresponding to above
ooservlUWns.
Take G =
2.70 and =
TJ 10.09 miIlipoise. p ... = 1 gmlml
The coordinates of the point on the particie-size distribution curve are (0.0161 mm. 60%).
U1ustratlve Example 3.3. A dry sample of mass 50 gm is mixed with distilled water 10 p~pare a
64 SOlL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION BNGlNEERING
suspension of 1000 ml for hydrometer analysis. The reading of the hydrometer taken after 5 minutes was 25
and the depth of die centre of the bulb below the water surface when the hydrometer was in the jar was 150
"VII. The vollmll! of me hydrometer was 62 1111 and lhe area of cross-section of the jar was 55 cm 2. Assuming
G :: 2.68 and'l1 = 9.81 miflipoise, determine lhe coordinates of the point corresponding IfJ above observation.
Solullon. 1be depth between levels B' -B' and A' -A' in Fig. 3.4, is given to be 150 mm. The effective
deplh between B - B and A - A is given by.
.. YO.3981x 9.81(2.68-1.0)
x 10'-3 x 14.436 .. 00023
x 5 . x an
.. 0023
• rnm
2.68)
.. ( 1.68 x --.so
1000
x
25
1000 )( 100 or N- 79.76
The coordinates of the point on the particle-size distribution curve are (0.023 mm, 79.76%).
lIIustrative Example 3.4. A soil has a dry del1sity 0/1.816 gm/ml in the MturaJ corulition. When 410
gm 0/ the soil was poUTed il1 a vessel in a very loose stale, its volume was 290 mi. The same soil when
vibrated and compacted was found to have a volwlle of 215 mI. Determine the relative density.
M 410
Solution. From Eq. 3.22, Pmin" V. ..
m ;"
290 - 1.414 gm/ml
Illustrative Example 3.5. A test lor the relative density 0/ soil il1 place was performed by digging a
small hole in ule soil. The volume of ule hole was 400 ml and ule moist weight O/Ihe excovated soil was 9
N. A/ter oven drying, the weight was 7.8 N. 0/ the dried soil, 4 N was poured into a vessel in a very loose
state, and its volume was found to be 270 mi. The same weight 0/ soil when vibrated and tamped had a
volume of 200 mI. Determine the relative density.
MI840 (MIIOCJO-MI1370)
.. MIlOOO MI840 MI1370 x 100
.. 0.6981 x 100 .. 69.81%.
filuslratlYe: Example 3.7. In order to find the relaJive density of a sand, a mould of volume 1000 ml was
used When the sand was dynamically compacted in the mould, its mass was 2.10 kg, whereas when the sand
was poured in loosely, its mass was 1.635 kg. If the in·situ density of the soil was 1.50 Mglm J• calculate the
relative density. G = 2.70. Assume thot the sand is saturated.
Now
or ernln .. 0545
likewise
2.70 + .~)
or 1.635 .. ~ x 1.0 or emu: .. 1.677
(
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
3.1. One kg of soil was sieved through a sel of 8 sieves. with the size 4.75 rom, 2.0 mm, 600 Il, 425 I-t. 300..... 212f.t,
ISOlA and 75j.l. The mass of soil retained on these sieves was found to be 50, 78, 90, 150, 160, 132, 148 and
179 gm, respectively. Determine the percentage finer than the corresponding sizes.
(AIlS. 995, 87.S , 78.2, 63.2, 47.2, 34.0, 19.2 and 1.]]
3.2. Prove Ihal the particle diameter and the terminal velocity of panicle are related as
v_9020d
where I' = velocity in an/sec,
D :, diameter in em
Oearly stale the various assumptions made.
33. Determine the maximum void rmio for II sand compa;ed of grains of spherical shapes.
(1I1nt Consider a cubical box of size al, where d is the diameter of sphere. The nunDer of pm in the box is 81
IAns. 0.911
3.4. The minimum and the maximum dry density of a sand were found to be 1.50 and 1.70 gmlml. CalculDte the dry
density corresponding \0 relative densities of 50% and 75%. fAns. 1.594 gmt1; 1.645 gmIm1]
3
3.5. An undisturbed sample of fine sand has II dry unit weight of 18 kN/m . At the maximum density. the void ratio
is 035, and that at the minimum defL~ity, 0.90. ()ctermine the relative density of the undisturbed soil. G = 2.65.
[Ans. 77.82%]
3.6. A coarse-grained soil is oompocted to a wet density of 2Mglm3 lit II WilIer coolenl of 15%. Determine the
relative density of the wmpoctcd sand. given emu _ 0.85 and em;n _ 0.40 and G _ 2.67.
fAns. 70%]
3 .7. How long would it take for 11 particle of soil 0.002 an in diameter 10 settle from the surface to the bottom of
2
the pond 15 m deep? Tllke G '" 2.60 and TJ '" 1.0 x 10-S gmf_seclcm _ [Ans. 11.72 hours]
3.8 A sample of soil of moss 40 gm is dispersed in 1000 mI of water. How long after the commencement of
scdimentntion should the hydrometer reading be IIIken in order to estimate the percentage of particles less than
0.002 mm effective dillJ1)Cter ? 1be centre of the bulb is at an effective depth of 20 em below the surface of
water. Thke G ;; 2.70, TJ '" 0.01 poise. tAns. 14.99 hoursJ
3_9_ In a sedimentation test, 25 gm of soil was dispersed in 1000 mI of water (TJ '" 0.01 poise). Doe hour after the
commencement of sedimentation, 25 ml of the suspension Wll') IIIken by means of a pipette from a depth of 10
em. The mass of solid pDrticles oblllined on drying was 0.09 g. Determine
(a) 1be largest size of the particle remai ning in suspension al a depth of 10 an after one hour of the beginni ng
of sedimentation.
(b) The percenlllge or particles finer than Ihis size in the original suspension.
(e) Tbe lime interval from tile commencement, after which the largest particle remaining in suspension al 10 an
depth is one-half of this size.
(Hint. Volume of suspension;; 1009.3 ml) [Ans. 0.0055 rnntj 14.53%; 4 bours]
3.10 The results of a sedimcnllltion test of a SIlmple P.!lSSing 75~ sieve are given below. Determine the grain size
distribution. Use approxima te formula v =- 9100 0 2. .
{Ans. Percentage finer than 0.075 mm, 0.0428 mm, 0 .0191 mm 0.0095 mm and 0.0017 nun,
respectively, 100%,60%, 40%, 20% and 2%J.
3.11 In a lesl 10 grn of fine-grained soil of specific gravity 2.70 was dispersed 10 make 500 mI of suspension. A
PAlmCLE SIZE ANALYSIS 67
sample of volume JO mI was taken by means 0( a pipette 9t a depth of 100 mm, 50 minutes after the
comrnenrement of sedimentation. The sample was dried in an oven. If the dry "taSS of the soil was 0.03 gm.
calculate the larga;t size of the particle remaining in the suspension at a depth of 100 mm and the percentage
of particles liner than this size in the original soil. 11 " 0.01 poise. IAns. 0.006 mm; 15%)
3.12. Ouring a scdirnentalion test for grain size analysis. the corncted hydrometer reading in a 1000 ml uniform soil
suspension al the cornmenoemem of sedimentation is 1.028. After 30 minutes, the corrected hydrometer reading
is 1.012, and the COCTesponding effective depth is 105 em. Determine (I) the IOtal mass of solids dispersed in
1000 mI of suspension, (;1) lbe portide size mrresponding 10 the 30 minute reading. and (iii) the percentage
fiDef than this size. TIIke G " 2.67 and 11 ,,0.01 poise. . (Aos. 44.77 gm; 0.00796 mm; 42.86%)
3.13. A dry soil sample is 49 8m in mass. It is composed of the following:
Particle size (mm) 0.05 0.02 0.01 O.OOt
Mass (8m) 20 18
The sample is mixed with enough water 10 make a uniform suspension of 1000 ml. Detennine
(I) The largest particle size at a depth of JO em after 5 minutes of the commenocment of sedimentation and the
specifie gravity of the suspension al that time III thut depth.
(i/) The time required for 1111 the pDrliclcs to scllie belcr.v 10 an depth. Thke G .. 2.70 lind 11 '" 9.81 millipoise.
[Ans.om mm; 1.014; 1.06 )( 10-5 seconds}
3.14, An air-dry soil sample weighing 2S kg was sieved in a laboratory. The results are given below.
15 Sieve (mm)
Mass rela;IIed
(.g) 0.08
Draw the grain size distribution curve and delenniile the coefficient of curvalure and the uniformity coefficient.
IAns. 1.15; 259J
3.15. A 1000 rnI suspension containing 30 gm of dry soil ~ prepared for a hydrometer analysis. If the temperalUfe
is the same as that at which it was allibrated, what whouJd be the hydrometer reading al the instant of
commencement of sedimenl.8tion ? Take G " 2.70. IAns. 1.019)
some particular water contenl. the soil becomes plastic (Fig. 4.1). l11e water content at which the soil chang~
from the liquid state to the plastic Slale is known as liquid limit (ll, w,), In other words, the liquid limit ~
the water content at which the soil ceases 10 be liquid.
The soil in the plastic stale can be moulded into various shapes. As the water content is reduced, tht
plasticity of the soil decreascs. Ultimately, the soil passes from the pla<>lic state to tbe semi~so1id state whet
it stops behaving as a plastic. It crocks when moulded. The water content at which the soil become!
semi-solid is known as the plastic limit (PL, wp ). In other words tbe plastic limit is the water content at wbicll
the soil just fails to behave plastically.
The numerical difference between the liquid limit and the plastic limit is known as plasticity inde"
(PI,I, ).
lbus PI - U - PL
'The soil remains plastic when lhe water content is between the liquid limit and the plastic limit. Th(
plasticity index is an imponant index property of fine-grained soils.
When the water content is reduced below the plastic limit, the soil attains a semi-solid state. The SOL
cracks when moulded. In the semi-solid stale, the volume of the soil decreases with a deaea<ie in wata
content till a stage is reached when further reduction of the water content does not cause any reduction in the!
volume of the soil. The soil is
said to have reached a solid
state: (In solids, 00 appreciable
change in volume is observed
with a change in water
cootent). The water content at
which the soil changes from
the semi-solid state to the solid
Cd) DIVIDeD SOIL CAKE BEFORE (el SOIL CAKE AFTER TEST
TEST
'{be soil in the cup is again mixed, and the tcst is repealed until two COflSeOJtivc tests give the same
number of blows. About 15 gm of soil near the closed groove is taken for water content determination.
The soil in the cup is tr.msfemxllo the dish containing the soil p8Sleatld mixed thoroughly after adding more
water. The soil sample is again taken in the cup of the Uquid limit device and the lest is repeated. The liquid limit
:~U:i~~~u~~~~ya~:~: 35,--------.-__-._,--.-"-.-rn
now when the device is given
25 blows. As it isdifficull to gel 30 ~
exactly 25 blows for the sample
10flow, the test is conducted at
different water contents so as to
gel blows in the range of 10 to 25
40. A plot is made between the ~
I
/i}.r--
Wilier content as ordinate and ~
... [4.1(0)]
where = water content of the soil when the groove closes in N blows.
wN
n = an index, as given below.
According 10 IS : 272D-V, for soils with liqUid limit less than 50%, the value of n is equal to 0.092 and
for soils with liquid limit greater than 50%, the value of n c 0.12. The acocpted range for N is 15 to 35 for
soils with liquid limit less than 50% and 20 to 30 for soils with liquid limit more than 50%.
Alternalively,
W, -
1.3215 _ 0.23 iogloN ... [4.I(b)]
Eq. 4.1 (a) can be written a<;
...(4.2)
where C is the correction fador.
PlASTICITY CHARACfERlsrlCS OF SOILS
"
The value of the factor is approximately 0.98 for N = 20 and 1.02 for N = 30.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 30.10 for the laboratory experiment)
4.4. CONE PENETROMETER METIIOD
The liquid limit of a soil can also be detennin(X! by Cone Penetrometer (IS : 2nO-V). It oonsists of a
stainless steel cone having an apex angle of 30 0 ;t; 10 and a length of 35 mm. The cone is fixed al the lower
end of a sliding rod which is fiued with a disc at its
lop (Fig. 4.5). The total mass of the cone, Sliding
rod and the disc is 80 g ;t; 0.05 g.
The soil sample is prepared as in the case of
the Casagrande method. The soil pat is placed in a
cup of 50 mm internal diameter and 50 mm height.
The cup is filled with the sample, taking care so as . Clomp
not to entrap air. Excess soil is removed and the
surface of the soil is levelled up.
The cup is placed below the cone, and the cone
is gradually lowered so as to just touch the surface
of the soil in the cup. The graduated scale is
adjusted to zero. The cone is released, and allowed
to penetrate the soil for 30 seconds. 100 water
content at which the penetrotion is 25 mm is the
liquid limit. Since it is difficult to obtain the
penetration of 25 mm exactly, liquid limit is
detennined from the equation given below.
W,. Wy + 0.01 (25 - y) (Wy + 15) ...(4.3) Fig. 4.5. Cone Penetrometer
where y (in mm) is the penetration when the water content is wy • and w, = liquid limit.
Eq. 4.3 is applicable provided the depth of penetration y is betweeo 20 to 30 mm. IT the penetration is oot in
this range, the soil in the cup is taken out, and the water content adjusled 10 get the required penetration.
A chart can also be drawn for direct determination for the liquid limit from the observed value of y and w,..
The shear strength of soil at liquid limit, as determined by tbis method, is about 1.76 kN/m2 which occurs
when the penetration is 25 mm.
The cone penetrometer method has several advaotages over the casagrande method.
(1) It is easier to perform.
(2) The method is applicable to a wide range of soils.
(3) The results are reliable. and do nol depend upon the judgment of the operator.
4.5. PLASTIC LIMIT
Plastic limil is the water content below which the soil stops behaving as a plastic material. II begins to
crumble when rolled into a thread of soil of 3 mm diameter. AI this water content, the soil loses its plasticity
and passes to a semi-solid state.
For determination of the plastic limit of a soil, it is air-dried and sieved through a 425 .... IS sieve. About
30 gm of soil is taken in an evaporating dish. It is mixed thoroughly with distilled water till it becomes
plastic and can be easily moulded with fingers.
About 10 gm of the plastic soil mass is. takeo in one band and a ball is formed. 'The ball is rolled with
fmgers 00 a glass plate 10 form a soil thread of uniform diameter (Fig. 4.6). The rate of rolling is kept about
80 to 90 strokes per minute. If the diameter of thread becomes smaller than 3 mm, without aack formation,
it shows that the water content is more than the plastic limit. The soil is kneaded further. 1ltis results io the
redudion of the waler content, as some water is evaporated due to the heat of the hand. 'The soil is re-rol1ed
74 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINHERINO
p'T~ii-:rr;~~~-~~-'-~""""-
1%}tiII11'~ll'
Stage 1
(e)
Stage II
(b)
Stoge II r
(c)
Fig. 4.7. Stages ror Derivation of Shrinkage Umil.
the oondition when the soil sample bas been ovendried. The total volume V] in Fig. 4.7 (c) is the same as the
lotal volume V1 in Fig. 4.7 (b). The throe figures indicate, respectively, stage I, II and m.
Let M~ be the mass of solids.
Mass of water in stage I - Ml -M,
loss of mass of water from stage I to stage II - (VI - Vv
p ...
Mass of water in stage n - (MJ - M,) - (VI - Vi) p...
From definition, shrinkage limit '" water content in stage II
(MI - M,) - (VI - V,)P.
w, • M, ... (4.5)
P[ASI'lCITY CHARACfERI5nCS OF SOILS 75
(V, - V:z)
or w. - wI - ~ P... •..(4.6)
where wI represents the water content in stage [.
For determination of the shrinkage limit in the laboratory. about 50 gm of soil passing a 425 Il sieve is
laken and mixed with distilled water to make a aeamy paste. The waler content (wI) of the soil is kept
greater then the liquid limit.
A cirallar shrinkage dish, made of porcelain or stainless steel and having a diameter 30 to 40 mm and a
height of 15 mm, is taken. The shrinkage dish has a flat bottom and has its intemal comers well rounded. The
capacity of the shrinkage dish is first determined by fllling it with mercury. The shrinkage dish Is placed in
a large porcelain evaporating dish and filled with mcccury. Excess merrury is removed by pressing a plain
glass plate fumly over the top of the shrinkage dish. The mass of mercury is the shrinkage dish is obtained
by transferring the mcccw-y into a mercury weighing dish. The capacity of the shrinkage dish in ml is equal
to the mass of mercury in gm divided by the specific gravity of mercury (usually, taken as 13.6).
The imide surface of the empty shrinkage dish is mated with a Ihin layer of vaseline or silicon grease.
The mass of empty shrinkage dish is obtained aa:urately. 111e soil sample is placed in the shrinkage dish,
about one-third its capacity. The dish is tapped on a firm surface to ensure that no air is entrapped. More soil
is added and the tapping continued till the dish is completely filled with soil. The excess soil is removed by
striking off the top surface with a straight edge. The mass of the shrinkage dish with soil is taken to obtain
lbc mass (Mt,) of the soil. 1be volume of the soil VI is equal 10 the capacity of the dish.
The soil in the shrinkage dish is allowed to dry in air unlil the oolour of the soil pal turns light. It is then
dried in a oven. The mass of the shrinkage dish with dry soil is taken to obtain the mass of dry soil M •.
For determination of the volume of the dry pat, a glass OJP, about 50 mm diameter and 25 mm height, r.
taken and placed in a large dish. The OJp is filled with mercury. 'The excess mercury is removed by pn=ssing a
glass plate with three prongs firmly over
the top of the cup. Any mercury
adhering on the side of the alp is wiped
off, and the OJp full of mercury is
transferred to another large dish.
The dry pat of the soil is removed
from the shrinkage dish, and placed on
tbe surface of the mercury in the OJp
and submerged inlO il by pressing il
with the gl<M plate having prongs (Fig.
4.8). The mercury displaced by the soil .
pat is transferred to a mercury weighing Fig. 4.8. DeICtlllll\8tlon of VoIwnc of dry pal.
dish and weighed. 1be volume of the mercury is determined from its mass and specific gravity. The volume
of the dry pat Vd is equal to the volume of the mercury displaced. Of course, the volume V1 in sUlge II is
also equal to V".
The shrinkage limit of the soil is detenniOC(l, using Eq. 45, from the measured values of
VI' V2 ,M1 andM•.
(See Olapter 30, Sea. 30.12 for the laboratory experiment).
4.7. ALTERNATIVE ME11IOD FOR DETERMINATION OF SIIRINKAGE LIMIT
The shrinkage limit of a soil can be determined by an alternative method if the specific gravity of solid
particles (G) is known or is determined separately. An expression for shrinkage limit in terms of the specific
gravity of solids can be developed from Fig. 4.7 (b). At that stage, the water 'oonteOI is al the shrinkage limit,
given by,
(V, - V,)P.
w·--- -.--
M
. •.(4.7)
where V. is the volume of solids.
76 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
V, V,] p...
Eq. 4.7 can be written as W, - [Ii; - Gp ... (V,)
.. _ [V'P. _
, M,
l]
G
... (4.8)
.. . M,
Now, from the defimtlon of the dry mass densIty, Pd" v;-
Therefore, w, .. (~ - ~ ) ... (4.9)
Eq. 4.8 can be used for the delennination of the shrinkage limit, as explained below.
A smooth, round-edge(! pal of wet soil is made in a shrinkage dish. It is then dried in an oven and cooled
in a dcssicalor. Any dust on the sample is brushed off. The dry mass Ms of the sample is delennined.
The volume Vz of the dry soil pal is obtained by placing it in a glass cup and delcnnining the
displacement of mercury, as discussed in Sea. 4.6.
Determination of Specific Gravity of 80Uds rr.om Shrlnkage Urnit
L Method-The specific gravity of solids (G) can be delennined using Eq. 4.8 if the Shrinkage limit has
already been determined.
From Eq. 4.8,
G - (V'P,.l~,) ..,
... [4.10(.)J
Sometimes, Eq. 4.9 is written in tenns of mass specific gravity (G".) in dried slale. Thking Girl" p/p""
V, _ .!!:....
Gp.
...(0)
Also, the volume of solid can be detennined from the volume VI in Fig. 4.7(a) (stage I) as
V~ - VI - volume of water
V _ VI _ (M} - M,)
, p• ... (b)
(V,- V,)P.
WI-W2"~
Therefore, SR_~
VdP",
SR .. ~ .. G. . .. (4.15)
Thus the shrikage rntio is equal to the mass gravity of the soil in dry state (Gift).
From &po 4.9 and 4.15, tbe shrinkage limit.
w_(-"-_.!.)
• S.R. G
••.[4.15(0)J
(3) Volumetric Shrinkage-The volumetric shrinkage (VS). or volumetric change, is defined as tbe
change in volume expressed as a percentage of the dry volume when the water mnlen! is reduced from a
given value of the shrinkage limit. Thll'>
\IS..
V,-V,) )(
(----v;- 100 ... (4.16)
In Eq. 4.19, it has been assumed that the length of the spedmen in oven-dried state is the same as that
at the shrinkage limit.
78 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
1be linear shrinkage may also be obtained from the volwnetric shrinkage (VS) as under.
Toughness index of a soil is a measure of the shearing Stralgth of the soil at the plastic limit. This can
be proved as under:
Let us assume that the flow curve is a straight Une between the Uquid limit and the plastic limit. As the
shearing resistance of the soil is direcUy proportional to .the number of blows in Casagrande's devi~
k SI _ NI ... (a)
aDd k S, _ H, ... (b)
where HI ::: number of blows at the liquid limit when the shear strenglb is SI
Np ::: number of blows at th~ plastic limit when the shear strellgth is Sp
k::: constan.l.
80 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
3. 50-75
"'I
Medium (Firm) 50-100 Thumb can be pressed with
1"=""
4 .. Stiff 75-100 100-200 Thumb can be pressed wilh
great difficulty
5. Vel)' stiff > 100 200-400 The "'I ao. be readily
indented with thumb nail
6. "Old > 100 >400 The soil ao. be indented
with difficulty by thumb nail
pL\SfICn-V CHARACTERlsrlCS OF SOILS '81
4.13. SENSmVITY
A cohesive soil in its natural state of occurrence has a certain structure (see chapter 6). When the
structure is disturbed, the soil becomes remoulded. and its engirieering properties dlange considerably.
Sensitivity (S,) of a soil indicates its weakening due to remoulding. It is defined as the ratio of the undisturbed
strength to the remoulded strength at the same water content.
S • (q,,).
. .. (4.28)
, (q.),
where (q,,).. = unconfined compressive strength of undisturbed clay
=
(q..). unconfined compressive strength of remoulded clay.
Depending upon sensitivity, the soils can be classified into six types, as given in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2. Classification or Soils based on SensitIvity
S.No. Sellsitivity Soil Type
1. < 1.00 Insensitive
2. 1.0-2.0 Little sensitive
3. 2.0-4.00 Moderately sensitive
4. 4.0-8.00 Sen.'!itive
5. 8.0-16.0 EXIra sensitive
6. > 16.0 Quick
For most days, sensitivity lies between 2 and 4. Clays considered sensitive have S, values between 4 and
8. In C$e of sensitive clays, remoulding causes a large reduction in strength. Quick clays are unstable. These
tum into slurry when remoulded.
High sensitivity in clays is due to a weU-developed flocculent structure which is disturbed when the soil
is remoulded. High sensitivity may also be due to leaching of soft glacial clays deposited in salt water and
subsequenUy uplifted.
Extra-sensitive day, such as clays of Mexico city, are generally derived from the decomposition of
volcanic ash.
4.13. mIXOTROPY
The word Thixotropy is derived from two words : tl!ixis meaning touch, and tropo. meaning to change.
Therefore, thixotropy means any dlange that occurs by touch.
The loss of strength· of a soil due to remoulding is partly due to change in the soil structure and partly
due to disturbance caused to water thplecules in the adsorbed layer. Some of lhese changes are reversible. If
a remoulded soil is allowed to staM, 'filhout loss of water, it may regain some of its lost strength. In soil
engineering, this gain in strength of ute soil with passage of time after it has been remoulded is called
thixotropy. It is mainly due 10 a gradual itprientation of molecules of water in the adsorbed water layer and
due to re-establisbment of chemical equilibfi!.im.
driV~~~!ro~~~.~ 1!s°~l=tQ;::~~rt:':is~~~~enc!=~n~i:~t~~~mi~:ica~::noc:wp~:!
sbear strength will be regained after the pile hm been driven and left in place for some time.
4.14. ACIlVITY OF SOllS
Activity (A) of a soil is the ratio of the plaslicity index and the percentage of clay fraction (minus 2,",
sjze). Thus
... (4.29)
wbere lp = plasticity index, F = clay fraction.
The clay fraction F is percentage finer than 21-1 size.
The amount of water is a soil mass depends upon .the type of clay mineral present. Activity is a measure
82 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
of the water·holding capacity of cl.•'1yey soils. The changes in the volume of a clayey soil during swelling or
shrinkage depend upon the activity.
A number of samples of a particular soil arc taken and their plasticity index and clay fraction determined.
If a plot is obtained between the clay fradion (as abscissa) and the plastit.ity index (as ordinate). it is
observed that all the points for a particular soil lie on a straight line (Fig. 4.10).
eo
I
~ 60
1.0
~
"
n:
20
(Z) II\lte
(3) Mon\omorillonitl;?;
40
Clay fra c t'lon (m i nus 2 r-)
Fig. 4.10. ActiYity of Soils.
The slope of the line gives the activity of soil. The steeper the slope, the greater is the activity. TIle lines
with different slopes are obtained for different soils.
The soils containing the clay mineral montmorillonite have very high activity (A > 4). The soil containing
the mineral kaolinite are least active (A < 1). whereas the soils oontaining the mineral illite arc moderately
active (A = 1 to 2). Depending upon activity, the soils are classified into three types (Table 4.3).
Tobie 4.3 Clas.<;ification of Soils Based on Activity
S. No. Activity Soil type
1. A < 0.75 Inactive
2. A::: 0 .75 to 1.25 Normal
3. A> 1.25 Active
Activity gives information about the type and effect of clay mineral in a soil. The following two points
are worth noting:
(1) For a soil of specific origin, the activity is constant. 1be plasticity index increases as .the amount of
clay fraction increases.
(2) Highly active minerals, such as montmorillonite,. can produce a large increase in the plasticity index
even when present in small quantity.
4.15. USES OF CONSISTENCY LIMITS
The consistency limits are detemlined fo r remoulded soils. However the Shrinkage limit can also be
obtained for the undisturbed sample. Since the actual behavior of a soil depends upon its natural structure, the
consistency limits do not give complete information about the in-situ soils. lbey give at best a rough estimate
about the behaviour of in-situ soils. .
Although it is not possible 10 interprete the consistency limits and other plasticity characteristics in
fundamental terms, yet these parameters are of great practical use as index properties of [ine-grained soils.
The engineering propenies of such soils can be empirically related to these index properties as under.
(1) It has been found that both the liquid and plastic limits depend upon the type and amount of clay in
84 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
30
I"
'E26
2s mm •
..:: 21. --- - - - - - - - - - ---
!:?22
~ 20
~ 18
~ 16
u" ,
:W(. S8'O Of..
"~~--<51'---5~1---'~~--'5"'--~55~-'5~6-'-'~--~5;S~-o59'---6""O
Water cont1!llt_
Fig. E-4.3.
PLAsnCITY CHARACTF.¥ISfICS OF SOIL') 85
U1ustrative Example 4.4. A sample of clay has the liquid limit and the shrinlwge limit of, respectively,
60% and 25%. If the sample has a volume of 10 ml at the liquid limit, and a volume of 6.40 ml at the
shrinXcge limit, determine the specific gravity of solids.
Solution. Let Ms be the mass of solids, in gm.
lbcrefore, mass of waler 81 the liquid limit = 0.6 Ms
and mass of water at Ihe shrinkage limil = 0.25 M,
Mass of waler losl belween the liquid lirnil
and the shrinkage limit = (0.6 - 0.25) Ms = 0.35 M,
RC<luaion in volume = 0.35 M, ml
BUI aClual reduction in volume = =
10.0 - 6.40 3.60 ml
Therefore, 0.35 Ms = 3.60 or M. = 10.29 gm
Thus, the mass of water at the shrinkage limit
- 0.25 x 10.29 = 2.57 gm
Volume of water al the shrinkage limit = 2.57 ml
Volume of solid particles, V, = 6.40 - 2.57 :::: 3.83 m
29
Therefore, specific gravity of solids, G.. M,V • '3°83
. - 2.69
. p"" .
Alternatively, directly from Eq. 4.10 (a),
• 5.6,O.~.35 .0.1147(11.47%)
V1- Vd
At liquid limit, \IS .. ----v;- )( 100 .. 44
VI
~_ 0.44 + 1.0. 1.44
86 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Vp .. 1.29 Vd .. .(b)
Let the volume at liquid limit, VI. be 1.0 ml.
From Eq. (0), Vd:::: volume at shrinkage limit:: 0.694 rol
From Eq. (b), Vp = volume at plastic limit = 0.895 mt
Volume
Fig. E4.6
From Fig. E 4.6 by proportion,
W,-W, ~
0.47 - w, 033 - W,
---0:306 - o:wt
w, _ 0.06 (6.0%)
Illustrative Example 4.7. The following index properties were determined for two soils A and B.
Index property A B
Liquid limit 65 35
Plastic limit 25 20
Wateroonlcnt 35 25
Sp. gr. of solids 2.70 2.65
Degree of saturation 100% 100%
Which of he two soils (i) contains more clay particles, (ii) has a greater bulk density. (iii» has a grtXlter
dry density. (iv) has a greater void ratio ?
PLASTICITY CIIARJ\CI'ERlSfICS OF SOILS 87
Solution.
S. No. saIL A SOIL E
Plasticity index
65-2.'1 = 40% 35-20 = 15%
PI .. w/-wp
2. Void ratio
0.35 x 2.7 .. 0.945 0.25 x 2.65 .. 0.663
e - wG
3. Dry density
Q.l!!! 2·~.;4~·0 .. l.388g/ml 2.6i.e::31.0 _ 1.594 g/m l
P4" 1 +e
4. Bulk density
p .. pd(l +w) 1.388 x 1.35 .. 1.874 glml 1.594 x 1.25 .. 1.992 glml
As lhe plasticiLY index: of soil A is more Ih.m thm of soi l B, [I has more clay particles.
I'ROBLEMS
A, Numericul
4.1. The consistency limits of a soil sample are:
Liquid limit '" 52%
Plastic limit '" 32%
Shrinkage limit '" 17%
If the specimen of this soil shrinks from a volume of 10 cm} at liquid limit to 6.01 an} at the shrinkage limit,
calculate the specific gravity of solids. [Ans. 2.8OJ
4.2. A cone penetcmion test was carried out o n a sample of soil with the fol lowing results:
4.13. What arc uses of (.:nnsislcncy lirnits'! Wh.ll nrc their limitations '!
4.14. Differcntime belwt,.'Cn:
(a) Liquidity index and cunsistency index.
(b) Flow index and toughness index.
(el Plasticity and consistency.
(d) Activily and sensitivil),.
4.15. State whether the following S(alernCnl~ nre true of false.
(a) All the consistency limils Me determined fur the soil in distu rbed condition.
(b) The liq uidity index cannot be more th:rn 100%.
(e) The consistency index C:lll be neg'lIive.
(d) Plastic limit is the water content of soil which represents the boundary between the plastic state and the
semi·S(llid slate
(e) Al shrinkage limit, the soil is fully saturated.
(fJ The activity of a day minenll is a con~tanl.
(g) The soils with son consist!!ncy hav<!- high strength.
(II) The soils with a dispersed structure hav!! a high sensitivity. tAns. True, (el. (il), (e), (f)]
C. Multiple-Choice Questions
1. At shrinknge limit, the soil is
(u) Dry (b) Partially ~aturiltcd
(c) Satur;\ted (d) None of ahove
2. The shrinkage index is equal to
(al Liquid limit minus plastic li mit.
(b) Liquid limit minus shrinkage limit.
(e) Plastit limit minus shrinkage limit.
(d) None of ilbovc.
3. Toughness index of a soil is the nltio of
tIl) Plasticity index to the !low index.
(b) Liquidity index to the now index.
(e) Co nsistency index 10 the now inUex.
(d) Shrinkage index to the !low index.
4. A stiffelay has a consistency inde x of
(a) 50--75 (b) 75- 100
(el Greater than 100 (d) Less than 50
5. The plasticity index of a highly plastic soil is about
(al 10-20 (b) 20-40
(el Grater th~ln 40 (d) Less than 10
6. The activity of the mineral mon tmorillonite is
(n) Less than 0.75 (h) Between 0.75 and 1.25
(e) Bctwcl:n 1.25 and 4 (d) Greater than 4
7. A soil sample has LL = 45%, PL'" 25% and SL "" 15%.
For a natural water conten1 of 30%, th e consistency index will be
(/1)75% (bl50%
(c) 40% (ll) 25%
H. For the soil wilh LL = 45%. PL :0 25% and ~h '" 15%, Ihe plasticity inu<:lx is
(/I) 50% (b) 20%
(c) 60% (if) 40%
IG
5
Ih, Soil Classification
5.1. INTRODUCTION
(1)1 Soil classification is the arrangement of soils into different groups such thai the soils in a panicular group
have similar behaviour. It i.. a sort of labelling of soils with different labels. M there is a wide variety of soils
covering earth, it is desirable 10 systematize or classify the soils into broad groups of similar behaviour. It is
more convenient to study the behaviour of groups than Ibm of individual soils. Cla<;sification of various
commodities and species is also oommon in many other disciplines. For example, a chemist classifies the
chemicals into various groups, and a zoologiSt classifies the specic~ into a number of groups. likeWise. a
geotechnical engineer classifies the soils into various groups.
For a soil classification system to be useful to the geotechnical engineers, it should have lbe following
basic requirements:
(I) It should have a limited number of groups.
(2) It shouk! be based on the engineering properties which are most relevanl for the purpose for which
the classification has been made.
(3) It should be simple and should use the tenns which are easily un<icrstood.
Most of the classification systems developed satisfy the above requirements.
A geotechnical engineer is interested to know the suitability or otherwise of a soil as a foundauon or a
construction material. For complete knowledge. all the engineering properties are determined afier oonducling
a large number of tests. However. an approximate assessment of the engineering properties can be obtained
from the index properties afier conducting only classification tests, as diSOJssed in chaplers 3 and 4. A soil is
classified according to index properties, such as panicle size and plasticity characteristics.
If the classification of a soil has been done acrording to some standard classification system, its
properties and behaviour can be estimated based on the experience gained from similar soils elsewhere. A
classification system thus provides a common language between engineers dealing with soils. II is useful in
exchange of infonnatioo and experience between the geotOChnical engincen;. For example, if a soil has been
c1assifJed as SW according 10 Unified Soil QassifJC3tion system, tbe geotechnical engineer anywhere in the
world would know Ibal the soil is well graded sand, is quite pervious. has low compressibility and high shear
strength. All Ibis information is exchanged only in two letlers SW.
It may be mentioned that soil classification is no substitute for exact analysis based on engineering
properties. For fmal design of large slruclures, the rogineering properties should be determined by conducting
clabomlc tests on undisturbed samples.
[Note. The soil classification system can be likened to classification of human beings into 12 zodiac signs
(b)1 done by an astrologer. Although general behaviour of a human being under a particular zodiac sign can be
estimated from his zodiac sign, for oomplete prediction, his delailed horoscope. is required].
5.2. PARTICLE SIZE ClASSIFICATION
The size of individual particles has an important influena: on the behaviour of soils. It is not surprising
90 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
that the first classification of soils was based on Ihe panicle size. It is a general practice to classify Ihe soils
into four brood groups. namely, grnve~ sand, silt sizc and clay size. While classifying the fine grained soils
on the ba<>is of particle size, it is a good prllctice to write Sill size and clay size and not just silt and Clay. In
general usage, the terms silt and clay arc used to denote Ihe soils that exhibit plasticity and cohesion over a
wide range of water content. The soi l with clay-si7.c particles may not exhibit the properties associated with
clays. For example, rocId1our has the particles of the size of the clay particles bul docs not possess plasticity.
H is classified as clay-size and not just clay in the particle size classification systems.
Any system of classification based only OD particle size may be misleading for fine-grained soils. The
behaviour of such soils depends on the plasticity characteristics and not on the particle size. However,
classification based on panicle siz.e is of immense value in the case of coarse-graincd soils, since the
behaviour of such soils depends mainly on the particle size.
Some of the classifi~tion system based on particle size alone are discussed below.
(1) MlT System-MIT system of cL1SSification of soils was developed by Prof. G. Gilboy at
Mass.'lChuseltcs Institute of Technology in USA. In this system, the soil is divided into four groups (Fig. 5.1 a).
(I) Gravel. particle size greater than 2 mm.
(it) Sand, particle size between 0.06 mm 10 2.0 mm.
(iii) Silt size, particle size between 0.002 mm to 0.06 mm.
(iv) Clay size, panicle size smaller than 0.002 mm (2~).
Boundaries between different types of soils corres!X>nd to limits when im!X>rtant changes occur in the soil
properties. 'The particles less than 2~ size arc generally colloidal fraction and behave as Clay. The soils with
panicle size smaller than 2~ are classified as cL'ly size.
The naked eye can see the the plIrticle size of about 0.06 mm and larger. The soils with particle size
smaller than 0.06 mm but larger than 21! are classified as silt-size. Important changes in the behaviour of soil
occur if particle size is larger than 0.06 mm when it behaves as cohesionlcss soiL
The boundary between gravcl and sand is abritrnrily kept as 2 mm. This is about the me of lead in the pencil.
The soils in sand and Sill-sizc-rangc are further subdivided into three categories: coarse (C). medium (M)
and fine (F), as shown in the figure. It may be nOled that MIT system uses only two integcffi 2 and 6. and is
ea<>y to remember.
(2) international Classlficalion System-The International Classification System was proposed for
general use at Ihe Intemational Soils Congress held as Washington in 1927. This cla<iSifiCalion system was
0.002
I 0.006
M
0.02
C I
0.06
I
02
M
0 .•
C I
2.0 mm
Gravel
(2_) legend
F:: Fine M:: Medium
(0) MIT System C:: Coarse
Ultra a,y Sill Mo g,,,,d
any Gravel
c c C M C VC
0.2 j.4 0.6 j.4 2_ 0.006 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 2.0mm
VC:: ·Verycoarse
(b) International Oassjfieation
Sm,'
Fine Medium
0.25
(e) U.S. Bureau of Soils Oassification
Fig. 5.1. OllSSifiCiltion Systems.
SOIL CLASSIFICATION 91
known as the Swedish classification system before it was adopted as InlermltionaJ system. However, the
system was not adopted by the United States.
In tbis system [Fig. 5.1 (b)1, in addition to sand, sill, and clay, a tenn mo has been used for soil particles
in the size range between sand and sill.
(3) U.s. Bureau of Soils Classification-This is one of the earliest classification systems developed in
1895 by U.S. Bureau of Soils (Fig. 5.1 (e)J. In this system, the soils below the size 0.005 mm are classified
as clay size in contrast to 0.002 mm size in other systems. 1be soils between 0.005 mm and 0.05 mm size
'a rt; classified as silt size. Sandy soils between the size 0.05 mm and 1.0 mm are subdivided into four
categories as very fmc, fine, medium and coarse sands. Fine gravels are in tbe size range of 1.0 to 2.0 mm.
5.3. TEXTURAL ClASSIFICATION
Texture means visual appearance of the surface of a material such as fabric or cloth. The visual
appearance of a soil is called its texture. The texture depends upon the panicle size, shape of particles and
gradation of particles. The textural classificaCton incorporates only the particle size, as il is dimwIt to
incorporate the other two parameters.
In fad, all the classification systems b~d on the particle size, as discussed in Sect. 5.2, are textural
classification systems. However, in soil engineering, the term textural classification is used rather in a
restricted sense. The triangular classification system suggested by U.S. Bureau of Public Roads in oommonly
known as the textural classification system (Fig. 5.2). lbe term texture is used to express tbe percentage of
the three constituents of soils, namely, 5.1nd, sill and clay.
0100
,
\
o ~>-CIQY
60~
\ \ p
\~
Silt
)0------------
/ Cloy
"
//
I
Silty toom
1000t--".---*"-""""""--;"";;____,~-"60;;----,)"'0----,:,"0- "'90,----,;;)">00
Silt ('/. )
(Size O.OOS to 0.05 mm)
fiB . .5.2. Textural cill85iftcalion System.
9' SOli.. MECHANICS AND FOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
According to the textural classification system, the percentages of sand (size 0.05 to 2.0 mm), silt (size
0.005 to 0.05 mm) and clay (size less than 0.005 mm) are plotted along the three sides of an equilateral
triangle. The equilateral triangle is divided into to zones, e.1ch zone indicates a type of soil. 1lle soil can be
classified by determining the zone in which it lics. A key is given that indicates the directions in which the
lines are to be drawn to locate the point. For example if a soil contains 30% sand and 20% silt and 50% clay,
it is shown by point (P) in the figure. The point falls in the zone labelled Clay. Therefore, the soil is classified
as clay.
'Ille textural classification system is useful for classifying soils consisting of different constituents. 'Ille
system assumes that the soil does not contain panicles larger than 2.0 mm size. However, if the soil contains
a certain percentage of soil particles larger than 2.0 mm, a correction is required in which the sum of the
percentages of sand, silt and clay is increased to 100%. For example, if a soil contains 20% particles of size
lager than 2 mm size, the actual sum of the percentages of sand, sill and clay particles is 80%. Let these be
respcaively 12, 24 and 44%. The corrected percentages would be obtained by multiplying with a factor of
l00/SO. Therefore, the corrected percentages are 15,30 and 55%. 1he textural c1assificatioo of the soil would
be done based on these corrected percentages.
In this system, the term loam is used to describe a mixture of sand, silt and clay panicles in various
proportions. The term loam originmed in agricultural engineering where the suitability of a soil is judged for
crops. The term is not used in soil
engineering. In order to eliminate the
term loam, the Mississipi River
Commission (USA) propC6td a
modified triangular diagram (Fig. 5.3).
'The term loam is replaced by soil
engineering tenns such as silty Clay.
The principal oomponent of a soil is
taken as a noun and the less prominent KEY
component as an adjective. For
example, silty clay contains mainly
particles of a clay, but some silt
particles are also present. It must be
noted that the primary soil type with
respect to behaviour is not necessarily
the soil type that constitutes the largest
part of the sample. For example, the
general character of a mixed soil is
determined by clay fraction ii it
exceeds 30%0-
Right Triangle Chart. Since the 1000;---;;:~~-''''':'---';;'-=--c;;;---;:'---;;;""
sum of the percenta'ges of sand, sill and
clay size particles is 100%, there is no SILT
need to plot all the three percentage.
The percentage of sand particles can be Fig. S.J. Modified Triangular Di~ram.
found by deduction from 100% the sum of percentages of sill and clay particles. It is possible t9 determine
the textural classification by locating the point of intersed.OO of lines representing silt and clay. as shown in
right.triangle chart (Fig. 5.4).
The right-triangle chart is more convenient than the conventional lriangular chart as it involves only
orthogonal arrangement of grid lines.
5.4. AASHTO CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Official (AASlITO) Oassification system is
SOtL CLASSIFICATION 93
Silt-clayMaJeria/s
Getleral Granular materials More than 35% passing No. 2()() Sieve
Classificalion (35% or less passing No. 200 Sieve (0.075 mm) (0.075 mm)
A---Z A-7
Group ~-;:i...--
A-3 A---4 A-5 A--<S ~
CltUSi{icarion A-l~ A-l-l> A---l-4] A----2-S[ A---.2--6j A---.?-7 A-7--6
(0) Sieve Analysis;
Percent Passing
(I) 2.00 mm (No. 10)
50 '""
I I I
(ii) 0.425 mm (No. 40) 3{) rna> '0.,., Simin
(ii,) 0.075 rnm (No. 200) 15"", 25 rna> 10 max I 3S max I 35 max I 35 max I 35 max I 36 min I 36 min I 36 min I 36 min
~="";:";'
(b) ~-~~
(,) Liquid limit 40 max
I 41 min
I 40 max
I 41 min 40 mal[
I 41 min 40 max
I 41 min
l'lF
~
<ii) Plasticity index 6 max N.P. 10 max 10 max 11 min 11 min 10 max 10 max 11 min 11 min· g:
(e) Usual types of Stooe Fragmenrs 3
signific8n1 Gravel and sand Fine Sand Silty or aayey Gravel Sand Silty Soils aayey Soils !A
ConsIituenl materials ~
(d) General rating as
subgrade. Excellent., Good Fair 10 Poor g~
~
• If plasticity index is equal 10 or less thaD (liquid Limit-30), the sal is A-7-5 (i.e. PL> 30%) ~
If plasticity index is greater than (I.iquid limil-30), the sojl is A-7---6 (i.e. PL < 30%) 0
z
~
~
~
SOIL ClASSIFICATION .,
5.5. UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
The Unified Soil Classification System (USC) was rlrst developed by Casagrande in 1948. and later, in
1952, was modified by the Bureau of Reclamation nnd the Corps of Engineers of the United States of
America. The system has also been adopted by Americ.1n Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). 1ne system
is the most popular system for usc in all types of enginccring problems involving soils. The various symbols
used are given in Table 5.2.
Tuble S.2. Symbols used in USC System
Symbols Description
Primary G Gravel
S Sao"
M Silt (Symbolh M obtained from the
Swcdis word 'mo')
c ao,
o OrganiC
p, poo,
Secondary w Well.graded
P Poorly graded
M Non-plastiC fines
C Plastic fines
L Low Plasticity
High plasticity
The system uses both the panicle size analysis and plasticity charaderistics of soils, like AASHfO
system. In this system, the soils are classified into 15 groups (Thble 5.3). The soils are first cmssiried into two
categories.
(I) Coarse-grained soils-If more than 50% of the soil is retainOO 01] No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve, it is
designated as coarse--graincd soil. There are 8 groups of coarse--grained soils.
(2) Fine-grained soils-U more than 50% of the soil passes No. 200 sieve, it is called fine-grained soil.
There are 6 groups of fmc*grained soils.
1. Coarsc_grnined Soils-The coarse-grained soil., are designated a'i gravel (G) if 50% or more of coarse
fraction (Plus 0.075 mm) is retained on No.4 (4.75 mm) s ieve; otherwise it is termed sand (S).
If the coarse--graincd soils contains less than 5% fines and are well-grnded (W), they are given the
symbols GW and SW, and if poorly graded (P). symbols GP and SP_ The criteria for well·grading are given
in Table 5.3. If the coarsc*grnined soils contain more than 12% fines. these are designated as GM, Ge, SM
Of SC, as per aiteria given. If the percentage of fines is between 5 to 12% dual symbols such as GW-GM,
SP-SM, are used.
Z. Fine-grained Soils-Fine-grained soils are further divided into two types . (1) Soils of low
compressibility (L) if the liquid limit is 50% or less. These are given the symbols ML, CL and OL. (2) Soils
of high compressibility (ff) if the liquid limit is more than 50%. These are given the symbols MIl, CII and
OIl. The exact type of the soil is determined from the plasticity chart (Fig. 55). The A·line has the equation
" = 0.73 (w,- 20). II scparntes the days from silts. When the plasticity index and the liquid limit plot in tbe
hatched paction of the plasticity chan, the soil is given double symbol CL- ML.
The inorganiC soil ML and Mil and the organic soils OL, OH plot in the same zones of the plasticity chart.
The distinction between the inorganic and organic soiis is made by oven-drying. If oven drying dccrcnscs the
liquid limit by 30% or more, the soil is classified organic (OL or Off); otherwise, inorganic (ML or MIl)
Highly Organic Soils-Highly organic soils are identified by visual inSpection. These soils are termoo
p"',(P,).
~:i
Coarsc-Graincd Gravel (50% or a"" grovels C~-1Io3
Soils. more of coarse Gravels Poorly graded Not meeting both criteria foc
IMorethan fraction retained GP gravels GW
50% retained on No.4 sieve
AlIcrbergumits Ancrberg
~
on No. 200 (4.75 mm)]
below A-line or Limits in
sieve (0.075 GM Silty grovels
plasticity index hatched area
mm))
e;~~
Gravels less than 4 GM-GC
with Auclberg Limits
fines ;.-il11 above A.Jine
GC Gayey gravels
::;g ~ and plasticity
index greater
Well-graded
~~~l thon?
ell :> 6
SW O_~'5 C~ _ I
$and [more thon Clean "','" to 3
50% ofooarse
faction passing
No.4 sieve
s.",,,,
SP
Poorly graded
"''''''
~~~
z~
NOI meeting both criteria for
SW
~ [".g>
below A-line or Limits in
SM Si[IY sands
plasticity index hatched area
So"", ,g~!1 [ less tban 4 SM-5C
~Hi!l
with Atlcrberg limilS
fines above A-line
SC Oayey sands
na~ and plasticily
index greater
~§:€£ than 7
Inorganic sillS
Fine grained Silts and clays Liquid ML of low
soils [50% 0< limit 50% or less plasticity
more passing Inorganic
No. 200 sieve dayso£low
(G.I175 mm)) CL 10 medium
Imaslicilv
Orgonicsills
OL or low
plasticity See Plasticity Chart (Fig. 55)
InorganlcsillS
SillS and days Liquid Mil of high
Limit greater than 50% plasticity
Inorganic
CH days of high
plasticity
Orgnnic clays
011 of medium of
high plasticity
Peat. muck
Highty organic Soils "'" oil""
" highly
organic soils
Visual-manual identification
SOIL CLASSIFICA110N 91
.. )0
Table 5-4 gives approximate equivalence in both the SystCffiS. If the soil has been classified according \0
onc system, its classification according \0 the other can be determined. However, the equivalence is only
approximate. For exact classification, the corresponding procedure should be used.
5.7. INDIAN STANDAIID CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Indian Standard Classification (Isq syslcm adopted by Bureau of Indian Standards is in many respects
simiLar \0 tbe Unified Soil Qassification (Usq system. However, there is one basic difference in llle
classification of fine-grnincd soils. The finc- grained soils in ISC system are subdivided into three categorics
of low, medium and high compressibility instead of two categories of low and high compressibility in USC
system. A brief oUlline of Qassif}cation and Identificalion of Soils for general enginccring purposes (1S:
1498- 1970) is given below. For romplete details, the reader should ronsult the code.
ISC system classifies the soils into 18 groups as per Tables 5.6 and 5.7.
Soils are divided into three brood divisions:
(1) Coarsc-grained soils, when 50% or more of the total materiaL by weight is retained on 75 microlllS
sieve.
(2) Fine-grained soils, when more than 50% of the total material passes 75 micron IS sicve.
(3) If the soil is highly organic and contains a Large percentage of organic matter and particles ct
decomposed vegctrltion, it is kept in a separate category marked as peat (P,),
In aU, there arc 18 groups of soils: 8 groups of coarse- grained, 9 groups of fine-grained and one of pea.
Basic soil components are given in Table 5.5. Symbols used arc the same as in USC system (fable 5.2).
•
,.,,~e
SC
S, 20
~
MH
'"
:~ 10
7 ------
MI
0'
OH
IS £ 4 ---- __
l-ML ML
0'
01
-.2(' Ol
00 10 20 30 J5 40 50 60 70 00
of liquid limit I"I) ',.
Fig. 5.6. PI~slicily Chart (ISC)
\. Coarse-grained &ils----Coarse-grained soils are subdivided inlo grovel and sand. lhc soil is termed
gfllvel (G) when more than 50% of coarse fraction (plus 75~) is retained on 4.75 mm IS sieve, and termed
sand (S) if morc than 50% of the coarse fraction is smaller Ihan 4.75 mm IS sieve. Coarse-grained soils are
further subdivided as given in Table 5.6 into 8 groups.
2. Fine-grained Soils---lbe fine-grained soils are fun her divided into three subdivisions, depending upon
the values of the liquid limit:
(0) Sills and clays of low compressibility-These soils have a liquid limit less than 35 (represented by
ge
symbol L).
(b) Sills and clays of medium comprcssibility-These soils have a liquid limit greater than 35 but less
g' than 50 (represented by symbol I).
IS
(c) SUts and Clays of high compressibility-These soils have a liquid limit greater th<m 50 (represented
by symbol 1-1).
30 Fine-grained soils are further subdivided. in 9 groups as given in T:lble 5.7.
5.8. nOUNDARY CLASSIFICATIONS
Sometimes, it is not possible to Classify a soil into anyone of 18 groups discussed above. A soil may
75 possess characteristics of two groups, either in particle size distribution or in plasticity. For such C.1SCS,
boundary classifications occur and dual symbolS arc used.
(a) Boundary classification for coarse-grained soils
The following boundary classification can occur:
(I) Boundary classifications within gravel group or sand group can occur. The following classification
'Y are common.
'"
~. GW--{;P, GM-GC, GW-GM, GW--{;C, GP-GM
SW-5P, SM-5C, SIV-5M, SW-5C; SP-5M
'Y
:ic While giving dual symbols. first writc a coarser soil then a finer soil.
u, 1(2) Boundary classification can occur between the gravel and sand groups such as
GW-Sw. GP-Sp, GM-SM, and GC-SC
of The rule for ~ classification is to favour the non-plastic classification. For c1C.3mple, a gravel with
10% fines, C" = 20 and Ce = 2.0 and lp = 6 will be classified as GW-GM, and not GW-Gc.
100 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(1) Come- Gravel (0) dean (l)GW Well Co. grnterthan 4 When lines
2) Fine- Low· {l)ML Inorganic silts Atterbcrg Anerberg (1) Organic "d
gruined soils compressibility with nOne 10 limits plol limits pioting inorganic soils
(more than (L) (Liquid low plasticity below A-line above A-line plotted in the same
Limit less or /p less with Jp zone in plasticity
SO% """
75~ IS sieve) tnan 35%) than 7 -='10
7
chan are distinguis-
hed by odour and
(2) CL Inorganic Altcrberg (hatched colour 0' liquid
clays of low limits plot zone) ML-CL limit ,,~ aftcr
plasticity above A-line ovcn-clrying.
andJp greater A roduaion
than 7 liquid limit after "
ovcn- drying to a
(3) OL OrganicsiUs
of low
Atlcrbcrg limits plot below
A·line
value ,,,' than
three- founh of the
plasticity liquid limit before
ove,· drying
Inteonediate (4) MI Inorganic sillS Atterberg limits plot below positive "
compre,<;sibility ofmcdium A·line identification
(I) plasticity of organic soils.
(Uquid limit
greater than
35% but less
than 50%
(5)CI Inorganic Auerbcrg limits plot above (2) ",,,,, amon
clays of A-line soils 01 India lie
medium along a band partly
plasticity 'bo,,, .h,
A-line
and panly below tho
(6)01 Orgaic silts Alterbcrg limits plot below Aline
of medium A-lillC
plasticity
smaller than 751l size and are not visible to unaided eye. lbc fraction of soil smaUer than 7511 size., that is,
the clay and sill fradion. is referred to as fines.
(1) Coarse-grained Soilr-If the soil is coarse-grained. it is further identified by estimating the
percentage of (a) gravel size particles (4.75 mm to 80 mm), (b) sand size particles. (75J.L to 4.75 mm) and (e)
silts and clay size panicles (smaller than 7511 size). Gravel panicles are larger than 4.75 mm size and can be
identified visually.
If the percentage of gravel is greater Ihan that of sand, the soil is a grovel; otherwise, it is sand.
Gravels and s.1nds are further classified as cle.-m if they contain fines less than 5% and as dirty if they
contain fioes more than 12%. Gravels and sands containing 5 to 12% fines are given ooundary classification.
The fine fraction of the coarse-grained soils is identified using the procedure given below for fine· grained
soils to determine whether it is silty or clayey.
To difJercntiate fine sand from silt, dispersion Icst is adopted. When a spoonful of soil is poured in a jar
full of wa:er, fine sand settles in a minute or so. whereas silt t.'1kcs 15 minutes or more.
(2) Fine·grained soils--U the soil is fine-grained, the following tests arc conducted for identification 00 i
the fmetion of the sOil finer than the 425-micron IS sieve to differentiate silt from clay.
(a) Dilatancy (reaction to shaking) test-A smaU pat of moist soil of aboul 5 ml in volume is prepared.
Waler is added to make the soil soft but not sticky. "be pal is placed in the open palm of one-hand and
shaken horizontally, striking against the other hand several times during shaking. If the soil gives a positive
reaction, the water appears on its surface which changes t("l a lively roosistcncy and appears glossy. When the
pat is squeezcd between the fingers, Ihe watcr and gloss disappear from the surface, It becomes stiff and
ultimately crumbles.
'fl1e rapidity with which water appc.'1rs on the surface during shaking and disappears during squeezing 1<;
used in the identification of fine-grained soils (pJbles 5.8). The larger the S:7..e of tbe particles, the quicker is
the reaction. The reaction is called quick if water appears and disappears quickly. The reaction is tcnned slow
if water appears and disappc.'1rs slowly. For no retlction, Ihe water docs nol appear at the surface.
(b) Toughness test-The pHI used in Ihe dil:lt:lncy test is dried by working and remoulding until it has
tbe consistency of pUlly. 'Ibe lime required to dry the pal depends upon the plasticity of the soil.
'Ibe pat is rolled on a smooth surface or between the palms inlo a threads of aboul 3 mm in diameter,
The thrc.'ld is folded and re- rolled to reduce tbe water is soil, due to cvaporation by heat of hand, until the
3 mm diameter thread just crumbles. The water content at that stage is equal to the plastic limit and the
resistance to moulding at that stage is called the toughness.
After the thread crumbles, Ihe picces of the sample are lumped together and subjected to kneading until
the lump also crumbles. lbe tougher the thread at the plastic limit and the stiffer the kneaded lump just
before it crumbles, the higher is the toughness of the soil. The toughness is low if the thread is weak and the
soil mass cannot be lumped together when drier than plastic limit. TIle toughness is high when the lump can
be moulded drier than plastic limit and high pressure is required to roll the thread.
The toughness depends upon the polency of the colloidal clay.
Table 5.8. Field Identification Tests
T", ML CL OL MI CI 01 Mil CH OH
Quick None 10 Sl~ Quick Noo, Slow Stow 10 None NonclO
(a) DiJDlancy
very slow 10 slow very slow
(b) lbughness
None Medium Low None Medium Low Low 10 lIigh
Low "
medium medium
(oj Dry st"mgl" I..I-Th, 1"" of the w;J i, completely dried by ak drying, ,un drying 0' ovcn'd'l'' : J
SOIL CLASSIFICATION 103
The dry strength is determined by breaking the dried pat and crumbling it betwcc.n finger.;. The dry strength
is a mea<>ure of plasticity of the soil. The dry strength depends upon the colloidal frndion of the soil.
The strength is termed high if the dried pat cannot be powdered at all; medium, if considerable pressure
is required; and low, if the dry pat can be easily powdered.
Table 5..8 can be used for the field identification of different soils.
S.IO. GENERAL CIIARACfERISTICS OF SOILS OF DIFFERENT GROUPS
General characteristics of the soils of various groups as classified by ISC system and USC system are
given in Table 5.9. The information given in the table should be considered as a rough guidance about the
engineering properties of soils. For complete information. the tests should be oonductcd and the engineering
properties determined.
Thble 5.9. General PropeUes or Soils
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Dlll'ltrative Example 5.1. A sample of soil was tested in a laboratOf)', and the following observations
were recorded:
Liquid Limil ::: 45%, Plastic Limit = 16%
SOIL MECHANICS AND· FOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
l<"
I
U.S. Sieve No.
I
No.4
I
No. 10
(2.0mm) I No. 40
(0.425 mm)
I No. 200
(0.075 mm)
Percentage Pa&<>ing 100 I 91.5 I SO.O I 60.0
I 45 29 100 59
I I " 100 B5
Solution. (a) Soil A. As more than 5()% passes No. 200 sieve, the soil
is fine·grdincd.
As WI is Less than 50%. the soH is of low plasticity. 'mc Atlerberg limits plot above the A-line in Fig. 5.5.
'Ille soil is classified as CL.
(b) Soil 8. The soil is fine-grained. As the liquid limit is greatcr than 50%. the soil is of high
compressibility. The Allcrberg limits plot below A-line. It can be either MH or OH. If the soil is OH, ilS
liquid limit will decrease considerably on oven·drying.
lIIustrntive Example 5.3. Classify th~ soil with the following properties according to ISC system.
Liquid Limit PlassidlY index % passing % passing
I I 4.75 mm sie\'e I 75JAsieve
40% I 10% I 60% I 45%
Solution. As more than 50% is rctClincd on 75", IS sieve, the soil is marse-grained.
Coarse frJction = 55%; Gravel fraction = 40%; Sand frdcUon = 15%
As more lhan half the coarse-fraction is larger than 4.75 mm IS sieve, the soil is gravel.
The soil has more than 12% fines. it can be either GM or GC.
As the Anerberg limits plot below A·lioe (Fig. 5.6), the soil is GM.
Illustrative Example 5.4. Fig E 5.4 ,fIIOWS the grain size distribwion curves for two soils A and B. Tht
plasticity characteristics of the sails are given below.
son A Liquid Limit = 40%; Plasticity Index = 10%;
Soil B Liquid Lilll/'t = 28%; Plasticity Index = 12%
Classify lhe soils according to IS classification and COII/menl on their sheor strenglh.
SOIL Cu\SSJFlCATION t05
~.o~~--~~~-v?-rH~
z
'"ffi 2of--l-----1f-r-:;l-""--t--t-i-t-i
Q.
(mm)
Fig. E-S.4.
Solution. (a) Soil A. As more than 50% pffiSCS 75~ sieve. the soil is line-grained. The Allcrberg limits
plot below A-line (Fig. 5.6) in the zone of intermediate compressibility. It can be either MI or 0/. If the liquid
limit reduces \0 thrcc-founh of the original value or more on oven drying, it is IS; oIherwise MI.
(b) Soil 8. As more than 50% of Ihe Iolal material is larger than 75 I-' sieve. the soil is coarse- grained.
Coarse fmction = 87%,
Gravel fmetion = 37%;
Sand fmelion = 50%.
As more than half of coarse fraction is smaller than 4.75 mm sieve, the soil is sand. As fines are more
than 12%, the soil can be SA{ or Sc. As the Atteroerg limits plot above A· line (Fig. 5.6), the soil is Sc.
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
5.1 Allerbcrg ]imil ICstS were carried out on 11 soil sample, with the following rC5ults:
Liquid limit'" 40%; Plastic limil '" 2S%.
Oassify Ihe soil according to Unified Oassifjeltion system and the Indian Standard classification system.
[Ans. CL; CI]
5.2. The follOWing results were obtained [rom Ihe classification tests of a soil.
Percentage passing 7Sjl sieve = 40%
Liquid limil = 35%; Plastic Limit = 15%
calculate the group index of lhe soil and dassify il aocording 10 AASl-ITO system. [Ans.4; A-6(4)]
5.3. The sieve analysis of a soil gave the following results :
% passing 75~ sieve:: 4; % ret:lined on 4.75 mm sieve'" 50
Coefficient of curvature = 2; UniformilY ooefficienl = 5
Classify Ihe soil according to ISC sySlem. [Ans.GWJ
5.4. The sieve analysis of a soil gave the following results:
%passing 75~ sieve ", 8; % retained on 4.75 mm sieve", 35
Coefficient of curvature '" 2.5; Uniformily ooefficient ~ 7
The fine frnClion gave the folJowing results :
Plasticity index = 3; Liquid Limit = 15.
Classify Ihe soil according 10 ISC system. [Am;. SW-SM}
5.5. Ascii has Ibe following charnCieristics:
% ~ng 75~ sieve = 58%; liquirl Limit = 40%
Plasticity Index = 10%; liquid lim!1 of oven-dried sample", 25%
Classify the soil according 10 ISC syslcm. [Ans.OI]
106 SOIL MECHAN ICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
C. Multiple·Choice Questions
t. IS classification ()fsoil is in many respects simi lar to
«(I) AAS HTO classificmion (b) Tcxlurn! classitkation
(t') Unified soil elilssilication (d) MIT clnssificmion
2. The maximum Sill! of pMticks of silt is
(a) 75 11 (b) 60 11
(e) 2 11 (d) 0.2 11
3. The maximum Si7.1! of parl iclc.~ or clay is
(0) 0.2 mm (b) 0.02 mm
fe) 0.002 mm (d) 0.0CI02 mm
4. Acconling to IS classifiC<11ion system. the soils can be cl.1ssilit"(,,1 into
«(I) 15 groups (b) 18 groups
(e) 3 groups (d) 7 groups
5. The soils which pl01 above the A line in the pl.1sticity chart flrc
«(I) cl!Jys (b) silts
(e) sands (tl) organic soil s
6. A silty soi l gives a positive reaction in
(a) Toughness tes t (b) Dilmancy test
(c) Dry strength test «(I) None of above
7. A soil has the liquid li mit of 30. TIle cQrresponding plasticity index given b)' the A·li ne is
(tl ) 7.3 (b) 7.5
(e) 9.0 (d) 9.5
8. The max imum value of the term (F. I 5) in the group index is taken as
(a) 20 (b) 30
(c) 40 (d) 60
6
Clay Mineralogy and Soil Structure
6.1. INTRODUCTION
The coarse-grained soils generally contain the minerals quartz and feldspar. These minerals are strong and
electrically inert. The behaviour of such soils docs not depend upon thc nature of the mineral present. The
behavior of fine-grained soils, on Ihc other hand. depends to a large extent on the nature and characteristics
of the minerals presenl. The most significant properties of clay depend upon the type of mineral. The
crystalline minerals whose surface activity is high are clay minerals. These clay minerals imparl cohesion and
plasticity. The study of clay miner.lls is essential for understanding the behaviour of clayey soi ls. Clay
mineralogy is the the science dealing with the structure of c lay minerals on microscopic, molecular and
atomic scale. II also includes the study of the mineralogical composition and electrical properties of the clay
particles. The study of clay minerals is important for particles smaller than about 2 micron size.
Soil struclIlre means the geometrical arrangement of soil particles in a soil mass. It is concerned with
the shape. si7..e and orientation of particles. If the individual particles are packed very close to one another,
the void ratio is low and the soil is dense and strong. If the particles are so arranged that there are more
voids, the soil is loose and weak. Engineering properties and behaviour of both coarse-grained and
fine-grained depend upon the structure.
This chapter is mainly devoted 10 clay mineralogy. The soil struclure is considered in the last section. In
fact. clay mineralogy also discusses the structure of clayey soils nOi as a whole mass but at a particle level.
6.2. GRAVITATIONAL AND SURFACE FORCES
The gravitational force in a soil particles is proportional to its mass. As the specific gravity of particles
is approximately constant, the gravi tational force is proportional to the volume of the particle. TIle volume
depends upon the particle size. Thus. the gravitational force on a particle is related to the particle size. In
other words. the larger the particle size, the greater would be the gravitational force. '
Bonding or surface forces betwecn particlcs depend upon lhe surface area of the particles and not upon
the volume. The surface area also depends upon the particle size .. However. the surface forces become more
important only when the paticle size is small. As the particle size decreases. the effect of surface forces on
a particle becomes more predominant than the gravitational force.
The re lative magnitude of volume and the surface area can be judged if we consider, say, a cube whose
each side is 10 mm (volume = 103mm\ When the cube is subdivided into smaller cubes. the ratio of the
surface area to the volume increases, as shown in Table 6.1. The ratio increases ten thousand times when the
side of the smaller cube becomes I micron. The magnitude of the surface area per unit volume (or mass) is
known as specific l·urface.
The particles of coarse-grained soils are larger than 0.075 mm size. For such soils, the ralio of surface area
to the volume is relatively small. These soils do not possess pla~ticity and cohesion which are predominant only
when the surface forces .are large. In fine-grained soils, the gravity forces are relatively insignificant compared
108 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Surface area
S.N.
Side
Length
Number of
"be>
~rfQCe area Vofumll!! ""=e
2 J
(mm /mm )
1. 10mm 1 600 mm2 Ht'mml Q.60
2- 1 rom 10' 6xlolxl 6.0
with the surface [orces. The fine~grained soils possess the plasticity characteristics depending upon the surface
area, the type of minerals and the nature of environment present around thc soil particle.
A material in which the surface forces arc predominant is known as a colloid. ll1c lenn colloid has been
derived from Greek words kolla and Didos, meaning a glucy material and alike. For colloids. the ratio of the
surface area to the volume is very large. It varies between 6(X) to las mm2/mml:r1le dayey soils with
particles smaller than 2 micron size arc generally colloidal in nature. The colloids have very large speciflc
surface.
6.3. PRIMARY VALENCE BONDS
Primary valence bonds hold togethcr the atoms of a molcrule. These are of two types:
(1) Ionic bond, (2) Covalcnt bon(1.
1. Ionic bond-In an atom, the electrons carrying a negative charge revolve about Ihe nucleus. Sane
elements have an excess or a deficiency of the electrons in the outer shell. One alom joins another alom by
adding some of the electrons to its outer shell or by losing some of electr0n5 from ilS outer shell Fer
example, an atom of sodium has an exress electron in its outer shell and an atom of dllorinc has one
deficient elearon in its outer shell. A molecule of sodium chloride is fonned by ionic bond when an atom of
sodium combines with an atom of chlorine. TIle atom which loses an ion becomes a JXl!>itive io!] (cation) and
that which gains an ion becomes a negative ion (anion). In ionic bonds, the forces bind the positive ions and
negative ions.
The number of electrons required to oomplete the first six shells individually are respectively. 2, 8, 8, i.8,
18 and 32. The total number of electrons required to oomplete are, IhereCorc , 2. 10, 18. 36, 54 and 86. The
deficiency or excess of electrons in a particular shell of an element is determined from the number of
electrons available and that required to complete the outersheU. For example,
aluminium has 13 electrons. It has an excess of 3 electrons over the second 1
shell (total 10 ekx:trons). IJkewise, oxygen whiCh has 8 electrons, lack 2 elec:- ~ 0
Irons in the second shell (total 10 electrons). An atom of hydrogen has equal Ai) ~
excess and deficiency. It has only one electron which can be oonsidered either ~
as one deficient in the first shell or one excess elearon. Likewise, the alom of
silicon has 14 electrons which has equal excess and deficiency of 4 each. It has
+, ~~ 61
an excess of 4 over the second shell or a deficiency of 4 in the third shell (total
18 electrons). See lbble 6.2 for ionic structure of various elements. A.I ~
The atoms of two different elements combine to satisfy their individual ~
deficiency or excess. For example.. when aluminium and oxygen combine two ~ fl
atoms of aluminium (excess 6) combine with 3 atoms of oxygen (deficiency 6)
to form aluminium oxide (Fig. 6.1). Fig. 6.1. Aluminium oxide
CLAY MINERALOGY AND SOIL STRUCllJRE 109
2.
3.
..
Oxygen
Silicon
Aluminium
f<""",
0
Si
AJ
F,
14
!3
-2
-4 ..
+3
or goin one ion
5. 26 .8
6. Calcium Ca 20 .2
7. Sodium No II • I
8.
9.
Potassium
Magnesium M,
K I.
12
.1
.2
10. Chlorine CI 17 -I
2. Covalent Bond-Covalcnl bond develops between two atoms by sharing of electrons in their outer
sheU. lWo atoms, each lacking one electron, may combine by sharing of a pair of electrons. Likewise, two
atoms, each lacking two electrons, may combine by sharing four electrons. For example. the bond between
two atoms of oxygen in a oxygen molecule is a covalent bond. Each atom Lacks 2 electrons in the outer sheU.
The two atoms bond by sharing 4 electrons in their outer sheUs. In other words, a covalent bond occurs when
there is sharing of electrons by atoms of like valence. 'The covalent bond occurs generally in clements of
negative valences or in non-electrolytes. such as carbon. (A non-electrolyte does not form ions).
Primary valence bonds are very strong. These do not break in normal soil engineering applications.
lbcrefore, primary valence bonds are not of much relevance in soil engineering. However, the study of ionic
structure is useful in understanding the behaviours of various atoms.
.
6.5. SECONDARY VALENCE BONDS
~
CQti"H'
Secondary valence bonds are intermolecular bonds which develop
between atoms in one molecule to atoms in another molecule. A molecule is o-2- -2
0
-
eleariC311y neutral, i.e., it has no charge. However. the construction of the
molecule may be such that the centres of Ihe negative and pooilive charges do
AnionJ
not exactly coincide. 1be molecule may behave like a small bar magnet, with
two electrical poles. Consequenlly, an electrical moment is developed inside Fig. 6.3. A Cllatioo joining
the molecule. A molecule with such a structure is called a dipole. In nature, two anions.
two dipolar molecules orient themselves in such a way that net attraction oc:cun;. The attractive forces so
developed are known as Vander Waul Forces, after Vander Wool who POOlulalcd the existence of a rommoo
attractive forces between molecules of all matters in 1873.
Vander Wanl forces develop due to anyone of the following three effects.
(1) Orientation effect-This effect
~
occurs between the oppositely charged
ends of permanent dipoles, as shown in
Fig. 6.4.
(2) Induction effect- Even in a
non~polar molecule, a pole can be I+ _I
induced. When a non-polar molecule is ;=====~
placed in an electric field, it gets
polarised and slans behaving as a
1_
' - -_ _-'CJ
+ I .-----+-"
dipole. Induction effect occurs between (a) (b)
an induced pole and another dipole.
(3) Dispersion effect-As all
electrons oscillate, the centre of ~I-_ __+-,' ~I-_ __+-,I
negative charges goc:s on changing (e)
periodically. This results in the
fonnation of a temporary, fluctuating Fig. 6.4. Orienlalion Effect.
pole. Dispersion e[fect occurs between a fluctuating pole and another dipole.
As all moleaJles behave as permanent or induced or fluctuating dipoles, Vander Waal forces are always
present in molecules. These exist in all matters. TIle relative magnitude of orientation. induction and
dispersion effects in a water molecule are 77%, 4% and 19%
respectively. Thus the orientation effect is the most
predominant effect.
A common example of secondary valence bond is the
G
attractive force between molecules of water: 'Ibe water
molecules . act as a bar magnet because the positive and
negative charges are not centrally located. It may be noted
that all liquids arc not dipoles. Some of the liquids. such as
kerosene and carbon tetrachloride, are non-polar, as shown by
@---..----C!)
construction in Fig. 6.5.
Vander Waa! forces also develop between the surfaces of
two parallel particles of clay mineral. separated by water. The
magnitude of the forces depend upon the distance between
the clay particles, structure of the minerals and the
characteristics of water.
The secondary val"ence bonds are relalively weak and are G
easily broken. The Vander Wanl forces play an important part
in the behaviour of clayey soils. Fig. 6.5. Non-polar System
CU\Y MINERALOOY AND SOIL SfRUcruRE III
0
0,,,'0 ---- :- ---
Oxygen
Silicon
~
4x(_21 '_ 8
6X(-2).-12
Net g _4
Ie) Sili ca ~heet
~
6X{-'I'-6
octahedron and having one aluminium atom at the centre (Fig. 6.7). As the aluminium (Ar·~ has three
positive charges, an octahedral unit has 3 negative eh.'lrges. Because of net negative charge. an octahedral unit
eannOi exist in isolation.
Several octahedral units combine to form a gibbsite sheet. Fig. 6.7 (c) shows a gibbsite sheet formed by
four octahedral units. The sheet is electrically neulral. Fig. 6.7 (d) shows a simple representation.
electrical <;ircuil containing a battery and an ammeter, there is a deflection of the needle of the ammeter. This
proves Lhat there is a flow of current through the medium. 1beoretically, a soil particle can carry either a
negative charge or positive charge. However, in aClu~ll tests. only negative charges have been measured.
The net negative charge may be due to onc or more of the following reasons.
(1) Isomorphous substitution of one alom by another of lower valency.
(2) Dissociation of hydroxyle ion (OlI) into hydrogen ions.
(3) Adsorption of anions (negative ions) on clay surface.
(4) Absence of cations (positive ions) in the lattice of the crystal.
(5) Prcsencc of organic matter.
The magnitude of Ihe electrical Charge depends on Ihe surface area of Ihe particle. It is very high in small
particles. such as colloids, which have very large surface area. A soil particle attracts the cations in the
environment to neu!!TIlise the negative charge. 'lbe phenomenon is known as adsorption. :
6.12. BASE EXCHANGE CAPACITY
The cations attracted to the negatively charged surface of the soil particles are not strongly attached.
These em ions can be replaced by Olher ions and are, therefore, known as exchangeable ions. TI1e soil particle
and the exchangeable ions make the system neutral.
11m phenomenon of replacement of cmions is called cation eXChange or base exchange. The net negative
charge on the mineral which c::m be 5.:1tisfied by eXChangeable cations is termed cation-exchange capacity or
base-exchange capacity. In other words, base--cxchange capacity is the capacity of the clay particles to change
the cation adsorbed on the surface,
Basc-cxchcmgc capaCity is expressed in teons of the total number of !JOS:ilive charges adsorbed per 100
gm of soil. 11 is measured in milliequivalent (meq). which is equal to 6 x lOw electronic charges. Thus, one
rneq per 100 gm means that 100 gm of material can exchange 6 x lOw electronic Charges if the exchangeable
ions are univalent, such as Na+. However, if the exchflngc.1ble ions are divalent, such as ea 2+, 100 gm of
m<lteriai will replace 3 x 102<1 calcium ions.
According to flnother definition, one milliequivalent (mcq) is alSo equal to one milligram of hydrogen Il'
its equivalent other material which will replace one milligram of hydrogen. For example, calcium has a
molecular weight of 40, whereas that of hydrogen is unity. However. calcium is divalent in contrast to
hydrogen which is univalent. Therefore. one mg of hydrogen is equivalent to 20 mg of calcium in base
exchange capacity. If 100 gm of a dry material adsorbs 60 mg of calcium, the base eXChange capacity of the
material is 60/20 i.e. 3 meqllOO gm.
The base-eXChange capflcity of clay depends upon the PII value of the water in the environment. If the
water is acidic (PH < 7), the base-exchange capacity is reduced.
Some cations are more strongly adsorbed than others. The adsorbed cations commonly found in soils,
arranged in a series in terms of their affinity for allraction arc as follows:
AI3+ > ea 2+ > Mg+2 :> NH; :> I-r > Na+ :> U+
For example, AI3+ calions are more strongly attracted than ea'2+ cations. '01OS Al3+ ions can replace Q,2.
ions. Likewise. ea 2+ ions can replace Na+ ions.
The base formula of the clay mineral is altered by base exchange. For example, if calcium chloride is
added to a soil containing sodium chloride. there would be an exchange of o?+ ions for Na+ ions, and the:
sodium clay would tum into the calcium clay. Thus
Sodium clay + Cl 2 = Calcium clay + NaC!.
The properties of the clay therefore (.tlange due to base eXChange.
The base eXChange capacity of the montmorillonite mineral is about 70--100 meq per 100 gm. However,
that of kaolinite and illite fire respectively 4.0 and 40.0 mcq per 100 g.
6.13. DIFFUSE DOUBLE LAYER
The faces of clay minerals carry n net neg<ltivc charge. 'l11e edges of the mineral may have either positive
CLAY MINERALOGY AND SOIL srnUcruRE 115
charges or negative chargcs. The chnrgcs in clay minerals are due to molecular grouping and arrangement of
ions. The electrical charges in the minerals are responsible for their behaviour when they come in contact
with other panicles and with water prescnt in the soil. Clay deposits, because of their sedimentary nature,
always exist in the presence of water.
~ecause of the net negative charge on the surface, the clay particles attract cations, such as potassium,
calcium and sodium, from moisture present in the soil to reach an electrically balanced C<juilibrium. These
cations, in tum, attract panicles with negative charges and water dipoles.
(The engineering behaviour of coarse particles is not affected by surface electrical charges, because of
their low ratio of surface area to volume. In such soils, the gravitational forces are more important).
The plasticity characteristics of Clays are because of the unusual molecular structure of water in soil
deposits. Experiments conducted with clays using nonpolar liquid, such as kerosene, in place of water, has
shown that plasticity does not occur, and the soil behaves as a coarse.grained sands soil.
The water molecule is a dipole, since the hydrogen atoms arc not symmetrically oriented around the
oxygen atoms. The molecule acts as a bar magnet (Fig. 6.11). As the faces of clay panicles carry a negative
HYDFlJGEN _
H
0
YGEN
HYDROGE~
H/~ ~
rO'YGEN
0
+
Ce) MODEL (b) RELATIVE LDCATm eel DIPOLE
'AIo\TER MOLECULE
Fig. 6.11. Structure of a water molecule. (ul Model, (b) Relatillc location, (e) Dipole water molecule
charge, there is aHraction between the negatively Charged faces and the positive ends of dipoles [Fig. 6,12
(a)] . 1be secood mode of attraction between the water dipoles and the clay surface is through cations [Fig.
6.12 (b)]. Cations are attracted to the soil surface and waler dipoles are attached to these cations through their
o00
=000 (a)
&±!J
(b) (c)
Gl CAnON
o OIPOLE
Fig. 6.12. AltrllClion of water molecules 10 soil SwfflCe.
negative charged ends. The third possible mode by which the attraction between the water and the clay
surface occurs is by sharing of the hydrogen atom in the water molecule by hydrogen bonding between the
oxygen atoms in the clay particles aod the oxygen atoms in the waler molecules [Fig, 6.12 (e)].
The cations attracted to a clay mineral surface also try to move away from the surface because of their
thenna! energy, The nel effect of the forces due 10 attraction and thnt due 10 repulsion is that the forces of
attraction decrease exponentially with an increase in distance from the clay particles surface. The layer
extending from the clay particle surface to the limit of atlroction is known as the diffuse dQuble layer (Fig. 6.13).
It is believed that immediately surrounding Ihe panicle, there is a thin, very tightly held layer of water
about 10 A 0 thick. Beyond Ihis thickness there is a seoond layer, in which water is more mobile. This second
layer extends to the limit of attraction, and is known as diffuse-double layer (Fig. 6.13). The water held in
lhe diffuse-double layer. is known as adsorbed water or oriented water. Outside the diffuse double layer the
water is nonnal. non·oriented. The total thickness of the diffuse-double layer is about 400 A 0,
116 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 6.14. Soil slruclUre ill sallds and silts. (a) Single Graillcd Structure, (b) HOlley-romb Slructure
Flocculent structure is fonned when there is a net attractive force between particles.
When clay panicles settle in water, deposits fanned have a flocculated structure. 'The degree of
flocculation of a clay deposit depends upon the type and concentration of clay particles, and the presence of
salts in water. Clays settling out in a sail waler solution have 3 more []occulent structure than those settling
out in a fresh water solution. Salt water acts as an electrolyte and reduces the repulsive forces between the
particles.
Soils with a flocculent structure arc light in weight and have a high void ratio and water content
However, these soils arc quite strong and can resist external forces because of a strong bond due \0 attraction
between p<,rtic1es. The soils are insensitive 10 vibrations. In general. the soils in a Oocculated structure have
a low' compressibility, a high ,penncability and a high shear strength.
(4) Dispersed Structure-Dispersed structure develops in clays tlmt have been reworked or remoulded.
The particles develop more or less 8 parallel orientation {Fig. 6.16 (b)l. Clay deposits with a flocculent
structure when transported 10 olher places by nature Of man get remoulded. Remoulding converts the
edge·to-face orientation to face-to-face orientation. The dispersed structure is fonned in nature when there is
a net repulSive force between particles.
'The soils in dispersed structure generally have a low she~r strength, high compressibility and low
permeabilily. Remoulding causes a loss of strength in a cohesive soil. With the passage of time, however, the
soil may regain some of its lost strength. Due to remoulding, the chemical equilibrium of the particles and
associated adsorbed ions and water molecules within the double layer is disturbed. The soil regains strength
as a result of re- estoolishing a degree of chemical equilibrium. This phenomenon of regain of strength with the
passage of time, with no change in water content., is known as thixotropy, as already disaJssed in chapter 4.
(5) Coarse-grained Skeleton-A coarse-grained skeleta'i'! 'is a composite structure which is formed when
the soil contains particles of different types. When the amount of bulky, cohesionlcss particles is large
compared with that of fine-grained clayey
particles. the bulky grains in
particle-to-particle contact. These pmticles
fonn a framework or skeleton {Fig. 6.17 (a)].
The space between the bulky grains is
occupied by clayey particles, known as
binders. In nature, the bulky grains are
deposited first during sedimentation and the
binder is subsequently deposited.
As long as the soil structure is not Fig. 6.17. Composite SlrUcture (a).coRJSe Grnind Skeltion,
disturbed, a coorsc-gr<lined skeleton can take (b) Clay MafIix
heavy loads without much deformations. However. when the structure is disturbed, tbe load is transferred
from the coarse-.grained particles to clayey particles, and Ihe supporting power and the stability of the soil is
considerably reduced.
(6) Clay-Matrix Structu~lay-matrix structure is also a composite structure fonned by soils of
different types. However. in this case, the amount of clay particles is very large as compared with bulky,
coarse- grained particles [Fig. 6.17 (b)]. The clay forms a matrix in which bulky grains appear floating
without touching one another.
The soils with a Clay-matrix structure have almost the same properties as Clay. Their behaviour is similar
to that of an ordinary clay deposit. However. they are more stable, as disturbance has very little effect on the
soil formation with a clay-matrix structure.
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
6.1. A dry mineral has a mass of 100 gm and adsorbs 50 mg of catcium. Determine its base exchange capacity.
(Ans. 2.5 meg per 100 mgJ
CLAY MI NERALOGY AND SO IL STRUCTURE 119
63. What arc primary valent"\: bonds'! What is their imponancc m soil engmccring '!
6.4. What do you undcrl>t,md by hydrogen bond? Give examples.
6.5. Wh:lI arc secondary valence bonds'! Wrile a shorl nOle on Vander W331 forces.
6.6. Describe the constitution of the two basic structuml units rcqulft'(l in Ihe formation of clay minerals. Are these
ele<:trically nCUlr:Il?
6.7. Discuss the charactcri~l1cs and the construction of Kaolinite. Montmorillonite and Illite mineral groups.
6.8. Write ~hon n(lte~ nn:
(I) Base exchlmge capacity. (ii) lsomorphollssubstitution.
(iii) Electricnl double I.lyer (il') Adsorbed water
6.9. What arc ditfcrent types ot soil Slnlctures which can occur in mllure ·1 Describe is brief.
6.10. STate whet hcr the followlllg statements arc InIC Of fillse.
(a) The l11 il1(:nl l qU:lrtz b electrically act ive.
(b) T he clay minerab li re rcspt.ll1sib le for plaslicty chnrnclC rislics of ~oi l s.
(e) T he hydrogcn hond is stronger than secondary v~tl c n ce bo nds.
(d) I SI' l11orJlhou~ ~ubstillition docs not change the electrical ct13rg<::
(1') The soib containing. thc minerallmlloyshe have .1 high unit weight.
if) The miner'll !l\ulllmurillu11I tC. cause.> excessive swclhng and shrinkage.
l1:) The nd~urbeJ water imparts phlsticity to SOils.
(II) Honey-comb ~tructure occur~ in clayey soils.
(0 Remouldcd tine-grainoo soils have a tlocculat<!d structUI"C. fA ns. T rue. (b). (e). (j). (g)]
C. Multiple-Choice Questions.
1. The behaviour of clay h govemed by
((I) Mass energy (b) Surf:lCe energy
(e) Both (a) and (b) ((/) Nei lher (a) and (b)
2. Honey-combed strut:turc 1~ found in
(a) Gravels (b) Co.lfSC sands
(e) Fi ne ~ands :U1d SIltS (fl) day
3. TIle weakest bond ill ~otl~ I~
(11) Ionic bond (b) Covalent bond
Ie) Hydrogen bond (tf) SecondJry valance bond
4. All O~'lahedrJl unit ha~
(a) Pour neg: llIvc charges (b) Thrcc negative c!mrgc.~
(e) One Il<::galive (If) No negative charge
5. In illi t<:: mineral. Ihebond be twecnstructural u11itsis
\a) Hyd ro;:cn bo nd (b) PQt ~l ssi um i011 bo nd
(e) Water l11ok.-cu lcs bond (tI) COV:l1e11l bond
6. The plas ticity charJcteri~lics of clays arc due 10
(f/) Adsorbed water (b) Free watcr
(r) CapI llary wmer (tI) None of above
7. In tine l>:tnds and ~ihs, the most common type structure is
(II) Smg!c grained (b) Honey comb
(c) Flucculated (II) Disperred
H. The base cxc!mnj,lc l·apacity of lhe mineral montmorrillonite is .. buul
(/1) 70 mt-qI1QO g (b) 700 mav l OO g .
(c) 7 meql100 g {(/) 40 meqf l OO g
~_ J~1~1~~m~W~~7m8~
7
Capillary Water
The forces tend to reduce the surface area of the air-liquid surface to a minimum. The surface assumes a
curved shape to maintain equilibrium. 'l11e intcrfHcc behaves like a stretched membrane or a skin. The surface
tension exists at the interface. Surface tension is defined as the force per urut length of a line drawn on the
surface. It acts in the direction normal to that line. The surface tension of water at normal temperature is
about 0.073 N/m at 20°C. It decreases with an increase in temperature.
It is because of surface tension that a smaU needle can float on water, and insects can walk on it.
7 Capillary water exists in soils so long as there is an air-water interface. As soon as the soil is submerged
under water, the interface is destroyed, and the capiUary water becomes norma~ free water. The capillary
water is always under tension (negative pressure). However, the properties of the capillary water are the same
r as that of normal, free water.
7.3. CAPILLARY IUSE IN SMALL DIAMETER TUBES
Water rises in small diameter, capillary tubes, beatuse of adhesion and cohesion. Adhesion occurs
because water adheres or sticks to the solid walls of the tube. Cohesion is due to mutual attraction of water
molecules. If the effect of cohesion is less significant than the effect of adhesion, tbe liquid wets the surface
and the liquid rises 1lI the point of contne. However, if the effect of cohesion is more predominant than
adhesion, the liquid level is depressed at the point of contact, as in the case of mercury.
If a glass tube of small diameter. open at both ends, is lowered into water, the water level rises in
the lube, as the water wets the tube. Let 8 be the angle of contact between the water and the wall of the
tube [Fig. 7.2 (a)].
T, r,
'b) ,01
Fig. 7.2. Capillary Rise
F" = Upward pull due to surface tension = (1~ cos 8) 1td
where T, = surface tension and d diameter of the tube.
F" = Downward force due to mass of water in the tube
_ y.(,/4 d') x h.
where h~ = height of capillary rise.
For equilibrium, F" - Fd
(T.cos9) xd _ y.(xl4d')h.
41~cos8 4 T,cos 9
h. - ----:;::;t" - KP.:d ... (7.1)
For a clean glass tube and pure water, the meniscus is approximately hemispherical, ie. 8 = O. 1berefore,
122 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
!l F-
Ca)
The capillary tension, therefore, varies linearly with the height of point above the water surface, as shown
in Fig. 7.4 (b). The pressure al point F below the waler surface is, of course, positive (hydrostatic).
As the capillary tube is open to atmosphere, the pressure at point A above the meniscus is atmospheric,
i.e. zero. Therefore, the pressure difference across the two sides of the meniscus is equal 10 "twhe. The
pressure difference is also known as pressure deficiency (P").
Thus p" .. "tw h~
Substituting the value of he from Eq. 7.2,
P
" - y. (4T,) 4T,
y.d - d ...(7.5)
If the meniscus is not herni·spherical and it has diameters d 1 and ~ in two orthogonal di.red.ions, it can
be shown that
p.'d;+d;
" T ( 2 2) ... (7.6)
Capillary water can be likened to hanging of a weight 10 the inside walls of a chimney. The walls of the
chimney support the load and transfer it as reaction to the base. The weight causes compressive stresses in
the walls of the chimney. In a similar manner, the capillary water causes compression in the walls of the gJa<;s
tube. The compressive force (F) is equal to the weight of suspended column of water.
F - (~h,) y. .. :(7.7)
The compressive stress in the wall of the tube can be determined from the contact area and the
compressive force. The compressive stress is constant in the entire height he of the tube.
results of capillary rise in circular tubes arc useful for understanding the phenomenon of capiUary rise in soils.
The channels formed in the soil arc a sort of capillary lubes of varying diameter but not necessarily vertical.
These capillary tubes may be inclined in any direction.
Capillary rise in soils depends upon the size and grading of the particles. The diameter (d) of the
channels in pore passage depends upon the diameter of the particle. It is generally taken as one·fifth of tbe
effect:~diameler (D10)d::;: ooan;e.grained soils. ffkSQI<.'.W/k.w;;:x:...'VX~~~V
~
opposite Corce induced at the points of contacts which
presses the particles together. The contact pressure
depends upon the water content, particle size. angle of
conlaCt and density of packing. The contact pressure .
dccrcascs as the water cootenl increases because of an Fig. 7.6.
increase of radius of meniscus. EventuaUy, a stage is reached when the contact pressure becomes zero as sooo
as the soil becomes fully saturated.
Terzaghi and Peck (1948) gave a relationship between the maximum height of capillary fringe and the
effective size, as
0~-~ .. ~
where C = constant, depending upon the shape of the grain and impurities.
~ = void mtio.
DlO = effective diameter, the size corresponding to 10% percentage finer.
If D IO is in mm, the value of C varies between 10 to 50 mm 2, and the height (h)max is also given in mm.
If D IO and «ht)mu are in centimeters, C = 0.1 to 0.5 an 2•
Table 7.1 gives representative heights of capillary rise in different soils.
Thble 7.1. Representative Heights or Capillary RIse
S.No . SoU Type Capillary rise(m)
1. fine gravel 0.02 to 0.10
2- Coo",,,,,,, 0.10 to 0.1S
3. Fine sand 0.30 to 1.00
4. Silt 1.0 to to.O
s. C.y 10.0 to 30.0
6. Colloid more than 30.0
CAPIUARY WATER 125
height of water column - ~~ _ 10.2 m and lJI - 10.2 )( 9.81 - 100 kJ/kg]
It is worth noting that the capillary potential is always negative. The maximum possible value of '" is
equal to zero when the soil tension is zero, which occurs when the water is at atmospheric pressure. As the
water content in the soil decreases, the tension increases. This causes a decrease in capillary potential. The
capillary potential is minimum when the water rontent is minimum .
Water in the capillary fringe is seldom under equilibrium. It moves from a region of high potential (more
water content) to a region of low potential (less water COIllent). The water starts moving as soon as the
suction equilibrium is disturbed either due to evaporatioo of water or due to an increase in water content. The
velocity of the capillary water is given by
v _ k" . is ... (7.10)
where k" = coefficient of unsaturated permeability,
i, = suction gradient, which is equal to the potential difference per unit length.
7.8. CAPILLARY TENSION DURING DRYING AND WETIlNG OF SOILS
Capillary tension develops not only in the soils abOve the water table but also in a soil when its water
CODlent is reduced. When the water content of a saturated soil is reduced by drying, the water recedes into
the interstices of the soil and (onos menisci. As the water content is reduced further, the menisci recede. The
radii of curvature decrease, and there is a rorresponding increase in soil suction.
Fig. 7.7 shows the relationship between the soil suction and the water conlent of a soil. The suctioo at a
particular water content is more when the soil is drying than when the soil is wetling, and a hysterisis loop
is formed. The reason for the differenrx in soil suction is that during drying the release of water [rom the
larger pores is controlled by the surrounding smaller pores, whereas during welting it is not controlled by the
smaller pores. The phenomenon is somewhat sUn ilar to the flow of capillary water in tubes of non- uniform
diameter discussed in Sect 73. The process of drying is analogous to the flow of water in the downward
direction, in which the capillary rise does not depend upon the larger diameter of the bulb.
126 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
h - ~
2. (TT-T~ ... (1.12)
128 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
where h = soil suction. expressed in terms of the height of water column (log h _ PI')'
0> = rotational speed (rndinns per serond)
'1 = radial distance from the centre of rotation to the water table
'2 = radial distance from the centre of rotation to the middle of the soil sample.
The test is conducted at various speeds to obtain a relationship between the water content and the soil
suction.
The centrifuge method can be used for determination of very high suctions, of the order of several
thousands of kN/m 2• For accurate results, thin samples shaD be used. If the sample is relalive!y thick, it is
subjected to an additional overburden pressure due to its own weight and erroneous results are obtained.
' .lI. FROST IlEAVE
The water which migrates upward from the water table to the capillary fringe may freeze if the
atmospheric temperature falls to the freezing point, and the i~ is formed. This results in an increase in the
volume of soil, because when water is ronverted into ice. 1here is about 9% increase in its volume. If the
porosity of the soil is 45% and the soil is sUlumted. the expansion of the soil would be (0.09 x 45) = 4.05%.
In other words, there would be a hc.'lve of about 4 cm in every one metre thickness of the soil deposit. Due
to frost heave, the soil at the ground surface is JiCted. This may cause the lining of light structure... built on
the ground.
The frost heave observed in most of the soils is much more thun a hc..'lve of about 4 cm (ler metre. This
is due to the foct that when the ice lenses are formed in the soil due to freezing of water, the water film from
the adjacent soil panicles is also removed. This disturbs soil suction equilibrium and more water is drawn up
from the water table by capillary action to replenish the water deprived by the ice lenses from the soil
particles (Fig. 7.11). This process may cause a frost heave of 20 \030% of the soil depth.
G.$.
Shrinkage is due to tension in soil water. When tension (negative pressure) develops in water,
compressive forces act on the solid particle. The compressive forces induced in the solid particles are similar
to those induced in the walls of the capillary lube discussed in Sect. 7.4. When the water content of a soil
mass reduces due to eV8lX'ration, the meniscus
retreats. This causes oompression of the solid
particles and hence a reduction in the volume
of the soil mass.
The Strc5SCS in pore water during
shrinkage can be studied from the capillary
tube analogy (Sect. 7.4). Let us consider a soil
mass consisting of spherical. solid particles,
shown in Fig. 7.13. When the capillary spaces . .
bclween the particles are completely filled Fig. 7.13. RClreahng or Mcmscus.
with water, the menisrus forms a plane surface, as indicated by 1-1. The tension in water is zero. As
evaporatjoo takes place, water is removed from the free surface and the meniscus retreats to the position 2~2.
This process causc.s tension in the water and corresponding oomprcssive fo~ces on the solid grains. The
tension developed depends upon the radius of the menisc..'Us.
With further evaporation. the meniscus retrc.'lts to position 3-3 and the rndius decreases. This increases
t.he compressive forces acting on the solid particles. Eventually, when the meniscus attains the minimum
radius. shown by position 4-4. it is fully developed and the compressive forces induced are maximum. Funher
recession of the meniscus docs nOI incremre the compressive forces, as there are n6 pores of smaller radius.
The lower limit of the volume occurs HI the shrinkage limit. At the shrinkage limit. the soil is still
saturated, but there is no free water at the soil surface. Further drying docs not cause a reduction in its
volume as the soil resistance exceeds the compressive forces. As soon as tbe shrinkage limit is reached, the
surface becomes dry. It is indicated by a change in the oolour of the soil surface to a lighter shade.
There may be a small addition.'li shrinkage after the shrinkage limit, but this is usually ignored.
,I
Swelling When water is added to clayey soil which had shrunk by evaporatioo of the pore water, the
menisci arc destroyed. The tension in soil water becomes zero. lbe compressive forces between the solid
particles reduce considerably. Hnd clastic expansion of the soil mass occurs and this causes some swelling.
However swelling mainly occurs due to attraction of dipolar molecules of water to the negatively charged soil
particles. The swelling also depend.. upon a number of other factors, such as mutual repulsion of clay
particles and their adsorbed layers and the expansion of entrnpped air. The mechanism of swelling is much
more complex than that of shrinkage.
ElTects or Shrinkage ond Swelling or Soils
Shrinkage and swelling crc.'lte many problems. as discussed below.
(1) Shrinkage and swelling cause the deformations and stresses in the structures resting on or in the soil.
(2) High swelling pressures develop if the soil has an aa.:ess to water, but is prevented from swelling.
The light strud1!res may be lifted if the swelling pressure ·is excessive.
(3) In semi·arid regions. the clay near the ground surface is subjected to shrinkage during dry periods
and the cracks are formed. During wet periods, the clay swells and the cracks are closed. This
process of the formation and closing of the crocks may cause the development of fissures in soils.
(4) If silt particles drop into the shrinkage cracks formed behind the retaining wall, particles later swell
and force the rctaining wall out of thc plumb. It may cause the failure of the wall if it had not been
properly designed to resist the pre:ssure so developed.
(5) If the soil below the pavements has high Shrinkage and swelling properties, it creates the problems
in the maintenance of highways and runways.
7.15. SlAKING OF ClAY
When a clay that had been dried well below the shrinkage limit is suddenly immersed in water, it
CAPILLARY WATER
~
When the soil dries to a water content lower than
the shrinkage limit. some of the voids gel filled with air
VOIDS FILLED
WITH AIR
(Fig. 7.14). Water enters these air-filled voids when the
'sOil is immersed in water. Jhis causes an explosion of SATURATED VOIDS
the voids, and therefore disintegration of soil occurs.
According to another interpretation. when water Fig. 7.14. Slaking of Clay.
cnler.; the pores. it forms menisci which react against the air in the void. 1be entrapped air is subjecled to
very high pressure and the soil mass disintegrates.
7.[6. nULKJNG OF SAND
if ~I damp sand is loosely dejXISited. its volume is much more than that when the same sand is deposited
in a loose. dry slate. TIle phenomenon of increase in volume of sand due to dampness is known as bulking
of sand.
In damped Slate, cohesion develops between the particles due to capillary water. The cohesion prevents
lhe particles from taking a stable position. A SOrt of honey-comb structure is formed. The effect is
predominant when the waler content is between 4 to 5%. The increase in volume due to bulking is between
20 10 30% for most s.1Ods.
If the damp sand is smurated by adding more water, the effect of capillary action is eliminated and the
volume of the sand mass is decreased.
7.l3. CAPILlARY SIPHONING
In an eanh dam with an impervious core. capillary siphoning may occur (Fig. 7.15). 1be water rises in
tile outer shell due to capillary action. If the crest <top level) of the impervious core is in the rellch of
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
llIustrative Example 7.1. What is the negative pressure in the water just below the meniscus in a
capillary tube of diwlleter 0.1111111 filled with watet, The surface tension is 0.075 Nlm and wetting angle is 10
degrees. .
Solution. From Eq. 7.1.
4 T. cos e 4 )( 0.075 )( 0.9848 .. 0.301 m
hr .. -----gp:;J .. 9.81 )( 1000 x 0.1 )( 10-3
lJIustmllve Example 7.2. Estimate the cnpillQry rise in a soil with a void ratio 0/0.60 and an effective
size of 0.01 mn!. Take C = 15 mm2,
Solution. From Eq. 7.8,
he" e;lo"
0.6 !50 .01 .. 2500 mm .. 205m
illustrative Example 7:3. The PF of a soil is 2.50. Determine the capillary potential of the soiL
Solution. Soli suction .. (10)2.5 .. 316.23 an .. 3.1623 m
Capillary potential .. - 3.1623 x 9.81 )C tal N/m'
.. - 31.02 kN/m2
Dlustratlve Example 7.4. The capillary rise in a soil A with an effective size of 0.02 mm was 6() em.
Estimate the capillary rise in a similar soil B wilh an effective size of 0.04 mm.
(h,h (D",),
Solution. From Eq. 7.8,
(h,), • (D",h
PROBLEMS
A, Numeriall
..
7.1 ~~~~ ~!,~~~a2 r~l ~~, sandy soil which has a void ralio of 0.65 and the effective Si~:::' ~~~~l~i
7.2. The effective size of a soil Is 0,015 mm. Estimate the height of capillary rise. Take surface tension as
0.074 N/m. [Aos. 10 m]
7.3. ;,~~f~~~~e maximum capillary tension for a capillary tube 'of 0.1 mm diameter, Take s[1~~ ;~o:;m~
7.4. The glass vessel shown in fig. P 7.4 is filled with water. It hns two holes of diameter 0.01 em and 0.03 ern as
shown. If a fully- developed meniscus is formed in the upper hole, determine the height h of the wall of the
vesseL [Aos. 20.27 em]
7.5. In Prob, 7.4, if both the holes ore of the some diametcr, equal to 0.Q1 em, determine the cont9Ct angle in the
lower hole if that in the upper hole is zero and h ;; 20,27 an, [ARS. 70.54"1
n. Descriptive and O~edlve Type
7.6. Whnl are different CDtegories of soil Wtltcr ? Dc:saibc in brief,
7.7, Discuss the phenomenon of capillnry rise in soils. What are the factors that effect the height of capillary zone?
7.8. What is soil suaion ? How is it measured? What are the factors thaI affectloH sualon?
CAPILLARY WATER 133
Th
Fig. P.7.4
7.9. Differentiat!! bl!tween frost heave and frost boil. Whm is their tHect on soils? How frost actiun can be
prevented ?
7.1D. Write a note on shrinkage and swelling of soils.
7.11. Discuss the phenomena of slaking and bulking.
8.1. INTRODUCTION
A material is porous if it contains inlenitices. The porous material is permeable if the interstices are
interconnected or continuous. A liquid can flow through a permeable material. Electron photomicrographs of
even very fine clays indicate that the interstices are interconnected. However. the size, cross· seaian, and
orientation of the interstires in diITerent soils arc highly variable. In general. all the soils arc permeable.
The property of a soil which permitS flow of water (or any other liquid) through it, is calkd the
penneability._In other words, the permeability is the ease with which water can flow through it. A soil is
highly pervious when water can now through il easily. In an impervious soil. the permeability is very low and
water cannot easily now through it. A completely impervious soil does nOI pennit the water to flow through
it. However. such completely impervious soils do not exist in nature. as all the soils arc pervious to some
degree. A soil is termed impervious when the permeability is extremely low.
Permeability is a very important engineering property of soils. A knowledge of permeability is essential
in a number of soil engineering problems. suCh as settlement of buildings, yield of wells. seepage through and
below the earth structures. It controls the hydraulic stability of soil masses. The permeability of soils is also
rrquircd in the design of filters used 10 prevent piping in hydraulic structures.
As mentioned in chapter 7, free water or gravitational water flows through soils under the influence of
gravity. Flow of free water depends upon the permeability of the soil and the head causing flow. This chapter
deals with Darcy's law for flow of water, the methods for the determination of permeability and the [adors
affecting the permeability of soils. further details of flow o[ water and seepage problems are discussed in the
next chap{er.
8.2. HYDRAULIC HEAD
'The total head at any point in a flowing fluid is equal to the sum of the elevation (or datum) head, the
pressure head and the velocity head. The elevation head (l) is equal to the vertical distance of the point above
the datum. The pressure head (ply..,) is equal to the head indicated by a piezometer with its tip at that point.
The velocity head is equal to ';ng. However, [or now o[water through soils. as the velocity (v) is extremely
small, the velocity head is neglected. Therefore, the total head o[ water in soil engineering problems is equal
10 the sum o[ the elevation head and the pressure head. for flow problems in soils, the downstream water
level is generally taken a'i datum. The piezometric level is the water level shown by a piezometer inserted at
that point. l'he line joining the piezometric levels at various points is called a piezometric surface. The
piezometric surface also represents the hydraulic gradient Hnc (HGL). The sum o[ the pressure head and the
elevation head is known as the piezometric head.
Fig. 8.1 shows two vessels A and B containing water at different levels and connected by a small lube
containing soil sample. Let the length of the tube be L. lbe flow takes place [rom the vessel A with a high
head to the vessel B with a low head through the tube. With datum at the water level in the vessel B. the
PERMEABlLTfY OF SOILS
e -IZ hZ h'
,f
d
Fig. 8.1. Variolti I·[eads.
,e elevation head, the pressure head and the total hcad at three points I, 2 and 3 are also shown in the figure.
is
The total head at point 1 is h and that at point 3 is zero. llle head h is known as the hydraulic head. It is
d equal to the difference in the elevations of water levels at the entry and exit points in a soil mass. Obviously,
;h it is equal to the loss of head through thc soil. Thc hydraulic head is also known as the effective head.
The loss of head per unit length of flow throujllhc soil is equal to the hydraulic gradient (I),
al
i _ hl L .. (8.1)
,d whcre h hydraulic head. and L = lcngth of the soil specimen.
The variation of head at various points is represented by the line CD, known as the hydraulic gradient
linc (H.G.L.) or pressure gradient line. If a piezometcr is inserted at any intcnnediate point 2, the water will
of rise upto the level of the hydraulic gradient line at that point. The line CD. therefore, represents a piezometric
,.
surface. It is generally assumed thai the loss of head over the length of the soil sample is uniform and,
therefore, the variation of head is linear.
83. DARCY'S lAW
The flow of free water through soil is governed by Darcy's law. In 1856, Darcy demonstrated
experimentally that for laminar flow in a homogcneous soil, the velocity of now (v) is given by
he v _ ki ... (8.2)
ye where k = coofficient of penneability, i = hydraulic gradient.
ilt.
The velocity of flow is also known as the discharge velocity or the. superficial velocity.
:ly
Eq. 8.2 is known as Darcy's law, which is one of the comcr stones of soil engineering. The discharge q
",I
is ootaioed by multiplying the velocity of flow (v) by the total cross· sectional area of soil (A) nonnal to the
tor d.iredion of flow. Thus
al
q _ vA - kiA ... (8.3)
'he
he The area A includes both tbe solidS and the voids.
The coetrJcient of permeability can be defined using Eq. 8.2. If the hydraulic gradient is unity, the
,be coefficient of permeability is equal to the velocity of flow. In other words. the coefficient of penneability is
defined as the velocity of flow which would occur under unit hydraulic gradient. The coefficient of
.gIl
Ihe permeability has the dimensions of velocity [Ln]. It is measured in mmtscc. cmlsee. m/sec, m/day or other
velocity units. The coefficient of penneability depends upon the particle size and upon many other faaors as
136 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
explained later. Table 8.1 gives the typical values of the cocflkicnt of permeability of different soils.
Thble 8.1. 1yplcal Values of the Coefficient of Permeability
Coefficient of
Soil Type penneabilily Drainage
S. No.
(mmlsec) properties
Cleangruvel to+ 1 to 10+2 Very good
to 10+1
..
2 Coarse and medium sands 10- 2 Good
Fine sonds, loose sill 10- 10 10- 2 Fair
4. Dense silt, clayey sillS 1O-~ 10 10-4 p"",
5. Silty day, day 10-3 to 10-5 Very poor
According to USBR, the soils having the coefficient of permeability greater than 10-3 mmJsec are
classified as pervious and those with a value less than 10-5 mm/sec as impervious. The soils with the
coefficient of permeability between 10-5 10 10-3 mm/sec arc designated as semi-pervious.
8.4. VALIDITY OF DAI~CY'S lAW
Darcy's taw is valid if the flow through soils is laminar. 'Inc now of water through soils depends upon
the dimension of interstic.::cs. which, in tum, depend upon the particle size. In fine-grained soils, the dimensions of
the interstices are very small and the flow is necessarily laminar. In coarse-grained soils, the flow is also
generally laminar. However, in very coarse-grained soils, such as coarse grdvels, the flow may be turbulent.
For flow of water through pipes, the flow is laminar when the ReynOlds number is less than 2000.
For flow through soils, it bas been found that the now is laminar if the Reynolds number is less than
unity. For now through soits, the characteristic length in the Reynolds number is taken as the average
particle diameter (D).
Thus
(0) Laboratory Methods. 'Ibc coefficient of permeability of a soil sample can be determined by the
following methods :
(I) Constant-head penneability test
(il) Variable-bead permeability test.
1lle instruments used are known as permeameters. The fonner lest is suitable for relalh1cly more pervious
soils, and the latter for less pervious soils.
(b) Field Methods. l11e coefficient of permeability of a soil deposit in-situ conditions can be delCrmined
by the following fields methods :
(I) Pumping-OUl tests.
(il) Pumping-in tesls.
The pumping-oul tests influence a large area around the pumping well and give an overall value of the
coefficient of permeability of the soil deposit. The pumping-in Icst innucnces a small area around the hole
and therefore gives n value of the coefficient of permeability of the soil surrounding the hole.
(e) indirect Methods. The coefficient of permeability of the soil can also be determined indirectly from
the soil parameters by
(I) Computation from the particle size or its specific surface,
(it) Computation from the consolidation test data.
The first method is used if the partiCle size is known. The second method is used when the coefficient
of volume change has been determined from the consolidation test on the soil.
(d) Caplllurlty-Penneubility test. The coefficient of permeability of an unsaturated soil can be
determined by the capillarity--permeability test (Sect.. 8.16).
8.6. CONSTANT IIEAD PERMEABILITY TEST
The coefficient of permeability of a relatively
more permeable soil can be dClcnnined in a
laboratory by the conslant-head permeability test.
The test is conducted in an instrument known as
constant-he3d permeameter. It consists of a metallic
mould, 100 mm internal diameter, 1273 mm
effeaive height and 1000 ml capacity aocording 10
IS : 2720 (part XVII). The mould is provided with
a detachable extension collar, 100 mm diameter and
60 mm high, required during compaction of soil.
The mould is provided with a drainage base plate
I h
It is essential thai the sample is fully saturated. This is done by one of the following three methods.
(l) By pouring the soil in the pcrmeameter filled with water and thus depositing the soil under water.
(il) By allowing water to flow upward from the base to the top after the soil has been plaoed in the
mould. 1ltis is done by attaching the COrlStant-head reservoir to the drainage base. The upward flow
is maintained for sufficicnt lime till aU the air has been expelled out.
(iit) Dy applying a vacuum pressure of about 700 mm of mercury through the drainage cap for about 15
minutes after closing the drainage valve. Then the soil is saturated by allowing dCllired water to enler
from the drainage base. 1be air-release valve is kept open during saturation process.
After the soil sample has becn saturated. the oonstant-head reservoir is connected to the drainage cap.
Water is allowed to flow out from the drainage base for some time till a steady-stalc is established. The water
level in the constant-head chamber in which the mould is placed is kept constant. The chamber is filled to the
brim at the stan of thc experiment. The water which enters the chamber aner flowing through the sample
spills over the chamber and is collected in a graduated jar for a convenient period. The head causing now (h)
is equal 10 the difference in water levels between the constant-head reservoir and the constant-bead chamber.
If the cross-sectional area of the specimen is A, the discharge is given by (Eq. 8.3)
q .. kiA
q- k~A
k_ ~ ... (8~)
where L ::; length of specimen, h "" head causing flow.
The discharge q is equal to the volume of waler collected divided by time.
The finer particles of the soil specimen have a tendency to migrate towards the end faces when water
flows through it. This results in the formation of a filler skin at the ends. The coefficient of permeability of
these end portions is quite different from that of the middle portion. For more accurate resUlts, it would be
preferable to measure the loss of head hi over a length L' in the middle to determine the hydraulic gradient
(I). Thus i_hilL'.
The temperature of the permeating water should be preferably somewhat higher than that of the soil
sample. This will prevent relea<;e of the air during the test. It also helps in removing the entrapped air in the
pores of the soil. As the water cools, it has a tendency to absorb air.
To reduce the chana:s of formation of large voids al points where the particles of the soil touch tbe
permeameter walls, the diameter of the perrneamcter is kept at team 15 to 20 times the particles size.
To increase the ratc of flow for the soils of low permeability. a gas under pressure is appUed to tbe
surface of water in the constant-head reservoir. The total head causing flow in that case increases to
(h + ply",,), where p is pressure applied.
The bulk density of the soil In the mould may be determined from the mass of the soil in the mould and
its volume. The bulk density should be equal 10 that in the field. The undisturbed sample can also be used
instead of the compacled sample. For accurate results, the specimen should have the same structure as in
natural oonditions.
(See Oiapter 30, Sect. 30.13 for the laboratory experiment).
The const.ant had permeability test is suitable for clean sand and gravel with k > 10- 2 mmJsec.
8.7. VARIABLE-lIEAD PERMEABILfIY TEST
For relatively .less permeable soils, the quantity of water collected in the groduated jar of the
constant-head permeability test is very small and cannot be measured accurately. For such soils, the
variable-head permeability test is used. The permeameter mould is the same as that used in the oonstant-head
permeabiUty test A vertical, graduated stand pipe of known diameter is fitted to the lOp of penneameter:-The
sample is placed between two porous discs. The whole assemblX is placed in a conslant head chamber filled
with water to the brim at the start of Ihe test. F)g. 8.3 shows a schematic sketch. 1be porous discs and waia
PERMEABILITY OF SOILS 139
1I STANO PJPE
from the drainage base when under vacuum. When the soil is
saturated, both the top and bonom outlets are c100ed. The
standpipe is filled with water to the required heighL
The test is staned by allowing the water in the stand pipe to
flow through the sample to the ronstant-head chamber from which
h,
112
h
h
SAMPLI
it overflows and spills out. As the water flows through the soil,
the water level in the standpipe falls. 1be lime required for the
water level to fall from a known initial head (h t) 10 a koown final
head (hi) is determined. The head is measured with reference to
the level of water in the constant- head chamber.
Let us ronsidcr the instant when the head is h. For the
infinitesimal smalltime dt, the head falls by tIh. Let the discharge
through the samplc be q. From continuity of flow,
adh _ -qdt
whcre a is cr06S-scctional area of the standpipe. Fig. 8.3. Variabte Head PermeamelC r.
or adh--(Axkx,)xdt
adh-....4.kx~xdl
A Icdt -dh
-;L-h
,uj' !: ~
*
Jntegrating, dl_
aL IJ - 10, h
where t _ (12 -11), the time intcrval during which the bead reduces from hi to h'2'
Eq. 8.6 is sometimes writtcn as
... (8.7)
The rate of fall of water level in the stand pipe and the rate of flow can be adjusted by changing the area
of the cross-seajon of the standpipe. The smaller diameter pipes are required for less pervious soils.
The coefficient of penneability is reported at 27°C as per IS : 2720 (Part XVII). The void ratio of the
soil is also general1y detennined.
The variable head penneameter is suitable for very fine sand and silt with k ::: 10- '2 to 10-5 mm/scC.
(See Cllapter 30, Sect. 30. 14 for the laboratory experiment).
Somelimes, the permeability test is conducted using the ronsolidomeler instead of the permeametet
140 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
mould (see chapter 12). The fixed-ring consolidometer is used a<; a variable-head permeametcr by attaching a
stand pipe to its base.
8.8. SEEPAGE VELOCITY
The discharge velocity v in Eq. 8.2 is not the actua1 velocity through the interstices of the soil. It is a
fictitious velocity obtained by dividing the total discharge (q) by the total cross-sectional area (A.). The total
CfOSS- sectional area consists of not only the voids but also the solids. As the flow can take place only
through voids, the actual velocity through the voids is much greater than the discharge velocity. TIle actual
velocity on a macroscopic scale is known as the seepage velocity (vs).
r 1
~T~r
~l~l
i----A--1
(.) (b)
Fig. 8.4. Seepage Velocity
Fig. 8.4 (a) shows the longitudinal seaion through a soil sample in which the voids and the solid
particles are segregated. However, it must be clearly understood that the voids and solids in actual soils fonn
a complex system and it is not possible to segregate them . From the oontinuity of flow.
q - vA _ v,A .. ... (.)
where A., is the area of flow through voids and v, is the actual seepage velocity.
From Eq. (a). v, - v x (A/A.~)
Multiplying the numerator and denominator by the length (L) of the specimen,
v, - v x (:. : i) ...(b)
The product (A x L) is equal 10 the lota1 volume V and the prodLKi (A .. x L), equal to Ihe volume of
voids (V.) [Fig. 8.4 (0)].
V
There[ore, v, - v x 'Y:' ... (0)
As the ratio V,IV is equal to the porosity,
v
v _-
, n ... (8.8)
In other words, tlie seepage velocity is equal to the discharge velocity divided by porosity.
Strictly speaking, the seepage velocity is not be absolute velocity through the interstices. The interstices
are tortuous and irregular in cross·section and cannot be represented as shown in Fig. 8.4 (a). The absolute
velocity varies from point to point. Its direttion may also change and, at times, i! may be directly opposite to
the general direction of flow. In fact, the problem is so complex that an analysis based on the absolute
velocity is not possible. Although on the microscopic scale, the flow path is tortuous, on a macroscopic scale,
it can be considered as a straight line. The seepage velocity can be taken a'> the maC'OSa>pic velocity at which
the line of wetting progresses in the direction of flow. ObviOUSly, it is not equal to the absolute velocity as
the water flows not in a straight line but it detours around solid particles. Fortunately, the absolute velocity is
not of much practical use in soil engineering. lbe geotechnical engineer is interested in the macroscopic
behaviour of the soil aDd not in its microscopic behaviour.
The total discharge can be computed using either the discharge velocity (v) or the seepage velocity (VI).
The discharge velocity is more convenient and is commonly used in soil engineering. In this text, when the
tcnn velocity is used without any qualification, it means discharge velocity.
8.9. GENERAL EXPRESSION FOR LAMIHAR FWW
For understanding the flow of water through soils, let us first consider the laminar flow through pipes.
Fig. 8.5 shows a horizontal pipe of circular cross·section of radius R. Let us take a small cylindrical fluid
element of radius r and length I, as shown in figure. The shear srress "'C on the surface of the fluid element is
given by Newton's law of viscositya'>
Integrating, v _ -;f~ i ( ~ ) + C
The constant of integration C can be obtained from the condition of no slip (Le.. v =0) at the boundary
142 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
R .. areaofflow A~
H wetted perimeter ..p:,
Multiplying the numerator and the denominator by the length of the passage (L).
R .. A~ xL.. volume of flow channel
1/ p~ x L surface area of Dow channel
100 volume of Dow channel may be taken as the volume of voids (V~), which is equal to e V, , where e
is the void ratio aod V, is the volume of solids. The surface area of the Dow channel may be worked out 00
the basis of a hypothetical spherical grain of diameter D and having lhe same volume/area ratio as the entire
mass. Thus
V~ eV. 'JtrY/ 6 eD
RII .. A, .. T, .. e --;;[j2 .. 6
Substituting the above value of RII in Eq. (a) and taking n .. el l + e,
q . c,(~)(eN(~)A
q · ~(~)(I: . )D'iA
Replacing C,I36 by another cocfHc ient C,
Eq. 8 .15 gives a general expression for the coefficient of penneabWty of soil.
8.11. FACffiRS AFFEcnNG PERMEABILITY OF SOILS
The following factors affect the permeability of soils.
(1) Particle size. As it is evident from Eq. 8.15, the coefficient of permeability of a soil is proportional
to the square of the particle size (D). l11e permeability of coarse-grained soils is very large as compared to
[hal of fine- grained soils. The permeability of coarse sand may be more than one million times as much that
ofcJay.
(2) Structure or soli mass. The coefficient C in Eq. 8.15 takes into 3CCOlUlt the shape of the flow
passage. The size of the flow passage depends upon the structural arrangement. Hx the same void ralio, the
permeability is more in the case of floca.J1ated structure as compared to that in the diSpersed structure.
Stratified soil deposits have greatcr permeability parallel to the plane of stratification than that
perpendicular to Ihis plane. Pcnncability of a soil deposit also depends upon shrinkage cracks. joints, fissures
and shear wncs. Loess deposits have grealer permeability in the vertical direction than in the horizontal
direction.
The permeability of a natural soil deposit should be detcnnined in undisturbed condition. 1be distwbance
caused duriog sampling may destroy the original structure and affect the penneability. The effect of
disturbance is more pronounced in the case of fmc· grained soils than in the case of coarse-grained soils.
144 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
0·6
t
equation given by Casagrande: 4;'
k - 1.4 ko,,, e' ... (8.16) 0·5
where ~.85 ::: permeability at a void S
ratio of 0.85, k ::: permeability at a ~ 0·1.,
void ratio of e.
(5) Properties of water. As
§
::> 0·3
indicated in Eq. 8.15, the roefficient
of permeability is directly proportional
to the unit weight of water <"t ...) and is 0-2
inversely proportional to its visoosity
(~). The unit weight of water does not ().1
vary much over tbe range of
temperature ordioarily encountered in
soU eogtneering problems. However, O'~04 1- t'rJ
there is a large variation in tbe value COEFFICIENT OF PERMEAB1Ut-V (k) mm/~c: _____
of the ooefficient of visalsity (~). The Fig. 8.7. Varilltlon cllOi k with e.
PBRMEABILITY OF SOILS 145
coeffkient of penneability inaeases with an increase in temperature due to reductiO'I in the visrosity.
It is usual practice (IS : 27111 Part XVU) to report the coefficient of permeabililJ at 27 D C. The following
equation can be used for conversion of the penneability to 27D C.
The coefficient of absolute permeability for a soil with a given void rntio and structure is constant. It has
tbe same value whatever may be the fluid.
IS
q. k (~) (2xn)
,e
or !!!.. .. 2nkzdz
,11 • q
~
or k • • (zl _ zl) log" ('';'') ... (8.22)
Near the test well, there is a rapid drop in head and the slope of the hydraulic gradient is steep, and
asswnption (8) is not satisfied. The observation wells 1 and 2 should be drilled at considerable distance from
'1
the well for acx:urate measurements: The radial distance of the well should be at least equal to the thickness
of aquifer (D). The observation wells are usually arranged in two orthogonal lines, one along the general
direction of flow of the ground water and the other at right angle to this direction.
An approximate value of the coefficient of pennenbility can be detennined if the radius of influence (R)
is known or is estimated. The circle of influence, over whicb the effect of pumping is observed, extend) to a
very large area. In fact, it gradually merges asymptotically 10 Ihe water table. The radiw; of influence varies
between 150 to 300 m. According to Sichardt, it can be found using the relation
R • JrnJdVli
where R = radius of influence (m), d = drawdown (m)
..I and J.: = Coefficient of penneability (m/SeC)
ed According 10 Kozeny (1933), the radius of innuence;
R • [(12 rln)(qk/nJ""]'"
where I is the time required to establish steady oooditions, and II is the porosity.
Eq. 8.21 can be written as
148 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
r
value of the mcmcienl of penneability. P.S. = PIEZOMETRIC
because the slope of the water surface SURFACE
near the well is steep and Dupuit's G.S.
assumption is not justified. Further. the
value 'of the radius of influence (R) is
also approximate.
(b) Confined Aquifer. Fig. 8.9 CONE
--0;.:;--.. .
shows a oonfined aquifer of thickness b DEPRESSION
and lying between the two aquicludcs.
The piezometric surface is above the
top of the aquifer. In mnfined aquifer,
the water pressure is indicated by the
piezometric surface (PS).
11D
T ~.LL<====~
b
CONFINED
AQUIFER
k • q log. ('';'1)
or .(8.24)
2nb(z2- Zt)
2.30q loglO (r2"rt)
or k· ... (8.25)
2nb(z,-zl)
where %1= height of water level in observation well (1) at a radial distance of '1 and
Z2 = height of water level in observation well (2) at a radial distance of '2'
As in the case of an unconfmed aquifer, an approximate value of k can be detennined if the radius of
influence R is known or estimated. In this C&'ie,
k • q log. (RI,.)
... (8.26)
2nb(D-h)
8.14. PUMPING-IN TESTS
Pumping~in tests are conducted to determine the ooefficient of permeability of an individual stratum
through which a hole is drilled. These tests are more economical than the pumping-out test. However, the
PERMEABILITY OF SOIlS 149
pumping-oul tests give more reliable values than that given by pumping-in tests. The pumping-in lests give
the value of the coefficient of permeability of stratum just close to the hole, whereas the pumping-out lests
give the value for a large-area around the hole.
There are b~lcally two types of pumping-in tests: (1) Open-end tests, (2) Packer tests. In an open-end
tests. the water flows oul of the test hole Ihrough its bottom end, whereas in packer tests, the water flows out
through the sides of the section of a hole enclosed between packers. 1be value of the coefficient of
pcnneability is obtained from the quantity of water accepted by the hole. The water pumped-in should be
clean, as tbe impurities, such as sill, clay or any other foreign matter, may cause plugging of the flow
passages. If the water available is tUrbid, it should be clarified in a settling tank or by using a filter. The
temperature of the water pumped in should be slightly higher than the temperature of the ground waler 10
preclude the formation of air bubbles in stratum.
(1) Open~nd 'Jests. A pipe casing is insencd into tbe bore bole to the desired depth and it is cleaned
out. The hole is kept filled with water during cleaning if it extends below the water table. This is necessary
to avoid squeezing of the soil into the bottom of the pipe casing when the driving 1001 is withdrawn.
TH
",
t-'-'--I
lOT
~
~
1
S;ZW.T.
~,
",
(o) (b) (<I
is difficult 10 maintain a constant water level in the casing and some surging of this level has to be tolemted.
Eq. 8.27 can also be used in this case. However, in this case H is equal to the difference of inlet level and
the bottom end of the pipe. If required, the rale of now (q) can be increased by pumping-in water under a
pressure A with a total head of (H + ply..,).
(2) Packer Tests. The packer tests are perfooned in an uncased portion of the pipe casing. The packer
tests are more commonly used for testing of rocks. The tests are occasionally used for testing of soils if the
bore hole can stay open without any casing.
(a) Single packer tests. If the hole cannot stand without a casing, single-packer lest is used. The packer
Is p~ as shown in F4,g. B.l1 (a). Water is pumped into the hole. It comes out of the sides of uncased
portion of the hole below the packer. If the casing is used for the full depth, it should have perforations in
the portion of the stratum being tested. The lower end of the casing is plugged.
(a)
(b )
Fig. 8.U. Packcrtesl5.
When the steady ooooitions are attained. the constant rate of flow (q) is dctmnined. lbe value of the
coefficient of penneability is found by the following equation (USBR, 19(1).
s_ (.10') _ ~
... (8.32)
(.0'16) D
The specific swface of spheres unifonnly distributed in size between the mesh size Q and b, is given by
S _ 61.fiifi ... (8.33)
For accurate results, the ratio alb should not be greater than 2.
Ir the particles arc of irregular shape. the specific surCa<.:e can be determined indirectly from 8
comparison with the specific surface oC unifonn sphere of the same size, and using a factor known as
angularity factor (J).
I .. ;:~~s~::=::s~e:u;!:;~~~~~
The value of f depends upon the angularity of the particles. Its value is usually taken as 1.1 for rounded
sands, 1.25 for sands of medium angularity and 1.4 for angular sands.
If Mh M2 ... Mil are the percentage of the total soil sample retained on different sieves. the overall
specific surface oC the lotal sampk: is given by
S .. j{M1S 1 + M2~ + ...... M"S,,) .•. (8.34)
where S .. S2 ...... 5" are the specific surface of spheres uniformly distribute:! wilhin the corresponding
sieves.
(3) Loudon's Fonnula. Loudon gave the following empirical formula.
IOg10 (k s') - a + bn ... (8.35)
where k = coefficient of permeability (an/sec). S = specific surface (an2/cm\
n = porosity, expressed as a ratio. a = constant, with an average value of 1.365 at lO"e,
b = constant, with an average value of 5.15 at lO"e.
The Loudon fonnula is much more convenient to use than the Kozcny-Carman equation and gives
approximately the same accuracy.
(4) Consolidation test data. 1bc coefflcicnt of permeability of fine-grained soils can be determined
.:ndirectly from the data ootained from a consolidation test conducted on the sample (see chapter 12). It is
given by
Ie - C~'t", m~ - C~p",gm.. ...(8.36)
where Ie :::: coefficient of permeability (m/Sec). C.. = coefficient of consolidation (m 2 /soc),
pw = density of water (kg/m~, g = 9.81 m/sec?,
2
m.. = coefficient of volume compressibility (em /N). y.., = unit weight or water (N/m\
This method is suitable for very fine-grained soils (Ie < Itr mm/sec) for which permeability test cannot
be easily conducted in the laboratory.
8.16. CAPILLARITY-PERMEABILITY TEST
The coefficient of permeability of soil in unsaturated condition can be determined from the
capillarity-penncability test. The apparatus consists of a transparent tube made of lucite or glass, about 35 an
long and 4 em diameter (Fig. 8.13). 1be sampie of the dry soil in powdered form is placed in the tube and
screens are fixed at both ends. One end of the transparent tube is connected to high level waler reservoirs and
the other end is open to atmosphere through an air-vent pipe. The air-vent pipe is connected to the screen at
that end with a spring.
The valve D connecting to the higher reservoir is initially closed. When the valve C connecting to lhe
lower reservoir is opened, capillary action in soil occurs and it draws water into it. The wetled surface starts
advancing towards the open end. Lei us oonsider the stage when the welted surfaoe has advanced by a
distanoe of x. Let the negative capillary head be hrt as shown by an imaginary manometer in figw'C. (The
manometer is imaginary and in actual tests, no manometer is used. It has been shown in the figure just to
PERMEABILITY OP SOILS 1"
IndiaJle the negative bead). The
total bead causing flow is increased
because of the negative bead (he)
and is given by
Integrating, ! 1
Xdx .. i.(h l +
Sn
ht)! dl1
or ..s-il
- 2 - - --S-n-
k.(hl+h.) (
t2 - tl
)
..s - .G
(12-11) ..
21. (hi + h,)
--S-n-- ...(8.37)
Eq. 8.37 can be used to detennine the coefficient of pcnneability (l..) if all other variables are given. As
the capillary head (he) is also not known, there are two unknowns (ktt and ht) on the right-hand side of the
equation. Therefore, one more equation is required.
The SCCX)nd equation can be derived if the head is changed from hi to ~ when the water surface has
advanced 10 about half the length of the transparent tube by closing the valve C and opening the valve
D. Let %2 and x,l by the distances measured from the left end at the time t;2 and I). Eq. 8.37 becomes. for
this case, as
.oi-..s 21. (h,+ h.)
(I)-tV .. --S-n-- ... (8.38)
The values of the unknown k,. and ht can be obtained analytically from Eqs. 8.37 and 8.38. A plol. is
154 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
- __
"1 LAVER 0)
~_LA_~E_R_(2)
_ _"
-q
Let (kllh snd (kllh be the permeability of the layers 1 and 2 rc5ped.ively, parallel to the plane of
stratification and (kh) be the overall penneability in that direction. From Eq. (a), using Darcy's law,
~ )( i )( (HI + Hv - (k")1 )( i '/(, HI + (k"h )( i )( H2
k (kil >.)(
HI + <kiln )( H2
/I - HI + H2
If there are n layers instead of two.
k _ (k"h )( HI + (k"h )( H2 + ... + (k"),, )( H"
ll . . .(8.41)
HI + 112 + ... + II"
(b) Flow normal to the plane or stratlncatlon. Let us consider 8 soil deposit consisting of two layers
of thickness HI and 112 in wbich the now
occurs normal to the plane of stratification (Fig. 8.16).
Loyer 0)
i.
to
I'] '" 1T
T
1
h
Loyer III
I.
WritiDg in teoos of hydraulic grandient (I) and the distance of flow, remembering h .. i )( L,
i" )( H - (i~)1 )( HI + (i..h )( Hl
Us;ng Bqs. (c) and (d),
. H (k,) • H (k,) . H
I" )( - (k~)1 x 1,,)( I + (k~h x ' .. )( 2
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
'"
k, [(Z;, + (Z~ j- H - H, + H,
k..-~
HI H2
(k,), + (k,h
In general, when there are n such layers,
.t.. .. HI + H2 + . .. + HII
... (8.42)
HI . H2 RIO
(k,)' + (k,h + ... + (k,)"
Evan (1962) proved that for isotropic (A;. .. kll) and homogeneous layers. the average permeability of the
entire depooit parallel to the plane of stratification is always greater than that normal to this plane. For
illustration, let us consider a deposit oonsisling of two layers of thickness 1 m and 2 m, having the coefficient
of permeabJljty of 1 )( 10-2 em/sec and 1 x 10-4 an/sec, respectively.
2
From ):I". 8.41. Ie 1)( 10- X 100 + 1 )( 10.... )( 200
"""'I ... .. 100 + 200
.. 0.34 x 10-2 ern/ sec
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Dlustratlve Example 8.1. In a oonstant head penneameter test, the following observations were taken.
))istaIIU between piezometer lappings c:: 100 nun
Altematlve Method
From Eq. 8.16, k.1.4ko.a.~e2
4 x 10-' _ 1.4 ko" x (0.7)'
In this case, Z2" 8.50 - 0.50 - 8.0 m and Zl" 8.50 - 3.0 .. S.sO m
Illustrative Example 8.7. Dnennille the coejficielll of permellbWly of a confined aquifer 5 m thick which
Rilles a .frcelli), tIi.~c/llIrge of 20 /itreslsec through (/ well of 0.3 til radills. The height of water in 'h e well which
1\'(1.\' 10 '" aIJo\'(! the base lJeJ()I1.~ pumping dropped to 8 m. Take the I'Mius of influence as 300 m.
k = q /ogr (Rlr)
Solution. From Eq. 8.26,
2xb(D-h)
lIIustrntive Example 8.8. De/ermine the average coefficient of pemllmbiliry ill 'he horh,ollral and
wmical diret',j(JI1.~ for (I deposit ("(msi~'ril1g of llime layers of thickness 5 m. J til a/1d 2.5 m and having the
cm'fficit:III.\' of perml'a{,ility of 3 x /0-1 /11I11/.H~C. 3 x JO-.~ IIIIIi/sec. and 4 x J(r 2 mmhec. respectively. Assume
tile layer.\· an: i.Wllrvpic,
Solution. From Eq. R.4J. taking /I = 3,
q _ k
dz )
;& ,(z, I)
t.
• ..-I ' ----t160 m - -I
(
qdz_kzdz Fig. E-8.n .
Integrating,
... (0)
PROBLEMS
A Numerkals
8.1. (0) A CODStmt·head permeability test was run on a sand sample 30 em in length and 20 cml in area. When a
loss of bead was 60 em, the quantity of waler ooIlecled in 2 minutcs was 250 mi . Dclennine Ihe mefficient
~ of permeability of the soil.
(b) If the specific gravity of grains was 2.65, and dry mass of the sample, 1.1 kg, find the void ratio of the
sample. [Ans. 0.052 an/Sec; 0.445]
8.5. Calculate Ihe coeflklent of pemleability of a soil sOlmp[e 8 em in height and cross-sectional area 60 cm 2. It is
observed thnt in [2 minutes. 600 ml of water passed down under an effective constant hc~d of 50 em.
On oven drying, Ihe test specimen weighs 750 gm. Taking 2.70 as speeific gravit~ of soil, calculate the
seep:lge velocity of water during the test. lAos. 2.22 x 10-' em/sec; 0.33 emlsec.]
8.6. Fig. P-8.6 shows :J. eros.q·se<:tion through the simla underlying a site. Calculate the equivalent permeability of the
layered system in the venical and horizontal din'Clioll.
.. Assume thaI ench layer i~ isotropic.
[Ans. 1.41 x 10-6 cm/sec: 0.081 emlsec1
Fig. P-S.6.
8.7. A glucial cl;lY deposit eontnins a series of sill partings in il at un average venical spacing of 2 m. If the silt
layel'll are about 5 mm in thiekne.qs and have a permeability of one hundred limes thlll of the clay. determine Ihe
ralio of the- horizontal and vertical penlle.1bi litics. [Aos. 1.244]
,8.8. In l\ flllling-head permeameler ir Ihe time intervals for drop in levels from II( to "2 and 1z2 to 11:1 are equal. prove
thai
8.9. If the eITcrlivc gmin sile of the soil is 0.3 mm, estimate the cocfficielll of permeability. Take Hazen's C = 10.
[Ans. 0.9 mm/sec[
8.10. A soil ha~ a eodlicient of pcrme.1bilily of 0.5 x 10-4 emlsce at 20°C. Determine its vulue when the temperature
rises 10 35°C. (~11O" '" 10.09 x 10-~ paiM: and ~IW'" 7.21 x 10-3 poise). [Ans. 0.7 x 10-4 emlsecJ
8.11. A dminage pipe beneath :I dam h;\s m..-come clogged with sand whose cocflicient of permeability is 10 m/day. It
8.19. How would you (\ctermine the average permeability of a soi l deposit consisting of a number of layers ? What
is its use in soil enboinecring?
8.Z0. Write whether the following statements are true or fnls<:.
(a) The coellicienl of pcrnlcability of II soil increa$Cs with an increase in temperature.
lb) The soils with [\ higher void ralio have alw3Ys greater pt!mll~ability than soils with a smaller void ratio.
(el The coctlic.:icnl of pcnncability decreases with un increase in the specific surfncc.
(d) For a given soil, the coefficient of permeability incrctlscs with an increase in void mtio.
tel For a soil deposit co nsisting of isotropic layers, the cocftident of permeability parallel \0 the plane of
st[;).lificalion is always greater than that normal 10 [his plane.
if> The variable-head permeability tcst is used for fine- grain¢.! soils_
(8) The line joining the piezometric.: surra(:"cs i~ also known us the hydraulic grac.lient line.
IAns. True (a). (e), (tI). (to). 00, (g»)
C. Multiple-Choice Questions
I. The pcrmellbility of sOil varies
(a) inversely as square of grain size (b) liS SqUllrc of grain sizt/:
(e) as grain size (tl) invt/:rsely as void ratio.
2. The maximum particle size for which Darcy's IllW is applicnble is
(a) 0.2 mm (b) 0.5 mm
(e) 1.0 mm (J) 2.0 mm
3. According to U.S.B.R .. n soil with n coemdent of pcrmeubiHty of 10-4 mmlsec will be classified as
(a) Pervious (b) ImperviOUS
le) Semi-pervious (e) Highly pccvious
4. The coefficient of permeability of clay is generally.
(a) Between 10-1 lind 10-1 mmls (b) Between IO-~ and 10-4 millis
(e) Between 10-:'1 and 10-11 mmls (JJ Less then ro-ll mm/s
5. A constant-head permeamcter is used for
(a) Conrse-grained soils (b) Silty soils
(e) Clayey soils {d)Organic soils
6 , The coemcient or permeability of a soil
(a) increa.~es with a increase in temperature.
(b) increases with II decrca.~e in temperature.
(e) incrcase~ with II dt.'Crea.~e in unit weight of water.
(tI) decreases with an increase in void rJtio.
1. A soil has a discharge velocity of 6 x 10-1 mls and a void r.llio of 0.50. Its seepage velocity is
(a) 18 x 10-1 mls (h) 12 x 10-7 mls
(C') 24 x 10-1 m/s (tl) 36 x 10-7 IIlls
8. In a pumping.out lest. tlte druwdown i.~ 5m. If the coefficient of permeability of the soil is IO-lmls, the radius
of inlluence will be about
(a) 250 m (b) 300 m
(e) 150 m (rl) 200 m
9. For II sphere of 0.5 111111 diameter. the specific surface is
(a) 12 mm- I (b) 6 mm- t
(c) 8 mm- I (rl) 9 mm- t
~_I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~a~
9
Seepage Analysis
I. INTRODVcnON
Seepage is the flow of water under gravitational forces in a pcnneablc medium. Flow of waler lakes
place from a point of high head to a point of low head. The flow is generally hlminnr. ,
The path taken by a water particle is represented by a flow line. Although an infinite number of now
lines can be drawn, for convenience, only a few arc drawn. At certain points on different flow lines, the total
head will be the same. '111e lines connecting points of equal total head can be drawn. These lines arc known
as equipotential lines. As flow always takes place along the steepest hydraulic gradient, the equipotential lines
cross flow lines at right angles. TIle flow Unes and equipotential lines together form a flow net. The flow net
gives a pictorial rcpresentalion of Ihe path taken by water particles and the head variation along Ihat path.
Fig. 9.1 (a) shows a glass cylinder containing a soil sample of length L. A steady now occurs vertically
downward through the soil sample under a head of II. The elevation head, the pressure head and the total head
(0)
I) 0 ·251'1
O·5L O.5L"'H,-O.5h L+Ht-O.51"1
,,0.5"-O.5l :0·51'1
Flow nel
(0)
at points. A, Band C can be worked oul as shown in Fig. 9.1 (b) and 9.1 (e). The point B is at a height of
0.5 L above the datum. As the rate of loss of head is linear, the loss of he.'ld upto point B is hfl. Therefore,
the total head at point B is IIfl. Fig. 9.1 (d) shO\Vs 0 simple flow net, in which five flow lines and an equal
number of equipotcntinllincs are drawn. TIle equipotential lines are horizontal and the now lines arc vertical
in this case. If a dye is inserted al a few points on the top of the soil sample, the paths taken by the dye
represent the flow lines. 11lc flow nets in aclua! soil engineering problems are not as simple as shown in the
figure.
In Ihis chapter, the methods for construction of flow nct and their uses arc discussed. 1be forces
associated with seepage and their effect on the stresses are dealt in the following chapter.
9.2. l:APlACE'S EQUATION
The simple method of construction of flow net as explained above cannot be used for soil engineering
problems in which the flow is generally two-dimensional The Laplace equarion is used in the construction
of the flow net in such cases.
The follOWing assumptions arc made in the derivation of the Laplace equation:
(1) The flow is two-dimensional.
(2) Water and soil are incompressible.
(3) Soil is isotropiC arfd homogeneous.
(4) The soil is fully saturated.
(5) The flow is steady, Le., flow conditions do not change with time.
(6) Darcy's law is valid.
Let us consider an element of soil of size dx by dz through which Dow is taking place (Fig. 9.2). The
third dimension along y-a:ds is large. For convenience, it is taken as unity. Let the velocity at the inlet and
outlet faces be v" and ( v.. + ~: . dx) in x-direction and Vz and ( ".. + ~ . dz) in z-direction.
"D
-... ----. Yx + ~V, 1
~ d_
1
""
Fig. 9.2. Two-dImensional Row.
As the flow is steady and the soil is incompressible, the discharge entering tbe element is equal to thal
leaving the element.
or (~ + ~) .. 0 ...(9.1)
and
V
z
- -k ~
Substituting the values of V;r and v, in Eq. 9.1,
t.t t.t 0
ar'+ai'- ... (9.3)
..[9.4(a)]
ihI>-!':'I>.·u+!':'I>.·tt.
ax az
166 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
or
(1!) _"-
dx... V.o:
...(9.5)
-k* . .
and *.
~ - v, -
v: .. - k y£ ... [9.6(b)J
[96(o)J
d'''~'dx+~.dz
If $ is a constant along a curve, dcp .. 0
Hence, O-~'dx+~dz
or (dz)
dX ... - ~ v,
acp/oz .. - ~ ... (9.7)
or n~
ariJz" iPz
and -~-~
., ax
SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 161
_i'.!.. ~
ilxiJz 0:2
Therefore, ~ + ~ __ .i.t + l i _0
;v? ar- axaz araz
Thus., the stream function ("') also satisfies the Laplace equation.
Determination of Discharge
The discharge 6q between two adjacent flow lines 'tjI and (til + .6.",) can be determined as follows
[Fig. 9.3 (a)].
The discharge is equal to the resultant velocity v multiplied by the nonnal distance (An) between 'tjI and
('I' + d\j». Obviously.
discharge _ - v~ de + v", dz
A
Therefore, 6.q - J",:t+ '"
(- v" dr + v",dz)
~.~~+~ . ~
Using Eqs. 9.6, ~ _ v", cos a + v", (-sin a)
Likewise,
depend much on the exaciness of the now net. A reasonably good estimate of hydraulic quantities can be
made even from a rough flow net.
'fl1e following points should be kept in mind while sketching the now net.
(1) Too many flow channels distrad the attention from the essential features. Nonnally, three to five
flow d:13nnels are sufficient. (The space between two flow lines is called a flow channel).
(2) The appearance of the entire flow net should be watched and not th:lt of a part of it. Small details
can be adjusted after tbe entire Dow net bas been roughly drawn.
(3) The curves should be roughly elliptical or parabolic in shape.
(4) All transitions should be smooth.
(5) The flow lines and equipotential lines should be orthogonal and form approximate squares.
(6) The size of the square in a flow channel should change gradually from the upstream to Ihe
downstream.
The procedure for drawing the flow net can be divided into (he following steps:
(1) First identify the hydraulic boundary conditions. In Fig. 9.5, the upstream bed lcvel GDAK represents
100% potential line and the downstream bed level CFJ, 0% potential linc. The first flow line KLM hugs the
II is nOl necessary tbat the last flow channel should make oomplete squares. The flow fields in the last
channel may be approximate rectangles with the same length to width ratio. In this ca<>e, the number of flow
channels would not be full integer. In facl, the flow channels will be an integer only by chance.
kfA ~
1-
....w : q - Law:I_K' ' ,4
2. Disclurge,q Current, 1
3. Hend,h VoImge,E
4. Length, L Length. L
5. Nen,A A1ea,A
6. Permeability. k Conductivity, K
An electrical model is , made whose boundary conditions are similar to those of the soil modeL 1be
equipotential lines are drawn by joining the points of equal voltage. The now pauem obtained from the
elcctrical model are used in the construction of Oow net in the model.
The following three types of electrical. analogy modelS are used.
(I) Electrical Analogy Tray. A shallow tray, with a flat bottom , made of an insulating material is taken.
The tray is filled with water. A small quantity of salt or hydrochloric acid or copper sulphate solution is added
to water to make it a good conductor of electricity.
The hyd~ulic boundaries are simulated on the tray. For the flow below a sheet pile shown in Fig. 9.6
(a), the boundary flow lines :)rt ABC and FG. An insulating material, such as ebonite or pcrspcx, is used to
simulate the boundary flow lines. The insulating material is fixed to the tray by means of some
non-conducting adhesive, such as plasticene or bee wax.
The boundary equipotential lines DA and CE are simulated by some good conductor of electricity such
as copper bars.
For obtaining the flow pauern, an electrical potential difference of 20 V is applied to the two electrodes
DA and CEo A VOltage dividing variable resistor, known as potential divider, is connected in parallel to the
alternating current source to vary the voltage in the range of 0 to 20 V. A galvanometer (or any other null
indicator) and a probe are connected to the variable potential ann [Fig. 9.6 (b)].
The position of the equipolentiallines is determined by locating the points of oonstant potential (VOltage).
To trace the equipotential line corresponding to a given percentage of total potential (say }O%), the VOltage
divider is set at that potential (2V). 1be 'Probe is moved in the tray till the galvanometer shows no ament
flow. That position of the probe gives tbe point corresponding to 2V potential. By moving the probe, other
points corresponding to that potential are obtained. A graph sheet is generally placed below the transparent
plate to detennine the roordinates of the poinlS. A line joining all these points gives the equipotential line
corresponding to 10% of the total head. likewise, the c:;quipotential line oorrespooding to 20% of the total
head is3lbtained by changing the selling on the voltage, divider to 4V and repeating the procedure. Other
equipotential lines can be drawn in the same manner.
After the equipotential Ii"es have been draWl), flqw lines can be sketched manually. The flow lines
should be orthogonal to the Cfluipotential lines and must. satisfy the actual hydraulic boundary conditions.
Alternatively, the flow lines can be drown electrically by interchanging the boundaries. The copper strips are
used for impenneable boundaries ABC and FG and insulating strips for VA and CEo The VOltage difference
SllEPAGE ANALYsrS 171
~:
help of probe.
(2) Conducting Paper Method. A
conducting paper is made by
introducing graphite during its
manufacture. One side of the graphite
paper is coated with a non-conducting
material and the other side wilh Ii
positive aluminum coating. The paper
is CUI to the shape of the hydraulic
structure for which the flow net is F G
required. The boundary equipotential 7 / / ) / / / / ; ; ?/Ta( ) ) J / ) ) ))???
lines, such as DA and CE in Fig. 9.6
(a), are given a coating of silver paint.
When the paint has dried, the
connecting wires are spaced out along
GAlVA,NOMET6I
the boundary strips in individual
strands and are stapled in position.
Direct current (D.C.) supply can be
used as there are no polarization TRAYFIUEO
effects. A 2- V accumulator is used for WlrH WATER
'rt
A seepage flume of width of a few centimeters is used in thi... mcthoo. A model made of plastic is
fastened to one side wall of Ihe flume, leaving II small space of 2.5 mm or less between ,Ihe model and the
olher side wall (Fig. 9.8).
GLYCERINE
') PLASTIC
" MODEL
SIDE VIEW
Fig. 9.8. Plastic model.
A highly viscous fluid. such as glycerine, is made to seep through the small space between the model and
the side wall. The flow is laminar. As the fluid flows, it gives an accurate representation of seepage through
soil. The flow lines can be observed directly by injecting II dye at suitable points.
Plastic models can be constructed more quickly than soil models. The flow lines in such models are also
better defined. Consequently, the flow net obtained is more acaJrate than that obtained from soil models.
Different penneabilitics of the soil can be accounted for by varying the space between the model and the
wall. Anisotropic soils can be represented by a zig-zag face.
9.9. FLOW NET BY SOLUTION OF LAPLACE'S EQUATION
Laplace's equatiqn can be solved by numerical techniques, such as finite difference method. Relaxation
method is generally used to find the potentials at various points. Once the potentials have been determined at
different oodal points, the equipotential lines are drawn by joining the points of equal potentials. Potentials
can be obtained very quickly if a high-speed digital computer is available.
The Laplace equation (Eq. 93) can be written in fmite difference form, as
~+.+~+~-~.O .. ~~
where '10
b ch and , .. are the potentials at the four adjoining points around the central point 0 with the
potenlial " (Ag. 9.9).
The aos,s-section of the earth structure, for which the flow net is required, is covered with a square grid
with a number of nodes. The values of the potential (,) at various nodal points 2rc assumed, satisfying the
SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 173
hydraulic boundary conditions. As the assumed values are not r--- --- 2 ------,
correct. there would be a residual Ro at point 0, given by the I 2 i
equation, 1 I
" + ~ + +.J + ,. -4$0 • Ro ... (9.15) :I 1I
Each node is oonsidered as a central node in tum and the
residual determined. The ooject of the rela'tatioo method is to 3 ., 1
reduce these rcsidu.'lls !o uro. It must be borne in mind that the
potentials at different nodes are inter-related and any change in
!
I
i
I
potential at one node has an effect on the residuals at the adjacent
nodes. The process is, therefore, quile tedius and time-
I I
L. ______ .~ _____ J
consuming. Howevcr, special relaxation techniques have been
devised to reduce the effort. •
The final com~ct value of $ give the true picture of the GRID AROUMl ·0·
variation of potential. The equipotential lines are drawn through
the points o( equal potentials. 'Ibc flow lines are then drawn Ag. 9.9. Fillito Diffcl'<:llocGrid
orthogonal to equipotcntial lincs.
9.10. FLOW NET IN EARTU DAMS wnn A HORIZONTAL FILTER
"ll1e methods of drawing a flow net discussed in the preceding sections are used when the boundary flow
lines and equipotential lines are given. Seepage through an earth dam is a case of unconfined seepage in
which the upper boundary of flow net
is not known. In such cases, it becomes
necessary to first locate the upper
boundary before a now net can be
drawn.
Let US consider the case of a
homogeneous eanh dam on an impervi- FILTER
ous foundation and having a hOrizontal
filter at the downstream end (Fig. 9.10).
The horizontal filter starts at point C. Fig. 9.10. EArth Dam with a horizontal filter
The impermeable boundary CD is a flow line wh:ich forms Ihe,lower boundary of the flow oct. The upstream
face AD is an equipotential line as the total head at every point on this face is equal to h. The discharge face
cn is the equipotential line of zero potential. Thus, Ihn:c hyclnlulLc houndarv c(>nditicms :Ire known.
The fourth boundary of the flow net is
the lap flow line AB, which is not known in
A
the beginning. Below the line AB, the soil is
saturated and the pressure every where on the
AB is atmospheric. The line AB is known a<>
phreatic line or seepage line. As the pressure PERVI().J5
Kozcny's conditions arc not entirely fulfIlled by any practical earth dam. However, an earth dam with a
horizontal drainage approximates the conditions at exit. An inconsistency occurs due to the fact that tbe
upstream equipotential tine in an actual earth dam is a plane surface and not a parabola as assumed by
Kozeny. OIs3grnnde (1940) recommended ilial the seepage line in actual dams can also be taken as ba<>ic
parabola. provided the starting point for the parabola is taken al point E, sucb that AE '" 0.3 AF (Fig. 9.10).
The distance AF is the projection of the upstream slope Oil the water surface. lbe coordinates of the phreatic
line can be determined using Eg. 9.16. The origin is at C, which is also the focus.
Substituting z = 0 in Eq. 9.16, the value of x is given by
xo .. i (;) - ik or q - 2kXo
The distance 2xo between the focus and the diredrix is known as focal distance (s). Thus
q - b ... (9.17)
Substituting the value of q from Eq. 9.17 in Eq. 9.16,
x-~(¥-tr')-f-t
or i-2xs-? .. 0 ... (9.18)
Eg. 9.18 can also be derived directly using the property of the parabola that the distance o( any point P
on the parabola (rom the focus is equal to the distance from the directrix. (Fig. 9.12). lbus
FP - PO
~ .. s-x
By squaring, Xl + ? .. i + x2_2sx
or i-2rs-?-O
If x is taken positive towards left of F. the above
equation becomes
s' 2xs-r' _
+ 0 ... (9.19)
The value of s can be determined using the
coordinates of the starting point E (Fig. 9.10).
Substituting x .. d and z _ " in Eq. 9.19. PARABOLA~
s2 + 2ds_h 2 .. 0
-2d=~
2
Fig. 9.12. Properties of PlIl<lootli.
Taking positive sign, s _ ..; (Jl + h 2 ) -d ... (9.20)
Once the value of $ has been determined, Eq. 9.19 can be used to determine the coordinates of the
various points on the phreatic line. For diITerenl value of X, the corresponding z coordinates are computed and
ploUed.
SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 175
15 10
l~"m~~
q '"' k· ~ . (z x 1) ...(a)
Cd)
Fig. 9.16.
laking the point C as the focus and also the origin. 'lbc phreatic line is given the entry correction as before.
An additional correction at exit is required in Ihis casc, as the basic parabola goes outside Ihe
downstream face, which is impossible. lbe actual seepage line meets the discharge face langcntially for
p < 90°, ll1c seepage line has been shown by full line, whereas the theoretical basic parabola is shown
by dotted line.
In the case of borizontal filter, the angle p is 180<> [Fig. 9.16 (b)]. For a rock toe [Fig. 9.16 (c)J, the angle
~ is greater than 90<>. The phreatic line drops vertically in this case.
Casagrande gave the charts for the exit
correction. The basic parabola is shifted by
O. ,
distance 6.a 10 locale the point where the actual '-----....
seepage line cuts the discharge face. The value o·3
of All is obtained [rom the value or "-
I
~
'" "'"
Aa/(a + 6.a) after the distance (a + Aa) is
obtained from the basic parabola. lbe value o[ .+ o· 2
Aa/(a + An) depends upon the angle p, given in
Fig. 9.16 (d). The value is also available in the
"'.
6 ·1
~
form of a curve (Fig. 9.17). It is wonh noting
that the correction is zero when the angle fl is
ISO. That is the reason why exit correction was o·0
not applied in the case of horizontal filler. The 30 90 126 156
chart is applicable [or p :t 30<>. /l--
Fig. 9.17. Casagrnnd's Chart.
Obviously, An .. C (a + ALl)
where C is the correction [actor obtained from the chart (Fig. 9.17)
9.12. SEEPAGE THROUGll EARTH DAM WITH DISCHARGE ANGLE LESS TllAN 30°
If the angle p is less than 30<> (Fig. 9.1 8). point S at where the seepage line becomes tangential to
downstream face can be obtained using Schaffemack's method. It is assumed that part CS of the seepage line
is a straight line. A tangent at point S coincides over the length CS with tbe seepage line.
SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 177
Fig. 9.18
But ~ .. i .. tanp
kz ~ .. kosin~tan~
zdt - asinptan~dr
Integrating between x .. 0 cos P to x .. d., and between z .. 0 sin P to h,
..
j ,' zdz = o~tanpj
.~,
+ 2d. V4d'-4(h'COSP/Sin'P)COSP
0" 2cosp
... (9.24)
Once the value of 0 has been detennined from Eq. 9.24, the discharge can be found using Eq. 9.23.
9.13. SEEPAGE THROUGH EARm DAM WITH DISCHARGE ANGLE GREATER mAN 30°
BUT LESS THAN 60°.
Eq. 9.24 was obtained on the basis of Dupuit's assumplioo that the hydraulic gradient is equal to dz/dr,
Casagrande suggested that the actual hydraulic gradient for discharge angle greater Ihan 3Q°is given by
178 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
. dz
I .. (is
where distance s is measured along the curve.
Based on tbis assumption, the discharge expression can be written as
q_k(~)Z ... (9.25)
T h
1
I.
Fi.g 9.19. Earth Dam with dischJirge ~ng!e greater than 30".
aod ~ - sin~
Therefore. Eq. (9.25) becomes q .. kasin'lj3 ... (9.26)
Integrating, ! zdz .. aj
culnp (J
(sinzj3)ds
of flow channels. The difference between two adjacent equipotential lines is called ~ quipotcntial drop. l...ct
Nd be the number of equipotential drops. In Fig. 9.20, there are 5 flow channels and 10 equipotential drops.
n:l///
I
/
I
2/
31
" lI \ \
\8\ \\
! ! 4! 5 6\ '1
/ : ~
777;;;);;;}) 777/;; 777 77l!..17;)) J
IIo1PERVlOOS
dq - k . (* 1 (dn x 1) .. (a)
where llh is equipotential drop in the flow field,
and /!..s and t:.n are dimensions of the flow field.
Substituting Ah - -k in Eq. (a),
dq - k· ~.
Nd
("-!!.)
As
The rotio (NINd ) is a characteristic of the flow net. It is known as shape [actor (p). It is independent
of the penneability (k) of the soil. It depends only on the configuration or the shape of the soil mass.
It is not necessary that NI and Nd be always full integer. The last flow channel may consist of rectangles,
However, in the last flow channel, the \englhtbreadlh (/!..s/6n) ratio should be approximately the same for all
flow fields.
(2) Thtnl head. The loss of head (Ah) from one equipotential line to the next is hINd' The total head at
aoy point (P) can be delennined as under.
h, _ h - n x (hiNd) ... (9.31)
where n is the number of the equipotential drops upto point P.
In Fig. 9.20, n = 8 for point P. Therefore, total head at P is
I'" SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
TD"-
'"
1.
c.) C"
Fig. 9.21. Trnnsfonnlllion of Coordinates.
SEEPAGE ANALYSIS 181
( ~)t!!+i'h.O
k. a2 a?
2
or a h+i'h.o ... (9.36)
a;; a?
Eq. 9.36 is the Lnplace equation in X, and z. Therefore, the principles of flow net construction can be
used for anisotropic soils after transfocmmion.
The cross-section of the soil mass whose flow nel is required is redrawn keeping the z·scale unchanged
but reducing the x- scale by the ratio ~. The flow net is constructed for the transformed section by usual
methods [Fig. 9.22 (b)]. The flow nCI for the actual section is obtained by transferring back the flow nct to
the natural section by increasing the x-scale in the ratio ..ff;7iZ;. Obviously. the flow nct for the natural section
docs not have the flow lines and the equipotcntial lines orthogonal to each other [Fig. 9.22 (a)J.
¥s - ~ . ~ + *. . ~
i .._'
(0)
Using the relations,
-kx~. v~ _ -~ ¥Z
~,
v% -
-~ _ -~ . ~ - ~ . ~ ... (b)
Fig. 9.23. PenneAbility in an indined direction
Now V% _ VI cos a and vl _ VI sin a
~-cooa and~_Sina
... (9.40)
tl tz J'
, : l
,, kd, .f
--....... ~,'
(0) (b)
k, <"'"
Fig. 9.26. Non-homogeneous llCCli~.
)84 son. MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(3) The now net in soiJs-2 consists of rectangles. The ratio of the sides of the rcaangIe can be
determined as under: From Eq. 9.41,
k) (~::) - k, (~~)
!;: - ~ (~::)
Ani .6.n:z k1
6$-1, 652-1;
or
/>.'2
1n Fig. 9.26, as ~ > k J • !J. n2 > 1.0
If the ratio of permeability is greater than 10, now net in the soil of higher permeability nced not be
drawn. Tbe 1005 of head in the soil of higher permeability is neglected. For example, in Fig. 9.26, if
k t > 104 the flow net in soil-l is neglected and it is assumed thnt the now lines in soil-l are horizontal.
The flow net will be constructed only (or soil-2, taking the interface as the uj:l>tream face. On the other
hand, if kz > 10 *10 the flow net will be drawn only for soil-I. In Ibis latter case, the interface will act as
D. discharge face.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Illustrative Example 9.1. Determine the coordinates of the phreatic line for the earth dam shown in Fig.
9.14, Find the discharge through the earth dmn from the flow net and also analytically. Taire k =
4.5 X 1fT'
em/sec.
Solution. From Eq. 9.20, taking d = 72.5 m and h = 30 m,
, _ >I(d' + h') - d
-~-72.5-5.96m
The coordinates of the phreatic line are determined from Eq. 9.19.
i+7xs-il-o
or (5.96)' + 2x(5.96)-; - 0
35.52 + 11.92x-il - 0
1be I-coordinates are determined for different values of x as under.
+72.5 m
30m
Fig. E-9.2
The total head at the two extremities or the floor are 7.0 m and 0.5 m. These are also equal to the
pressure heads, as the underface or the floor is al the datum (dis level).
Total uplift roree U - t (hl + flu 1... x area
- ~(7.0 + 0.50) x 9.81 x (28.5 x 1)
or U - 1048.4 kN
The length (As) or the last C10w field ncar toe is 1.0 m.
Thererore, exit gradient (I) _ 6.h/lls _ 0.5/1.00 _ 0.50
PROBLEMS
9.1. Determine the seepage discharge through the foundlltion of an earth dDm if the flow net has 10 cquipolcnlial
drops and 3.5 flow channels. The length of the dam is 300 m Dnd the coefficient of permeability of the soil is
2.5)( 10'" cm/see. The level of water above the base of the dam is 12 m on upstream and 4 m on downstream.
lAns.66.23 )( 103 rnll yearJ
9.Z. In the experimental set up shown in Fig. P 9.2, now lakes place undcr a constant head through the soils A
andD.
Fia. P9.2.
186 SOIL MECHANICS AND rOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
Fig. P9.3.
Also determine the seepage discharge per unit length jf the coefficient of permeability is 40 m/dOlY.
IAns. s .. 3.99 m, q = 159.6 m1/dayj
9.4. A Stlndy stratum 5 m thick has II slope of 1 in 10 and lies between two impervious simta (Fig. P 9.4). If the
piezometers inserted at two points 20 m apart indicate a pressure difference of 3.5m nnd the coefficient of
permeability is 1.91 )( 10""" cm/sec, determine the seepage dischnrge. [Ans. 5.96 litccSolbour]
Fig. P9.4.
9.5. Water percolntes across a rcclilngulnr silly earth fill 30 rn long and 15 m wide. The fiJI is founded on an
impervious strotum and the depth of watcr on one side is 5.0. Compute the seepage dischllrge. Ie = 0.15
crn/minute.. [Ans, 108 m3/dny]
9.6. A homogcneous dam is 21.5 m high and has a free board of 1.5 m. A flow net was constructed and the
following results were observed.
No. of polcntinl drops '" 12
No. of now chnnels =3
The dam has n horizonUlI fillcr of 15 m length
Cnlculate the discharge/m length of the darn if the coefficient or permeability or the dam mnterinl is 2.7 )(
10~ rnlsec. . [Ans. 1.35 )( 10-5 culllCCS/m]
Fig. P9.7.
9.10. Describe the electrical analogy method of flow net construction.
9.11. Prove that the discharge per unit width of .:m earth dam with Il horizOI1Ull filter Ilt its toe is equal to the
coofficient of permeability times the focal length.
9.12. Prove that the discharge through on earth mass iii given by
q ... k..-t;'Nf
where 1r .. coefficient of permeability, Ii :: head, Nt = number of flow ch:mneis,
Nd "' number of equipotcntial drops.
9.13. How would you draw the flow nct for a homogcneom earth dam without any filter 1
9.14. Whlll is entry correction of the flow nct 1 How is it donc 1
9.15. How would you conslructthe flow net when lhe soil is anisotropic 1
9.16. Explain the method of constructing the flow net in an earth dam consisting of two different zones.
9.17. Memion whether the fallowing sUitemems are true or false.
(a) The flow lines and equipotential lines are orthogonal for an isotropic soil.
(b) The number of equipotential lines and flow lines is always a full integer.
(c) In two-dimensional flow, the velocity in the thi rd direction is zero.
Cd) The velocity potential is equal to the totnI head.
(e) The flow net for anisotropic soil can be obtained from Loplacc's equation.
(/) The electrical analogy method can be used to obUlin directly flow lines.
(g) Relaxation method is used 10 determine the potentiDls at various poinlS.
(Ii) The upstream fDoe of an earth dam is an equipotential line.
(I) The shape factor depends upon the type of soil.
(J) When the flow pl\'iSCS from a soil of high permeability to that of low penneability, Ihe flow lines are
deflected aWllY from the normal. ~
(1) The equipD(ential lines make equal vertical intercepts on the phreatic line.
(I) The phreatic line of a homogeneous seccion always cuts the downstream face.
(m) The phreatic line at the entrance may rise upward.
(n) For an earth dam with a horizonUlI filter DC its downstream loe, lhe casagrande exit correction is zero.
IA..... Tru', (Q~ (,~ (j), (g), (h), ('), (I), (n)]
C. Multiple-Choice Questions
1. The phreatic line in a homogeneous dam is
(a) Circular (b) Ellipliad
(c) Hyperbolic (II) Parabolic
2. If there is flow from a soil of permeability «1 to-that or k2, the angles Ih and 02 which the flow line makes witb
the normal to the interface are related as
", SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
sin9t kl
(tI) sina2 = k2
(c) c~se l = ~
COSe2 k2
3. The pressure on :l phreatic line is
«(I) cqunllo atmospheric pressure.
(b) greater than Iltmospheric pressure.
(e) less than atmospheric pressure.
(d) nOI related to Ihe atmospheric prcssure.
4. A !low net ha.' 4 !low channels and 20 eq uipotential drops. the shape factor is
(a) 1/5 (b) 5
(a) 80 (,I) None of above
5. For an isotopic soil, k,,/kz '" 9. For the transposed section. th e horizontal scale should be
(Q) 1/9 (b) J/3
(e) nl ree limes (d) N ine times
6. The slarting point of the horizontal dminage is usually taken as .... of parabola
(a) Focus (b) Origin
(c) Vertex (d) Both (a) and (h)
7. If the flow net of a cofTcrd:lnl foundation ha.~
II = 6m. N.I = 6 and N,I = 18, k = 4 x IO-~ m/inin. then the sccp;tgc discharge (in m3/d) per m lenglh is
(0) 0.2304 (b) 0.1152
(el 1.0368 (d) 2.304
8. A fl ow net can be used 10 determine
(a) Seepage. cocflicicnt of permeability und uplift pre.qsure
(b) Seepage. coell1cient of permeability and exil gradient
(c ) Seepage, exit grndient nnd uplift pressure
(d) Seepage and ex it gmdient o nl y
9. For an an isOlropic soil with kx = 4kz. the value of the modified coefficient of permeability k' is
~)2kx W4kx
(d 0.5 kx Cd) 0.25 kx
10. For a now net wilh Nt'" 5 und N,I = 20, the shape factor is
(a) 0.25 (b) 4.0
(el lOO (d) 1.0
(An.<;. I. (d). 2. (b). 3. (a). 4. (a) 5. (b), 6. Cd), 7. (b), 8. (e), 9. (a) . 10. (a)]
10
Effective Stress Principle
10.1. INTRODUcnON
The effective SlreSS principle enunciated by Karl Thrzaghi in 1936 fonns an extremely useful basis of the
most importanf theories in soil engineering. 1be effective stress principle consists of two parts :
1. Oefmitioo of the effective stress.
2. Importance of the effective stress in engineering behaviour of soil
This dlapter is devoted mainly to the fin! part. 1be socond part dealing with the importance of effective
stress is discussed briefly in the follOWing article. The role of effedive stress on compression rflaraderistics
and shear strength is dealt in detail in chapters 12 and 13, respectively.
The methods for determination of effective stress in soils for hydrostatic conditions and for steady
seepage conditions are discussed separately. The effect of seepage pressure on the stability of the soil masses
in described. Piping failures and the methods for its prevention are also disrussed.
10.2. EFFECTIVE STRESS PRINCIPLE
(1) DeOnilion of Effective Siress
Fig. 10.1 shows a soil mass which is fully saturated. Let us oonsider a prism of soil with a O"OSS-sectional
area A. The weight P of the soil in lhe prism is given by
P _ Y,tII hA ...(a)
where YUIl is the saturated weight of the soil. aod h is the height of lhe prism.
Total stress (a) on the base of the prism is equal to the force per unit area. Thus
I
Pore water pressure (u) 15 the pressure due to pore water
The lOtal normal force P acting on the soil model is resisted partly by the interparticle forces at the points
of contact (P"') and panly by the pore water pressure force (P..,) [Fig. 10.2 (b)].
'Thus P - p. + p. ",(105)
At every point of contact, the interparticle force F can be resolved into the normal component (N) and
the tangential component (T) to the plane X-X [Fig. ID.2 (e)]. The interparticle forces are random in both
o Pm
,--~--,
(b)
~
I Am I .... /
j.---A ---..j
(e) (d)
(; _ sumar::~~~mpk:n~
0_ I: ",(lO,6)
Let the area of qoss-section occupied by the solid particles (minerals) be Am and that occupied by wale<
bl: A_ [Fig, 10,2 (d)J
Therefore, A - A", + A...
or A ... - A - A", ,.(10.7)
Let u be the pore water pressure. From Eq. ID.5,
P _ Pm + P", .. l:N + IV
oA - a Am + uA ... ",(108)
where 0- is tbe actual normal stress transmitted at the points of contact of the solid particles, and a is the
total stress (Eq. 10.1).
Eq. 10.8 .can be written as
a _ " (Am/A) + U (A.lA)
Using Eq. to.7, o .. 0- (A",/A) + u (1 - A".IA)
0"0 + u (I-a",) ".(10,9)
'"where Q", _ Am/A.
Q ...
1<>2 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
'Ille geolcdmical engineer is interested in the effective stress (0) not in the actual contact stress (0). Let
us again consider the equilibrium in the vmical direction [Fig. 10.2 (d)}. We have
P _ TN + uA ...
aA .. 'EN + uA ...
or 0 _ IN/A + u (A,./A) .. .(10.10)
In Eq. 10.7, as the area occupied by the interparticle contact (mineral to mineral) A. is very small (about
3% for granular soils). the area A ... be taken approximately equal to the lotal area A. In other words,
A ... _A .
Therefc::re, Eq. 10.10 becomes 0 " IN/A + u
Designating IN/A by the nominal effective stress, 0,
0 .. a + u
or cr .. 0- u (same as Eq. 10.3)
It must be nOled that the effective stress (0) depends upon the normal force (IN) transmitted at the points
of contact, but it is not equal to the contact stress (fJ). It is equal to the total normal (orce N transmitted at
the points of contad divided by the total area A, including that occupied by water. It has no physical meaning
and, therefore. cannot be directly measured. It is much smaller (han the actual contact stress '&.
The pore water pressure due to water in voids acts equaUy in aU directions (pascal's law). It docs not
resist any shear stress. and, therefore, is also called the neutral stress. However. it is very important as tbe
effective stress depends upon the pore water pressure.
In clayey soils, there may not be direct contact between the minerals due to the surrounding adsorbed
water layers. However, it has been established by actual experiments that the interparticle contact forces can
be transmitted even through tbe highly viscous adsorbed water. The above equations whK;b have been
developed assuming '-he soil as coarse-grained may be used for clayey soils as well.
For surface active minerals, Eq. 103 is modified as
cr •
0 - u + (A' - R') ... [10.3 <a)]
where A' and If are respectively the attractive and repulsive forces per unit area.
i. 1H} + 1,,# H2
The left-hand side is equal to the lotal stress CEq. 10.1).
! ! ! ! !U
Therefore, 0 .. Y HI + y,atH2
The pcxe water pressure (u) is given by Eq. 102 as w = 1."t+ f sa• Hz'
u .. y,.,H2 Fig. to.3
From Eq. 10.3, 0_ 0 - u .. (yHI + y_Hi) - y... H 2
0' (j .. yHI + (y_ - Y...) H2
ErFECTIVE stRESS PRINCIPLE J93
... (10.11)
Eq. 10.11 gives the. effcaive stress at section X-X. Fig. 10.3 also shows ti<l: directions of a and u at
X-X.
(a) If the water table rises to the ground surface, the whole of the soil is S.'ltUf'dted, and
a.y'(H\+H,).y'H ... (10.12)
As y' < y, the effective stress is reduced due to rise of water table.
(b) If the water table is depressed below the section X-x,
'0 - 1 H ... (10.13)
In this case, the effective stress is increased.
Thus, it is observed that the fluctuations in water table level cause changes in the pore water pressure and
the corresponding chnnges in the effective stress.
10.5. EFFEC'IWE STRESS IN A SOIL MASS UNDER nYDROSTA"nC CONllrnONS
Fig. 10.4 (a) shows n soil mass under hydrostatic conditions, wherein the wmer level remains constant.
As the interstices in the soil mass nre interconnected, water rises to [he same clevmion in different
piezometers fixed to the soil mass. 'nlC effective stress al various sections can be determined using Eq. 10.3.
r
WATER 'tw
SOIL.ltl'5.;lIt>' (Yut~
SOIL.2!)'U\), (lui?
St.!ction C-C
(.) (b)
Fig. 10.S. Wafe.r Table in (a) Soil-l and (b) Soit-2.
Section A-A a-u-Ci_O
Section D-D 0"" yllIl',
where '(J is the unit weight of soil above D.-D. u =0
Therefore, (j - '(I Hl'
Section n-n 0" • Yl HI' + (y,...h Ht" (Note. HI' + Ht .. HI)
U .. y",ll(
Therefore, a .. YI HI' + [(y,...)1 - y",l Ht .. YI HI' + YI' Ht"
Section C-C 0" - yllIl' + 'r,a)1 Ht" + (Y/ahHz
U .. y..,(Hz + HI")
Therefore, a .. ylHt ' + YI' fIt" + yz' Hz
j
Section A-A o ,. 0, U,. -y..,HI
Therefore, '0_ 0 -(-y..,HI) - y..,H I
196 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
uSaturated
Wet
Hi~
}"'
"2
C
(b)
The effective stress is increased by 'I ... Ht" due to capillary action.
Likewise, it can be shown that the effective stress is increased by 'Iwllt at section C-C also.
The following points may be noted from the study of both cases :
(1) The capillary water above the water table causes a negative pressure '1 ... 11, where 11 is the capillary
rise. This negative pressure causes an increase in the effective stresses at all levels below the
saturation level. The increase is equal to '1 ... 11. The capillary action is equivalent to a surcharge
q - y.H.
(2) If the soil is saturated due to rise in water table, the e[fcx:tive stress depends upon the submerged unit
weight; whereas for the soil saturated with capillary water, the e[fedive stress depends upon the
saturated unit weight. In the latter case, the water does not contribute to hydrostatic pressure.
(3) If the water table rises to the top soil surface, the meniscus is destroyed and the capillary water
Changes to the free water, and the effective stress is reduced throughout.
(4) Eq. 103 is applicable in all cases. However, it should be remembered that the pore water pressure
in the capillary zone is negative.
10.8. SEEPAGE PRESSURE
As the water flows through a soil, il exerts a force on the soil. The force acts in the direction of flow in
the case of isotropic soils. The force is known as the drag force or seepage force. The pressure induced in
the soil is lenned seepage pressure.
Let us consider the upward flow of water in a soil sample of length L and cross-sectional area A under
a hydraulic head of II [Fig. 10.9 (a)l. The expression for seepage force and seepage pressure can be derived
considering the boundary \/ater pressures III and u2 aC1ing on the lop and hoIlom of the soil sample, as shown
in Fig. 10.9 (bXI). The boundary water pressure can be resolved into two components, namely, the hydrostatic
pressure and the hydrodynamic pressure as shown in Fig. 1O.9{bXil) and 1O.9(b)(iit).
(I) The hydrostatic pressures III(S) and u2(s) are the components which would occur if there were no
flow. If the samples were submerged under water 10 a depth of HI, lhese pressures would have
occurred.
T
I
(b)
(2) The hydrodynamic pressures Ul(d) and u2(d) arc the components which arc responsible for flow of
waler. This pressure is spent as the water flows through the soil. 'nlcse components cause the
seepage pressure.
At the lop of Ihe sample, III .. "1 (5) + III (d)
1... H , .. 1... /11 + 0
At the bottom of the sample, 1.12" tl2 (s) + U2 (d)
'(..,{H I + L + h) .. ,(... (H I + L) + l ... h
The hydrodynamic pressure is due to hydraulic hc..1d h. The seepage force (1) ads on the soH skeleton
due to 'flowing water through frictional drag. It is given by
J - y.hA ... (10.14)
The seepage pressure (Ps) is the seepage force per unit area,
p, .. l / A .. '1 ... h .. (10.15)
'(he seepage pressure (Ps) can be expressed in terms of the hydraulic gradient. From 10.15,
p, .. 'Yw h .. 'I ... . (hIL) . L
P." i1... L ... (10.16)
The seepage force (1) can be expressed as the force per unil volume V). as
. J YwhA h
) .. A"";L .. -:;u:- .. Y.., L
or j .. h... ... (10.17)
lbus, the seepage force per unit volume is equal to the product of the hydraulic gradient (I) and the unit
weight of water. As the hydraulic gradient is dimensionless, the seepage force per unit volume has the
dimensions of the unit weight (i.e.)!F/L)). It bas the units of N/mJ. For isotropic soils, the seepage force acts
in the direct ion of now.
10.9. FORCE EQUILIBRIUM IN SEEIJAGE PROBLEMS
Force equilibrium in seepage problems can be considered adopting either of the following approaches.
(1) Considering the equilibrium of the entire mass and using the boundary pressures.
(2) Considering the equilibrium of the solid particle or the mineral skeleton, and using the hydrodynamic
pressures.
(a) Vertical F10w
(I) Upwards . Fig. 1O.10(a) shows the forces acting on the soil mass shown in Fig. 10.9 (a). The unit
weight of the soil used is the s..1turntcd unit weight. 'rne resultant force (If) on the soil mass considering the
equilibrium of the entire mass, adopting the first approoch,
1'.;1 ~I
)!T
"
5
,~H+h)'
I l4J lj]
U,' ....
BOI..IiD4RY
R : u,+
FO~CES
w- ll2
u;' .... "
FORCES ACllNG ON
SOLID PAATrClES
: LA,'_ Y."A R:W"'-ui~w"_J
:tA'f'-Y... A
h, ) fb)
R = (W + Ud - U2
R .. (LA '(sat + '(wAHl) - '(... A (H J + L + h)
or R .. LA l' - 1whA ... (10.18)
The figure on the left-hand side shows the force diagram. The resultant force R acts downwards. For
stability of the mass, R must act downwards.
Fig. to.IO(b) shows the forces acting on the solid particles, adopting the second approach. 1be unit
weight of the soil used in this approach is the submerged unit weight. 1be resultant force (10 on the soil
skeleton is given by
R .. W' - U2'
R .. LA'(' - l..,hA (same as Eq. 10.18)
In Eq. 10.18, the first term gives the submerged unit weight and the second term, the seepage force (Eq.
10.14). It must be noted that in the first approach, the seepage force (J) is not considered separately. It is
automatically accounted for in the boundary forces.
(iI) Downwards. Adopting a similar procedure, it can be shown that the resultant force when the flow is
downward is given by
R '" 1..A y' + 1.., IIA ... (10.19)
(b) Inclined Flow
Fig. 10.11 (a) shown the flow through an inclined soil specimen. In this case also, the resultant force R
can also be determined by adopting either of the two approaches discussed above for the vertical flow. As for
the vertical flow, in tbe first approach, the resultant force R is the vectorial sum of the saturated weight
1b)
ic .. (~ : ~) ... (10.24)
Taking the specific gravity of solids (G) as 2.67, and the void ratio (e) as 0.67,
l~c I
T
Fig. 10.16. Effect or Surcharge.
o .. l",H... + q + 110lL
aDd u .. 1... H...1 or u .. l",(h + H", + L)
Therefore, (j .. ("f...,H... + q + 1,,,, L) - 1... (h + H..., + L)
The soil will become quick when a• O. Thus
y...,(h + H..., + L) .. y..., lJ", + q + llal L
y...,h + y...,H", + Y... L .. y",H..., + q + Y,OI L
y... h . y ' L+q
h.y ' L+q ... ~ 1O.25)
Y.
Comparing Ihis equation with Eq. 10.23 (b) for the case when there is no surcharge as discussed in the
preceding sections, it is observed that the head required to cause quick condition is increased by ql y.... In
other words, the downward weight increases the stability against quick conditions. The critical gradient is,
however, not affected by the depth of water (H...,) over the soil surface. Substituting q =:- 0 in Eq. 10.25.
h • L.!,.
Y.
or hlL .. y'/y",
i .. y'/y... . .. (same as Eq. 10.23)
Backward erosion of soil is caused by the percolating water, and the piping begiru; when the hydraulic
gradient at exit, known as exir gradient, exceeds the critical gradient (if), given by Eq. 10.24. The soil at the
exit is removed by the percolating water. When the soil near the exit has been removed, the flow nct gets
modified. There is more ooncentralion of the flow lines in the remaining soil mass, resulting in an increase
[ carried by the percolating waler even though the most of soil particles are restrained. Thereafter, the seepage
concentrates in the loosened soil and results in piping failure.
(2) Heave Piping. Failure by heave piping occurs in the form of a rise or a heave of a large mass of soil
due 10 seepage pressure. When the seepage force due to upward flow of water at any level is greater than the
submerged weight of the soil above that level. the entire soil mao;s in that zone heaves up and is blown out
by the percolating water. This type of failure is known as heave piping failure.
Heave piping may occur on the downstream of a sheet pile cutoff wall of a hydraulic structure (Fig.
10.18). According to Terzaghi, heave piping occurs within a distance of D/2 on the dowmtream of the sheet
pile, where D is the depth of pile below the ground surface. It occurs in the zone marked abc d when the
upward seepage force is greater than the submerged weight of the soil in this ·zone. 1be seepage force can be
determined from the flow n~.
In Fig. 10.18, the equipotential line or potential 0.4 h passes through d and that of 0.3 h through c. The
average excess hydrostatic pressure on the base c d of the prism abc d is 0.35 h. Therefore, upward seepage
force, U _ Y... (0.35 h) (D/2 )( 1) per unit length and downward force due to submerged weight,
206 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION E.NGINEERING
F.~.~
U Y. (h,) (D 12)
or ... (10.26)
where ha is Ihc average excess hyd~latic pressure at the base of the prism abc d
/
"'-------,,
~~~L--',f---":::';Q~7
\
\
\
" .... ,
Fig. 10.20. Openings in filler
Dls(J) Dls(J)
... (10.30)
D85(b) < 5 < Dls(b)
The U.S. Corps of Engineers have recommended that
D",IJ)
D,,(b) < 25 ... (10.30 (a)]
In a graded filter, each layer is designed considering it us a filler and the preceding layer as a base
material. 111C p..1rticJe sizes of the layers increase in the dircction of flow. (Fig. 10.21).
(6) To avoid segregation, filter should not contain the particles of size larger Ihan 75 mm.
(7) For proper working, the filter material should not contain more than 5% of the fines passing 75~ IS
sieve.
(8) The thickness and area of Ihe filter should be sufficient 10 c..1rry tbe seepage discharge safely.
If the filter has to work as a londed filter, the lotalthickncss should be large enough to provide adequate
weight.
10.17. EFFECTIVE STRESS IN PARTIALLY SATURATED SOlLS
In partially saturated soils. air is also
prescnt along with water. Tn the discussion
given below, it is a<>Sumed thnt air is in
sufficient quantity such that there is
continuity in both the air phase nnd the water
phose. Because of meniscus formation, the air
pressure is greater than the water pressure. It
is assumed thnt the air pressure and water
pressure are constant throughout Ihe void
spaces. Thus, Ihere are three measurable
stresses in a partially saturated, namely. total c.c
stress a, pore water pressure u'" and air
pressure u".
Let us consider the forces acting on the
wavy plane X~, shown in Fig. 10.22 (a).
The wavy plane passes through the points of
contact of solid particles. The wavy plane can (b)
be taken as a plane as already mentioned.
Fig. 10.22. Pilrtially saturnled soil.
Fig. 10.22 (b) shows Ihe forces acting on the
plnne. From equilibrium in the vertical direction.
aA - IN + u",A .., + u"A" ".(a)
where a = total stress, A total area of the plane, A", = area of the plane passing through water,
A" = area of the plane passing througb air, and
IN = summation of normal forces acting at the particle to particle contact points.
IN A", A"
From Eq. (a), a - A + U'" A + U" A
0' 0 - (j + u""a"" + u,,(1 - aw) ".(b)
where a = effective stress (- INIA), a.,. .. A,./A, and a" - A/A - 1 - a",
The area at the points of contact is neglected as it is very small as compared to the area through the
water and lhat through the air. Eq. (b) can be written as
a-0- u,.,a", - u" (1 - Dw) ... (10.32)
Eq. 10.32 cannot be verified experimentally as it is difficult 10 measure the area a... Bishop el al (1960)
conducted a large number of tests and gave the following equation for the effective ~Ircss in partially
saturated soils.
".(1033)
where X (pronounced as Ch,) represents the fraction of Ihe area of the soil occupied by water. It pepends
mainly on the degree of saturation S (Fig. 10.23). Its value is zero for dry soil and is unity for fully saturated
soil. The value of X also depends upon the soil structure, the cycle of welting and drying, and stress changes.
210 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGrNEERING
'·0
o· e
/'
o·6
/
/ "-
o· 2
/
o· 0 V 20 40 60 SO 100
DEGREE Of SATURATION (5) ~
Fig. 10.23. Vllri~lion of X with S.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Illustrative Example 10.1. A sand dC/lOsit is 10 /II thick and overlies a bed of soft clay. The ground
wotel' table is 3 m below the ground surface. If d,e sand above the grollnd water table has a degree of
saturation of 45%, plot the diagram showing file variation of the total stress, porI! water pressure and tire
effective stfJ!SS. The void ratio 0/ the sand is 0.70. Take G = 2.65.
Fig. E to.l.
EFFECTIVE STRESS PRINCIPLE 211
Fig. E 10.3 shows the variation of slresscs. It is to be noted that there is a sudden change in u and a at
leveIB-~
Fig. E 10.3.
(6) When artesian pressure is reduced by 1 m
S«tion C-C 0==4 x 19.5 + 2 x 18.5 = 115.0 kN/m2
11=7 x 10.0 = 70.0kN/m2 , a=
115.0 - 70.00 "" 45.0kNlm
2
+
Jm
t
lm
3·5m
1
B .CLV_ _ _ _"-----
!L
"---------"-500d
ClOy
"-C- - - - - - " - - - -
Grovel
"-0_ _ _ _ _-"--- _,1"$
B8
5S.S6kNlml
H
~
",,).770'.175.11
kN/m2 kNlm2 kNIm2
'·ig. F. 10.4
St.'clio" l~n u_ 58.86 -+- :t5 (1.65 x 9.81) .. 115.51
u _ 0, (i .. 115.51 kN/m2
~tioll C-C u .. 115.51 -+- 3 )( (1.95 x 9.81) .. 172.90
u .. 3 x 9.81 .. 29.43, 0' .. 172.90 - 29.43 .. 143.47 kN/m 1
~ction 1)-0 a_ 172.00 -+- 3.5 (1.925 x 9.81) .. 238.99
Il .. 6.5 )( 9.81 .. 63.77, a .. 238.99-63.77 .. 175.22 kN/rnz.
lIItl'drulive Example 10.5, A sand deposit consists of two layers. The top layer is 2.5 m thick (p ,.
17()9.67 kg/l1,.f) and the bOltom layer is 35 m thick (PSN = 2064.52 kg/m)). The. waler table is at a depth of
3.5 11/ from 1111.' surface and the zone of capillary saturation is 1 m above the water table. Draw the diagrams,
.~/ulII·iI/K 1/1(' vllriation of total Slre.fS, nemral stress and effective stress.
~lll1t1on, Fig. E 10.5 shows the soil profile.
'"rI c
2·5m
2·5m
.
A
'IOPlJII'[A
A
,
X'"
~:"·n
.Nlm'
Fig. E 10.5
0 " 14 .. (j ... ()
uvd II-II (top luyer) o .. 16.77 )( 2.5 .. 41.93 kN / m' u .. 0
n .. 41.93 kN / ml
Level 8-11 (Ihlflum layer) 0 .. 16.77 )( 2.5 .. 4].93 kN/ m'
u .. - \- )( 9.81 .. _ 9.81 kN/m2
a .. 4}.93 -( -9.81) _ 51.74 kN/m%
Lewl ('--C o .. 16.77 )( 2.5 + 1 )( 20.25 .. 62.18 kN 1m'
u .0; (j _ 62.18 - 0 ... 62 ,I8kN / m i
EfFECTIVE STRESS PRINCIPLE 213
2
Level D-D cr = 16.77 x 2.5 + 20.25 x 3.5 = 112.8 kN/m
u = 2.5 x 9.81 = 24.53 kN/m 2, a = 112.8 - 24.53 = 88.27 kN/ml
Illustrative Example 10.6. A 8 III thick layer of stiff saturated clay (y = /9.0 kN1mJ) is underlain by a
layu of sand. The sand is IInder an artesian preSSllre of 5 Ill. Calculate lilt! IIIluimlim depth of the cui that
ctur be made wilho,1I causing a heave.
Solution. Fig. E 10.6 shows the cut Let H be the required depth or the cuI. Heave will occur when the
effective stress a becomes z.cro at level A-A.
Rg. E 10.6.
a = 19.0 x (8 - 11) = 152.0 - 19H, 1/ = 5 x 9.8 1 = 49.05
cr = 152.0 - 19H-49.05 = 102.95 - 19H = 0
or H = 5.42 m.
Illustrative Exam ple 10.7. A 10 III thick layu of silty clay (p = /864.64 kg;"I"') ove,.lie~· a gravel layer.
The gravel is wuler WI w'lesiclII pl?SSlIre of 12.5 m. II i~' propOl"ed 10 excavate a founda tioll trellch 2 m deep.
Detent,ine the facto/" of safety against heaving.
(b) What wOl/ld be llle faclOr of safel), against heaving whe/l (/ IIl/iform IJressure of 98./ kNIII/ 2 is applied
t() the footillg cQlu·tmcte,/ ill the above trench?
00
90
II V //
80
O.10mm
V / J
70
/ V / J
0
/ // / //
Bose material--! Filter+/ V'!'
.0 / j" / //
0
/ Y / II
/ / /,6
10
kim mm )I"6.05mm / ~/o.5mm
0
0.001
7 0,01
/ / 0,1 / 7
10,0
Particle size (mm) _ _
fig. E 10.9
Therefore, DIS of filter material should lie between 0.05 mm and 0.5 mm. As the gradation curve of the
filter matcrial should be roughly parallel to that of the base material, the hatched portion indicates the limi~
of the material suitable as filler.
IIIustralive Example 10.10.1[ excavation is carried out in a soil Wilh a porosity of 0.40 and the specific
gravity of solids 0/2.65, determine the critical gradient. A 1.50111 layer of the soil is subjected to an upwlJld
seepage head of 1.95 m. What depth of coarse sand would be required above the soil to provide a foeror tJ
safety of 2.50 ? Assume that sand has the same porosity and sp. gr. of solids as the soil.
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
10.1. Determine Ihe 101al, neulml and ellcctive stresses at the bottom of the deposit shown in Fig. P 10.1.
IAns. 199.14.83.39,115.75 kN/m2)
G5.
l
in j':1·6g/ml
W.T. io
3m ____'_._2_.0~g_/m_'________
205m ,_1·70 g/ml
1m ==f;P=;:IB51i,,jqjzlmiii[:,===:
2m __~~~-~I.~85~g~l~m~I_______
Fig. P 10.1
10.2. The water table in a deposit of uniform sand is located at 2 m below the ground surface. Assuming the soil
above the water table is dry. determine the effective stre~s at a depth of' 5 m below the ground surface. The void
ratio is 0.75 and the specilic grnvity of solids is 2.65.
{b) If the soil above the water table is saturated by capillary action, what is the effective slress at the thai depth?
(Ans. 57.43 kN/m2; 65.83 kN/m 2j
10.3. A deposit of fine sand ha.~ a void ratio of 0.54 and the specific gravity of wlid particles is 2.67. Compute the
safe exit gradient, with u factor of safety of4. ·
[ADS. 0.271)
10.4. A deposit of silly clay lies between two layers of sand,
as shown in Fig. P lOA. The lower sand layer is under
anesian pressure of 4 m and the water level in the upper
IS
sand layer is 2.0 m below the ground surface. Detemline
the effective stress at the bottom. -------l~1
(h) Also. determine the head above G.S. that would
"' .t6 kNlml t7 ~ 2,;
'--fr
cause heaving at the base of Ihe clay. .... 20kN/ml
[Aos. 32 kN/m 2,7.2 m]
10.5. The porosity of a sample of ~al1d in the lOOSe stale was
54% and in dense stale, 38%.· Find out the critical ___y_"_"_'_N'_""______ --lLL___
hydraulic gradient in hath the slates if the specilic
gravity of the wil grJin was 2.60. Also lind out the
Fig. P 10.4.
216 SOIL MECIIANICS AND FOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
3 3 3
S!lturated densili(..'S in kg/m . [Ans. 0.736; 0.992; 1737.33 kg/m ; 1992.56 kg/m 1
10.6. If 40% of the excess hydrost!ltic pressure is lost in flowing through soil II which has a coefficient of
permeability of 0.05 cm/sec (Fig. P 10,6). determine the discharge veloci ty and seepage velocity through each
soil and the hydraulic head at which instability occurs.
IAns. Soil A : 0.02 cm/scc, 0,06 cm/scc; Soil B : 0.02 cm/scc. 0.053 r.m/SCC; 73.33 em]
Fig. P 10.6.
B. Descriptive Dnd Objective 'I)'pe
10.7. Define lolal slress, neutral stress and effective stress. What is the importllnce of the effective stress?
10.S. Prove that the effective stress (0) for a saturated soil can be expressed as
(j _ o-u
where 0 ~ 10lal stress, II = pore water pressure.
10.9. Whal is the effect of surcharge and the capillary oclion on the efTective stress ?
10.10. Prove that rhe seepage force per unit volume is equal 10 the product of the hydraulic gradienl and the unit
weight ofwalcr.
10.11. Discuss two different approaches of ronsidering the equilibrium in seepage problems. Which approach is more
convenient nnd why?
10.12. What is the effect of the seepage pressure on the effective stress? Give examples.
10.13. Whot is quick SlInd ? How would you calculate lhe hydraulic grodienl required to create quick sand conditions
in iI sample of sand ?
10.14. Explain the mechanics of piping in hydraulic structures. Wlult methods ore used 10 incrCllse the foCtor of safety
against piping?
10.15. Why a filter is used on the downSircam of an carlh dilm ? How would you design a filter?
10.16. What are two different types of piping failures? Explain with the help of sketches.
10.17. What is effeCtive stress principle?
19.IS. Wrile whether Ihe following statements are correct.
(a) The effective stress is the stress at the points of contact of the soil partidcs.
(b) 1lte effective stress stress CIIn be measured directly in the field.
(c) The effective stress is equal to the lotal stress minus the pore water pressure.
(d) The rise of wnter due \0 Cilpillnry action reduces the efTeclive stress.
(e) The shear strength of n soil depends upon ilS effective stress.
(J) In partially s:llurnted soils, the pore nir pressure is more thnn the pore waler pressure.
(g) Quick sand is a type of sand.
EFFECTIVE STRESS PRINCIPLE 217
11.1. INTRODUCTION
Stresses are induced in a soil mru;s duc to weight of overlying soil and duc to the applied loads. These
stresses are required for the stability analysis of the soil mass, the settlement analysis of foun<1.1tions and the
determination of the earth pressures. The stresses due to self weight of soil have been discussed in chapter
10. These stresses are summarised in Section 11.3. lbe rest of the chapler is devoted to the determination of
stresses due to applied loads.
The slreSSeS induced in soil due to applied loads depend upon its stress-strain characteristic. The
stress-strain behaviour of soils is extremely complex and it depends upon a large number of factors, such as
drainage oonditiollS, water content, void ratio, rate of loading, the load level. and the stress path. However,
simplifying assumptions are generally made in the analysis 10 obtain stresses. It is generally ru;sumed that the
soil mass is homogeneous and isotropic. The stress-strain relationship is as.<iumed to be linear. The theory of
elasticity is used to determine the stresses in the soil mass. Jl involves considerable simplification of real soil
behaviour and the stresses computed are approximate ones. Fortunately, the results are good eoough for soil
problems usuaUy encountered in practice. For more aocurate results. realistic stress-strain characteristics
should be used. However, the procedure becomes complex and numerical techniques and a high speed
computer are required.
11.2, STRESS-STRAIN PARAMETERS
The main stress-strain parameters required for the application of elastie theories are modulus of elasticity
(£) and Poisson's ratio (v). The modulus of elasticity can be determined in the laboratory by conducting a
triaxial compression test (see Chapter 13). The stress-strain curve is plotted between the deviator stress
(0) - oJ)' and the axial strain (£1). An unoonsolidated-undrained (UU) or an unconfined compression test can
be performed for saturated, cohesive soils. A consolidated drained (CD) is usually conducted for cohcsionless
soils. The value of modulus is generally laken as the ('1-.,.)
=::
material varies from 0.0 to O.SO. For undrained
conditions, the value of Poisson's ratio is 050. For
Poisson's raUo on the oomputed stresses is not significant and an approximate value can be used without
much error.
Tubles 11.1 and 11.2 give typical mnge of values of modulus of elasticity and Poisson's mtio,
respectively, for some soils.
Tllble 11.1. 1)rplcal Values of E
E
S. No. Type of SQil
MN/m kN/m2
1. Sorraay 1.5-4.0 1500-4000
2 Hard day 6.0-15.0 6000-15000
3. Silty Sand 6.0-20.0 6000-20000
4. Loose Sand 10.0-25.0 10000-25000
S. Dense Sand 40.0--80.0 40000--80000
6. Dense grovel 100-200 I x 105to 2 x lOS
Type 0{ Soil
1. SatUnlted clay 0.4-0.5
2. Uns.oturuted clay 0.1-0.3
3. Silt 0.3--0.35
4. Loose ",nd 0.30--0.50
S. Dense sand 0.20-0..30
or ...(B.l)
IT the soil is strotified, having n layers of thickness l1o~ .... lll' with unil"weight 't1l '12) ... "t", the vertical
stress is given by
w=j yA dl
o
where dl is the thickness of a small strip of soi l al dcpth z.
Therefore, the vertical stress is given by
lV
f
0
yA d,
a ;: =A"== - A-
0,=(,:,)0,
Os = Koot ... (11.6)
The vulue of Ko can be obtained if the Poisson's ratio v is known or eslimated. Eq. 11.7 is not of much
prnctiCl I ~ as the soil L'i not a purely elastk: material and it is dHncult to estimate the Il()i.'~,s()n r.uio.
The value of ~ is detcnnined from actual measurement or soil prcs.,>ure or from experience. For :J
sedimentary sand deposit, its value varies from 0.30 10 0.6, and for a nonnally consolidatctl d:lY, iL.. value
generally lies betwccn 0.5 and 1.10. Table 11.3 gives the average values of Ko for diITcrcnl types of soil...
Juky's fonnulu is oommonly used, according to which
Ko • I - sin<p'
where " is the angle of shearing resistance.
lhhle 11.3. Values of Laterul .·n.... . . u!"e Coemclent ut nest (Ko)
S. No. 7'ypt a/Soil K,
I. Loose sallil 0 5 -0.(0()
2. J)ellS~
$llnd 11.:\~ )5U
... (11.8)
where R ::: polar distance betwccn the origin 0 and point I'.
p '" angle which the line 01' makes with the vcrticul.
Obviously, R • V~ + 1 +?
R_~ where ,'l.2.i
and sinp ... ,IR and cas.p .. zl/l
The vertical stress (o~) at point P i.. given by
or az-~~ .~
3Q i'
oJ ..
3Q
Zit . ----nr
(Z/R)'
.. 23t . If
a,-~ . ?~
a, - ~ ·l· [(? : i')" 1
a,_~.!,. I .•. (11.9)
~. r [I + (d')'J>'
or az - 18 . ~ ... (11.10)
The following points are worth noting when using Eq. 11.10.
(1) The vertical stress does not depend upon the mcx1ulus of elasticity (E) and the Poisson ratio (v). But
the solution has been derived assuming that the soil is linearly elastic. The stress distribution will be the same
in all linearly elastic materials.
STRESSES DUE TO APPLIED WADS 223
(2) The intensity of vertical stress just below (he load pc>int is given by
(3) At the surface (z = 0), the vertical stress just below the load is theoretically infinite. However, in an
actual case, the soil under the lond yields due to very high stresses. The load point spreads over a small but
finite aTCa illld, therefore, only finite stresses develop.
(4) The vertical stress (oJ decreases rapidly with an increase in r/z ratio. Theoretically, the vertical stress
would be zero only at an infinite distance from the load point. Actually, at r/z = 5.0 or more. the vertical
stress beoomes extremely small and is neglected.
(5) 10 actual practice, foundation loads are not applied dirccUy on the ground surface. However, it bas
been established that the Boussinesq solulioo can be applied conservatively 10 field problems concerning
loads at shallow depths, provided the distance z is measured from the point of application of the load.
(6) Boussinesq's solution can even by used for negative (upward) loads. For example, if the vertical
stress decrease due to an excavation is required, the negative load is equal to the weight of the soil removed.
However, as the soil is not fully elastic, the stresses determined are necessarily approximate.
(7) The field measurements indicate that the actual stresses are generally smaller than the theoretical
values given by Doussincsq's solution, especially at shallow depths. Thus, the Boussincsq solution gives
conservative values and is commonly used in soil engineering problems.
Limitations of Bousslnesq's Solution. The solution was initially obwined for determination of stresses
in elastic solids. Its application to soils may be questioned, as the soils arc far from purely elastic solids.
However. experience indicates that the results obtained are satisfactory.
The application of Boussinesq's solution can be justified when the stress changes are such that oruy a
stress increase occurs in the soil. The fC.'11 requirement for use of the solution is not that the soil be elastie
(Le., fully recoverable), but it should have a constant ratio between stress and strain. When the stress decrease
occurs, the relation between stress and strain is not linear and. therefore, the solution is not strictly applicable.
If the stresses induced in the soil arc small in comparison with the shear strength of the soil, the soil behaves
somewhat elastically and the Boussinesq solution can be used.
For practical cases, the Boussincsq solution can be safely used for homogeneous deposits of clay,
man-made fills and for limited thickness of uniform sand deposits. In deep sand deposits, the modulus of
elasticity inaeases with illl increase in depth and, therefore, the Boussinesq solution will nOI give satisfactory
results. In Ihis case, the assumption of proportionality between stress and strain cannot be justified. For such
a case, non-linear elastic solutions or elastie-plaslie solutions arc required.
The point loads applied below ground surface cause somewhat smaller stresses than are eaused by surface
loads, and, therefore, the Boussinesq solution is nol strictly applicable. However, the solution is frequently
used (or shallow footings, in which z is measured below the base of the footing.
11.5. nORIZONTAL AND SnEAR STRESSES DUE TO A CONCENTRATED LOAD
The method for detenninmion of the vertical slress (0.:) has been discussed in the preceding section. In
most soil engineering problems, only the vertical stresses are required. Occasionally, other stress components
t.,.
(on 0.1' .. and ""'.J'l:) are also required. 1bcsc compooenlS can be determined as follows:
Fig. 11.4 shows an elementary stress block, indicating all the stress components. In all there are 9 stress
components. namely. 0 .... 0,.. 0D "t..,.. ""'.co ~... ~"t"u and "t"Z)" However, the moment equation gives the following
relatiOf\$.
""'..,. -"Ssi ~ - "t.l)'i ""tu -"t".r:t.
and. therefore independent unknown components are only six 0 .... 0,. 0:. "..,., ".)01."=
The equations for
determination, of 0.: have already been given. The corresponding equations for other components are :
o .1Q. [~. ('-2Vl,{ __' __ (2R ,)J' _.£}] +
• 2x R' 3 ' R(R.,) R'(JI.')' II'
224 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
°Y·2n
~ If [D. +
i!..=M
2
{ R(R+z)
1
Vertical stress,
3Q I
a, - OX· ~
Radial stress, a
'
_.£[ 3%..' - ~l
2l< R' R(R + z)
.•. (11.14)
0.1 Q - 18 . ~
18 = 0.1 z' ... (a)
For different depths z, the value of fs is computed from Eq. (a), as
shown in the second row of 'Thblc 11.5. The values of rlz for computed
values of IIJ are obtained from Eq. 11.11 or Table 11.4. Once the values
of rlz have been determined, the radial distance r can be obtained os
shown in table. It may be observed that r is zero at the load point. and it
attains a maximum value at rlz = 0,75 and again decreases. As the isobar
is symmctrical about the load axis, the other half can be drawn from
symmetry. The shape of an isobar approaches a lemil1SQlte curve (not
'I'
I, 0.4775
0.25
0.4103
050
0.2733
0.75
0.1565
1.00
0.0844
1.25
0:0454
1.50
0.0251
2.00
0.0085
0.1194 Q 0.1026 Q 0.0683 Q 0.0390 Q 0.0211: 0 0.01130 0.0063 Q 0.0021 Q
'"
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
I ' 0· 00210
'"
"'B-'e".
x " dO' I~: "t
i
~,1 " xox~;'x ow
I ' I '
GeC~bce ~ ~
_~~~--~~~---
_.. .........
___ m __
The values of OM , 0AB and 0AC can be abtained from the influence diagram IL' 13 and h.
The computation, work is coosklembly _simplified using the reciprocal theorem, according to which
0AB - OBI!;> OAC - 0CA and 0BC - 0CB
wbere the first suffix denotes the point where the stress is required and the second suffix gives the point
above which the load is applied. Acoordingly, Eq. 1l.15 can be written as
...(11.16)
SfRESSES DUE TO APPLIED WADS Zl.7
3t/i"-~
a, - zn L (r' + i')"
3q'i"- dy
or
a, - z;;- f_ (x' + y' + 1)" ... (b)
228 SOIL MECHAN ICS AND FOUNDA11ON ENGINEERING
Fig.ILlO
Substituting ~ + z? = ,,2 in Eq. (b),
O"~ ."
3q'Z3
2n _
J- (I"
<1\,
+ I)¥. .•. (c)
2n
r
0
us«l a dO
u.s sec's O
-
cr.=~
2 1tu~
1 0
cos~9d9 ... (d)
cr1. =~
1t1l"
[1- -11"]' 3
o
a , = 3q'z? x!. = ~
1tli~ 1t (Xl + (2)1
0, = 2.~' [I ;xIA
+ ... (11.17)
lhe expressions for lhe slresses 0'.. and t.o;: can be obr.aincd in II similar manner, starting from Eq. 11.13.
STRESSES DUE TO APPLIED LOADS
2q' .l~
...(11.19)
Ox "" """"it (.i + zh 2
and
2q' xi' ... (11.20)
'n-,,·~
11.11. VERTICAL STIIESS UNDER A STRIP LOAD
The expression for vertiClil stress nt any point P under a strip load can be developed from Eq. 11.17 of
tho tine load. The rxpression will depend upon whether the pint P ties below the centre of the strip load
or nOl..
Note. The length of the strip is very long. For convenience. unit lcngth is considered.
(1) Point P below the centre of the strip
Fig. 11.11 shows a strip load of width B (= 2b) and intensity q. leI us consider the 10.1<1 acting on a small
elementary width dx at a distnnce x from the centre of the load. This small load of q dx can be con-,idcrcd
as a line toad of intensity q'. From Eq. 11.17,
6u, -~[--I-l'
nz 1 + (xl::)2
The stress due to entire strip lood is ootained as
a _!9. f" __1 _ _ d<
, 1U .... [1 + (xl:)2)2 ···Ca)
LetX/Z-tanlL 1'hcref«e,dx=zsec'ludu
or a, .. ~;cos2udu
n J.
u, - ~ f: C ~2u) '" +
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
I:===':~
...(b)
STRESSES DUE TO APPUED LOADS 231
It may be mentioned that Eqs. 11.22 to 11.24 are geneml equations which can be used even for the case
when the point P is below the centre of the load.
In this case, P1 .. -131 .. 8
The shear stress at any point P below a strip load is given by Eq. 11.24 as 't,Q ,. ~ sin 29 sin 2<p. 111e
planes on which the shear stresses arc zero nrc known as principal plancs. TIlcrefore [or principal planes,
"t.a:; = O.
~sin29sin2<p=O
As q and 9 cannot be zero, 't,Q will be zero when
sin2",=O or 2<p=O
The principal stresses are obtained from Eqs. 11.22 and 11.23, substituting 2<p _ o.
OJ - 0: - ~ (29 + sin29) ... (11.25)
Eq. 11.27 indicatcs that the maximum shear stress at P depends upon thc anglc 29 subtcnded by thc strip
load at the point J~ Obviously, the maximum shear stress will remain constant if the anglc 28 docs not
Change. Let us draw a circle with the centre 0 obt~Lined by the intersc('1ion of lines OA and on mnking angles
------.........
(9O-2B) with the ends of the load. as shown in fig. 11. I 4. As the angle subtended at the centre of circle is
twice that at the circumference, the point P makes nn angle 2B. All the points on this circle will subtend an
angle 28.
From Eq. 11.27, US the maximum shear stress depends on the angle 2B, the circle is the locus of all points
with sheur stress equal to 'tmax. The absolute maximum value of shur stress, ("t".....Jmax will occur when
sin 2B = 1 in Eq. 11.27. Thus
«~)- -;
'The locus of (tmax)mru: is a semi circle, which has the width of the loaded strip, D, as its diameter, In this
sin 28 • 1 oc 28 _ 90°.
I
unlfonnly dlslnbuted over the area of the base of fOOlings,1 @ l n t e n S I I Y 2 Q
Let us detcrmme the vertlCai stress at the pomt P at
depth z below the centre of a umformly loaded Circular area
(Fig 11 15) Let the mtenslty of Ihe lood be q per uml area dr r !o
and R be the radiUS of the loaded area Boussmcsq's Q
solullon can be used to determme Oz The load on the '. , ,,' I
elementary nng of rndlUS , and Width dr L'> equal to q '\" : ':' ,,I
(2M) dr. The load acts at a constant ra<hal diStance r from \ \" ,,:/ , /
P;rom ;(:lx9'z",,u) I
the poUlt
0, - ~ . %' . [1 + (,I')'J"
The vertical stress due to entire 10mJ is given by
,d,
1 \\,
,\<'\,
'<~2 e";~'
\).,tF
I ,:/
/,1/
0, -
3
3qz
R
I. (,.' + ?-)" ...(0) ___ Y
Let ? + ; - u. Therefore, 2r dr _ du Fia:. JI.JS. Circular Lo.1d.
(Ii + l) du
Eq. (0) becomes 0, - 3q? Ie '}""
-i lit' (- ~) [u-"'L~' ".
- -q? [(II' :?-)'" - (~'" 1
- q? [~ - (R' : 1-)'" 1
or
0, - q [1 -{I + ;RI,)' r .. .(11.29)
.. .(11.30)
234 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
r
wh.ere Ie is the influence coefficient for the drcular area, and is given by
Table 11.8 gives the value of the influence coefficient lc for different values of Rlz.
Eq. 11.31 for the influence coefficient./c can be written in tenns of the angle 29 subteoded at point P by
tbe load.
Let tan a = R/Z. Therefore,
E, -
[
1-11 + ~n'e }YO
.. (11.32)
Eq. 11.32 indicates that as e tends to 90°, the value of /( approaches unity. In other wor~, when a
uniformly loaded area tends to by very large in comparison with the depth Z, the vertical slress al the point
P is approximately equal to q.
When the point P is not below the centre of the load, analysis becomes (;()mplicated and is outside the
scope of this text. In that case, the isobars shown in Fig. 11.16 can be used to determine the vertical stress at
any point. It may be noted that the isobar of O.lq cuts the axis of the load at a depth of about 4R (= W)
below the loaded area. The zone within which tbe stresses is indicated by tbis isobar. as mentioned above, is
known as the bulb of pressure. The reader should compare this pressure bulb with that below the strip load,
which is much deeper.
11.14. VERTICAL STRESS UNDER A CORNER OF A RECTANGULAR AREA
The vertical stress under a comer of a rectangular area (Fig. 11.17) with a uniformly distributed load of
intensity q can be obtained from Boussinesq's solution. From Eg. 11.9, the stress at depth z is given by, taking
dQ - q M- qd< dy,
STRESS DUE TO APPLIED LOADS
"
_ 3ql f rB qdxd}'
By integTlllion.
°t ~ """"27t Jo Jo (x2 + l + Z2)~/2
Although the integral is quite t.:omplicated, Newmark was able to perform it The results we re presented
as rollows:
0t =.!L[
21t ~
1//11 •
III
2
+
m: +1I2;;
/I + III II + I
+ sin- I (
"'m2 + 112
mn
+ m2 n2 + I
] ... ( 11.33)
Table 11.9 gives the value.s of IN for different values of m and II.
0.2 0.0179 O.032g 0.0435 0.0504 0.0547 0.0610 0.0619 0.0620 0.0620
0.4 0.0328 O'(}('O2 0.0801 0.0931 0.1013 O.JJ34 0.1150 0.1154 0.1154
0.0 0.0435 {I.GSOI 0.1069 0.1247 0.1361 0.1533 0.1555 0.1561 0.1562
0.' 0.0504 0.0931 0.1247 0.1461 0.1598 0.1812 0.1841 0.1849 0.1850
1.0 0.0547 0.1013 0.1361 0.1598 0.1752 0.1999 0.2034 0.2044 0.2046
2.0 0.0610 0.1134 0.1533 0.1812 0. 1999 0.2325 0.2378 0.2395 0.2399
3.0 0.0618 0.1150 0.1555 O.I!Wl 0.2034 0.2378 0.2439 0.2461 0.2465
'.0 0.0620 0.1154 0.1561 O.I!W9 0.2044 0.2395 0.2461 0.2486 0.2491
10.0 0.0620 0.1154 0.1562 0.1850 0.2046 0.2399 0.2465 0.2491 0.2498
Fadum gave charts for detenmnal\on of Lhc inlluence factor IN (Fig. 11.18). These charts can be used in
a design office. The t:harls t:an also be used for dClenninalion of the vertical stress under a strip load. in
which case the length tends to infinity and the curvc for II 00 can be used . =
o.26
0""
.l
~ I
20
V" n~ ~o
- ./"' n,"
.1
.. /,1%:
1/
//
--------- ncO.6
nsO.S
n",0.4
n",
/-~ n~o.2
"""'~V V
°1~P
"mO••
:I~F- I
0.1 0·' ID
rectangles has a comer at the point where the vertical stress is required. The vertical stress is delennined
WJing the principle of superposition. 1bc following three cases can occur.
(1) Point anywhe~ below the rectangular area. Fig. 11.19 (a) shows lhe location of the point P below
tile rectangular area ABeD. The given rectangle is subdivided into 4 small rectangles AEPH, EBFP, IlPOD
and PFCG, each having one comer at P. The vertical stress at P due to the given n:ctangular load is equal to
that [rom the four small rectangles. 1bcrefore, using Sq. 11.34,
E
(J)! (2)
I
Hr----t-------- F
\to) I ())
I
(a'
(b,
E
(e) Fig.l1.l9. Vertical stress under a rccl3ngulllrarea.
0z - q [(IN)' + (/Nh + (IN>. + (IN)'] ...(11.35)
where (iNh, (/Nb. (lNh and (/N)4 arc Newmark's influence fadors obtained from Thble 11.9 for the four
"",<angles ma"'ed (I), (2), (3) and (4).
For the special case, when the point P is at the centre of the rectangle ABeD, all the four small
rectangles are equal, and Eq. 11.35 beromes
..•(11.36)
where IN is tbe influence fador for the small rectangle.
(2) Point outside lhe loaded area. Fig. 11.19 (b) shows the point P outside the loaded area ABCD. In
this case, a large red.angle AEPF is drawn with Its one comer at P.
Now rea.angle ABCD = rectangle AEPF - rectangle BEPH - rectangle /X1PF + rectangle CGPH
The last rectangle CGPH is given plus sign becal..lSC this area has been <leducted twice. once in rectangle
BEPH and once in /X1PF.
Therefore, the stress at P due to a load on redangle ABeD is given by
0, - q [(IN)' - (INn - (IN>' + (IN)'] ... (11.37)
where (IN)!> (INn. (IN») and (IN). are the influence coefIkients for the rectangles AEPF, BEPH, /X1PF and
CGPlf, n::spocti.vely.
(3) Polnt below the edge or the loaded area. If tile point P is below the edge of the loaded arca AlJCD
(Fig. 11.19 c). the given rectangle is divided inlO two small rectangles APED and PBCE. In this cme,
0, - q [(IN') + (IN),] •.. (11.38)
where (IN)J and <INn lireiqfluence coefficients for rectangles APED and PIJCE, respectively.
r]
circle. From Eq. 11.29,
0. - ~ q [ 1 - { 1 + (~,/Z)' (a)
0005
. q 20 [· {I
.. !L 1- _ _1_ _
+ (R,Iz)' } '" ] ... (b)
Fig. 11.20. Concentric circles for Rl and Rz.
toxO.OO5q-!L20[I-{_I_,}'" ] 1 + (R,oIz)
or RIO - QC
n = number of small area units covered by the plan. Each area between two successive radial
lines and two successive concentric circle is taken as one unit.
q = intensity of load.
The following points are wO£1h IlOting:
(I) The fractions of the unit areas should also be rounted and properly accounted for.
(2) If the plan of the loaded area extends beyonds the 9 ¥h circle. it may be assumed to approach the
10th circle for the purpose of counting the unit areas.
(3) The point P at which the vertical stress is required may be anywhere within or outside the loaded
an:8.
(4) If the depth at which the stress is required is changed, a fresh plan is required such that the new
depth is equal to the distance AB on the chllrt.
11.17. COMPARISON OF STRESSES DUE TO LOADS ON AREAS OF DIFFERENT SHAPES
The variation of venical stress with depth depends upon the shape and size of the loacted area. Fig. 11.22
shows the variation of the vertical stress with depth below the centre of circular, square and strip loads.
The vertical stresses are equal to the load intensity at Ihc surface and deaease rapidly with an increase in
depth (z). In the case of circular and square Ioods, the vertical stress is about 10% of the surface load (q) at a depth
of about 2B. However, in the case of strip loads, the stresses are much greater. Even at z = 38, the vertical
stress is about 20% of the surface load (q). In other won1s. the pressure bulb in this case is much deeper.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
l!T- -
o.oOJJ~o,-'O'i""'O~-""ro'-r-'OT.60"--r--'1o."''''-r--7I.00'1:~~~~ii~
I LA ~ rcu~~V/QUor triP
TT ~ .. 0." 0.6'3 0.70 0.8'3
0.,1-l-+I(C~,,-'<"-,.-.J,,-..,'-+-~-j,_"'_4"-'l/""':H ::~ g:~: ~'.~: ~:~;
2.00.08 0.14 0.31
'.0 I-+--sq~"a_"...,-X
q:1-?-+AI~<'''''''1'Pf--H 2.5 0.06
3.0 0.010
0.01
0.0"
0.25
0.20
1-+---j,l1/'4'---++I--+-++-I-I •• Wid'h a, .'am"..
,., 1-1-/",t:---I-j-!.f-hHHHH
1/
2.01-/!-+-+-+-+--+-I-4-H
, I
2.5 -It
3.0 L-.L.L.L...L...L..L..L...L-l
u 'IlL!'
°t - 2i [~ a - sin 26 ]
where & Js the angle which the line PB marks with vertical, and a is tbe a ngle subtended by PA and PB
at p.
IC the point P is CXadly beknv the end B, x .. 2b and & = O. Therefore,
<1
~
_!L (~(l)
2x b
_~ Jl
Sl'RESSES DUE TO AP.PUED WADS 241
The above equations can also be applied to the case whcn the intensity of the load increases linearly from
zero 81 one end to a maximum q and then decreases to zero (Fig. 11.24).
For tho load shown in Fig. 11.24 (a),
I 2b 1 2b.1 I' 2b 1 2b .1
~~.z z
(a) (b)
. .. (11.43)
When thc point P is exactly below the point B, 01 - az • a and x :: 2b. [Fig. 11.24 (b)]. 1ncrcforc,
... (11.44)
.~rI~
p p
(a) (b)
Fig.l!.25. Trapc:zoidalload.
b) (al + a,) -
0, • ; [ ( a : ~ '" 1
0, _; [(a\ + a0 + ~ aL]
0< 0, - ;;ra(al + au + bad ... (11.45)
Obviously. for the lrapezoidal load shown in Fig. 11.25 (b), the vertical stress at P,
242 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA:nON ENGINEERING
0, _
... (11.46)
(b) Concentl'1llcd Load Q. In cartesian coordinates, the stresses duc to a horizontal load Q can be
written as
~~-~.¥
~y:=~.* ... (11.49)
1 1 ... (11.55)
..... :re[1 + 2(r/z)2f2
The values. of I ... arc considerably smaller than the BOllSSinesq influence factor (10). Table 11.10 gives the
values of I .... 'The values of 18 are also given for comparison.
'Thble 11.10. CompllrLson of lw and 18
Fig. 11.28 shows the variation of 18 and Iw with rh. The Westergaard influence factor is about 2/3
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
.-
Ag. 11.28. Comparison of IB and Iw.
of the Boussinesq values fo r small values of rlz. But for rlz more than 2.0, the Westergaard values are
slighlly gre<lter. The effec~ of the load is negligibly small in bOlh the cases when rlz is greater than about
2.0.
11.23. FENSKE'S CIIARTS
Just like Newmark's Charts which are based on Boussincsq's solution, Fenske's Omrts are based on
Westergaard 's solution. The Fenske chart can be prepared using Eg. 1152.
0: -
Q
21t .
1
(cz)2p + (rlcz)2)3/l
The above equation can be integrated to obtain the vertical stress (oz) below the centre of a uniform
circular load of intensity q and radius R as was done for the Boussincsq solution for derivation of Eq. 11.29.
In this case,
o, _ q [1_{_1}"2 1 + (Rlcz)2
1 ···(1l.50
IT instead of the full circle, only I/Bth sector of the circle is considered, the stress is given by
~ .. 0.127
R\ ,.. 0.127 (cz)
The modified depth cz is marked as the distance AB in Fig. 11 .29.
<G STRESSES DUE TO APPLIED LOADS 245
ou t
A B
t-- CZ ----l
Fig. 11.29. I'enskc'$ Chart ( I _ 0.001).
Ukewise, the radii of other circles are determined. Unlike the Newmark chart, the radial divisions are
also changed in Fenske's chan. There are 8 radial divisions [or the first circle and 48 radial divisions for the
18th circle, The radii of the circular arOi and the number of radial divisions are so chosen thai each influence
area unit is approximately a square. Thblc 11.11 gives the values of R/({:z) for different circles and their
corresponding number of division.
!9.
The method of using the Fenske chart is similar to thai for the Newmark: chart. However, in this case the
d~tance AD represents the modified depth cz. 'The plan of the loaded area is drawn on a tracing paper to a
scale such that the distance AD is equal 10 c times the depth z of the point P at which the stress is required.
;6) For Poisson's ratio of zero, the value of c is equal to 0.707.
Table H.H. Values of Riel. ror Fenske's Chart
Ci"kNo 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 5 1 6 1 7 1
'7) RJ (ez) I 0.127 I 0.204 0.292 0.376 0.472 0.560 I 0.664 I 0.772 0.900
+.
[Qd'D), <- Q,
0,'
-9 -10 "II -12
1 •
or 0, • ;: ,:?, Q, (',), ... (11.58) ..1
&j. 11.58 gives fairly accurate results if the
side a of the small area unit is equal to or less than
one-third of the depth z of point P at which the Fig. 11.30. Equivalellt Point loads.
venicai stress is required.
(2) Two-to-one Load lli<;tribution Method. The actual distribution of load wilh the depth is complex.
However, it can be assumed to spread approximately at a slope of two (vertical) to one (horizontal). Thus the
vertical pressure at any depth z below the soil surface can be determined approximately by constructing a
frustum of pyramid (or cone) of depth z and side slopes (2:1). The pressure distribution is assumed to be
uniform on a horizontal plane at that depth.
i-ol·----B+Z-----.j.,
Fig. 11.31 . Two""o..()ne Distribution.
The average vertical stress crz depends upon the shape of the loaded area, as given below (see Fig. 11.31)
The above method gives fairly accurate values of the average vertical stress if the depth z is less than 2J
times the width of the loaded area. The maximum stress is generally taken as 1.5 times the average stress
determined above.
(3) Sixty Degree Distribution. This method is similar to the preceding method. In tttis case, tbe pressurt
STRESSES DUE TO AI'PLIED WADS 241
distribution is assumed along lines making an angle of 600 with the horizontal instead of 63~0 (2 : 1). The
method gives approximately the same results.
11.25. CONTACr PRESSURE DISTIUBUTION
The upward pressure due to soil on the underside o f the footing is tenned cont;:la pressure. In the
derivations of Ihe prcceding scctions, it has been assumed that the fooling is flexible and the cont."lct pressure
distribution is unifonn and equal to q. Actual footings are not flexible as assumed. The aaual distribution of
the rontact pressure depends upon a number of factors such as the clastic properties of the COOling material
and soil. the thickness of footings. In faa, it is a soil- structure interaction problem.
Borowicka (1936, 1938) studied the rontaa pressure distribution of uniformly loaded strips and circular
footings resting on a semi-infinite elastic mass. assuming the base of the footing as frictionless. The analysis
showed that the contact pressure dislribution depends upon thc relative rigidity (K,) of the footing-soil system.
The relative rigidity is defined as
K
,
(I - >?) (~).
_.!.6~ E,
(1.)'
b
... (11.63)
where v" vf = Poisson's mtios for soil and footing material respectively,
E., Ef = Mcxluli of elasticity [or soil and footing material, respectively.
Ie 2h = width (or diameter) of footing. I = thickness of fOOling.
Fig. 11.32 shows the contact pressure distribUlion of circular and strip footings for different values of
relative st iffness. For a perfectly rigid fOOling (K, _ 00), the oontact pressure is minimum .11 the centre. with
1 f.o-----Wldth ~ 2 b - - l
tl j I
o.oq '77"70'777777'?1
Contact Pressure on sand. Fig. 11.34 shows the qualitative contact pressure distribution under flexible
and rigid footings resting on a s<mdy soil and subjected to a unifonnly distributed load q. In this case, the
edges of the flexible footing undergo a larger sellicmcnt (han al the centre. The soil at the centre is connned
and, therefore, has a nigh modulus of elasticity and deflects less for the same contact pressure. The contact
pressure is unifonn.
(2) TIle soil mass is not clastic as the particles do not return to lhe origi nal position when the load is
removed.
(3) The , stress-strnin ratio for most soils is not constant.
However. for m Ost soils the stress-strain ratio is approximately constant provided the stresses are well
below the failure stresses, ilnd no unloading occurs.
Although the applicability of elastic theories to soil problems is questionable, yet the results arc generally
not much different from the observed values. A difference of 20 to 30% between the theoretical and the
measured values may OC!;UT. This diffcren!;e is generally ignored considering many complexities of the
problem. The eluslic theories are used as better theories are not yet available which can be used in a design
office.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
U1ustrative Example 11.1. A concelltrated load of 2000 leN i.f applied (j( the ground slIIface. Determille
the vertical m 't!5S at a poi"l P which is 6 //I directly below tlte load. Aim calculate tile venical stress at a
poillt R which i~' (If u depth of 6 11/ bllf til (I horiwllfal distance of 5 m form Ihe axis of the load.
*
distributioll method.
(1:
Illustrative Example 11.3. There 6' {/ line load of 120 kNlm aCfing 011 the ground surface along y-axis.
Determine the vertical ~·tress (If a poilll P which Iws x and z coordinates as 2 1/1 alld 3.5 m. respectively.
AI point P. o
~
=2 x
1t
120 [ _ _I _ _
x 3. 5 I + (2/3.5)2
J' = 12.40kN/m2
250 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
llIustrative Example 11.4. The unit weight of the soil in a uniform deposit of loose sand (Ko = 0.50) is
16.5 kN/ml, Determine the geostatic stresses at a depth of 2 m.
Solution. From Eg. 11.1,
0 ... yz .. 16.5 )( 2.0 .. 33.0 kN/rnl
From Eq. 11.6, a., .. Ko o... 0.5 x 33.0 .. 16.5 kN/rnz
illustrative Example U.5. Determine the vertical stress at a point P which is 3 m below and at a radial
distatlCC of 3 m [rom the vertical load of 100 kN. Use Westergaard's solution (v = 0.0).
1 Q
Solution. From Eq. 1153, oz" 1[[1 + 2 (r/z)2yn . l
(J .. 1 . 100 .. 0.681 kN/m2
, • [! + 2(3/3)'1'" (3)'
From Fig. 11.16, the verLical stress at z = 1.25 Rand r = 1.25 R is about 0.2 q.
Therefore, 0: at Q _ 0.2 x 100 _ 20 kN/m 2
Illustrative Example 11.7. An L--l>/lQped buil4Nlg in plan (Fig. E 11.7) exerts a pressure of 75 kNlm] 0/1
tile soil. Determine the vertical stress increment at a depth of 5 m below the interior cartier P.
Solution. The loaded area is subdivided into three small areas such
that each small area has one comer at P.
From Eq. 11.35, 0, - q [(INh + (INn + (INh]
:I~
For Ilre8 Al m-n-· 10/5_2.0
From Table 11.9, (IN), = 0.2325
For area A z 111 _ 15/5 .. 3, 12" 1015 _ 2.0
From Table 11.9. (lNh = 0.2378
For area AJ m .. 20/5 .. 4, 12 .. 1515 _ 3 : 10m I 20m ~
From Table 11.9, (INh .. 0.2450
Therefore, 0, .. 75 {0.2325 + 0.2378 + 0.2450] = 53.65 kN/mz. Fig. E 11.7.
Hlustrative Example 11.8. A rectangular foundation 4 m by 5 111 carries a uniformly distributed foad af
STRESSES DUE TO APPLIED WADS
'"
zoo kN/m 2. Determine the vertical stress at a point P located as shown in Fig. E 11.8 OIId at a depth of
2.5 m.
Solution. From Eq. 11.35, 0'%" q[(lN). + (/Nh + (INh + (IN)41
In this case For Al and Al, In = 212.5 = 0.80, n = 2/2.5 = 0.80
(IN) • .. 0.1461,
For A3 and A., III = 3(2.5 = 1.20, n = 2a.5 :: 0.80
(IN), - 0.1684
I,'m I 3m "I
Therefore, 0%" 200l0.1461 + O.l46J + 0.1684 + 0.1684]
.. 12S.8kN/ m l Fig. Ex. 11.8
llIuslrative Example 11.9. A T-shaped foundation
(Fig. E 11.9) is loaded with a uniform load of 120
leN/n? Determine the vertical stress at point P at a depth
of 5.0 m. Use NL'Wlllark's inflllence chart. Compare the
OIISW'er by exact method
Solution. The foundation plan is drawn on a tracing
paper with a scale such that the distance An in Fig. 11.21
represents 5.0 m. The plan is placed on the Newmark
chan such that poinl P is al the centre of the chari.
Number of area units occupied by plan = 63
From Eq. 11.40, o~ .. { x n x q
o~ .. 0.005 x 63 x 120 .. 37.8 kN/m 2 Fig. E 11.9
Exact method. The loaded area is divided into 3 areas. such that they have onc corner at P.
Area AI 11/ = 3/5.00 = 0.60 : /I = 1.5/5.00 = 0.30. (IN). = 0.0629
Area Al II! = 3/5.00 = 0.60: /I = 615.00 = 1.20, (fNh = 0.1431
Area A3 11/ = 3/5.00 = 0.60 ; 11 = 3/5.00 = 0.60. (fNh = 0.1069
From Eq. 11.35, o~ :: q I(lN)] + (fNh + (lNh J
or o. = 120 [0.0629 + 0./431 + 0.1069J :: 37.55 kN/m2
lUustralive Example 11.10. A r~tonglilar loaded area '2 m x 2.5 m carries a load of 80 lcN/m (Fig. E
2
1/.10). Determine the vertical stress at point P located outside the loaded area at a depth of 2.5 In.
Solution. From Eq. 11.37, C1z .. [(IN). - (INn - (/Nh + (IN)4)]
Fig. E 11.10.
252 ~IL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
~~~-3m----'1
1-01
I IL_(7_)_---1__(8_)_~
15 (£1 (51 (61
__(9_)____'
Fig.E.ll.H.
Solution. Let us divide the loaded area into 9 small areas of size 0.5 m x 1.0 m.
load on each area .. 40 )( (1.0 )( 05) .. 20kN
The stresses at point P are determined due to 9 point loads, using Boussinesq's solution CEq· 11.9).
For loads (1) and (4), r .. ,..; 1.5 2 + (0.25)2 .. 1.521 I rlz - 0.507
Fig. E 11.12.
Solution. From Eq, 11.46,
0: .. ~ [a (a, + aV + b a,l
In this case, a = 12111 and b = 2 111, q = 6 x 18 = 108 kN/m2
Ian al .. 2/3.0 .. 0.667; a:z - 0,588 radians
tan (a, + all .. 3~~ .. 4.667; (at + all '" 1.359 radians
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
11.1. A monument weighing 15 MN is erected on the ground surfoce. Considering the load ns 8 concentrated one,
determine the vertical pressure directly under the monument at a depth of 8 m below the ground surface.
(Ans. 111.9 kNlmlJ
11.2. A concentrated 1000 of SO kN acts on the surfoce of a homogeneous soil IllllSS of large extent. Determine the
stress intensily at 8 depth of 5 m, directly under the load, and at a horizontal distance of 2.5 m.
(Ans. 0.955 kN/m2; 05 5 kN/m2,
1l.3. Two columns A and B arc situated 6 m aport. Column A transfers a load of 5pO kN Dnd column B, a load of
250 kN. Determine the resultant vertical stress on a horizontal plane 20 m below the ground surface nI points
2
vertically below the points A and B, [Ans, 59.8 kN/m ; 29.9 kN/m2]
11.4. An excavation 3 m x 6 m for foundation is to be m3dc 10 8 depth of 2.5 m below ground level in a soil of bulk
3
unit weight 20 kN/m . What effect this excavation will have on the vertical pressure at a depth of 6 m measured
from the ground surface vertically below the centre of foundation? IN for m '" 0.43 and II '" 0.86 is 0.10.
2
[Ans. decrease 20 kN/m J
11.5. A square foundlltion (S m x S m) Is to earry Il load of 4000 leN. Colculllle the vertieal stress at a depth of 5 m
below the centre of the founootion. IN '" 0.084 fot 1/1 .. n '" 0.50.
(ii) Also determine the vertical stress using 1 ; 2 distribution. [Ans. 53.76 kN/m2 ; 40 leN/ml ]
11.6. A wllter tower has 8 drcular foundlltion of to m dillOlCter. If the totn] weight of the tower, including the
4
foundation, is 2 x 10 kN, calculDte the vertical stress at 8 depth of 25 m below the foundation level.
2
[Ans. 231.9 kN/m J
2
11.7. A reclllngulllr foundlltion, 3 m x 2.1 m, is perfecUy flexible and carries II lood of 300 kN/m . Determine the
vertical pressure at 8 depth of 5 m below a.point P shown in Fig. P 11.7. (Ans. 31.8 kN/m1
11.8. The contact pressure for a square footing 2 m )( 2 m is 400 leN/ml. Using 1 ;'2 distribution, determine the depth
2
81 which the contnct pressure is 100 kN/m . [Ans. 2 m]
11.9. A rerungular foundation 20 m x to m subjects the subgrade to a contaCl pressure of 2SO kN/m2. Detennine the
vertical stress at a point P loalled 8t a depth of 5 m (Fig. P 11.9).
(Use Thble for IN values) (Ans. 3.375 kN/m 21
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
l§±J
1)·7m
L
1--1 m ---+-- 1m ---1-1 m --l
Fig. P 1l.7. Fig. P 11.9.
11.10. A 1000 kN lood is uniformly distributed on II surface area of 3 m x 2.5 m. Find the npproximmc value of
vcrlicrll stress al a depth of2 m. using.
(i) 2: 1 distribution
2
(il) 60 0 distribution. (AIlS. 44.4 kN/m ; 392 kN/rn1
U.U . A concentrated lood of 1000 leN ncts vertically at the ground surface. Determine the vertical st TCS$ at D point
which isot
(I) a depth of 2.5 m and a horizonllli distance of 4.0 m
(il) DI a depth of ~.O and D radial distance of 2.5 m.
2
[Ans. 3.2 kN/m ; 10.93 kNlm1
(1) 'The Boussinesq solution always gives stresses greater than the Wes tergaard solutioll.
<I) The equivalent point load gives reliable re~ults if the dimension of the area is greater than three times the
depth.
(k) TWo-to-one load distribution llilU sixtY-Ocgree distribution give approx imately the same messes.
Cf) In actual design. the contact pressure distribution is generally taken as uniform.
IAn.~, True, (ll). (Ir), (k), (/)]
C, Multiple-Choice Questions
1. The stress developed at !I point in the soil exactly below a point load a\ the surface is
(1I) proportional to the depth of point.
(b) proponiooal to the S(lu!lre of the depth of point.
(e) inVersely proporlionnl to the depth of point.
(d) inversely proponiolllil to the square of the depth of point.
2. An isobar is a curve which
(a) joins poims of equal horizontal stre.~s.
(b) joins points of equal verlkal mess.
(el Joins points of zero vertical ~tress.
(d) joins points of maximum vertical stre.~s.
3. If the entire semi-infinite soi l mass is loaded wilh a load intensity of q at the surface. the vcnicnl stress at any
depth is equal to
(a) q (b) 0.5 q
(e) zero (d) infinity
4. For a strip of width 8 subjected to a load intensity of q at the surface, the pressure bulb of intensity 0.2 q
extends to a depth of
(u) 38 (b) 6 B
(e) 1.5 B (d) B
S. Newmark's intluence ch'lrI can be used for the determina.tion or verlical slres.s under
(II) circular load area only ( b) rcctangul:!r 100000 area only
(el strip loud unly (tI) Any shape of loaded area
6. The WC~lergaard analysis is used for
(a) homogeneous soiL~ (b) cohe.~iYe soils'
(e) sandy soils (d) slratilicd soils
7. A concentrated load of JOOO kN acts vertically al a point on the soil surface. According 10 Boussinesq's equation
the ratio of the venical stresses at depths of 3m and 5m is
tal 0,35 (b) 0.70
(c) 1.75 (d) 2.78
8. A load of 2000 kN is uniformly distributed over an area of 3 m )( 2m. TIle average venical stress at a depth of
~a~ ~~~n~~/~J distrihution is (h) 100 kNhnl
(e) 48 kN/ml (tl) 37 kN/m2
~_l~~~~~~~~~~~~~&~
12
Consolidation of Soils
12.1. INTRODUCTION
When a soil mass is subjected to a compressive force. like all other mmerlals. its volume decreases. The
property of the soi l due to which a decrease in volume occurs under compressive forces is known as the
compressibility of soil. 111e compression of soils can occur due to one or more of the following causes.
(I) Compression of solid particles and wmer in the voids.
(2) Compression and expulsion of air in the voids.
(3) Expulsion of water in the voids.
Compression of solid particles is negligibly small. Compression of water in the voids is also extremely
smail, as the walcr is almost incompressible in the fange of stresses involved in soil engineering. Therefore,
the compression due to the first cause is not much significant.
Air exists only in partially saturated soils and dry soi ls. The compression of the air is rapid as it is highly
compressible. Funher. air is expelled quickly a" soon as the load is applied. However. the compression due
to the second cause is not relevant for saturated soils.
When the soil is fully satumted. compression of soi l occurs mainly due to the third cause. namely.
expulsion of water. As this chapter is mainly concerned with saturated soils. only this cause is relevant.
The compression of (l saturated soil under a steady static pressure is known as cOllsolidation. It is entirely
due to expuh';oll of W(jfe/' Jm/ll the voids. It is similar to the action of squeezing of water from a saturared
sponge under pressure. The soil behaves as a saturated sponge. As the consolidation of soils occurs. the water
escapes. The solid particles shift from one position 10 the other by rolling and sliding and thus attain a closer
packi·ng. It is worth nOling that the decrease in volume of soil occurs not due to compression of solids IX'
water but due 10 the shifting of positions of the particles as the wfller escapes. Small volume changes may
occur due to bending, distortion and fracture of the soild porticles. but such chooges are insignificant in the
ordinary range of stresses involved in soil engineering problems. However. bending. distortion and fracture
are indirectly responsible for a further decrease in volume due to shifting of particles.
Settlement of a structure is its vertical. downward movemenl due to a volume decrease of the soil 01'1
which it is buill. In other words. the settlement is the gradual sinking of a structure due to compression of the
soil below. A study of consolidation characteristics is extremely useful for forecasting the magnitude and time
of the settlement of the structure.
111e compression of soils due to expulsion of air due to dynamic methods. such as rolling and tarnpin..
is known as compac tion (see chapter 14).
This chapter deals mainly with consolidation of fully saturated soils.
(Note. In geology, consolidation means hardening of soils due to solidification. It should not be confused
with the word consolidation used in soil engineering).
CONSOUDATIOH OF SOILS
g.
T
100mm
lL--L----.J (0)
.. 0
Ib)
btl
10)
Fig. 12.1. Spring Analogy.
258 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
I I
consolidation cells are of two types: (1) Ao.'lling or free K , 6i'2 ~3 6"4 lIi"S
ring cell [Fig. 125 (b)J in which both the top and bottom
porous stones are free 10 move. The top porous stone can
Fig. 12.4. Plot between "/ and o.
move downward and the bottom stone can move upward
as tbe sample consolidates. (2) Fixed ring ccll [Fig. 12.5 (c)] in which the bottom porous stone cannot move.
Only the top porous stone can move downward as the specimen consolidates. The fixed ring cell can also be
used as a variable--head permeability test apparatus. For this purpa:;e, a piezometer is attached to the base of
the cell.
The inside surface of the ring should be smooth and polished to reduce friction. The ring imposes a
condition of zero lateral strain on the soil sample. The internal diameter of the cell is usually 60 mm, but tbe
r
0,
-.l
cells with a diameter upto 100 mm are also available. 'The thickness of the sample is fixed from the following
considerations:
(1) The thickness of the sample should be as small as possibJe to reduce side friction, but a minimum
thickness of 20 mm is usually required to get uniform distribution of pressure on the Sc'lmple.
(2) The diameter to the thickness ratio should be a minimum of 3.
(3) The thickness of the specimen should not be less than 10 times the maximum sile of the particle.
The thickness of the sample for a 60 mm diameter cell is usually taken as 20 mm. The specimens of
diameter 50, 70 and 100 mm may be used in special cases.
The consolidometer has arrangements for the application of the desired load increment, saturation of
sampie and measurement of change in thickness of the s.'lmple at every stage of consolidation process. The
consolidation cell is placed in a water jacket or water trough SO that water ha<> free access into and out of the
sample. The cell is provided with a perforated pressure pad at its top for the application of load. The load is
applied either by suspending weights from a hanger rcsting at the centre of the pressure pad or by a lever
arrangement. The arrangement for saturation of the sample consists of a small water reservoir connected to
the c.:ell with a plastic tube (not shown in figure). A dia1 gauge is used to measure the change in thickness as
the consolidation takes place. The sample is kept submerged under water to prevent evaporation from its
surface.
Before conducting the test, the ·porous stones are saturated either by boiling them in distilled water for
about 15 minutes or by keeping them submerged under water for 4 to 8 hours. 'The bottom porous Slone is
fi rst placed in the consolidation cell and a filter paper is fixed on the porous stOlle. The ring containing the
sample is then placed on the bottom porous Slone. Another filter paper is kept on the top of the sample and
then top porous stone is placed. The loading pad is placed on the top porous SiOOC. The bolts are lightenoo
SO as to hold tbe entire assembly, and then the consolid.'ltion cell is kept under the loading unit. It should be
centred carefully so that the load is applied axially. The dial gauge is mounted and adjUSted. The mould
assembly is connected to the water reservoir to saturate the Sc'lmple. The level of water in the reservoir should
be approximately same as that of the sample.
An iniual setting pressure of about 5.0 kN/m2 (for very soft soils, 2.5 kN/m2) is applied to the sample.
The initial setting pressure is chosen such thm there is no swelling. The load is allowed 10 stand till there is
no change in the dial gauge reading or 24 hours whichever is less. The rmal dial gauge reading under the
initial setting pressure is noted.
The first increment of load to give a pressure of 10 kN/m2 is then applied to, the specimen. The dial
gauge readings are taken aft~ r 0.25, 1.0,2.25,4.0,6.25,9.0, 12.25, 16.0, 20.25,25,36,49, 64,81, 100, 121,
144, 169, 196, 225, 289, 324, 400, 500, 600 and 1440 minutes (24 hours). Sometimes, after 49 minutes,
readings are taken at 1. 2, 4, 8, 10 and 24 hours. The primary consolidation in the sample is usually complde
within 24 hours.
The second increment of the load is then applied. It is usual practice to double the previous load in eacll
increment. The successive pressures usually applied are 20, 40, BO, 160, 320 and 640 kN/m 2, etc., till the
desired maximum required load intensity is renchcd. lbe maximum load intensity is governed by the actual
loading on the soil in the field after the construction of the structure.
After the consolidation under the final load increment is complete, the load is reduced to one-fourth <i
the final Io.'ld (160 kN/m2 in above case) and allowed to stand for 24 houts. The sample takes water am
swells. lbe reading of the dial gauge is taken when the swelling is complete. 'Ibc load is further redUCJ!d to one-
fourth intensity (40 kN/m1 and the swelling recorded after 24 hours. The load is then reduced to to kN/rn 2
and the swelling is noted. The load is finally reduced to the initial selling load and kept for 24 hours and lilt
final dial gauge reading laken. Throughout the test, the container gutter should be kept filled with water.
Immediately after complete unlo.'tding, the ring with the Sc'lmple is t..'lken out. The excess surface water iI
dried using a blotting paper. The weighl of the ring and the sample is taken. The sample is then dried in III
oven (maintained at 110°C) for 24 hours and its dry mass Al, and the water content are delennined.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 30.15 for the laboratory experiment).
CONSOUDATION OF spn..s 261
H- H,
FOr an intermediate stage, e .. ~ ... (12.10)
After dctennination of the void ratio and the water content at the beginning and at the cnd of the tesl,
the corresponding degree of satumtion can be found from the relation, S .. wGle.
From the calculnted void ratiOS, a plot of "e' versus log 0 can be made, as shown in Fig. 12.8.
(2) Change in Void milo method. In this method, the final void ratio (e/). corresponding to oompletc
swelling conditions after the load has been removed, is determined from its water content, using the equation,
e, .. wG
assuming that the soil is fully saturated.
The void ratio corresponding to intermediate loading stages is determined as explained below. From the
definition of void ratio,
e_v-v·_~_1 ... (a)
V, V,
where V = total volume and V. is the volume of solids. Eq. (a) can be written as
V - V, (l + e)
A )( 11 - V, (1 + e) ... (b)
where A is the cross-sectional area of the specimen and /-I is its total height.
3y partial di[Jerentiation of (b), A dH _ V, de ... (e)
where Ml is the change in thickness, as me~urcd with respect to the thickness Il, at the end of the test.
See Table 12.2 for the illustration of the method.
Table 12.2. Computation or Void Ratios by Change in Void Ratio Method
Given Data flo .. 25 mm, A = 50 cm 2• Volume = 125 ml, M~ = 190.24 gmt
G = 2.67, W, _ 24.94%. H/ .. 23.74
e, - WI )( G - 0.2494 )( 2.67 - 0.666.
Obsef1l(1tions CaJcu/miolls
Applied Challge ;11
pre.ssuree Dial gauge thickness A,
H.Hoj:l:6.ff
reat/ing 6.J1(mm) (from Eq. (d)
(kNlm,>
0.0 490 25;.00 0.754
....08
10.0 482 24.92 - 0.006 0.748
20.0 470 - 0.12 24.80 - 0.008 0.740
40.0 431 - 0.39 24.41 - 0.027 0 .7 13
BO.O 390 - 0.41 24.00 - 0.029 0.684
160.0 343 -0.47 2.1.53 - 0.033 0.651
320,0 295 - 0.48 23.05 - 0.034 0.617
640.0 24. - 0.46 22.59 - 0.032 0585
0.0 364 +1.15 23.74 + 0.081 0.666 f
12.7. CONSOLIDATION TEST RESULTS
(1) Dial gauge reading-lime piOI. Fig. 12.6 (0) shows the plot between the dial gauge reading and lime
for a typical load increment for clay and sand samples. The thicknes.<i just after the application of the load
increment (I - to). is a maximum which decreases as the lime incre.15eS. TIle decrease is rapid initially but it
Cloy
~
~ "-.......... ..,.,-SOnd
g ---------
Ti m~ (0-
Co) Cb)
Fig. 12.6. (a) Dial gIluge reading- li me plot. (b) Final void f3tio-a plot
slows down as the time passes. There is practically no change in thickness after 24 hours. The oonsolidation
al Ihal load increment is considered to the. complete at 24 hours. for sand, tbe change in thickness occurs
very quickly and stops after a few minutcs. This is due 10 high penncability of lhe sand which pennits easy
Dow of water.
264 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
The plot betwccn the dial gauge reading and time is required for determining the coefficient of
consolidation. which is useful for obtaining the rate of consolidation in the field.
(2) Final void ratio--efTectlve slres.q plot. The thickness of the specimen after 24 hours of application o[
the load increment is taken os the final thickness [or that increment. The final void ratio (el) corresponding to
the final thickness for each increment is determined using the methods discussed in the preceding section.
Fig. 12.6 (b) shows the plol between the fin.'li void ratios, (elb (efh, (e,») ... etc. and the corresponding
effective stresses 0\.(20), ... for load increments 1. 2. 3, ... elc. As the sand is relatively less compressible,
the change in void ratio is small. TIle plot between the final void ratio and the effective stress is required for
detcrminaUon of the magnitude of the consolidation senlement in the field.
The reader must carefuUy note the difference between Fig. 12.6 (a) and Fig. 12.6 (b). The former shows
the process of consolidation under a particular increment. For each load increment, 8 plot like Fig. 12.6 (a)
can be plolted. The latter shows the plot between the final void ratios reached under diffcrelll load increments
and the corresponding effective stresses under those increments.
(3) Final 'Void rutio---Iog CJ plot. Fig. 12.7 (0) shows a plot between the final void ratio and the effective
Stress, which is similar to one in Fig. 12.6 (b). For convenience the suffix f has been dropped. The curve bas
Log<r - - -
(0) Ib)
Fig.12.7.(Q)~-aplor. (b)~-logaplOl
concavity upward. The slope of the curve at different points is different. The slope decreases with an increase
in effective stre..<;s.
It is more common to plot the results on a semi-log graph. in which the final void ratio is plotted on the
natural scale and the effective stress as
abscissa on the log scale [Fig. 12.7(b).
The plot is practically a straight line for a A
nonnally consolidated clay (defined laler)
within the range of pressure usually
encountered in practice.
(4) Unloading and Reloading plot.
In Fig. 12.8, the curve An indicates the
decrease in void ratio with an increase in
the effective stress. 1l1e curve is similar to
,,,
UNLOAD'NG E ,0
one shown in Fig. 12.7 (b). It is the
loading curve.
'>i:: G
After the sample has reached I
equilibrium at the effective stress of oz.as
shown by point B, the pressure is reduced
<j "2
and the sample is allowed \0 take up water Log~ ------
and swell lbe curve BEe is obtained in Fig. 12.8. Loading, untoa<ling lind retOAding plor.
CONSOUDA110N OF SOILS ,.,
unloading. This is known as the expansion curve or swelling curve. It may be noled that the soil cannot attain
the void ratio existing before the start of the test, and there is always some permanent sct or residual
deformation.
If the specimen which has swelled to the point C is reloaded, the recompression curve CFD is obtained.
As the load approaches the maximum value of the lo."ld previously applied corresponding to point B, there is
reversal of curvature of the curve and then the plot DG continues as an extension of the first loading rurve
AB. However, the reloaded specimen remains at a slightly lower void ratio at point D than that attained at B
during the initial compression for the samc load.
12.8. BASIC DEFlNmONS
The following basic definitions related to consolidation are of paramount importance.
(1) Coefficient of ComJKtiSibility. The ooefficieot of compressibiUly (a~) is defined as deuea<;e in void
ratio per unit increase in effective Stress. It is equal to the slope of the e - 0 curve at the point under
coosidcration [Fig. 12.7 (a»).
-de -6e
Thus a,. - do - .6 0 ... (12.12)
As the effective stress increases, the void ratio decreases. and therefore, the ratio del dO is negative. The
minus sign makes a~ pooitive. For convenience, the coefficient of compressibility a~ is rcported as positive.
As the value of a~ is different at various effective stresses, while reporting its value, the effective stress
to which that value corresponds must be mentioned. The coefficient of oompressibility decreases with an
increase in the effective stress. In ocher words. Ihe soil becomes stiffer (less compressible) as the effective
stress is increased and the curve becomes flaller.
The coefficient of compressibility (a,,) has the dimensions of [L 2/F). The units are m2/kN. It may be
noted that the units are inverse of that for pressure.
(2) Coefficient of Volume change. The coefficient of volume change (or volume oompressibility) is
defined as the volumetric strain per unit increase in effective stress. Thus
- A VIVo
m~ .. ~ ... (12.13)
where m~= coefficient of volume change, Vo = initial volume,
AV "" change in volume, and A 0' "" change in effective stress.
The reader should note that the coefficient of volume change is inverse of the bulk modulus used in solid
medianics and fluid mechanics, For most clays, m~ _ 1 )( 10-3 to 1 )( lO-4m2JkN.
The volumetric strain (.6VIVo) can be expressed in tenns of either void ratio or the truckness of the
specimen as explained under:
(a) Let eo be the initial void ratio. Let the volume of solids be unity. Therefore, the initial volume Vo is
equal to (1 + eo). If Ae is the change in void ratio due to change in volume AV, we have AV - Ae. Thus
AV Ae
Yo - r:;e;;
Therefore, Eq. 12.13 becomes m~ .. - A e~(~ + eo) ...(12.14)
(b) As the area of cross-section of the sample in the consolidometer remains constant, the change in
volume is also proportional to the change in height. Thus .6 V .. tJI
AV .6H
Therefore,
V;" Ho
where Ho = initial height.
266 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
- Mllllo
Therefore, Eq. 12.13. becomes m~ .. ~ ... (12.15)
m~ .. 1 :veo ...(12.16)
like Q .. • the coefficient of volume change m .. depends upon the effective stress at which it is determined.
Its value also decreases with an increase in the effective stress. The unit of m" is the same as that of a,~
However, the coefficient of volume change m.. is more commonly used in practice than the coefficient of
compressibility Q",
(3) Compression Index. The compression index (C() is equal to the slope of the linear portion of the
a
void ratio versuS log plOI [Fig. 12.7 (b)]. Thus
where 00 = initial effective stress, '0 = final effective stress, de "" change in void ratio
Sometimes, Eq. 12.17 is expressed as
Cc .. -a!: 6. (J ... (12.18)
10glO(~)
where 60 is the change in effective stress.
The numerical value of C c can be easily determined from the difference in void ratio corresponding to
one log cycle. Thus
... (12.19)
The compression index is extremely useful for determination of the settlement in t!le fiek!.
The compression index of a clay is related to its index properties. especially the liquid limit. Terzaghi and
Peck gave the following empirical relationship for Clays of low to medium sensitivity «Sf $ 4).
(a) For undisturbed soils, Cc ,. 0.009 (wL - 10)
(b) For rcmoulded soils,
where wL = liquit limit (%).
The value of Cc normally varies between 0.30 for highly plastic clays cmd 0.075 for low plastic clays.
The compression index is also related 10 the insilu void ratio eo or water content (wo) as under
C, _ 0.54 (co - 0.35) ... (12.21)
C, _ 0.0054 (2.6wo - 35) ... (12.22)
The coeITicient of compressibility av may be calculated' from the compression index as under:
a,. - 0.435 5-
0.
where 0", is tile average pressure for the increment.
(4) Expansion Index. 'The expansion index or swelling index (CO') is the slope of the e-Iog a plot
obtained during unloading (BEC in Fig. 12.8).
C _ de
• 10 (0+40)
g lO~
... 12.23)
CONSOUDATION OF SOILS 1b7
As it is evident. the expansion index is much smaller than the compression index.
(S) Recompression Index. Recompression is the compression of a soil which had already been loaded
and unloaded. The load during rerompression is less than the load to which the soil has been subjeaed
previously. The slope of the recompression curve obtained during reloading ( CFD in Fig. 12.8) when plotted
as e-log 0, is equal to the recompression index (C.). Thus
C _ -lie
~ 10g(0+:0) ... (12.24) .
lbc reoompression index is appreciably smaller than the compression index C~. It is usually in the range
of 1/10 10 1/5 of lhe compression index.
(6) NonnaUy consolldnted and Over-<:onsolidated clays. A normally consolidated soil is one which had
not been subjeacd to a pressure greater than the presenl existing pressure. A soil is said to be
over-consolidalcd if it had been subjected in the past to a pressure in excess of the present pressure.
The {Xlrtion AD of the curve in Fig. 12.8 represents the soil in normally oonsolidaled condition. The curve
in this ronge is also called the virgin compression curve. '!lIe soil in the range CD when it is recompressed
represents overconsolidatcd condition. as the soil had bccn previously subjected to a pressure 02> which is
greater than the pressure in the range CD.
lbe maximum pressure to which an over-consolidated soil had been SUbjected in the past divided by the
present pressure is known as the overconsolidation raLio (O.C.R.). For example, the soil indicated by the
coodition at point C bas an over-consolidatioa ratio of o:0'J'
It may be emphasized that normally consolidated soils and O\lerconsolidated soils are not different type<>
of soils but thcsc are conditions in which a soil exists. The same type of soil can behave as nonnally
consoLid..lted in a certain pressure range and an over-consolidatcd in somc other pressure rangc. For example,
in Fig. 12.8, the soil which behaves as overc:onso1idat~ in the range CD would again behave as normally
consolidated in the range DG.
The liquidity index of a normally consolidated clay is gen,erally between 0.6 and 1.00, whereas that for
an over-consolldated clay between 0.0 and 0.60.
As the recompression index (C~) is very small as compared with Ihe compression index (C~), the soils in
the overconsolidated Slate have smaller compressibility. The settiemenlS of the strudures built an
over-consolidated clays are small.
(7) Vnderconsolldated clays. If the Clay deposit has not reached equilibrium under the applied
overburden loads, it is said to be underconsolidated This normally ocrurs in areas of recent land fill.
12.9. TERZAGill'S TDEORY OF CONSOLIDATION
(1) Assumptions. Terzaghi (1925) gave the theory for the determination of the rate of consolidation of a
saturated soil ma<iS subjected 10 a static, steady load. The theory is based on the following assumptions :
(1) The soil is homogeneous and isotropic.
(2) The soil is fully saturated.
(3) The solid particles and water in the voids are incompressible. The consolidation occurs due to
expubion of water from the voids.
(4) The coefficient of permeability of the soil has the same value at all points, and it remains constant
during the entire period of consolidation.
(5) Darcy's law is valid throughout the collSOlidation process.
(6) Soil is. laterally oonfmed, and the consolidation takes place only in axial direction. Drainage of water
also ocrurs only in the vertical direction.
(7) Ihe time lag in consolidation is due entirely to the low permeability of the soil
(8) There is a unique relationship between the void ratio and the effeaive stress., anc;t.lbis relationship
268 roll MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
remains constant during the load increment. In other words, the coefficient of compressibility and the
coefflcienl of volume change are oonslant.
Comments on the assumplions
'!be assumptions made by Tcrzaghi are not fully satisfied in actual field problems. The results obtained
from the use of the theory to practical problems are approximate. However, considering romplcxity of the
problem. the theory gives reasonably acrurnle estimate of the lime rate of settlement of a structure built on
the soil. A brief oomment on the various assumptions and their effect is given below.
Assumptions 1 to 3 are generaUy satisfied for fully saturated, clay deposits. However, the presence of air
may affect the accuracy.
Assumptions 4 and 5 are not fully satisfied. 1n fact. the coefficient of penneabilily varies at different
points in the deposit. Its value dccreascs as the consolidation progresses due 10 an increase in the effective
stress. Further, at vcry low hydraulic gradicnts. the Darcy law in not strictly applicable. Fortunately, the errors
introduced due to these assumptions ore smalL
The largcst error is probably due to the assumption 6. In the field. the consolidation is usually
3·dimensional and not one· dimensiomli. Howevcr. in the c.'lSe of deposits having large areas compared with
their thicknesses have essentially one·dimensional consolidation and thc error is not mud).
Assumption 7 is oot fully justified, as some secondary consolidation does occur along with the primary
consolidation. However, for most inorganic soils, the secondary consolidation is small and does oot introduce
much error.
The actual relationship between the void ratio ood the effective stress is not linear. oontrary to the
assumption 8. However, if 0 largc number of samples are taken from the same stratum and an average value
of the coefficient of volume change (111,,) is taken for the appropriate range of the effective stress, the error
introduced due to this assumption is not unduly high. The only justification for making this assumption is to
get a relatively simple expression. The thoory becomes more complex when actual relationship is used.
(2) Derivation or DllTerential Equation. The basic differential equation of one-dimensional
consolidation can be derived as under:
Let us consider a S<lturatcd clay layer of thickness 2d ( _ If) sandwiched between two layers of sand
(Fig. 12.9). When a unifonn pressure of 8 0 is applied on the surface of the top sand layer, the tOlal stress
developed at aU points in the clay layer is increased by 80.
As explained in the spring analogy model (Sect. 12.3). initiaUy the whole of the pressure is taken up by
water, and the hydrostatic excess pressure of 80/ y.., develops. Fig. 12.9 shows the excess hydrostatic pressure
diagram on tbe rigbt side. It is assumed that various points along the thickness of the clay layer are ron~ed
by flexible tubes to the piezometers. AI lime I = D. just after the application of the load, the excess hydrostatic
pressure Ui is equal to 80/ y.., throughout the clay layer. This is represented by ttrv horizontal line AB. The
1=0
T
Ilo:rl~"''''h
T
H:2d
Thus, i .. ~
oz
_ 0 (iily...,) ..
oz
..!..
1...,
(El.)
a z
... (a)
Ah-~-.!..(§!..
y.., yOO' az
dz)
The hydraulic gradient becomes
i _ ~_
dz
.!..(i§.)
y.., iJz
... [same as (a)] T
From Darcy's law, lhe velocity of flow at depth z is bZ
given by 1
v_ki _k . ...!..(£'!.)
1... az
1be velocity of flow at the bottom of the element of
UUctness Az am be written ~ Fig. 12.10. PrC:5Sure Difference on /I Thin Sliec.
v+ ~'dz
oz
- v+ ~['!'(i§.)l
ilz y... ilz
dz
lberefore, . ..(1226)
270 OOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
AQ - [ (v + Tz . dz) - v1Ax x Ay
AQ .. ¥z (ar x Ay )( Al) ... (b)
As the water is squeezed out, the effective stress increases and the volume o~ the soil mass decreases.
From Eq. 12.13,
aAa ll§ 8u
---at .. iJt - at
For a given pressure increment, at.. a .. O. Therefore.
~ au
a, .. -at
Therefore, Eq. (d) becomes i!!'. _ -m. (_~)
az in
_ m. (£¥.)
at ... (12.27)
~ a'u _ m. (£¥.)
1. az' at
,a2 u au
c" a1- - at ... (1228)
k k
c.. - - .. - - .(12.29)
't",m.. gp ... m ..
Eq. 12.28 is the basic differential equation of one-dimensional coosolidation. It gives the distribution of
hydrostatic excess pressure Ii with depth z and lime t.
12.10. SOLUTION OF BASIC DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION OF CONSOLIDATION
The solution of the basic differential equation of one- dimensional oonsolidation (Eq. 12.28) can be
obtained using Fourier series. Let us express hydrotatic excess pressure U as
u - fdz) . "(,) ... (12.30)
where II (z) and f2 (t) indicate some function of z and t, respectively.
Substituting the above value of uin Eq. 12.28,
c.
a' [fdz) I 1-" (z) -a,[/,(,)]
8z'
["(,) - ,-
a'
8z' [fdz)] ata [(, (/) ]
oe r,w- c'/,(/)
The lefl-hand side of the above equation is a function of x only and the right.hand side is a function of
tonly. In other words, if the left-hand side is e.quallO some constant (say, - A2) when t is taken as a variable
and the right-hand side is equ.1l to the same constant when z is considered as a variable.
Thus,
a' [fdz) I -
8z' _A' fdz) ... (a)
.cd
a'
8z' [f, (e)] - -A'c."(,) ...@
. .• (1232)
Ia sin mxsinnxd:c .. 0
and Ia sin nx tb: .. xl2
2
In the above identities if (1tl IfI) is substituled for x. the differential dx changes to ('1[/11) dz and the
limits of integration change to 0 to H.
ii. !u. ~
l't
_ 1 _ [s'n (2N + 1)ru
'NL:o (2N+1) I 1/
1e -«2N+ll·,llJllC' y l ... (12.33)
12.32)
Eq. 12.33 is the required solution of the basic diffecential equation of one-dimensional consolidation. It
gives the variation of hydrostatic excess pressure ii with depth z at any lime t in terms o f the initial
hydrootatic excess pressure Ui ( equal to & o/y...).
Substituting H • 2d, where d is the length of the drainage path, in Eq. 12.33,
32 (a)l _.§;
u n: N~O
_ 1 _ [ . (2N+Oruj _« 2N+l )211.1/4;)C'~1
(2N + I) sm 2d e .. (12.34)
Ind the Eq. 12.34 bca>mes, U _ § ~ _1_ [ . (2N + 1)m: 1 _(2N+l)l,.?r./4 ... (1236)
l't NL:o (2N+l»)( sm 2d e
A series of isochroncs indicating the variation of U with z Co1n be plotted for diffcrent values' of T~ . The
..• (fJ shape of the isocbrones dcpends upon the initial distribution of excess pore water pressure ii; and the drainagc
C(l{lditions at the boundaries of the cL'l)' layer. If both the upper and lower boundaries are free draining. the
•. .(g) clay layer is known as open layer. If only one boundary of the clay layec is free draining, the laycr is called
half·dosed layer.
limits Fig. 12.11 (a) shows the isochrones for an open laycr of thickness 2d when the initial distribution of
pressure is uniform. TIle upper balf of the diagram is also applicable for a half-closed laycr of thickness d
(Fig. 12.11 (b)]. The hydraulic gradient at any pain! is equal to the slope of tbe isochrone at thai point.
u
The progress of consolidation nt any point depends upon the porc water pressure at that point. The
dcgree of consolidation (UJ at any point at depth z L.. equal to the ratio of the dissipated excess pore water
pressure to the initial excess pore water pressure, i.e.,
... (h)
lal
Fig. 12.11. \sochrones.
274 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
... (12.37)
Uz·I- "
;
2 .
!ism (Md') .-AlT.
... ...(12.38)
.0
where M. i (2N + 1)
Eq. 1238 gives the degree of consolidation at a point. In practical problems, the main interest is to know
the average degree of consolidation of the whole layer. The average degree of consolidation (U) is defined as
U _ U j - V, .•.(12.39)
U;
whecc Vi is initial excess hydrostatic pressure over the entire depth,
1 l"-
Ui -'2d JO U; dz
aod V, is the average excess hydrostatic pressure after time t over the entire depth,
1 1'-
V, - 2d 10 u dz
1 l"-
U_l _'2dJ
__ udz
o _ _
Eq. 12.39 can be written as,
1 l"-
'2dJ o Uj dz
r"
U-l-;_ dz
... (12.40)
10 Uj dz
For constant initial excess pore waler pressure Uj, Eq. 12.40 becomes
1 1'_
u- 1 - 2dUj 10 u dz ... (12.41)
U- l"~
1 - _1_ j" ~ 2";.
-
2dui.0N_oM
Sin (AI')
-
d
e-AIT•
. .. (12.42)
upon the non-dimensionaJ time fadar T~ The curves can be obtained between U and T, for different drainage
conditions and the pressure distribution.
Table 12.3 gives the values of T~ for different values of the average degree of consolidation (U). Case (1)
is applicable for unifonn pressure distribution for ooth open layer and half-closcd layer. This is also
!) applicable for triangular (linear) distribution of pressure in the case of open layers. Case (2) is applicable for
triangular distribution of pressure for half·c1oscd layer with maximum pressure near the drainage face. Case
(3) is also applicable for triangulru- distribution of pressure for half·closed layer but with zelO pressure ncar
the drainage face. Fig. 12.13 gives the rurve for the three cases considered.
Thble 12.3. Variation or U with T~.
~)
Presrure
dislribuljOll "[JOr
;;~'J,' .
Curve (1)
,'f,r:, r-~ • • ,' j",-
Curve (2)
~J Cun>e(3)
Ca.{e (1) Casc (2) Case (3)
U T. T. T.
0.0 0.0 0.0
O.! 0.008 0.003 0.047
0.2 0.031 0.009 0.100
03 0.071 0.024 0.158
0.4 0.126 0.048 0.221
05 0.196 0.092 0.294
0.6 0.287 0.160 0.383
0.7 0.403 0.270 0.500
0)
O.B 0567 0.440 0.665
0.• 0.848 0.720 0.940
1.0
.1) The time factor T" depends upon tbe coefficient of consolidation (e,,). time I and the drainage patb d (Eq.
12.35). lbe coefficient of consolidation represents tbe combined erred of the coefficient of permeability (k)
and the coefficient of volume change (m~) as indicated by Eq. 12.29.
Thus ...(12.44)
As the codsoliclation progresses, both the coefficient of permeability (k) and the coefficient of volume
change (m,,) decrease, but the ratio (kim,,) remains almost constant over a considerable mnge of pressure.
Consequently, the coefficient of consolidation remains almost constant.
The drainage path (d) represents the maximum distance that the water has to lravel before reaching the
free-drainage boundary. For an o(X!n layer, the value of d is equal to half the thickness of the layer, whereas
for a half-closed layer, it is equal to the thickness of the layer.
The time (t) is measured from the instant tbe load is applied to tbe layer.
, As indicated by 'Eq. 12.44, the time factor T" and hence the degree of consolidation depends upon
t, m,. d and t. It also depends upon the distribution of pressure across the thickness.
The rurve (1) in Fig. 12.13 is parabolic. 1llc relationship can be represented by tbe following empirical
equations.
27' SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
O~
r-
o.
'~
---- I'---
o. ~
'~
o. ,
"'" ""'-",
"-
'\
o. , "- \
~ O., "\ ~)
L. 6 ~ \\
, \ [\
""
o.
o. 8
'\1\
o.9
0
0.01 O.Q) ().()<j 0.070. I T I / _ a . ) O.S OJ'
~
LO
and T" - - 0.933 \0£10 (1 - U) - 0.085 (for U > 0.60) ... (12.46)
where U is expressed as a ratio (not percentage).
Eq. 12.46 can also be written as,
T~ - 1.781 - 0.933 10g IO (100 - U%) ... [12.46 (a)J
These approximate relations are extremely useful when the curves between U and T~ arc not available.
Limitation of the Consolidation Theory. One-dimensional consolidation theory is bused on a numbcr of
assumptions which arc not realised in practice. The equation has the following limitntions :
(1) The value of the coefficient of consolidation (c..) has been assumed to be constant. In reality, it
changes with a change in the consolidation pressure. For accurate predictions of the time-rate of
consolidation in the field, its value should be detennincd for thc cxpected pressure rangc.
(2) The distance d of the drainage path cannot be measured accurately in the field. "n1C thickness of the
deposit is generally variable. and an avemge value has to be estimated.
(3) There is sometimes difficulty in locating the drainage face. Sometimes thin pervious scams which
CONOOUDATION OF SOILS 277
can act as good drairiugc faces arc missed in the boring operations. On the other hand. sometimes
isolated sand pockets arc wrongly laken as drainage faces.
(4) The equation is based on the assumption that the consolidation is one-dimensional. In field. Ihe
consolidation is generally 3- dimensional. The lateral drainage may have a significant effect on the
lime rate of consolidation.
(5) 'llie initial consolidation $lnd the secondary consolid.ation have been neglected. Sometimes, these
fonn an important part of the total consolidation.
(6) In the field, the load is seldom applied instantaneously. The effect of the loading period has to be
considered, as explained in Sect. 12.15.
(7) In actual pradice, the pressure distribution may be far from linear or uniform. The theory becomes
complicated when correct disJ:ribution is considered.
NotwiUlstanding the above limitations. the consolidation theory is used to predict the time rate of
settlement of the structures built on a soil. The results arc fairly occurate if the theory is applied with caution,
keeping above limitations in mind.
12.11. DETERMINATION m" COEFFICIENT OF CONSOLIDATION
The curve between dial gauge reading and time I obtnincd in the laboratory by testing Ihe soil sample is
similnr in shape to the theoretical curve between U and T~ obtained from the consolidation theory. This
similnrity between Ihe laboratory curve and the theoretical curve is used for the detennination of the
coefficient of consolidation (c~) of the soil. The methods are known as the filling mer}wds. '!be fallowing two
methods are commonly used.
(1) Square-root of time method. The method. devised by Taylor, utilizes the theoretic.'ll relationship
betwccn U and ff.,. The relationship is linear up to the value of U equal to about 60% (Eq. 12.45). It has
been rurtbcr established that at U = 90%, the value of ff., is 1.15 times the value obtained by the extension
of the initial straight line portion [Fig. 12.14 (a)].
The sample of the soil whose coefficient of consolidation is required is tested as explained ;n Sect. 12.5
For a given load increment, the dial gauge readings are taken for different time intervals. A curve is plotted
between the dial gauge reading (R), as ordinate. and the.fi • as abscissa [Fig. 12.14 (b)], The curve AlleDE
shows the plot. The curve begins at the dinJ gauge reading Ro III time to. indicated by point A.
I\s the load increment is applied, there is an initial compression. 11 is obtained by producing back the
Ro A
I R~
~1
o
€ u·/.
~_\oI';
bo
Theoreticat
'" ,:rimo r y consolidolion
,curve
b"~
)]
901Jl!-Q===::::=~::,..
IOOL
iT,
~)
RgO - - - - - - - - - - - -
~
E ~~~~~i%~ion
(b)
.[T -
Rg. 12.14. Square.root d Time plot.
278 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
initial linear part of the curve to intersect the dial-gauge reading axis at point A '. This corresponds 10 the
corrected zero reading (N,,). The conso lidation between the dial glluge reading Ro and RI . is Ihe illilial
compression. The TCf:l.aghi theory of consolidation is not applicable in this range.
From the corrected zero reading point A', a line A' C is drawn such that ils abscissa is 1.15 times Ihat
of the initial linear portion A ' 8 of Ihe curve. "Inc intersection of this linc. with the curve at point C indicates 90%
of U. The dial gauge reading corresponding to C is shown as Roo and the corresponding absciss..1 as "rr;.
The point D for 100% primary consolidation can be obtained from Roo as,
... (12.47}
The distance of the drainage path d is half the total thickness. The total thickncss may be taken as the
average or the initial thickncss (II,) and final thickness (NJ~ of the sample.
Th,,·
•• d -- li2 -- -2
'
[Hi +2 Ht ] . .. [12.48(a)[
The test is repealed for different load increments -and an average value of c" obtained, as shown in
Fig. 12.15.
(2) Logarithm of time method. llle method
given by Casagrande uses the theoretical curve
between U and Log T,., as shown in Fig. 12.16 (a).
The curve consists of Ihree parts : (i) an initial
portion which is paraholic in shape, (ii) a middle
portion which is almost linear, and (iii) the last
portion to which the horizontal axis is an asymptote. c..,
t
It is observed that the point of intersecti on of the
tangent drawn at the point of inllexion on the curve
and the asymptote of the lower portion gives the
value of 100% consolidation. Logr __
The sample of the soil is tested as explained in
Section 12.5. For a given load increment, 11 curve is
, ploned betwccn the dial gauge reading R nnd log I Fig. 12. 15. Vnriation of C•.
[Fig. 12.16 (b)}. Let Ro be the in.i[ial dial gauge before the application of the load increment. The corrected
zero reading (R..) is ob[ained using the fac[ that the initial portion of the curvc is parabolic. Two points Band
C arc selectcd cOITcsponding to some arbitrary time II and 4th respectively, illld having the vertical intercept
a, as shown. Point A' is located such that the vertical intercept hetween B and A' is also equal to u. It
represenls the corrected dial gauge reading Rr corresponding to zero primary consolidation. As a check, the
procedure can be repeated hy selecting two other points (not shown) with the time ratio I : 4. It should also
give approximately [he same location of point A ' . Obviously, the consolidation ' between the dial gauge
reading Ro to RI " represented by A and A " is initial compression.
CONSOUDATION OF SOILS 279
100
[s: ... Tv
'0)
h.«" <O.
c:.urv~
'
~ 1
RIOO
R.
----------- -!------~~¥---_
- - _____ ____ 1_ - - - - __ . :_ _ _ _ _ _ _
E
, ,
''30 '00
logt - _
'b)
Fig. 12.16. Logarithm or tim e: Plot.
The fmal portion of the experimental curve is linear. The point F corresponding to 100% consolidation is
obtained from the intersection of the two linear parts, as shown. The values of Rloo and 1100 are obtained
corresponding to point F. TIle compression between the dial gauge readings Re and RiOO is the primary
consolidation, and thai between R 100 and R, is the secondary consolidation.
The point M corresponding to 50% primary consolidation (Rso) is located midway between Re and R 100
800 the value of time 1$0 is obtained.
1be distance d of the drainage path is detennined using Eq. 12.48, as in the first method.
The test is repeated for different load inqements and an average value of CO' for the desired load range is
determined, as shown in Fig. 12.15 ..
Comparison of the two method... The two methods for determination of the coefficient of consolidation
give comparable results for most of the soils. However, the following points must be carefully noted.
(1) For some SOils, the square-root of time plot does not give a straight line for the inilial portion and,
therefore, to 10000te the corrected zero Rc becomes difficult. For such soils, the log-of-time method is
better.
(2) The square-root of time method is more suitable for soils exhibiting high secondary consolidation. In
>d such soils the log I-plot does not show the characteristic shape required to locate the point
COITtSponding LO 100% consolidation.
00
(3) The square-root of time method is more convenient for a general case, as it requires dial gauge
p'
readings covering a much shorter period of time compared with the log-time method. The )atter
"
he
method requires accurate plotting of the secondary coosolidation curve in order to locate tbe
asymptote.
Compression Ratios. The following definitions for different compression ratios are used.
ge
(I) Inldlll compnsslonJ8t1o (T,). It is the ratio of the initial oompression to the total compession. In
tcnn.s of dial gauge readings. it is expressed m;
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUND/maN ENGINEERING
... (12.50)
where Ro = zero dial gDuge reading, Rt = corrected zero reading, and RI = final dial gauge reading.
(il) PrImary compression mtlo (r,.). II is ralio of Ihe primary oomlxession 10 the 10lal oompression. In
terms of dial gauge readings. it is given by
... 12.51)
l>i'
I I I I I I i + I I I
I w+///lI//l1lllZTP7/1M
e;s
j
Fig. 12.18. l./Iycr Subjected 10 Ao.
A}f .. mJlo(A 0)
> of
Representing the final seUlcmenl as As, and laking}fo .. AI..
tho As,_ mv 62 (AD)
Total settlement of the oomplete layer,
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
r
In an actual case, as the pressure intensity 6,'0 and the coemcicnt of volume change my deaease with
depth z, it is convenient to divide the stratum into a number (n) of small layers and to assume dO and mIl as
constarll in each layer. The fmal setllement is given by
f"''
" - }: (m.), (d 0), (IU), ... (1255)
r:r-.. [J:"...
is relatively small, the variations of 6. (j and m"
with depth z may be asswned as linear (Fig. Fig. 1219. Graphical Integrnlion Method.
12.20). The values at the mid-depth may be taken as representative
values, and Eq. 12.15 may be used as
" - (m.). (dO). H. ...(1256)
where (m ..)", and (6. 0)", are the values at mid-depth.
dH-H.(~)
1 + eo l l
(a) (b)
... (12.57)
Fig. 12.20
Sf - 1 ~~ eo • Ho . 10gIO (a ~oa a)
o
.. (12.58)
(b) Preconsoliduted soils. The final settlements are small in the case of preconsolidated soils as the
recompression index C, is considerably smaller thun the compression index. From Eq. 12.24,
-ae - C, log
ao 6a)
(----0;;--
+
The above equation is applicable when (cio + a 0) is smaller than the perconsoli<ialion pressure 0(.
If the perconsolidation pressure oe is greater than 00 but less than \ao + aO), the settlement i'> computed
in two parts:
(l) Settlement for pressure ~ to 'O~.
(iJ) Settlement for pressure Or to (00 + II 0)
For the first, part, the recompression index is applicable, whereas for the second part, the compression
index is used. Thus
C, _ Crflo
', - - 1 - ' Holog\crc / oo) + -I-
(00 +
log - -- -
ao) ... (12.60)
+- +-
In this case, the first part is relatively small and is sometimes neglected. ~
________________ lptP~-~,~F~u~"~LOO~d~'~p~--
-t"] i
L
r----7'lP-"--'---''-'--'c------ 11meo
'0'
,..,~ic__4c_+-~'-----_tlme
Ukcwisc, the settlemem at any other time can be obtained. Fig. 12.21 (b) also indicates the settlement at
time 1/4 of the in')taneous curve. A smooth curve is drawn through all points so obtained. Thus the corrected
curve OC is drawn. 1hc curve eM beyond the loading period is extended by making offset 8M equal to AC.
The load after time tp is equal to the full load P. The offset, therefore, remains equal to the one·half of tbe
looding period (/,/2). In other words, the horizontal offset between the oorreclcd curve and the instantaneous
curve after the k>ading period is constant, and equal to 1/2.
Alternative method.
The corrected curve can be obtained ea<>ily if the mle of settlement is not of interest during the
construction period (tp ). In this case, the correde(l curve can be taken as the curve for instaneous loading in
which the origin is t:lken at t _ t"l2. In other words, the whole load P is assumed to be applied
instantaneously at half the loading period (t/2).
C C04l'eSponding to a void ratio of 0.40 eo (Fig. 12.22). [Note. In some texts. il is taken as 0.42 eo]. The
coordinates of point D represent the natural void ratio (eo) and the effective overburden pressure (00) before
the sample was extracted. When the sample has been taken out. the overburden pressure reduces to zero, but
the water content (w) and hence void ratio remain essentially the same. The process is represented by line
De_
When the undisturbed sample is tested in the laboratory. the compression curve (k.. ). represented by the
curve ABC is obtained. The portion A 8 of thL.. curve represents the recompression ana the portion BC as the
virgin compression. The upward extension of the linear portion BC intersects the horizontal line through eo at
point £. For a nonnally oonsolidatcd soil, the point E always lies towards the len of the point D. Once it has
been established that the soil is normally consolidated, the field consolidation Line or in-situ consolidation line
(kt) is drawn joining the points D and C. 'rbe slope of this line DC is equal 10 the compression index of the
in- situ soil.
If the sample is remoulded and again tested, the compression curve (k,) is obtained. The slope of the k,·
curve is somewhat smaller than that of the k..·curve. However. the downward extension of the k,.line also
intersects the horizontal line drown from 0.4 eo at point C.
(b) Preconsolidnted soli. In Fig. 12.23, the curve ABC is the laborotory compression curve (kw) for the
undisturbed sample. The poinl C corresponds to a void ratio of 0.4 eo- The backward extension of the linear
portion of the curve ABC meets the
at horizontal line eo D at point E. In case of
ed
preconsolidated soils, the point E lies towards
C.
he
the right of point D representing the in-situ
condition ('00. eo). It is obvious that there is
!
recompression of the soil from a pressure of ]:
00 to the prcconsolidation pressure (O~). A
smooth curve !Xi is drawn from point D
he
in f~~~i~~ ~~~ 1~::S~~i~7:;ou~~ ~
o~ is denoted by the point G. The point G is
ed
joined to the point C by a straight line. The
curve DOC represents the field compression Log iF _ _
curve (kf ). For pressure between 00 to 0.., the
relevant index is the recompression index C, Fig. 12.23. Fietd Consolidation Curve for D.C. CIIIYs.
ed
en and for lhe pressure more than a... it is the compression index (Ct ) given by the krline.
(c) Underconsolidated soils. In areas of rerent landfill, sometimes the soil is underconsolidated. It has
not reached equilibrium under the effectivc overburden pressure (00)' For such soils, the prcconsolidation
pressure @t) is less than thc overburden pressure.
Thus o~ < 00 or O.C.R. < 1
:uRV(
The total compression ror such soils when subjected to extemal loads is equal to the sum or the
compression due to overburden pressure till equilibrium is reached and the additional compression due to
external loads. Thus
6e- 6e L + lie2
where lieL = decrease in void ratio due to 00
tt.e:z = decrease in void ratio due to applied pressure. as found in nonnally consolidated soils.
12.17. SECONDARY CONSOLIDATION
According to Terzaghi's theory of consolidation, the primary consolidation stops when the excess pore
water pressure becomes zero. In actual practice, it has been observed that some consolidation continues even
286 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA'10N I!NGINEERtNG
after the full dissipation of the excess pore water pressure. This additional consolidation is known a<>
secondary consolidation. In other words, the secondary consolidation is the consolidation which occurs after
the completion of the primary consolidation.
The causes of secondary consolidation are not well underslood. This is probably due to tbe gradual
readjustment of the soil skeleton which oc(.:urs after the stresses caused during primary consolidation. There
is plastic readjustment of the soil pnrticlcs 10 the new stress. (In Ihis respect. secondary con.<tOlidation is
somewhat nnalogous to the creep in sleel when it is overstressed and is in the plastic slale.) Secondary
consolidation may also be due to progressive fradurc of the interparticle bonds and the particlcs themselves.
1'11e rate of secondary consolidation is given by the secondary compression index (el ). as defined below.
C, .. 10g~O~t~tl) . .. (12.61)
Primary consolidotion
Logt-_
FiS. 1224. Seconrbry CoosolidatiOfl.
Another pnramcl.cr, known as the coefficient of secondary consolidation (Cu ), is more commonly used. It
is given by
C _~ .. ~. _ _1_ _
... (12.62)
" I + ep 1 + t:p loglo (t2Itl)
where ep = void ratio at the end of primary consolidation
and At: = change in void mtio between time tl and t2'
The magnitude of the secondary cotL'\Olidation is given by
Ss .. C u x 1IIOglO(t2111) ... [12.62(a)J
lime II COfTcsponds to the end of primary consolidation.
The rate of secondary consolidation depends upon the plastic characteristics of the soil. It is controlled
by higbly·viscous, adsorbed water layer surrounding the clay minerals. As the secondary conso'ldation is
highly erratic, its estimate l$ing the above equations is seldom accurate.
For a p.'lrticular soil, the rate of secondary consolidation increases as the ratio of the pressure increment
to the existing pressure is decreased. For standard consolidaLion lest, the ratio is kcp,t one. The rate also
increases with a decrease in the thickness of the specimen used in the test. There are a number of other
factors which control the rate of secondary consolidation. In general, the value of Co. for normally
consolidated soils varies with the compressibility and hence with the natural water content.
The rate depends upon the length of time the preload may have acted on the soil. It also depends upon
lbe shear stresses and on the degree of disturbance of the sample.
Serondary consolidation is important only for highly plastic Clays and organiC soils. In some organic
CONSOUDATION OF SOILS
soils, the secondary consolidation may even be more than the primary consolidation. [0 over-consolidaled,
inorganic clays, the secondary consolidation is usually small and hence it is neglected.
12.18. 3-D CONSOLIDATION EQUATION IN CARTESIAN COORDINATES
Teralghi's tbeory of one-dimensional consOlidation discussed above is based on the assumption thai the
soil is laterally confined and the consolidation takes place only in the vertical direction. In field, as the layers
are not Laterally confined, the consolidation takes place in all the three-dimensions. In general, the
consolidation in the horizontal direction is small and. therefore, neglected. However, in some special cases,
such as in sand drains, there is significant radial drainage. in addition to the vertical drainage. For such cases,
three-dimensional consolidation equation is required to determine the rate of consolidation. The equation for
3·D consolidation' is derived below, making the following assumptions :
(1) The soil mass is homogenous.
(2) The soil is completely saturated.
(3) The soil particles as weD as the water in the voids are incompressible.
The consolidation takes place
due to reduction in voids
caused by flow water.
(4) Darcy's law, in generalised
form, is applicable to
anisotropic soils.
(5) Pressure increment dO is
applied instantaneously to I
develop an initial excess pore I
I
water pressure Uj. Ptx,y;!:):
Fig. 12.25 shows a parallelepiped \Vy dy ....L-
of soil mass with sides li:c, dy, liz with y-""""iY.~............
its centre at point P (x, y, z). Let the
velocity components at the point P by
............. .,
v"' v,. and v:. 100 velocities on the s ix
/'
faces are obtained using the partial y
Y:r._~.!tt..
derivatives and are shown in the figure.
"
Fig. 12.25 2
The volume of water entering the
parallelepiped per unit time (QJ is obtained from the products of the relevant velocities and areas. Thus
Likewise, the volume of water going out per unit time (Qo) is given by
Qo · (v"+~.
'22 ~)dy<4+ (vYaz2
+~. <!l)dx<4 + (v: +~.
az '!!.2) x dxdy
Therefore, the volume of water squeezed out of the parallelepiped per unit time is given by
dQ • Qo-Q;
dQ -
iJv" + ~
( ax iJ"~)
iJy + az dxdydz ... (a)
The volume of the parallelepiped V is equal to dx I dy, dz. It is also equal to V, (1 + e), where V, is the
volume of the solids and e is the void ratio. Thus
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
v _ _ v __ dxdydz
~ 1 +e 1 +e
V .. V1 (1 + e)
1* -fr [V. (1 + e) ] - V. ~
av dxdydziJe
...(b)
at-I+e'ai
Obviously the volume of waler squeezed oul per unit time is equal 10 the mange in volume of
parallelepiped per unit time, From Eqs, (a) and (b),
dxdydz , ~ _ (~ + ~ + ~) dxdydz
I+e at ax ay az
E!=(l+e)(~+5+~)
at ax ay az ... (c)
If ii is the excess hydrostatic pressure. the velocities in x, ~ and 1 directions are obtained from Darcy's
law as
vx-k~i~-~ %'i-*x:!:'~
vy "
v: ..
ky iy " ky
k~i~-Is ~-k:t·~
*. ky:!: . ~
at 'Yw
(k"ax! al :0;
As soon as the pressure increment (~ 0) is applied, the pore water pressure develops, Initially, the load
is entirely taken by pore water, but as the lime passes, water is squeezed out. The excess pore water pressure
gradually decreases and the effective stress increases, as in the one-dimensional consolidation. Thus
~o-~o +&
where ~ (; = effective stress, and ~ u: = pore water pressure.
As any increase in effective stress (O) is equal to a decrease in excess hydrostatic pressure ii,
A'O .. - ~u.
Therefore,
iJe ae
a5'" -~
iJe
Therefore, au .. -0"
The above equation can be written in tenns of lhe coefficient of volume change mit'
a.
From Eq. 12.16, nr~_~
Thus
The equation can be written in tenns of coeITicienls of consolidation c~. e,,. and e"" in the three
directions using Eq. 12.29.
au a2;i il~ a1;
Therefore, at - c~ ~ + e,y ~ + e,~ al ... (12.63)
Eq. 12.63 is lhe general equation for lhrce·dimensio:1ai consolidation (3-D consolidation).
12.19. 3-D CONSOLIDATION EQUATION IN CYUf\JI RICAL COOJt Hl NATES
Three-dimensional consolidation equation, obUlined in :11,' proceixling !\l',l::){m. can be twnsfonned into
cylindrical coordinates (r, a, z) by making the followillg ELlrn,.,\Ulion:
x-reasa, y_rsinO and Z ': 2:
where r = radial distance (polar distance).
and a = angle made by the radius with the pole.
Thus, a_
lan yl x or a- arc Ian (y/x) ... (a)
and r2_x'+l ... (b)
(a~
as L 1
From Eq.
a; - - 2 ='r
or s""S~--~
aa ~ =.l. sinS
a; - 2(1 + I I.?-) - ,> ---;-
Likewise.,
aa x cosO
ay";J-~
au au.2!..+§...~
Therefore, a;-a; ax as ax
au aU.cose _.@..(Sin9)
-ax"-ar as r
Likewise,
lng ~_
at
c
...
(aar2u+ !r
2
§.)
ar
67)
68)
14),
SAND BLANKET
69)
70)
SAND DRAIN
ical
.7 1)
'".:.":
sed.
Fig. 12.21. Sand Dralns IrwaJladon.
292 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
In Ihe case of free strain case, the boundary conditions are as under
The solution for excess JXlrc waler pressure Ii at any time t and at a r'Jdiai distance, is obtained by the
solution of the differential equ.'1tion as
:I!'!:.I ,~
Uo(arlr .. .. 10 (arlr...) Yo (a) - Yo (-Z) 10 (a)
wt:cr~ ./0 = Bessel function of [lISt kind of zero ordcr.
.! I = n~"sel function of first kind of first order.
10 = Bessel function of second kind of 7.ero order.
Y; = llcssci function of second kind of first order.
n ! . ((2 .. arc roots of Bessel function which satisfy the equation
11 (an) Yo (a) - YI (an) 10 (a) .. 0
T, .. C", //(2 R)2
k, kJ,
c,,. .. nr~l.... 111"1...
.~ l,o. i~ic:1 k. i.. coefficient of permeability in horiZontal direction.
[';1l'. average pore water pressure u"" throughout the soil mass may be written as
4vf (a)
,u"" - u~,.~ ... a2 (n2 _ 1) rn2V~(OJJ) _ UT(a)J
'The average degree of radial consolidation Vr can be detennincd from the equation
... (12.72)
Fig. 12.28 shows the variation of V, with the time factor T, by dolled lines for different values of /I,
wheren _ Rlr....
(2) Equal Strain Case. This case occuno when the surcharge applied is rigid, such as heavy steel plates.
!n this case. the settlements are uniform. but the distribution of pressure is non·unifonn. The problem was
solved by Barron, who gave the expression for excess pore water pressure as u
- 4u_ [, (,'-,:.)]
u - (2R)2 F(n) R log. (rlr...) - - - 2 - .. .(12.73)
III •
.'
ttl _ 82 log.. (niB) -
0'
43 + 4n2 +
k,(.,-o')
k; -.-,- log.. B
Fig. 12.29. Smear Zone
294 SOIL MEC~IANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
and
The average degree of consolidation is given by
V, _ I _ ~ _ 1 _ e- ( 8T./mj
... (12.7~
The solutions for values of III are also lMlilable in the fonn of curvcs for different values of klolk, and B
and n. It may be noted that for no smear zone. B = 1.0 and the results of equal-strain casc apply.
"rne net effcct of the smear zone on the consolidation is thaI the influence area of the drain is reduced.
As an upproximation. the effect of smear zone is sometimes taken indirectly into acrounl by reducing tht
radius 'of influence R to 0.5 R.
'Inc following points regarding sand dmins may be noted.
(1) Secondary consolidation is nol taken into acrounl in [he design of sand drains. In fact , the sand
drains arc ineffective in controlling the sc(."(mdary consolidation for highly plastic and organk soils.
(2) Sand drains tend to act os weak piles ond reduce the stresses in the clay. Consequently, the excess
pore water pressure developed is gcncrnlly less os compured with that in the case when there arc !XI
sand drnins. This factor is nO!. taken into nccount in equation given above.
(3) The typical design parameteffi for the sand dl1lins arc os under:
(0) Radius of sand drains well, r" = 0.2 to 0.3 m
(b) Spacing of sand drnins, S := 2 to 5 m
(c) Depth of sand drains. 2H = J \0 35 m
(d) Thickness of sand bl.'lOket = 0.6 to I m.
CONSOUOATION OF SOILS
""
Table 12.4. Values of coefficient 0.
n
(Slrip/OOIing) 1.0 0.80 0.63 0.53 0.45 0.40 0.36 0.25
:ed. Note: (1) B"is e<juaJ to the width of strip fOOling or diameter of the circular fOOling.
the (2) For square foolings, USC the values of a for the circular footlng of the same arca.
The values of the pore pressure coefficient A depend upon the type of the clay.
'fhe typical values of the correclion factor Il are given in TaDJc 12.5. Fig. 12.30 gives the values of j.l for
.and
different values of A and DJB ratio, where D is the thickness of soil layer.
•its.
cess Thble 12.5. Values of ~l.
Type of Soil
:ounl
2.77)
~onal
2.78)
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
lim in
tue of Illustrative Example 12.1. Calculate the final sculemen! of the clay layer slwwn in Fig. E 12.1 due to
an increase of pressure of 30 kN/nl at mid·height of the layer. Take y", .. 10kNlnl
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERINO
G,o;.
T
40m
------
Cloy
--~---------
1,,18 kN/m 3 '0;\.30
cc"o.zz t
2.Sm
1
Fig. E 12.1
Also calculate the settlement when the water table rises to the ground surface.
Solution. Initial pressure at the centre of the clay layer.
ao .. 4 )( 20 + 1.25 )( 18 .. 102.5 kN/m 2.
0.22 (50+30)
Therefore, sf" I + 1.30 )( 2.50 10gIO -----so-
.. 0.0488 m .. 4.88 an
As expected, the seulement inm:ascs due to the rise of Ihe water table.
Illustrative Example 12.2. A footing IuJs a size of 3.0 m by 1.50 m and it causes a pressure increment
of 200 kN/m2 ai ilS base (Fig. E 12.2). Determine the consolidation settlement at me middle of me clay layer.
Assume 2 : 1 fresswe distribution and consider Ihe variation of pressure across the depth of the clay layer.
"Y..... 10 leN/III • Il l...
~'V.I<.'W? q"';;x:<;j}:x::.<:<V?) 1m
!--,.'m-l T
':16·0 kNlml ¥ L
l5~t:'!·OkNlmJ 0f·,m
CLAY
L
_ . _ _ _ __ . _ . _ _ _ ._3m
r: IS~N/m3 Ib;O·80
Cc =0-30
Fig. E J2.2.
Solution. Initial pressure at the centre of the clay layer,
00 .. 2.5 x 16 + 0.5 (18 - 10) + 1.5 )( (15 - 10.0) _ 51.5 kN/ml
'0 CONSOUDATION OF SOILS 297
The pressure increase at the top, middle and the bottom of the clay layer are found as follows (Eq.
11.60).
sf .. 0.09941 m .. 99.41 mm
~ = 0.05 x
./
2.0 1 <'
1 + 1.40 0.,10
(ll 1
50
+ 0.25 )( 2 1
I + 1.40 oglo
( 50 + 40
75
1
0' .f/ = 7.34 x 10-.1 + 16.50 X 10-) m
or sf = 23.84 x 10-'\ m = 23.84 mm
lII11.dralive Example 12.4. A consolidation test was conducted on a sample of a normally cOlZSolidated
clajl with an initial void ratio of 1.55, and the following results were obtained.
Plot e-loga curve. If the initial overburden pressure is 150 leN/m2, draw thcficld consolidntion line and
hence determine the coefficient of compression.
(b) If the thickness of the clay layer in the field is 4 m and the increase in the pressure due to loading
is 50 kN/m 2, compute the settlement.
Solution. Fig. E 12.4 shows the requjred plot The field consolidation line is drawn between the point
(00. eo) and the point D where the plot cuts the horizontal line through e = 0.40 eo = 0.4 x 1.55 = 0.62.
''' ,-~---,-,---.------,--,---r-~
---"
'."'r--,---t---t-+":tt---t----l---+--~
Il0r--+-----..jf--+::".,'~t-~-~--~------J
1', \
: \. \ ,
1.1Or-- +--+--+-i--jh-i,j-- -1----+-----l
\ \
\ \\
l.o0r--+---f---+-t-L--~~.c-l___-__+--l
1 \\
Jl.obc>rgbycUl've~\
~,
O.80t---t---I--+--}---+------l---~1 "+-+---1
o.ror-----t--t--+-+------++-----+-----+~
: \----J
'\
o. lt ~ - - - -
0.60 10 20
- ----- -- -! - - -- 0
100 1';0200
;r kNltnlJ
Fig. E 12.4
0.844
_ ~)(4.0JoglO
( ~
150 + 50 )
_ 0.1654 m .. 165.4 mm
. Illustrative Example 12.S. A clay straalm 5 m thicJc has the initial void ralio of 1.50 and the effective
2
overburden pressure of 120 kNlm 2, When the sample is subjected to an increase of pressure of 120 kNlm , the
void ratio reduces UJ 1.44. Determine the coefficient of the volume compressibility and the final settlement of
the stratum.
-6.e/(1 + eo)
Solution From Eq. 12.14, mv - ~
or
From Eq. 12.54, s,- "'v Il a Ho
sf ,. 2 )( 10..,( )( 120 )( 5 )( let mm .. 120 rom
CONSOUDATION OF SOILS 299
llIuslrative Example 12.6. Determille the coefficiem of eonsolidntion of soil whose test data is plotted in
Fig. E 12.6. The sample was 2.0 em thick alld had double draillilge.
Solution. The construction lines ore shown in Fig. E 12.7. R100 is obtained from the intersection of the
two Slruight lines drawn. 1be poinl 50% consolidation (R!IO) and (he corresponding 'so are detennined.
! 8.0
9.0
0.10 1.0 0
o.01
Time (years)---
rig. E-12.9.
0.270-~
4 x (1.575)2
or 1 .. 1.34 months.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
nIustrative Example 12.11. The laboratory consolidation data for an undisturbed clay sample are as
follows. el .. 1.00, a) .. 85 kNlm 2, and e2 .. 0.80, '02 .. 465 kNlm 2.
Determine the void ralio for a pressure 'OJ of 600 WI,,?
Solution.
Now C .. ~ .. ~
.. loglo (O:YOI) logw (600/85)
Thus I _ 12.226,'
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
12.1. A sntumted soil stmlum 4 m Ihick lies above an impervious stratum ond below II pervious stratum. It has a void
ratio of 1.50 at lin initial pressure of 150 kN/m 2.
(I) Compute the change in void ratio due to to an increase or stress or 50 kN/m2. Take Ct = 0.20.
(il) Also compute the final settlement of the soil stratum due to above increase in stress.
(iiI) Who! would be the time required for 50 percent consolidation? Thke Tv "" 0.20 and k ,. 3.0 X 10...4 cm/sec.
[Ans. 0.025; 4 em; 34.18 minutes]
12.2. In a laboratory, Ihe consoIidntioo test WIlS performed on II specimen of Clay 3 an thick. The sample WIlS drained
CONSOUDATION OF SOILS 303
lit top and bottom. The time required for 50% consolid:Jtion of the sample was observed to be 15 minutes.
Determine the coefficien\ of consolidation of clay.
QJlculate time required for 50% lind 90% consolidation for this clay deP9Sit in the field 3 m thick and
drained at both ends. [Ans. 4.93)( 10:..4 crr?/sec; 104.17 days; 450.69 dllYs]
123. There is a layer of soft cloy 4 m thick under a newly constructed building. The overburden pressure over the
2
centre of the clay layer is 300 kN/m . Compute the settlement if there is an increase in pressure due to
2
construction of 100 kN/m . Take C~ '" 0.50, G :: 2.70. The water content of the deposit wa.<; found to be 50%.
[Ans. 10.63 em]
2
12.4. In Il consolidation test, on increase of 100 kN/m in the veniall pressure was applied to a saturated clay sample
initially 2.5 em thick. The thickness of the sample reduced to 246 em after 24 hours. The sample was then
relieved of jlressure and allowed 10 take up water. The final thickness was 2.465 cm and the moisture content
was 30%. Assuming that the sample was saturated throughout the tcst, calculote the following:
(l) the initial void rario. (fake G = 2.68)
(il) the void ratio afler consolidation.
(iiI) the void mtio after expansion
(iv) the coefficient of compressibility. [Ans. 0.83, 0.80, 0.804, 1.6 )( W ...4 m 2/kN]
125. In II consolidation test on a soil, the void ratio of the sample decreased from 1.2..'1 to 1.10 when the pressure is
increased from 200 kN/m2 to 400 kN/m 2. Cnlculate the oocfficient of consolidation if the coefficient of
permeability is 8 )( 10-8 cm/sec.
2
[Ans. 755 m /yearj
12.6. The time required to reoch 60% consolidotion for a sample 1 em thi ck tested in consolidometer under conditions
of double drainage wos found to be 35 seconds. Determine Ihe time required for a loyer 10 m thick to reoch the.
8
same degree of consolidation, if it has drainoge only on one side. [Ans. 1.4 )( 10 secondsJ
12.7. A clay strotum 2.5 m thick lies over a sandy stmlum and hilS drainage on both sides. Colculate the values of the
pore. . wllter pressure and the effective stress at the middle of the clay stratum when 60% of consolidation has
2 2
taken plocc under an increment oflood from 500 to 2500 kN/m . [Ans. 800 kN/m ; 1700 kN/m2}
12.8. In a consolidation test, 0 fully smurnted clay sample was subjected to a load of 500 kN/m2. After 12 hours, the
2
average pore pressure was found to be 200 kN/m . Fina out the time required for 50% consolidotioo to take
place. Assume T~ _ (Jt/4) cr. [Ans. 8.33 hours]
12.9. There is clay layer 8 m thick with a layer of sand on
either side. An undisturbed sample 2.5 cm thick of S7
the clay when tested in the laboratory required 25
minutes to reach 50% consolidmion (T~ = 0.20). It is
proposed to OOnslroct a building at the above site.
Estimote the time required for 00% consolidation 10 take
place. (T~ = 0.85). (Ans. 7555.6 days]
12.10. Fig P·l2IO shows a bore hole log obtalfled dunng
sub-surfuce explorntion. There are two Inyer.; of cloy
of thickness 2 m each, loc.ated 6 m ond 15 m below fig. P 12.10.
the ground surface. 100 bulk densities of sand and
clay were found to be 2.0 gm/ml and 1.82 gm/ml, respectively. Compute the total settlement of each clay layer
under II uniformly distributed load of 400 kN/m2 spread over a large area on ground surface. C~ "" 0.40, eo ""
1.08. [Ans. 32.45 an, 21.57 em, lotal ;: 54.02 an]
. '~.': "
.... , • . ' CQ/IRSE: SAND'.... ~ .. ,:.
---========>:< :Em
SILT
~~ lo°·15m
1. m
Fig. P-12.11.
3
12.11. A 6 m thick fine silt strntum [C~ _ 7.2 )( 10- cm2/sec] underlies a coarse sand deposit and overlies a 0.15 an
304 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
5 2
thick fine sand 1l1fer under which there is a cloy stratum 3 m thick (Fig. P.12.1l) (cv _ 9 )( 10- cm /sec).
A pervious SITll!Um lies below the day layer. When the cloy layer reoclles a degree of consolidation of 20%,
wh:lt would be the degree of consoIidlllion of the sill layer" (T.. = 0.03 for 20% U and U '" 82% for T" = 0.6).
[Ans. 82%1
12.12. ,\ clay lOiyer of 10 m thickness underlies a sand stratum of 10 m arid overlies a pervious layer. The sand layer
CJrri ~:l point load of 10 MN. Assume e = 0 .70, and G = 2.72, L.L. '" 60% and c" _ 2S X 10-4 cm2{sec, The
waler mblc is located 5 m above the top of the day layer. Find how long would the clay take to settle 4.7 em.
[AM. 36_'iS hours]
12.13. A 15 m thick hydraulically' isotropic clay stratum overlies nn impervious liilrulum. If [he coefficient of
consolidation is 5 )( 10--4 cm 2/sec, find the time required for 50% and 'Xl% oonsolidolion (Tv., 0.20 and 0.85,
respectively).
(ii) In order to accelerate the rate of scnlemenl, vcnical sand drains of J m diameter were installed at 5 m centre
to centre. Calculote how much the settlement is accelerated due to provision of sand drains. For 11 ::: 5, T, :::
0.081 for U, '" 50% and Tr ::: 0.27 for UT . , 90%. [Ans. 9.0 )( 108 seconds ; 38.25 )( 108 seconds.
8 8
(ii) 0.405 )( 10 seconds; 1.35 )( 10 seconds]
13.1. INTRODUcnON
The shear strength of a soil is its maximum resistance to shear stresses just before the failure. Soils are
seldom subjected to direct shear. However, the shear stresses develop when the soil is subjected to direct
compression. Although shear stresses may also develop when the soil is SUbjected 10 direct tension, but these
shear stresses are nol relevant, as the soil in this c..'1SC fnils in tcnsion and does not fail in shear. In field, soils
are seldom subjected to tension, as it causes opening of the cracks and nssurcs. These cracks arc not only
undesirable, but are also detrimental to the stability of the soil masses. Thus, the she.1r failure of a soil mass
occurs when the shear stresseS induced due to lhe applied compressive loads exceed tbe shear strength of the
soil. It may be noted that the failure in soil oocurs by re1.1tive movements of the particles lind nOI by breaking
of the particles.
Shear strength is the principal engineering property which controls the stability of a soil mass under
loads. It governs the bearing capacity of soils. the stability of slopes in soils. the earth prc.ssure against
retaining structures and many other problems, as explained in later chapters, All the problems of soil
engineering are related in one way or the other with the shear strength of the soil. Unfortun.1lely, the shear
strength is one of the most complex engineering propenies of the soil, llle current research is giving new
concepts and theories. This chapter presents the bnsic concepts nod the accepted theories of the shear strength.
13.%. STRFSS·SYSTEM WITH PRINCIPAL PlANES PARALLEL TO TIlE COORDINATE AXES
In general, a soil mass is Subjected to a three--dimensional stress system. However, in many soil
engineering problems, the stresses in the third direction are not relevant and the stress system is simplified as
two-dimensional. The plane suain conditions are generally assumed, in which the strain in the third
(longitudinal) direction is zero. Such oonditions exist. for example. under a strip footing of a loog retaining
wall.
At every point in a stressed body. there are three planes on which the shear stresses are zero. These
planes are known as principal planes. The plane with the maximum compressive stress (01) is called the
major principal plane, and that with the minimum oompressive (03) as the minor principal plane. The t.hird
principal plane is subjected to a stress which has the value intennediate between 01 and 03, and is known as
the intermediate prinCipal plane. Generally, the stresses on n plane perpendicular 10 the imennediate principal
plane are required in the analysis. Therefore. the stresses on the intennooime principal plane are nOl much
relevant. Only the major principal stress (01) and the minor principal stress (0) are generally imponant.
In solid mechanics, the tensile stresses are taken as positive. In soil engineering problems. tensile stresses
rarely occur. To avoid many negaHve signs, compressive stresses are taken as positive and the tensile stresses
as negative in soil engineering.
Fig. 13.1 shows a plane which is perpendicular 10 the inlcnnediale principal plane. The major and minor
principal stresses act on this plane. The major principal plane is hori7.ontu) and the minor principal plane is
SHEAR STRENGUI
OJ ~- asin8 -"[cosEt
Eqs. 13.1 and 13.2 give the stresses on the inclined plane AB, making an angle e (measured
counterclockwise) with the major .principal plane AC.
13.3. MOJIR'S CIRCLE
Otto Mohr, a Gennan scientist, devised a graphical method for the detennination of stresses on a plane
ioclined to the principal planes. The graphical construction is known as Mohr's circle and is extremely useful.
In this method, an origin 0 is selected and the normal stresses are plotted along horizontal axis aDd the shear
stresses on the vertical axis. As the compressive s~ are taken positive in soU engineering, these are
plolted towards the r:ight of tbe origin. i.e. along positive x-axis. The shear stress is generally taken as positive
if it causes a counterclockwise couple at a point inside the wedge ABC in Fig. 13.1. Thus the shear stress
marked on the plane AB is pa;.itive. The positive shear stresses are plotted upward from the origin, i.e., along
positive y-axis. Let us draw the Mohr circle for the stresses shown in Fig. 13.1.
In Fig. 13.2, tbe JXlint E represents the minor principal stress oJ ani;! the JXlint F. the major principal
stress al' The point C is the middle point with the normal stress coordinate equal to (01 + oJ)I2. The circle
is drawn with C as the centre and EF as diameter. 1be circle is known as Mohr's circle. Each point on the
circle gives the stresses a and 't on a particular plane. It can be shown that the point D on the circle gives
e
the stresses on the plane AD inclined al an angle to the major principal plane. The line DE makes an angle
9 witli a-nxis. 1be angle DCF subtended al the centre is obviously twice the angle DEC.
308 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERIN.G
1
ond DH ... CD sin2e .. 0 ; "3 sin29 .. 't'
Comparing tbe above equations with Eqs. 13.2 and 13.1. it is obvious that the coordinates of the point D
represent the stresses on the inclined plane AD in Fig. 13.l.
The point E is a unique point, which is known as the pole (P) or the origin of planes (OP). If a line is
drawn. from any point (say D) on the Mohr circle parallel to the plane ( say. Ali) whose stresses arc
ill
represented by that point, it will intersed the circle at the T
pole P. When the major principal plane is honzonta!
(parallel to x-axts), the mmOf prinCIpal planl! IS vertical I ~Mlnor pror>c.pal plone
and the pole lies at the pomt E which mdlcates tne minor V...
pnnclpal stress Once the pole has bccn located, the : ... --- ~
stresses any other plane making an angle 0. With lnt: [._--- i I
major pnnclp.'ll plane can be determmed gl11plm:,,"\lly by __ ~- I
draWing a line through the pole and maklOg an ano-Ie ex 0 .-- P e 2£ I
with u-axis. rae coordinates of the point obtained by (he
intersection of this line with the circle give the stresses
on that plane.
The line OD represents the magnitude of the
resultant stress on the inclined plane AB. '1l1e anglc of
the obliquity of the resultant with the nOlmai of the plane
An is equal to the angle (3. R~. D.2.
It may be mentioned that the cqumions developed in Sect. 13.2 and the Mohr circle discussed in this
section are based on the principles of mechanics.These arc valid for all materialS irrcspective of thci~
sfress-strain characteristics. The same relations are also applicable in solid mechanics.
13.4. STRESS·SYSTEM wml PIUNCIPAL PLANES INCLINED TO TilE COORDINATE AXIS
Fig. 13.3 (b) shows a stressed element in which the principal planes are inclined to the coordinate axcs.
In other words, the principal planes are not vel1ical a~ horizontal. The stresses on a plane inclined at an
e
angle to the major principal plane can be determined using Eqs. 13.1 and 13.2 or using the Mohr circle, as
~
"3 '
T
these relalions are indcpt'ndent of the inclination of the principal planes. However, the orientation of the
principal planes is different from that in Fig. 13.2.
In Fig. 13.3 (a), the poinLs E and F are loc.1tcd and the Mohr circle is drawn, as in Fig. 13.2. The JXlle
P is located by drawing a line EP from E parnllel 10 minor principal p13ne Be or by drawing a line FP from
F parallel 10 the major principal plane AC. Tbe stresses on the plane AB inclined at an angle B to the major
principal plane can be determined by drawing a line PD through the pole P and parallel to AB. The
coordinates of poiQt D give the stresses 0 and "t on the plane AB. It may be noted that the line ED also
makes an angle e with a-axis.
13.5. SI'RESS-SYSTEM wrm VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL PLANES NOT PRINCD'AL PLANES
Fig. 13.4 (0) shows an element ABC in which the vertical and horizontal planes BC and AC are subjected
to shear stresses in addition to the normal stresses. Hence, these planes are not the principal planes. The
stresses on the plane AD inclined al an angle B 10 plane AC can be detennined from the equilibrium of forces.
Resolving the forces in x·direction [Fig: 13.4 (b)~
OJ
-,
~ t'
incipc:;i
..
(., (b)
Co,
Fig. 13.4. Vertical Planes not Principat Plarw!S.
aABsin8 .. OIlIJC + "t.ryAC + "tABoose
asin9 .. all sin 6 +""C.ry oosB+ ""Coos8 . ... (a)
Resolving the forces in y-dircclion,
aABros8 +"t" ARsinB .. "t"..,.DC + a,.AC
arosB + "[sinS _ "t"xysinB + o,cosB
Mohr's clrde Squaring Eqs. 133 (0) and 13.4 and adding we get
[of'; 0,) r+.'. [( 0,; 0.) ",,'29 n;,sin'29 + 2 ( ¥ )""29 '., sin29 1
,
+ [( 0, ; 0.) sin'29 + .;, ",,' 2 9 _ 2 (0, ; 0.) sin 2 9 ('., OOS 2 9) 1
[ ( ~)l'
0- 2 +'t_ ,(~),
2 +-.:q l ... (135)
Eq. 13.5 is the ~uation of a c ircle whose centre has the coordinates ( ( o. ; 0, ) .0 1and whose radius
is l(~) ~) + . lbe coordinates of any PJint 00 the circle represent the nonnal and shear stresses
(0,1:) on a particular plane. The circle is Mohr's circle.
Conslruction of Mohr Circle
To draw the Mohr circle in this case, the nannal stresses 0:r and 0, are marked as PJints Q and R
respectively on the o-axis [Fig. 13.4 (c)]. At PJinl Q. a perpendicular QS is drawn, such that QS - 1:JI:}" The
shC"ar stress 1:", is positive on the plane BC as it causes a counterclockwise moment at a point inside the
wedge. likewise, the perpendicular RT is equal to 1:..,.. However, this is negative because the shear stress on
the plane AC causes a clockwise moment.
Point C is at the middle point of QR and ha.. the coordinates [ ( 0% ; 0, ) .0 ]. It also lies on the lineVjdrawn
through point SandT. A circle is drnwn with its amtre at C and its mdius equal to f ( + The ~) 'f~] .
circle passes through points Sand T. It may be noted that the point T in the :Johr circle represents 'the
stresses on the plane AC and the point S. on the plane nco
The line CD drawn at an angle of 29 10 the line
CT interseas tbe Mohr circle at D. Thererore, the point D gives the stresses on the inclined plane AB.
Principal Planes. As the principal plnnes are the planes with zero shear stresses, from Eq. 13.4,
o. cry; 0", sin29
p
_ 'txy coo29p
where 8p is the angle whim the princip.11 plane makes with the plane AC in Fig. 13.4 (b). As the angle
subtellded at the centre is twke this angle, the line CU indk:alcs one of the principal planes and the point U
represents the major principal stress. This can also be ~roved from the above value of Ian 20r We have
SHEAR SfRE~Gll'l 311
ros29p _ ± r=(O=,-=O:::J:;::/=2=
"(¥)'+.:.
Substituting these values of sin 201' and the ros 29p in Eq. 13.3,
o-~±(¥)x (oy-o,,)/2
"(¥)'+.:.
or o--Z-
a" + a,.
:t "(¥)'+.:.
Therefore, the two principal stresses are as under.
6)
:le
U
The rcsullanl stress on that plane is equal to ~ and its angle of obliquity with the normal of
the plane is equal to angle fl. given by
~. tan-I ('/ 0) ... (13.9)
(3) The maximum angle of obliquity Pmax is obtained by drawing a tangent to the circle from the
origin O.
~ _ 5io-1 (01 - OJ )12 _ sin-1
(01 + oiJlZ
(01 -
(Jl +
OJ)
OJ
... (13.9)
(4) The shear stress T.! on the plane of the maximum obliquity is less than the maximum shear stress
"tmu.
(5) Shear stresses on planes at right angles to each other are numerically equal but are of opposite sigm.
as shown in Fig. 13.4 (c).
(6) As the Mohr circle is symmetrical about o-axis, it is usual practice to draw only the top half circle
for convenience.
(7) There is no need to be rigid about sign convention for plolting the shear stresses in Mohr's circle,
These can be plotted either upward or downward. Although the sign convention is ~uired for
locating the orientation of the planes, the numerical
results arc not affected.
T
13.7. MOHR·COULOMB TIlEORY
The soil is a particulate material. The shear failure
occurs in soils by sUppage of particles due to shear stresses.
The failure is essentially by shear, but shear stresses at
failure depend upon the nonnal stresst.s on the potential
failure plane. Acrording 10 Mohr, the failure is caused by a
critical combination of the normal and shear stresses.
The soil fails when the shear suess ('tj') on the failure
plane at failure is a unique functioo of the normal stress
(0) acting on thai plane. c.)
' , . /(0)
Since the shear stress on tbe failure plane al failure is T
defined as the shear strength (s), the above equation can be
written as
, . /(0) ... (13.11)
The Mohr thoory is roncemed with the shear stress at
failure plane al failure. A plot can be made between the
shear stress "t nnd tbe nonnal stress a nt failure. 1be curve Cb)
defined by Eq. 13.11 is known as the Mohr envelope [Fig.
13.6 (a) 1. There is a upique failure envelope for each
malerial. T
Failure of the material occurs when the Mohr circle of
the stresses touches tbe Mohr envelope. As disrussed in the
preceding sections, the Mohr circle represents all possible
combinations of shear and normal stresses at the stressed
point. AI the point of conlal;i (D) of the fairure envelope and
tbe Mobr circle, the critical combination of shear and
normal stresses is reached and the failure occurs. The plane
indicated by the line PD is, lherefore, the failure plane. Any Cd
Mohr's circle which does not cross the failure envelope and. Pia. 13.6. F.itu~ Envdopea.
SHEAR STRENG1l( 313
lies below the envelope represents a (non-failure) stable oonditioD. The Mohr circle cannot aoss the Mohr
envelope. as the failure would have already occurred as soon as the Mohr circle touched the envelope.
The .shear strength (3) of a soil al a point 00 a particular plane was expressed by Coulomb ru; a linear
function of the oormal stress on that plane, m
s • c + a tan, ... (13.12)
In other words. the Mohr envelope is repluced by a straighl line by Coulomb as shown 10 Fig. 13.6 (b).
In Eq. 13.12, c is equal to the intercept 00 't-axis and , is the angle which the envelope makes with
a·axis [Fig. 13.6 (c)]. The oomponent c of the shear strength is known as cohesion. Cohesion holds tbe
particles of the soil together in a soil mass, and is independent of the normal stress. The angle til is called the
angle of in~rnoJ friction. It represents tbe frictional resistance between the particles, which is directly
proportional to the normal stress.
As mentioned before, the failure occurs wben the stresses are such that the Mohr circle just touches the
failure envelope, as shown by point B in Fig. 13.6 (c). In other words, shear failure occurs if the stresses a
and 't 00 the failu~ plane~_as point B. If the stresses plot as point A below the failure envelope. it
represents a stable. noo-fai1fi.e oondlticm. On the other hand. a state of stress represented by point C above
the failure envelope is not possible. It may be noted that a material fails along a plane when the aitlcal
combination of the stresses a and 't gives the resultant witb a maximum obliquity (f\uJ. in wbich case tbe
resultant just touches the Mohr circle.
The shear tcs( must be conducted under appropri<llc drainage condilions thai simulate the actual field
problem. In sh~lr tests, lhcrc arc two SInges :
(1) Consolidation stage in which the normal stress (or confining pressure) is applied 10 1he specimen and
it is allowed to consolidate.
(2) Shear stage in which the shear stre.'>S (or deviator stress) is applied to lhe specimen to shear it.
Depending upon the drainage conditions, there are three types of tests as explained t>clow :
(1) Unconsolidated-Undndned Condition. In this type of test, no drainage is permitted during the
consolidation siage. The drainage is also not pennitted in the shear stage.
As no time 1.<; allowed for consolidation or dissipation of excess pore water pressure, the tCSt can be
conducted quickly in a few minutes. 1'he lest is known as unoonsolidatcd--undraincd test (UU test) or quick
<cst (Q.<es<).
(2) Consolidated-Undrained Condition. In a consolidated-undrained test, the specimen is allowed to
consolidate in the first stage. The drainage is permilled until the consolidation is complete.
In the second stage when the specimen is she.mcd, no drainage is permitted. The test is known as
consolidatcd-undrained tcst (CU tcst) It is also called a R.lest. as the alphabet R falls between lhe alphabet
Q used for quick test, and the alphabet S used for slow test.
The pore water pl"C$sure can be measure!!.. in the second stage if the facilities for ilS measurement are
available. In that case, the test is known as CU test.
(3) Consoliduted-Drained Condition. In a consolidated-draincd test, the drainage of the specimen is
permitted in both tile stages. 1be sample is allowed to consolidate in the first stage. When the consolidation
is complete. it is sheared at a very slow rme 10 ensure that fully drained conditions exist and the excess pore
water is zero.
TIle test is known as a consolidated-drained lest (CD tcst) or drained tcst. It is also known as the slow
ICSt (S-test).
13.10. ManE OF API)LlCA1l0N OF SIIEAR FORCE
The shear force in a shear lest is applied either by increa'>ing the shear displacement at a given rate (X"
by increasing the shearing force at a given rate. Aaxxdingly. the shear tests are either strain-controUcd or
stress· controlled.
(l) Sirain controlled tests. In a stmin-conlrolled lest, the test is conducted in such a way thai the
shc.aring slroin increases at a given ralc. Generally. the rale of increase of the shearing strain is kept oonstant,
and the specimen is sheared al a uniform strain rale.
'Ibe shear force acting on the specimen is measured indirccUy using a proving ring. The rate of shearing
slJ"din is controlled manually or by a gear system attadted to an electric motor.
Most of the shear tests are conducted as strain-controlled. The slress--strain dtaracterislic are easily
obtained in !hese teslS, as the shape of the siress-strain curve beyond the peak point can be observed only
in a strain- contro lled lest. A strain--conlrolled test is easier to perform than a stress- controlled lest.
(2) S(~ss-Controlled tests. In a stress--controlled test, the shear force is increased at a given rate.
Usually, the Me of increase of the shear force is maintained constant. The shear load is increased such thaI
the shear stresses iT1Ct'C3SC at a uniform rate. lbe resulting she.'lI' displaa:.ments are obtained by means of a
dIal gauge.
Stress--conlrolled tests are preferred for conducting shear tests at a very low rale, because an applie..J
load can easily be kept constant for any given period of time. Funher. Ihe loads am be conveniently applied
and removed. TIle stress-controlled tcst represenls the field conditions more closely.
13.11 DIilECT SHEAR TEST
(a) Appal"ullL'i. A direcl shear Ie..<;t is oonductcd on II soil specimen in a s hear box which is split into two
b.1lves along a hori7.ontal plane al ilS middle (Fig. 13.7). The shear box is made of brass or gunmetal. It is
SHEAR STRENGTH 315
tests, the strain rale depends upon the type of soil. For sandy soils, it may he taken flS 0.2 mm/minute;
whereas for clayey soils, it is generally between 0.005 to 0.02 mm/min. Inc &'lmplc sllears along Ihe
horizontal p.k'lne between the two halves. The readings of the proving-ring and the dial gauges arc taken every
30 seconds. The lest i~ continued till the specimen fails. The failure is indicated when !.he proving ring dial
gauge begins to recede afler having re.'lchcd the maximum. For the soils which do not give a peak. point, the
failure is assumed to h:lVe occurred when a shearing slmin of 20% is readIed. AI the end of the test, the
specimen is removed from the box and its waler conlent found.
The lest is repeated under the nonnal stress of 50. 100, 200 and 400 kN/m 2 . lne range of the normal
stress should cover the range of loading in the field problem for which the shear parameters are required. The
shear stress at any stage during shear is equal to the shear force indicated by the proving ring divided by the
area of the specimen. A plot can be made between the shear stress and the shear strain. 1bc shear strain is
equal to the shear displacement (till) divided by the length of the specimen (L). 'The shear stress is obtained
from the shear load indicated by the proving ring and the cross-sectional area.
Direct shear tests can be COnduCled [or anyone of the three drainage conditions. For U-U test. plain grids
are used and the sample is sheared rapidly. For CU test, perforated grids are used. The sample is consolidated
under the normaiload and afler tbe completion of consolidation, it is sheared rapidly in about 5-10 minutes.
In a CD test, the sample is consolidated under tbe normal load and then sheared slowly so tbat excess pore
water pressure is dissipated. A CD t~t may take a few hours for oohesionlcss soils. For cohesive soils, it m~y
take 2 to 5 days.
'Il$ direct shear test is generally conducted on co~ionless soils as CD lest. It is convenient to perform
and it gives good results for the strength parameters. It is occasiooally used to determine the strengt!!
parameters of silt and clay under unconsolidated-undrained T
and consolidated drained conditions, but i: does not offer
the flexibjijty of a triaxial compression test, as explained
later.
13.12. PRESENTATION OF RESULTS OF DIRECT
SHEAR TEST Loosp 50nd
(0) Stress-Strain Curve. A stress-strain curve is a plot
between the sbear stress l: and the shear displacement
(MIlL) {Fig. 13.8 (o)J. In case of dense sand (and also
over-consolidated clays), the shear stress attains a peale.
~-------------------'1.
'0)
vallie at a small strain. With further inc:rease in strain, the
shear stress decreases slighlly and becomes more or less IlII
constant, known as ultimate stress. In case of loose sands
(:md nonnally consolidated clays). the shear stress increases
gradually and flOally allains a constant value, known as the
ultimate stress or residual strength_ It has been mservcd that
the ultimate shear stress attained by both dense and loose -Av
s•.-mds tested under similar conditiOll!l is approximately the
same. The figure also shows the stress-strain aJNe of a
medium dense s.'lnd.
Generally, the failure strain is 2 to 4% for dense sand
'"
Loost'sond
and 12 to 16% for loose sand.
Fig. 13.8 (b) shows l?e volume changes with an
increase in shear strain for CD teslS. Since Ihe
cross-sectional area of the specimen remains unchanged, the
volume change is proportional to the change in thickness
measured by the dial gauge. In case of dense sands (and
over-oonsolidaled clays), the volume first d~ slightly, Shoi~
but it increases with further increase in strain. In the case of loose stmds (and nonnally consolidated clays),
the volume decreases with an increase in'. shear strain. The figure also shows the curve for medium dense
sand.
It may be observed that the void ratIO of an initial loose sand decreases witll an ini=rease in shear strain,
whereas that for the initially dense sand increases with an increase in strain [Fig. 13.8 (C}}. lbe .v9id ratio,at
which there is no change in it with an increase in strain is known as the critical void ratio. If ' the sand
initially is at the critical void ratio. there would be practically no change in volume with an increase in shear
main.
(b) Failure Envelope. For obtaining a failure envelope, a number of identical specimens are tested
under different nonnal stresses. The shear stress required to cause failure is determined for each nonnal
stress. The fmlme envelope is obtained by plotting the points corresponding to shear strength at diffcreni
normal StI'eSSC1> and jOining them by a straight line rpig. 13.9 (a)]. The inclination of the failure envelope to
Is 0'<
d .:;,9-i- ¢o.-.t.v.
T ~,..\\"
n
h
(a·)
c.:: d'lyy-" 1
~~
(e)
Merits.
(I) lbe sample preparation is easy. The test is simple and convenient.
.(2) As the thickness of the sample is relatively small, the dminage is quick and the pore pres.sure
dis.sipate5 very rapidly. Consequently, the consolidaled-drainoo and the consolidated.. undrained tests
lake rclntivcly small period.
(3) It is ideally suiled for conducting drained tests 00 rohcsionless soils.
(4) TIle apparatus is relatively cheap.
Demerits.
(1) lbc stress conditions are known only al failure. The conditions prior to failure arc indeterminate and,
thereiore, the Mohr circle c.'moot be drawn.
(2) The stress distribution on the failure plane (horizontal plane) is nOl uniform. The stresses are more
at the edges and lead to the progressive failure, like tearing of a paper. Consequently. the full
strength of the soil is not mobilised simultaneously on the entire failure plane.
(3) 'lllC a~ under shear gradually decreases as the test progresses. Out the corrected area cannot be
determined and, therefore, the origin:li area is taken for the computation of stresses.
(4) 11lt: orientation of the failure plane is fixed. This plane may not be the wcakest plane.
(5) Control on the drninage conditions is very diffICUlt. Consequently, only drained tests can be
conducted on highly permeable soils.
(6) 1be mea'>uremenl of pore water pressure is nol poosible.
(7) '111e side walls of the shear box all1')C lateral rcstrnint on the specimen and do nO( allow it to deform
l:lIcl"'.lUy.
13.13. DIFFERENT TYPES OF SOILS
-0
On the basis of shC:lr strength, soils can be divided into three types.
(I) Cohcsionless soils. (2) Purely cohesive soils and "C+'ij
(3) Cohesive-frictional soils. 111
1. Cohesionless soils. ll1csc are the soils which do not have cohesion
i.e., c' - O. 'fbcsc soils derive the shear Slrcngth from the inlergranular friction.
'Ibcse soils are also called frictional SQils. For example, sands and gravels.
2. I'urely cohesive soils. 1bcse are the soils which exhibit oohcsion but the
- -
--
angle of shearing resistance , :: O. For cxample, satumted clays aDd silts under "C- - 't
undrained conditions. lhese soils are also called ' .. '. 0 soils.
-
c-, --
3. Cohesive-frictional soils. These arc composite soils having both c' and
". These are also called
clay, etc.
soils. For example, clayey sand, silly sand, sandy
time of shearing is equal to (or + 0d)' II may be noted that when the axial Slress is increased, the shear
stre.sses develop on incHncd planes due to compressive stresses on the top.
The vertical sides of the specimen are principal planes, as there arc no shear stresses on the sides. The
coofining pressure Oc is equal to the minor princiP.11 stress (oJ). The top and bottom planes are the major
principal planes. The IOlal axial stress which is equal 10 the sum of the confining pressure and the deviator
stress, is the major principal stress (01)' l3ccause of axial symmetry, the intcnncdiatc principal stress (o:z) is
also equal to the confining pressure (or)'
[Note. The above ~terpretalion of the stress conditions in the triaxial test is 1I0t strictly correcl
according 10 the theory of elasticity. In the case of cylindrical specimens. the three princ ipal ' stresses arc
the axial, radial and the circumferential stresses. lhe state of stress is statically indclcrrninute throughout
the specimen. For convenience. in the triaxial test. the circumferential stress is taken equ<ll to the rndial
stress and the principal stresses Ih and oJ 3rc assumed to be cqual}.
lhe main femur~ of a triaxial test apparmus arc shown in Fig. 13.11. It con...ists 01 :1 circular base thaI
has a central pcdCSt:li. The pedeswl has one or two holes whidl nre used for Ihe drninngc of the specimen in
a drained test or for the pore pressure measurement in .10 undrained test. A triaxial cell is lined 10 Ihe top of
tile base plme with the help of 3 wing
nulS (not shown in the figure) after the
specimen has been placed on the
pedcstal. llte triaxial eell is a perspcx
cylinder which is permanently fixed 10
the top cap and Ihe bollom brass collar.
There are three tie rods which support
the celL The top cap is a br6nze casting
with its central boss forming a bush
through which a stainless steel ram can TIE
slide. The ram is so designed thaI it has
minimum of friction and at the s.1me
Lime docs not pennit any lenkHgc.
There is an air-release valve in the top
cap which is kept open when the cell is
fl1lcd with watt( (or glycerine) for
applying the confining pressure. An oil
valve is also provided in the top cap to
fill light machine oil in the cell to
reduce the leakage of water pa<;t the
ram in long duration tests. lhe
apparatus is mounted on n loading ... .
frame. The deviator stress is applied 10 Ag. 13.11. InaJnal Tcs Appllralus
the specimen from a strain-controlled loading machine. TIl<: loading system consists of either a screw jack.
operaled by an electric mOlor and gear box or a hydraulic ram opcrdtcd by a pump.
The triaxial lest apparatus has the following special attachments.
1. Mercury Control System. The cell pressure is a triaxial test in maintained constant with a
self-oompensflling mercury control system. developed by Dishop nnd Henkel. It consists of two limbs of a
water-mercury manometer (Pig. 13.12). "Ihe pre..<;sure in the water of the triaxial ceU develops due to the
difference in levels of the mercury in the twO pots. The water pressure at lhe centre of the specimen in the
triaxi<ll cell, at a height of IIJ above the datum. can be cah:.ulmcd u!>ing the thcory of manometers. As the
mercury surface in the upper pot is open to atmosphere. the (gauge) pressure there is zero. Prom the
manometer equatjon,
31Jl SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
r
where cr(
1 Fig. 13.12. Mercury Control System.
... (13.15)
'The triaxial cell is placed over the base and fIXed to it by lightening the nuts. The cell is then filled with
water by connecting it to the pressure supply. Some space in the lOp portion of the cell is filled by injecting
oil through the oil valve. When excess oil begins to spiU out through the air-vent valve, both the valves (oil
valve and air-vent valve) are closed. Pressure is applied to the water HUed in the cell by connccting it to the
mercury-pot system. As soon as the pressure acts on the spcx:imcn. it starts conSOlidating. The specimen is
connccted to Ibe burette through pressure connections for measurement of volume changes. The consolidation
is complete when there is no more volume change.
When the consolidation is complete. the specimen is ready for being she.1red. The drainage valve is
closed. The pore water pressure measurement device is attached to the specimen through the pressure
connCctions. The proving ring dial gauge is set to zero. Using the manual control provided in the loading
frame, the ram is pushed into the ceU but not allowed 10 touch the loading cap. The loading machine is then
run at the seleded speed. 1be proving ring records the force due to friction and the upward thrust ading 00
the ram. The machine is stopped, and with the manual control, the ram is pushed further into the cell bringing
it in COnt.1ct with the loading cap. The dial gauge for the measuring axial defannation of the specimen is sct
to zero.
The sample is sheared by applying the deviator stress by the loading machine. The proving ring readings
are genemlly taken corresponding to axial strains of 1/3%, 213%, 1%, 2%. 3%. 4%. 5%, ... until failure or
20% axial strain.
Upon completion of the test, the loading is shut ofT. Using the manual control, all additional axial Slrc$
is removed. The ccll pressure is then reduced to zero, and the cell is emptied. The triaxial ccll is unscrewed
and removed from the base. O-rings arc taken out, and the membrane is removed. l'he specimen is thCII
recovered after removing the loading cap and the top porous stone. 1be filler paper strips arc peeled ofT. The
post- shear mass and length are determined. The water content of the specimen is also found.
(b) Unconsolidated Undrulned tcst. The procedure is similar to that for a consolidated-undrained tCSl,
with one basic difference that the specimen is nO( allowed to consolidate in the first stage. llte drainage valve
during the test is kept closed. However, the specimen cm be connected to the pore-water pressure
measurement device if required.
Shearing of the specimen is started just after the application of the ceU pressure. 'nle second stage is
ex.1C11y the same as in the consolidated-undrained test dc.c;cribcd above.
(c) Consolidated Drained test The procedure is similar to thai for a consolidated-undrained test, with
one basic difference that the specimen is sheared slowly in the second stage. After the consolidation of tbe
specimen in the first stage., the drainage valve is not closed. !t remains connected to the burette throughout
the test. The volume changes during the shearing stage are measured with the help of the burette. As the
permeability of cohesive soils is very low, it takes 4·5 days for the consolidated dmined test.
'"
;al
he
(6) The test is suitable for accurate research work. The
such Wi extension test and tests for different stres.~
apparnt~
paths.
is adaptable to special requirements
Demerits.
(1) The apparatus is elaborate, costly and bulky.
cd (2) The drained lest takes a longer period as compared with that in a direct shear lest.
\ir. (3) The strain condition in the specimen are not uniform due to Crictional restraint produced by the
ISS loading cap and the pedcs181 disc. This leads to the formation of the dead zones at each end of tbe
be specimen.
32A SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
The non-uniform distribution of stresses can be largely eliminated by lubrication of end surfaces.
However, non-uniform distribution of stresses has practicaUy no effect on the mealOured strength if
length/diameter ratio is equal to or morc than 2.0.
(4) II is not possible \0 determine the cross-sectional area of the specimen Ilccuratcly al large strains, as
lhe assumption thai the specimen remains cylindrical docs not hold good.
(5) The Icst simul..'1ICS only axis-symmetrical problems. In the field, the problem is generally
3-dimcnsional. A general test in which all the three stresses are varied would be more useful.
(6) 'Ibc consolidation of the specimen in the tcst is isotropic; whereas in the field. the consolidation is
. generally anisotropic.
Despite the above-mentioned demerits. lhe lriaxia) lest is extremely uscrul. It is the only rcli.'lble test ror
accurate detcrmin:"ttion or the shear char<lCteristics Or all types or soils and undcr all the drainage conditions.
13.18. COMPUTATION OF VARIOUS PARAM ....IERS
(a) Post-Consolidation Dimensions. In consolidated-drained and consolidated-undrained tests, tbe
consolidation or the specimen takes place during the first stage. As the volume or the specimen decreases, its
post-conSOlidation dimensions arc different from the initial dimensions. The post coru;olidation dimensions can
be determined approximately assuming thllt the snmple remains cylindric.'ll mld it behaves isolropically. Let
Li. D" and Vi be the length. diameter and the volume or the specimen berore consolidation. Let Lo- Do and
Vo be the corresponding quantities aftcr consolidation.
Thcrerore, volumetric Change,
The volumetric change (A V,) is mc.'lsurcd with the help or burette.
a Vi
Volumetric strain,
£" " -v,:-
For isotropic consolidation. the volumetric strain is three times the linear strain (£/), Thus
£/ .. £,,/3
Thus Lo-Li-A~-Li-L,x~
Lo • L, (1 - EI) .. L, (1 - E,/ 3) ... (l3.16)
Likewise, Do - Dj (I - E,/ 3)
Ihe post consolidation diameter Do can also be computed after La has been detennincd rrom the relation,
(j[/4 . D~) x La - Vo
Do - V~-
-
·~ ... (!3.I~
(x / 4) )( [,0
(b) Cross-S(,.'Clional Area During Shl!ar Stage. A<; the sample is sheared. its length decreases and the
diameter increases. The cross-sectional arc.'l A at any stage during' $hem can be determined assuming that the
sample remains cylindrical in shape. lei tJ.L o be the change in length and avo be the change in volume. The
volume of the specimen at any stage is given by Va :!: avo.
Therefore, A (Lo - aLo) .. Vo:!: avo
VO(I:!: a~o)
A .. Vo:!: AVo _
Lo-aLo
Lo
(Ho)
To
1 -
Eq. 13.18 is the general equation which gives the cl'06S-scctiomtl area of the specimen.
The above equation can be written <IS
SHEAR STRENGTH 325
... (13.19)
A - 1 ~o £1 ... (13.20)
The strcsscs in the specimen at various stages of shear should be calculated using the craiS-sectional area A
as found above.
The correction so applied is known as area CQrrection.
le (e) Stresses (I) DeviOlor stress. 'The deviator stress (od) acting on the specimen wht::n the axial load
IS applied by the loading maChine is P can be obtained as
Od - ~ ••• (13.21)
{ .. , STRESS. STRAIN
(LOOSE SAHD J
~kwsss
(I) Effective Stresses. Fig. 13.18 (0) shows the
failure envelope for a nonnally oonsolidatcd clay in
terms of effeaive stresses obtained from a
consolidated drained test. The failure envelope has an
+
angle of shearing resistance of and pmses through
origin. First the Mohr circles for the three tests are
drawn in IConS of effective stresses corresponding to T (b)Foiluff "rwt'lop"
(r!lf~livt
tor O\'O!,_conSOlidated
sl,,,sSt'S)
d oy
failure envelope. As each circle represents a failure. there must be at least one point on it which gives the
stresses satisfying the failure criterion. Obviously. the common tangent joins all such points of the three
circles.
'Tbus for nonnally consolidated clays, shear strength is
$ - otan~'.
Fig. 13.18 (b) shows the failure envelope for ovcrconsolidatcd clay in terms of effective stresses. The
failure envelope is slightly curved in the initial portion, but, for convenience, it is approximated as a straighl
Une. lhe failure envelope has an intercept c' on the 't- axis. The angle of Shearing resistance is ". In the case
of ovcr-mosolidated clays. shear strength is
s_c'+otancp'
The failure envelopes il!.. terms of effective stresses can also be drawn from the results of a
consolidated-undrained lest (CU test) when the porc water pressure measurements are also laken. The shear
strength parameters c' and 'P' obtained Crom the oonsolidatcd·undrained tests and that from consolidated
drained tests are approximately equal. Drained tests on dense Sc1nds and ovcr-consolidated clays give slightly
higher values oC ~' due to extra work required during dilation (increase in VOlume), but the difference is
small. and, therefore, usually neglccted.
(iJ) TOUll stresses. 11lC failure envelope in terms of total stresses can be dmwn from the test resulls oC a
consolidated·undrained test.
[Note. In consolidated·drained lests, the total strc.sscs are also equal to the efJeaive stresses, as the pore
water pressure throughout is zero].
The failure envelopes are similar in shape to that in terms of effective stresses but the values oC the
strength parameters are quite different. Fig. 13.19 shows the Cailure envelopes for effective stresses and aLw
for total stresses for a normally consolidated clay. The
iy angle of shearing resistance in terms of total Stresses
'"
Iv
('e.,) is much smaller than that for the effective stresses
(+').
In the case oC normally consolidated clays, shear
" strength is
s" otan4l.... TOTAl STRESS
Fig. 13.20 shows the failure envelope for an
overconsolidated clay in terms oC total stresses. The
~ngle oC Shearing resistance (41 ..,') is much smaller than
the angle 41' obtained in terms of etIcctive stresses. In the
case oC overoonsolidated clays. shear strength is
f<ig.13.l9.
s .. e.... + otan~r..
The angle of shearing resistance q..... obtainw Crom the lotal stress envelopes is also known as apparent
angle of shearing resistance.
~bnsss.
Failur~ ~nv~topr
(Tolill
for 0'Irf - consolidat~d
strrss~s)
clay
Fig. 13.21.
Fig. 13.21 shows (be failure envelope in terms of total stress obtained from an unconsolidated-undrained
lest on a normally coosolidated clay. The failure envelope is horizontal (~ .. 0), and has a cohesion intercept
of c", In Ihis case, shear strength is s - cu' The failure envelope for an over-consolidated Clay is also
horizontaL but (he value of e" wiU be more, depending upon the degree of overronsolidation.
For an unconsolidmcd-undl"Jincd test, the [ailure envelope cannot be drawn in terms of effective stresses.
In aU the tests conducted at different oonfining pressures, the effective stress remains the same. This is due
to the fact that an increase in confining pressure results in an equal increase in pore water pressure for a
saturated soil under undrained conditions. Thus only one Mohr circle (shown dotted) in terms of cfJectivc
stresses is obtained from aU the three tests. It may be noted that the deviator stress at failure is the same for
aU specimens.
13.20 EFFECT OF CONSOLlIlATION PRESSURE ON UNDRAINED STRENGm
As di~ in the preceding section. the shear strength of a cohesive soil under undrained conditions
depends upon the consolidation pressure. If a rcmoulded specimen of saturated Clay is first consolidated under
a confining pressure. say (o()J, and then sheared under undrained oonditions. with different confining
pressures, the deviator stress is independent of tile cell pressure. lhe failure envelope is horil..ontal and the
cohesion intercept is C"l [Fig. 13.22 (a)].
"""""-"
CONSOLIDATED CLAY
OJ + c.. 1
-c-.- - sin 4'.... Fig. 13.25. Re.IMionship between CII,O) Hnd ~" ,
-OJ _ _1 _ 1 -I-
-sin,
-- ....
c.. +.... sin to...
OJ I-sin ....
1
elj
0<
0·3
The ratio c.. /OJ is a constant for a given Clay. 5f 0·2 -1t=O.1I+0.0031PI
Skempton suggested that a similar constant ratio exists 0·'
betwccn the undrained shear strength of normally 0·0o~"~"c-+.",--.. e:-:,,"""'..::--=,,,~..:-:::,,-',::::oo:-;,,""o~"o
oonsolidated natural deposits and the effective
overburden pressure. It has been established that the
ratio (c.. / 0) is oonstant provided the plasticity index Fig. 13.26. Plot Iktw~n CJo3 Rnd PI.
330 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(PI) of the soil remains constant (Fig. 13.26). An approximate value of the undrained shear strength of a
normally consolidated deposit can be obtained from Fig. 13.26, if the plasticity index has been determined.
The relationship is expressed as (Skempton, 1957).
~ _ 0.11 + 0.0037 PI
a
where c.. = undrained cohesion intercept,
(j = effective over-burden pressure
PI = plasticity index (%)
The value of the ralio (c .. / 0) determined in a consolidated-undrained test on undisturbed samples is
generally greater than actual value because of anisotropiC consolidation in tbe field. The actual value is best
determined by in-situ shear vane test, as expLained later.
13.22. UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
The unconfined compression lest is a special form of a triaxial lest in which the confining pressure is
zero. 'Tbe test can be conducted only on clayey soils which can sland without confinement. ··The test is
generally performed on intact (noo- fISSured), saturated clay specimens. Although the test can be conducted
in a triaxial test apparatus as a U~ test, it is more convenient to perform it in an unoonfined compression
testing machine. There are two types of machines. as described below.
(1) Machine with a spring. Fig. 13.27 shows the unconfined oompression testing machine in which a
loaded spring is used. It consists of two metal cones which are fixed on horizontal loading plates B and C
supported on the vertical posts D. The upper loading
plate B is fixed in position, whereas the lower plate C
can slide on the vertical posts The soil specimen is
placed between tbe two metal cones.
When the handle is turned, the plate A is lined
upward. As the plate A is attached to the plate C, the
Latter plate is also lifted. When the handle is turned
slowly, at a speed of about half a turn per second, a
oompressive force acts on the specimen. Eventually, the
specimen fails in shear. 1be compressive load is
proportional to the extension of the spring. Spring _-++_~
The strain in the specimen is indicated on a chart 0
fixed to the machine. As the lower plate C moves Fix~ plate
upward, the pen attached to this plate swings sideways. Sa I
The lateral movement of the pen (in arc) is proportional Mewing p~te~ Pivot
to the stmin in the specimen. ~rr==:J::JIT:~~
The chart plate is attached to the yoke Y. As the r
yoke moves upward when the handle is rotated, the chart
plate moves upward. The pivot of the ann of the pen
also D)oves upward with the lower plate. 'The vertical Fig. 13.27. U~nfined ~pression Testillg
movement of the pen relative to the chart. is equal to the MRChllle (Spnllg Type).
extension of the spring and bence the compressive force. Thus the chart gives a plot between the defonnatioo
and the oompressive force. Springs of different stiffncsscs can be used depending upon the expected
compressive strength of the specimen.
(2) Machine with a Proving Ring. In this type of the unoonfined compression testing machine, a
proving ring is used to measure the compressive force (Fig. 13.28). There nre two plntes, having cone seatings
for the specimen. The specimen is placed on the bottom plate so that it makes contact with the upper plate.
The dial gau~e and proving ring are set to zero.
The compressive load is applied to the specimen by turning the handle. As the handle is turned, the upper
SHEAR SfRENGTH 331
nit
~m
'"
Fig. 13.29. Mohr Circle (or Unconfined Compression Test.
Demerits
(1) The test cannot be conducted on fissured clays.
(2) The lest may be misleading for soils for which the angle of shearing resistance is not zero. F()( such
soils, the shear strength is not equal to half the compressive SlrCngth.
(See Chapler 30, Sect. 30.17 for the laboratory experiment).
13.23. VANE SIIEAR TEST
'llie undrained shear strength of soft clays can be dctcnnined in a labnratory by a vane shear test. lbe
test can also be conducted in the field on the soil at the ooHom of a bore hole. The field test can be
performed even without drilling a bore hole by direa. penetration of the vane from the ground surface if il is
provided with a strong shoe to protect ;1.
Th" apparatus coosists of a vertical steel rod having four thin stainless
stccl blades (vanes) fixed at its bottom end. IS : 2720--XXX-1980
recommends thai the height H of the vane should be equal to twice the
overall diameter D. lhe diameter and the length of the rod are
recommended as 2.5 mm and 60 mm respectively. Fig. 13.30 (a) shows a "mm
T
vane shear test appal"'dlus.
For conducting the test in the laboratory, a specimen of the size 38
mm diameter and 75 mm height is taken in a cootaincr which is fixed
securely to the base. TIle vane is gradu.'llly lowered into the specimen till
f
r
the top of the vane is at a depth of to to 20 mm below the lOp of the
specimen. 'Ibe readings of the strain indicator and torque indicator are
taken.
Torque is applied gradually 10 the upper end of the rod at the rate of
about 6 0 per minute (i.e. 0.10 per second). The torque ading on the
specimen is indicated by a pointer fixed to the spring. The torque is
continued till the soil fails in shear. The shear strength of the soil is ElMTON
determined using the formula derived below.
Derivation of Formula. In the deviation of the fonnula. it is assumed
that the shear strength (5) of the soil is oonstant on the cylindrical sheared -----L-l 05mm
surface and at the top and bottom faces of the sheared cylinder. The torque PLA;-U-- f
clpplied (7) musl be equal 10 the sum of the resisting torque at the sides '.>l
(TI ) and that at the top and bottom (Tv. Thus,
... (a)
The resisting torque on the sides is equal to the resisting force
developed on the cylindrical surface multiplied by the radial distance.
Thus, (OJ
T, - 2
on
fo ['Cw)drJ' - 4",
[If
"3 Jo
a
0'
T2 - ru ~ ... (c)
T
or ... (13.27)
, - .(0' H/2 + d16)
=
For ex.1mple, if D 1.2 cm, and /J = 2.4 an, S =
0.158 T
where T is in N-cm and S in N/an 2.
Eq. 13.27 is modified if the top of the vane is above the soil surface and the depth of the vane inside the
sample is N I • In such a case.
... (13.28)
The shear strength of the soil under undrained conditions is equal to the apparent cohesion cu'
The vane shear test can be used to detennine the sensitivity of the soiL After the initial test, the vane is
rotated rapidly through several revolutions such that the soil becomes remoolded. The test is repealed on the
remooided soils and the Shear strength in remoulde<l state is determined. Thus,
( I) Ilore Pressure Under Isotropic Consolidations. Let us consider a small clement of a saturated soil
mass which is in equilibrium Wldet three principal stresses 01' Oz and 0) [Fig. 13.3. (a»). leI the initial pore
pressure be 110- When the element is subjected 10 an equal increase 60) in all the three directions, lei the
increase in the (Xlre pressure be Au) [Fig. 13.31 (b)]. Consequently, the inaease in the effective stress in each
direction would be equal 10 (.1.0)-6u).
Let the initial volume be Vo and the porosity be n. As the soil is saturated, the volume of water would
be equal to nVo. If C~ is the roefficicnl of compressibility of the soil skeleton, the reduction in the volume or
the soil mass due to an increase in the effective stress (110) - Au) is given by
6Vo .. C.Vo(.6.a)-A u) ... (n)
If C" is the coefficient of volume compressibility of pore fluid under isotropic condiLiollS. the reduction
in the volume of voids is given by
!J,. V" - C" (n Vol 611) . • • (b)
Assuming thnt the solid particles are incompressible, the reduction in the volume of the soil mass is equal
to the reduction in the volume of voids. Therefore, from Eqs. (0) and (b),
C. VO (6 0) - Au) - C" (n Vol 6 Il)
(.) (b)
6 Vo.. (6 0d - A Ud - /l ud - /l Ud)
VO C, 3 I
~ (6 ad - 36i4d)Vo" C,,(nVo)Aud
Because a soil is not perfccUy elastic, the constant 1/3 is replaced by A in the above expression. Thus
A
ne.)
6.11<1" - ( x (L\Od)
1+-
e,
Using Eq. 1331, the above expression is written as
Au" .. ABl!.oJ ... (1332)
Eq. 13.32 can also be wrinen as
lJ.IIJ" A !J.Od ... (1333)
where A .. A x B ... (13.34)
For II fully salurntcd soils, A is aLo;o equal
La A, as B is unity.
The value of the pore pressure ~rameler A can be determined experimentally in a triaxial test. A
~turatcd soil specimen is set up under a certain confining pressure and the pore water pressure is measured.
A deviator stress, lloJ, is then applied to the specimen and the change in pore water pressure tJu d is measured
under undrained conditions. lJle value of the coefficient A, can be determined using Eq. 13.33. The
coefficient A is also equal to A, as B is equal to unity.
Although the value of the parameter A can be delennioed '·0
at nny slage of the loading, its value at failure (A f ) is of
o.
main interesl. The parameter Af is required for the
determination of the shear strength which depends upon
the effective stress al failure. The value of Af depends
t
upon such factors as the degree of saturat ion and over- At 0 ----- - --
consolidation ratio.
For a heavily overconsolidaled clay, there is a L~;--...L--:----7;c--':;-
tendency for Ihe soil to increase in volume (dilate) when -O·5~ to -..... 8 16 32
S.No. 7'y~ofsoil A,
1. Sensitive day 1.5-25
2.
,. Normally consolidated clay
Lightly overconsolidcllecd clay
0.5- 1.3
0..3-0.7
4. Highly overconsolidated clay -0.5-(1.0
5. Very looocfincsnnd 2.0-3.0
6. Medium fine sand 0.0--1.00
7. Dense fine sand -0.3---0.0
. . ..
SHEAR SfRENGTII 337
(3) Pore pressure due to both isotropic Consolidation and Deviator stress.
In 8 conventional triaxial tcst, the specimen is fust isotropically ronsolidnted under a pressure of 603'
and then it is sheared under a deviator st~ of (601 - dO)). The pore pressure developed can be obtained by
combining Eqs. 13.30 and 1332. as
dU- dU) + dUd
du .. BdO) +AB (dOl-dO))
dU" B[6.o) + A (dOl-dO)] ... (13.35)
dU" B6.03 + A (dOl-d03) ... (13.36)
where A_AxB
For a fully Sllturnted soil. as 8 - 1.0,
du .. do) +A (A01-dO)) ... (13.37)
The above equations can be used for determination of the pore water pressure in the field when the
values of the parameters A and B have been determined.
13.25: MOIIR.COULOlim FAILURE CRn'EIUON
lbe Mohr-Coulomb equation was discussed in Sect. 13.6. The Mohr- Coulomb failure criterion can be
written in terms of principal stresses. Fig. 1335 shows the failure envelope of a soil. It is tangent to the
A~1:~~~L---<f~--~~----~F~~
''-OJ
~1~~cc~o~I~'~I____~____~'~I~' 2 .1
_ _ ~ 2c'cos<p'
°l ... 0) (I _ sin~') + 1 _ sin,'
2
01 - 0) lan (45" + ¢I'I2) + 2c' tan (45" + $'/2) .. (13.40)
Tan2 (45" + 4112) is caUed flow ratio (N.).
1bus
For cohesionlcss soil, c' ... o.
Therefore, . .. (13.41)
-°1 - -(~)
0) 1 _ sin $' ... (13.42)
When the stresses in a soil mass satisfy the above failure criterion, the failure is imminent. The soil mass
is said to have reached a state of plastic equilibrium. The failure criterion is extensively used for the
detcnnination of earth pressure on retaining walls and in many other applications.
The angle S, can be determined from the angle of shearing resistance ¢I'. As the failure depends upon the
effective stresses and not thc total stresses, thc angle of shearing resistance affecting the orientation of the
failure plane is " and nol the apparent angle ~. FrCllTl the triangle ABC.
2S,_ 90 + 41'
or 8f ... (45" + 41'/2) ... (13.43)
01 - 03
q--2- ... [13.44 (b)J
As discussed in Sect. t 3.6, the coordinates of the lop point of the Mohr circle corresponding 10 the
maximum shear stress are (0\ ... oV/ 2 and (0) - (3)/2 and are. therefore, equal to p and q.
In Fig. 13.36 (a), the points 1, 2 and 3 give the maximum shear stresses reached in the three tests at the
time of failure. These points are transferred 10 p-q plot in Fig. 3.36 (b), and a line is drawn through these
points. The line makes an angle a' with the p-axis and has an intercept a' on the q-mds. 1'his line is known
as the modi[led failure envelope, and has the following equation in tcnns of effective stresses.
q _plana' ... a'
Cil;O)) _CJI; ( 3
) lana' ... a' ... (13.45)
It may be noted thai points 1, 2,3, elc. represent the maximum she..'lr stresses which arc greater than the
shear stresses on the failure plane. 111e Mohr envelope gives the shear stresses on the failure planes, which
are represented by the points of tangency; wherea-; the modified failure envelope joins the points of maximum
shear stresses at the time of failure.
The main advantage of the modified failure envelope is thaI the stress conditions al failure are
rep~ nted by one poinl instead of a Mohr ciffle. As the averaging of scattered points is easier tban drawing
a common tangent to a number of eircl~ it is more ~
convenient than the Mohr-Coulomb failure envelOpe. / Stress poth
Despite this, Mohr-Coulomb failure envelope is used more
commonly than the modified failure envelope. A Mohr
envelope is more popular because it not only gives the
shear strength parameters, but also' the principal stresses at
the time of failure and directions of the failure plane. It \\I
gives a beller insight into the whole phenomenon.
The modified failure envelope is also known as the Kf (0)
Fig. 13.37 (a) shows the Mohr circle I. II. III which represent the stress conditions of a specimen as the
load on the specimen is increased such that the minor principal stress remains constant. The line joining
points I, 2, 3 at the tops of the Mohr circles is the stress palh. It is more convenient 10 draw the stress path
on a p-q plot. as shown in FIg. 13.37 (b). There is no nOed to draw the complete stress circles. Only the stress
points 1.2, 3, etc. corresponding to maximum Shear stresses are plotted. The direction of arrow on the stress
path indicates the direction of the stress changes.
There are basically three types of stress paths.
(1) EfTecti...e Stress Pilth (ESP). It is plotted between effective SlrCSSCS (OJ +0)12 and (01 ~(3)/2
(2) Total Stress Path n'Sp). It is plotted between total stresses (oJ + 03)/2 and (oJ - 0))12.
(3) Total Sh"tSS minus static pore pressure path rfSS)'). It is a plot between [(oJ +(3)12 - u~J and
(OJ - (3)12, where 148 is the sUltie pore waler pressure.
It may be noted thaI the vertical axis for aU the stress paths is the S<lme, as
a[ - 03 0\ - 03
-2---2-- q
If the principal planes arc horizontal Clnd vertical, the vertical stress (0,,) and horizontal, stress (a,,) are
the principal stresscs. In that cilSe, the above three basic stress pathS can be drawn between
(1) (2)
In the norm al triaxial test, as the static pore waler pressure (u8 ) is zero, the stress paths (2) and (3)
coincide. However, if a back pressure is used in testing, the two stress pathS wiU be different. In fK!kl. the
static pore water pressure depends upon the paoition of the waler table with rcspea \0 the point.
"'---!:.---;t-P,P
I--us----t
'0)
Fig. 1338. Different Slres~ Pl1tlis.
Fig. 13.38 (0) shows the stress paths for a drained lest. The point A corresponds to the stress conditioo
when only the confining pressure acts on the specimen. ( A<; 01 _ 0l,P - 0). The point F represents the
failure. Fig. 13.38 (b) shows the stress paths for a consolidated undrained test on a normaUy consolidated clay
and Fig. 13.3S (c), on an over-consolidated clay.
Fig. 13.39 shows the effective stress pathS A-I for conventional triaxial compression test (0/0 =
constant) i.t!. 6 o~ = positive and 60" = O. The typical example is the case of a footing subjected to tbe
vertical lo..1c1s.
The stress path A - 2 is for the unloading case, when 60/0 = negative and 60 .. = O. The typical example
is the case Qf active earth pressure on the retaining waUs.
TIle stress path A - 4 is for the loading case in extension test when 60" = 0 and 60h = positive. It
represents the pa<iSive earth pressure case.
ING SHEAR SfRP..NG11I 341
'he
ling
">th
Yertij:ol compression
1"'::::---7f:.----------- P.~
and
Yerticol eJlension
lo;rv<~l
"h Rr,
-Q If'~flf!" -~
Fig. 1339. Loading aoo Unloading Stress Paths.
The stress path A - 3 is for the unloading case in the extension test, when 60" = 0 and 6o~ = negative.
II represents the case of the foundation excavation.
The follow-ing points about the stress path are worth noUng.
(1) A n..egative value of q indicates Ihat the horizontal stress is greater than the vertical stress; and a
(3) positive valuc, that the vertical stress is greater than the horizontal.
the (2) TSP to the right of ESP indicates a positive pore water pressure and TS? to the left of FSP, a
negative pore water pressure.
(3) TSSP to tile right of ESP indicates a positive cxcx:ss pore pressure and TSSP to the left of ESP, a
negative excess pressure. When both coincide, excess pore pressure is zero.
(4) Lines from any location on a SlrtSS path drawn at 45" 10 the axis CUI the horizont.'li axis at a stress
equal to the horizontal stress.
Note. The slreSS p;!lh can also be drawn using the space diagonal (Rendulic stress path). which is ourside
the scope of the text.
13.28. SUEAR STRENGTD OF PARTIALLY SATURATED SOn.s
The eITedive stress in a partially s.'1turnted soil is determined using Bishop's equation (see chapter 10).
a- 0- u" - X(u ... - /I.,) ... (13.45)
The parameter X depends upon the degree of saturmion. As it is difficult to determine accurately Ihe
tion effective stresses in partiaUy saturated soils. it is common practice to draw the failure envelope in terms of
Ibe total stresses.
clay Unoonsolidated-undraincd triaxial tests are conduaed on a number of samples with a given degree of
initial saturation (S). 1l1c Mohr circles in terms l'
of IOtal stresses are drawn at failure and the FAILURE ENVELOPE
failure envelope obtained (fig. 13.40). As an
increase in ooilfining pressure causes an increase
in the solubility of air in voids. the degree of
nplc
saluration increases. and the failure envelope
(ends to the horizontal. For design purposes, the
e. It curved envelope is approximated as a straight
line. Fig. 13.40. Sm:ngth Envelope.
342 roll MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
1) where K is known lIS Hvorslcv coefficient of cohesion. Accordingly, thc shear st·cngth can be expressed
o
s _ Ko.,+ lan q>., ... (1352)
Dishop and Henkel (1962) suggested a method for determination of c~ and '., from a series of
coosolidatcd-undraiocd triaxial tests on normally coosolidated and over-ronsoHdated specimens. 1be two
failure cnvelopes ar:e obtained as usual and are shown in Fig. 13.42 (b). The watcr oontent at failure for the
two types of specimens is plotted against the maximum principal stress as shown in Fig. 13.42 (a).
For determination of the true failure envelope, any circle (say left circle I) for the over-consolidated clay
in Fig. 13.42 (b) is chosen. The point corresponding to its maximum stress (0,), is projected upward to the
a, - w, curve in Fig. 13.42 (D) to get the point 1 on thc ruNe for ovcr-coru;olidated clay. The point 1 is
projected horizontally across at constant water content to obtain point 2 on the ruNe for the normally
coosolidatcd clay. The point 2 is projected downward to obtain the point (01)/1 in Fig. 13.42 (c). Through this
point, a Mohr circle II is drawn to IOuch the failure envelope for normally' consolidated Clay. In Fig. 13.42
(c), the left circle I is the same as the circle I in Fig. 13.42 (b). 1bc common tangent to the circle I and n in
Fig. 13.42 (c) is the true failure envelope. The pammeters c~ and ,~ are obtained from this envelOpe.
The true failure envelope has been obtained using the o:mccpt that two samples can exist at the same
water content, one as normally consolidated and one as over-consolidaled. As the watcr contents at points 1
and 2 are equal. the true cohesion is the same and the difference between the shear strength of the two
s:lrnples is due to the internal friction only.
The fundamental properties o[ soiLo;; can be studied in termS of Hvorslev shear strength parameter.
However, the theory is generally used only for research purposes. For practical use in engineering problems,
the Mohr-Coulomb theory is commonly used.
The phenomenon when the sand loscs its shear strength due to oscillatory motion is known as
344 SOIL MECI-IANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
liquefaction of sand. The structures resting on such soils sink. In the C&'>e of partial liquefaction. the structure
may undergo excessive settlement and the complete failure may not occur.
The soils most susceptible to liquefaction arc the saturated, fine aod medium sands of uniform particle
size. When such deposits have a void ratio greater than the critical void ratio and are subjected to a sudden
shearing stresses, these decrease in volume and the jXl!'c pressure u' increases. The soil momentarily liquefies'
aDd bchaves as a dense fluid. Extreme care shall be taken while constructing structures on such soils. If the
deposits are compacted to a void ratio smaller than the critical void ratio, the chances of liquefaction are
reduced.
13.31. SHEAR CHARACTERISTICS OF COIIESIONLESS SOII.S
The shear charnclcrislics of cohcsionlcss soils ~ be summarized as given below.
The shear strength of cohcsionless soils. such as sand.. and 000- plastic SillS, is mainly due to friction
between particles. In dense s.1nds, interlocking between particles .also contributes significantly to the strength.
lbe stress-stroin curve for dense sands e::hibits a relati ....ely high initial tangent modulus. The stress
reaches a maximum value at its peak at 8 comparatively low strain and then decreases rnpidly with an
incrct1sing strain and eventually becomes more or lcs.~ constant, as discussed earlier. '[he stress-strain curve
for loose sands exhibits a relati ....ely low initial tangent modulus. At large stmins, the stress becomes more or
lcss constant.
The dense sand shows initially a volume decre..1SC in a drained test, but as the strain increrlScs, the ....olume
starts increasing. The loose sand shows a volume decrc..1sc throughout.
and 1~It~ea:e~~~~~:~~~i=~:~;lg:., •
;;~~:O~:,I~~3~~/~~~~~~r:7~e~:~I~~~~~ :~.:~..:';' ":::~ .::.. \~ :'.~: · ·:~:i
specimen shows ~ clear fadure plane and the failure '"3 ! • ' .... '~" ' ; ' ' .•. ::; Cj
S. No,
l.
2.>
&>1
Sand, round grains. uniform
Sand, !lngulnr, well.gmdcd
.'
zr to 34°
33° 1045°
,.
..
5.
Sandy grlIVC\S
Silly sand
Inorganic silt
35" 10 50°
27" 10 34°
zr 1035"
Note. Smaller values are for loose oonditions and larger values are for dense conditions.
13.32, SHEAR CIIARAcrERlSTlCS OF COHESIVE SOILS
'llie shear characteristics of cohesive soils are summarized below:
The shear characteristics of a cohesive soil depend upon whether a soil is normally consolidated or
over·consolidaled. The stress· strain curve of an ovcr-consolidated clay is similar to thai of a dense sand and
that of a normally consolidaled clay is identical to thai of a loose sand. However, the strain required \0 reach
peak. stress are generally greater in clay than in sand. lbc high strength at the peak point in an
over·consolidated clay is due to structural strength; whereas in the dense sand, it is mainly due to
interlocking. In over·consolidated Clay, strong structural bonds develop between the particles. Loose sands
lend to increasc in volume at large strains whereas normally consolidated clays show no tendency to expand
after a decrease in volume.
The effective stress parameters (c',4") for an ovcrconsolidated clay are determined from the failure
envelope.
s-c'+otanf'
However, for a normally consolidated clay, the failure envelope passes through the origin and hence c' = O.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGlNEEIlING
For ·c1ay, when tcsted in unconsolidated-underained test, the failure envelope in terms of tOl.al stresses is
horizontal (f.... 0), and the shear strength is given by
s .. c..
For heavily over-COll.'iOlidaled clays, negative pore pressure develops during shear, and the undrained
strength is more than the drained strength. The $.. = 0 concept, therefore, leads to the results on the unsafe
side. Funher, tbe continuity of heavily over-consolidated clays is commonly disrupted by a network of hair
cracks and the average pressure is reduced. lbis results in a substantial decrease in its shear strength.
The general behaviour of compacted (partially saturated) clays is similar to a modcrately
over-consolidated clay. A total stress analysis is used for sueh soils.
The factors affecting the shear strength of cohesive soils may be summarised as under:
(1) Structure of clay. The clay exhibits a definite structure. Even a nonnally-consolidated clny exhibits
a small peak due to structural strength. In case of o\'cr-coosolidated clays, the structural strength is
predominant.
(2) Clay content. lbe ultimate friction anglc .' of the oohcsivc soil depends upon the clay content. As
the clay rontent increases, the angle decreases. Further, the difference between the 4" at peak and that at
ultimate condition increases with an increase in clay cootent, because the clay particles do not reach a fully
oriented faa>to-face alignment at peak.
(3) Drainage condilions. As the oohcsive soils have low penncabiUtYJ the shellr strength will depend
whether it is in drained condition or in undrained oonditions. 1be cohesive soils have very low strength just
after the application of the load when undrained conditions exist.
(4) Rate of stmin. In the case of normally consolidated clays, the effect of rate of strain upon the anglc
of shearing resistance is relatively small. The value of " may decrease by about 10% if the stmin rate is
reduced by n factor of 10. However, in some cases, the angle " is found to. increase with a deaease in rote
of suain. In the ~ of over-consolidated clays, some of the shear strength is always lost when the rate of
strain is decreased.
c
(5) Intermediate principal stress. 1be valucs of and .' are affected very little by the magnitude of
the inlenncdiate principal stress.
(6) Repeated loading. For Clays tested at constant water rontent, the shear strength is increased due to II
Jorge number of repetitions of the stress. However, if the stress intensities are too high, the Ctlmulativc
deformations may result in failure.
(7) Confining pressure. The shear strength of clays increases with an ina-ease in the confining pressure,
provided there is enough time available for the pore water pressure to dissipate.
(8) Plasticity index, The value of " decreases with an ina-ease in plasticity index of the Clay. The
following relation is commonly used.
sin f' - 0.814-0.234log,olp
(9) Stress history. The values of strength parameters depend upon the stress history.
(10) Disturbance. The shear strength of disturbed sample is lcs<> than that of the undisturbed samples.
Table 13.3. gives' the representative values of c.. for different types of cohesive soils for undrained
CODdilions.
Thhle 13.3. Representative Values of c.. for day
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAlolPLES
D1ustratlve Example 13.1. A series of direct shear rests was conducted on a soi~ each test was carried
out till the sample failed The following results were obtained
40
]0
i
Z
.." ,.
T .0
".
1 W 10 10
Fig. E-13.1.
Solution. Fig. Ex. 13.1 shows the plot between the shear stresses and nannnl strcs..<;es at failure.
From the plot, c .. 11 kN/m 2, 1(1 .. 26°
IIlustrutive Example 13.2. The following results were obUlined from a series of consolidated undrained
testJ on a soi~ in wldch the pore water pressure was not determined Determine the cohesion intercept and
the angle of shearing resiSUlnce.
Solution. The major principal stresses in the three test are 700, 950 and 1170 kN/m 2, respectively. Fig.
Ex. 13.2 shows the Mohr circle at failure in tenns of total stresses.
600
1100
Plot the strength envelopes in terms of total stresses and effective stresses, and hence determine the
strengtl, parameters.
If (he soil was preconso/idaled to a pressure 0/ 1000 leN/ml, plot the variation 0/ the pore pressure
parameter AI Wilh the over-consolidation ralio.
Solution. The table below shows the required calculations.
Sample a, 01 AI
O.CR.
No. -(7)-u - UIOd
Fig. Ex. 13.3 (a) sbows the su:n!I~9~~C~O~ l~I~~~~f total stress~. From the plot,
Fig. Ex. 13.3 (b) shows the strength envelope in terms of effcctive stresses. From the plot,
,'_ 28.5°, c· _ 50 kN/m 2
Fig. Ex. 13.3 (c) shows the plot belween AI and O.CR.
lllustratin Example 13.4. The following results were obtained from a consolitkAted-undrained (CD)
test on a nonntllly consolidaJed clay. Plot the strength envelope in terms of total stresses and effective stresses
and determine the strength parameters.
Solution. The table below shows the calculations for principal lotal stresses nnd effective stresses.
Sample
0, cr,
No.
250 402 120
"'
130 282
500 800 250 250 550
750 1205 350 400 855
Fig. Ex. 13.4 (a) and Fig. Ex. 13.4 (b) show the plot in terms of cffeaive stresses and total stresses,
respectively.
600
'1 400
~
r lOa
Alternative method
From Eq, 13.38 (0), sin ~ _ [ : : ~~ _ 0,5
D
In the seoond lest, • remains equal to 3O •
. (0, - ol)/2
Therefore, from Eq. 13.38 (a), Sin ell .. (01 + 0)12
01 - 200 2
0.50 .. 01 + 200 or 01 .. 600 kN/m
2
Therefore, 01 - 0) .. 60J - 200 .. 400 kN/m
(b) From the piC){ when 41' ... 0,
0, - oJ .. 200, as shown in Fig. Ex. 13.5 (b)
100
100
'00],.0
'F---io.' ~~J.n------~ 0 ,( ,{s:')oo cr(kNIm2)
I (0)
Fig. Ex. 13.5.
(b)
Illustrative Exumple 13.6. A sample o{ dry cohesion less soil war tested in a triaxial machine. I{ the
Qngle of shearing resistance was 3tJ> and die confining p~sure, /()() lcN/m 2, determine the deviator stress at
which the sample failed
Solution. For dry cohesionless, the cohesion intercept is zero.
. (01 - 0))12
From Eq. 13.38 (a), Sin ~ .. (01 + 0))12
kNlm2
Fig. lli:.13.7.
(b) The centre C of the Mohr circle 'is located by drawing a normal AC to line OA at A. Mohr's circle is
drawn through point A, with its centre at C. The circle ruts the a·axis at points B and D.
From the figure. 0) .. 73 kN/ m2 , 01 .. 159 kN/m 2
The stresses 0) and O'J can also be obtained analytically as follows.
~
Samp!' I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \0
NA (1tNIm)
1 50 15 27 36 43 4. 54 57 61 63 64
,
2 100
150
22
32
37
52
4.
65
58
75
65
89
72
88
76
96
.7.
.6
81
98
82
99
Solution. FIg. Ex. 13.10 shows the stress-stram curves for the soil at three different confirung pressures.
From the plot, the values of secant moduli arc obtained.
of
] 4 S 6 7 8 9
S!rom('/.)_
Fig. B·I3.l0.
(E,)] for at .. 50 IcN/m 2 is 1250 kN/m2
(E,h for o( .. 100 IcN/m 2 is 1750 kN/m 2
(E,h for a c - 15£1 kN/m2 is 2700 kN/m 2
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
2
13.1. The principal stresses al a point in a m<lterial are 80 kN/m and 40 iN/ml, Determine Inc norrnnJ, shear and
resultant stress on a plane il'!Clined at 30° to the major principal plane. .
Find also, for this plane. the maximum value of obliquity. (Ans.70; 17.3; 72.1 kN/m2; 19.47°)
13.2. On a failure plane in a cohesionless soil sample, the normal and shear Stre5SeS are found 8... 10 kN/1ll2 and 4
kN!m2. Determine the resultant stress on the plane of failure, the angle of shearing rcsiSlnnce and the inclination
or failure plane to the major prindpal plane. [Ans. 10.8 kN/m2 i 21.8 0 i 55.9"}
13.3. A consolidated-undrained triaxial test W$ condUCIed on a saturated clay. When the confining pressure was 200
354 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA'10N ENGINEERJ1\G
kN/m 2, the sample failed at a deviator stress of 500 kN/m 2. The pore water pressure was 150 kN/m 2. The failurt
plane OCCUlTed at an onglc of «J0 to the horizontal. Detcnnine the norrrui and shear stresses on Ihe failure p12Dt
at failure. Also calculate the the maximum shear stress.
(il) Ir the same specimen were tested in a drained test with a confining pressure of 200 kN/m2, whm would have
2
been the deviator Sl/'CSS 8t failure? c = 44 kN/m . fAn.'!.226.5; 108; 125; 552.4 kNlm1
11.4. A cylindrical soil sample failed at an axial lood of 140 kN/m2 in an unconfined compression ICSl. The failln
plane makes an angle of 54° with horizontal. Determine the soil propcnics. (Ans. 'P = 181
13.5. The following resull<; were obtained from an undrained shear box lest o n a soil.
03 , (0"1 -('1)
Sample No.
(kN/m'l (kN/m'i
70 2.1 0 - 10
350 550 >90
:=~ne the cohesion intercept and the angle of shearing resi stance in ;~: ~i.~(1~5to~~/~~~ ..~bioe~~~~
13.7. A shear vane, 7 _<j em dia and 11.25 em long, was pressed into soft clay at the bottom of a bore hole. Find lilt
shear strength of the Clay if the torque required for failure was 40 N·m. rAllS. 33 kNflD1
13.8. In an unconfined compression test, the following results were obtained. Diameter of sample = 3.75 em. Lengtb
of sample '" 75 an. Spring extension '" 3.00 em. Spring constant = 100 N,bn. DdOffTl3tion of sample", 12 IDIlL
Determine the unconfined compressivc strength of the soil. rAns. 228. 1 kNlm1
2
13.9. A sample of dry sand was subjccted 10 a triaxial tcst, with a confin ing pressure of 250 kN1m . 'The angle ci
shearing resistance was found 10 be 36°. At what valuc of the major principal stress, the sample is likely 10 fail t
IAn.... 963 kNJmlJ
13.10. A direct shear test WlIS performed on a 6 em x 6 em sample of dry sand. The normal load was 360 N. Tbe
failure oocurred at a shear 1000 of ISO N. PlOI the Mohr strenglh envelope, and determine ,. Assume c = O.
Also determine the principal stresses at failure. [AilS. 26.57°; 69.1 kN/m2; 181.1 kN/1D1
2 2
13.11. An embankment is constructed of soil, with c' '" SO kN/m , . ' = 20· and., '" 16 kN/m . Determine the pm
water pressure, effective stress. shear Slrength of the soil al the base of.embankment jlL~t after the fill has been
raised from 3 m to 6 m. Thke pore prfSSure coefficients A and B os 0.50 ond 0.80, respectively, ond the lotmJ
pre..o:.sure as one·holf of the vertical pressure. [Ans.. 28.8; 67.'2:, 74.5 kN{m1
13.12. A series of shear tests was performed on 0 soil. Each test wa,c; corried out until the soil somple sheared and the
principill stresses for each test are as follows.
Test 01 (kNlm1
875
1160
1460
Plor the Mohr circle of stress and determine the strength envelope and ongle of intemol friction of the soil.
[Ans.29'j
B. Descriptive and Objective 1»pe
13.13. Whot is Mohr's strength theory for soils? Sketch Iypical strength envelopes for D clean sand.
13.14. Describe direct shear test. What are its merilS alld demerits?
13.15. Describe the triaxial shear lest. What are the advantages of trioxial shear lest over the direct shear test?
13.16. What is unconfined comprcssioo test? Sketch the apparalus used. What is ils advantoge over 0 triaxiol test?
~I NG
SHEAR STRENGTH 35S
'.Iilure 13.17. Define slow, qUick and conMllidated quick triaxial shear [cst, illuslrllting the ir u e by at least one field example.
plane 13,18. What is Mohr' s d Tde'! Discuss LtS Lmportant chamclcrislics.
13.19. Write revised Mohr-Coulomb equation. How docs it dIffer from the original C<!uation?
have 13.20. DilTerenti::lle between [he stre~)-conlrolll!d iHld the ~tram·eumru ll ed teMS. Why thc latter lests are mnre
~/m2J co mmonly co ndm:ted'!
llilurc 13.21. Discuss (he. she(lr ehnmeterisl1cS of cohesionless s{lil~ and cohcsive Soil s .
• 18°1 13.22. Explain the working of the following :1ccessorics of a Iria:uru [cst apparmus.
(a) Pore presslIre mea.~urement device.
(b) Mercury comrol sy~tcrll.
13.23. Derivc a rdationshlP bctwt.'"Cn the principal stresses at failure usmg Mohr-Coulomb failure critcrion.
13.24. Discuss modified fatlUl"e envelope. What arc li S :1dv;lmages !lnd disadvantages over the standard failure
envelope?
13.2S. What IS stress path? Sketch different types of stre~s paths thm e:1Il be obtai ned in a trill}Linl test.
13.26. Di scuss the shear chuTlIctcnstics of pnrtially snturated ~oils.
13.27_ Wh!1l is Hvorslev ' strengt h th cory .., How does it differ from the the Moh r·Coulomb theory '1
13.28. What LS Iiqllefact10ll of ~ands ? Ho w L~"n it be prevented?
13.29. Discuss how the shear te~l eo ndiuo ns are decided. Where would yo u use th e cUecli ve stress analysis and where,
the total stress analy~i~ 'I
1330. Write whether the Inlluwing statements are true or false.
(a) 1l1e origin and the pole arc the same point 1lI II Mnhr circle.
(b) On the failure plane. lhe shear stn.~·,~s 1S maxiUlum.
fe) The Mohr c1rcle can be drilwn for all mtcnnediutc loadi ngs 11l a shear box lesE.
(d) According \0 Mohr's theory. the lailure envelope tS a strength line.
(el TIle shear strength of 1I ~oil de~nds upon the tOial stresses.
(f) The Mohr cirde for unconfined compre~siun te~l passc~ throu gh the origin.
(/0 In a stress-cuntrolled tcst. the stress-strain curve atier the peak ca n easily be obtained.
(h) Consolidated tlramed lest is also known us slow te~1.
(i) Consolidaloo undrnined lcst Oil s~lId cml be co nducted easIly in a dirt.'"Ct shear mac hine.
(11 1l1e dense ~;\nd increases in volume during shear.
(t) At critical void mtlo. the volume ch ~n ge during shear is maximum.
(f) The pore pressure during: n .~ hear tesl on a norm ally consolidatt."'<I day is negative.
(/11) The effective strehl; failure envelope of a oomlnl1y consolidaled clay passes Ihrough ongin.
(n) The failure envelope for a nonnally consolidllloo clay in terms of lotal slr~scs obtained from an
unconoo!idatoo undrmned tcst is horizontal.
(0) The de nse ~and ha.~ a bnttle fracture.
(/') V"ne shear test cnn be conducted on <111 types of soil.
tq) The uneonlil1l:d cOl11pr..:ssiun tesl can be condu cted on :1 cohesio nlesS ~() iL
( r) The pore pressu re parametcr 8 is equal to ullity for satu rr1 tcd soils.
(s) The fllilure plane lllnke~ an :mgle of (45" + ¢I/2) with th e mnjor principal plane. where ¢I is the angle of
shearing re.~blnnl'C in tCmlS of 1U1 ..1 stresses.
(t) It is easier to draw the lllodified failure envelope than the Mohr-Coulomb envelope.
(II) Dense sands are liahle 10 liquefnction. '"
[Ails, True, ifJ, (II), U). (m), (n), (Q). (r), (t))
14
Compaction of Soils
14.1. INTRODUCTION
Compaction me3rui pressing the soil particles close to each other by mechanical methods. Air during
COOlpSction is expelled from the void space in the soil mass and, therefore, the mass density is increased.
Compaction of a soil mass is done to improve its engineering properties. Compaction generally increases the
shear strength of the soil, and hence the stability and bearing capacity. It is also useful in reducing the
COOlpressibility and permeability of the soil.
Compactioo is an entirely different process tban consolidation disaJssed in chapter 12. It is important to
"'" note the fOUowing basic differences between the two processes. even though both the processes cause a
rOOucUon in Uie volume. .
(1) Coosolidation is a gradual process of reduction of volume under sustained, static loading; whe~
canp3d.ion is a rapid process of reduction of volume by mechanical means such as rolling, tamping and
vibration.
(2) ConsoUdation causes a reduction in volume of a saturated soil due to squeezing out of water from the
soil; whereas in compaction, the volume of a partially saturated soil decreases because of expulsion of air
:0)]
from the voids at the unaltered water content (Fig. 14.1).
Fig. 14.l.
(3) Consolidation is a process wbich occurs in nature when the saturated soil deposits are subjected to
stade loads caused by tbe weight of the buildings and other structures. In COOlrast, rompaction is an artifieial
process whicb is done to increase the density (unit weight) of the soil to improve its properties before it is
put to any use.
Compaction of soil is required for the oonstrudion of earth dams, canal embankments, highways,
runways aoo in many other engineering applications. This chapter deals with various methods of compaction
aod their effccts on the engineering properties of the soil Various other methods of site improvement are also
discussed.
(Stabilisation of soilS is discussed in chapter 15).
358 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION HNOlNEI!RING
"""'iT ~ Con"
~=====mJ-bra2td
~ Th,.. 1"9'
on
BeSl! plaIt
(0)
Fig. 14.2. StanJ.,rd Proctot Test.
height and 1(XX) ml C3fX1city [Pig. 14.2 (0)]. The rammer recommended is of 2.6 kg mass with a frce drop of
310 mm ana a face diameter of 50 mm. '!"he soil is compacted in three layers. The mould is fixed to a
detachable base plate. lbe eoll.'lr is of 60 mm heigh!.
If the percentage of soil retained on 4.75 mm sieve is more than 20%, a larger mould of internal diameter
150 mm, effe{.'1ive height of 127.3 mm and capacity 2250 ml is recommended.
Procedure. About 3 kg of air-dried, pulverised soil passing 4.75 mm sieve is taken. Water is added to
the soil to bring its water content to about 4% if the soil is ooarsc-graincd aoo to about 8% if it is
fmc-grained. The watcr content should be much less than the expected optimum water content (fable 14.1).
The soil Is mixed thoroughly and covered with a wet cloth and left for maturing for about 15 to 30 minutes.
Table 14.1. Range or Optimum Water Content
Saud
61010%
'1l1e mould is cleaned, dried and grctlSCd lightly. The mass of the empty mould with the base plate. but
without collar, is mken. The collar is thcn fitted to the mould. The mould is placed on a solid base and filled
with fully matured soil to about onc-third its hcight. The soil is compacted by 25 blows of the rammcr, with
COMPACfJON or SOILS 359
a free fall of 310 mm. (Tlle number of blows required for lhe bigger mould of 2250 ml cupacily is 56 instead
of 25). The blows arc evenly distributed over the surface. 'Ibc soil surface is scratched with a spatula before
the second layer is placed. The mould is filled to about two-thirds height with the soil and compacted again
by 25 blows. Likewise, the third layer is placed and compacted. The third layer should project above the top
of the mould into the collar by not more than 6 mm.
lbc collar is rotated to break the bond between the soil in the mould and thai in collar. 'The coUar is tben
removed, and the soil is lrimmcd oIT flush with the lOp of tbe mould. The mass of the mould, base plate and
the compacted soil is taken, and thus the mass of the compacted soil is delennined. The bulk density of the
soil is computed from the mass of the oompacted soil and the volume of the mould.
Representative soil samples are laken from the bottom, middle and lOp of the mould for dctennining the
water content. The dry density is computed from the bulk dcruiity and the water content.
Ih
Bulk mass density, p _ ~ gm/mI ... (14.1)
Gpo
Pd-~
Gpo
As e .. wGIS, ... (14.4)
Pd - I + (wGIS)
It may be mentioned that compaction methods cannot remove all the air voids, and, therefore, the soil
never becomes fully saturated. Thus, the theoretical maximum density is only bypotheticaL It can be
calculated from Eq. 14.4 for any value of w if the value of G is known. The line indicating the theorel.ical
maximum density can be plolted along with the compaction curve, as shown in Fig. 14.3. It is also known as
zero air void line or 100% saturation line.
Likewise, the lines for otber degrees of saturation, say 80%, 90% etc. can be drawn. For example, for S
= 90%, Eq. 14.3 becomes
Gpo
p,' 1 + (w G/O.90) .. (145)
Instead of drawing lines corresponding to different degrees of saturation, it is sometimes more convenient
to draw lines corresponding to different percentage air voids (n..). From equations developed in chapter 2,
Thus, the zero-air void line and 100% saturation line are identical.
The lines for other percentages of air voids, such as 10%, 20% etc. can be drawn. For example, for 10%
air voids, Eq. 14.6 gives
0.90 x G pw
Pd-~ ... (14.7)
Il may be noted that 10% air-void line and 90% saturation line are not identical.
The water renteo! at which the soil is compacted in the field is controlled by tbe value of the optimum
water oontent detennined by the laboratory compaction test. The amount of compaction in the field should be
approximately equal to that in the laboratory. The standard Prodor test desaibed above is adequate 10
represent the compaction of fills behind retaining walls and in higbways and earth dams where light rollm
are used. In such cases, the optimum water content obtained from the standard Proctor lest can be used as II
control criterion. However, in situalions where heavier compaction is required, for example in modern
highways and runways, the standard Proctor tcst does not represent the equivalent compaction in the
laboratory. For such conditions, the modified Proctor test, as described in the following section, is used to
represent the compaajon in the field.
(See Chapter 30, Sect. 3O.1~ for the laboratory experiment).
14.3. MODIFIED PRocroR TEST
The mooified Proctor test was developed to represent heavier compaction than that in the standard
Proctor test. The test is used to simulate the field conditions where heavy rollers are used. The tcst was
standardised by the American Association of Stale Highway Officials and is, therefore, also known as
modified AASHO·tesl. The Indian Standard Code IS : 2720 (part VllI) gives the specifications for heavy
compaaion based on this test.
In the modified Proctor test, the mould used is the same as in the standard Prodor test. However, the
rammer used is much heavier and has a greater drop than that is the standard Proctor tcst. Its mass is 4.89 kg
and the free drop is 450 mm. The face diameter is 50 mm as in the standard Proctor test. The soil is
COMPAcnON OF SOILS 361
compacted in five equal layers, each layer is given 25 blows. The compaClivc effort in the m~ified Proctor
lest, measured in kJ/m l of soil, is about 4.56 times that in the standard Proctor lest. Thus, a much heavier
compaction is attained.
(Compactive effort in modified Pactor test:: 2700 kJ/m 3; in standard Proctor test :: 592 kJ/m~.
If the percentage of soil retained on a 4.75 mm sieve is more than 20%. the larger mould of 150 mm
internal diameter, effective height of 127.3 mm and capacity 2250 ml is used. In this case, 56 blows are
required for each layer. The rcst of the procedure is similar to that in the standard Proctor test.
The dry densities arc obtained for different water contents and the oompaction Olrve is drawn. Fig. 14.4
shows the compaction curve for the modified Proctor test (curve No.2). The curve is higher than and to the
left of that obr.aincd from a starxlard Proctor test (curve no. 1). The heavier compaction increases the
maximum dry density but dca-eases the optimum water content. TIle percentage increase of th.e dry density is
between 3 to 18% for most soils; the percentage increase is more for clayey soils than for th.e sandy soiIs.
\ ,
" \ II) 5tondord proctor tt1~!
"
~
(2) \\ (2) Modlf oe d proctor tes l
, ,
\, "_Zt1fOC""",dline
, '" IS . IOO ·I.)
~"'"
fig. t4.4. Compaction Crves of 5randard Proctor Test and Malified Proctor Test.
Fig. 14.4 also shows the zero air.void line. It may be noted that the ma~mum dry density attained even
in the modified Proctor test is lower than the theoretical maximum dry density indicated by the zero air-void
line. The line of oplimums Shown in the figure joins the points indicating the maximum dry density. It is
roughly parallel to the zero air-void line.
14.4. COMPACJ10N OF SANDS .
The oompaction curves shown in Fig. 14.3
and 14.4 are obtained for soils which contain at Air dry
least some percentage of cohesive soils, In case of
pure sandy soils, the effect of water conlcnl on
the dry density is nOI well defined when the water
Maximum bulking
rontent is below the optimum value. There is a
large scattering of the points on tbe compaction
curve. Generally, the dry density decreases with
an increase in the watcc content in this range (Fig.
145). The dry density decrea<>es due to capillary
tension in pore water. The capillary tension resislS
the tendency of soil particles to lake a dense state
aod hence the volume increases. The phenomenon
is known as the bulking of sand The maximum
bulking occurs at a watpr content of about 4 to
5%. With further increase in the waler content, Fig. 14.5. CaOlpaction CUf1ICC (or Cobesionle3S Soit.
SOil MECHANiCS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
the dry density increases a<o tbe meniscus is destroyed and the particles arc able 10 shift and take a closer
packing. '(be maximum dry density ocrul'S when the soil is fully saturated. If the water content is increased
beyond this point, the dry density again decreases. The coarse- grained soil'! do not adsorb water and arc not
amenable to lubrication. These do not display a distinct optimum water content.
For sandy soils, the compaction curve is of lill\e practical usc. For such soils, the relative density, as
discussed in ch.:1ptcr 3, is used as a criterion for mea<>urcmcnt of compactness (or denseness). The dry density
of the sand is measured in the embankmcnt and its relative density is determined if the dry densities in the
loosest and densest stales are known.
14.5. JODHPUR MINI COMPACI'OR TEST
'Illc Jodhpur Mini Compactor test was developed by Prof. Alam Singh (1965). A small mould of internal
diameter 79.8 mm (cross- sectional area = 5000 mm). effective height 60 mm and a capacity of 3OOm1 is
used. The rammer used is of 25 kg ma'IS and is known as the dynamic ramming tool (DR]). 111e mass slides
down a stem through a height of 250 mm and falls ovcr a fOOl. of 40 mm diameter and 75 mm heighl and
compacts the soil. The test is suitable for both fine-grained soils and coarse-grained soils (minus 4.75 mm
sieve).
The procedure for conducting the test is similar 10 that in the standard Proctor test, but tbe soil is
compacted only in 2 layers. Each layer is compacted by 15 blows of the dynamic ramming tool uniformly
distributed over the soil surface. The compactive effort is approximately equal to thai obtained in the standard
Proctor test. It is daimcd that the optimum water content and the dry density obtained in the tcst are almost
equal to that in the standard Proctor test. It is recommended that, for fine- grained soils, a fresh soil sample
shall be taken for each test after allowing a suitable maturing time.
14.6. DARVARD MINIATURE COMPACTION TFST
In Harvard miniature compaction test. romp..1dion is done by the kneading action of a cylindrical
tamping foot of 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) diameter. The tamping fOOl. operates through a pre-sct compression spring
to give the tamping force to a predetermined valuc. The mould used is of 116 ioch (33.34 mm) diameter aod
of effective hcigbt of 2.816 ioch (71.53 mm). The capacity of the mould is 1/456 cubic foot (= 62.4 ml).
l11e number of layers, the tamping force and tbe number of tamps per layer are selected depending upon
the ty~ of the soil and the amount of compaction required.
14.7. ABBOT COMPAC110N TEST
In the Abbot compaction test, a metal cylinder (mould) of 5.2 em internal diameter and 40 em effective
height is used. '£be cylinder is damped 10 the base. The soil is taken in the cylinder and compacted by a 2.5
kg rammer having a circular face of 5 cm diameter. l11e rammer is lifted up and dropped inside the cylinder
through a height of 35 an above the base.
14.8. FAcroRS AFFECTING COMPACTION
The dry dcnsity of the soil is increased by compaaion. The increase in the dry density depends upon the
following (octors :
(I) Wate.- ContenL At low water content, the soil is stiff and offers more resistance to compaction. As
tbe water content is increased, the soil particles get lubricated. The soil mass becomes more workable and the
particks have doser packing. The dry density of the soil inaea<;es with an increase in the water content till
the optimum water content is rel\Ched. At that stage, the air voids attain approximately a constant volume.
With further increase in water content, the air voids do not decrease, but the total voids (air plus water)
increase and the dry density deae&;CS. Thus the higher dry density is achieved upto the optimum water
content due to forcing air out from the soil voids. Aner the optimum water content is reached, it becomes
more difficult to force air out and to further reduce the air voids.
"be effect of water content on the dry density of the soil can also be explained with the help of electrical
double layer theory (Chapler 6). At low water contenl, the forres of attraction in the adsorbed water layer arc
COMPACIlON or SOILS .,.3
large, and there is more resistanre to movements of the particles. As the water content is increased, the
electrical double layer expands and the interpartkle repu~ive forres incJ'eaI;e. The panicles easily slide over
one another and are closely packed. This results in higher dry density.
(2) Amount of Compaction. As discussed earlier, the effect of increasing the amount of oompactive
effort is to inacac;e tbe maximum dry density and to dcaease the optimum water content (Fig. 14.4). At a
water content less than the optimum, the effect of inaeascd compaction is more predominant. At a water
content more than the optimum, the volume of air voids becomes almost constant and the.: effed of increased
compaction is not Significant. -
It may be mentioned that tbe maximum dry density does not go on increasing with an increase in the
compactive effort. For a certain inacase in the compective effort, the increase in tbe dry density becomes
smaller and smaller. Finally. a stage is reached beyood which there is no further increase in the dry density
with an increase in the compactive effort.
The line of optimums which joins the peaks of the compaction curves of different compactive efforts
follows the general trend of the zero-air void line. This line correspoods to air voids of about 5 %.
(3) Type of Soil. The dry density achieved depends upon the type of soil. The maximum dry density and
the optimum water content for different soils are shown in Fig. 14.6. In general, coarse-grained soils can be
compacted to higher dry density than fine- grained soils. With the addition of even a small quantity of fines
to a coarse-grained soil, the soil attains a much higher dry density for the same campaClive effort. However,
if the quantity of fines is increased to a value more than that required to fill tbe voids of the coarse-grained
soils, the maximum dry density decreases. A well graded sand attains a much bigher dry density than a
poortly graded soil.
Cohesive soils have high air voids. These soils attain a relatively lower maximum dry density as
compared with the oobesionless soils. Such soils require more water than oohesionless soils and, therefore, the
optimum water oonlenl is high. Heavy Clays of very high plasticity have very low dry density and a very high
optimum water content.
(4) Method of Compaction. 1be dry density achieved depellds not only upon the amount of compactive
effort but also on the method of oompaction. For the same amount of compactive effort, the dry density will
depend upon whether the method of compaction utilizes kneading action, dynamic action or static action. For
example, in Harvard Minimure compaction test, the soil is compacted by the kneading action, and, therefore, the
2.00
III
~ (l)W~'-,md.d "'"'
~
(2)l.OW-PlasticitYSi\t
O}l.ow-plos!itily clay
(l.)High-plostic,ty ctoy
'.50
'~°lro---t----;;n;__-"::r'--~20;---~2:.'--~"';-
Weier content (.,.)-_
Fig. 14.6. Compaction Curves for Different Soits.
364 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEER)NG
compaction curve obtained is different from that obtained from the other conventional tests in which an equal
compaetive effort is applied.
Different methods of compaction give their own compaction curves. Consequently, the lines of optimums
arc also different.
(5) Admixture. TIle compaction characteristics of the soils are improved by adding other materials,
knO\Vn as admixtures. The most commonly used admixtures are time, cemcot and bitumen, as diso.lssed in
chapler 15. The dry density achieved depends upon the type and amount of Ddmixtures.
14.9. EFFECT OF COMPACTION ON PROPERTIES OF SOn..s
The engineering properties of soils are improved by compaction. 'The desirnble properties are achieved by
proper selection of Ihe soil lype, the mode of placement and the method of compaction. The effect of
compaction on various soil properties is discussed
below. In the (ollowing discussions, the dry of
optimum means when the water cooten! is less than e
~
'SPERSEO
~
'SPERSEO
:~ct
the soU is compacted plays an important role in the ;;;
engineering properties of the soil. Soils compaded . LOW COMPACT1YE
, . EFFORT CURVE
at a water content less than the optimum watcr
content gcnerally have a flocculated structure, ~ CAJ
FLOCCULATED
-
regardless of the method of compaction. Soils
compacted at a water content more than the
optimum water content usually have a dispe~
WATER CONTENT ("1.)
structure if the compaction induces large shear
strains and a flocculated structure if the shear Fig. 14.7. Soil Struaure in CompllCled Soils.
strains are relatively small.
In Fig. 14.7, al point A on the dry side of the optimum, the water oontent is so low that the attractive
forces are more predominant than the repulsive forces. This results in a flocculated structure. As the water
content is increased beyond the optimum, the repulsive forces ina-ease and the particles gel oriented into a
dispersed structure. If the compactive effort is increased, there is a com:spooding increase in the orientation
of the particles and higber dry c!ensities are obtained, as shown by the upper OJrve.
(2) Penneubility. The penneability of a soil depends upon the size of voids, as discussed in chapter 8.
The penneability of a §Oil decreases with an increase in water conteot 00 tbe dry side of tbe optimum water
content. There is an improved orieotatioo of the particles and a corresponding reduction in the size of voids
which cause a decrease in penneability. The minimum permeability occurs at or slightly above the optimum
water content. Afier that stage, the permeability slightly incrcmes, but it always remains much less than that
00 the dry side of the optimum. The slight increase in the dry density is more pronounced than the effect of
improved orientation.
If the compactive effort is increased, the penneability of the soil decreases due to inaeased dry density
and better orientation of particles.
(3) Swelling. A soil compacted dry of the optimum water content has high water deficiency and more
random orientation of particles. Consequently, it imbibes more water than the sample compacted wet of the
optimum, and bas, therefore, more swelling.
(4) Pore water pressure. A sample compacted dry of the optimum bas low water content. The pore water
pressure developed for the soil compacted dry of the optimum is therefore less than that for the same soil
compacted wet of the optimum.
(5) Shrinkage. Soils compacted dry of the optimum shrink less on drying compared with those
compacted wet of the optimum. TIle soils compacted wet of the optimum shrink more because the soil
particles in the dispersed structure have nearly parallel orientation of particles and can pack more efficiently.
COMPAcnON OF SOI~ 365
(6) Compressibility. The flocculated structure developed on the dry side of the optimum offers greater
resistance to compression than the dispersed structure on the wet side. Consequently. the soils on (he dry side
are less compressible.
However. the compressibility of the soil depends upon a number of other factors. It increases with an
increase in the degree of saturation. The compressibility of a soil compacted on the wet side of the optimum
is also influenced by the method of compaction. If the compaction is of kneading or impact Iype, it creates a
more dispersed structure with a corresponding
iocrease in the oomprcssibility. If the
compaction causes very large stresses, the
t
compressibility increases due to breakdown of ~
the structure and greater orientation lor the ~ DRy SlOE
particles. tn
com~ct:7r;'~~r:~ ;tl:i;:~::e ~I:~~ a:
stress-strain curve than those on the wet side ~ WET SIDE
(Fig. 14.8). The modulus of elasticity for the ~
soils oompaded dry of the optimum is
therefore high. Such soils have briUle failure
If swelling is pennittcd during saturation, the difference in strength of the two 5.1mplcs is further reduced.
In some cases, the sample compacted on the wet side may exhibit even more strength.
The drained shear strength of the two samples is almost equal.
The roller compaclS the soil primarily by 1cne.1ding action. 1bcse roUers arc effcaive for compacting
cohesive as weU as cohesionlcss soils. These rollers are the best type of equipment for general use. Light
rollers (mass upto 20 Mg) are effective for compacting soil layers of small thickness upto 15 cm, whereas
heavy rollers are useful for layers of thickness uplO 30 em.
Sometimes, the rollers arc dcsigned to produce a wobble eITect, due to which a slightly weaving patb is
lraeleed. This improves Ihe compaction of the soil. Pneumatic-tyred rollers are generally provided with a
weight box or ballast box. TIle box can be filled with ballast 10 increase the weight of tbe roller.
(c) Sheep-foot rollers. In ancient time before tbe advent of tbe rollers. it was usual practice to pass a
flock of sheep on the newly formed soil fill to cause its compaction. The same principle is used in the design
of sbccp-fool rollers.
The shcc~fOQ( roller consists of a bollow drum wilh a large number of small projeaions (known as fect)
on its surface. These projections penetrate tbe soil layers during the rolling operations and cause compaction.
The drums are mounted on a steel frame. The drum can be filled with water or ballast to increase the mass.
Sheep-fool rollers are available both as a self- propelled unit and a lowed unit. As rolling is done, most o(
the weight of the roller is imposed through the projections on the soil. The contact pressure is generally
betwccn 700 to 4200 kN/m 2. The roller may sink inLo the soil if the contact pressure is marc than the bearing
capacity of the soiL
·Ibe shcc~foot rollers are ideally suited for compaction of cohesive soils. The rollers compact the soil by
a combination of tamping and kneadin;J action. When the roller is passed for the first time. the projections
penetrate the soil layer and the lower portion of the lnyer is compacted. In successive passes, compaction is
obtained in the middle and the top jXXtioo of the layer. This continually rising effect of the compaction is
caUed wa/Jdng-OUl of the roller.
The depth of layer that can be compacted depends uJXIn the length of the projections and the weight of
the roUer. Small rollers can compact layers o( 15 em thickness, wherta'> heavy rollers can compact layers of
30 em thickness. In general, the thickness of the layer compacted is kept not more than 5 cm greater than the
length of tbe projection.
(3) Vibratory compaclors. In vibratory compactors, vibrations are induced in the soil during compaction.
The ~mpactors are avaiJable in a variety of forms. When the vibrator is mounted on a drum, it is called a
vibratory roller. These roUers nrc available both as pneumatic type and the smooth-wheel type. In a
smooth-wheel type, a separate mOlor drives an arrangement of eccentric weighlS to create high frequency, low
amplitude, up- and-down osciUatioos of the drum. These roUers are suitable for compacting grtJIW/ar soils,
with no fines. io layers upto I m thideness. However. if there is appreciable percentage of fines, the thickness
has to be reduced. In a pneumatic-tyred vibratory compactor, a separate vibrating unit is attached to the wheel
axle. The ballast box is suspended separately from the axle so that it does nO( vibrate. 1bese compactors are
suitable for compacting granular soils witb thickness of layer of about 30 em.
Another form o( a vibratory compactor is a vibrating-plate compactor. In this system, there are a number
of small plates, each plate is operated by a separate, vibrating unit. Hand- operated vibrating piHtes are also
available. The effect of the vibrating plates is limited to small depths. Their main use is 10 compact granular
base courses for highways and runways where the thickness of layecr; is small.
Vibratory compactors can compact the granular soils to a very high maximum dry density.
14.11. PLACEMENT WATER CONTENT
As the methods used for compaction in the field are differenl (rom that for compaction in the laboratory,
the optimum water content in the field may oot be necessarily be the same as in the laboratory. The
laboratory value may be laken as a rough guide for placement water content in the field. The ideal placement
water content when the pneumatic-tyred rollers are used is approximately equal to the optimum water content
as obtained from a standard Proctor test. The placement water content when the sheep-foot rollers, smooth-
whccl rollers and vibratory rollers arc used. is of the order of the optimum water content obtained in the
modified Proctor test.
For important works, a full-scale test is conducted in the field to determine the placement water content,
368 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
the thickness of layer. ma<iS and speed of roller and tbe number of passes. Sometimes, in case of small,
unimportanl works, the placement water content is taken equal to the optimum water content of the standard
Proctor test for light compadion and equal to tbat of the modified Proctor test for heavy compaaion.
However, tbe field water content is sometimes kept intentionally different from the optimum water content in
order to achieve or to improve a specific engineering property of the soil.
To avoid large expansions and swelling pressure under pavements and the floors, cohesive soils in such
cases are generally compacted at a water content more than the optimum water content with the resulting dry
density less tban the maximum dry density. The clayey soil in tbe impervious core of an earth dum ia also
compacted on tbe wet side of tbe optimum to reduce swelling pressure. On the other band, tbe highway
embankments of cohesive soils are generally compacted at a water content spmewbat lower than Ihe optimum
water <:OOtent in order to achieve high shear strengtb.and low compressibility. Likewise, the soil in the outer
shells of earth dams is compacted dry of the optimum to obtain high shear strength, high penneability and
low pore pressure.
A<i discussed cartier, cohesionless soils do nOl exhibit a weU- defined opUmum water content . For such
SOils, the maximum dry density is achieved either in completely dry condition or in completely saturated
condition. In the field, completely s"lturatcd condition is preferred for practical reasons to achieve the
maximum compaction.
If the water content of the soil in the bonow erea is less than the required placement water conteOl, water
is sprinkled over the area. On the other hand, if it is more than the desired value, the soil is excavated from
the borrow pit, spread and allowed to dry. However, in wet weather, it becomes rather difficult to decrease
the water cootcot and the work has to be stopped.
14.12. RELATIVE COMPACTION
The dry density achieved in the field is compared with the maximum dry density obtained in the standard
Proaor lest or thm in the modified Proctor test. The ratio of the dry density in the field to the maximum dry
density is known a<; the relative compaction or percent compaction. Thus
· . Pd in the field
Relative compact}()n - (Pd)""", in the laboratory )( 100 ... (14.8)
For cohesive soils. the dry density of the order of 95% of tbe maximum dry density of the standard
Proctor test (i.e. 95% relative compaction of the stondard Proctor test) can be achieved LLSing a Sheep-foot
roller or a pneumatic-tyred roller. However, if the soil is very heavy clay, only sheep-foot rollers are effective.
For moderately cohesive soils, the dry density of the order of 95% of that in the modified Proctor test am be
achieved using pneumatic lyre<! roller with an inflation pressure of 600 kN/m2 or more.
For oobcsionless soils. the dry density of the order of 100% or even more of that in tbe modified Proct«
test can be obtained using pneumatic-tyrcd rollCffl, vibratory roUm and other vibratory equipment
14.13. COMPACTION CONTIWL
The laboratory compaction tests give the optimum water content and the maximum dry density. In the
field, during the compaction of the soils, it is essential 10 check the dry deosily and the water content in ordtt
to cITed proper quality control. The geotechnical engineer ha<; to ensure that the specified amount of
compaction aDd the desired dry densities arc achieved.
Compaction control is done by measuring the dry density and the water content of the OOfll pactcd soil m
the field.
(1) Dry Density. The dry density is mea<;uroo using the methods discussed in' chapter 2. 'I11e core-cuuer
method and the sand replacement method are commonly used. The nuclear methods are occasionally used as
these are non-destructive and require no physical or chemical processing of the soil and are very convenient.
(2) Water Content. 1be oven-drying method of thC determination of the water content takes 24 hours.
This method, though very aa;:urate, cannot be used for controlling construction, as the soil layer from whidJ
the sample was taken would be buried by the time the water content is known. lbcrefore, the basic
requirement is that the method used be such that it gives quick. results. In the field, the waler content is
OOMPAcnON OF roiLS
generally determined using the sand·bath method, alrohol method or the calch..m
carbide method, as discussed in chapter 2. 1be nuclear methods are also beiog
used increasingly.
The water content can also be detennined indirectly using a Proctor needle
(also known as plasticity needle). The Proctor needle consists of a rod aUacbed STEM
to a spring-loaded plunger (Fig. 14.10). The stem of the plunger is marked to SLIDING
read lbe resistance in newton. A sliding ring on the stem iodicates the maximum RING
resistance recorded during the t(St. The needle-shank: bas graduations to indicate
the depth of penetration. The equipment is provided with a series of needle
points of different cross·sectional areas (0.25, 0.50, 1.0 and 2.5 an1
to obtain a
wide range of the penetration resistance. For cohesive SOils, the needle points of
larger aoss-sectional area<> are required and for cohesionless soil, those of
smaller aoss· sectional areas are used. The needle point used should be such
that it is neither too small for accurate measurement nor 100 large.
A suitable needle point is selected and screwed to the needle shank:. After
the soil has been compacted at a given water content in the compaction test in
the laboratory, the Proctor needle is forced 7.5 em into it at the rate of about
1.25 an/sec. The maximum force used is found from the rompression of the
spring. From the known area of the needle point, the penetratioo resistance per
unit area is mmputed. A number of such measuremcnts are made in the
laboratory during the mmpaction test, and a ailibration curve is obtained
between the penetration resistance (R) and the water content. as shown in Fig.
Fig, 14.10. Proc:IOr Needle.
14.11. It is found that for a given degree of compaction, the penetration
resistance decreases with an increase in watcr content.
10 12 14
WATER CONTENT (0/.) _ _ _ "
Fig, 14.11. Calibration CuM) ror Penetration n;sistanoc R.
Th determine the watcr content of the compacted soil in the field, lhe soil is compacted in the standard
compaction mould in thc field in the same manner as was used during tbe calibration of the needle. The
penetration resistance of the rompacted soil is measured. The moisture rontent is then obtained form the
calibration curve.
This method of the detenninalion of the water rontcnt is quite rapid and reliable for fine-grained soils.
However. it does not give accurate results for cohesionless soils and for soils having a large percentage of
gravels and stone pieces.
14.14. VIBROFWTATION METHOD
VibroflOl:alion is used for compacting thick dcposits of loose, sandy soils upto 30 m depth. A vibroflOl
consists of a cylindrical 'tube, about 2 m diameter, fitted with water jets at the top and the bottom. It oontains
370 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
deposits as well. 1be deplh (D) in metres upto which the method is effective ClIl be determined from the
following relation:
D - C VMH .. .(14.9)
= = =
where C coefficient (0.5 to 0.75). M mass (Mg), H height of drop (m).
While using the pounding method, care shall be taken that harmful vibrations arc not transferred to the
adjacent buildings. The radius of influence (R) in metres beyond which no hannfu l vtbrntioos are transmitted
can be determined from the relation.
R _ !30VMH .. . (14.10)
where M = mass (Mg), and H = height of drop (m).
14.17. COMPACTION BY EXPLOSIVES
. Buried explosives are sometimes used to density cohesionless soils. The shock wave and vibralions
produced by explosives are somewhat similar to thaI produced by vibratory, compaction equipment. The
methoo is quile effective when the cohesionless soil is fully saturated. The shock waves cause liquefnction of
sand, which is followed by densification. 10 partially saturated cohcsionlcss soils, compressive stresses
develop due to capillary action and prevent the soil particles from laking closer positions. The method is nOI
effective for partially saturated soils.
1he deplh upto which the blast is effective is limited to about 25 m. The uppennOSI zone of the soil upto
a depth of about 1 m gets displaced in a random manner and is, therefore, not properly densificd. ThL.. zone
should be compacted using the conventional methods by rollers.
Explosive charges usually consist of about 60% dynamite and 30% spedaJ gelatin dynamite and
ammonite. The charges are placed at two-thirds the thickness of the stratum to be densified. The spacing of
the explosive points is kept between 3 to 8 m. Three to five blasts are generally required at each location.
The radius of influence (R) of compaction can be determined using the relation
R - (M/C)~ ...(14.11) .
where R = radius of influence (m), M = mass of charge (kg), C constant ( =0.04 for 60% dynamite)
14.18. PRECOMPRESSION
As discussed in chapter 12, prccompression improves the properties of the cohesive soils. In this method,
the soil is preloaded before the application of the design loads. Preloadiog causes settlement before actual
construction begins. The preload is generally is the form of an earth fiU which .is left in place for a long time
so a'i to induce the required settle!llent. After the required compression hml been achieved, the preload is
removed prior to the construction. A monitoring system consisting of settlement plates and piezometers may
be used to check the progress of settlement.
The prcrompression method is effective for compaction of silts, clays, organic soils and sanitary land
fills. The preload must be carefully selected so as not to cause shear failures in the soil. The stability of the
soil deposit under preload should be checked. Sufficient soil data should be collected to predict the rate arxl
magnitude of the settlement. Sometimes, venical sand drains are used to decrease the lime of selllemcnt.
in base courses. Vibratory rollers, vibroflotation, terra probe, blasting, compaction piles and
explosives are effective for compacting dejXlSilS of large thickness.
(2) Cohesive Soils only. Sheep-foot rollers are suitable for compaction of cohesive soils. Precompression
is also quite effective.
(3) Both cohesion less and cohesive soils. The following methods are universal. 'Illcsc can be used for
both cohcsionicss soils and cohesive soils.
(I) Tampers are effective for rompacting soils in a conrmed space of al1 types.
(ii) Pneumatic-tyrcd roUers are extremely useful for compacting aU types of soils.
(ii!) Pounding method has a great promise for compacting all types of soils.
ilLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
lIIustrati.-e Example 14.1, A sample of soil was prepared by mixing a quantity of dry soil with 10% by
mass of water. Find the mass of this wet mixlure required /i) produce a cylindrica~ compacted specimen of 15
cm diameter and 12.5 cm deep and having 6% air content. Filld also the void ratio and the dry density of
the specimen if G = 2.68.
Solution. Air content, a c - V.,.IVv - 0,06
V.. _ 0,06 V y , Hence V.., _ O,94Vy
The volume of the mould used was 950 mi. Make necessary calculations and plot the compaction curve
COMPACTION OF SOILS 373
and obtain the maximlUlI dry density and the optimum Waler content. Also calculate the void ratio, the degree
of saturation and the thecretical maximum dry density (G = 2.70).
Solution. Calrulations are shown in tabular form.
Dry density
158 1.71 1.73 1.67 1.64 1.60
fJd-e{(I.+w)
\bid ratio
e-~-l 0.71 0.58 0.56 0.62 0.65 0.69
PJ
Degree of saturation
S _ weG 0.46 0.65 0.77 0.78 0.83 0.86
2.O° rrTT-n-,-,-,-rrTT-n-,-,rrrr"-,-,rrrrrr,,
I ::: H-t+t+-t1+H-t+t+-t1+l-+++-t1H-H-++++
E
1.90
H-t+t+-t1+H-t+t+u,.-t1+l-+++-t1H-H-++++
~ 1.60 H-+++t-f-j+H-H'H-f1+H-.pf~H-H-+++l
I.'"
'ii 1.40
~
qp
0
1.20
1.10
1.00
0 CUO ..,.
W:atfer content _ _ _
Fig. E-14.2-
From the plol. (Pd)_ .. 1.74 gm/ml, O.We. = 15.2%,
Illustrative Example 14.3. The ma-cimum dry density of a sample by the light compaction test is 1.78
glml at an optimum waler content of 15%. Find dIe air VlJid\' and the degree of saturaiion. G = 2.67.
What would be the corresponding value of dry density on the zero air void line al O. We. ?
SoIUtl~ G P... G p ...
Pd .. ~ .. 1 + (M-G/S)
374 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
PROHLEMS
A. Numerical
14.1. A cylindrical specimen of a oohesivc soil of 10 em diameter and 20 an length was prepared by COIllp<lClion in
a mould. If the wet mnss of the specimen was 3.25 kg and its water content was 15%. determine the dry density
and the void ratio.
If the specific gravity of the particles was 2.70, find the degree of saturation. (Aos. 1.80 gmlmJ; 0.50; 81%J
14.2. The following are the resulls of a swndard compaction lest performed on a sample of soil.
If the volume of the mould used was 950 c.c. and the specific gravity of soil grains was 2.65, make necessary
calculations and plO! the water contcnt-dry density curve and obtain the optimum w.ller content and the
maximum dry density. [Ans. 15%; 1.83 grw'm1J
6
14.3. An earthen embankment of 10 m) volume is 10 be constructed with a soil having n void ratio of 0.80 after
compaction. There are three borrow pits TIlllrked A. D and C, having soils with void ratios of 0.90, 1.50 and
1.80, respectively. The COSt of excavation and trnnsportlng the soil is Rs. 0.2$, Rs. 0.23 and Rs. 0.18 per ro3,
respectively. Calculate the volume of soil to be eXQlv8ted from each pit. Which borrow bil is the I'IXGt
economical? (0 = 2.65). [Ans. 1.055 x 106; 1.389 x 106; 1.555 x 106 m3; A]
B. Descriptive and Objective Type
14.4. Differentiate between consolidation and compaction. Give examples.
14.5. Describe Standard Proctor lest and the modified Proctor lest. How would you dwde the type of the test to be
conducted in the laboratory ?
14.6. What is il compaction curve? Give its salient features. What is a zero-air void line ?
14.7. What are the factors that affect compaction? DiS\-=uss in brief.
14.8. What is the effect of compaction on the engineering propenies 9£ the soil? How would you decide whether the
soil should be compacted the dry of optimum or the wet of optimum ?
14.9. What are the different melbods of compaction adopted in the field? How would you select the type of roller 10
be used?
14.10. Write shan notes on
(a) Placement water content (b) Rclolivc compaction
(e) Compaction control (d) Terra probe
(e) Vibrofiotalion (j) Comp<lCtion by pounding
(g) Precompression (h) Compaction by explosives
14.11. Write whether the followi .lg statement are correct Of nol.
(a) Compaction occurs under a sustained. stalic load on a saturated soil.
(b) The theoretical maximum dry density can be ottained in the laboratory.
(c) The zer~air void line and 100% saturntion line nrc identical.
COMPACTION OF SOILS m
IS.I. INTRODUCTION
Soil stabilisation is the process of improving the engineering properties of the soil and thus making it
more stable. It is required when the soil available for constructioo is 001 suitable for the intended purpose. In
its broadest senses. stabilisation includes compadion, preconsolklalion, drainage and many other suet
processes. However, the tenn stabilisation is generally restriaed to the processes which alter lhe soil nuueriaf
inelf for improvement of its propenles. A cementing material or a chemical is added to a natural soil for the
purpose of stabilisal1oo.
Soil stabilisation is used to reduce the permeability and oompressibility of tbe soil mass in earth
structures aod 10 increase its shear strength. Soil stabilisation is required to i.ncrea'ie the bearing capacity of
foundation soils. However. the main use of stabilisation is to improve Ibe natural soils for the coostructioo of
highways and airfields. The principles of soil stabilisation are used for OODlrolling the grading of soils and
aggregates in tbe construction of bases and sub-bases of the highways and airfickts.
Soil stabilisation is also used to make an area trafficable within a short period of time for military aod
other emergency purposes. Sometimes, soil stabilisation is used for city and suburban streets to make tbern
more noise-absorbing.
This chapter deal.;; with the various methods of soil sr.abUisation and their effects on the engineering
properties of the soils.
!Sol. MECDANICAL !rrABILISATION
Mecbanical stabilisation is the process of improving the properties of the soil by changing its gradation.
1Wo or more types of natural soils are mixed to obtain a composite material which is superior 10 any of its
components. To achieve lbe desired grading. sometimes the soils with ooarse particles are added or the soils
with fine particles a re removed.
Mecbanical stabilisatioo is also known as granular stnbiJisation.
For the purpose of mechanical stabilisation, the soils arc subdivided into two categories:
(1) Aggregates : Tbesc are the soils which have a granular bearing skeleton and have particles of tbe
size larger than 751'.
(2) Binders : ThC'SC are the soils which have particles smaller than 75" size. They do not possess a
bearing skeleton.
The aggregates consist of strong, we~·graded, angular particles of sand and gravel which provide internal
friction and incompressibility to a soil. The binders provide cohesion and imperviof.lSl)(:$ 10 a soil. These 3Jt
composed of silt and clay. The quantity of binder should be sufficient to provide plasticity to the soil, but it
should not cause swelling.
Propcr blending of aggregates and binders is done in order to achieve required gradation "Of the mixed
SOlI. 1be blended soil should possess both internal fridian and cohesion. 1be material should be workable
SOIL STABILISATION 377
during placement. When properly placed and compacted, the blended material becomes mechanically stable.
The IOOd<arrying capacity is increased. The resistance against the temperature and moisture changes is also
improved.
'The mechanical stability of the mixed soil depeods upon the following factolS.
(1) Mechanical strength or the aggregate. The mixed soil is stable if the aggregates used have high
strength. However, if the mixture is properly designed and compacted, even tbe aggregates of relatively low
strengtb can provide good mechanical stability.
(2) Minerai composition. The mechanical stability of the mixed soil depends upoo the composition of
the minerals in it. 'The minerals should be weatber.resisLant.
$odium sulpbates and sodium carbonates cause large volume changes due to their bydration and
dehydration. These are detrimental to the stability.
(3) Gradation. The gradation of the mixed soil should be such that the voids of the coarser particles are
filled with finer particles so that a high density is oblained. According to Fuller (1907), the max:imum density
is achieved if the particle size distribution of the mixture satisfies lbe following criterion:
p = (dID)O',. x 100 ... (15.1)
wbere p = perrentage of the soil mixture passing sieve of size d,
n
D ::::: maximum particle size.
'" The U.S. Bureau of Public Roads recommends that the value of the exponent in Eq. 15.1 should be taken
as 0.45 instead of 0.50.
It is found by experience that to obtain sufficient cohesion in the mixture, it is necessary to bave a greater
proportion of the material passing 7511 sieve than that given by Eq. 15.1. Generally, an ideal mixture would
include about 25% binder. The basic requirement is that the mixture shall contain a fair proponioo of different
,r size particles. It should contain sufficient quantity of fines to provide cohesion, especially in the wearing
or surface.
xl
(4) Ploslicity characteristics. Sailo; with high liquid limit and plasticity index are suitable as bindclS for
soils used [or surfacing. Such soils possess greater cohesion and better moisture retention capacity. They
xl
provide a better seal against the downward movement of surface water.
For soils used in base courses, tbe requirement of plasticity characteristics are quite different from those
for surfacing. The soil in base course should have low plasticity to avoid excessive accumulation of water and
the resulting loss of strength.
As the soil .available at site may seldom meet hoth the gradation and the plasticity characteristiCS, it
usually beromes necessary to mix soils from different sources to obtain the desired mixture. This is normally
done by trial mixcs. As far a<> possible. the maximum use of locally available soils should be made for
its eoonomy.
ils (5) Compaction. The mechanical stability of the stabilised soil mass deperxls upon the degree of
compaction attained in the field. NonnaUy, tbe oompaction is done at or near the optimum water content.
Uses or Mechanical Stabilisation. It ' ~ the simplest method of soil stabilisation. It is generally U'ied to
improve the subgrades of low bearing capacity. It is extensively used in the construction of bases, sub-bases
pc aod surfacing of roads.
15.3. CEMENT S1'ABn.ISATION
Cement Stabilisation is done by mixing pulverised soil and portland cemeot with water and compacting
the mix to attain a strong material. The material obtained by mixing soil and cement is known as soil-cemenl.
nal The soil-cement becomes a hard and durable structural material as the cemen.t hydrates and develops strength.
are
tit 1)pes or Soll-cement
MitdleU and Freitag (1959) have divided the soil-cemenl into 3 categories.
,00 (1) Normal SoU·Cement_ It COOSislS of 5 to 14% of cement by volume. The quantity of cement mixed
ble with soil is sufficient to produce a hard and durnble construction material. 1be quantity of water used should
318 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGI NEERING
be just sufficient to satisfy hydration requirements of the cement and 10 make the mixture workable.
The normal soil-cement is quite weather-resistant and strong. It is commonly used for stabilising sandy
and other low plasticity soils.
(2) )Iastic Soil-Cement. This type of soil-cement also contains remcot 5 to 14% by volume, but it has
more quantity of water 10 have wet co~islency similar to thai of plastering mortar at the time of placement.
The plastic soil-ccmcnt can be placed on sleep or irregular slopes where it is difficult to use nonna\
ro.1d-mak:ing equipment. It has also been successfully used for water-proof lining of canals and reservoirs. The
plastic soil-ccment can be used for protection of sleep slopes against erosive action of water.
(3) Cement-Modified soil. II is a type of soil-cement thai contains less than 5% of cement by volume.
It is a semi-hardened product of soil and cement. It is quile inferior to the other two types.
As the quanlity of cement used is small, it is nOl able to bind all the soil particles into a coherent mass.
However, it interacts with the silt and clay fradions and reduces their affinity for water. It reduces the
swelling characteristics of the soil. The use of cement-modified soils is limiled.
The following discussion is ooofined to the fir.>t two types of soil-cement.
Factors affecting cement stabilisation
The factors affecting cement stabilisation can be summarised as under:
(1) Type of soil. Granular soils with sufficient fines are ideally suited for cement stabilisation. Such soils
can be easily pulverized and mixed. Ihey require Ihe least amount of cement.
Granular soilS with deficient fines, Such as beach sands and wind-blown sands. can also be stabilised but
these soils require more cement. As it is difficull to move road-making equipment over such soils when dry,
il is desirable to keep them wet for better traction.
Silty and· clayey soils can produce satisfactory soil-cement but those with a high clay-content are diffiOJh
to pulverise. Moreover, the quantity of cement increases with an increase in clay content. The quality of
soil-cement in this case is not good, as it may have high shrinkage properties.
Organic matter, if prescnt in colloidal fonn, interferes with the hydration of cement and causes a
rcdudion in the strength of soil-cement. The trouble is more common in sandy soils than in clayey soils. The
soil sbooJd be treated with calcium chloride to remedy the situation. Sodium hydroxide is also effective in
correcting the ill cffects due to organic mailer. Sometimes, addition of a small quantity of silt or clay to a
sandy soil may aid in the cement reaction.
(2) Quantity or cement. A well-graded soil requires about 5% cement, whereas a (XlOrly graded, unifonn
sand may require about 9% cement. Non-plastic silts require about 10% cement, whereas plastic clays may
need about 13% cement.
The actual quantity of cem~nt required for a particular soil is ascertained by laboratory tests. For base
courses, samples arc subjected to durability tests for determination of the quantity of the cement required. It
oonsists of 12 cycles of freezing and thawing or 12 cycles of wetting and drying. 'The maximum volume
change (swelling plus shrinkage) of 2% is generally permitted.
Sometimes, the quantity of cement is determined according to the minimum unoonfincd compre&ive
strength. Generally, a minimum strength of about 1500 kN/m2 for clayey soils and of about 5500 kN/m2 for
sandy soils is Specified. High strength is ootained by decreasing the water-<:emcnt ratio. This is done by
increasing the cement content for tbe same water content.
As a rough guide, the cement content can be taken as 6% for sandy soils and 15% for clayey soils.
(3) Quantity or Water. The quantity of water used must be sufficient for hydration of cement and
silt-clay cement and for making the mix workable. GeneraUy, the amount of water ascertained from
compadion consideration is adequate for hydration a<; weU.
Water used sbould be clean and free from harmful salts, alkalies, acids or organic mailer. In general, the
water which is potable is also satisfadory for soil-cement.
(4) Mixing, Compaction and Curing. The mixture of the soil, cement and water shOuld be thoroughly
mixed, as the success of cement stabilisation depends mainly on thorough mixing. If it is nOi. properly mixed,
SOIL STABIUSATION 319
it may result in a non-homogeneous, weak product. However, the mixing should nol be continued after the
cement has started hydrating, as il would resuU in a loss of strength.
Soil-cement should be properly compacted. Compaction is generally done as for soil alone (Chapler 14).
For good results, fine- grained soils should be compacted wet of optimum, and coarse- grained soils, dry of
optimum . After compaction, the surface is finished by a rubber-Iyred roUer.
Soil-cement should be protected agaiost loss of moisture by providing a thin bituminous coaling.
Sometimes, other materials, such as water-proof paper, mow straw or diet, are also used.
(5) Admixture. To increase the effect iveness of cement as stabiliser. admixtures arc sometimes added to
soil cement. Admixtures may permit a reduction in the amount of cement required. These may also help
stabilisation of soils which are not rcsporriive to cement alone.
Lime and calcium chloride have been used as admixturc.s for clays aoo soils containing harmful organiC
matter to make them more responsive to cement. Fly ash acts as a pozzolana and is effective for stabilisation
of dune sand. Sodium carbonate and sodium sulphates have also been used as admixture.
Construction Methods
'[lJ.e construction of soil-cement bases and sub-bases is done using the following methods.
(1) Mix-in-place method. In this method of construction. mixing of soil-cement is done at the place
where it would be finally placed. 11 consists of the following steps:
Is
(I) The subgrade is cleared of all undesirable materials such ao; boulders, debris. stumps. It is then
levelled to the required formation level.
JI
(ii) The levelled subgracle is scarified to a depth equal to the proposed thickness of the soil cement
Y.
(ilt) The scarified soil is then pulverised till at least 80% of the soil passes 4.75 mm IS sieve. It can be
done either manually or with the help of a machine.
,[ Pulvcrisatioo of highly plastic soil can be done easily if about 4% lime is added to it.
(iv) The pulverised soil is properly shaped to the required grade and the required quantity of cement is
spread unifonnly over the surface. It is then intimately mixed dry with rotary tillers or special soil
,e mixers.
(v) lbe required quantity of waler is sprinkled over the surface and wet mixing is done till the mixture
has a uniform colour. 1be operation should not last longer than 3 hours.
The surface is then properly graded using towed graders.
(VI) Compaction is done using suitable methods. The thickness of the layer should not be more than 15
em. Compaction should not take more than 2 hours.
After cornpaction, the surface is properly finished.
(vii) The compacted soil-cement is moist cured for at least 7 days by providing a bituminous primary
"
It coot. Altematively. it is k.ept damp by frequent applicatioo of a light spray of water.
The mix·in-piace method of construction is quite simple, cheap and easily adaptable to dj(ferent field
conditions. The maio disadvaotage is that the mixing is not uniform and high strength cannot be achieved.
(1) Plllnt-mix method
y There are two types of plants used in the plant-mix method of construction.
(a) Stationary plant. In this method, the excavated soil is transported to a stationary plant located at a
suitable place. The required quantity of cement is added to the soil in the plant. Mixing is done after adding
water. The lime required to obtain a uniform mixture depends upon the type of soil. 1be mixed material is
then discharged into dumper trucks and transported back to the subgradc. It is spread and properly compaaed.
The Slationary plant is useful for obtaining a uniform mix. In this methOd, the depth of treatment can be
belter controlled. However, the method is quite expensive ao; compared with mix-in· place mc·thod. The
material bas to be compacted as delivered and oot as a complete section of the road. A further disadvantage
is that the work may have to be stopped even after a minor breakdown in the plant.
(b) Travelling Plant. A travelling plant can move along the road under construction. The soil, after
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
placement of cement o ....er- iL, is lifted up by an elevator and discharged into tbe hopper of the mixer of the
travelling plant. Water is added and proper mixing is done. The mix is then discharged on the subgrade and
spread by a grader. It is then properly compacted.
1be travelling plant method, like stationary plant, is useful for acOJrate proportioning aod unifonn
mixing. The depth of treatment is also properly rontrollcd and a unifonn subgrade surface is attained.
However, the initial cost is vcry high.
1504. LIME !mUIILISATION
Ume stabilisation is donc by adding limc to a soil. It is useful for stabjlisation of clayey soils. Whcn lime
reacts with soil, there is exchange of cations in the adsorbed water layer and a decrease in plasticity of the
soil occurs. The resulting material is more friable than the original clay, and is. therefore, more suitable •
subgrade. .
Lime is produced by burning of lime stone in kilns. The quality of lime obtained depends upon the parent
material and the production process. There are basically 5 types of limes.
(I) High calcium, quick lime (CaO)
(il) Hydrated, high calcium lime rea (OH)2]
(iii) Dolomitic lime (Cao + MgO)
(iv) Normal, hydrated dolomitic lime [Ca (OH)2 + MgO]
(v) Pressure, hydrated dolomitic lime [Ca (OH)2 + MgCh].
The quick lime is more effective as s{.1biliser than the hydrated lime; but the latter is more safe and
convenient to handle. Generally, the bydrated lime is used. It is also known as slaked Jime. lbe higher the
magnesium content of the lime, the less is the affinity for water and the less is the heat generated during
mixing.
The amount of lime required for stabilisation varies between 2 to 10% of the soil. However, if lhc lime:
is used ooly to mOOify some of the pbysico---dlemical characteristics of the SOil, tbe amount of lime is about
I to 3%. The following amount may be used as a rough guide.
(I) 2 to 5% for clay gravel material having less than 50% of silt· clay fractioo.
(il) 5 to 10% for soj~ with more than 50% of sill<lay fraction .
(iii) For soils having particle size intermediate between (I) 8ndr(il) above, the quantity of lime required is
between 3 to 7%.
(iv) About 10% for heavy clays used as bases and sub-~.
Ume stabilisation is not effective for sandy soils. However, these soils can be stabilised in oombination
with clay, fly ash or other pozzolanic materials, which serve a<i bydraulically reactive ingredients. The ratio
of fly ash to lime generally varies betwccn 3 to 5. 1be fly ash used is about 10 to 20% of the soil weight.
Chemical and Physical Changes In lime stabilisation
When lime reacts with wet soi~ it alters the nature of the adsorbed layer by base exchange. Calcium ions
replace the sodium or hydrogen ions. The double layer is usually depressed due to an inaease in the catioo
ooocentratioo. However, sometimes the double layer- may expand due to high PH value of lime.
Ume reacts chemically with available silica and alumina in soils. A natural cement composed of calcium
alumino silicate! complexes is fonned, which causes a cementing action. 1be reaction depends upon the
effective .concentration of the reaaants and temperature.
In lime stabilisation, the liquid limit of the soil generally decreases but the plastic limit increases. Thus,
the plasticity iOdex of the soil deaeascs. The soil heoomes more friable and workable. The strength of the
lime-stabiUsed sOil is generally improved. It is partly due to a decrease in the plastic properties of the soil aDd
partly due to formation of cementing material Increase in the unconfIned compressive sLrCngth is sometimes
as high asc60 times. The modulus of elasticity of thelsoil also inaea-;es substantially.
Addition of lime- causes a high concentration of calcium ions in the double layec. It causes a deaease in
the tendC09Y of attraction of water. Consequently, the resistance of the soil to water adsorption, capillary rise
SOil SfABIUSAllON 381
,e and volume changes on wetting or drying is substantially increased. TIle lime-stabilised bases or sub-bases
fonn a water resistant barrier which stops penetration of rain water. There is an increase in the optimum water
content and a reduction in the maximum dry density. In swampy areas where the water content is above the
optimum, application of lime to soil helps in drying of the soil.
Cyclic freezing and thawing can cause a temporary loss of strength, but because of subsequent healing
aaion. there is no Joss of strength in long run.
,.
le
Construction Methods
Construction methods used in lime stabilisation are similar to those used in cement stabilisation.
However, the following differences should be carefully noted.
(I) As the reaction in the ClSC of lime is slow, there is no maximum time limit between the addition of
lime to the soil and the completion of compaction. However. care should be taken to avoid
nl
carbooation of lime in the process.
(iI) lime may be added in the form of slurry insIead of dry powder.
(iii) A rest period of 1 to 4 days is generally required after spreading lime over a beavy clay before fmal
mixing is done. l11is facilitates proper mixing of lime and soil.
(iv) lbe soil-lime is compaaed to the required maximum dry denSity.
After compaction, the surface is kept moist for 7 days and then covered with a suitable wearing coat.
Sometimes, the wearing coat is applied soon after compaction to help hold the moisture.
xl lS~. BITUMINOUS SD\IlILISAT10N
I· Bitumens are non-aqueous systems of hydrocarbons thut are soluble in carbon di-sulphidc. Tars arc
19 obtained by tbe destructive distillation of organic materials such as coal. Asphalts arc materials in which the
primary compOnents are natural or refined petroleum bitumens.
,. Bituminous stabilisation is generally done with asphalt as binder. As asphalls are normally too viscous 10
ut be I1'>ed direc".iy, these are used as OJt-back with some solvent, such as gasoline. These are also used as
emuisions, but in this form they require a longer drying period.
Any inorganic soil which can be mixed with asphall is suitable for bituminous stabilisation. In
cOOcsionless soils, asphall binds the soU particles togcther and thus serves as a bonding or cx:menting agen!.
is In cohesive soils, asphalt protcas the soil by plugging its voids and water proofmg it. It helps the cohesive
soil to maintain low moisture content and to iocrcasc the bearing capacity.
The amoWlt of bitumen required generally varies between 4 to 7% by weight. The actual amoont is
00
dctennined by trial
00 Types of soil-bitumen
According to the Highway Research Board of USA, there are foor types of soil-bitumen.
(I) Soli-bitumen (proper). This is a water-proo~ cohesive soil system. The best results are obtained if
the soil satisfies the following criteria.
os (0) Passing No.4 (4.76 mm) Sieve 50%.
00
(b) Passing No. 40 (0.425 mm) Sieve 35 to 100%.
(e) Passing No. 200 (0.074 mm) Sieve 10 to 50%.
un
(d) Plastic limit less than 18%.
r.
.he
lid
(e) Uquid limit less than 40%.
(/) The max:imum size of thc particle should not be grcuter than one- third the romp..'\ctcd thickness of
the soil-bitumen .
The quantity of bitumen varies from 4 to 7% of the dry weight.
(2) Sand·bltumen. This is a bitumen stabilised cohcsionlcss soil system. The sand should be free from
vegetal mailer or lumps of clay. The sand may require filler for its mechanical stability. However, it should
not contain more than 25% minus No. 200 sieve material (i.e the rpaterial finer than No. 200 Sieve) for dune
in
sands and not more than 12% in case in other types of sand.
ise
SOIL MECtlANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
calcium chloride causes a slight inCrc.1sc in the maximum dry density. However. the optimum water
content is slightly lower than that for the untreated soil. It C,1U$CS a small decrease in the strength of the soil.
However, if the compacted soil is put to watcr imbibition, water pick up is reduced and the strength of the
treated soil is greater than that of the untreated soi\.
It may be noted that most of the benefits of stabilis.1tion require the presence of the chemical in the pore
nuid. As soon as the chemical is leached out, the benefits arc lost. The performance of treated soils depends
to a large extent on the ground-water movement.
The construction methods are similar to those used for lime stabilisation. lbe quantity of calcium
chloride required is about 4% of the weight of the soil.
(2) Sodium Chloride. TIle action of sodium chloride is similar 10 that of calcium chloridc in many
respects. However, thc tendency for attraction of moisture is somcwhat lesser than that of calcium chloride.
When sodium chloride is added to tbe soi~ crystallisation occurs in the pores of the soil and it forms a dense
hard mat with the stabilised surface. '£l'le pores in the soil gel filled up and relaro further evaporation of water.
Sodium dlloridc also cbecks the tendency for the formation of shrinkage cracks.
Sodium chloride is mixed with the soil either by the mix-in-place method or by the plant-mix method. It
should not be applied directly 10 lhe surface.
The quantity of sodium chloride required is about 1% of the soil weight.
(3) Sodium Silicate_ Sodium silicates, as well as other alkali silicates, have been successfully used for
soil stabilisation. The chemical is used as solution in watcr, known as water glass. The chemical is injeded
inlO the soil. Sodium silicate gives strength 10 soil when it reacts with it. It also makes the soil impervious.
It also acts as a dispersing agent. The maximum COlilpadcd density is increased. The qunntity of the chemical
required varies between 0.1 to 0.2% of the weight of the soil.
This method of stabilisation is relatively inexpensive, but its long-term stability is doubtful. Thc treated
soil may lose strength when exposed to air or to groWld water.
(4) Polymen.. Polymers are Jong-dlaincd molecules formed by polymerising of ccnain organic chemicals
called mOllf)mers. Polyrnm may be natural or synthetic. Resins arc natural polymers. C'..alcium acrylate is a
commonly used syntheLic polymer. When a polymer is added to a soil, rcnction takes place. Sometimes, the
monomers are added with a catalyst to the soil. In thaI case, polyrnerisation occurs along with the fC.1ction.
(5) Chrome Lignin. The chemical lignin is obtained as a by- prooud during the manufacture of paper
from wood. O1rome lignin is formed from black liquor obtained during sulphite paper manufacture. Sodium
bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate is added to sulphite liquor to fonn chrome lignin. It slowly polymeriscs
illto a brown gel. Whcn the chemical is added 10 the soil, it slowly reads to cause bonding of particles. The
quantity of lignin required varies from 5 to 20% by weight.
As lignin is soluble in water. its stabilising eITect is not permanent.
(6) Other Chemicals. (I) Some water proofers such as alkyl chloro silanes. siliconates amines and
quaternary ammonium snIts, have been used for water proofing of soils.
(it) Coagulating chemicals. such as calcium chloride and ferric chloride, have been used to increase the
electrical attraction and to fonn flocculated structure in on:Ier to improve the permeability of the soil.
(iiI) Dispersant, such as sodium hexa-metaphosphate, are used to increase electrical repulsion and to
cause dispersed structure. The compacted density of the soil is increased.
(iv) Phosphoric acid oombined with a welling agent can be used for slabilisalion of cohesive soils. It
reacts with clay minerals and forms an insoluble aluminum phosphate:
15.7. TIIERMAL S'D\BILISATION
Thermal change causes a marked improvement in the properties of the sOil. Thermal stabilisation is done
tither by heating the soil or by cooling it.
(a) Heating. As the soil is heated, its water content decreases. Electric repulsion between clay particles
is decreased and the strength of the soil is increased. When the temperature is inaeased to more than 100°C,
!he adsorbed water is driven off and the strength is further increased.
384 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
When the soil is beated to temperature of 400°C to 600°C. some irreversible changes occur which make
the soil non-plastic and non-expansive. The clay clods are converted into aggregates.
With further increase in temperature, there is some fusion and vitrification, and a brick-like material is
obtained which can be used as an artificial aggregate for mecbanical slabilisatio~.
This method of stabilisation is quile expensive because of large heat input. It is rarely used in pr3dice.
(b) Freezing. Cooling causes a small l~ of strength of clayey soils due to an increase in interparticle
repulsion. However, if the temperature is rcdured to the freezing point. the pore water freezes and the soil is
stabilised. Ice so fonned ads as a cementing agent.
Water in cobesiooless soils freezes at about O°C. However, in cohesive soils, water may freeze at a much
lower temperature. 'Ibc strength of the soil in~ as more and more water freezes .. This method of
stabilisation is very cosUy. This method is used only in some special cases. It has been successfully used to
solidify soils beneath foundations. The method is commonly used when advancing tunnels or shafts through
loose silt or fine sand.
Freezing may cause serious trouble to adjacent structures if the freezing from penetrates these areas. It
may cause excessive heaving. The method should be used after considering the arove aspects.
15.8. ELECfRICAL STABILISATION
Electrical stabilisation of clayey soils is done by a process known as electro-osmosis. As a direct current
(D.C.) is passed through a clayey soil, pore water migrates to the negative electrode (cathode). It occurs
because of the attraction of positive ions (cations) that are present in water towards cathode. The strength or
the soil is considerably increased due to. removal of water. (For further details of electro-osmosis see chaptet
16).
Electro-osmosis is an expensive method, and is mainly used for drainage of oohesive soils. Incidentally,
the properties of the soil are also improved.
15.9. STABILISATION BY GROUTING
In this method of stabilisation, stabilisers are introduced by injection into the soil. As the grouting is
always done under pressure, the stabilisers with high viscosity are suitable only for soils with high
penneability. This method is not suitable for stabilising clays because of their very low permeability.
The grouting method is casHier as compared with direct blending methods. TIle methlXl is suitable roc
stabilising buried zones of relatively limited extent, such as a pervious stratum below a dam. The method is
used to improve the soil that cannot be disturbed. An area close to an existing building can be stabilised by
this method.
1ypes of Grouting
Depending upon the stabiliser used, grouting techniques can be classified as under:
(1) Cement Groutmg. A cement grout consists of a mixture of cement and water. U the hole drilled ill
the soil is smooth, tbe water-cemenl ratio is kepI low. Sometimes, chemicals are added to grout to increase iI
fluidity SO that it can be injected into the soil.
Cement grouting is quite effective for stabilising rocks with fissures, gravel and coarse sand.
(2) Clay Groulmg. In this metbod, the grout used is composed of a very fme-grained soil (bentonite
clay) and water. The bentonite clay readily adsorbs wafer on its surface. The viscosity, strength and flow
characteristics of the grout can be adjusted according to the site conditions. Clay grouting is suitable itt
stabilising sandy soils.
Sometimes, other chemicals are added to clay grout. Clay cement grout is a mixtwe of clay, bentonite
and cement. Clay-cement grout is a mixture of clay, bentonite and cement. CIay-chemical grout is a
mixture of clay and sodium silicate. It is effective for medium and fine sands.
(3) Chemical Grouting. The grout used consists of a solution of sodium silicate in water, .Jqlown as
water glass. ~e solution cootains both free sodium hydroxide and colloidal silicic acid. An insoluble silia
gel is fonned. ¥ the reaction is slow, calcium chloride is generally added to accelerate the reaction.
SOIL STADILlSA1lON 385
The melhod is suitable for medium and [me sands, However. the effect of chemical grouting is not
permanent.
(4) Chrome-lignin grouting. 100 grout used is made of lignosulphatcs and a hexavalant chromium
compound. When it is combined with an acid. lhe chromium ion changes valence and thereby oxidises the
lignaiulphates inlo a gel.
The method can be used 10 stabilise fine sand and coarse silt.
(5) Polymer grouting. Various polymers have been successfully used in grouting of fine sands and silts,
(6) Bituminous grouting. Sandy and silly soils have been grouted successfully using emulsified asphalt.
Slow-setting emulsions arc generdlly preferred, as these can travel a large distance into the stratum.
15.10. SThllILISA110N BY GEOTEXTILE AND FABRICS
The soil can be stabilised by introducing geotextilcs and fabrics which arc made of synthctic materials,
such as polythclem; polyester, nylon. The gcotextile sheets are manufactured in diITcrent thicknesses ranging
= =
from 10 to 300 mils (1 mil 0.0254 mm 25.4 j,l), The width of the sheet am be up to 10 m. These arc
available in roUs of length uplO about 600 m. Gcotextilcs are manufactured in different pattcrns, such as
woven, nOn-woven, grid, and hybrid. '[he woven gcolextilcs arc made from continuous mono-filament or slit-
film fibers. The don-woven geotextiles are made by the use of thermal or chemica l bonding of continuous
fibres and then pressed through roUers into relatively thin sheets. The grids of geotextilcs arc made from a
sheet of polymer by punChing it and then elongating it in at least one direction. 'Ihc hybrid geotextile arc
nothing but combinations of woven, non-woven and grid.
The geolextilcs are quite permeable. Their permeability is comparable to that of fine sand to coarse sand.
These ar quitc Sleong and durnblc. These arc nOI affected by even hostile soil environmem. The use of
gcotextilcs in geotechnical and coostrudion engincering has increased considerably in the last 2 decades.
Gcotextiles are being increasingly used for the site improvement, soil slabilisation and various other related
works. While selecting geotextiles for a partirular job. due importance should be givcn to the major function
thai the geotextile bas to perform, as explained below,
1. Geotextiles as sepurator.>. Gcolexliles arc commonly used as separators between two layers of soils
having a large difference in particle sizes to prevent migration of small-size particles into the voids of
large-size particles. The main usc as separators is in tbe construction of highways on clayey soils. As the
particle size of granular base .course of the highway is SE
much larger than that of the subgrade (clayey soil in this r BASE COUR
after some time an equilibrium stage is attached. For relaLivc1y thin gcotcxtilc sheet, most of the filtration
occurs within the soil just upstream of the gcotextileJabric. Fig. 15.2 shows the usc of geotcxtilc as filter on
the upstream and downstream of the core of a zoned earth dam. It prevents tbe migration of the particles of
the core inla the sbells.
3. Geotextile as Drain. A drain is used to convey
water safely from one place to the other. As the
goolextiles are pervious, tbey themselves fundion as a
drain. They bave a relatively higher water-carrying
capacity as comP'lred to Ib.:ll of the surrounding soil. .
Drainage occurs either perpendicular to the plane
of the sheet or in-plane of the sheet. In the first case, it
fuoctions primarily as a filter. In the latter case, it ads
us -a water carrier, and a relatively bulky geotextilc or a
composite system of gcolcxtile is required. Fig. 15.3
shows a Iypical application where gcotexti1c is used for
..,
drainage behind a retaining wall. Fig. 15.3.
In all the above applications of the geotexLile, the following advantages are generally adlievcd.
(1) The installation is generally easicr and (aster.
(2) The system has greater stability.
(3) The quantity of soil to be excavated ,md disposed of is less.
(4) '[be load on the structure is less.
4. Geo1extile as Reinforcement ror slnmgthenlng soil. Gcotextilcs have a high tensile strength. '[besc
can be use<.t to increase the load-carrying capaCity of the soil. Geotextiles are used as reinforcement in the
SOil, which is poor in tension but good in oompression. The action is somewhat similar to that of steel bars
in a reinforced concrete slab.
Geotextiles when uscd a<> rcinforcc- ~EOTEXTllE
ment for soils have solved many EMBANKMENT
construction problems on soft and ~
compressible soils. Fig. 15.4 shows the
reinforcement of an embankment with ""'------------------">.
geotcxtiles. The geotextiles/ havc been Fig. 15.4.
used in the construction of unpaved roads over soft soils. These are laid over the soil and the base courre of
the road is placed directly over it. When the vehicles pass over the road, the gcotextile deforms and iLS
strength is mobilised.
5. Geotextlles used a.... reinron:ement in retaining walls. Geotcxtile can be used as reinforcement in the
construction of earth-retaining structures. Gcote:dilcs are used to fonn the facing of the retaining wall as well
as reinforcement. Such retaining walls are also ClUed fabric reinforced retaining walls (Fig. 15.5).
rGRANULAR
,rGEOTEXTllE / / _MATERIAL
-
FORM (a)
(b)
(0)
(d)
Fig. 15.5. Fig. 15.6.
SOIL STABILISATION 387
The following procedure is used for the construction of the fabric-reinforced wall.
(I) First the ground surface is levelled and the first gcotextile sheet of th(·. required width is laid over the
surface such that about 1.5 m to 2 m of the sheet at the wall surface is draped over temporary
wooden form (Fig. 15.6 a).
(ii) Grooular material is placed over the geotextile sheet aod compacted with a roller of suitable weight.
(iii) After compaction, the sheet is folded as shown in Fig. 15.6 (b).
(iv) The second gcotextile sheet is placed over the compaaed layer over the granular material and draped
over the wooden fonn as shown in Fig. 15.6 (c), and the process is repeated.
(v) The front face of the wall is protected by the use of shotcrel.e or gunite. Shotqete is the cement
concrete with a low water content. It is sprayed over the soil surfaoo at a high pressure. Fig. 15.6 (d)
shows the completed wall.
The design of fabric reinforced retaining walls is similar in principle to that of reinforced earth discussed.
)rPE in the following section.
15.11. REINFORCED EAR'm
The soil can be stabilised by introducing thin strips in it. In reinforced earth. thin metal strips or strips of
wire or geosyntbctics are used as reinforcement to reinforce the soil. The essential feature of the reinforced
earth is that friction developi between the reinforcement and
the soil. By mc.·lnS of friction, the soil transfers the forces
built up in the earth mass to the reinforcement. Thus tension
develops in the reinforcement when the soil mass is subjected FAONG
to shear stresses under loads. UNIT
The main application of the reinforced earth is in the
reinforced earth wall. The wall consists of a facing element,
reinforcement and the back fll.l (Fig. 15.7). At the exposed
vertical surfare of the earth mass, facing elements are used to
provide a soct of barrier so that the soil is contained. The
facing units are generally prefabricated from units which are
small and tight so thai they can be easily transported and
placed in position. These are usually made of steel,
aluminum, reinforced concrete or plastic. These should be
of strong enough 10 hold back the back fill. Moreover, these .
,Is should be such that the reinforcement can be easily fastened FIg. 15.7.
to tbem. The facing units generally· require a small plain concrete fooling al the bottom so that they can be
easily built.
The reinforcement is connec:ted to the facing clement and extended back into the backfill zone. The
friction developed in the reinforcement restrains Ihe facing element. First a layer of reinforcement strips is
p1.1ccd al the level ground surface and the backfilling is done with a granular soil. The soil with less than 15
percenl passing No. 200 sieve is used. The entire process of laying strips and backfilling is continued till the
required height of the reinforced earth wall is attained.
Galvanised steel strips arc commonly used as reinforcement. EaCh strip is about 50·100 mm wide and
several metres in length. Tbc thickness is upto 9 mm. Sometimes metal rods, wires and geotextiles are used
as reinforcement.
Design of relnforced earth wall
lbc following assumpcions are made:
1. The backfill is horizontal, without any surcharge.
2. The earth pressure acting on the facing element is the same as that acts on a rigid vertical face
retaining concrete wall.
388 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
3. Rankine's earth pressure theory for active pressure (discussed in chapter 19) holds good.
4. The failure plane makes an angle of (45" + ~) with the horizontal, where, is the angle of shearing
resistance of the backfill material.
Let u.<l consider the design of a retaining wall AB of
height H (Fig. 15.8). When the wall rotates about the point
1"1 '
B
h \
C
p,'yZK. . .. (15.1)
The pressure variation is linear. The total pressure per
1"
H h
h
\b
,
'RANKINE
unit length of the waU is given by h _ ,,~·!t __'~ illr~ PRESSURE
P" _ ~YH2 KA ... (15.2) A
!-.....----i
where K... is Rankine's active earth pressure ooefficienl, G
2
cquallo 1002 (45 0 + ~!2). as discussed in chapter 19. A:lan (45'- T)
I(
Let us divide the height H of the wall into small equal Fig. l:'i.S.
heights h as shown in Fig. 15.8. Let ZI be the depth of ony reinforcing strip i. The total earth pressure acting
on the strip is represented by the area abed of the pressure diagram. The average pressure P; on the strip is
given by
Pi - '1 Z;KA ••• (15.3)
LeI us assume that the reinforcing stri!l) arc placed at intervals of h in the vertical direction. Let the
spacing of the strips in the direction perpendicular to the plane of paper be s. 1'11us one reinforcing strip is
subjected to the earth pressure on the area of (h x s). Therefore, the ten<>ion in the strip i is given by
Ti - PI A - ('1 Z;KAHh )( $) ... (15.4)
Using the same procedure, the tcosion in other reinforcing strips can be determined. Of course, the
tension increases as the depth incre3SCS. 'The sum of the tension in all the reinforcing strips is equal to the
total earth pressure on a length of s. Thus
I 1; - s p. . .. (15.5)
i.l
Length of reinforcing strip. 1bc reinforcing strips should extend well beyond the active zone inlO tbe
backfill to have proper grip length. The length of the strip lying between the wall AD and the failure plane
AC is Dot effective for computing the grip length. The effective grip length lying 00 the right-hand side of the
failure plane AC should be able to provide a suitable factor of safely against failure.
lei us again consider the reinforcing strip at depth Zi . If Fi is the frictional resistance on the reinfordng
strip of length L", then
.. (15.6)
where F, is the fattar of safcty (usually lakcn as 2) and T; is the tension in the strip.
Jf 6 is the angle of surface friction, then
F/ .. (y ZI) tan 6 x (surrace arca of strip)
The surface area of the strip of width b Is taken equal to (2 bLc) as the resistance develOps on both faces
of the strip.
Thus F, _ (y Z,) tnn b (2 b L.) ... (15.7)
Substituting the value of F; in Eq. 15.6 and simplifying
L .. ~ (15.8)
.. 2'1Z;btan6
SOIL STABILISATION 38.
Eqs. 15.7 and 15.8 are applicable 10 rectangular strips. If round bars are used,
L.~ ... [15.8 (a)]
~ 1tdyZ;tanb
where d is the diameter of the bar.
If continuous reinforcing sheets are used,
L-~
~ 2yZ tanb
... [15.8 (b)]
j
The angle of surface fridion b depends upon the density and type of the backfill material. It also depends
upon Ihe roughness of the reinforcing Sirip. 1be value of b usually varies between 0.5 ., and .. where 4' is
the angle of shearing resistance of the backfill material
A,.I'!..F,Ti
t. t.
A,. F,(yZiK.,h,
or ... (15.9)
t.
Eqs. 15.8 and 15.9 give different lengths L", and the aoss--sectional areas A, for different reinforcing
strips. For convenience, it is the usual practice 10 adopt the same length and the cross-section for aU the
reinforcing strips. Thus the value oorresponding to the maximum tension at the base of wall is used for all
strips. Hence Zj - fI for all strips.
PROBLEMS
A. Descriptive and Objective type Questions
IS.1. What is soil smbilisntion ? Whnt are its uses ?
IS.2. What is mechanical stabilisation ? What are the raaors that aerea the mechanical stability of a mixed soil?
IS.3. Dc:;cribe in brief cement stabilisation. What arc the factors that affect the smbility or soil cement? Discuss
construaion methods.
J5.4. Discuss the use or lime in Slooilisation or soils. What arc the chemical and physical manges which take place
in lime stabilisation?
15.5. Write a short note on bituminous stabilisnlion. What are different types or soil bitumen? Dcsaibe the raaors
affecting bituminous stobilisation.
IS.6. What are different types of chemicals used in stabilisation of soils?
IS.7. Write short notes on:
(I) Thennal stabilisntion (u) Electrical stabilisntioo.
(iil) Grouting (iv) Geotextile.
15.8. Write ~hethcr the ronewing stalements art true or false:
(a) Mechanical stabilisation requires addition of chemicals to soils.
(b) Cement stabilisation is more suitable for fine grained soils than coarse-grained soils.
(e) Lime Slabilisalion is suitable for coarse-grained soils.
(d) Bituminous Stabilisation can be used for both coarse- grained and fine-grained soils.
(e) The effect or lignin as a SUlbilisntion agent is permrment.
(j) Thermnl stabilisation Is quile inexpensive.
(g) Elcctro-osmosis is used ror stabilising highly cohesive soils.
(h) A ~olextile is embedded in the soil to give it stobility.
(.) Cement groutIng can be used for clayey soils. [Ans. True, (d), (g). (II)}
390 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
16.1. INTRODUCTION
Drainage is the process of removal of gravity water (free water) from a soil mass in order to keep it in
a stable condition. Drainage may be classified into two categories: (I) Surface Drainage, (iI) Sub-surface
Drainage. Surface drainage is the method of collection and divclSion of the surface run off. Subsurface
drainage oonsists of collection and dis[XlS81 of the ground water. Subsurface drainage is also known as
dewatering. 11 is process of removal of water (rom a foundation pit when it is situated below the ground water
table or when it is surrounded by a colIer dam.
The purpose of dewatering is to keep the excavation dry so that concreting can be done. Dewatering is
temporary if it is done al the lime of construction. It is followed by restoration to its original water table after
tbe structure has been compleled. Pennanenl dewatering is required for removing subsurface gmvilationai
water throughout the life of structure. It may be necessary to keep the water away from the structure to ched:
dampness or other ill effects.
Subsurface drainage not only facilitates construction, but it also helps in improving the properties of the
soil. This helps in the stabilisation of soils. In case of fine·grained soils, although the quantity of water
removed is not much, improvement in the properties of the soil is significant. Subsurface drainage also helps
in reducing the hydrostatic pressure acting on the base of the structure.
The method of sub-surface drainage to be adopted at a particular site would depend upon the
characteristics of thc soil, the pa;ition of the water table and the time period the system has to operatc.
Various methods of sub-surface drainage are discussed in this chapter. Theory of wells is alSo dealt with. The
methods of surface drainage are outside the scope of this te"t.
16.2. INTERCEPTOR DITCIIES
Intcrceptor ditches arc used (or excavation of limited depth made in a coarse soil. These ditches are
constructed around the area to be dewatered. 1be ditches must penetrate deeper than the level of the work
area (Fig. 16.1). At suitable locations, sump pits are constructed along the ditch for installation of the pump
to remove the water collected.
Fig. 16.1.llIleroepcocOitcb.
392 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERINQ
If the soil is fine sand of low permeability, boiling may occur in sumps and ditches. This may be
prevented by placing niter layers on the sides and at the bottom of thc ditches and sumps.
Interceptor ditches are mail economical for carrying away the water which emerges 011 thc slopes and
near the botlom of the foundation pit. The method can be effectively used for rock fonnalion, gravel and
coarse sand. In fine sands and sillS, there may be sloughing, erosion or quick COIldiliorlS. For such soils, the
melhod is confined 10 a depth of 1 102m.
16.3. SlNGLE-STAGE WELL POINTS
A well point is a perforated pipe about I m long and 5 em in diameter. 1be perforations are covered with
a screen to prevent clogging. A jetting nozzle is provided at its lower end. A conical steel drive point is flXed
to the lower end of the well point to facilitate instaUntion (Fig. 16.2). A ball valve is also provided. near tbe
lower end which permits 00'0'1 of water only in the downward
direction during installation. The well point is wnnccted to
the bottom of the riser pipe of the same diameter. Risers of
different well points are connected to a horizontal pipe of 15
to 30 em diameter, known as header. The header is connected
to a specially designed pumping unit. Tbc spacing of the well
points depends upon the type of soil and the depth of water.
Generally. it varies between 1 to J m.
Well points can be installed in a drilled hole, but
generally these are installed by jelling. Water is pumped
through the riser pipe in the downward direction. As it
discbarges through the nozzle, it displaces the soil below the
tip. Jelting is continued till the required pcnetralion of the tip
is achieved. The advantage of installation by jelling is that
the water under pressure w~hes away soil fines near the. tip ,.,
and lca~es a relatively coarse material. It forms a natural Ball volve
filter around !be tip. The hole formed ncar the tip is filled
with coarse sand. poiot
After the well points have been installed around the area (a) Elevation. (b) Sec!ion
to be dew3tered, pumping is started, Each well point lowers FIg. 16.2. Well POInts.
the water table around it and fonns a small cone of depression (Fig. 16.3). Various cones of depression join,
and a common drawdown curve is oblained. The water table is thus lowered (Fig. 16.4.)
Well points are suitable for lowering !be water table by 5 to 6 m in soils wilh a coefficient of
penncabilily between I x 1~ to 1 )( 10-6 m/sec. 1he saea1 normally provided wilh (be well points can
prevent medium sand and roarse sand ·from entering the well point. If the stratum to be dewatered consists of
PIPE
~--,. ~sz.
1t is essential to oontinue pumping once it bas
been started until the excavation is complete. If it is
stopped in between, it may prove to be disastrous.
_ _ _ __ __
Tr~l'ICh-z"
~
_ ___
393
~.!.:_
consolidation takes place. It makes the soil stiff. However, the process is slow and it may take severol weeks
for the soil to become stiff enough for carrying Qui the excavation work.
16.6. SIIALLOW WELL SYSTEM
In a shallow well system, a hole of about 30 an diameter is first bored into the ground, using a casing.
A filler lube of about 15 em diameter, covered with a special wire mesh, is then lowered into the casing. 1be
casing is gradually withdrawn and suitable filler material is added in to the annular space between the casing
and the Ulter lube. 'Ibis forms a filter well. A suction pipe is lowered into the filler well. A number of such
wells may be installed. The sud ion pipes of all these wells are connected to a rommon header A pumping
unit is attached [0 the header. As the pumping is stancd. the drainage OCOJI"S. TIle suction lift of ~hc well
should not be more than 10 m for its proper working.
Shallow well system is rarely used in practice. Well-point systems, as discussed earlier, are more
economical uplO a depth of 10 m than a shallow well system.
16.7. DEEP WELL SYSTEM
A deep well is about 30 10 60 an in diameter, bored to a depth of 15 to 30 m . It is provided with a
casing which is perforated ooe in the pervious zones penetrated. Coarse filter mnterial is placed in the annular
space between the casing and the walls of the hole. The spacing of deep wells varies betwccn 10 to 30 m,
depending upon thee area to be dcwatered and the IQCalion of the water table.
A submersibJe pump is placed inside the casing near the bottom. The pump is driven by a motor mounted
on the top of the casing through a vertica"'shaft (Fig. 16.7). However, if the motor is submersible, it can be
directly attached to the pump. As the
pump is placed al the bottom, there is
no restriction on the height to which the
water can be lifted, unlike a shallow
weU system.
Deep wells are located on the outer
periphery of tbe area to be excavated. A
row of well point is also insLalled at the
toe of side slopes of the deep excava-
tion to intercept seepage between the
deep wells and to prevent sloughing of
the slopes near the toe. Fig. 16.7. Deep Well System.
As in the case of well point systems, pumping once started must be continued until the entire excavation
work is completed. If the pumping is stopped in between, tbere would be a rapid development of hydrostatic
and sccp3ge pressure in the excavation, which may prove 10 be disastrous.
16.8. HORIZONTAL WELLS
Horizontal wells of about 5 cm to 8 em diameter have been used for drainage of hill sides. These wells
are drilled ioto the hill at a slightly upward slope. A perforated casing is installed in the well to collect and
dischm-gc water. Horizontal wells have been successfully installed for horizontal length of 60 m.
Large horizontal tunnels have also been successfully used to tap deep aquifers beneath hill sides.
A combined system of vertical wells and horizontal wells can be used to drain stratified soil de~its. In
tbis system, the vertkaJ. weUs intercept the aquifer and discharge the water into the borizontal well. 100 water
collected by the horizontal well is discharged at a suitable point.
16.9. ELECTRO·OSMOSIS
Elcctro-osmos~ is a method of drainage of cohesive soils in which a direct ament (D.C.) is used. When
a direct current is pa<>sed through a saturaU:d soil between a positive electrode (anode) and a negative
electrode (cathode), pore water migrales 10 the cathode. The cathode is a well point which collects the water
drained from the soil. The water oollected is discharged. as in a conventional weU-point system.
DRAINAGE, DEWATERlNG AND WEllS 39'
The phenomenon of electro-osmosis can be explained witb the belp of the electrical double layer. Cations
(positive ions) are formed in pore water when the dissolved minerals go into solution. 1besc cations move
tow"ards the negatively charged surface of clay mineral<; to satisfy the elecuical charge. As the water
molecules ad as dipoles, the cations also attract the negative end of dipoles. When the cations move to the
cattxxlc, they take with them the attached water molecules. In fact, tbe entire outer part of the diffuse double
layer which is loosely adsorbed to the
:i1ne.~~~estheg~rshm~pa~o:f u! PUMP__(-)
layer about 10 A O thick remains
attached to the particle.
Fig. 16.8 shows an installation in
wbich electro-osmosis is used. Anodes
are in the fonn of steel rods located
neaf the toe of the slope of the
excavation. Cathodes arc in the Conn of RCIN OF WElLS ROW OF WEllS
perforated pipes, resembling well ( CATHODES) (CATHOOES)
points, installed in the soil mass about
Fig. 16.8.
4 to 5 m away from the slope of the
cut. The electrodes are so arranged that the natural direction of now of water is reversed and is directed away
from the excavation. This arrangement is required 10 prevent sloughing of the slopes. In many cases, mere
reversing of the direction of flow helps in inaeasing the stability of the slope even if there is no significant
decrease in the water contcnt of the soil.
The system requires about 20 to .30 amperes of electricity per well at a voltage of 40 to lBO. The
consumption of energy is between OS to 10 kWhlm] of soil drained. Because of specialised equipment and
high electricity consumption, drainage by electro-osmosis is expensive compared with other methods. 'The
method should be used only in exceptional cases when other methods cannot be used. It is normally used 10
drain water in a cohesive soil of low perme.'lbility (k _ 1 x 10-5 to 1 )( 10-3 m/sec).
Electro·a;.mosis alsQ helps in increasing the shear strength of the cohesive soil.
16.10. PERMANENT DRAINAGE AFfER CONSTRUCI10N
When a usable part of a suuaure Lies below the ground water table, it should be made water proof.
Suitable construction techniques should be used. As far as JXlSSible, basement walls and floor should be cast
monolithically. If the joints are provided, these should be as few as possible. All joints shall be provided with
water stops.
Permanent drainage is done by providing foundation drains and blanket drains, as explained below.
(0) FOUndatJOD Drains. When ground water
flows towards the struaure, provisions are made to
carry the water away from the foundation. Fig. 16.9 G. S.
shows an arrangement of foundation drain in which
perforated drains are used. The drains are
BACKFIll
surrounded by a filter. The drains should be placed
0B'!l!~"!. _W~T.... _
at an elevation higher than the bottom of the
IIA:;DEHT
footing to avoid the possibility of carrying away
fine soil particles.
The water collected in the drain is disposed of
by gravity to a nearby storm drain, nullah or any
other drainage facility located at a lower level. If
Fig. 16.9. Foundalion Drain.
no such drain is available, the water is collected in
a specially COOSlructcd sump well and pumped out. The drainage system should be provided with some
periodical cleaning arrangement.
396 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Foundation drains arc eITective when the depth below the water table is not too much. When the water
table is very high, suitable interceptor drains are installed at some distance away from the structure to lower
the water table in stages.
(b) 8lanket Drains. The blanket
crusbed
pervious stones. It provides
drainage path. Thea bighly
water \~~~~~~~~~~~~~~F~LO;OR
coming out of the blanket drain is
collected and drained away by gravity.
Alternatively, it can be oolJeded in a
COARS£ SAND
sump pit and then pumped out.
Blanket drains are quite effective
Fig. 16.10. Blankel Drain.
in reducing the uplift pressure on the
floor. 'llle possibility of upward seepage flow lhroogh the basement floor is also considerably reduced.
16.11. DESIGN OF DEWATERING SYSTEMS
The design of a dewatering system consists of the determination of the number, size, spacing and
penetration of the well points or wells. 'lllese parameters depend upon the expected rate of discharge, the type
of the soil and the drawdown in the wells. Collectors and pumps should have sufficient capacity to serve the
intended purpose.
It is extremely important to establish a fundamental relationship between the discharge and the
corresponding drawdown. 1be rale of discharge is computed using Darcy's law. It is assumed that the stratum
is homogeneous and isotropic. In case the stratum is anisotropic, it is assumed to have been transformed into
an equivalent isotropic stratum using the method di.scussed in Chapter 9. It is furthcr assumed that the flow
is continuous and steady. Equations for the rate of discharge and COI1'CSpOOding drawdown for different types
of wclls are developed in the following sections.
The well may be either gravity well or artesian well. A gravity well penetrates a homogeneous. pervious
stratum aquifcr in which the water table is located. An artesian well penetrates a homogeneous, pervious
stratum which is bounded by impervious strata above and below and in which the piezometric surface is
above the top of the pervious stratum. A combined artesian· gravity type of Dow occurs when the water table
is an artesian well falls below the lOp of the pervious stratum.
The equations developed may also be used for the detennination of discharge from wells for irrigation
and other purposes. However such wells are CODStructed for supplying water and not drainage. In this text,
the use of wells for dntinage is of main oono::m.
these assumptions, the hydraulic gradient at any point is taken equal to the tangent of the angle with the
boriwntal which the drawdown curve makes at that point. 1l is further assumed that the stratum is isotropic,
homogeneous nod Darcy's low is applicable.
Lei us oonsider the flow through a vertical section of height z located at a distance x from the slot. From
Darcy's law, "'-
q .kiA
[H'~"']_ ~
q_k(H2~h2). y ... (16.1)
The drawdown level at a vertical section at a distance x can be ootained from Eq. (b).
I]" - fy
["2, [xt
As the flow at the face of the slot is almost vertical, Dupuit Fordlheimcr assumption is not strictly valid.
The actual drawdown level is given by the following equation
q_k(~)(IXY)
dz _..!L <Lx
klY
Integrating and substituting the boundary conditions.
(H - h) _ ty- (L - 0)
The drawdown level at a distance x from lhe slot can be obtained from Eq. (c), as
(H - z) - ty- (L - x)
(c) Artesian-Gravity Flow. Fig. 16.13 shows an artesian gravity type of flow. The flow ncar the slot is
gravity flow, whereas that away from the slot is artesian flow. Let Lv be the distance of the point al which
Ml1!I'.o.~.
Tt
1
Fig. 16.13. Artesian.Gravity Flow in a. Slot
the flow changes from artesian flow to gravity flow. The distance La can be determined by equating the
discharge in the gravity flow portion to thaI in the artesian Dow portion.
From Eqs. 16.1 and 16.5,
k(1- h') y _ kly(H - I)
2LG L -La
k(t' _ h')
From Eq. 16.1. q. .Y
2LG
Substituting the value of LG from Eq. 16.7,
z- vi:;. (p - h 2
) + h2 ... (16.9)
or ... (16.10)
~;;=1
1. 1 ~L~l,,," ;;;;""""";,, ,")}
q,'
[
0.73 + 0.27 (11 11
- h) l!L , ,
Fig. 16.14. Partially Penetrating Slot (Gravity Row).
The symbols are given in Fig. 16.14. As before, y is the length of the slot perpendicular 10 the plane of
paper.
400 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Eqs. (16.11) and (16.12) arc valid for the ratio L/H equal to or greater than 3. It may be noted that hD is
greater than h.
(b) Artesian now. Fig. 16.15 shows artesian flow in a partially penetrating slot of depth W. The
TT W H
ill ~L~l
; J,;::;)';;;;; ;:) >; ;;)')'J;;n·;;> )));on:;;
Fig. 16.15. Partially Penetrating Slot (Atn::sian Flow.)
kry(H-h)
qp-~ ••. (16.13)
where E... is the extra-length factor, which depe0d9 upon the rntio WIt and LII (Fig. 16.16)•
0 . -
, t·o.,~
.'
/<-t o
-
:JL
t
.
0
/'
"f--
/
,. o.oo~ 00\ 0., .. .so
E"'H~
>0
"
Fig- 16.16. Variation or Extra-Length Factor.
The maximum residual head ho on the downstream of tbe slot is given by
hD _ E. (H - h) + h
... (16.14)
L + E...
~ in the case of gravity flow,the head hD is greater than that at the slot.
16.14. DISCHARGE IN A SWT FROM DOTll SIDES
tn most of the practical cao;es, the flow towards a slot is from both sfdes and not only from one side. The
equations for discharge from a slot from both sides are given below.
DRAINAGE, DEWXJ'ERING AND wnll.S 401
(a) Fully Penetrllting Slot. The discharge from a fully penetrating slOl from l.oth sides is twice tile
discharge from one side. Equations developed in Sect. 16.12 can be used.
For gravity flow, Eq. 16.1 gives the discharge from one side. Therefore,. the disch.'1rgc from both sides is
given by
... (J6.J5)
For artesian flow, Eq. 16.5 can be used to give the discharge from both sides as
q ., 2ktvri - h) .. .(16.11l)
(b) Partially Penetrntlng SloL Chapman (1956) gave the following equfltiOns for the discharge of a
partially penetrating slot from both sides.
where }. is a factor, which depends upon the ratio (WIt), a'> given in Fig. 16. 17,
W = depth of slot in the aquifer, and t = thickness of aquifer.
All other notations are the same as in Sect.
16.12.
0
,
----
16.15. WELL IIYDRAULICS
Wells and commonly used for the dewatering
of ground water. A well is a circular hole of a
, //'
1
V
suitable diameter made in an aquifer. As the
pumping is done from the well, a cone of O., /
depression is created aU around the well. The o. /
equations for discharge can be developed using (.Y!.) •
Darcy's law. However. the main usc of wells is to I' O.6 /
supply water for drinking, irrigation and other o.1 /
purposes. Ground water is an important source of ,I r
water. It i.. exploited through open wells, tube
wells, springs and horizontnl galleries. 9
Ground water is the water that falls as 0
precipitation and then infiltrates the soil below the
water table. The ground water reservoir is formed
'"
).--
I.S
lhe total volume of water in an aquifer depends upon porosity. However, a high value of pom;ily docs
not necessarily indicate that the aquifer will yield large volume of water. '1l1e qu.'lntity of water which can be
obtained from the aquifer is that which flows under gravity. Therefore, it depends upon the penncability and
hence specific yield. The specific yield is always less than porosity. It is sometimes called effective porosity.
Specific yield of most of the aquifers, such as sand and gravel, vllries between 15 to 30%.
(2) Specific Uetentlon. The specific retention (SR) of an aquifer is the ratio of the water retained in the
soil after drainage to the total volume of aquifer. It is also expressed as a percentage. Thus
S .. Volumeofwatcrretain~ x 100
R Total volume of the aqUIfer
Y,,,,
SH." V x 100 ... (16.20)
When a saturatc<l mass of soil is subjccted to drainage, some water is not drained 35 it is retained in the
pores of the ~i1 due to molecular and capillary forces. lhe amount of water retained depends on grain size,
grain shape and distribulion of pores. 'Ibe specific retention is high for soils with small pores, such as Clayey
soils.
For a saturated soil, the total volume of waler V... is equal 10 porosity (n) limes the total volume of the
aquifer (Y). Thus V... .. n V
BUI V... • V...,.. + Vo.R
V... V...y + Wo.R
Therefore n.-y_--y--
n .. Sy + SR ... (16.21)
Thus, the porosity of the stratum is equal to the sum of the specific yield and the specific retention.
(3) Stornge Coefficient. The storage coefficient is defined as the volume of water released (or stored) by
an aquifer per unit surface area per unit change in the com ponent of the head normal to the surface.
In an unconfined aquifer, the storage coefficient corresponds to its specific yield. The storage coefficient for
a unilthickncss of the aquifer is equal 10 the specific yield, provided gravity drainage is complete. In a confined
aquifer, the storage coefficient alSo depends upon the compression of the aquifer and the expansion of the
contained water when the pressure is dccre.'lsed during pumping. Typical values of storage coefficient fOf
unconfined aquifers range from 0.02 to 0.03 and that for confined aquifers range from 0.00005 to 0.005. The
actual values can be obtained from the pumping oul tests.
(4) Transmissibility Coefficient. The coefficient of transmissibility (1) is defined as the rate of flow of
water through a vertical strip of aquifer of unit width and extending to the fully satur.llion height under oo:t
hydraulic gradient. Obviously, the cocITicient of transmissibility in a confined aquifer is equal to the product
of the coefficient of permeability and the thickness I of aquifer.
Thus T .. k x I ... (16.22)
lIS units arc m1Jsec or cm1/scc.
The coef.ficient of transmissibility of a welhn an unconfined aquifer is equal to the product of tbe
coefficient of permeability and the average saturated thickness t". lous
DRAINAGE, DEWATERING AND WELLS ."
T _ k x 10 •. (16.23)
when t,," (/1 + h)12 where H is the height of the original water table abov..; the impervious stratum
and h is the beight of water in the well after drawdown.
16.17. DISCHARGE FROM A FUlLY I'ENETRATING WELL
The water table is initially horizontal. When the pumping is stane<!, the water table is lowered near the
well and a cone of depression is fonned. The drawdown at any point is equal to the ve{tical intercept between
the original water level and the depressed water level. The flow may be gravity, or artesian, or artesian-
gravity. The equations for discharge for all these types of flows are given below.
(1) Gravity Flow. Gravity flow occurs in an unconfined aquifer (see Fig. 8.8). This type of flow has
already been discussed in chapter 8 when describing the methods for the dctennination of the coeCricienl of
pe.rmeabilily in the field. However, for completeness of the treatment, the equatiOM are repeated here.
l'tk{H2 _ A2)
Eq. 8.23 can be written as q .. io&e(Rlr...) ... (16.24)
where H = depth of aquifer measured below the wilier table, h = depth of water in the well,
R "" radius of influence, r... = radius of well, k "" coefficient of permeability.
The elevation z of the drawdown curve at a radial distance r from tbe well can be computed from the
equation
? .. qlo~~ /r...) + h2 ... (16.25)
The drawdown at a radial disl.'lnce r can be computed from the equation
P. S.: PIE20METRIC
SURFACE
~
z - 1og.,(Rlr...) log.,(rl r ...) + V',.. - L.!!L
10g.,(Rl r...) log., (Rl r) ... (1635)
The radial dist.1ncc Ro of the point at which the flow ehanges from artesian type 10 gravity type is given by
10. (R) (il - "')log. (R) + 21 (N - I) log. (r .) ... (16.36)
~ G - 2IH_I _ h7
Eqs. 16.34 and 16.35 have been based on the assumption that the head al the well is at the same
elevation as the water surface in the well. This is not true if the drawdown is relatively IClrge. For such cases,
the head at and in the close vicinity of the well is greater than the water depth in the well.
16.18. mSCllARGE FROM A PARTIALLY I)ENETRATING WELL
The discharge from a panial1y penetrating well depends upon the depth of penetration in the aquifer. Like
a fully penetrating well, the flow can be gr.avity flow or artesian flow.
DRAINAGE, DEWATERING AND WElL') 405
(a) Gravity Flow. Fig. 16.19 shows a partjaUy penetrating well with gravity flow. The discharge is given
by the foUowing equation.
where fly/ is the height of the draw down curve at a distance of 211 from the well and W = depth of
penetration of Ihe well in Ihe aquifer. The other notations are Ihe same as in the preocding sections.
(b) Artesian Flow. Fig. 16.20 shows 3 partially penelrating well with artesian flow. The discharge is
given by the following equation.
C • .'!'( (1 + 7 ~
2W
cos • W
2t
x 180 )
It
... 16.39)
2Jtk1(H - h)
... (16.40)
q. ( Fi' )
lo~ Br""
where R is the radius of i~fluence (R > > B).
All other notations are the same m before.
(i.) Three wells in the same line. If there are three identical wells in the same line having a spacing of
B, tbe discharge through the two end wells is given by
2dl (11 - h) log. (Blr.)
(ii,) Three wells ronning a lriangle. If there are three identical wells located at tbe apexes ~[ an
equilatcml triangle, with side B, the discharge from each well is given by
q • 2. k1 (11 - h) ... (16.43)
log. (R'IB'r.)
(b) GravIty Wells. The discharge from gravity wells caD be obtained by using the equatiOflS given above
[or the artesian wells and making the following substitution :
(/-Pl2t) for 11 and (h 2/2J) for h.
For example, the discharge from ench well when the two wells are spaced B apart is obtained from Eq.
16.40 as
q. 2xkJ(H2/2J _ h2l2t)
10g.(Fi' /Dr.)
xlc(H2 _ hZ)
.. . (16.44)
q - log..(R2/r""B)
DRAINAGE, DEWATERING AND WEUS
''''
16.20. SI'IlERlCAL FLOW IN A WELL
The equations developed in the preceding sections arc for radial flow. Fig. 16.22 shows a well which
penetrates up(Q the top surface of the confmed aquifer. 1be flow in the well is spherical. In this case, the
,...,.,~_ _~G~.~
,} I I};
Fig. 16.22. SphcriOit ROII/.
1
equations given in the preceding secLions do not apply a'i the Oow is not radial and the Dupuit assumption is
not vaUd.
The discharge in the case of spherical flow is given by
q - Z.b.(I1- h) ... (16.45)
where r", is the radius of the well.
The discharge in case of spherical flow is mudl less as rompared 10 lhal in a fully penetrating well. As
the weUs with spherical flow arc not very effective, thcsc arc rarely used in practice.
I
or mechanically.
Safe yield of an open well is the rate of flow 31 which the water percolates into the well under safe
maximum worldng head. As the water is pumped out, the water level in the well falls. The difference between
tbe water level in the well and the original water table is the depression head. The critical depression head
occurs when the velocity is so high as to dislodge the
soil particles. The safe maximum WOrk.ing bead is usually
taken as ooe- third of the critical depression head.
; MV;C"" WIO
1--=-":-":--- -------i£J<f"'VXW"
Ji...;.-:.__--
The yield from an open well is determined by the H ............ .,.., ....
follOWing two methods: (1) Pumpmg test at constant .... ______ /'
level, (2) ReaJperalion test.
1. Constant level Pumping tesL In this method, the
water level in the well is depressed by pumping. out
water till the maximum safe depression head is reached.
The mte of pumping is so adjusted that the water level in Fig. 16.23. Pumping TCSI.
SOIL MECUANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
the well remains constant (Fig 16.23). AI that stage. the rate of withdrawal is equal to the pcroolalion rate.
TI1C rate of pumping per hour gives the yield per hour of the well al a particular drawdown.
Knowing the values of Ill> 1i2 and 1~ the value of the specific yield (KIA) can be romputed. Once tbe
value of K/A has been detenninoo, the discharge can be obtained (rom Eq. 16.46 foc any other depression
head Ii as
q - (KIA) )( A )( H
Although recupcmtion test is not as reliable as the oonstant level pumping method, it is used when it is
difficult to regulate the ffite of pumping 10 attain a constant water level in the well required in the constant
level pumping Icst. .
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Illustrative Example J6.1. A slot is made in an uncon[uted aquifer to drain water: The flow to the slot
occurs from both sides. If the water table is at a height of 12 m above the base and the drawdown is 4 m,
find the dischflrge per metre length, assuming that die distance of the slot from both sides is 100 m. Take
k _ 5 x lO"""mlscc.
k (IP~ h
2
Solution. From Eq. 16.15. q _ ) • Y
2
----roo--)(
... 5 )( 10-' (122 _ 8 ) 1 - 4 )( 10-< m', / sec
Illustrative Exumple 16.2. A welf flllly penetrates an unconfined aquifer hQl'ing a saturated thickness of
10 m. If die radius of the well is 10 cm, and the drawdown is 3 In, determine die dischflrge. Take the radius
of influence as 300 m and the coefficient of permeability as 8 x 10""" mlsec.
1tkVP_h2)
Solution. From Eq. 16.24, q - log., (Rl r...)
or
U1ustnltive Example 16.3, Calculate the discharge from a fully- penetrating tube well, having the
following particlIlar :
(I) Thickness of confuted aquifer = 25 m
(Ii) Tube well diameter = 30 em
(iil) Drawdown =3m
(iv) Radius of influence = 150 m
(v) CoefJicient of permeability :: 30 m/day
RI T.., .. 12332.58
or T.., .. 300/ 12332.58 .. 0.0243 m
illustrative Example 16.5. A fully penetrating well draws water from a confined aquifer of thickness 12 m
and o{ permeability 1.5 x 10-J mlsec. If the discharge is 0.03 mJ/sec, compute the drawdown at 30 m from
the centre 0/ the well. Take RI T.., = 2000.
SoIuUon. Eq. 16.31, 1/ - z .. ~ log., (Rl r ...)
Fig. E-l6.6.
or
_ K )( 5 )( 10'" (2 )( 12 )( 15 - 122 - g2) _ 00279 3/
q log. (300/0.15) • m sec.
Dlustratlve Example 16.7. A well 25 em diameter partially ~etrate.s a confined aquifer by 9 m. 1/ the
totallhicJcness of the aquifer is 20 m aNI the disduJrge is 0.04 mJ/sec, compute drawdown at the well. Take
R = 200 m, and k =4 x 10-; m/see.
Solution. From Eq. 16.38, qp _ 2 X~i7;;T~) C
c • ~t (I + 7~
2W
oos x W • 180)
2t :rt
• .2..(1 +
20
7~
2x9
cos:rt 9 x 180) .. 0.649.
2x20xx
X
lllustl'1llive Example 16.9. Determine the discharge from a well with spheriaJI flow and having the
following partiaJlars :
(i) ThicJou!3S of confmed ~uifer = 10 m
(il) Radius 0/ influe"ce = 100 m
(iii) Radius 0/ well = 0.1 m
(iv) Coefficient of permeability '"' 1 )( 10-4 m/sec
(v) Drawdown =J m
What would have been the discharge if the well bad penetrated the confined aquifer fully ?
Solution, From Eq. 16.45, q. 2 x kr. (H - h)
or q .. 2n)( to.... )( (0.1 )( 3) .. 1.88 x 10.... m)/sec
If the well had penetrated fully, the discharge would have been given by Eq. 16.29 as,
2nkt (H - h)
q • log. (100/0.1)
2lt )( l~ )( to )( 3 (f"" )
q .. ~(lOO/O.I) .. 1:1.29 x 1 m /sec
The ratio of the discharge in spherical flow to that In a fully penetrating well is given by
412 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
PROBLEMS
A Numerical
16.1. A slOi is made in a confined aquifer 2 m thick to drain water. 111e flow to the SIOl ou:urs from both sides. If
the Wllier U1ble is III II height of 10 m above the base and the dmwdown is 3 m, find the dischorge per metre
length. The disUlnce of the slot from both sides is 120 m. 'HIke k = 4 )( 10-4 mJscc. fAns. 0.04 lit/Scc]
16.2. A 30 em di~ler well penetrates 20 m bcloYl the waler table. The draw down al 100 m is 0 .50 m and that at
30 m is 1.10 m. If the discharge is 100 litJsec, determine the transmissibility of the aquifer.
2
[An.... 0.032 m /sec.\
16.3. A well penetrates an unoonfined aquifer having a saturated depth of 90 m. When the drawdown is 10 m, the
discharge is 4 lit/sec. Determine the discharge when the drawdown is 15 m. Take the radius of influence the
same in both the cases. [Ans.. 5.82 lit/sec]
16.4. A well is sunk through a layer of sand of thickness 12 m lying over an impervious stratum. When the water was
3
pumped at a constant rate of 5 m /minute, the Wllter levels in the observation wells situDled at a distance of 15
m and 30 m from the pump well wen: 2.9 m and 2.7 m below the ground Wllter table, respectively. Find the
permeability of the sand. fAns.. 5 mmJscc]
16.5. Find the coefficient of permcubllily of an unoonfined aquifer of thickness 18 m when a well of diameter 20 ern
discharges 50 lit/sec under a depression head of 45 rn. Take the radius of influence as 300 m.
[Ails.. 9 x 10-4 mJsec]
16.6. calculate the discbDrge through II fully penetrating tube wcll of the following ptlrticulnfS :
(I) Thickness of confined aquifer = 25m
(il) Diameter of the well = 25 an
(iiI) Drnwdown =3 m
(iv) Coefficient of permeability = 0.29 x 10-3 m/sec.
(v) Radius of influence = 200 m
lAns. 18.51 lit!sec.j
16.1. A fully penetrating well of diameter 30 em draws water from a confined aquifer of permeability 2 )( to"3 m/sec
nnd thickness 12 m. If the steady disc;:harge is 0.03 cumecs, compute the drowdown at 10 m from the centre of
the well. Take radius of infl uence as 500 m. tAns. 0.178 m]
DRAINAGE!, DEWATERING AND WEUS 413
16.8. A fUlly penetrnting well of diameter 30 cm draws water from a 25 m Ihick mnfined aquifer. The steady state
drawdown at 10 m and 50 m were observed 10 25 m and 0.50 rcspea ively. D:tennine the steady-stage
3
discharge. Thke k = 1.5 x 10- m/SOC. [Ans. 29.261il/sCC]
16.9. Design an open well in a fine sandy soil (specific yield = 05 m3/OOur/m1 under unit depression hr.ad) to yield
0.004 cumecs under a depression head of 3 m. [Ans. 3.5 m dial
16.10. calculate Ihe overage yield of an open well of 3 m diameter from the recupeltltion test wherein the water level
is depressed to the extent of 2.0 m and recuperation rate is 1.0 m per hour. 1be allowable depression head in
the well in 3 m. [Ans. 14.69 mlftlt]
(l)5 In (b) 10 m
(el 15 m (tf) 20 m
EARTH-RETAINING STRUCTURES
AND
FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
17
Site Investigations
17.1. INTRODUenON
Site investigations or subsurface explorations are done for obtaining the infonnalion about subsurface
conditions at the site of proposed construction. Site investigations in one form or the other is generally
required for every big engineering project. Information about the surface and sub-surface features is essential
for the design of structures and for planning construction tcchniques.
Site investigations consist of determining the profile of the natural soil deposits at the site, laking the soil
samples and detcnniniog the engineering propenies of the soils. It also includes in-silu tcsting of the soils.
Site investigations arc general1y done to obtain the information that is useful for one or morc of the
following purposes.
(I) To select the type and depth of foundation for 11 given structure.
(2) To determine the bearing capacity of the soil.
(3) To estimate the probable maximum and differential settlements.
(4) To establish the grouncl water level and to determine the properties of water.
(5) To predict the i..1tcral earth pressure against retaining walls and abutments.
(6) To select suitable construction techniques.
(7) To predict and to solve potential foundation problems.
(8) 1b ascertain the suitability of the soil as a construction material.
(9) To investigate the safety of the existing structures and to suggest the remedial measures.
The relevant information is obtained by drilling holcs, taking the soil samples and determining the index
and engineering properties of the soil. In-situ tests are alw conducted to determine the properties of the soils
in natural cooditiollS. This chapter discusses various methods of sub-surface explorations and in-situ testing.
416 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
17.4. RECONNAISSANCE
The geotechnical engineer makes a visit to the site for a careful visual inspection in reconnaissance. The
infonnation about the following features is obtained in reconnaissance.
(1) The general to(X>gr3phy of the the site, the existence of drainage ditches and dumps of debris and
sanitary fiUs.
(2) Existence of settlement aacks in the structure already buill near the site.
(3) The evidence of land slides, creep of slopes and the shrinkage cracks.
(4) The stratification of soils as observed from deep cuts ncar the sitc.
(S) The location of high flocxl maries on the nearby building and bridges.
(6) The depth of ground water table as observed in the wells.
(l) Existence of springs. swamps, etc. al the site.
(8) The drainage pattem existing at the site.
(9) Type of vegetation existing at the site. Tbc type of vegetation gives a clue to the nature of the soil.
(to) Existence of underground water mains, power conduit, etc. at the site.
In addition to making site visits, the geotechnical engineer should study geological maps, aerial
photographs, toposhcet. soil maps and the blue prints of the existing buildings. Maps and publications of
various agenCies give a lot of infonnalion about the geologic character of the area.
The gcotcdmical engineer should also get infoonation about the type of structure to be built and its
proposed usc. In the case of a multi.storeyed building. the infonnation aboUt the column loads and their
approximate locations should be obtained. In the case of bridges, the span length and the Joad carned by tbe
piers and abutments should be a'iCenained. In the case of a dam, the gcotechnical engineer should gel
informalion about the type of the dnm, its height, base width and other salient characteristics.
The infonnation obtained during reconnaissance is helpful in evolving a suitable sub-surface investigation
programme.
17.5. DEJYl11 OF EXl'LORAll0N
The depth of exploration required at a partiadar site dependS upon the degree of variation of the
subsurface data in the horizontal and vertical directions. It is not possible to fIX the number, disposition and
depth of borings without making a few preliminary borings or soundings at the site. The geotcctmical
engineer baving a long experience and good engineering judgment may give some guidelines.
The depth of exploration is governed by the depth or the influence zone. The depth of the influence zone
depends upon the type of the structure, intensity of loading, shape and disposition of the loaded area, the soil
profile, and the J*lysica1 characteristics of the soil. 1be depth uplO which the stress inacmcnl due to
b GS
J~~
T
BOREHOLE~
\·58
j
Fig. 17.1. Oeplh or Exploration.
418 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
superimposed loads can produce signincnnt settlement and shear stresses is known as the significant depth.
'Inc depth of exploration should be at least equal to the significant depth.
The significant depth can be dctcnnincd using the method discussed in chapter 11. The significant depth is
generally taken as the depth al which the vertical stress is 20% of the load intensity. According to the above
criterion, the depth of exploration should be about 1.5 times the width of the square footing (Fig. 17.1) and about
r-
appllcation of the load. HOLE 0
When the foundations are taken up to rock. it
should be ensured that large boulder.; are DOt
miS{akcn as bed rock. The minimum depth of core
boring into the bed rock should be 3m to establish
il as a rock. ,·59 t---9--1
71
Ln ca<>e of multi-storeyed buildings, the depth
of exploration can be taken from the following
formula (Sowers and Sowers, 1970), TIl
D - qsi'"' ... (17.1)
where D = depth of exploration (m). C = constant, Fig. 173. Depth of Explornlion for Friction Piles.
equal to 3 for light steel buildings and narrow concrete buildings. It is equal to 6 for heavy stccl buildings
and wide concrete buildings. S = number of storeys.
If loose soil or reccnLly deJXlSited soil or a weak stratum is encountered, it should be explored thoroughly.
Explorations should be carried to a depth at which the nct increase in the vertical stress is less than tbe
aJowable bearing pressure of the soil.
For two adjacent footings. each of size B )( L, spaced at a clear spacing A, IS: 1892-1972 suggests thai
the minimum depth of boring should be 1.5 B wben A :t 4B; and it should be 1.5 L when A < 28. Fa-
adjacent rows of such footings, the minimum recommended depth of exploration is 4.5B when A < 28; it is
3.5 8 when A> 2D :md it is 1.5 B when A ~ 48.
SITE INVESfIGAll0NS 419
For explorations of deep excavations, the depth of exploration below the proposed excavation level
should be at Ic.1st 1.5 times the depth of excavation. In case of road cuts, it is taken at lcac;t equal to the width
of the cut.
In case of road fiUs, the minimum depth of boring is 2m below tbe ground surface or equal to the height
of the fill, whichever is greater.
. In case of gravity dams. the minimum depth of boring is twice the height of the dam .
• 17.6. \ATERAL EXTENT OF EXPLORATIONS
.The lateral extent of exploration and the spating of bore holes depend mainly on the variation of the
strata in the horizontal direction. The cxplordtion should bc cxtensive so as to reveal major changes in the
propertics of the sub~surface strata.
For small and less important buildings, even onc bore hole or a trial pit in the centre may suffice. But
for compact buildings, covering an area of about 0.4 hectares, there should be at least 5 bore holes, one at
the centre and four near the comers (Fig. 17.4).
,..-----&-----,
! i
I
i
i
o ~ I
I
' Jl __ _
C'7-----f':!)
Fig. 17.4. Fig. 17.5.
For large, multi-storeyed buildings, the bore holes should be drilled at all the comers and also al
important loc.1tions. The spacing between the bore holes is generally kept between 10 to 30 m, depending
upon thc variation in the subsurface conditions and loading (Fig. 17.5.).
For highways, subsurface explorations are usually carried out along the proposed ceotre line or along the
propose ditch line. The spacing of bore holes usually varies betwccn 150 and 300 m. If the sub~st ra[ a is
erratic, the spacing may be reduced to even 30m.
In case of concrete dams, the spacing of bore holes generally varies between 40 and 80 m.
17.7. OPEN EXCAVATION M~"TIIODS OF EXPLORATION
In Ibis method of exploration, an open excavation is made 10 inspect the sub~strala. Tbe methods can be
divided into two categories: (1) Pits and Trenches, (2) Drifts and Shafis.
(1) Pits and Trenches. Pits and trenches are excavated at the site to inspect the strata. TIle size of the
pit should be suCficient to provide necessary working space. IS : 4453-1967 recommends a clear working
space of 1.2 m x 1.2 m at the boltom of the pit. The depth of the pit depends upon the requirement of the
investigation as already discussed.
Shallow pits up to a depth of 3 m can be made without providing any lateral support. For deeper pits,
especially below the ground water table, the lateral support in the form of shccting and bracing system (Fig.
17.6) is required. I\s the depth of the pit increases, its cost increases rapidly. For depths greater than 6 m,
bore holes arc more economical than open pits.
4'" SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
~~~inq SOmm
tical
thie
against possible accidents due to caving of the ground.
t
(2) Drif'ls lind Shufts. Drifts are horizontal tunnels
made in the hill-side to detennine the nature and
structure of tile geological formation. IS: 4453--1980
recommends that a drift should have the minimum clear
dimensions of 1.5 m width and 2.0 m height in hard
rock. In soft rock, an arch roof is more advantageous
2·0
m! !
Ihan a flat roof. If the ground is unable to stand of its
own, supports have to be provided to carry the load of
the roof and the sides of the drift.
Drifts arc useful for establishing the minimum
excavation limits to reach sound rock and for locating
1 SECTION
r~OT
PIT
TOM OF
D
faullS and shear zones and buried channels in the river
section. However, drills are generally expensive. These
are used only wben other methods do not provide the
required infonnation. Drifts are also known as adits.
Shafts are large size vertical holes made in the
geological formation. These may be rectangular or
circular in section . The minimum width of a rectangular
shaft is 2.4 m and for a circular shaft, the minimum
diameter is 2.4 m. In weak ground, the sides of the shaft Fig. 17.6.
should be properly supported. Deep shafis should be properly ventilated. Shafts are used to reach a particular
strata at a depth of 4 m or more. Shafis are also used to extend the exploration below the river bed already
done by means of tunnels.
17.8. BORINGS FOR EXPLORATION
When the depth of exploration is large, borings are used for exploration. A vertical bore hole is drilled in
the ground to get the information about the sub-soil strota. Samplcs are taken from the bore hole and tested
in a laboratory. The bore hole may be used for conducting in-situ tests and for locating the water table.
Extensometers or pressure meter may also be installed in the bore hole for the measurement of deformatioo
in the sub-Slrata.
Depending upon the type of soil and the purpose of boring, the following methods are used for drilling
the holes.
(1) Auger Boring (2) Wash Boring (3) RotaI)' Drilling
(4) Percussion Drilling (5) Core Boring.
A few holes are drilled during the preliminary investigation. In the detailed investigations, a large number
of holes are drilled to thoroughly investigate the sub-soil strata.
The rcsuHs of boring arc presented in the form of boring-log and sub-surface profiles (Sect. 17.22).
17.9. AUGER BORING
An auger is a boring tool similar to one used by a carpentor for boring boles in wood. It consists of a
SITE INvEsnOATIONS
T 421
iT
shank with a cross-wise handle for turning and having central
tapered feed screw [Fig. 17.7 (a)1. TIle augers can be operated'
manually or mcd:lanically.
The hand augers used in boring are about 15 to 20 em in
diameter. 1besc are suitable for advancing holes UplO a depth of 3
to 6 m in soft soils. The hand auger is attached to the lower end
of a pipe of about IS' mm diameter. The pipe is provided with a
eross-arm al its top. The hole is advanced by turning the cross-
arm manually and al the same time applying thrust in the
downward direction. When the auger is filled with soil, it is taken
out. If the hole is already driven, another type of auger, known &'>
post-hole auger [Fig. 17.7 (b)} is used for taking soil samples.
Mechanical augers are driven by power. 1bese are used for
maklng holes in hard strata to a great depth. However, for depths
greater than 12 m, even mechanical augers become inconventicnt
and other methods of boring are used.
Continuous rughl augers are special type of mechanical
augers which arc provided with a central hollow tube. When the lol Ib)
bole is advanced, the central tube is kept plugged. As the auger is
turned into the ground, the cuttings rise to the surface through the Fig. 11.1. Augers.
spiral. During sampling, the plug is removed and a sampler is inserted Cor taking lhe samples. The main
disadvantage of using a (X)ntinuous flight auger is that it becomes difficult to 3SCe11ain the depth from which
tbe cuttings coming on the ground have been removed.
Auger boring is generally used in soils which can stay open without casing or drilling mud. Clays. silts
and panially saturated sands can stand unsupported. For soils which cannot stand unsupported, especially for
sandy soils below water table, a casing is nonnally require(!. For such SOils, the method of auger boring
becomes slow and expensive. Auger boring cannot be used when there are large cobbles, boulders or other
obstructions which prevent drilling of the hole.
Auger borings are particularly useful for subsurface
investigations of highways, railways and air fields, where the
depth of exploration is small. 1he investigations arc done quite CABLE-
rapidly and economically by auger boring. (Attache<1 to
The main disadvantage of the auger boring is that the soil winch)
samples are highly disturbed. Funher, it becomes difficult to
locate the exact changes in the soil strata.
17.10. WASH BORING
TUB
In wash boring, the hole is drilled by first driving a casing,
about 2 to 3 m long, and then inserting into it a hollow drill rod
with a chisel-Shaped chopping bit at its lower end. Water is
pumped down the hollow drill rod, which is known as wash pipe.
Water tmerges as a strong jet through a small opening of the CASlNG
chopping bit. The hole is advanced by a oombinalioo of chopping
adion and the jetting action. &'> the drilling bit and the
accompanying water jet diSintegrate the soil. The water and the
chopped soil particles rise upward through the annular space BlT
l>etween the drill rod and the casing. The return water, also
known as wash water, is laden with the soil cuttings. It is
coUected in a tub through a T-shaped pipe fixed at the top of
the casing (Fig. 17.S). Fig. 17.S. Wash I3ocing.
422 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
The hole is further advanced by alternately raising and dropping the dlopping bit by a winch (not
shown). The swivel joint provided al the tOp of the drill rod facilitates the turning and twisting of the rod.
The process is continued even below the casing till the hole begins 10 cave in. AI that !'>tagc, the bouom of
the casing can be extended by providing addilional pieces at tbe top. However, in stable, cohesive soils, the
casing is required only in the t()P ponion. Sometimes, instead of a casing, special drilling fluids made of
suspension or emulsions of fal Clays or bentonite combinoo with some chemical additives are used for
supporting the walls of the hole
'[he wash samples collected in the tub do not represent the soil in its lrue condition. There is oomplete
break down of particles by chopping action. 1here is also mixing of the particles and the loss of fine particles
in transportation. '{be samples are of lillie practical use. However. some indication about the changes in strata
is provided by the reaction of the chopping bit as the hole is advanced. It is also indicated by a change in
colour of the wash water.
The wash boring is mainly used for advancing a hole in thc ground. Once the hOle has been drilled, a
sampler is inserted to obtain soil samples for testing in a laboratory.
The equipment used in wash borings is relatively light and inexpensive. The main disadvantage of the
method is that it is slow io sliff soilS and coarsc·grained soils. It cannot be used efficiently in hard soils. rocks
and the soils containing boulders. "[he method is oot suitable for taking good quality undisturbed samples
above ground water table, as the w,lsh water enters the sirota below the bottom of the hole and causes an
increase in its water romenl.
17.11. ROTARY DRILLING
In the rotary drilling method. the bore hole is advanced by rotating a bollow drill rod which has a cutling
bit at its lower end. A drill head is provided at the top of the drill rod. It consists of a rotary mechanism aDd
an arrangement for applying downward pressure.
As the drilling rod is rot.1tcd, thc CUlling bit shears off chips of the material penetrated. A drilling fluid
under pressure is introduced through the drilling rod to the bottom of th,e hole. The fluid carries the cuttings
of the material penetrated from Ihe bottom of the hole to the ground surface through the annular space
between the drilling rod and the walls of the hole. The drilling fluid also cools the drilling bit. In case of an
uncasod hole, the drilling fluid also supports the walls of the hole.
When the soil sample is required to be taken, the drilling rod is raised and the drilling bit is replaced by
as.1mpler.
Rotary drilling can be used in clay, sand and rocks. Bore holes of diameter 50 mm to 200 mm can be
easily made by this method. The mcthod is not well adapted for use In materiaL<; containing a large percentage
of particles of gravel size and larger. The particles of this size start rotating benealh the drill rod and it
becomes difficult 10 advancc thc hole.
17.12. PERCUSSION DRILUNG
The percussion drilling method is used for making holes in rocks, boulders and other hard slmta. In this
methods, a heavy chisel is altemately lifted and dropped in a vertical bole. The material gets pulverised. If
the point where the chisel strikes is above the water table, water is added to the bole. The water forms a
slurry with thc pulverised m a leria ~ which is removed by a sand pump or a bailer at intervals. PcrOJSSioo
drilling may require a casing. Percussion drilling is also used for drilling of tube wells.
lhe main advantage of percussion drilling method is that it can be used for all types of materials. It is
particularly useful for drilling holes in glacial tills containing boulders. One of the major disadvantages is that
the material at the bottom of the hole is disturbed by heavy blows of the chisel. It is not possible to gel good
quality undisturbed samples. Further, the metbod is generally more expensive than other methods. Moreover,
it becomes dim~lt to detect minor changes in thc properties of the strata penetrated.
17.13. CORE DRILLING
The oore drilling method is used for drilling holes and for obtaining rock roccs. In this method, a am
barrel fitted with a drilling bit is fixed to a hollow drilling rod. As the drilling rod is rotated, the bit advances
SITE INVEsnGATIONS 423
and cuts nn rmnular holc mound un inluct core 1l1C core is ·then removed from its bottom and is retained by
a core lifter and brought to Ihe ground surfllce. Wmer is pumped continuously inlo the drilling rod 10 kcep
the drilling bit cool aTKJ to carry the disintegrated material 10 the ground surface.
The core drilling may be done using cilher a diamond studded bit or a OJtting cdge consisting of chilled
shot. The diamond drilling is superior to the other Iype of drilling. but is costlier. The core barrel may consist
of a single tube or a double tube. A double-tube barrel gives a good quality sample of the rock.
17.14. TYPES O.~ SOIL SAMI'LFS
Soil samples are obtained during sub-surface explor-<ition 10 dclennine the enginccring properties of Ihe
soils and rocks. Soil s.1mples arc generaUy classified inlo two categories :
(1) Disturbed samples. lhcse arc the samplcs in which the natural structure of the soil gets disturbed
during sampling. Howevcr,. these samplcs represent Ihe oomposition and the mineral content of the
soil. Disturbed samplcs can be used 10 determine the index properties of Ihe soil, such ~ grain size,
plasticity charactcristics, specific gravity.
(2) Undisturbed samples. Ihcse arc the samples in which the natural structure of the soil ::lOd lhe water
cootcnt arc rctained. ,rowcvcr, it may be mentioned the""!t it is impossible to get truly undisturbed
sample. Some disturbance is inevitable during sampling, evcn when the ulmost cme is taken. Dven
the re.moval of the sample from the ground produces a change in the stresses and causes
disturbances.
Undisturbed samples are used for determining the engineering propcnics of the soil, such as
compressibility, shear strcngth, and pcrme.1bility. Some index properties such as shrinkage limit can also be
determined. Thc smollcr the disturbance, the grcater would be the reliability of the results.
17.15. DESIGN FEATURES AFFECl'lNG TUE SAMPLE DISTURBANCE
The disturbance of thc soil depends mainly upon the following design features :
(1) Area ratio. The area rntio is defined as
A .. Maximum cross-sectional area of the CUlling edge x 100
, Area of the soil sample
Fig. 17.9 shows the lower portion of a sampler. Tbc area ratio can be expressed as
ai-ol
A, - ~ x 100 ... (11.2)
~7?l'7'\\M
\\ ,;j.(j~Spring Core Catcher.
Fig. 17.10. Stand.1rd Split Spoon S,1mplcr. Fig.I'.]\' Spring; Co~ Catdl<,lr.
(ii) steel tube about 450 mm long. split longitudinnlly in two hnlvcs, and (iii) coupling at the top of the tube
about 150 mm long. 'Jbe inside diameter of the split tube is 38 mm and the outside diameter is 50.0 mm. The
coupling head may be provided with a check valve and 4 venting ports of 10 mm dia to improve sample
recovery. lbis sampler is also used in conducting standard penetration lest (Sect. 17.22).
After the bore hole has been made, the sampler is :lItachcd to the drilling rod nnd lowered into the hole.
SITE INVEsnGA1l0NS 425
The sample is collected by jacking or forcing the sampler into the soil by
repented blows of a drop hammer lnc sampler is then withdrawn. llle
split lube is separated after removing the shoe and the coupling and the
sample is .taken out. It is then pl..1ced in a container. scaled, and
transported to the laboratory.
If the soil encountered in the bore hole is [ine sand and il lies below the
waler table, the sample recovery becomes difficult. For such soils, a
spring-core catcher device is used 10 ;lid recovery. As the sampler is lifted,
the springs close and fonn a dome and retain the sample (Fig. 17.1 I).
While taking samples, care shall be wken to ensure that the water
level in the hole is maintained slightly higher than the piezometric level
at the boltom of the hole. It is necessary to prevent quick sand conditions.
The split tube may be provided with a thin metal or plastic tube liner
to protect the sample and to hold it together. After Ule sample has been
collected, the liner and the sample it contains arc removed from the tube
and the ends are sealed.
17.17. SCRAPER BUCKET SAlVIPLER
If a sandy deposit contains pebbles, il is not possible to obtain samples
::--''''''''000< by standard split-spoon sampler or spLit-spoon s:!mpler fitted with a spring
0)
~\rotottor1
core catcher. The pebbles come in-between the springs and prevent their
closure. For such deposits. a sa-aper bucket sampler can be used .
A scraper bucket sampler consists of a driving point which is
~\~ ~ IH
Dttached 10 its bottom end (Fig. 17.12). There i<; a vertical slit in the
upper portion of the
Sec ti cm 0_0 s.1mpler. As. Ihe ~
Pig. 17.12. Scraper Bucket Sampler. l>ampler is rotated. the 2Smm
rn
is quite disturbed, it is still representative.
A scraper bucket sampler can also be used for
obtaining ihc samples of cohesion less soils below the
water table.
0
17.18. SHELBY TUDES AND TIIIN-WALLED
SAMPLERS
Shelby tubes are thin wall tube samplers made of
seamless steel. The outside diameter of Ihe tube may be I
::~~ :ts~~e l~m:~; ~~:it:~~~~I~:C: 7~~~: I
The bottom of the tube is sharpened and bevelled, which I
acts as a cutting edge [Fig. 17.13 (a)]. The area ratio is I
less than 15% and the inside clearancx: is between 0.5 10 I
3%. Fig. 17.13 (b) shows a thin-walled sampler (1S : 1m I
~~~~~::;~~ ;;'~yl:fl~h a~~ ~~et~U~; t~~ ~~el~ial~~~r ~~~
clayey soils. The diameter generally varies between 40 and
\1 (b) (0)
125 mm, and the thickness varies from 1.25 to 3.15 mm. Fig. 17.13. (II) Slielby Tube, (b) Thin-waited Sampler.
426 SOIL MECUANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
BOX
,
~\
which cannot be emily snmpled. The tcst is extremely useful for determining the relative density and Ihe
angle of shearing resistance of cohcsionless soils. It can also be used to determine the unconfined
compressive strength of cohesive soils.
The stand.1rd penctration Lest is conducted in a bore hole using a standard split-spoon sampler, described
in Sect. 17.16. When the bore hole nus been drilled 10 the desired depth, the drilling lools are removed and
the sampler is lowered 10 the bottom of the hole. "Il1e sampkr is driven into the soil by a drop hammer of
63.5 kg mass falling through a height of 750 mm at the rate of 30 blows per minute (IS : 2131 - 1963). The
number of hammer blows required 10 drive 150 mm of the sample is counted. The sampler is further driven
by 150 mm llnd the number of blows recorded. Ukewise, the sampler is oncc again further driven by ISO
mm and the number of blows recorded. 'Ibe number of blows recorded for the first 150 mm is disregarded.
The number of blows recorded for the last two 150 mm intervals are added 10 give tbe slandard penetration
number (N). In other words, the standard penetration number is equal to the nUmber of blows required for 300
mm of penetration beyond a scating drive of 150 mm.
]f the number of blows for 150 mm drive exceeds 50, it is lalten as refusal and the test is discontinued.
The standard penetration number is corrected for dilatancy correction and overburden rorrection as
explained below.
(a) Dililtancy Correction. Silty fine sands and fine sands below the water table develop pore pressure
which is not easily dL-.sipated. The pore pressurc increases the resistance of the soil ond hence the penetration
number (N).
Terzaghi and Peck (1%7) recommend the following correction in the case of silty fine sands when the
observed value of N exceeds 15.
(b) Overburden Pressure Correction. In granular soils, the overburden pressure affects the penetration
rcsist.1DCe. If the two soils having same relative density but different confining pressures are tested, the ODe
with a higher confllling pressure gives a higher penetration number. As the confining pressure in cohesionicss
soils increases with the depth, the penetration number for soils at shallow depths is underestimated and that
at greater deplhs is overestimated. rOOf unlfonnity, the N·valucs obtained from field tests under different
effective overburden pressures are COlTected to a standard effective overburden pressure.
Gibbs and Holtz (1951) recommend the use of tbe following equation for dry or moist clean sand.
/
/
/
/
0 /
0 /
0
V
0
/ v
0
18 30 12
An gle 01
14
sne e r i ng
)6
"
resis tellc e (¥J
" " ..
Fig. J7 .17. Variation of.' with N.
qu - 125N ... (17.11)
OII l where qu is unconfined compressive strength (kN/m1.
N Dens.ness
0-4 "''l'Loo;e 25"-32"
4-10 Loo;e 27"-35"
ID-30 Medium 30"-40"
30-50 De"se 35"--45"
> 50 Very Dense > 45"
therefore, also known as Dutch rooe Test. The test is conducted either by the static method or by dyn.1mic
method. as disrussed below.
(a) Static Cone penetmtion tesl. 1be Dutch cone has an apex angle of 60° and an overall diameter of
2
35.7 mm, giving an end area of 10 00 (Fig. 17.18).
For obtaining the cone resistance, the roDe is pushed downward at a steady rale of 10 mm/sec through a
depth of 35 mm each lime. The cone is pushed by applying thrust and not
by driving.
Mer the cone resistance has bccn determined, the cone is withdl1lwn.
The sleeve is pusbed on to the roDe and both are driven together into the
soil and the combined resistance is also dctcnnined. 1be resistance of the
sleeve alone is obtained by subtracting the cone resistance from the
combined resi'itance.
A modification of the Dutch cone penetrometers is the Refined Dutch
cone. It has got a friction sleeve of limited length above the cone JX>int. It 1Smm dio
is used for obtaining the point resistance of the cone and the frictional
resistance of the soil above the cone point.
For effective use of the cone penetration test, some reliable calibration
is required. This consists of comparing the results with those obtained from
conventional tests conducted on undisturbed samples in a laboratory. It is. k7mmol
also convenient to compare the cone test results with the standard .
penetration test results. As the sHlndard penetration tests have been more Fig. 17.18. Dutch Cone.
commonly conducted in the past, good correlation studies arc available between the SPT number (N) and the
engineering properties of the soil (Sect. 17.22). If the cone penetration results are rel.1ted to the SPT number
H, indirect rorrelations are obtained between the cone test results and the engineering properties of soil.
The following relations hold approximately good between the point resistance of the cone (qJ and the
standard penetration number (N).
(I) Gravels qr = 800 H to 1000 N .[17.12(a)J
(il) Sands q( = 500 N to 600 N ... [17.12(')J
(iii) Silty sands qc = 300 N to 400 N ... [17.12(')J
(iv) Silts alX! Clayey silts qr = 200 N ... [17.12(.)J
where qr is in kN/m 2
(b) Dynamic cone Test. The test is conducted by driving the cone by
blows of a hammer. The number of blows for driving the cone through a
specified distance is a measure of lhe dynamic cone resistance. HoIe5 lmm d,o
Dynamic cooe tests are performed either by using a 50 mm cone
without bentonite Slurry or by using a 65 mm cone with bentonite slurry 60mm dio
(IS : 4968-part ! alX! 11-(976). The driving energy is given by a 65
kg-hammer falling lhrough a height of 75 an. The number of blows for
every 10 an penetration is reoordcd. lbe number of blows required for
30 cm of penetration is taken as the dynamic cone resistance (N~",.). If the
skin friction is to be eliminated, the test is ooooucted in 3 cased bore
hole.
When a 65 mm cone with bentonite slurry is used, the sct-up should
have arrangements for circulating slurry so that the friction on the driving
rod is elim inated (Fig. 17.19).
The dynamic oone resistance (Nt"') is correlated wilh the SPT
number N. The following approximate relations may be used when a 50
mm diameter cone is used. Fig. 17.19. Dynamic Cone Test.
SITE INVESTIGATIONS 431
I
H :
at the bottom of the bore hole. When a torque is applied through the
handle lit the top of the rod, the soil is shc.'lrcd along a cylindrical
surface. The torque required to shc.'lf the cylinder of the soil is
measured by means of a spring balllncc. The undrained shear
strength s" of the soil is determined from Ule cqlk1t ion developed ill
chapter 13. "
T
... (17.15)
0/""1
'" - _(dU/2 + ri'16)
where T::: torque applied, JJ ::: height of the vane,
V
D ::: diameter of the soil cylinder sheared. Fig. 17.20. In·situ Vane ShcarTcsl.
The vane-shear test is extremely useful for determining Ihe in-situ shear strength of very soft and
sensitive clays, for which it is difficult to obtain undisturt>cd samples. The test can also be used even for
determining the shear strength of stiff. fi'iSurcd clays. However. the method cannot be used for Sc'lndy soils.
[7.25. IN·SITU TESTS USING A I'RESSURE METEII
Menard developed a pressure meter. or sub-soil deformeter, which can be used for determining tbe
stress-deformation characteristics of the soils in the n.mural conditions. 'lbe pressure meter consists of an
innatoole cylindrical probe which is COllncctcd to a water reservoir (Fig. 17.21). The probe is inserted into the
bore hole and it is inOalcd by applying water pressure. 'lbe probe presses against the unlined walls of the
bore hole. As the pressure is increased, the soil deforms. The volumetric deformation of the bore hole is
obtained by noting the fall in water level in the water rcst::rvoir.
Fig. 17.22 shows a typical prcssurc.volumetric strain curve. The soil is initially in elastic phase but it
enters the plastic phase at high pressure. Aftcr the plastic swge, thcre is no choogc in the volume with further
incre.1sc in pressure. 1be prcssurc.dcfonnotion dola obtaincc.J from the test may be used to ddcrmine modulus
of defonnation, undrained shear strength, "ngle of shearing resistance and other engineering properties of the
soil. IS : 1892·1979 describes the usc of pressure meier.
.432 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Gas pr~ssure
~TlCO
I_ ELASTC
'1
GU.'" cell
rE Probe
(lllE'asuring cell)
Guard cell
Fig. 17.22.
Go5.
Casing
_____ sz..~:!.:._
-I~---3
_____ 2
h, ______ 1
h,
____ .0
1:1 0
Fig. 17.24.
VJ::: 1anoC3
iii
~
;1
~: v,=tano<,:
,
~=ttna(2
I
'2
"
«it
9;;t :
X2 ___
DISTA.NCE FROM SOURCE (X)
Fig. 17.26.
Upto a certain distance XI> the dircct waves in the layer I reach fir.;t. At this point, the fjr.;1 two lines in
Fig. 17.26 intersect, which indicates that the direct wave traveling a distance Xl with a velocity VI and the
refracted wave traveling with a velocity Vi in distance 2111 and with a velocity of V2 in distance XI reach
simultaneously, where H I is the thickness of the layer I. Thus
~ _ 2HI ... ~
VI VI V2
SITE INVESTIGATIONS
'"
or ... (17.18)
Eq. 17.18 gives reliable results when t~ waves are produced by a sinusoidal force and not by impact.
The following empirical equation gives more reliable results for impact shock.
XI·~
HI - T V~ ... (17.19)
Likewise, the thickness of lbc second layer (H,) is obtained from the distance X 2 colTCSpooding to the
point of intersection of the second and (he third line in Fig. 17,26. It is given by the relation
Ih - O.85H 1
X • rv;-:v;
+"'22 V b , ... (17.20)
TIle pnx:edurc is oontinued if there are more 111.1n three layers.
The type of material in various layers can be determined by comparing the velocities obtained with the
standard velocities given in Thble 17.3.
Thble 17.3. Velocities in Different Types of Strata
Satura/eli
1)"" of Soulld Weatllered Clayey ofay
Gravel Sam'
rock/soil mok Rock sOlid olldsill
1500 1500 500 200
Resistivity 10 to 10 to
> 5000 '0
(Ohm-m) 2500 4500 1500 500 100
p--- ,
2l'taV
... (17.22)
,,
depth of exploration. As the dcpth of the current
penetration is equal to the eleclrode spacing, the
changes in the mean resistivity is correlated to the L-- ' 111 SETTING
I ' a3 --..f---aJ --r-- a 3---i
changes in strata at that location.
The method is useful in studying the changes
in the strata with incre.1sing depth at a point. The Fig. 17.28. Electrical Sounding melhod.
method can indiQlte sub-surface variation when a hard L'lyer overlies a son layer or vice-versa. It can also be
used to locate the water table.
SITE INVESI'IGA1l0NS
DEPTH (m)
o LOOSE SANe
- .
: SAN9Y SILT:
PROBLEMS
Ie) The sHlndilrt! penetration Icst IS mure useful for cohcsionless soil than cohesive SQils.
(j) The static cone tcst is more useful tor whcsive soils dmn cohesionlc.~s soils.
(8) Dilatancy correctiun of SPT numbe r is clolle for clayey soils.
(II) In-situ v;lnc shear test is cxtremely useful for oblaining the shear strength of very soft cohesive soils.
(I) The Cas3gr:mcle piezometer is used lor deiennining the water level in l'tJhcsionless soils.
(j) SeismIC methods can be used if the seismic velocity of diftcrcllt str-lla increases as the depth is increased.
(k) Gcophyslcal methods are useful for preliminary H1vestigations.
(/) A soil proliic gives an ;\Ccumle prome of different Mrata.
(m) A bClrmg log mdicates differcl1l SlratH along the depth of II bore hole.
(Ans. Tl1le, (a). Ie). (e).Ij). (11), (j). (k). (1II}1
U. Multiple Choicc Qucstions
1. The .~I :mdard pcnctr.ltion lest is useful to mea.~ure
(a) shear Mrength of soft days
(h) she.lr Mrength of sands
(c) consistency ofehlYs
<d) None of above.
2. For an undhturhed sample. the lll'l.:a mtlO of the samples shoul d be
la) zero (b) 10% or less
tc) 10% 10 20% (d) more Ihan 20%
J. In-suu vane shear lest is used 10 measure shear sirength of
tal very soli and .~ensilive clays
(h) stiff and fissured clays
(c) sandy soil~
(tl) All the above
4. The seismic refraction mel hods cannot be usell if the wave velO\: it y in Ihe lower layer is . . .. Ihat in the upper
layer.
«j) grealer IhUI1 (M less than
(e) more thun four limes (ti) more lhan thice
5. Selcctthe incorrect statement:
For u good quulity ~oil sample.
(a) The are.1 ratIo shou ld be low
(b) The CUlling edge shoulll be thick
(e) 111C inside ckamnce should he ~mall
(J) The outside clellrance should be small
6. If the ill1ual vlllue or thc standard pcnclnllion number (N) is greater than 15 for line snnds below water table.
18.1. INTRODUCTION
An earth slope is an unsupported, inclined surface of a soil mass. Earth slopes are fonned for raHway
fonnations, highway embankments, earth dams, canal banks, levees, and at many other locations. Fig 18.1
shows some of the examples of eanh slopes.
SIOP.~SIOpe~
Y~;;k\,*ilWAYTRACK))(\\
(al (bl
~SIOPe
~ ~'-SIOP~~
(c) CANAL
(1) The factors which cause an increase in the shear stresses. The stresses may increase due to weight
of water causing saturation of SOils, surcharge loads, seepage pressure or any other cause. The stresses are
also ina-easrA due to steepening of slopes either by excavation or by natural er05ion.
(2) The factors which cause a decrease in the shear strength of the soil. 1be loss of shear strength may
occur due to an increase in water oontent, increase in pore water pressure, shock or cycliC loads, weathering
or any other cause.
Most of the naturnl slope failures occur during rainy seasons, as tbe presence of water causes both
increased stresses and the loss of strength.
18.2. BASIS OF ANALYSIS
The soil mass must be safe against slope failure on any conceivable surface across the slope. Although
Hie metlxx1s using the theory of elasticity or plasticity are also being ioacasingly used, the most oommon
methods are based on limiting equilibrium in which it is assumed that tbe soil is at tbe verge of failure. The
methods of limiting equilibrium ar~ statically indetecminate. As the stress-strnin relationships along tbe
assumed surface are not known. it is necessary to make assumptions so that the system becomes statically
determinate and it can be analysed easily using the equations of eqUilibrium. The following assumptioIl') are
generally made.
(1) The str<:ss system is assumed to be tw<Hlimensional. The stresses in the third direction
(perpendicular to the section of the soil mass) are taken as zero.
(2) It is assumed that the Coulomb equation for shear strength is applicable and the strength parameters
C and , are known.
(3) It is further assumed that the seepage conditions and water levels are known, and the corresponding
pore waler pressure can be estimated.
(4) The conditions of plastic failure are assumed to be satisfied aloog the crilical surface. In other w~
the shearing strains at all points of the critical surface are large enough 10 mobilise all the available
shear strength.
(5) Depending upon the method of analysis, some additional O!:>Sumptions are made regarding the
magnitude and distribution of forces along various planes.
In the analysis, the resultant of all the actuating forces lrying to cause the failure is detennined. An
estimate is also made of the available shear strength. The factor of safety of the slope is determined from tbe
available resisting forces and the actuating fora:s.
18.3. DIFFERENT DEFlNITIONS OF FAcroRS OF SAFIITY
Three different definitions of the factor of safety are used.
(4) Factor of safety willi respect to shear st[t!nglli
In common usage, the faaor of safety is defined as the ratio of tbe shear strength to the shear stress
along the surface of failure. The factor of safety as defined above is know n as the faaar of safety with
respect to shear strength.
Thus ...(18.1)
F ... :t~n+~
F.- t~n:m ...(IS.6)
whcre F. =factor of safety with respect to friction, " =angle of shearing resistance,
+. .
= angle of mobilised shc.1ling resistance.
For small angles, Eq. 18.6 can be expressed as
F. - t ... ([IS.6(o)J
In the analysis of stability of slopes, generally the three factors of safety are taken equal, i.e.
+
F. - Fe - F." However, sometimes when greater reliance is placed 00 the parameter than the parameter c,
the factor of safety with respect to cohesion is taken greater than that with respect to friction. In such a case,
the factor of safety with respect to friction is usually taken as unity Le. ...... +.
18.4, TY1'ES OF SLOPE FAILURES
A slope may have anyone of the foUowing types of failures.
(1) Rotational failure, 'Illis type of failure occurs by rotation along a slip surface by downward and
outward movement of the soil mass (Fig. 18.2). lbe slip surface is generally circular for bomogeneous soil
conditions and non-circular in case of non- homogeneous conditions. Rotational slips arc furtber divided into
3 types.
(a) Toe failure, in wbich the failure occurs aloog the surface that passes tbrough the toe [Fig. 18.2 (a)J.
(b) Slope failure, in which the failure occurs along a surface that intersects the slope above the toe [Fig.
IS.2 (b)J.
(c) Base failure, in which the failure surface passes below the toe [Fig. 18.2 (c)J.
The slope failure occurs when a weak plane exists above the toe. The base failure occurs when a weak
stratum lies beneath the toe. If a strong stratum exists below the toe, the slip surface of the base failure is
tangcntial to that stratum. In all other cases, the failures are generally loe failures. Toe failures are most
common.
(2) 1hmslaUonai Failure. A OOf1S!ant slope of unlimited extent and baving unifonn soil properties at the
srAIlILffY OF SLOPES 44'
{c)8ose !oi\ure
1
I Fig. 183. Translational Failure.
Translational failure occurs in an in(initc slope along a long Cailure surface parallel to lhe slope (Fig.
18.3). The shape of tbe failure surface is influenced by the presence of any hanI stratum at a shallow depth
below the slope surface. Translational failures may also occur along slopes of layered materials.
(3) Compound Failure. A compound failure is a combination of the rotational slips and the translational
sUp (Fig. 18.4). A compound failure surface is curved at the two ends and plane in the middle portion. A
compound failure generally occurs when a bard stratum exists at considerable depth below the toe.
1
J
Fig. 18.4. Compound Failure.
(4) Wedge Failure. A failure along ao incUn'C<l plane is known as plane failure or wedge failure or block
failure (Fig. 18.5). It occurs when distinct blocks and wedges of the soil mass become separated.
A plane failure is similar to translational failure is many respects. However, unlike translational failure
which occurs in 2Il infinite slope, a planc failLUe may occur even in a finite slope consisting of two different
materials or in a homogeneous slope having cracks, fissures, joints or any otber specific plane of weakness.
(5) Mls(.'elhlDeous Failures. In addition to above four types of failures, somc complex types of failures
444 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENG INEERING
PLANE OF WEAKNESS
~
::;;~
Fig. 18.5. Wedge Failure.
in the form of spreads and flows may atso oocurs.
18.5. STABILITY OF AN INFINITE SLOPE OF COHESIONLESS SOn.s
The stability mteria of an infinite slope of cohesionless soils will depend whether the soil is dry, or
submerged or has steady seepage, as explained below.
(1) Dry Soli. Fig. 18.6 (0) shows a section of an infinite slope having a slope angle of i. leI us mnsider
the prism ABeD of the soil. with the inclined length An equal to b. The horizontal lengtb of the prism is b
COS L The height of the prism is H [Fig. 18.6 (b)].
~
B
. b
,- H
i 0 C
,- Ca)
IbC~t
1:tI NGW
r '~-----,V
o ~ Cc)
0 0-
F, .. ~ ... (18.9)
Eq. IB.9 indicates that the slope is just stable wben .' .. i. The factor of safety is greater than unity when i
is less than ,'. For the slope angle i greater than cp', the slope is not stable.
It is worth noting that the factor of safety of an infinite slope of a oohesioolcss soil is independent of the
height H of the assumed failure prism.
'£be angle .' in Eq. 18,9 should correspond to the actual relative density of the soiL As the soil in the
surface layers is in a relatively loose slate, the angle .' oorrespooding to the loose state is generally taken.
Eq. 18.9 can be represented graphiQllly [Fig. 1B.6 (c»). The ordinate PQ is equal to a tan .' and
represents the shear strength, The ordinate PI Q represents the shear stress 't equal to a tan i. Obviously, tbe
factor of safety is given by
F,. ~_~_~
(2) Submer-ged Slope. If the slope is Submerged under water, the norma! effective stress and the shear
stress are calculated using the submerged urnt weight and oot the bulk unit weight as was used for dry soiL
Thus, from Eqs. 18.7 and 18,8.
0 .. y'Hcos2 j .. .(18.10)
and "t - l'Hsinicosi ... (18.11)
where y' is the submerged unit weight.
Therefore, the fador of safely is given by
F _! .. (y'Hcos2 ,) lan"
f 't y'HsinirosI
F _~
.. .(18.12)
, tan i
Comparing Eqs, IB.9 and 18.12, it is observed that the factor of safety of a submerged slope is the same
as that in dry condition.
(3) Steady Seepage along the slope. Fig. IB.7 (a) shows an infinite slope with steady seepage parallel
to the surface. Fig. 1B.7 (b) shows a free-body diagram of the prism ABCD of the soil. The forces acting on
the venical sides of the prism due to water and soil are equal and opposite and, therefore, Qlncel. The weight
of the prism W is taken corresponding to the saturated conditions.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Therefore, W .. y,.Hbcosi
N - Woos; _'jptHbro:;'l I'
T- lYsin; .. y_Hbsinicosi
AI tbe base of the prism, there is an upward (oree due
10 waler pressure (u), given by
'oj
u '"' y",ffcos 2 ;
or
Uplift force, U .. (y", H
Thus, the nel nannal force
COi'l i)
If is given by
N -N - U .. YIQlHb~2; - (y",ffco!l?t)b
b
~ ..
o = y' ll cos'lj
't ~ f. y,,.Hsinicosi
Fig. 18.7. Steooy Seepage along the Slope.
11100s
2
j (:~ - tanCP') _ c'
II .. c'
1 (tan j - tan q>') OOS2 j
The height at which the slope is just stable is
known as the critical height (H~). Thus
Fig. 18.8. Infinite Slope in Cohesive Soils.
fir. c' ... (18.15)
l(tan; - tanq:>')CfYii,2i
For heights less than the critical beight, the fador of safety is given by Eq. 18.14.
(b) Submerged Slope
As in the ClSC of cohcsionless SOils, the normal and tangential components of the weight are taken for
submerged unit weights and not for bulk unit weights. Thus. from Eq. 18.14,
F .C'+l'Hcos2 itanp'
... (18.16)
• l'Hcosisini
The va lue of .1
in Eq. 18.16 should be laken a:>rrespotiding 10 the submerged conditions, which may be
quite different from that in dry condition in case of cohesive soils.
(e) Steady Seepage along the Slope
100 case is similar 10 that for a oohesionless soil. In this cast; the factor of safety is given by
c ' + J'Hcos2 jtanq>'
F, " l'IIIHcosisini ... (18.17)
The critical height is obtained corresponding to a factor of safety of unity. Thus
c' + '(' H~oos2jtanlP' - 11~H(oosisini
H~ cos2 i (1.111 tan i - 1 I tan !p') .. c'
c'
IJ~ - ('(,lII tan ; -l'tan<pl)caili
... (18.18)
Eq. 18.19 indicates thai the cffect of the angle of shearing resistance .p' is reduced as compared with Eq.
18,15 of the dry soil.
18.7. WEDGE FAILURE
A wedge failure occurs when a soil deposit has a specific plane of weakness. The stratified deposits
generally fail along the interface. Fig. 18.9 shows a soil mass resting on an inclined layer of impermeable
soil . There is a tendency of the upper mass to slide downward along the plane of contact AB.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 18.9.
The force trying to cause sliding is the langenlial component T of the weight (W) along the plane of
contact.
T-W~na ... M
where a is the angle which the plane A/J makes with horizontal, W is the wcight of wedge per unit length
perpendicular 10 the plane of paper.
The force Icnding 10 resist the sliding depends upon the oohesion c and the frictiooal foroe and is given
by
S - cL + (Woos a) tan + ... (b)
where L is the length of lbe failure surface AB.
Thc factor of safety against sliding is obtained from (a) and (b) as
F, _ cL + (::aa)tanq> ... (18.20)
,~m ~c
R\~OJr-r{\
(90-<)
" W
(o(- ~)
Fig. 18.10.
(1) Weight of the wedge (W).
(2) Cohesive force (C) along the surface AB.
(3) Reaction R. The reaction R is inclined at angle tj:I", to the nonna!.
The triangle of forces is also shown in figure. 1be magnitude and direction of Wand C are known. 1be
direction of R is also Imown. The weight of the wedgc is given by
STABILITY OF Sl.OP£S 449
1
W--2'YL (II). (. )
--;----:
SlOl
SID I-I). .. .(a)
and C .. e,.L
where H = height of slope. e". = mobilised cohesion. q.". = angle of mobilised friction,
and L = length of failure surface AB.
[Note. Area of a triangle AnD = ~ d b sin A where d and b are the length of sides DA and AD,
respectively.]
C sin(a-t",) sin(a-'".)
From the law of sines. ... (c)
W" sin(cjI". + 00°)" ~
Substituting the values of Wand C from Eqs. (a) and (b) in Eq. (c),
c,.,L sin (a - cjI",)
...(d)
lI2yL(H/sint) sin (i a)" ~
'£be left-hand side of Eq. 18.21 is known $ the stability number (S,,). The most dangerous plane is thai
for which the angle a is such that the stabillly number becomes a maximum, i.e..
dd~) _ 0
.. '12 COSCC I
. (i- -~_)
. sec .,.sm 2 - sm (i-~_)
-2- .
.. '21 COSCC I
.
sec t",
[ i-cos (i -
2
~-) 1
C_) l-cos(i-~.)
(Yii ........ (4 sin;cos',.)
... (18.22)
nearly vertical. The critical surface for general slopes is not a plane and, therefore, the aitical slope a~ has
little practical use for such slopes.
18.'. ~. - 0 ANALYSIS
In case of fully saturated clay under Wldrained conditions, the stability of the slope can be cbeckcd in
terms of (()(at stresses. Such a condition occurs in slopes immediately after construction. In Ibis case. =0+..
aooc=c...
The failure surface is assumed to be a ciroJlar arc AD (Fig. 18.11). 1be figure shows a failure surface
with centre 0 and radius r (i.e. DB '" OA = r).
Fig_ 18.11.
The total weight W above the failure surface causes instability. For equilibrium, the shear strength to be
mobilised along the failure surface can be e~ as
~m - f; - ~
where F is the factor of safety.
Taking moments about 0,
W)( d - (c./F)L.r ... (18.23)
where LQ is the length of arc AD and d is the lever arm of Wabout O.
F _ c"LQr
Thus .. .[18.23(0)]
W x d
If a tension aack develops and water enters the crack, the hydrostatic pressure force P w acts on the
portion Be of tbe arc al a height of hl3 from C, where h is the depth of tension crack. equal to 2 c,l'y (see
chapter 19). The arc length in tbat case sbould be taken equal toAC. Eq. 18.23 may be modified aocordingly.
18.10. FRlcnON CIRCLE METUOD
The friction circle method is useful for the stability analysis of slopes made of homogeneous soils. In this
metbod, the slip surface is assumed to be an arc of a circle.
The reacUon R is inclinCd at angle '''' 10 the nonnal to the slip surfacc. As the dircaioll of the nonnal
chnnges, the direction of R also changes. With tbe centre as 0, 0 small circle, known as friclion circle, is
drawn with a radius r sin ''''. All lines which arc tangent to the friction circle make an angle ,,.. with the
nonnal of the slip surface. These lines represent the direction of the combined normal and mobilised frictiooal
forces on the slip surface. The value of,,,. is obtained from Eq. 18.6, aOcr choosing a value of F•. Thus the
reaction R is tangential to the friction cirdc.
[Note. Acttml1y, the reaction R is lOngential 10 lhc friction circle of a slightly larger radius of K T sin
f .... whcre K is a factor with a value g~ter than unity. as it is evident that the two reactions dH [Fig. 18:~2
(0)] inlersect slightly outside the friction circle of radius T sin !P.... lIowevd. this discrepancy is generally
disregarded].
The cohesive force e". is equal to e", Ltl wbere e", is the mobilised cohesion and Lo is the length of the
circular surface arc. It is oonvenient to replace this force acting along the arc by an equivalent force C acting
aJoog a lioc. The Corce along arc AEB is also equal in mogniludc to the force e", )( Lc where Lt is Ihe length
of the chord AD. The line of action of Ihis force can be determined by tnking moments of lhe aclual force
and the equivalent force about O.
(L~ )( c",) )( a _ (e". )( LJ )( r
L.
a - T r; ... (18.24)
Obviously. the distance a is gremer than T, as L" > L~. ~
The intersection of Ihe weight IV Dnd the cohesive force C". C5lablisbcs a point P through which the
,.) Ib)
~~
"
.'
o
,,' F,
Fig. 18.12. Friction'"~Circle Method.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
reaction R must m..', TIlC direction of R is ohlnincd by drawing a line tangential to the t-circle, The forces
Cm and R can be determined from the force triangle.
Fig. 18.12 (b) shows the Corce triangle. The wcight vector W is drawn first. 111c triangle is completed by
drawing the vectors R and Cm along the directions already established. From the force triangle, the value oC
the cohesive force C". is determined. 'll1e mobilised oohesion is equal \0 the cohesive force C", divided by the
length of lhe chord L r • '£1ms
c. . .. (18.25)
e"," Y;
1ne factor of safely with rcspcclto oohesion is given by Eq. 18.5.
If the value of F~ obtained from Eq. 18.5 is not equal to the assumoo value of F., the analysis is
rcpeated. 'me procedure is repeated after taking another trial surface. 111e slip circle which gives the
minimum factor of safety (F,.) is the most critical circle. Generally. the analysis is repeated 3·4 times to
oblain a curve between the assumed value of F+ and Ihe compuled value of F~ as shown in fig. 18.12 (c).
111e fac.:tor of safety with respect to shear strength F, is obtained by drawing a line at 45°, which gives
Fc - F . .. Ft.
For a purely cohesive soil. cjI = 0 and the friction circle reduces to a poinL The factor of safcty is
determined from the resisting moment due to C and actuating moment due to W (See Sect. 18.9).
Sometimes, the factor of safclY with respect to friction (F'> is assumed to be unity aod the factor of
safety with respect to only cohesion is obtained. .
(b) Submerged slope
The above discussion refers to inlergranular (effective) forces only. II the soU is dry and there is no
submcrgence. the dry unit weights are oonsidered. [f the soil is submerged, the submerged unit weight is used
when calculating the weight of lhe wedge (W). The neutral forces acting on the wedge are given below:
(1) Neutral part of the weight. W.. • V'i ... where V is the volume of the wedge.
(2) Water pressure (lI) acting on the slope AD.
(3) Resultant water pressure (Us) acting on the curved surface AEH.
The three neutral forces are in equilibrium among themselves and do oot draw upon the shear strength of
the soil.
(e) Sudden dmwdown conditions
When the water standing on the slope AD is suddenly aDd quickly removed, the water pressure force (ll)
disappears. However, if there is 00 time for drainage 10 occur from the soil in the slope. the soil remains
submerged as before and the neull'81 part of lbe weight (W..) is still acting. Thus, the equilibrium of tbe neutral
forces is disturbed, although the equilibrium of lbe intergranular forces remains unaffected.
'!llC equilibrium of the neutral forces can be maintained only if the soil can mobilise additional cohesion
(co) such thai the additional oohesive force CilLo. the neutral part of the wcight (W..) and the new resultant
water pressure (Us) are in equilibrium. 1bc additional cohesion can be determined by drawing another force
triangle.
Tbe total oohcsion mobilised (c",') in this case is equal to the cohesion mobilised for intergranuiar forces
and that for neutrnl forces.
c,/: .. cM + c" ... (18.26)
Thc factor of safety with respcd to cohesion is given by
F~ _ ~ _ _c_
... (18.27)
Cmcm+c"
Thus the factor of safety of the slope is considerably reduced during sudden drawdown conditions.
STABILITY OP SLOPES 453
... (18.28)
The reciprocal of lhe stability number is known as stability factor. The stability number is a
dimensionless quantity.
Taylor dCICmlined the values of S,. for finite slopes using the friction circle method. Slopes that are of
simple sections and of homqgeneous soils may be analysed using the slope stability charts given by Taylor.
The charts are prcp..1red indicating the stability number, and slope angle i for various values of <Pm (Fig.
18.13). There are 5 parameter, viz e"" y, H, ; and <p",. However, if +'"
= 0 (purely cohesive soils), a sixth
0·35r----r-,..----,---r----,.---r-----,r----r---,
vi ~ 0·30'f----l--+-+-+-+--+--f--j--I
" 0·25
U~I~
v'f 0·20f----!,=,,\--+--I--+--+:_'f'c7"'-f7"~
8 0.15
~
:a 0·10
al 0·0
SLOPE ANGLE i
Fig. 18.13.
parameter DI beoomes also important (Fig. 18.14). The parameter Dr depends upon the depth of the hard
stmlum below the lop of the slope, and is given by
Dr _ Depth of hard st~~;h~~~O:O~ lOp of the slope
When the slope is steep, the failure surface passes through the toe, whereas for the flatter slope. the
failure extends below the toe. The chart in Fig. 18.13 is based on the most aitical circle pa5Sing through the
toe of the slope.
For slope angle i greater then 53°, the toe failure occurs. For; :$ 53°, and small values of 'Pm , a more
critical surface may pass helow the toc.
=
The chart in Fig. 18.14 is appl icable for <P'" O. In soils with <P'" =
0 and the slope angle less than 53°.
the failure surface clttcnds below the toe as deep as possible. 1lle stability number also depends upon the
parameter Of.
U...
(1) The stability number can be used to detcnnine the factor of safety of a given slope. For the known
values of j and <p_ the value of stability number (S,,) is dctennined from the cbart in Fig. 18.13 (or Table
18.1) and tbe factor of safety is determined as
'54 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
ul~:::~~"'~""~~
t' O.l6~~"'!"'''1.1.~ ;..~.x. . .~.
I--
-...Q.:J
S" .. F~H
For the computed value of S,. , the value of i is read from tbe stability chart for the given value of'm.
Tables 18.1 and 18.2 give the values of stability numbers.
Thble 18.1. StablUty Numbers (see Ag. 18.13)
~ 0"
'" 10" ,," 20" 25"
..,,'
90"
75 0
3D"
"
0 .261
0.219
0.191
(0.170)
(0.156)
0.239
0.195
0.162
0.136
(0.110)
0.218
0.173
0.138
0.108
0.075
0.199
0.152
0.116
0.083
0046
0.182
0.134
0.097
0.062
0.025
0.166
0.117
0.079
0.044
0.009
15" (0.145) (0.068) 0.070 (0.023)
[Note. figures In brackets are for ttie most dangerous Circles through the toe when a more dangerous arcle eXIsts
below the toej.
STABIUTY OF SLOPES .,5
ThbIe 18.2. StabUity Numbers for CohesIve soils (IJm .. 0)
a nd i :so 53° (see Flg. 18.14)
.,."" 0.181
0.164
0.181
0.174
0.181
0.177
0.181
O.lSO
0.181
0.181
30" 0.133 0.164 0.172 0.178 0.181
225" 0.113 0.153 0.166 0.175 0.181
,,"
75"
0.083
0.054
0.128
O.OSO
0.150
0.107
0.167
0.140
0.181
0.181
tan,. _
.
L
'f..
(-F1• tan <p') ... (1830)
or ,
...
_ L, _ L
'fsDI'" 'isa
(i:.)
F.
... [18.3O(a)1
{o, (b,
F~ .. l:c AL ;i Ntan ;
... (18.31)
srADILITY OF SLOPES ,>7
cL,,+tan,IN
If c and +are oonstant, F, - ~T .. . 18.32)
trial circles are taken or. this line shown as 0", a and 0'. The factors of safety obtained when these were the
trial centres are genernlly plotted ao; nonnals to the line AB to obtain a curve of F•. The centre axrespooding
to the minimum factor of safety indicates the most ailical circle.
For a purely cohesive soil (, - 0), the point A itself represents the centre of most critical circle.
The Swedish circle method is a general method of slope stability analysis. It can be used for non~
homogeneous soil masses, stratified deposits, fully submerged or partly submerged conditions. 'The method is
also applicable when seepage occurs and pore pressure develops in the soil ma<>ses, as explained taler.
However, the method is necessarily an approximate one, as it neglects the effect of forces ac'Jng on the
sides of the vertkal strips. Forunalely. the method errs on the safe side, i.e. the fador of safety ootained is
generolly less than thai obtained from the more accurate methods, such as Bishop's method, which also
consider the forces on the sides of the vertical strips.
Use of N-Cune and T-Curve
The values of l:.N and IT in Sq. 18.31 can also be detennined by drawing N and T curves. The sector
AnD (fig. 18.17) has been divided into 6 slices having equal width. The weight W of each slice is
proportional to its central ordinate (Le. height at mid-width), shown dotted. The weight of each slice is
The value of IW can be determined by drawing a rectangular plot of width b and having boundary
ordinates 1 b l2 .. . etc. as abscissae. In the case of last slice being of widtb mb, the last ordinate is multiplied
by (1 + m)/2 before plotting. The area of the diagram is proIX'rtional to IW.
If the vertical ordinates are resolved along the normal and tangential directions, the N-components and
T..c;omponents a(e obtained. The rectangular plot of N-components is then drawn, tak.ing the width of the plot
equal to tbe width b of the slice [Fig. 18.18 (b)]. The normal oortlIX'nents N"N2o etc. are plotted as abscissae.
Likewise., the rectangular plot of T-comIX'nents is drawn. In T-plot, as Tl oomIX'nent is negative, it is
plotted in the opposite direction. The net area of T- plot is shown hatched [Fig. 18.18 (c)]. The values of
460 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
TN and IT are obtained using Eqs. 18.34 and 18.35, where "( is the unit weight and AN and AT are the areas
of tbe N.plot and T- plot, respectively.
The rectangular plot method greatly simplifies the calculations for determinations of the areas of N and
T- diagrams. It may be noted tbat the weights in the rectangular plot are proportiona1 to cod ordinates., and
not the mid-ordinatcs.
18.13. STABILny OF SLOPE UNDER STEADY SEEPAGE CONDmONS
The stability of slopes of an earth dam is investigated for the steady seepage conditIons, sudden
drawdown conditions and during construction conditions. The steady seepage condition is coosid\%ed in Ibis
section. When the rescNOir on the up>lream of the dam is filled, water starts seeping through the dam. After
sometime, the steady seepage oonditiol'l'> arc established and a well-defined phreatic line is formed. The soil
below the phreatic line is saturated and subjected to pore water pressure.
On the upstream slope, tbe seepage forttS are directed inwards and hence: tend to increase the stability.
However, on the down-stream slope. the direction of the seepage forces is such that they decrease tbe
stability. 1be steady seepage condition is, therefore, aitical for the downstream slope of an earth dam. Fig.
18.19 (0) shows the downslream slope of an earth dam provided with a horizontal fIlter al its loe. The flow
net is drawn using the methods discussed in Chapler 9 .
'The boundary pore pressures acting on the slip surface arc oblained from the flow net. Fig. 18.19 (b)
shows the enlarged view. The pore pressure", at point-l where Ihe first cquipotentialline (h/9) cuts the slip
surface is equal to the vertical distance between the point-l and the point P where the equi(K)l:entiai line
intersects the phreatic line As the pore pressure acts normal 10 the surface, a line equal 10 "I is drawn normal
10 the slip surface at point-!' likewise, the pore pressure "2 at point-2 is found. The pore pressure diagram
is then drawn joining Ihe extremities of all these lines. The pore pressure diagram is shown hatched in Fig.
18.19 (b) . Eq. 18.32 can be used to detcnnine tbe factor of safety. However, in this case the IOtal weight of
the slice is due to bulk\.unit weight above the phreatic line and the saturated unit weight below the phreatic
line. The N-componcnt of the weight is reduced due to pore pressure below the phreatic line. 1lterefore,
o
..
8h
(b)
EQUIPOTENTIAL LINES
Fig. 18.19. Stelldy Seepl'lge Condltions.
srABILITY OF SLOPES 461
Fig. 18.20.
The pore water pressure (u) can also be estimllled using Skempton pore pressure coefficients (Otapter
13). Fig. 18.20 sbows the upstream slope of a dam . The pore.water pressure at ally point P before drawdoWll
is given by
"" - y.(h + h. - h') .•• (18.40)
where h = height of soil above P, h"" :c: height of woter column above P,
and h' = loss of bead due to seepage, indicated by the equipotential line passing through P.
It is assumed that the total major principal stress (oJ at P is due to the weight above.
When there in a drnwdown, the major principal stress decreases by
/l01 - -"f""h..,
and the change in pore water pressure is givell by
/lu - O!J.O l - -By..,h..,
where Ii is the overall pore pressure coefficient, related to coefficients A and B, as
jj - 8 [ 1 - (1 - A) ( 1 - !~) 1 ... (18.41)
462 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
Approximate method
An approximate alternative method for investigating the stability of the upstream slope under sudden
drawdown conditions is to oonskler tbe saturated unit weight of soil (or calculating the driving forces
(i.c.l: 1) and the submerged unit weight for calQllsling the resisting forces (i.e. IN') in Eq. 18.32.
Thus F, _ cL Q + ~a; ~IN ... (18.44)
In other words, it is assumed that the full pore pressure acts even after the drowdown and the soil is fully
saturated.
Below the drawdown level, as the water pressure on the slope is still aaing. the submerged unit weight
is used for both the driving forces and the resisting forces. This is similar to the case of a submerged slope
as discussed in Sect, 18.5.
Ir the slope material has high coefficient of permeability, it drains as fast as the reservoir level goes
down, tben both the driving and resisting forces are calculated using the bulk unit weight.
If the slope material is of medium permeability, the saturation line moves downward at a rate depending
on the permeability of the soil. A series of flow nets can 00 drawn for different posillons of saturation line
and the correspooding pore pressures determined and the fador of safely is estimated.
18.15. STABlL1TY OF SLOPES DURING CONSTRUC-nON
When an eartb dam is buill of the soil of low penneability, excess pore pressures develop in the air and
water voids due to compaction carried out during construction or due to its own weight. The pore pressure
developed depends upon the placement water rontent, method of compaction, weight of the overlying layers
and the rate of dissipation of pore pressure during construction.
When the placement water cootent is more than the optimum aod there is 00 proper drainage, injtiai pore
pressure at any point may be as high as 100 percent of the weights of the overlying layers. An estimation of
initial pore pressure may be made using Bishop's method of predicting pore pressure. According to which, the
pore pressure (1.1) at nny point can be written as
... (a)
where Ito :::: initial pore water pressure, and II 1.1 = change in pore water pressure.
In terms of the change in total major principal stress Il 01' Eq. (0) can be written as
1.1 - Uo +B A 01
B
where is the overall pore pressure oocfficient.
The increase in lotal major principal stress II 01 is approximately equal to the fill pressure (yh). Thus
• - •• i (1 h) ... (18.45)
As the soil is partially saturated when compacted, the initial pore water pressure (1.10) is generally
negative. The actual values of Uo and B
depend upon the placement water content. For high water content,
1.10 may be zero. Thus
• - i (1 h) ... (18.46)
The value of B
jn Eq. 18.46 must be that corresponding to the stress condition in the dam. It can be
determined from undrained triaxia l tests on rompactcd specimens with pore pressure measurements.
SfABILn'"Y OF SLOPES 463
Alternative method
The pore pressure during construction can be delermined from Hill's equation:
p" V" ... (18.47)
u - h~ Vw
where p" = air pressure in the voids of a soil mass after initial compaction (absolute pressure).
V" :: volume of air after initial compaction, in percent,
Vw = volume of water after initial compaction, in percent,
he "" Henry's constant of solubility of air in watcr by volumc ( := 0.02 at w aC)
and u :: pore water pressure wilen the soil mass hm; been consolidated to complete saturation.
When the soil is not consolidated 10 complete saturation, the pore pressure can be determined using tbe
following <Xjuation:
... (18.48)
A plot is then made between the total stress 0 and lhe pore pressure IL lbis plQ( is used for the
determination of pore pressures at various points in lhe dam during construction from the values of the tOUlI
stress o. Obviously, lhe total stress at any point in the dam is <Xjual to the bulk unit weight multiplied by the
depth of the soil above.
1-'-1
~t "QI-',
w
"
~
Fc,N'::N-ut
l::tlMe":
H::H-U[
C.)
,b)
Fig. 18.21.
1bcrcfore, l:f;)(I)(T-~WXrXSina
Thus, F, _ c L. + "'n~+~~~:= a- uQ
f~ _ c' L. + "'"~ +/ (N - U) (same as Eq. 18.38)
In Bishop's simplified method, it is assumed thai the ra;uilant forces Oil the sides of the slice are
horizontal, i.e,XI - X2 .. O.
Resolving the forccs in the vertical direction,
W .. N'cnsa + ulcosa + Tsina + Xl - X 2
W- uloosu - C"SinUl
Ic'l+tan,'I
[ coso. +
~
. F,n,.F'
sma
~-----~~t~w~s~m-u----~
___l_t[
IWsina
c'bseca
1+ tan.~:ana
+tan,'(Wscca ubsecal]
1 + tan.;,~taDa
-~
sma
t[IC'b + (IV - ub)tan~'1 1+~
:::'' ON]
I...!.. [c'b + (lY - ub)tmt,']
F, _ ma
... {I8.52)
IWsioa
+'
where ma = (1 + tan tan o./F,) cos a ... (1853)
Sometimes, the pore pressure u is expressed in tenns of pore pressure ratio r.,. In that case,
u _ r.,yh .. r.,(Wlb)
Eq. 18.52 gives the factor of safety of the assumed failure surface. As the factor of snfcty (F,) appears
on both the sides, a process of successive approximation is required. A value of P, is assumed and the
analysis is done. The value computed from Eq. 18.52 is compared with the assumed value. If the two values
466 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
~iffer, the process is repeated till convergence. As the convergence is rapid, only 34 trials arc required. A
c'omputer may also be used.
The effective stress analysis is generally done, but the total stress analysis is also paiSible. The factor of
safety determined by Bishop's simplified method is an underestimate and, therefore. it errs on the safe side.
The error is genemUy less than 2% and not more than 7% even in an extreme case.
18.17. OTHER METHODS OF ANALYSIS
A number of investigators have developed different methods for the analysis of slopes. The methods are
similar in nature to tbe Bishop methods but diller in handling of interstice forces.
(1) Spencer (1967) assumed that the forces on the sides of the slices are parallel [Fig. 18.22 (a)]. The
method satisfies Ihe requirement of equilibrium of forces and moments.
(2) Morgenstern and Price (1965) developed a method in which all boundary and equilibrium conditions
are satisfied. The analysis imposes normal and shear forces on tbe sides and also includes water pressure
effects [Fig. 18.22 (b)]. The method satisfies the requirement of equilibrium of forces and moments which act
on cl slice. The failure surface may be of any shape. .
if
"' ~
, ~~=::l '01-U'
1
,"
~
_ _ E,
(,J (OJ
Fig. 18.22
The soil mass above the failure surface is divided into sections by a number of vertical planes. The
problem is made statically determinate by assuming a relationship between the forces E and X on the vertical
sides, as .
X. ).[(x)E
where I(x) is an arbitrary function describing the pattern in which the ratio XIE varies across the soil. The
value of the scale factor ). is obtained as a part of the solution along with the factor of safely.
The values of the forces E and X and the point of application of E can be determined at each vertical
boundary. For any assumed value of I(x), it is necessary to check that the solution is physically reasonable
and no shear failure or tension develop within the soil mass above tbe failure surface. As the choice of f(x)
docs nOI influence the computed values of the factor of safety by more than S%, for oonvenience I(x) is taken
as unity. The analysis involves a complex process of iteration for the values of ). and Fs. The usc of a
computer is essential. However, slope stability charts which simplify the solution have been developed for the
design office usc.
(3) Bell (1968) developed a method in which alllhe conditions of equilibrium are satisfied. The soil mass
is divided into vertical. slices. The failure surface may be of any shape. The statical determinacy is obtained
by means of an assumed distribution of normal stresses aloog the failure surface. The soil mass is considered
as a free body, as in the case of the friction circle method.
(4) Cousins (1978) developed charts which have applicatioo to 8 wide range of field problems. The cbarts
are quite convenient, as these deal in easily calculated parameters. Cousins charts are based upon the friction
SfABIut:Y OF SLOF£S 467
circle method of analysis discussed earlier. However, !he charts are for a general case. These can be used for
the evaluation of long·term stability analysis in tenns of effeaive stresses. The charts can be used even in
case of tension crncks.
(5) Stability charts for tbe analysis of earth dams under sudden drawdown conditions have been
developed by Morgenstern (1963). The charts are based upon an effective stress analysis using the method of
slices.
18.18. IMPROVING S'D\BILITY OF SLOPES
The slopes which are susceptible to failure by sliding can be improved and made usabJe and safe. Various
me!hods are used to stabilise the slopes. The methods generally involve one or more of the following
measures, which either reduce the mass which may cause sliding or improve the shear strength of the soil in
the failw-e zooe.
(1) Slope flattening reduces the weight of the mass tending to slide. It can be used wherever p<l5Sible.
(2) Providing a berm below the toe of the slope increases tbe resistance to movement. It is specially
useful when there is a possibility of a base failure.
(3) Drainllge helps in reducing the seepage forces and hena: increases the stability. The zone of
subsurface water is lqwered and infiltration of the surface water is prevented.
(4) Densification by use of explosives, vibrotlotation, or terra probe helps in increasing the shear
strength of cohesionless soils and thus increasing the stability.
(5) Consolidation by surcharging, electro-osmosis or other methods help; in increasing the stability of
slopes in rohesive soils.
(6) Grouting and injection of cement or other compounds into specific zones help in increasing the
stability of slopes.
(7) Sheet pilcs aod retaining walls can be installed to provide lateral support and to increase the stability.
However, the melhod is quite expensive.
(8) Stabilisation of the soil helps in increasing the stability of slopes.
In the interest of economy, relatively inexpensive methods., such as slope flattening and drainage control,
are generally preferred.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Dlustratlve Example 18.1. A. long natural slope in an OW!f'C(}nsolidated clay (c' _ 10kN/ m 2, ,' _ 25 0 ,
2
1_ - 20 kNlm ) is inclined at J{r to the horizontal. The water table is at the surface and the seepage is
para/lei tow slope. If a plane slip had developed at a depth of 5 m below the surface. determine the factor
of safety. Take '(... _ 10 kN/mJ.
c' + y' llOO52itant'
Solution. From Eq. 18.17, F~ - ls.Hc:osisini
From Fig. 18.14, for Sit = 0.105 and D, = 1.20, we have j ::; 15°,
D1ustratlve Example 18.4. Determine the foctor of safety with respect to cohesion for a submerged
embankment 25 m high and having a slope of 41r. (c = 4() kN/m 2, lO°and Y6'" = 18 kNlm 3). +..
Solution. From Eq. 18.28, using submerged unit weight,
S _ 40 0.195
IJ Fe )( (18 9.81»( 25 .. ----p;- ... (e)
For += 10° and i = 40°, Table 18.1 gives S" = 0.097 by interpolation.
Therefore, 0.097 = O.;~5 or Fe :::: 2.01.
Illustrative Example IS.5. Determine the /acUJr of safety with respect to cohesion if an embankment 25
m high and having a slope of 40° is subjected to sudden drawdown. (c '" 40 kN/nl, 4' '" 10°, "(,at '" 18
kN/ml).
0.130 ... Fe X ~ )( 25
Fe ... 0.684 < 1.00
·50
The slope is not safe.
DIustrative Example 18.6. Determine the factor of
safety with respect to shear strength of a slope 10 m high and ·40
"-
luwing an inclination of 4()0 of a soil with c '" 30 kN/ml, 4' =
u1' and"( '" 19 kN/mJ. ·30 X
Solution. The factor of safety is obtained by trial and ,
error. Lei us assume F I¥ = 1.30 for the fU'St trial. TI
·20 /
~ ... ta~;:
.to/,~P'
From Eq. 18.4, lao 4'...... 'C
'III . . 7.72°
From Thble 18.1, for t ..... 7.72° and i ... 40°,
S" ... 0.115 100 1-10 I 20 1·30 1.lo0 1·50
Ft -
From Eq. 18.28, 0.U5 .. Fe~H Fig. E·18..
STABIurY OP SlDPES 469
0.115 • Fe )( ~ )( 10 or Fe - 1.37
Ukewise, for F+ =- 1.40, the value of Fc is . found 10 be 1.32 and for F+ ::: 1.20, Ihe value of Fe is
computed as 1.44. Fig. E-18.6 shows the plot between Fe and F+. The line drawn at 45° cuts the plot al the
required point.
From the plot, Fe - F'f • F, - 1.34.
E_18~~.~n;:::m~X=~=t!~;i
3
~ai:t~ ;;:::r ::;;:fo~: i:J~~~:"::;::!I~a~~i:~ ~ !~~~lg~
= 20" and y.: 17 kNlm •
Fig. £-18.7.
Solution. Weight of triangular wedge ABD,
w_ i)( 2.86)( 2.5)( 17 .. 6O.8kN
vertical AO. ,,
I "
'
I
Solution. Length of arc AD. Lo _ 2 ~~ 24 x 65
T
I
I
I
.. 27.21 m I
Actuating moment, Mo .. 2518 x 11 14m ~11
.. 27698kN-m I
1
I
Resisting moment, M, .. c Lo r .. 50 x 27.21 x 24
.. 32652 kN- m :,
Therefore, faaor of safety Fe (- F,) 50'
Fig. E-18.10.
STABIUfY OF SL..QPES 471
The weight of the sou wedge is 15{)() /eN and it oc:ts at a horizorual distance 0/10.3 m from A.
Solution. rsin+_ 22 x sin 15 0 _ 5.1 m.
The friction circle is drawn with a radius of 5.1 m.
T
T_DI,,"m
~
Apl6m 2
7T:16X20
:320kN
--=Flg-.:-C_,'-'S.1--"
472 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION BNGINEBRING
Solution. 'Ilte sliding wedge is divided into 6 vertical slices of equal width of 2 m. The calculations arc
shown in tabular ronn below.
Tuble Example 18.11.
Weiglrt (W)
Sli~ T .. Wsina Nil Wcosa
No. Average WeightW (kN) (kN)
ordillate llidth Volume (kN)
1. O.9m 2m 1.8 m.1 36 36
2 2.4 m 2m 4.8 m) 96 9" 15 94.8
3. 3.6 m 2m 7.2 m) 144 19" 46.9 136.2
4. 4.5 m 2m 9.0 ml 180 29" 87.3 157.4
5. 4.0 m 2m 8.0 m3 160 42" 107.1 118.9
6. l.80m 2m 3.6 ml 72 55" 59 413
1"f" 315.3 kN IN = 584.6 kN
D1ustrutlve Example 18.12. Determine the factor of safety of the slope shown in fig. £-18.12. The slip
surface paucs tllTOugll two layers of soils. The pore water on the slip surface is shawn by the dotted lhll!.
Take y"" =: }O leN/mJ,
T
rI
Fig. &18.12.
STABIUfY OF SLOPES 471
Solution. The sliding wedge is divic\cd into 8 slices of equal width 4 rn. One ver1icalline is drawn aI the
interface of the layers between slices (7) and (8). The weight of each slice is determined from the area of the
slice in the layer and the oorrCS{X>l1ding unit weight of the soiL
The pore water pressure is detennined a.. the vertical ordinate of the dotted line above the curved surface.
The calculations are shown in tabular ronn.
Total length of arc (L.J .. (2 1C x 28/360) x 75 - 36.63 m
Length of arc in I-layer - (36.63/75) x 65 .. 31.75 m
Length of arc in II-layer .. (36.63/75) x 10 .. 4.88 m
1: (N - ul) in 1 layer (lSI to 7th slice) :::;: 2388 k:N
1: (N - ul) in II layer (8th slice) = 198 kN
From Eq. 18.39, F, _ 1:cAL + I.I(~ - ul) tan ,
illustrative Example 18.13. Find the facwr of safety against sliding for the slope shown in Fig. E-18.13,
using Bishop's simplified method.
II Loy«
c:a 40kNlm1
. ;ZOO
__ ;19 kN lm3
I Loyt r
,.0
+sJcf'
"t ,, 21kNI~
Fig. E-18.13.
Solution. The slip circle has been divided into 5 slices; the fIrSt four stices are in Layer I. The widtb of
the first slice ~ 5.6 m and that of other slices is 6 rn.
CaIrulations are done in tabular form. 1be value of mo in oolumn (11) ba.. been oomputoo using Eq. 18.53.
Inu" (1 + tan4"tanalF,)oosa.
For first trial, F, is assumed to be 1.20.
~-"--
m
[c' b + (W - ub)tan ~'J
From Eq. 18.52, F, - -cc,,-"----,;W"'sm""
o -ca- - -
~
~
1.4m 4m 6.6
682
5. 6.0 4m 24.0 480 5.0 m 19' 4.23 211.5 712.9 501.4 +2455
3.6 4m 14.4 274
r-----m- ~
~
6. 4.2 4m 16.8 336 4.2 Itt 28' 453 190.3 618.8 4285 ... 329.1
4.8 4m 19.2
I ::
~
7. 1.6 4m 6.40 128 1.8m 38' 5.08 91.4 386.4 295 + 303.5 "
f.l
>
z
:~
4.8 4m 19.2
I "g
z
8. 2.6 4m 10.4 198 46' 5.75 198 198
~
I T _ UOZ.l 11"
0
z
~
0
~
z
0
SfABILITY OF SLDPES 47>
~
4. 3.0 6.0 18.0 318 3'- 05Tl .776.3 1.088 7443
6.0
8.0
6.4 6.0
48.0
38.4
r-wo
912
1 [ 1 1 1
- 1958.8 0.984)( 176.4 + 1.063 )( 479.8 + 1.107 )( 687.6
- 1.30
The assumed value of P, is not correct. The process may be repeated after taking P, "" 1.25.
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
18.1. What inclination is required where a lilling 12 m high is to be ronstructed having a factor of safety of 1.251
2
The soil has c '" 20 kN/m • +'" l
IS°, '1 = 17.0 tN/m . The stability number for .... = 12" is equal lo 0.063 when
the slope is 30° and 0.098 when the slope is 45·. [Ans. 36°).
l
18.2. A cutting of depth 10 m is to be made in soil which bas c = 30 tN/m2, T = 19 kN/m and • = O. There is a
hard suatum below the original soil swfaa: at a depth of 12 m. fiod the safe slope of cutting jf the factor of
o
safely is 1.50. For D,s 1.20, S,. .. 0.143 for i = JO and S,. • 0.101 for i = 15°. [Ana. 17"].
l
18.3. A vertical OJt is to be made in clayey soil for which lests gave c '" 30 kN/m2, 1 '" 16 kN/m and = O. Fiod +
the maximum height for which the CUI may be temporarily unsupponcd. For +""
0, and i :: 90°, the value of
the stability number is 0.261. [Ans. 7.18 ro]
2
18.4. When is Ihe factor of safety for a 45° slope 12 m rugh in a clay (c = SO kN/m , T .. 18 kN/m and = 0)
l
+
having a rock: stratum al a depth of 12 m below the toe? For Df Z 2.0 and i '" 45·, the wlue of S" is equal 10
0.177. IAos.1.3J
11.5. Determine tbe factor of safety with respect 10 cohesion only for a submerged embankment 25 m high whose
u~m face Iuls an inclination 0145°. 1be soil has the following properties; c :a 40 kN/m2, • = 10°,16. "" 18
l
kN/m . The relevant stability number is equal to 0.108. (ADs. 1.85)
18.6'. What is the factor of safety if the embankment in Prob. 18.5 experiences the effect of sudden drawdown 1 FOI'
...... 4S and j ::: 45°, the value to the stability number is 0.136. [Aos. 0.65]
2
18.7. A CUI 10 m deep is to be mooe in a stratum of rohes.ive soil (c ::E 35 kN/ro , y = 18.5 kN/ml and +..
0). The
bed rod:: is located IS m below the original grouod surface. Determine the factor of safety against failure if the
slope is 30°. For Df::: 1.5 and i " 30°, the stability number is equal to 0.164. [Aos. 1.15]
18.8. An embankment 10 m high is inclined al 35° to the horizontal. A stability analysis by the method of sliocs gave
the follOWing forces:
476 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
T
8m
Fig. P. 18.11
18.12. Determine the faCIO!' of safcly of [he slope given in Prob. 18.11. If too soil has c = 20 kN/m2;
3
+= 15°, Y ::: 20
kN/m . Use the friction circle method.
n. Descriptive and Objective TYpe
18.13. What are the assumptions that are generally made in the analysis of the slability of slopes?
Di~ briefly their
validity.
18.14. What are different fsctM o( safety used in the stability of slopes?
18.1S. What nre differenl types of slope failures?
18.16. Derive an cxpressioo for the (aaor of safety of an infinite slope in a c:ohcsionless soil.
What is the effect of steady seepage parallel to the slope on the stability?
18.17. Discuss the mcthod for dJealng the stability of an inlinire slope in a cohesive soil. What Is ulrical height?
18.18. Describe Culmann's method for the stability analysis or homogeous slopes. What are its limitations?
18.19. Discuss the friaion circle method for the SIlIbility analysis of slopes. can this method be used (or purely
cohesive soil?
18.20. What is a stability number? What is its utility in the analysis of slability of slopes? Discuss the uses of stability
""o1S.
18.21. How a slope is analysed using Swedish circle method? Derive an expresion for the factor of safety.
18.12. Describe Bishop's simplified method. What are its advantages over conventional S..vedisb circle method? Derive
an expression for the factor of safety.
18.23. Discuss the various methods for improving the stability of slopes.
l8.24. Write whether the following statements are true or false.
(a) The friction circle method can be used for 8 non· homogeneous soil mass.
(b) The Stllbility numbels can be used for the analysis of purely cohesionless soil Slopes.
(c) The factor of safety of an infinite slope of a cohesive soil depends upon Ihe height H of the slope.
(d) Culrnann's method assumes that the failure surface is 8 plane.
(I:') The upstream slope of an earth dam is critical during sudden dl"8wdowt1lX1nditions.
(J) Bishop's simplified method oonsIders ali the forces acting on the sides of the slices.
(g) In Bishop's simplified method, a process of successive approximations is required.
(h) The total stress analysis can be used for the stability of slopes.
STABILITY OF SLOPES 471
(!) The r.:onvcntional S..... I,.-dish circle method always cIT'S on the safe side.
IAns. True. (d. (i/), (e), (g),(/.). (,)).
"'SSN~
PA~RE
\...~
ACTIVE
PRESSURE
A,. 19.1.
EARTII PRESSURE TItEORlES 479
subjected 10 any lateral yielding or movement. This case occurs when the retaining wall is firmly fixed al its
top and L.. not allowed to rotate or move laterally. Fig. 19.1. (a) shows the basement retaining walls which
are restrained against the movement by tbe basement slab provided al their tops. Another example of the
ai-rest pressure is that of a bridge abutment wall which is restrained at its top by the bridge slab. The at-rest
condition is aLso known as the elastic equilibrium, as no part of soil mass has failed aocI attained the plastic
equilibriwn.
(2) Active prasure_ A state of active pressure occurs when the soil ma<iS yields in such a way that it
lends 10 stretch horizontally. It is a state of plastic equilibrium as the entire soil mass is on the verge of
failure. A retaining wall when moves away from the backfill, there is a stretching of the soil ma<iS aod the
active state of earth pressure e1tists. In Fig. 19.1 (b). the active pressure develops on the right-hand side wben
the wall moves towards left.
(3) PassIve ~ure. A state of passive pressure exists when the movement of the wall is such lha1 the
soil tends to oompress horizontally. Il is another extreme of the limiting equHibriwn roodition. In Fig. 19.1
(b), the passive pressure develops on the left-side of the wall below the ground level, as the soil in this zone
is compressed when the movement of the wall is towards left. Another example of the passive earth pressure
is the pres>urc acting on an anchor block.
Variation of ]'ressure
Fig. 19.2 (a) shows the variation of eartb pressure with the wall movement. Point B represents the case
wbcr. there is no movement of the waU. It indicates the at-rest pressure.
Point A in Fig, 19.2 (a) indicates the active pressure. When the wall moves away from the backfill [Fig.
19.2 (b)]. some portion of the backfill located immediately behind the waU tries to break away from the rest
of the soil mass. This wedge-Shaped portion, known as the failure wedge or the sliding wedge, moves
downward and outwards. The lateral earth pressure exerted on the wall is a minirnwn in tbis case. The soil is
at the verge of failure due to a decrease in the lateral stress.
1be borizontal strain required to reach the active state of pla5tic equilibrium is very small. Lambe and
Eorth prfSsun~
M~nt
o +
Mowment oway I
II1XfIIiU . rHo Mo"'M\tm ta.\o:Il1Is
moYt'ment
litl_
(0)
Foiluft' wedge
Fig. 192
480 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Wbiunan (1969) have shown that in dense sand, the horizontal strain required is about 0.5%. For example,
for a wall of 5 m height, a movement of 0.025 m would develop active earth pressure.
Point C in Fig. 19.2 (a) indicates the passive pressure. 'When the wall moves towards the backfill [Fig.
19.2 (c», the earth pressure ina-eases. The failure wedge moves upward and inwards.1be maximum value of
the eanh pressure is the passive earth pressure. The soil is at the verge of failure due to an increase in tbe
lateral stress.
Lambe and Whitman (1969) found lhal very lillie horizontal strain (about 0.5%) is required 10 reach
one-half the maximum passive pressure in dense sand, bul much mo.-c borizontal strain (about 5% in dense
sand, and 15% in loose sand) is required to reach the full passive pressure. However, their data are based on
the triaxial shear lest results and Ihe magnitude of the horizontal strains required in the field may be
somewhat different.
It may be summarised that the state of shear failure corresponding to the minimum earth pressure is the
active state and Ihat corresponding 10 the maximum earth pressure is the passive state. These are the two
extreme conditions of pla.<;tic equilibrium. For all intermediate stales when the soil is not in plastic
equilibrium. it is said to be an elaslic equilibrium. The ai-rest conditioo is a special case of an elastic
equilibrium wilen tbe Slale of stress corresponds to the condition where there is no movement. IL indicates the
in-silu condiljons.
Thus
... (19.2)
The stress a.., is usuaUy represented ac; Po. indicating the lateral pressure at rest.
Thus Po - Ko Oz .. (19.3)
II may be noted thaI the oocffident of lateral pressure at rest (XO) relates the effedive stresses. The total
lateral pressure (PII) is equal to the sum of the intergranular pressure (PO) arxl the pore water pressure (u).
Thus Ph .. Po + u ... (19.4)
In Fig. 193, the lateral pressure at depth Z is, therefore.
p, - Ko(yZ - y.Z.) + y.Z. •.• (195)
As Eq. 19.5 indicates, the pressure distribution is lriangular with zero pressw-e at the top (Z = 0). and the
maximum pressure at the bottom of the wall.
Fig. 19.4 (a) shows the pressure distribution when the soil is dry. The pressure at the bottom of the wall
at depth J1 is given by
EARUi PRESSURE TIlEQRIES 481
(o) (b)
Fig. 19.4.
Ph - Ko'YH
The total pressure force per unit length of the wall is given by
p - r.
o
K"yz dZ
In Fig. 19.4 (b). the depth of water table is at depth d below the surface. 'The pressure at depth Z > d is
given by
p, - K" [yZ - y.(Z - d)] + y.(Z - d)
p, - K" yd + K"y'(Z - d) + y.(Z - d)
The pressure at the bottom (Z = 11) of the wall is given by
p, - K" y d + K" y' (H - d) + y. (H - d) ... (19.7)
The total pressure force (P) can be detennioed from the pressure distribution diagram.
If the water table is at the ground surface [Fig. 19.4 (c)], the pressure at the bottom of tbe wall is given
by. laking d = 0 in Eq. 19.7.
Ph - Ko'Y' H + 'YwH ... (19.8)
The resultant pressure (P) acting on the wall is delennined from the pressure distribution diagram.
The point of application of the resultant pressure P is determined from the pressure distribution diagram.
For triangular pressure distribution. it acts at height Hf3 from the base.
19.4. RANKINE'S EARTH PRESSURE THEORY
Rankine (1857) tDnsidered the equilibrium of a soil element within a soil maos bounded by a plane
surface. The following assumptioos were made by Rankine for the derivation of eartb pressure.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 19.6.
p.-OE_DC_CE
As CE - CD _ DC,u,,',
pQ" OC - OCsin,' .. OC(I-sin,') ... (aJ
Also c .... OB .. OC + CB .. OC + OCsiD.'
a~-OC(l+sin,') ... (bJ
IG EARn) PRESSU~E THEORiES 48'
p(J~
From Eqs. (a) and (b),
"0:"" 1 + sin,'
0' p" .. ( ~)
+ sin,'
1 Ov
Ka" ! : :: :: .. l
lan ( 45" - -f) ... (19.10)
-
Movement o f wall
Fig. 19.8.
<II) Passive Earth pressure
The passive Rankine state of plmtic equilibriwn can be explained by considering the element of soil al a
point at a depth of Z below Ihe soil surface [Fig. 199 (0»). As the soil is oompressed laterally, the horizontal
stress (0,,) is increased, whereas the vertical stress (owl remains constanl. Fig. 19.9 (b) shows the Mohr circles.
The circle-! indicates the insitu condition, in which point A indicates the horizontal stress and point B,
vertical stress. With lateral oompressing of the soil, the horizontal stress incrtaSe§ until it reaches a limiting
value greater than the vertical stress, indicated by point A" and the Mohr circle [marked (3)] touches the
failure envelope. The expression for the passive pressure Pp can be obtained as follows. Fig. 19.10, shows the
Mohr circle at failure.
484 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 19.9.
Now Pp " OC+ CE .. OC. CD .DC+ OCsin,'
0< Pp" OC(l + sin,') ... (a)
Also DB .. OC - Be .. DC - CD .. DC - OCsin +'
a~ .. OC(l-sin,') ... (b)
,.
Fig. 19.10,
pp-(!~::~::)o~
or Pp .. Kp"1 Z ...(19.11)
where Kp is the coefficient of passive earth pressure, given by
Kp .. ~ 2 0
: :::: .. too (45 + +'/2) .. .(19.12)
For example, if" . 30". Kp .. 3
1be coefficient of passive pressure (Kp) depeDds upon ,'. '[be pressure distribution is similar to tbal shown in
Fig. 19.4, in which Kp is substituted for Ko.
F.ARni PRESSUR.E THEOR.IES
The angle which the failure plane makes with the major principal plane is equal to (450) + ,'12). As the
major principal plane is vertical, the failure plane make an angle of (45 - *'/2) witb the hori7..onlal (Fig.
19.11) which is the minor principal plane.
When the wall moves towards the back fill, the lateral earth pressure' increases because the resistance
builds up in the direction towards the wall. The pressure reaches a maximum value when the full shearing
1
angIe j to horizontal (Fig. 19.13). The
angle i is known as the angle of surcharge.
The intensity of vertical stress (ov) on the
element is given by
Ov.1(ZbbClJ5i)
OA='¥
OB=Pa
Fig. 19.14.
conditions. lbe vcnical stress o~ is represented by the line OA making an angle i with the horizontal. At any
depth, the value of 0'" is constant and equal to that given by Eq. 19.13.
If the lateral expansion of the soil is suriicicnt to induce the state of active plastic equilibrium, the Mohr
circle must paiS through A and it should be tangential 10 the failure envelope. The origin of planes P is
obtained as the point of intersection of OA with the Mohr circle. As the reader would recollect (chapter 13).
the origin of planes is located by drawing from the point representing a stress (vertical Slress, in this case) a
line parallel to the plane 00 which it acts (plane inclined at i, in this ca<>e). A vertical line through P nus the
circle at B below the o-axis. The conjugate stress, which is the active pressure (PrJ, is represented by DB.
Numerically, tbe conjugate stress is also equal to OP.
p" DB OP OD - DP
From the figure, ... (a)
0:- OX-QA-OD+DA
The ratio p,.lo" is known as the conjugate stress ratio.
Now OD - Oecosi ... (b)
,nd DA • DP • vPC' - DC'
B", PC-FC-OCsin~jI'
,nd IX - oe sini
Therefore, VA • DP • "r("O-=C-s;-n""~''')2-_-(''''OCC=-s'--in-=i)2
_ DC Ysin 2 ,' _ sinz; ... (0)
P. OC oos i OC Vrs~in2~.-'-s-in~2i
From Eq. (a),
0: - OCcosi + OCY Sin2 ,' _ sin'l;
p" cos;_YSinz"_sin2 ;
···(dJ
0: - cos; + Ysin2 " _ sin 2 ;
Z
or p._COSi_VCOSZi_COS +, (lZCOSI)
Cl.)Sj + VCl.)S2j _ cu2 t'
or P. - K.yZ ... (19.14)
where K. is the coefficient of active pressure. given by
. cas j _ "rCOS--.,7j ---COS--",,-:
..
. .. (19.15)
K .... COSI X cos; + VCOSZj _ fXYi>2+'
In must be noted that P. is parallel 10 the inclined surface.
For the special case, when i = 0
K _ l....=...!!!!.£
(same as Eq. 19.10)
• 1 + sin 41'
The conjugate stress in thai case become principal stresses, as already discussed.
Direction of fliliuR planes
The inclination of the major principal plane is indicated by the line PE in Fig. 19.15. It makes an angle
9 1 with the horizontal. The lines PF and PP indicate the failure planes. 1be failure plane PF makes an angle
III with the horizontal.
Fig. 19.1S.
From the triangle PEG, the exterior angle, 8/1 .. III + 8 1
al- 8/1- 8 1
where 8/1 is the angle which the failure plane PF makes with the major principal plane, and is equal to
(45' + .'/2).
0
Thus al - (45 + .'12) - 8 1
1p ..
. _I ( sin
sm
i)
sin,' ... (19.1~
The other failure plane PF' makes an angle (X2 with the horizontal, which is given by
(XI- Bf2+ BI
(Xz .. (45 0 + ,'/2) + ('$ - 1)/2 ... (19.1~
(b) Passive Earth Pressure. This case is similar to lhe one for the active case with one basic differeno:
that the vertical stress is the smaller of tbe two conjugate strc..'ises. In Fig. 19.16, OA represents the vertical
stress (a~). The point P shows the origin of planes, and DB represents the passive pressure, From the figure,
OA= by
08=,.
Fig. 19.16.
ee. DB OP OD+DP
a~-OA-OA-OD-DA
Now OD .. DCoosi
and DP _ DA _ y'7(A:::C):;-j---;'(DC)==' _ ,; (FC)' _ (DC)'
... (19.1~
HARTIi PRBSSURB THEORIES 489
where Kp is given by
~A..oR
P. PLANE
1i'ig.19.17.
The inclination of the failure plane PF with the horizontal is equal to ~ oo!ained from the relation
8/1-a..z+ e2
where ell is the angle which the failure plane PF makC!S wilb the minor principal plane
Thus ~ .. ell - 82
or a, - (45
0
- ,'12) - (~) ... (19.21)
'$" 8m
._,( sin,'
Sini) . ..(same ~ Eq. 19.11)
The other failure plane PF' makes an angle al with the horizontal. given by
at .. 81l + 81
a, _ (45 0
- ,'12) + ( ~) ... (19.22)
(c) Pressure DlstribuUon. Fig. 19.18 shows the p~re distribution when the soil surface is inclined at
'90 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENOINEERJNO
Fig.19.18.
an angle i. The lateral pressure is parallel to the soil surface. The maximum pressure occurs at the boUom of
the wall and is given by p. where p .. Po in aa.ive case and p .. Pp in passive case.
From Eq. 19.14, Po .. Ko YII
oos; - " co~,2; _ C(62.'
Po - cos; 005; + "rxlflj _ cos2 ,' yH
The depth Zc is know n as the depth of tensile aack.. The tensile stress eventuaUy causes a ttack to from
along the soil-wall interface.
The pressure at the depth H is given by,
pQ - KQyH - 2c'..t'K;.
Pressure DistrlbuOon
Fig. 19.21 shows the pressure distribuHon against tbe retaining wall. The total pressure on the retaining
wall of height H is given by integration of Eq. 19.25 as
fig. 1921.
P.-r. (K.yZ-2e'VK.)dZ
wall has a height of 2Z". the total earth pressure is zero. This height is known as the critical height (He).
H, _ 2Z, ... (1931)
If the height of an unsupported vertical alt is smaller than He' it should be able to stand. However, the
conditions in unsupported vertical cut are different from those near a retaining wall. In the vertical cut, the
lateral stress is everywhere zero, whereas in the retaining wall, it varies from - 2c' ffa to + 2c VK;. Because
of this difference in the stress condition, the safe height of the vertical cut is slightly smaller than Ilk'lt given
by &j. 19.3l.
Substituting the value of Ze from Eq. 19.27,
He - 2 x 2e'/(.,..rK;.) - 4e'/(.,VK;) .(19.32)
For t' .. 0, He - 4e'l., ... (19.33)
Fig. 19.22.
. , CD (01 - 0))/2
sm~ "Ci-c'cot~+(ol+o)12
(01 - 03) .. (01 + a)sin t' + 2c'cos~'
WhenZ=O. pp-2c'vx;,
When Z = II, PI' - YII Kp + 2 c' YK.; ... (19.36)
The pressure, unlike active case, is positive throughout the depth. Tbe total pressure on the retaining wall
of height 11 is given by
PI' - ifl(yI-lKp) + 2c'..rK; x /I
(0) lb)
Fig, 19.24.
(1) Weight of the wedge (lV).
(2) Reaction R on the slip surface BD.
(3) Reaction PI> from the wall.
It may be noted that, at failure conditions, the shearing resistance on the failure surface is fully mobilised
and the reaction R bas the maximum obliquity. It is therefore inclined at an angle ¢l'to the nonnal to the failure
plane. Further, PI> acts upward, and it is inclined at an angle 6 with the normal as shown ill Fig. 19.24 (a).
Fig. 19.24 (b) shows the force triangle. As the magnitude of one force (viz. weight W) and the directions
of all three Caras are known, the force triangle can be completed. TIle magnitude of Ptl is detennined from
the force triangle. The pressure acting on the wall is equal and opposite to PII'
TIle procedure is repealed afier assuming an other failure surfacc. The surface that gives lbe malrimum
vaJue of p. is the critical failure plane, and the C()(l'eSpooding force is the active foroe.
Coulomb's method does not give the point of application of the resultant earth pressure (P~. 1bc point
of application is found to be approximately at the point of intersection E of the back of the retaining wall
with a line CE drawn from the centroid C of the failure wedge and parallel to tbe failure surface. As this
procedure is cumbersome, for convenience, the pressure distribution is sometimes a<iSumed to be hydrostatic
OIl the bade of the wall. and the resultant pressure P tl is assumed to act at one-third tbe height of the wall
from the base.
The follOWing points should be carefully noted while using Coulomb's theory :
(1) For most practical cases, the backfill moves down relative to the wall in the active case, and,
therefore, the active force PI> is inclined at angle 6 below the normal as shown in Fig. 19.24 (a),
However, if the wall is supported on a soft, compressible SOil, it may sctUe to such an extent lhat the
movement of the wall will be downward relative to the back.ftll and the relative movement of Ihe
wedge will be upward. In such a case, the force P. would be inclined at an angle 6 above the oonnal
10 the wall.
(2) The angle 6 is the friction angle between the soil and the wall It may be dctennined by means of a
direct shear test. For concrete walls, 6 is generally taken as 2/3,'. The value of 6 cannot exceed ,',
because in that case the failure will ocrur in soil.
IC the friction angle 6 is zero, and tbe wall is vertical and the ground surface is horizontal, the
Coulomb method gives identical results with tbe Rankine method.
(3) Coulomb's theory assumes the failure surface to be a plane. TIle actual failure surface is slightly
curved. Fortumltely, for the active case, the error is' srnan, and therefore the failure surface may be
assumed to be plane without any significant error.
496 001L MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
rH
J~ Fig. 19.25.
W_~xBExAGXY
TalciogAG _ m. and BE = L, we bave W - ~L x m x 'f
Now AD - H/sinp.
From triangle ABG, ~ _ sin (180" - (Il + a)] - sin(p + 0)
BG m
From triangle ABO,
sin(~ + a - 90')· sin(~ + a)
BG _ msin(p + a - 90 0 )/sin(j} + 0) ...(4)
GE m
From uiangle AGE,
sin (90° - a + i) - sin (<< - I)
GE' . m sin (90" - a + ,) ...(e)
sio(a - i)
Substlluting the values of m, 00 and GE from Eqs. (c), (4) and (e) In Eq. (b~
Sinm + a - 9(
0
) sin (90 0 - a + I)]
)( [ sin(p", a) + sin(a I)
The active pressure force PtJ will be a maximum when the failure plane makes an angle a with the
horizontal such that
iJPfi .. a
au
Mullcr-Drcslau gO\'c the solution, which is quite complicated. lbe maximum value of PtJ thus obtained is
Coulomb's active force, given by
... (19.38)
. ' • . (0_
sm p SID P
5)[ 1 +
./SinW+6)SinW-Oj
V sin (P _ 6) sin (~ + I)
The lioc of action of P" wilJ be at a height of 11/3 above the base of the wall and it will be inclined at
an angle (I to the normal drawn to the back of the wall.
Fig. 19.26.
498 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 19.26 shows the graphical oonstrudion. The line BD is drawn at an angle q.' to the horizontal. The
line BL, drawn at an angle" with the line BD. is known as the earth pressure line. The angle 'tV is equal to
(~ - 5).
A semi-circlc BMD is drawn on BD as diameter. The line AH is drawn parallel to BL, intersecting the
line BD at J!. A perpendicular HM is drawn at H. intersecting the semi-circle at M.
With B as centre and 8M as radius, an arc MF is drawn, intersecting DD at F. The line FE is drawn
parallel to BL, intersecting the ground surface at E.
With F as centre and FE as radius, an arc is drown to intersect BD at N. The line BE represents the
critical failure plane.
The total active pressure P" is given by
P D - Y (areaoflriangleNEF)
p. _ y (112 x NF x x) ... (19.40)
where x is the perpendicular distance EG between E and BD.
Proof. The proof of Eq. 19.40 is as under:
The triangle BEF and the force triangle in Fig. 19.24 (b) are similar. Therefore,
p.
W '" EF
/iii or Po " W
(EF)
BF ... (a)
W - l~xLxm-lxLx~-t.,L~-~ ...(d)
where m is the perpendicular dislance from A to BD.
From Eqs. (a), (b), (e) and (d),
Po" t 1 L (m - x) (L ~xdx)
For maximum value of po. iJiJ:o .. 0
(L - dx) (me - 2cx) - (m - x) ex (-d) - 0
IX mL - 2xL + <IX' - 0
0' m L - xL .. xL - dr
~ (m - x) - ~ (L - dx)
EARTH PRESSURE THEORIES 499
- 'f x t x BF x x x EFIBF
or PtJ-txYXEFXX ... (19.41)
AH AB
From triangle flAB,
sin (180° - ~ - ") - sin,!,
500 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
BH_AB~
sin'!:'
BD ~
From triangle ADD,
Ali - sin(ip' - i)
BD - AB~
sin ($' - i)
The ratio AD/ED can be written as
* _ ~+ 1
M; - ~ Bfl/BD
Therefore, ~ .. "BI-IIDD + 1
EP2=AFr x 1
(~BIIIBD + 1)'
Substituting the value of All, 811 and DO,
EF2"AIf[~f x 1
SIO'\j.t [V~'~l]'
sin(~ + ,) +
SID1p
[v,in"" + 6)';0(<1>' -
Sln'l'sm(p + I)
.J + 1]'
where
EAR'm PRESSU.RE THEORIES SOl
2
As'l'.~-b, K" _ sin (~ + ,') 2 ... (same as Eq. 1939)
Fig. 19.27
(1) From point B (Fig. 19.27), a line BD is drawn at an angle t' to the horizontal. As the weight of the
wedge is plolted along this line, it is also known as the weight line.
(2) A line BL is drawn at an angle 'll' with the line BD, such that'll' _ 1.1 - fi, where P is the angle which
the back fare makes with the horizontal and 6 is the angle of frictioo.
(3) A failure surfare OF is assumed, and the weight (W) of the failure wedge ABF is computed.
(4) The weight (W) of the wedge is plotted along BD such that BP = lV.
(5) A line PQ is drawn from point P parallel to BL to intersect the failure surface BF at Q.
(6) The length PQ represents the magnitude of P" required 10 maintain equilibrium for the assumed
failure plane.
(7) Several other failure planes llF", BF', BF" " etc. are assumed and the procedure rcpc.'lted. Thus the
points Q", Q', Q"', etc. are located.
(8) A smooth auve is drawn joining the points Q", Q, Q',Q"', etc. The curve is known as CUll1llllUl's line.
(9) A line (shown dotted) is drawn tangential to the Culmann line and parallel to BD. Point T is the
lXlint of tangency.
(10) The magnitude of the largest value (Pawl) of P" is measured (rom the tangent point T to the line BD
:) and paralielto BL. It is equal 10 Coulomb's active pressure (P.. ).
(11) The actual failure plane passes through the point T (shown dotled).
meet of Unlronn Surcharge or Une loud
Cuimann's method can be easily extended to include the eITed of uniform surcharge or the line load
applied to the backfill. Each such iood that falls within the assumed failure wedge is included by adding it to
the weight of the failure wedge.
502 SOIL MECHANICS AND fOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 19.28.
Fig. 19.28 shows the modification when a line load q' acts on lhe baclUlil. The Culmann line upto point
Q .is similar to the case when there is no line load. However, at point Q. it becomes discoo.tinuous, m
suddenly the load of the wedge is inc:rea..ed due 10 line load q'. In this case, tangents are drawn to the two
segments of the a.uve, and the value of Po is determined. The value of (Po + !J.PJ is measured from the line
BD to the maximum point on the Culmann line that includes the line load.
l!Ul. COULOMB'S ACTIVE FARTH PRES:SURE FOR COHFSIVE SOILS
'q
The Coulomb wedge theory ~n be extended 10 oohesive soils. In addition to the three forres (W, p .. aDd
R) oonsidered for the cohesionless soils in the preceding seclioos, there are two more forces, namely. (1) tbe
cohesive force C acting on the failure plane BE (Fig. 19.29), (2) the adhesive force CD acting on the back. of
~ ~
Co
o
0) ,.
Fig. 19.29.
the wall. In all there are 5 forces which keep the wedge in equilibrium. The resultant pressure Plan the bad
of the wall acts at an angle 0 to the nonnal.
The force polygon for the 5 forces is shown in Fig. 19.29 (b). The magnitude of W is determined from
the weight of the wedge ABE. The magnitudes of C and Cn are respectively c x BE and c n x AB where c
and c.. are unit cohesion and unit adhesion. Knowing the directions of all the five forces and the magnitudes
of 3 forces, the force polygon is completed as shown.
The total pressure p .. on the wall is the vector sum of PI and C... By analysing several trial wedges, the
maxinium value of PQ can be determined.
iNO 503
The resultant pressure P fJ is assumed to ad on the back of the wall at the point of intersectioo of a line drawn
parallel to the critical surface and passing through the centre of gravity of the wedge, with the back of the wall.
For convenience, sometimes it is taken at a point at one-third the height of the wall from its base.
Note. (1) Sometimes, the resultant pressure 00 tbe wall is taken as maximum value of Pl' without
combining it with C...
(2) In oobcsive soils, tension cracks develop to a depth of Z~. It is generally assumed thaI upto depth of
lension crack, no cohesion, adhesion or friction acts.
19.12. TRIAL WEDGE METHOD
The trial wedge method assumes that the rupture surface is plane. The trial wedge method is a general
method wbicb can be used to oompute active pressure and passive pressure for both Rankine's condition and
Coulomb's condition. The method can also be applied 10 the cases when the soils are cohesive. The trial
wedge method for oomputing Coulomb's active pressure for cohcsionless soils is discussed below.
int
JT~a
NO
ne w ,
b I: (Pa)max
IX! '-PRESSURE
he
(a) " lOCUS
of
(b)
Fig. 19.30.
In Fig. 19.30, the line BF sbows an assumed failure plane. 1be wedge ABF is held in equilibrium by the
reaction R ooing OIl tbe rupture plane BF and the force PfJ • The force P fJ acts at obliquity 6 below the oonnal
to oppose the movement of the wedge. The reaction R acts with obliquity +'
below the normal.
The force triangle abc is shown in Fig. 19.30 (b). The valuc of PfJ is detennincd from the force triangle
as the distance be.
Another trial surface, such as BF' is assumed and the force triangle a b' c' is drawn. A common vertical
line for the weights is taken for all the force triangles. The value of p ... is again determined.
The procedure is repealed, taking scveral leial planes, and the oorresponding force triangles are drawn and
the values of P fJ determined in each case.
A curve, called pressure locus (shown dotted) is drawn through the points of intersections c, c', etc. of
P fJ and the corresponding R. The maximum pressure vector (PJmax gives the magnitude of the Coulomb
cit. active JXC&"ure. The failure plane corresponding to this vector is the actual failure plane. However, it is
difficult to localed the failure plane precisely.
The above procedure is general. Various modifications can be made as under:
(1) If the adive pressure corresponding to Rankine's condition is required, the plane AB on which the
pressure is computed is vertical. lbe resultant pressure on tbis plane is parallel to the ground surface.
The rest of tbe procedure remains unchanged.
(2) If the ground surface is irregular, the trial wedge method can still be used. Of oourse, there would
be some difficulty in calculating the weight Wof the wedge.
504 SOIL MECHANICS AND rOUNDA110N ENGINEERING
(3) The method can also be used to determine the active pressure against the back: of the wall if the back
fill carries a surcharge load distributed over the ground surface or a line load 3Cting on tbe fill. The
weight of the wedge would include all such loads.
(4) If the soil is oohcsivc, the force polygon would also include tbe cohesive Carre C on tbe failure plane
and the adhesive force CD on the wall.
I! may be noted Ihnl the trial wedge method does not give the point of application of Ptr 1llc pressure
variation is assumed to be triangular and it is assumed thot P" aas at onc~third height. However, in irregular
ground surface, the pressure variation is not triangular and it would result in some error.
19.13. COUWMll'S PASSIVE EARTII PRESSURE FOR COllESlONLESS SOlLS
'rbc failure surfucc in Coulomb's passive
Slate is assumed to be a plane. Fig. 19.31 shows
the case when the passive conditions develop. In
this case, the failure wedge moves upwards. The
directions of Rand Pp which oppose the
movement are also shown. The reaction R acts
at 41' to the normal in the downward direction
aod the reaction prcs.sure Pp acts at an angle b to
lhe normal in the downward dircaion.
The procedure for computing Coulomb's
passive pressure is similar to one for the active '------'==¥t:::..._
case (Sect. 19.8) However, there is one basic
difference. In this case, the critical failure
surface is that which gives the minimlllli value
10' I.,
of Pp • fo1g.19.31.
Fig. 19.31 (b) shows the force triangle. The value of Pp is determined from this triangle. The procedure
is repeated aller assuming a new trial failure surface. The minimum value of Pp is the (".ou!omb passive
pressure. Using the procedure similar to that for the active case, it can be shown that the passive prc.c;.sure is
given by
... (19.42)
Kp _ sir12(p - 41') 2
where ... [19.42(a)1
The resultant passive pressure Pp octs at a height of U/3 measured from the bottom of the wall. It would
be inclined at an angle b to the normal. as shown in Fig. 19.31. However, when the retaining wall moves
up relative to the soil, the friclion angle b is measured below Ule oorma! and b is said to be negative. The
negative waU friction produces a value of passive pressure lower than that for the usual positive wall
friction.
It is worth noting Ihal the wall friction decreases the active pressure, but it inacases the passive pressure.
Moreover, the wall friction has a greater influence on the pac;sive pressure than on the active pressure. When
1)exceeds II.J .', Coulomb's assumption of plane failure surface is not justified in the passive case. It gives
much greater value of Pp compared to that obtained for the actual curved surface. As the passive pressure is
generally required to provide the stability 10 a rel.:lining wall subjected to the active pressure on the other side,
the higher value of Pp obtained from the plane failure surface in unconscrvative or unsafe. For such cases, the
failure surface should be I.:lken as a logarithmic spiral or a circular arc as explained in Sc.ct. 19.14.
10 BARnI PRESSURI3 THEORIES "JS
:X Rchbo.no's construction. Rchbann's construction can be used for the dclcnninnlion of the p.'lSSive
pressure. 1I0wever, in this case, Ihe +-line is drawn at an angle - +' (i.e. below horizontal) (0 intersect Ihe
extension of ground surfoce at point D.
Culmonn method. '[he Culmann method and trial wedge method may also be used. From a series of
scvernl force triangles corresponding 10 the various trial surfaces, a pressure locus or a Culmann line for
pussivc pressure is obtained. The Coulomb passive pressure is the minimum value of pressure so obltlincd.
19.14. PASSIVE 1'RESSURE UY 'I1tE FRICTION CJRCLE Ml!.lHOD
/I.s discussed above, Ihe rupture surfuce cannOI be tlSSumcd 10 be a plane in Ihe passive case, especially
when [, > t'/3. as il givcs uns.'lfc values of the passive pressun:. The actual rupture surface resembles more
closely a log-spiml in such 0 case. Tcr13ghi's general wedge theory (1943) enn be used to determine the
passive pccssurc. However, Ihe melhod is quite involved :md beyond the scope of Ihis lext. The friction circle
method is somcwhot easier and is described below for both cohesionless aod oohcsive soils.
(0) Cohcslonlcss Soli
TIle lower portion DF of the slip surface DFD is assumed to be an arc of a circle which joins, without
brcnk, the plane slip surface FD [fig. 19.32(a)]. The plane slip surface portion FD is inclined at (45 0 - ,'/2)
to the horizonlIlJ. It is assumed that the upper portion CFD of the sliding wedge AnD is in Rankine's passive
o
eirel~
T
1 I,)
Ib) 'd
Ag. 19.32(0), (b) and (c)
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENOINEERlNO
stale of plastic equilibrium. Planes AF and DF are the boundary failure planes of the Rankine's passive zone
MD. The plane FD is tangential to the cirOJiar arc BF at F.
Let US consider the equilibrium of the free body ABFC [Fig. 19.32 (b)]. The body is in equilibrium under
4 forces.
(1) Weight Wof the free body ABFC of soii
(2) Resultant pressure P due to Rankine's passive zone CFD.
(3) Reaction R on the curved surface.
(4) Passive force PI"
The friction circle method uses the OODCCpt that the reaction farre R acting along the failure arc acts at
an angle " with the normal, and is therefore tangential to a circle of radius r sin .' drawn at the centre of
the failure arc. Thus the resullant reaction R is tangential to the friction circle. Actually, R is tangential to a
circle of radius K r sin ,', where K is a factor Slightly greater than unity, but for oonvenieoce K is taken as
unity.
The Rankine passivc pressure P acts on plane CF at a hcight of h/3, where h is equal to the beight CF
and is given by P =tKpyh2.
The passive pressure Pp acting on AB is also asswncd to act at a height H/3, where H is the beight of
the wall.
The weight W of the wedge ABFC is determined from its area and the unit weight of the soil.
Knowing the magnitudes and directions of Wand P, their resultant S can be determined as shown in Fig.
19.32(c). Now tbe system is reduced to 3 forces, namely, Pp'R and S. The three forces must meet at a point
Q for the equilibrium [Fig. 19.32(b)]. Knowing the directions of Pp and R and the magnitude and direction of
S, the force triangle can be drawn and the value of Pp computed.
The procedure is repeated for various trial surfaces and the value of Pp determined. The minimum value
of Pp thus obtained is the required passive pressure. Of oourse. the pressure acting on the wall would be equal
and opposite to PI' so found.
at Frltlion cjrcl~
,f
a
" '-./2
F
)f
l·
,f (0)
e
01
'b)
Fig. 19.33.
C... -c,..xAB
where c'" is the adhesion along the wall.
From the force diagram [Fig. 19.33(b)], tbe resultant C of the force C and the wall cohesion C w is first
determined.
The resultant P/ of the forces C and Pc is then delennined ~ shown. Point (1) in Fig. 19.33 (a) shows
the position through which P/ passes.
Now the forces Pp ' , p~' and R' are coosidered. Point (2) indicates the position through which the three
focccs act. It lies at the inlecscction of P/ and Pp'. TIle direction of R' is now determined as it ~ through
point (2) and is tangential to the fridioo circle. Once the direction of R' is determined, the force polygon in
Ag. 19.33 (b) is completed and the value of PI" is determined.
The total passive pressure is equal to the sum of PI' and pp'. where PI' is the friaional part as calculated
for cohesionless soils and PI" is the cohesion part.
The above procedure is repeated laking different failure surfaces. The failure surface which gives the
minimum value of (PI' + PI") is the required surface, Thus the passive pressure force is found.
19.15. DETERMINATION OF SUEAR STRENGm PARAMETERS
Retaining wall problems represenl plain strain conditions in whiCh intennediate principal stress bas a
'06 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENOINEERING
value in-between the major and minor principal stresses. The angle of internal Cridion (,') used in tbe
computation of latcra1 earth pressure should correspond to the pJ3n(f strain condition. As tbe determination of
this angle in the laboratory is diffiaJll, tbe angle of friction is ' determined from the triaxial test and a
correction is applied.
Bjenum et al (1961) found that the angle of internal friaion in plain strain (fp) is about 10% more than
lIlat in the conventional triaxial leSt (,,).
Meyerbof (1963) gave tbe following relation for +,.
~,- (1.1 - O.l~)~, ... (19.43)
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Illustrative Example 19.1. Determine the toterol earth pressure at rest per unit length. of the wall shown ill
Fig. £·19.1(a).Also detennine the Ideation oflhe resulltv1tearthpressure. TakeKu- I-sin,' amiy ... _lO kN/m'.
Solution. Ko - 1 - sin f' .. 1 - sin 30° .. 0.50.
At point B 0, _ 2 x 17 .. 14 kN/m l , u• 0
Po" Ku 0," 0.5 x 34 .. 17kN/m2
At point C a, _ 2 x 17 + {19 _ to} )( 2 _ 52 kN/ml
Po .. 0.5 x 52 .. 26 icN/m 2
u .. 2 )( 10 .. 20kN/m2
Fig. E·19.1 {b} shows tbe pressure distribution diagram. The diagram ~ been divided into tour parts.
Let P"P2>P) and p. be the lotal pressure due to these parts. Thus
1'·30' T
¥:!1kNlm 3 t,m
.':JO"
L -______ ~'_~_t·_"_·N_'_~_ r
Fig.1!--19.1.
Pi .. ~ )( 17 x 2 .. 17 leN. P2 - 2 )( 17 .. 34 kN
TakeD~::;~v~:;,mple 19.2. Determine the active pressure on the retaining wall shown in Fig. £-19.2 (a),
f',,)S'"
T
F
Y:I7kNlm)
,,)
r
Fig. E-19.2.
Illustrative Example 19.3. Determine the active pressure on the wall shown in Fig. £-19.3, using
Rankine's theory.
Solution. From Eq. 19.15,
. CDS i _ .Joos2i _ cos2"
K,," COSl x cos; + .Joos2, _ cx>s2,'
2 0
K .. ros IS" Ie cos IS" - .Jcm/ISo cos 30 .. 0.373.
.. cos 15° + vCDS l l5° cosl300
510 SOIL MBCHAN1CS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
,.
'.
T
'm
.=30·
'1:19 kNlm3
'13 m
...l
Fig. E-19.3.
1
From Eq. 19.23, P., .. kK., yH'l .. k)( 0.373 )( 19.0)( (4)'l - 56.7kN
lhc active pressure aas at a height of 4/3 m and inclined at 15° to normal
,
Dlustrative Example 19.4. Determine the stresses at the
top and the bottom of the cut shown in Fig. E-19.4.
Also determine the maximum depth of potential aack: and
. ' ~ 12°
the maximum depth of unsupported excavation. c: . 20k Nlm2
Solution. From Eq. 19.25, p .. .. ~ "'t Z - 2 c' VK;, ... . 18 kN/m3
where
Thus
or
AttopZ=O,
K.. - / : ~i~ l~~o
I -1 14.8 r-
At bottom Z = 4, Pa .. 14.8 1cN/ m'l Fig. E-19.4.
From Eq. 19.27, depth of aack,
LJl c.)
Fig. E·19.S.
5.83Z - 5.77 .. 0 or Z .. 0.99 m
At bottom Z "" 5 m, PQ .. 5.83 x 5 - 5.77 .. 23.38 lcN/m2
Pa .. t H2 K 2e' H VK;, 2
1 Q
- + (C')2/1
~~
I
.',,30° 2m
c'"O
B 't,,\6kNlm 3
II
.'=24°
c',,(IkNlm 2
t
2m
96
-{:
lel9kNlm 3
1
~4~-J0~
'0' !o,
Ag. E-J9.6.
From Eq. 19.34. Pp .. Kp Y Z + 2e' VK;
At point A. z-o. pp-o.
At point B. Z .. 2 m. a,," 2 )( 16 _ 32 kN/ml
Top layer, Pp .. 3 )( 32 _ 96 kN/ml
Bottom layer, Pp .. 32 )( 237 + 2 )( 10 )( V2.TI _ 100.6 kN/ml
AI point C, a. - 2)( 16 + 2)( (19 - 10) _ SOkN/ml
Pp - 50 )( 237 + 2 )( 10 V2.37 .. 149.3 kN/m 1
u _ 2 )( 10 _ 2OkN/m1
Fig. E-19.6 (b) shows the pressure distribution.
TQ(al pressure P - PI + P2 + P3 + P4
E_19~~.~tr:t~v;s ~,:~e 19.7. Delermine the Coulomb active force on the retaining wall shown in Fig.
i a 15-
"'S-20·
.30·
'¥.11-~ IcN/m3
~.75
Fig. &-19.7.
sm".
t' .
'(.-')[1
sm t' U
</ Sin(+'+6)Sin(+'-i)j'
+ V sin(p 6)sin(P + j)
10 BAR111 PRESSURE THEORIES
K. _ _ _ _ _~~~~:::::::~~,
~
, '750 ' MSO _ 20°) [1
-., • V';0 (30° • 20°) ';0 (30° - 15°) 1
~w-~~w·~
KII .. 0.933 '2 .. 0.548
I_ 3m 3m
f'm
1 Ca)
,. Fig. 8-19.8.
514 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
Fig. E-l98 (b) shows the force diagrams drawn along the common weight line. The pressure locus is
shown dotted.
The maximum thrust is given by P(I - 178.5 leN
D1ustratlve Example 19.9. Determine the QCtive thrust on Ihe retaining wall shown in Fig. E-19.9, using
Cuimann ~ method.
t--2m---J.-lrn---+lm-+-2m---\-t---- 2m---t
T 6m
4:350
J
Y,,20kN/m3
~ ",gOO
~_"O
Ai. E-19.9.
Solution. The line BD is drawn at an angle of 35 0 to the horizonLal. and the line & at an angle 1p =
to the line BD.
In this case, 'I>_~_6_90·_0_90·
~l. B-2. B-3, and B-4 are the four assumed trial failure surfaces. The weights are calculated as un
i
WI - x 2 x 6 )( 20 .. 120kN
t)(
W2 - 4)( 6)11 20 .. 240kN
W• .. tx 8 x 6 x 20 .. 4801cN
The weight (Wo) of wedge AlJO, upto tbe line lood, is 180 kN.
The weight including line load, Wo .. 280 leN
The weights are plotted along the line BD. •
From each of the points SO located on BD, lines are drawn parallel to BL to cut the oorrespond'
assumed failure surface. On the failure plane BO, two points e and e' are obtained, one for wedge without
line load and one for wedge with !he line load:
Culmann's line is drawn joining the points a, e, e', b, C, d. It is a disoonLinuous curve because of the '
load, A tangent is drawn to the Culmann line such that it is parallel to BD. From the point or tangency, a '
EF is drawn parallel to Bt. The length of EF gives the required Pr
PII - 156kN
lING BAR11I PRE$URE THEORIES 515
>sis PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
Fig. P-193,
(b) The shear resistance dtvcloped along the railure surface is a minimum when the active conditions develop.
(e) The Rankine pres~urc is lliways noonnl to the wan surface.
(t!) Culmano's construction ilt more genera! than Rehbann's construction.
(t' ) Culmann's ConSlnll'l ion I:an be used even for passive case.
(/) Coulomb's Iht.'Ol')' always gives conservative results.
(g) For~':: 30". the passive pressure is three limes the octive pressure, accordmg to Rank ine's theory.
(II) The aClIye pressure Increases if a dry soil becomes submerged.
(i) TIle basement walls are gencmlly dcsigned for ai-rest pressure.
(Aos. True, (a). (e). (d), (e), (I)]
(b)1YH 2 Ka .. 2c'H..JI(;/
(cJ~YH2KII- 2(:'Hffi - 2 ¥
«(1)1 yH 2 Ka _ 2c'H..JKa + ~
2 Y
6. The rud ius orlhe friction circle is cqual to
WR~, WR=.
(c) R tan ill (ll) R ill
7. If u uniform surcharge of 120 kN/m2 is placed on the backl111 with ¢I' = 30~. Ihe increa.~e in pressure is
(a) 12 kN/m 2 (b) 30 kN/m2
(el40 kN/m2 {(I) 120 kN/ml
[Ans. I. (a), 2. (b) 3. (a), 4. (a), 5. (d). 6. (a), 7 . (eJI
UNG
::lop.
I. (i»)
20
11he
Design of Retaining Walls and Bulkheads
ltI.l. INTRODUcnON
(0) Des.lgn of Retaining WBlis. Retaining walls are relatively rigid walls used for supporting the soil
mass laterally so that the soil can be retained at different levels on the two sides. The lateral earth pressures
ad.ing on the retaining walls have been discussed in the preceding chapter. The types of retaining walls and
their dcsiWl features are explained in this chapter. However, the design is limited 10 the determination of the
sbear fooces and bending momenrs. Actual structural design is outside the scope of Ihis text.
(b) Bulkheads. Sheet pile walls, or bulkheads, are special type of earth retaining structures in which a
coolinuous wall is constructed by joining sheet piles. Sheet piles are made of timber, steel or reinforced
by concrete and consist of special shapes which have interlocking arrangements. Sheet pile walls are used for
water front structures, canal locks., coffer dams, river protection. etc. Sheet pile walls are embedded 10 the
ground to develop passive resistance in the front to k.eep the wall in equilibrium. \1Irious types of sheet pile
walls and their analysis and design are discussed in this chapter.
ltIJ. lYPES OF RETAINING WALlS
The moot common types of retaining waDs are classified as under:
(1) Gravity RetaLnlng Walls. These walls depend upon their weight for stability (Fig. 20.1 (4»). The
walls are usually constructed of plain ronaete or masonry. Such walls are not economical for large
heights.
(1) Seml·Gravlty Retaining Walls. The size of the section of 8 gravity retaining wall may be reduced
if a small amount of reinforoement is provided near the back face [Fig. 10.1 (b)] . Such waDs are
known as semi*gravity walls.
(3) C.nlUever RetalnLna Walls. Cantilever retaining walls are made of reinforced cement ooncrete. The
wall consists of a thin stem and a base slab cast monolithically (Fig. 2O.1(c)J. This type of wall is
found to be economical upto a height of 6 to 8 m.
(4) Counlerfort Retaining Walls. Counterfort retaining walls have thin vertical slabs, known M
oounterforts, spaced across the vertical stem at regular intervals [Fig. 2O.1(d)]. The counterforts tie.
the vertical stem with the base slab. Thus the vertical stem and the base slab span between the
• (c») counterforts. The purpose of providing the counterforts is to reduce the shear force and bending
moments in the vertical stem and the base slab. The counterfort retaining walls are coonomical for a
height more than 6 to 8 m.
[NOIe : Counterforts are on the side of the back fill).
%OJ. PRINCIPLES OF THE DESIGN OF RETAINING WALlS
Before the actual design, the soil parameters thaI influence the tarth pressure and tbe bearing capacity of
the soil must be evaluated. These include the unit weight of the sou. the angIe of shearing resistance. the
518 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
'0) Id)
Fig. 20.1. Dlffc:n:nt Types of Retaining WIllis.
cohesion intercept and the angle of wall friction. Knowing these parameters, the lateral earth pressure and the
bearing capacity of the soil can be determined. Methods for the computation of earth pressure have been
discussed in chapter 19. The bearing capacity theories are explained in chapter 23. With tbe earth pressure
known, the retaining wall as a whole is checked for stability.
1
Fig. 20.2 shows a retaining wall with a smooth
back face and no surcharge. The active pressure
PQ acts horizontally, as shown. The front face of
the wall is subjected to a ~ive pressure (Pp)
below the soil surface. However, it is doubtful
whether the full passive resistance would develop. H
Moreover, o[ten Pp is small and therefore it may be
li
neglected. This gives more conservative design.
The weight W of the wall and the active
pressure P" have their resultant R which strikes the
base at point D. There is an equal and opposite
reaction R' at the base between the wall and the
foundation. For oonvenience, R' is resolved into the
vertical and horizontal components (R/ and RH').
From the equilibrium of the system,
Fig. 20.2.
'INO DESlGN OF RETAINING WALLS AND BULKHEADS '19
••• (20.1)
where IA =coefficient of fridion between the base of the wall and the soil ( = tan 0).
A minimum factor of safety of 1.5 aga~lDSt sliding is geoerally recommended.
(2) No Onrturnlng
The wall must be safe agaillSt ovenurning about toe. The factor of safety against overturning is given by
F, _ ~ MR ... (20.4)
~Mo
where I MR = sum of resisting moment about toe,
the =
aoo I Mo sum of overturning moment about toe.
<en
.ure In Fig. 20.2, ... (20.5)
The factor of safety against overturning is usually k.ept between 1.5 to 2.0.
I
H
(3) No bearing capadty rallure
The pressure caused by Rv at the toe of the wall must not exceed the allowable bearing capacity of the
soil.
The pressure distribution at the base is assumed to be linear. 100 maximum pressure is given by
p~ - ~ (I + ,.,./b)
The factor of safety against bearing failure is given by
... (20.6)
A factor or safety or 3 is usually specified, provided the settlement is also within the allowable limit.
(4) N. 1 _
1bece should be no temion at the base of the wall When tbe eccentricity (e) is greater than b!6, tension
52" SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
develops at the heel. Tension is nOI desirable. The tensile strength of the soil is very small and the tensile
crack would develop. The effeaive base area is reduced. In such a case. the maximum stress is given by
Rv )
Pma · 3"4 ( b-2e ... {20.8)
T
soil surface should be al least 0.6 m. 1
The base width of the wall is generally
between 0.5 H to 0.7 Hi with an 30 Pa (R.lHtclNE)
average of 211/3.
The earth pressure can be
computed using either Rankine's theory
or Coulomb's theory. For using
Rankine's theory, a vertical line AB is
drawn through the heel point A. II is
assumed that the Rankine active
conditions exist along the vertical line
1
~~el~;;:~r, oteR=~:~iO~:;j~~ Fig. 203. Gravily wall-Rankjne P!usure.
along AD is theoretically justified only if the shear zone bounded by the line AC is not obstructed by the stem
of the wall. where AC makes an angle 11 with the vertical, given by
a - ( 45 +
0
~) - ~ + sin-
1
(s~~n~, ) ... (20.10)
T
section of the retaining wall is divided into rectangles
).8) and triangles for the computation of weigbt and the
determination of the line of action oC the weights. P. (COULOMB)
dt.s
Seml-anvlty Reta1n1na walls. The base width of
the semi-gravity retaining walls is slightly smaller than H
.--
1
of that of a aHTCSpOnding gravity wall. The re;t of the
design procedure is the same as that for gravity retaining
walls.
10.5. CANTD..EVER RETAINING WALLS
Fig. 20.6 shows a cantilever retaining wall. The .
gencml proportions for an overall height of H are also Fig. 2O.S. Grav,!}, wall--Coulomb Pressure.
shown. The top width of the stem is at least 0.3 m. 1be width of the base slab is kept about 2H!3. The width
of the stem at bottom, the thickness of tbe base slab and the length of the toe projection, each is kept about
O.1H.
T Pot (RANKINI
9)
0)
Fig. 20.6. CAntilever Retaining wall.
The earth pressure is computed using Rankine's theory on the vertical plane AB, provided the shear zone
bounded by the line AC is not obstruaed by the stem of the wall The line AC makes an angle" with the
vertical given by Eq. 20.9.
Fig. 20.7 shows the forces ading on the wall. The Rankine pressure Pa acts at an angle i with the
horizontal. It is resolved into the vertical and horizontal 'components Pvand p" .
as shown. The passive
pressure Pp is also shown, but generally it is neglected. For oonvenience, the weight of soil (W~) over the slab
is divided into two pans (I) ,and (2). Likewise, the weight of stem is divided into two parts (3) and (4).
«(I) Factor of safety against sliding
The factor of safety against sliding may be expressed as
IF,
F~ - IFd ... (20.11)
T
o
i
where b = base width, I:V = sum of all the venical forces, Wn W, aDd PI" P" .. P"sin I and
Ph" P"OOSi .
Pp = passive force in the front of the wall (.. 112 Kp2 Y2 Jj2 + 2c2 Vi(,,; D)
where c2. 12 and 4Iz are parameters of the foundation soil.
The factor of safety can also be detennined from Eq. 203 if 1.1. is given. IT the required factor of safety
of 15 against sliding is nol obtained, a base key is generally provided' (Fig. 20.8). The key inaeases the
passive resistance to Pp' where
where Dl is the depth of the boliGm of the key wall (rom soU surface.
Generally, the base key is constructed just below the stem and some of the main steel of the stem is
extended into the key.
The fridion angle th and C2 are generally reduced to about one-half to two-thirds of the values for extra
safety, as the full passive resistance is doubtful.
Factor or safety against Onrturnlng
Eq. 20.4 can be used to obtain the fador of snfety against overturning,
EM,
Fo" T.M"
where 1: MR = sum of the resisting moments about toe,
IMo ::=: sum of the overturning moments about loe.
The only overturning force is P", acting at a height of H/3.
Mo" p lo )( HI3 ... (20.14)
The resisting moments (MR) are due to weights Wb W2:I W). W.. and Ws of the soil and the OOOQ'ete. The
vertical component of pressure P" also helps in resisting moment. lIS resisting moment is given by
Mil" p,,)( b ... (20.15)
Ml +M2 + M) + M.. + Ms + M~
Therefore F,," lo
r
)( H/3
... (20.16)
The factor of safety against bearing capacity failure is given by Eq. 20.7.
20.6. COUNTERFORT RETAINING WALLS
For oounterfort retaining walls, the general proportions of the stem and the base slab are almost the
,,. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
same as that in the cantilever walls. 1be oounterforts arc about 0.3 m thick: and bave the
centre-to-cenlre
spacing of 0.3 H 10 0.7 JI.
The analysis is also similar to that of a cantilever retaining wall. The pressure p_ and Pmln are
determined, as in the case of cantilever walls.
]be basic differeoce between the COW1terfort retaining wall and the cantilever retaining wall is in the
detcnnination of the bending moment and shear forces.
(1) In cantilever retaining walls, the stem acts m; a vertical cantilever fIXed at base whereas in the
CQUoterfort retaining walls, it acts. as a oontinuous slab supported between the counterfocts. 1be slab
has positive momcots in the middle and the negative moments at the supp:>rts. The reinforcement is
provided in the horizontal direction on the front side of the stem in the middle and on the rear side
at the supports. In cantilever walls, the main reinforcement is in the vertical direction at the rear face.
(2) In cantilever walls, the toe slab and the beel slab both act as cantilevers subjected to the upward
pressure. The reinforcement is provided at the bottom face.
In counterf~It retaining walls, although the toe slab acts as a cantilever, tbe heel slab acts as a
continuous slab supported on the counterforts. The main reinforcement is al the lop face in the
middle portion and at Ihe bottom face near the supports.
(3) In couoterfort retaining walls, the rounterforts are designed as cantilever of varying section and ftxed
at the base. The maln reinforcement is provided at the back face of the counterfort.
In addition, the vertical and horizontal ties are provided in the counterforts to jOin the base aod tbe stem
to the counterforts.
The structural design of the counterfort and cantilever retaining walls is outside the scope of this text.
L-------Jc
fig. 20.9. Shallow Shear Failure. Fig. 20.10. Deep Shear FaillJ~
IG DESIGN OF tmrAININO WALlS AND BULKHEADS
(2) Deep shear (aDure. This type of slope failure occurs along a cylindrical surface ABC (Fig. 20.10).
when there t... a weak layer of soil underneath the wall a depth of about 1.5 times the height of the wall. The
re critical failure surface is determined by trial and error procedure.
For the backfills having slope i less then 10°, it has been found that the aitical failure surface DEF
passes through the edge of the heel slab. The minimum' factor of safety is found by trial and error, taking
different circles, and determining the resisting forces and the driving forces along the failure surface (See
reng, 1962),
Ie
When a weak soil layer is located at a Shallow depth below the retaining wall, the possibility of deep
ob
shear failure should be investigated. The possibility of excessive settlement should also be looked into.
is
Sometimes, piles are used to transmit the foundation load to a firm layer below the weak layer. However. care
Ie !hall be taken in the design of piles so that the thrust of the sliding wedge of soil does not cause bending of
the piles.
20.8. DRAINAGE OF THE BACKFILL
When the backfill becomes wet due to rainfall or any other reason,
its unit weight increases. H increases
the pressure on the wall and may create unstable conditions. Further, if the water table also rises, the pore
waler pressure (u) develops and it causes ex~ive
hydrostatic pressure on the wall. To reduce the
development of excessive lateral pressures on the BACKFIL L
wall, adequate drainage must be provided.
Weep holes are generally provided in the FILTER
walls. The weep holes are of about 0.1 m diameter. MATERIAL
The spacings of the holes generally varies between WEEP t-I)LES
1.5 m to 3 m in the horizontal direction. As the
bacldill material may be washed into weep holes
and may clog them, filter material is placed around
the weep holes (Fig. 20.11).
Perforated pipes are aIro frequently used for
the drainage of the backfill. 'These pipes are laid fig. 20.11. Weep Holes.
near the base (Fig. 20.12). The water is collected from the backfill and discharged at a suitable place at the
ends. The filler material is placed around the pipes. These days, a filter cloth or a geotextile fabric is also
used to serve tbe purpose of a filter material. All drain pipes should be provided with clean-outs for cleaning
when cloggoo.
Fioe-grainoo soilS cause large earth pressure against retaining walls and are, therefore, rarely used as a
backfill material. As far as possible, good draining, granular material should be used, at least in the sliding
wedge portion of the wall. In case a fmc-grained material cannot be avoided, some form of filter of coarse
permeable material is placed behind the retaining walls to prevent the development of excessive pore water
pressure. Fig. 20.13 shows two types of drainage filters commonly used. The water percolating into the filter
is discharged through the weep holes. The inclined filter is found to be more effective tban the vertical filter. .
FILTER MATERIAL
r''--------'=q-,.., ~~~FORATED
Fig. 20.12. Perforated Pipca. Fig. 20.13. Drainage Rlter.
SOIl. MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
''''
BULKHEADS
20.9. 1YPES OF SHEET PILE WALLS
Sheet piles an:: generally made of steel or timber. However, sometimes reinforced cement concrete sheet
piles are also used. The use of timber piles is generally limited to temporary strudures in which the depth of
driving docs not ~xceed 3m. For permanent strudures and for depth of driving greater than 3 m, steel piles
are more suitable. Moreover, steel sheet piles an:: relatively water tight and can be exlrn(.1cd if required and
re- used. However, the coot of steel sheet piles is generally more than that of timber piles. Reinforced cement
concrete piles are generally used when these are to be jetted into fine sand or driven in very soft soils, such
as peat. Foe tougher soils, the roncrete piles generally break. off.
~D SOCKET JOINT
~IPtLE IIPILE~
Fig. 20.14. Plan cC • Sheet Pile Wall.
Fig. 20.14 shows the plan of a typical steel sheet pile wall, in which 2 sheet piles are shown with jOints.
Based on its structural fonn and loading system, sheet pile walls can be classified into 2 types: (1)
Cantilever Sheet piles and (2) Anchored Sheet Piles.
(1) Cantilever sheet plies
Cantilever sbcct piles are further divided into 2 types :
(a) Free canUlever sheet pile. [Fig. 20.15 (a)]. It is a sheet pile subjeded to a oonccntrnted horizontal
lood at its top. 1bcre is no backfill above the dredge level. 1be free cantilever sheet pile dc.rlves its
stability entirely from the lateral passive resistance of the soil below the dredge level into which it
is driven.
~J-I
Anchor
rored e level
of I.bc soli into wbich the sheet piles are driven. The anchored sheet piles are also of two types:
(II) Free-e:arth support plies. An anchored sheet pile is said to have free.earth support when the depth
of embedment is small and the pile rotates at its bottom tip. Thus there is no point o[ oontrafiexure
lee! (or inflexion point) in the pile.
a of (b) Flxed.earth support piles. An anchored sheet pile has fixed earth support wben the depth of
ilcs embedment is large. The bottom lip of the pile is fixed against rotations. There is 8 change in the
~rxJ curvature of the pile, and hence., an inflexion point occurs.
en.
x:b lUl FREE CANTILEVER SIllili"T PILE
The free cantilever sbeet pUe rotates about a point 0 below the dredge level. The actual pressure
dhtribution is shown in Fig. 20.16 (a). Blum (1931) gave a Simple solution. The passive resistance of the soil
IS.
1)
CIl the kR side is idealized as a right angled triangle AOE [Fig. 20.16 (b)1. The distributed pressure acting 00
!he right side below the pivot 0 is replacx:d by an equivalent concentrated load PI acting at lX'iot O. In
calOJlations that follow, however, the magnitude of the force PI is not required,
For equilibrium, the moment of all the forces about 0 must be zero, i.e.
where F is the horizontal force, h is the height of wall above the dredge level,
d is the depth of embedment.
Eq, 20.20 can be solved for d. The actual depth to be provided is generally taken as 1.2 d.
The point of the maximum bending in the sheet pile can be detennined as under.
The bending moment at depth x below the dredge level is given by
F _ Y(Ke; KJ (3.<') _ 0
... (20.22)
'" .x - VY(K,u:. K,,)
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
The maximum 8.M. (M1IlP) is obtained by substituting the value of x from Eq. 20.22 iota Eq. 20.21.
The section modulus of tbe sheet pile can then be determined as
S _ MIIlP
... (20.23)
a.
when:: all = aUowable bending stress in the pile. Fig. 20.16 (c) shows the bending moment diagram .
T h
+~
d
ACTIVE
T
\ PASSIVE
(.)
1
(b) ACTUAl PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION
Fil. 20.17. Cantilever ~ Pile.
the point 0' are reversed i.~. there .$ aaive pressure in the front and passive on the back side. Fig. 20.17 (b)
shows the actual pressure distribution. As the analysis taking actual pressure distribution is quite complicated,
the pressure distribution is generally simplified as shown in Fig. 20.18. In Fig. 20.18, the pressure is zero at
point 0 1 at a deptb a below the dredge level.
The pressure diagram BCOl shows tbe active pressure. The pressure at the dredge level is given by
PI -yhKII
~ ~. 1
l~,,"~:~__ -- - --A ij F
Il(kp-")(d-·).lr(h+d)ko-1d~ I
(~) ASSUMED PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION
Pig. 20.18. Simpllncd Press~ DI.trlbution.
DESIGN OF RETAINING WALLS AND BULKHEADS 529
b)
d,
at
Fig. 20.19.
1I2p.p - PI P2b - 2P1
From Eq. 20.25, ... (20.26)
m-1I2<P2+P3)-~
Taking moments of all the forces about A ,
.-
Eq. 20.27 can be written as b4 + C 1 b l - C2 b 2 - Clb - C 4 _ 0
C
• -
PI (6Z I P4 + 4Pd
11(K, - K.)]'
.(20.28)
530 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGJNEER!N~
JS
. D _ 1.2d to l.4d ... (20.3I!
This gives a factor of safety of about 1.50 to 2.0.
AHcmativcly, a (actor of safety can be applied to the passive resistance. In that case, the value of Kp J
usually taken ~ to ~ of the normal value while oomputing b from Eq. 20.28, and the required depth D is taku
equal to d.
In the above discussions. the depth of water table is not
considered. If the water table on the front side is at the same level
as on the rCo:"lf side, the analysis remains unaltered cxu:pt that the
B
T
submerged unit weight ('I ') should be used fOf the soil below the
water table (see Illustrative Example 20.6). However, if the
difference in the two levels is greater than 1 m, the pressure due to
p
1
h
1
water on the sheet pile should be found from the flow nct and A
properly accounted (or in the analysis. T 8:
Approximate Analysis. The exact analysis of the cantilever? 2
sheet pile as discussed above> is quite involved. An approximate --.L A ---1
value of d can be obtained using a simplified pressure diagram as I KpJ'd I
KaJ'(h+d)
shown in Fig. 20.20. In this analysis, the resistance of the pile
below the point 0 is replaced by a concentrated force P3. (Note that
the pressure distribution extends upto tip A). Fig. 20.20. Approllimate Analysis.
From the equilibrium in horizontal direction.
PI - P2 + P 3 .. 0
20.29)
hdis
!D.30)
C()-1ESJONLE$ SOIll
cpO
4\
r'1 Jh
'?i~~j----'L----'C L
-"J
Fig. 20.21. Cantilever Sheet Pile in Clay.
For, - 0, we have Kp_K.. _l.O.
Therefore, P2- 4c -yh
Ukewise, the pressure Pl from righl 10 leO is given by
or P3 - Kp(h + d)y +2cYK; - (K.. yd - 2cv'K';;]
For, = 0, we have P3 - 4c+ yh
From equilibrium in the horizontal dircaion, considering equivalent areas as in Fig. 20.19.
PI - [P2 )( dJ + iP2 + Pl] )( ml2 - 0
:fill is -
PI (ll + d) - (4c-yh)-z +
,p 34 c [(4C- Y h)d - P,]'
4c - 0 ... (20.34)
II and
The above equation can be written as
Jl PI (12cZI + PI)
... (2035)
(4c-yh)-2P J d- 2c+yh .0
"'!he Eq. 20.35 can be solved for d. The actual depth D is kept 40% to 60% more. Thus
D _ l.4d to 1.6d
Alternatively, the depth d caD be computed using a reduced value of cn
or 2c/3 in Eq. 20.35. In tbis
ca!it, the actual depth D would be equal to the computed value of d, as the ractor of safety has already been
applied to c.
roIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
If the water table exists on both the sides, modification can be done as in the case of cohesioolcss
deposits. The submerged weights are used below the water table (see Illustrative Example 20.8).
20.13. ANCHORED SHEET PILE wnn FREE·EARTH SUPPORT
The stability of anchored sheet pile depends- upon the anchor force in addition to that upon the passive
earth pressure. The embedment depth is considerably smaller than that in a cantilever sheet pile. 1berefore,
by this metbod, the lotal length of the sheet pile is reduced. Of course, the additional (;:(lSt of anchors is also
to be considered while judging the eronomy of the two types of construction.
liNG
The above equation can be written as
b'(K" - K,,)y/3+ b2 (K" - K,,)y/2(g + a) - Pd - 0
mess
.,
...(20.39) -
l 2 3Pd
b + 15b (g + a) - y(Kp _ K,J - 0 ... (20040)
own.
eve!. +1
into <:=0
!'P"" "<1
:edge
0.36)
Eq. 20.42 can be solved for d. The actual depth (D) provided is 20 to 40% more than d.
It may be noted that the wall beromes unstable when P2 - 0, i,e., 4c - YH .. 0
,.,f----+---+------+----I
O.~,L.,=---:l:----_".f.,=---:!;------!.
l09 I
Fig. 20.24.
INO DesiGN OF REI'AINING WAllS AND BULKHEADS 5"
Fig. 20.24 shows a Iypical moment reduction curves Cor rohesionless soils. The ratio M/MOWI. is
dclermined directly for the given value of p. 1be curve (a) is for loose sand (relative density = 0) and the
ClIVe (b) for dense sand (relative dCrL'iity = 100%). The value of Mmu being known from the free-earth
.43) sup(X)lt analysis, the design moment Mil can be computed.
'al.Is (For more details, the original paper may be consulted) .
•) ;,; IUS. ANCHORED SUEET PILE wml FlXED-EARm SUPPORT
Fig. 20.25 (a) shows the deflected shape of an anchored sheet pile with fixed-earth support. The elastic :
line manges its OJrvature at the inflexion point I. The soil inla whidl the sheet is driven exerts a large
_44)
.
..
(he
lof
.he
ility
A
(0)
.45)
Fig. 20.25.
restraint on the lower pan of the pile and causes a change in curvature. Fig. 20.25 (b) shows the pressure
distribution, Blum (1931) gave a mathematical relationship between (i/h) and, (Fig. 20.26), where j is the
dcplb of the point of inflexion I below the dredge level and h is lhe beight of sheet pile above the dredge
Iof leveL Thus inflection point I is located.
Foe simplicity, the lower portion of the pressure diagram on the right hand side in Fig. 20.25 (b) is
repJaced by a concentrated force Rk at point K and the diagram shown in Fig. 20.27 (0) is used in the
-46) analysis. The magnitude of Rk is initially unknown, but it is
m
0.3
automatically excluded from calOJwtions when the moments
~
art taken about K. Once the depth has been found, Rt can
be dclennincd from the equilibrium equation in the
horizontal direction. 02 .
As the exact analysis of the anchored sheet pile with
0 ·(
rlXed-earth support is complicated, an approximate method,
known as U/uivatem-beam method is generally used. It is
aumcd !hat the sheet pile is a beam which is simply 0·0
supported at the anchor point M and fixed at the lower end 20- 25- 30- 35- 40-
K. Fig.w.n (b) shows tbe bending moment diagram. The
bending moment is zero al the inflexion point I.
1bettetically, the lower pan lK of lhe pile can be removed Fig. 20.26.
BOO the shear force can be replaced by a reaction RI . Thus, a simply-supported beam .B1 is obtained [Fig.
20.27 (c)].
The following procedure is used for the analysis of the sheet· pile with fixcd~carth support, using
eIJlivalent beam method.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
""
~
T
",
tK
!
8 .M . Oio2 ro m
,.,
Fig. 20.27. S implified Pressure Diagram.
t
'_R,
I - RI
",
,-
III
S f!Om(2)
-RI(
Po - ~ (a - i) ... (20.4!
(6) Determine the reaction RI for the beam IB by laking moments about the point M of anchor of all III
forces acting on IB [Fig. 20.28 (a»).
(b) Lower Beam IK
(7) Determine the pressure P2 (rom the relation
P2 - y(Kp - K.)(d - a) ... (20.4~
Alternatively, pz - (D p~ i) x (d - a)
(8) Determine the distance (d - a) by taking moments of the fotUS on the beam IK about K [Fig. 20.28 (blj
The reaction RI on the lower beam is equal and opposite to thot on the upper beam.
(9) Calculate d from Eq. 20.49 and hence find D _ 1.2 d.
(10) Determine the tension T in anchor by considering the equilibrium of beam Ill. Thus
T - PI - R, ... (20.511
whcre PI = total force due to pres.<;ure on lB.
trs
B
T p,
",
(oj Top beam
TX~I'O
d-o
1 K ""
(b)BOClom
" brOm
Fig. 20.28.
20.47)
The design of anchor plates and beams is diSCUSSC<l below.
Anchor plates and beams arc made of casl-concrele blocks. A wale (horizontal beams) is placed al the
front (or back) face of the sheet pile, and a tie rod is attached to it. The other end of the lie rod is connected
20.48) 10 an andlor plate or a beam (Fig. 20.29).
illlhe
ANCHOR
BEAM
10.49)
TENSION
PILE
8 (b)]
or P_I!!.P..(K_K'
II 2 p tl/ ... (20.51)
where 1/ is the depth of the lower face of the anchor beam from the ground surface.
(b) For plates or beams with Blh < 5, the ultimate resistance is given by
P,. - B(Pp - PJ + iKoY(v'i(,; + VK;)Jilum+
where Ko = coefficient of earth at rest ( :: 0.40).
Po - ~ ... (20.53)
where FS = factor of safety (generally taken equal to 2.0),
The centrc-to-CClltre spacing of anchors is obtained from the relation,
s _ PalT ... (20.54)
where T '" tension in sheet pile per unit length as obtained from the analYJja of anchored sheet pile.
ll..LUSTRATIVE EXAMPLFS
Fig. E-20.I.
.'~ . (~- 6) [I
sm sm +
V'in(.' + 6)sin(i' -I)
sin(p-6)sin(~+')
1
DESIGN OF RETAINING WAllS AND BULKHEADS 539
or
K" - [ 0.9~ 0.866 x 0.588]' - 0.417
.. p .. Pay
Ha-ironlal compoooni of
P -PuA
92.' 1.90 m 175.9
Neglecting passive resistance, the factor of safety against sliding is given by Eq. 20.3 as
The factor of safety against bearing capacity failure is given by Eq. 20.7 as
Fb - p~ - : - 3.1 (safe)
H1mtratlve Example 20.2. Check the stability of the cantilever retaining waU shown in Fig. £-20.2. TIu!
allowable soil pTt!Ssure is 500 kNlm2, +' 0
= 34", 6 = 25 , '1 = 18 !tN1"?, i = 15°,
f'm
I 6.21m
l~ 1
Fig. £..20.2.
Solution. Let us first asccctain whether Rankine's theory is applicable to the cantilever retaining wan.
From Eq. 20.9.
" _ (45 0 + il2) _ r.2 _sin-1 ( smcp'
~ioi )
CO
_ (45 + 7.5) - 17 - sin-
1
(:~:) = 7.9 0
The shear ZOI!e docs oot intersect the stem. 'Therefore nie Rankine theory can be applied.
From Eq. 20.7, the factor of safety against bearing capacity failure,
l'l"y(Kp-K.J b
.. 16)( 2.667 )( b .. 42.7b
Pl" y{h + tf)Kp - ydK•
.. 16 (5 + b + 0.62) x 3.0 - 16 (b + 0.62) )( 0.333
Pl .. 266.5 + 42.7 b E
P2 + PJ
42.7b 2 - 2 )( 74.7 ~~------.
266.5 + 85.4 b
2
~~--t-~-1
From Eq. 20.27, - P2b <P2+Pl) '2
Pdb + ZI) - 6 + - 6 - nr .. 0 Ag. B.20.3.
3
74.7 (b + 2.08) _ 42.7 b + (266.5 + 85.4 b) (42.7 b' -
6 6 266.5 + 85.4b
149.4)' " 0
448.2 (b + 2.08) _ 42.7b + 3
(4;:':: ~;~:)2 . 0
Solving by trwl and error, b .. 4.4 m.
Alternative Method tor b
Using Eq. 20.28, b4 + C1b1 _ Cp2 _ C.p - C... 0
t
Mm
r
d
L.'~~:~___ ---'------=-
t---- P2 - . . . . ; - - ~ ---I
Fig. &20.5.
Solution. K .. ,. 0.333 I Kp" 3.0.
PI ,. 0.333 )( 16 )( 2.50 + 0.33 (9.0) )( 2.50
PI ,. 13.3 + 7.5 ,. 20.8 kN/ml
and
c _6 x 683 [2 )C 9.0 x 2.667 x 2.36 + 208.4] _ 228.81
3 (9.0 )C 2.667)2
PI [6 ZIP" + 4Pd
and C, - [y'(K, _ K.»)'
.. 68.3 [6 x 2.36 x 208.4 + 4 )( 68.31 .. 382.21
[9.0 x 2.667)'
'Therefore, b" + 8.68bl - 22.76 b2 - 228.81 b - 382.21 .. 0
r
'm
Solving by trial and error, b .. 5.50 m.
Dlustrutive Example
do. b + a .. 5.50 + 0.87 .. 650m.
D .. 1.3d .. 830m.
20.6.
Determine the depth
embedment for the cantilever sheet pile shown in Fig. £-20.6.
1
Solution. (See Fig. 20.21 for notations) In Ibis case,
K" .. 0.333, Kp .. 3.0
PI .. 16.0 )( 5.0 x 0.333 .. 26.7
PI .. ~ )( 26.7 x 5 .. 66.81cN
z... 5/ 3 .. 1.67m Fig. B-20.6.
DESIGN OF RIITA1NING WALLS AND BULKHEADS
'"
P2 - 4c -lh ., 4 )( 50 - 19 )( 5 ., 105.0
PJ - 4c + lh - 4 )( 50 + 19 )( 5 - 295
(4c -lh)d - PI (4)( 50 - 19)( 5)d- 66.8
From Eq. 20.32,.
4c - 4)(50
- 0.53 d - 0.334
- d' 4 1 [(4< - yh) d - Pd'
From Eq. 20.34, PdZI +. d) - (4c - 'fh) 2" + '3 )( 16 c - 0
r ~ 16 kN l rJ
• • 3':
11':9 kNlm3
1/ ~ 3,;°
1 _ _ _11---'-::7' T
i
Fig. &20.7.
..
, SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Taking moments of all the forces about M. using Sq. 20.38 (a),
124.92 (a + h - e - ZI) - P z ( a + h - e + ~) .. 0
0'
124.92 (0.82 +
8.0 - 2.5 - 3.43) - 15.39 b' (0.82
361.02 - 97.26b2 - 1O.26bl .. 0
+8.0 - 2.5 + 2b/3) - 0
PI 34.6
From Eq. 20.47, a .. y (Kp _ Ko) .. 16 )( 3.42 .. 0.63 m
From Fig. 20.26, for
Therefore,
*' . 35°, ilh .. 0.025
i .. 0.025 )( B.O .. 0.2 m
Td
jL----~ E·20.8.
DESIGN OF RETI\JNING WALLS ANI) BULKHEADS 547
Po - e; (a - I) - ~~ x 0.43 - 23.6
Talcing moments about M of all the forces acting 00 beam lB.
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
fig. P-20.l.
548 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
J':19kNlm 3
+:30"
T
,.
J'~9kNlm3
(:o;QkNlm 2
~': 0.0
1
,.
1
Fig. P-20.3. Fig. P·ZO.4.
20.4. An anchored sheet-pile wall is shown in Fig. P 20.4. Find the fraction of the Ihoorelical maximum pressure IJI.
the embedded length which must be mobilised for equilibrium. Usc the free· canh suppo" method.
Also delennine the force in one of the anchors, assuming that they are spaced al 2.5 centres.
[Aos. 0.51; 206.5 kNl
20..s. An excavation 8 m deep is to be made in c:ohesionless soil (y = 19 kN/m3, , '" 30"). The sides of the excavatitl
are supported by anchored sheet piles with fixed-end support. Dctennine the minimum depth of embedment fa
equilibrium. The anchors are at a depth of 1.5 m below the surface. [Ans.. 5.0 r:aJ
20.6. For the anchored sheet pile shown in Fig. P-20.6, detennine the embedment depth d and the (orce in the ancha
per m run. Assume fixed-end conditions. [Ans. 5.00 , 71 kNtrai
20.7. For tbe anchored sheet pile shown in Fig. P 1JJ.7, determine the theoretical and actual depth of penetration,!hI
anchor force per unit length of the wall and maximum moment. Assume frce-earth support.
[Ans.. 2.40 mj 3.50 m; 39.S kN, 63.0 kN-~
B. Descriptive and Objective 'iYpe
20.8· What are differenl types of retaining walls? Discuss the methods for estimation of lateral earth pressure acti"
on the walls.
20.9. Discuss the principles of the design of retaining walls.
20.10. What are different modes of failure of retaining walls? Explain with the help of sketches.
10_11. What are different types of sheet pile walls? Draw the skctche;s showing the pressure distribution.
20.12. DiSQJSS the procedure for chocking the stability of a cantilever sheet pile wall.
ZO.13. How would you check the stability of an anchored sheet pile wall with free-earlh support? What is Rowe\
correction?
20.14. Describe the equivalent beam method for the analysis of an anchored sheet pile.
20.15. Discuss various methods for providing anchors for a sheet pile wall.
:RING DESIGN OF RETAININO WALLS AND BULKHEADS 549
~~:j
35 m]
sata
, m]
1
Fig P·20.6. Fig. P-20.7.
20.16. Write whether the fol1owing statements are true or folse.
(a) Gravity walls are more economj~1 lhan cantilever walls.
(b) The Jatenll pressure on gravity wal1s is determined using Coulomb's theory.
(e) Rankine's theory can always be used for the determination of laternl pressure on cantilever walls.
(d) Counterfort retaining walls are more suitable than cantilever relaining walls for greater heights.
(e,) Tension develops at the base of the retaining Willi when the resultant strikes outside the middle-third.
(/) Backfill should be preferably of cohesive material.
(g) In an anchored sheet pile with frce-earth support, there is no point of inflexion.
(h) AI. the point of contranexure, the shenr force is zero.
(I) The ultimDlC resiSlance of an anchor depends upon the passive resistance.
(;) Anchors should be placed as neat the wall as possible.
kN]
[An. True. (b). (<I). ('1 (g). (i)]
Btion
itfor C. Muldple Choice Questions
Om] 1. The minimum allowable fBctor of safety against sliding in the case of a canlilever retaining wall is
(a) 2.0 (b) 3.0
"'""
'1m] (0) 1.50 (d) 2.50
, the 2. In the case of a counterfort retaining wall, the toe slab acts as a
(a) cantilever (b) continuous slab
"-m) (e) simply supported slab (d) DOlle of above.
3. In the case of fixed-earth support of a bulkhead, the stability is provided by
(a) the passive resisumce of the soil
~ing (b) the force in the anchor
(e) both (a) and (b)
(Ii) neither (a) na (b)
4. Rowe's correction for free-enrth Support of a bulkhead depends mainly on
(a) 10lial height of bulk-head
(b) Young's modulus of pile material
we', (e) moment of inertia of the pile
(d) all the above.
[A= 1. (0). 2. ('13. (0). 4. (d)]
21
Braced Cuts and Coffer Dams
21.1. INTRODUCUON
(a) Brnced Cuts
Dccp excavations with vertical sides require lateral supports to prevent cave-in of the earth and to prolcd
the adjacent areas against ground subsidence and lateral movement of the subsoil. When excavations 11ft
shallow and ample space is available, the sides of the excavation can be sloped at a safe anglc to eosutt
stability. However, in deep excavations, especially in built-up areas, there may not be adequate space r(t
providing safe slopeS .. Moreover, it bcoomes uneoonomical to provide safe slopes because of large quanlitio
WATER
IlS
PLAN
Fig. 21.2. Coffer Dam.
)tcct
21.2. lATERAL EARm PRESSURE ON SUEIITINGS
sure Rankine's and Coulomb's tbeories of earth pressure cnnnot be used for the computation of lateral earth
[0' pressure on sheetings, as those theories arc applicable to rigid retaining walls rotating at base. The sheeting
:ilies and bracing system is somewhat flexible and the rotation takes place al the lop of the wall.
Shcclings are placed against the walls of the excavations when these are shallow. The upper strul is
placed when the excavation is shallow and little lateral yield of the soil has occurred. As the excavation
proceeds downwards, the lower part of the face is free to yield inward before the next strut can be placed.
The inward yield of soil increases with an increase in tbe depth of excavation. Thus, the sheeting tilts about
i~ top [Fig. 21.1 (b)].
The method of earth pressure calculations has been developed by Terzaghi based on observations of
actual loads in struts in full - scale excavations in sand in Berlin and in sort clay in Chicago. Pressure
distributions against the sheeting have been approximated on the assumption that each strut supports a
sheeting area. TIle pressure distribution depends upon the speed at which excavation advances, the care '.
taken in the installation of bracing, the soil type and many other factors. The effect of various factors is not
yet fully understood. However, the results of field studies can be used as a basis for developing earth
pressure diagram required for the design of bracing system. The pressure distribution diagram recommended
for design represents an envelope which encompasses the actual pressure distribution diagrams obtained from
The
ively
]llili
j by
alioo
Cling
dose
: and
:rally
open
Je.A I ~·65nf(.il f1:~~ t~~~
>OSed (.a) SANO (b) FIRM CLAY (0;) SOFT TO
, dO')' (~':::l,) '-£D!LM CLAY
C "'" (~>")
Fig. 21.3. Apparent Pressure Diagrams.
552 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
the field tests [Fig. 21.1 (c)]. These design pressure diagrams are also known as apparem pressure diagrams.
Fig. 21.3. shows the apparent pressure diagrams suggested by Peck (1969). Fig. 21.3 (a) gives the
pressure distribution for braced cuts in dry or moist sand. The pressure distribution is unifonn with a pressure
(P(l) equal to 0.65 "( fI KID where K(I is Rankine's earth pressure cocITicienl, given by
K(I _ tan 2 (45 0
_ $12) ... (21.1)
Figs. 21.3 (b) and 21.3 (c) show the pressure diagrams for clay. If ("(Hlc) is less than or equal to 4, the
pressure envelope shown in Fig. 21.3 (b) is used. The value of P(I varies between 0.2 y H to 0.4 y H, with an
average value of 0.3 y H. If (y fllc) is greater than 4, the pressure envelope shown in Fig. 21.3 (c) is used.
lbe pressure p(l is taken as (y f/ - 4c) or 0.3 y ll, whichever is greater.
Non-unifonn soils
1. When the braced rut passes through layers of both sand and clay [Fig. 21.4 (a)l, an equivalent value
of cohesion ce ($ = 0 concept) is detennined using the following equation suggested by Peck (1943).
rr.t SAND
....... r~ ..
CLAY
CLAY
'
H H
"2
[ '2''2
11 l~f
CLAY CLAY LAYERS
....c.qu
CLAY Yn.cn
(a) (b)
fig. 21.4.
pressure coefficient (- 1), $, = angle of friction of sand, q" = unconfined compressive strength of clay, n' = a
coefficient of progressive failure (average value 0.75).
The equivalent unit weight 'Ie of the layers is detcnnined from the following equation:
'"d.
(a) (b)
Fig. 21.5. Vertical Tim1xr Shet:ling.
supported by horizontal struts which extend from side to side of the excavation [Fig. 21.5 (a)J. iIowever. if
the excavations arc relatively wide, it becomes economical to support the wales by inclined struts, known as
rakers [Fig. 21.5 (b)J. For inclined struts to be successful, it is essential that the soil at the base of the
excavation be strong enough to provide adequate reaction.
Ir the soil can temporarily support itself an excavation of limited depth without all external support, the
timber sheeting can be installed in Ihe open or in a partially completed excavation.
Vertical timber sheetings arc cconomicIi upto a depth of 4 106m.
(2) Steel Sheet ]'Iles. In this method, the steel sheet piles are driven along the sides of the proposed
excavation. As the soil is excavated from the enclosure, wales and struts arc placed [Fig. 21.6(a)J. lhe wales
2) are made of steel The struts may be of steel or wood. As the excavation progresses, another set of wales and
th
~
3) ::D""""I~I
BLOCK I~I
SHEEl
PIL E
.3 STRUT
SOLDIER BEAMS
W4.LES
LAGGING
SOL!JIER BEAM
back
foro,
::leis
C., (b) CC)
Fig. 21.9.
! the
The reactioo Rl per unit length is determined by taking moments of the forces acting 00 span a d at d.
and equating them to zero. Once RI has been determined, the reaction component R2' is detenninoo from the
equilibrium equatioo in the horizontal direaion for the span a d.
The reaction components R z" and R]' are determined considering span df as hinged at d and f
Thus reaction at d, Rz - Rz' + Rz"
'me reaction R4 is determined by laking momel'llS about f of the forces acting on f h. The reaction
component R]" is determined from the equilibrium equation for horizontal forces acting on f II. 1be analysis
is similar to that of the top strut. Thus reaction at t.
R3 .. R]' + R]"
The strut loads are then computed as under.
PI .. RI )( S P2 .. (R2' + R2") S . .. (21.6)
LL
p] - (R3' + R]")s and P4 - R4 )( S
where s is the horizontal spacing (perpendicular to plane of paper) of struts.
Proper sections for lhe struts can be chosen for the respective loads found above.
gh a (b) Wales. Wales are considered as horizontal beams pinned at the strut levels. The maximum bending
ired. moment will depend upon the span s and the loads on the struts. As the strut load<> are different at various
levels, the maximum bending moments would also be different. For example.
R1i
ness
Mrrw< .. 8' for the top wale ... [21.7(a)]
IOns
Cru~ and ... [21.7(b)]
epili
qual Once the maximum bending moments have been computed, the section modulus (S) is oomputed as
S .. Mmax ... (21.7)
[dier a""
where O.,JI = aUowable bending stress.
5,. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(c) Sheet lines. Sheet piles act as vertical plates supported at strut levels. The maximum bending
moments in various sections such as a 4 d f and f h in Figs. 21.9 (b) and 21.9 (c). are delennined.
Once the maximum bending moments have been oompulcd, the section modulus of the sheet pile can be
computed and the seaion chosen.
COFFER DAMS
21.5. TYPES OF COFFER DAMS
l11e following are different types of coffer dams common ly used in prnaice.
(1) Earth Coffer dams. These are the simplest type of coffer dams weD-adapted to depths of water upto
3 m. Earth embankments are constructed around the nrea to be dcwatered.
The earth coffer dams are buill of local soils, prcfernbly fine s:lnd. These usually bave a clay core or a
vertically driven shcct piling in the middle. The upilrcam slope of the bank is covered with a rip rap (Fig.
21 .10). A successful coffer dam need not be completely watertigbt. For reasons of economy, it is not possible
STRUT
WORKING
AREA
1===IIr-TIE RODS
5,""
~rkjng(lre(l
Se~hon A_A
Dry s id~
---r-
Fig. 21.18. Sliding Analysis.
F Resisting force p( + Pp
... (21.12)
S - Sliding force - Pd
ItW + Pp
F, - - P- - ••• (21.13)
d
where It : coefficient of friction (: tan C\l). W: total weight of fill (submerged weight below saturation line).
Pp :: passive resistance of the berm on dry side.
P d :: driving force due to water and soil on the water side.
PI = resisting force at the base.
A factor of safety of at least 1.25 is generally recommended.
(4) Safety against Overturning. The coffer dam should be safe agrunst failure due to overturning at toe.
Neglecting the passive resistance of the berm, the factor of safety against overturning is given by
F _ Resisting moment
... (21.14)
~ Overturning moment
lbe factor of safely (Fi» should be greater than 2.0.
Further, as the soil canoot resist tension, the resulLant of the forces must tie within the middle third. 1be
eccentricity (e) is determined after :ocating the point where the resultant strikes, as the case of retaining walls
(see Chapter 20). Thus
ING BRACED ClITS AND COFFER DAMS 56'
(a)J e :so b/6 ... [21.15(a)]
(b)J
be or b
-~~.
:z:-V~II ...[21.15(b)J
where Z = beight of the line of action of Pd above the base.
fbe
(5) Sarely lilgalnst sUpplng. As the cell tends to lip over the toe, the
f)
fill material has the tendency to run aliI (Fig. 21.19). The piles on the
'a)J
water side aeep upward as one unit. but the piles on the dry side sllp
relative to eacb other. 1bis behaviour occurs because the frictional
'11
b)J reslstance between the fill and the piles on the water side is smaller than
the frictional resistance along the interlock.
g
On the water side, the I force Ptt pushes tbe pile against. the fin. 1be
""
ns frictional resistance between the pile and the fiU is equal to ~'P". 1be
factor of safety against slipping is given by ...,,; ..-,:,-' .... ..
3).
F,p .. Frictional rcsista~;::i70~:ward movement ... (21.16)
Ag. 21.19. Slipping Analysis.
The value of friction ooefficienl II' is equal to tan 6, where 0 is the angle of friction between the fm and the
pile.
The minimum width b required can be obtained by taking moments about the toe. Thus
Pd)(Z)( F,p -PdtanO)( b
b-~
tao 0
... (21.7)
or 51 - k 2
'{QH Ktan, .. [(21.19(b)J
where K = coefficient of earth pressure having a value greater than that for the active pressure,
• = angle of internal friction of the cell fill,
and lQ = aveOlge unit weight of soil.
The resistance S2 is equal (0 the interlock tension T mUltiplied by the coefUcient of friction (f).
5,. r. T
The maximum pressure is developed at a height of (3/4) HI above lhe base, where HI is the height of cell
above the point of fixity. Thus
'62 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDAnON eNGINEERING
23)
::e).
IH
j~
. of
24)
lam
led.
ater
Fig. 21.20. Row-Net
F · +. .. (21.28)
.25) where i =hydraulic gradient at exit ( = l!. h/l), l!. h =drop between last two equipotential lines,
I = length of the last flow field.
If the factor of safety is less than L50, a loaded filter is provided as shown to increase tbe downward
force without increasing the seepage pressure.
.26) The factor of safety can also be increased by reducing the gradient i by driving the sheet pile deeper or
by reducing the e(fed.ive head by pcnnilting some water depth on the inner side.
The depth of the sheet pile below the ground surface is generally kept at least equal 10 two-thirds of the
height of the coffer dam.
564 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERINO
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
lIIustratlve Example 21.1. Determine Ihe loads in the three strut.! shown in Fig. E·21.1 (a). The cenlrt
ttl centre spacing of the struts along the length o[ 1M CUI is 2.50 m. The soil is stiff, fissu.red clay (y = 19
2
kN1m'J, c = 40 kNlm ). Also determine the maximum bending momems in wales and sheet piles.
"i
0) ..!!4. C
'0' '"
fig- E·21.1.
Therefore, the pressure distribution is as given in Fig. 21.2 (b). The value of the earth pressure is given
by
p" - 0.3yH .. 0.3 )C 19)( 6- 34.2kN/m 2
(a) Strut loads. Let RIt R2 and RJ be the reactions per unit length in three struts at levels A, Band C,
respectively.
Taking moments of all the forces acting above iXllni B,
R, x 2.0 .. 34.2 ; 1.50 (1.50 + 0.50) + 34.2 x 1.5 x 0.75
or R, .. 44.9 kN
From the horizontal equilibrium of the portion AB,
Rl + R2' .. 34.2 ; 1.50 + 34.2 x 1.50 .. 77.0
(c) Sheet pile. Fig. &21.1 (c) shows the shear force diagram for the vertical sheet pile. The shear force
is zero at point D at a depth x below top point E. 'The depth x is detennined from the shear force equation.
1NO BRACED CUTS AND COFFER DAMS
UlustraUve Example 21.2. [)efl!rmme the fon::es in the struts for the bracing system shown in Fig.
£·21.2, Ass~ hinges at levels B, C and D. Take y = 18 IcNlmJ, c ::: 30 iN/m2 and s = 2.0 m.
1·5m
OJ T
T
r
!
Mm
t
R'
8m m 2.. B
2·5m
-l- "
'" .,..
R'
..1.. c
.... l8kNlrn3
C.lO~N/m2
l·Sm
Fig. E-21.2
e,
Solution. l.!!...18x8. 4.80>4.0
c 30.0
The prc5Sure distribution shown in Fig. 21.2 (c) is applicable in this case. Therefore.
P.. .. 1 H - 4c .. 18 x 8 - 4 )( 30 .. 24 kN/m 2
Alternatively, p • .. 0.3 YH .. 0.3 x 18 )( 8 .. 43.2 kN/ml
Adopt larger of the two values, viz, 43.2 kN/ml
The reaction in strut (1) is delennined by laking moments about B, of the forces acting above thaI level.
Rl .. SO.6kN
Now PI .. 80.6 )( 2 .. 161.2 kN.
From horizontal equilibrium of the portion above B,
Ory side
Ag. B-21.3.
Solution. Saturation line is taken as shown in Fig. 21.17 (0), a<iSuming a perfedly draining fill.
The average unit weight of soi~ taking half of the fill as submerged, is given by
roc1
or F" .. 1125 ~!~ x+ 1~:2x 4/3 .. ~-r;:: . 4.82 (safe)
Y••
Therefore, ~
yH
.. ';6)( 1149)( 4.92
14)( 15
.. 12.70m.
S2 -I "'{d HH/Kdf
PROBLEMS
T
Y.18 kN/mJ
,,.30 kNlml
f
2·5m
2m s:2m ,.,
,., 8kNlm1
'" +
2m
8m
I2l
i- OkNlm2
,,.Z· 'm
", -L
0'
Vim
1
I - - 'm----i T 1 I------
1"
6m -----<
1.Sm
T
Fig. P-21.1. Ag. P-21.2.
21.2. For the braced all shown in Fig. P 21.2, draw .he eanh pressure envelope. Delennine the 10000s in SIMS (1), (2)
(3) and (4)~ assuming thlll the Slruts ore hinged 01 levels 2, 3 lind 4. The spacing of the struts is 2.S m. Take 1
'" 18 kN/m and c = 30 kN/m z. [Ans. 201.8, 2575, 216.81, 81 kNJ
3
+
21.3. Check. the slability of the circular, cellular coffer dam SDawn in Fig. P 21.3. Toke '1 '" 18 kNhn , z 30- ,6,"
25·, K ::: 0.6, f '" 0.3, TAl'" 1'500 kNIm. The diameter of the main cclls is 15 m.
Fig. P-ll.3.
21.4. Determine tbe factor of safety agnin.'11 piping failure of the ooffer dam founded on a deep sand bed shown In
Fig- P 21.4. Take G '" 2.67 and e = 0.67.
n . Descriptive Types.
215. What is II coffer dam? Name the different types of coffer dams and discuss their relative advantages aM
diSDdvimtages.
11.6. Discuss the method for the design of a circular, cellular, coffer dam on rock.
11.7. CVmpare diaphragm cellular coffer dams and ci~lar ooffer dams.
:ING BRACED ctrrS AND COFFER DAMS S69
Fig. P-21.4.
2UI. Sketch 11 typical section o f II brnced cut aocl show the vnriou, components.
21.9. Draw different type!> of 3ppnrent pressure diagrnm~ used in the dc~ign of braced cut~. What nre the factors that
affect the pressure distribution?
21.10. Describe the methods for the design of various ,"'Umponcnls of a braced CUI, Slating clearly the assumptions
"",<io.
(2) 21.11. How the design o f a cellular coffer dam on rock ditTers from that on a soil bed?
!cy
"'J C. Multiple Choice Questions.
1= 1. For the design of braced cuts. the eanh pressurf distribution is based on
((I) Coulomb's theory (h) Rankin e's Iheory
(el ilpp:lrent pressure di ugrnm (tTl none of llbove.
2. In th e design of br:u::ed cut. it is gencrnll y assumed Ihnt Ihe sheet pile is
Itli hinged at all thl! strut levels.
(b) Ihl!d at 1111 the ~tmt Icvels.
Ie) hinged at all thc strut Icvels except the top and bottom struts.
(lh none of :lOOVC.
J. The diameter of the cell of a cell ular. colTer dam is usually kepi
(tI) 0.5 H (h) 0.80 H
Id 1.2 H (d) 2.0 H
where H is the height of the coffer d:lm.
4. Single-sheet pile coffer dums ure suitublc uplo u height of
fa) 5 m Ih) 10m
Ie) IS III Iff) more than 15 m
= =
5. The faclor o f safcty ag(linst piping when; 0.75 and y' 9 kN/mJ is about
~)l.W (M I.OO
(e) O.KO (d) 0.75
6. For a cellular ,""Offer dam ~~hcdded in clay. the factor of safety agninsl bearing fa ilure when c _ 60 leN/m , H
2
= 15mandy= 18kN/ III' ISabaut
(a) 1.10 (h) 1.27
(e) 1.40 (d) O.W
(Ans. I. (el. 2. (el, 3. (e ). 4. (a), S. (a), 6. (b»)
22
Shafts, Thnnels and Underground Conduits
The stresses due to equivalent liquid pressure can be found using Lame's fannulae for thick. cylindcn>
(sec any text on strength of materials). According to which,
(oz)p - 0 ... [223(a)]
(o,)p - p';;,.' - K, r Z (,.'.1,.') ... [22.3(b)J
and (a,,)p _ - p,}',' - -K.yZ(,.',1,.') ... [22.3(c)]
where suffix p indicates thai the stresses are due to pressure p of the equivalent liquid.
After the shaft has been excavated, the shear stresses and the radial stresses on the interior surface are
zero. The effect of excavating the shaft can be considered equivalent to that of pumping the liquid out of a
5 cylindrical hole whose dimensions are identical with those of the shaft (BiOI, 1935).
Thus the streSses at any point aftcr the excavation of the shaft can be obtained by supel1X>Sition of the
initial stresses (Eq. 22.1) and those due to pressure (Eq. 22.3). The stresses due to pressure are taken as
negative because the liquid is pumped out, which corresponds to a negative value of p.
Therefore, 0: - (oz); - (oz)p - ,Z ... [22.4(a)J
"). o~ - K~ ,Z-(o,)p - K",Z(l - r;;?) ... [22.4(b)]
)] 0, _ (0,), - (a,,)p - K. r Z (1 + ,.'.1,.') ... [22.4(c)J
)] Fig. 22.1 also shows the variation of stresses on a horizontal plane in the soil mass. TIle vertical stress
)] (O'~) is constant and equal to ,Z, and is independent of r. The radial stress (0,) is zero at r _ r". As r
81 increases, 0', increases. The curve becomes asymptotic. As r tends to infmity, 0, approaches a value of
Ih K" 'Y Z. The circumferential stress (00) is equal 10 2 K", Z at r = r". As r tends to infinity, Oe also tends to a
value K" 'Y Z. In olher words, at infinite radial distance, the stresses reduce to those given by Eq. 22.1 a to c.
The above stresses have been derived assuming that the soil is elastic, homogeneous and isotropiC. These
assumptions are seldom justified. Moreover, the circumferential stress (00) in the vicinity of the shaft is very
high (= 2 K" 'Y Z) which may cause plastic flow of the soil. This may lead to a state of plastic equilibrium.
Consequenlly, the actual stresses in the soil in the vicinity of the shaft may be somewhat different from those
given by the elastic theory. The elastic theory is used as it is simpler than more advanced theories.
22.2. STRESSES IN SOIL AROUND TUNNELS
Fig. 22.2 (a) shows a tunnel of intemal radius r" , with its centre line al a depth of Z" below the ground
surface. Let a, and 00 be the radial stress and circumferential stress at any IX>int P (r. Z). Before the
excavation of the tunnel, the stresses are given by Eq. 22.1 as
(0,);" K",Z and (00); - K"yZ
~'i r
es
he
he
,------
I _____
L H -G:j'
p(r.z)
l"fZo
-rzo
2)
of
10)
'"
Fig. 22.2. Stres>es anound a tunnel.
sn SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
liner plme (Fig. 22.3). The liner plales are flanged steel pmles, which when boiled to similar plmes form a
continuous wall. Somelimes, in place of a liner plate, l.1ggings, which arc wooden or steel hOrizontal planks
braced by steel frames, are usOO. The next increment is then exc..'lVatcd and the process repeated until Ihe
complcte section has been excavated. If requir~. the liner can be stiffened with curved arches.
In a very soft soil, a cytiDdric..11 temporary support, known as .fMeld, is jacked through the soil. The face
of the tunnel is supported by a bulkhead fitted with doors through which excavation of a limited portion of
the face can be done. The pennanent lining is constructed inside the shield aftcr some excnvation has been
done. The shield is then jacked ahead and the process repeated.
In sand, a tunnel requires support during construction as well as pennancnt support after construction.
22.4. ARCHING IN SOlLS
Arching is a phenomenon that occurs when a yielding part of a soil mass transfers pressure to adjoining
soil mass which is less yielding or rigid. The action is similar to one in a structural arch which transfers the
load to abulments. When a part of the soil
mass yields, it has a tendency to move out
of its original position. This tendency is
T
resisted by the shearing resistance at the
zone of contact between the yielding and
non-yielding pmts. Coru;cquently. the
pressure on the yielding part is reduced, z
where$ that on the non-yielding pans is
increased. The soil thus arches over the
yielding part and transfccs the load to the
non-yielding pans which act as abutmen~.
1.Ldz G
Fig. 22.4 shows a long narrow section T
of the layer of soil having a yielding part
Non yielding part Non yieldIng par t
supported on a deflecting structure.
Although the actual failure surf:lccs are Yielding part
curved, for Simplicity, the analysis is
usually based on the assumption of
vertical slip surfaces (Thrzaghi, 1943). As
the structure and the soil above deflect
downward, the shear resistance develops Fig. 22.4. Arching in Soils.
between the soil above the yielding part and that in tbe non-yielding part. It is generally assumed that the
shear stress mobilised is equal to the shear strength of the soil. An expression for the vertical stress can be
determined as under.
Let us consider the equilibrium of a yielding slice of thickness dz at depth z from the soil surface, The
slice is of width B and unit length pecpcndicular to the plane of the paper. The slice is in equilibrium under
its O'W'n weight dW, the vertical earth pressures on the upper and lower surraces, and the shear strength (s)
prOOuccd by the lateral earth pressure. Thus
dW + Boz - B(oz + do,) + 2sdz
Substituting dW .. '( Bdz. and s - c + o.lan ••
where o. - Koz ,
'(Bth. + Bo... 8(oz+ doz) + 2[c+ Ko.tan+]dz
or '(Bth. + Boz " Boz !&ioz + 2cdz + 2Koz tan4ldz
Bdoz - ('IB - 2c - 2Koz lancp)dz
doz _ ('I _ ~ _ 2Ko.taDCP) ...(a)
<k B B
'74 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
At the upper surface (x = 0), the vertical stress «(J~) is equal to the surcharge q.
The solution of Eq. (a) with these boundary conditions becomes.
oz" np;!I:> [1 _ e-2K(IIB)tan+ ] + qe-2K(zIB) tan + ... (22.8)
Eq. 22.12 can be used for the determination of the vertical stresses.
The phenomenon of arching can be demonstrated by a simple test illustrated by Fig. 22.5. It consists of
a platform fitted with a trap door AB. The lrnp door is mounted on a weighing scale (001 shown). The depth
H of the dry sand layer over the trap door is very large in comparison with the width of the trap door. The
pressure on the trap door and that On the adjoining platform each is equal 10 1 H when the trap 000r occupies
its original position. However, when the trap door is allowed to move slightly In the downward direction, the
pressure on the door dcacases considerably. as shown by the weighing scale, whereas that on the adjoining
parts of the platform increases. As the prism of sarxl located above the door moves downward, the shear
~N~~':
~ ~P:;~~URE
PRESSURE
AFTER
lOWERING OF DOOR
(b)
Fig. 22.5. Dtmomtrlllion of Arching.
SHAJIl'S, TUNNELS AND UNDERGROUND CONDUITS
'"
stresses along its lateral boundaries AD and BC resist it and, therefore, the pressure on the trap door is
decreased.
The pressure becomes constant after a small movement. II has been established that the ultimate pressure
on the trap door is independent of the depth H of the layer of sand above it. Only a small portion of the soil
prism, shown by the area ABE, contributes to the pressure on the trap door. If the sand has even a trace of
cohesion, it will not drop out even jf the trap door is removed.
22.5. TYPES OF UNDERGROUND CONDUITS
Underground conduits are used for sewers, drains, culverts, water mains, gas lines, electrical cables,
telephone lines and many other purposes. The underground conduits should be capable of supporting aU
external loads. If the conduit is under pressure, it should also be strong enough to withstand internal pressure
under extreme conditions. In this text, the forces acting on the conduits due to only external loadings are
considered. These forces depend upon a number of factors such as !he buried depth, rigidity of the conduit,
method of installation, preparation of conduit bedding, live and dead loads acting on the conduit. For purpose
of analysis, the conduits are classified into the following Iypes.
(1) Ditch Conduits. (2) Positive Projecting Conduits,
(3) Negative Projecting Conduits, (4) Imperfect Ditch Qmduits
(5) Tunneled Conduits.
The loading on different types of conduits are discussed.
-L
G,S.
1
type of conduits arc normally installed for sewers, drains, "i dh
water mains, g'.!s mains, etc. The width Ed of the trench is
generally Dot greater than 2 to 3 times the ronduit
H
T
diameter B~ .
The loading imposed on 10 the buried conduil can be
obtained by considering the equilibrium of an elemental
slice of thickness dh at a depth h below the ground
surface. Let V be the vertical load on the top surface of the
slice and (V + dV). on the bottoms surface. Let dW be the
weight of the slice, which is equal to y Bd dh per unit
length.1be horizontal pressure (ax) on the vertical sides is
equal to K times the vertical pressure, where K is the
coefficient of laleral pressure. Thus Fig. 22.6. Ditch Conduit
The shearing resistance (5) developed along the sides in the vertical direction is equal to Il' times the
horizontal pressure, where Il' is the coefficient of Sliding friction between the backfill material and the treodl
wall. Thus
When the elemental slice has a tendency to move downwards, the shear resistance S acts upwards. From
lhc equilibrium equation in the vertical direction,
V+ dV + 2S _ V+ ylJddh
dV .. yBddh - 2S
or dV .. yD"dh - 2KIJ.' (VIDd ) dh .
The solution of the above differential equations is
51. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
l _ e-2K~' (hIBJ ) 1
V-llf" [ 2K~'
------
AI the lop of the conduit, h = II. 'Ibcrefore,
l_e-2K~' (/JIB,,) 1
V-llf" [ 2K_' .. .(22.13)
If the ditch has sloping sides. the value of Dol is taken equal to the width of the horizontal tangential
pl.,nc nl the top of the conduit [Fig. 22.7{a)]. If the ditch is very wide, the wntluit is laKl in a sub-dilch 10
reduce Dol and hence to reduce the load on the cooduil [Fig. 22.7(b)].
w , ----
8ockl1ll
---
,.) 'b)
Ag.22.7.
The load (We) carried by the conduit depends upon the rigidity (stiffness) oC the conduit in comparisoo
with that of the fill material between the sides of the conduit and the sides of the ditch. In the cnse of a vcry
rigid condull, the side fills nre relatively compressible and the conduit would amy pmctically aU the load V.
l_c- 2KJ,I.'(IIIB,,)
From Eq. 22.13, W, - 1 If" 2 K _' ... (22.14)
W, - Cdl If" ...(22.1S)
l_e- 2Ktl' (IIIBJ
where Cd - 2 K _' ... (22.16)
The coefficient Cd is known as the load coefficient for ditch conduits. The values of Cd for different
values of HIBtl aDd K Il' can be obtained from Fig. 22.8. The ranges for the values of C. for a>hcsioolcss
soils and cohesive soils are shown hatched.
If the conduit is relatively Oel(ible and the soil is thoroughly tamped around the conduit, the stiffness of
the side filb may approoch Ihot of the conduit. The load on the fiel(iblc conduit is reduced because some of
lhe load is carried by the side fiUs. The lood corried by the fluible cooduit is obtained by multiplying the
value given by Eq. 22.15 with the ratio (B/Bd). where B~ is the diamCler of the a:>oduit. 1berefore. ftt
fJcxiblc conduits, the load is given by
We " CdyBrBd ... (22.17)
Eq. 22.13 has been derived a\Sumlng thai the orchlng cffect is achieved without soil cohesion. Actually,
some cohesive resistance develops in the vicinity of the trench which would reduce the looding on the
conduit. Therefore, Eq. 22.13 is conservnUve. Field observations indicate that the load ot the time when the
fill is completed is about 80 to 90% of the finnl load. The 1000 keeps building up because of straim occurring
in the soil in the zones along the vertical boundaries of the trench. This rcdua:s the shearing resistonce of the
soH and causes transfer of load from the soli to the conduit.
The following points are worth noting :
<,) If the trench bockfill is oompacted to blgh density, it wlU not settle relative 10 the surrounding
G SHAFfS, TUNNELS AND UNDERGROUND CONDUITS 577
I'
more than the fill above tbe conduit, the load
r-*':;~~
10
II on tbe conduit is computed considering it as , 1-1-- \<'; 0. 130
a projecting conduit, as explained in the (2:!...)
, RANGE OF ---...,
following section,
22.7. POSITIVE PROJECTING CONDUITS
~
,
7
C()-£SIONLESS
SO" tt k!<':O.l1
~~ANGE
A oonduit projecting some distance atx)Vc the
5
t,
natural ground surface (GS) and covered by caM fill
is known as a plSitive projecting cooduit [Fig. , VI. CL AY _
FOR
=~i: S~t t~~~:~1 ~c!:a~~r It::n ~h to~ Fig. 12.8. Chart for c'I.
directly over the conduit. This is because greater height of fill in side woes. However, if the conduit is
flexible and deflects considerably under the weight of the fill, the settlement of tbe fill in the central zone will
be greater than the settlement in the side zones. The differential settlement between the two zones results in
the development of shearing stresses on vertical planes passing through the sides of the oonduit. Fig. 22.9 (a)
shows the direction of Shearing stresses (upward) when the central zone settles more than side zones, whereas
rTOP OF EMBANKMENT4
~
I FlEJ(IBLE il I RIGID
: CONDUIT' CONDUIT
GS . ~S .
(a) (b)
(.) Ib)
wbere bm =: compression of the fill on the sides of the conduit in the distance pBe ~
6, = settlement of natural ground surface adjacent to tbe conduit,
6t = settlement of conduit into its foundation.
and dt = vertical deflection of the conduit,
p = projection rntio. It is the ralio of the distance from the natural ground surface to the top of the
conduit to its width Bt ,
Bt = dj.ameter or width of conduit.
The setUement ratio is negative when the conduit settles more than the aitical plane. The load on the
conduit is less than the weight of the overlying fill. It is similar 10 the conditions in the ditch conduit and is
known as ditch condition. However, if the settlement ratio is positive, the load on the conduit is greater than
the weight of the overlying fill . Il is known as projection condition. 11 is extremely difficult to determine the
individual terms in the settlement ratio. However, empirically determined values given by Spangler are
generally used for design purposes (Table 22.1).
Table 22.1. Values fOI" St!Ulement Ratio (rp)
(After Spangler)
Settlement Ratio
S.No. Conduit Condition (rp)
1. Rigid conduit of foundation of rock. oc unyielding soil. +1.00
2. Rigid conduit on foundation of ordinary soil. + 0.5 \0 + 0.80
3. Rigid conduit on foundation Wt yields relative 10 adjacent ground. 0.0 to + 0.50
4. Fleltible conduit with poorly compacted side fills. - 0.4 \0 0.0
5. Flexible conduit with well compacted side fills. - 0.2 to + 0.8
(not well~ablished)
I C TOP OF ~MBANKMENT
I I
T" -r-l(-r::~=-~b::.a~~:~,!.':EMENT
;e The upper (Plus or minus) signs apply when settlement ratio (7,,> is positive, whereas the lower signs
aw1y when ' " is negative.
l)'pes of Positive Projecting Conduits
The positive projecting conduits can be classified into 4 types, depending u!X>n (1) magnitudes of actual
embankment height (lI) and the height of plane of equal settlement (H~) and (2) the sign of the settlement
ratio (Tp), as given below. .
(I) Complete ditch oooduits H < He ; Tp - negative .
(il) Complete projection conditions H < He; Tp _ positive
(iii) Incomplete ditch conditions H > He: Tp - negative
(iv) Inoornplete projection conditions H > He; Tp - positive
It may be DOted that for complete ditch or complete projection oonditions, the shearing stresses extend
uptO the top of the embankment; whereas (oc inoomplete ditch or iocomplcte projection oonditions, the
shearing stresses extcod upto the plane of equal settlement. which is lower than the top 'o( the embankment.
Marston gave the (olloY/ing expression (or tbe load on positive projeaing conduit:
We - epyn; ... (22.20)
580 SOIL MECHANICS AND FQUNDXnON ENGINEERING
where the cocITicicnl Cp for the complete projection Of ditch condition is given by
e:l: 2K J,t'(HIB.) -1
... (22.21)
Cp - ::t2KIJ.'
and ttL'll for incomplete projection or ditch condition as
Cp
_ e:!:2K\-l'(lleIBc) -1
:t:2KJ.l' +
(!l ~) :t:KIl'(lIeIBc)
Dc - D. e ... (22.22)
lbc positive signs apply when Tp is positive (projection conditions), whereas the negative signs apply
when rp is negative (ditch conditions).
t2)
.ly
and
[ 2KIl' (lf~/B.t) _ 1 + (!!... _!l.!.) e- 2KIl' (II,/B.J when H > He ... (22.26)
ell " - 2KIl' Dd BJ
~ I \c
:~',o'31~w ",:~g E~:=-~I~P-
{7
0'.' 0 Te:-
~+-
0 p.O
, 50 ' 1
fl-
p'=2·Q
~2
~t--,-~ 4- 4-
he r! 7r-ru 'L Y'A~ / I- I-r-§ liY;/, / /
Or ~
6f- § I/V#,' / / 1-1- !//(/i / f- f-I-it
r- I- $
/
f- /
/
if'
;; 1-1- i;
flW / / 1-1- •f/
1-1-- /
/ I- ~L /
/
cd
ve " f-r!~ /
0 i-+,fY / I-
t-:lf /
jo
In 2r-:U / 1/ A/
"J ,7' J?i /
3)
o1/, 2 34 S 6 7 &01L , 2I 34
COFFICIENT Cn~ COFFICIENT
S 6 7
Cn- -
I/,
SO , 2 3 4
COFFICIENT Cn- "
5 S
lbc negative projection mtio p' is the ratio of the distance between the top of the conduit and the natural
ground surface to the trench width. Thus the distance between the lOp of the conduit and the ground surfnce
is p' Ed- h is always positive. As the settlement ratio (rft) is always negative, the product (r" x p') is a~
negative. The settlement ratio (r,,) is generally taken as -0.50 for the purpose of estimating loads on the
conduit. The value of ell may be obtained for different values of r" from Fig. 22.14 for K~' - 0.13 andp'
::: 0.5, 1.0 and 2:00.
22.9. IMPERFEcr DITCH CONDUIT
Imperfect ditch conduits are special type of oonduits which are oonstruded to reduce the load on I
conduit under a high embankment. The construction of imperfect ditch conduits is done in two stages :
•. ...Q
..
.' . . .. " . ..
>
" ...·~~·G. ....·xvG_;;
4' ' . .
. ',:
(0)
r-- BI------i
Fig. 22.16. TtUlneled Conduit.
c = cohesive strength of the soil overlying conduit,
C, = coefficient for tunneled conduit. It is equal to Cm the oocfficient of ditch conduit (Eq. 22.16).
The values of C, can be obtained from Fig. 22.8.
conduit can lake depends upon the conduit material, shape of the conduit and
the type of support. The 501fc ioc''\d which can be imposed on II rigid conduit, Load
such as concrete pipe, is dclcnnincd from the pipe strength and the quality of
o
foundation bedding. The strength of concrete coo.duits can be obtained from
a three-edge bearing lest (Fig 22.17). As the lest simulates a very severe
looding condition, which rarely develops in the actual conduits, the conduit
can support even a load greater than that obtained from the test. Generally, a
conduit which has a foundation shaped according to its contour can take a
graltcr: lood [Fig. 22.18(b)] than thnl wbich has no bedding [Fig. 22.18(0)].
Design ch..'U1S are supplied by manufacturers which provide load faaors foc
different Sh..1pcd concrete conduits based upon type of bedding, conduit
projection and settlement ratio.
The factors affecting the looo-carrying capacity of flexible conduits are
not well derined. Ilowcver, manufacturers of corrugated met.,1 pipes have
developed some manuals which can be consulted. Such conduits fuil by Fig. 22.17. Three-edgc
excessive deflection whereas rigid conduits f:lil by the rupture of the pipe bcaringte5t.
wall. 111C deflection of flexible conduits should be limited.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Dlustmllve Example 22.1. A rigid sewer pipe with an outside diameter of 50 em is to be laid in a ditch
which is 1 III wide at the top of the pipe and is to be covered with 8.0 III of clayey soil back-fill (y = 19
kN/m 3). Determine die load on the sewer. Take K Il' _ 0.12.
Solution. (Sec Fig. 22.6.) In this case, 11 = 8.0 m, fld = 1.0 m, I1IBd ;;; 8.0.
From Fig. 22.8, Cor I1IB/I = 8.0,
1 _ e- 2KJl'(/JIBJ )
Alternatively. Crom Eq. 22.16, Cd - 2KI1' - 3.56
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
22.1. A rigid pipe with an outside diameter of 1 m diameter is laid in a dild:! which is 1.5 m wide at the top of the
~~1~~~ is covered with 9.0 m of sandy soil backfill (K....'.O.1S). Determine the load ~!e:rk~!~
22.2. A reinforced concrete pipe, 2 m in diameter, is installed as nn imperfect ditch conduit, with the negative
projection rutio (P') ., 1.0, The height of fill above the top of the pipe is 16 m. Determine the 1000 on the pipe.
Assume K ....' = 0.13 and T" '" - 0.5. Take y = 19 kNlnl [Ans. 357.2 kNImJ
B. Descriptive and Objective 1)rpe
22.3. DiS'-"USS different types of conduits. What are the factors that affect the lood on a conduit?
22.4. What do you undcrsland by arching of soil ? Gille examples.
22.5. Explain the variation of stresses in soil in the vicinity of a venial! shnR.
22.6. Draw a sketch showing the stress distribution in soil around tunnels.
U.7. Discuss the methods of oonsuuaion of eatth tunnels. •
22.8. DefiDe planes of' equal settlement. What is their impooancc' ?
22.9. DefiDe settlement ratio. lIow is it determined ?
22.10. How would you determine the load on a buried conduit due to surface loads ?
n.ll. Describe the methods of laying of conduits. What is the effea or foundation bedding on the load carried by the
conduit?
n.n. What do you understand by imperfea ditch oondition ? What is its advantage?
22.13. Write whether the following statements are true.
(a) For a vertical shaft constructed in soil. the radial stress becomes infini te when the l1KI..ius tends to infinity.
(b) For a tunnel in sail, as r lends to infinity, tile radial stress tends 10 approach a value of zero.
(e) The StreMeS on the yielding portion of a soil mass are inaeased due to arching of soil.
:h (d) For a ditch conduit, the load carried by a flexible ronduit is greater than that by a rigid one.
'9 (e) For a ditch conduit, the load load carried by the oonduit is reduced if the ditch is made wider.
(/) The sail above the plane of equal settlement is not subjected to shear stresses.
(g) lbe plane of equal seulemem cannot be above the top of embankment.
(h) In imperfect ditch conduits. the excavated trench is backfilled with compact, incompressible material.
(Ans. True, (f)]
23
tho
Bearing Capacity of Shallow Foundations
23.1. INTRODUCTION
:Iuit
A fouodalion is that part of a structure which transm its the weight of the structure to the ground. All
structures constructed on land are supported on foundations. A foundation is, therefore, a connecting link:
between the structure proper and the ground whim supports it. The word 'foundation' is derived from the
latin word [wulaTe, meaning to sct or ground on something solid. In other words. a foundation is an
artificially laid base on which a structure is set or built up.
A foundation is required for distributing the loads of the superstructure 00 a large area. The foundation
should be designed such thai (1) the soil below docs not fail in shear and (2) the settlement is within the safe
limits. 1be pressure wbich the soil can safely wilrnrnod is known a<> the allowable bearing pressure. This
chapter gives the methods for the determination of allowable bearing pressure.
Foundations may be broadly classified into two categories: (1) SbaUow foundations, (2) Decp
e)1 foundations. A shallO\ll foundation transmits the loads 10 the strata al a shallow depth. A deep foundation
transmits the load at ~iderable deplh below the ground surface. The distinction between a shallow
foundation and a deep foundation is generally made acoording 10 Terzagbi's aiterion. According to which. a
foundation is termed shaUow if it is lnid al a depth equal to or less than its width. ShaUow foundations are
discussed in Chapters 23 and 24. and deep fouildatiQllS., in OUlpters 25. 26 and 27.
23.2. BASIC DEFINITIONS
(1) Ultimate Bearing Capadty (q,,). The ultimate bearing capacity is the gross pressure at the base of
the foundation at which the soil fails in shear.
(2) Net UlUmale Bearing Capacity (q_) . It is the net increase in pressure at the base of foundation lhal
causes shear failure of Ihe soil. It is equal to the gross pressure minus overburden pressure.
Thus q~ - q. - r Df ... (23.1)
where q" '" ultimate bearing capacity (gross),
= =
y unit weight of foundation soil. and Df depth of foundalioo.
It may be noted that the overburden pressure equal to y Df existed even before the conslructioo of
foundation.
(3) Net Sare Bearing Capadty (q..J. It is the net soil pressure which can be safely applied to the soil
considering only shear failure. It is obtained by dividing the net ultimate bearing capacity by a suitable factor
of safety. Thus
... (23.2)
without shear failure. It is equal (0 the oct safe bearing capacity plus the original ovaburdcn pressure. Thus
q, -qlU + yD,
Some authors define the gross safe bearing capacity (q~) as the ultimate bearing capacity divided by a
faclor of safety (I'); that is,
... (23.4)
As the added strength due to y D, is available in full, it does not seem logical to apply a factor of safely
to this term. II is, therefore, more rational 10 define the gross safe bearing ca~cily as indicated by Eq. 233.
This prnctice will be followed in this text.
(5) Net Safe Settlement PrtiSure (q..,). II is the oet pressure which the soil can carry without eXO::cding
the allowable settlement. The maximum aUowabJc settlement generally varies between 25 mm and 40 mm for
individual footings.
The nct safe se!llcmcnt pressure is also known as unit soil pressure or sale bearing pressllre.
(6) Net AUowable Dearing Pressure (q.) . The net allowable bearing pressure is the nct bearing pressure
which can be used for the design of foundations. -
As the requirements for the design of foundation are that there should be no shearing failure and more-
over the settlements should also be within the limits, the allowable bearing pressure is the smaller of the net
safe bearing capacity (q..) and the net safe settlement pressure (q~p). Thus
qnQ - q.. if qnp > qIU ... [23S(a)}
or q~ • g.. if gN > g., ... [23.5(b))
The net allowable bearing pressure is also known os the allowable soil pressure or allowable bearing
pressure or allowable bearing capacity.
2J.J. GROSS AND NEI' FOOTING I'RESSURES
The gross and nel fooUng pressure at the base of a fooling can be found as follows.
(1) Foundation Backfilled. Fig. 23.1 shows a footing subjected 10 a superimposed loud Q. If the weight
of the footing and the soil above it is WI' the gross footing pressure is given by
q, • Q : W, ... (23.6)
G.S .
T
l'f
FOOTING
1 ~I'~------B----~~
.1
T
0.:
Fig. 21.1.
G
BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 589
I)
Eq. 23.6 can be written as q, • q+ (D'1,)A + (Dr - ~,) 1A . .. (23.7)
where Yc '" unity weight of ooncretc, Dc = thickness of fooling. y = unit weight of soil,
Q = superimposed load.
The net footing pressure is equal to the gross footing pressure minus the overburden pressure. Thus
q• • q, - 1 Df ... (23.8)
Substituting the value of q, from Eq. 23.7,
q• • ~ + (D'1,)A + (Df - ~,) 1A -1 D
f
Simplifying, q" - QI A + (Yc - y)Dc
If the difIereoce between the unit weight of concrete (about 24 ItN/m~ and the unit weight of soil (about
20 kN/m1 is neglected, Eq. 23.9 becomes
q• • QIA ... (23.10)
Thus the net footing pressure (q,,) is equal 10 the superimposed load Q divided by Ute area A.
For safe design. the nct footing pressure (q,,) should be less than or equal to the net allowable bearing
pressure (q....), i.e.
q,,:$ q-
QI A :s: q"" .. (23.11)
(2) Foundation not baddilled. 1be footing beneath the b~ment (Fig. 23.2) are not backfilled. For such
footings, the gross pressure is given by
Q
BASEMENT
1
Fig. 232.
q, - QIA + Dc 'tc + !t'Yc ... (23.12)
where If = thickness of basement floor.
The net footing pressure becomes
q,.-q,-lD, ... (23.13)
or q,. - [QIA + De le + llle] - yD/
As the thicknesses De and 1 are small in comparison with the depth D" the second and third tenns in Eq.
23.12 can be neglected.
Thus q,. - QIA - yD, ... (23.14)
For safe design, the net footing pressure should be equal to or less than the net allowable bearing
pressure, i.e.,
590 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
q,. s; qllQ
'" (QIA - yDf ) S q~ ... (23.15)
QIA S q~ + y Df ... (23.16)
Comparing Eq. 23.11 with 23.16, it is observed that the load- carrying capacity of a foundation is
considerably increased if it is not backfilled. lbe nct Cooling pressure would reduce to zero if in Eq. 23.14,
QIA - yDf ... (23.17)
This is the principle of compensated raft foundations in which the pressure applied is just balanced by
the pressure released (see Olapter 24).
The reader sbould carefully notc the diffcreoce between the footing pressure q" and the allowable bearing
pressure q..... The footing pressure depends upon the superimpaiCd load Q ading on tbe footing, whereas tbe
allowable bearing pressure depends upon the bearing capacity of the foundation and the allowable settlement.
The allowable bearing pressure is a function of the type of soil and the footing, as discussed in later sections.
Eq. 23.11 is used for the determination o( the area of footing if it is backfIlled and Eq. 23.16. if not
backfilled.
23.4. RANKINE'S ANALYSIS
Rankine (1885) oonsidered the plastic equilibrium of two adjaocnt soil elements, one immediately
beneath the footing and the other just beyond the edge of the footing (Fig. 23.3). For the element I beneath
tbe footing. the vertical stress is the major principal stress and tbe lateral stress is the minor principal stress..
However, for the clement n, the lateral stress beoomes the major stress, and the V(:rtical stress becomes the
minor principal stress.
(~)'
q.. - 't D, 1 _ sin.' ... (23.18(b)]
Eq. 23.18 gives an approximate value of the ultimate bearing capacity q .. of the soil. As the equation does not
give reliable values, it is rarely used for the determination of the ulLimate bearing capacity of the soils. It has
been superseded by Tchaghi's theory and other theories which give more dependable valucs. Rankine did not
consider cohesion intercept (c') of the soil. The theory gives the bearing capacity of the soil as zero if
Dr • O. This is contrary to experience. These are the limitations of the theory.
Eq. 23.18 is occasionally used to determine the minimum depth of foundauon (D,)min' It can be written
D . _ 2.
(:,r}m," 1
(.!....=...!!!!.)'
1 + sin "
... (23.19)
03 - ~ : :::: 01 - ~~~~,
0, - tan' ( 45' - f) a, - 2c'tan ( 45' - f)
or 03_0toot2a'_2c'cota' ... (b)
Substituting the value of 03 from Eq. (0),
2
- cot a' (q" + rt-tan 0.' ) - 2c'cota'
From Eq. (a), q" B-2 [(Pp)T+ (Pp)(' + (Pp)q) + B c' tan q.' - ~ y JiZ tanq.'
2<=' (~o f) 1
... [23.26(b)J
N, - [ •
10
5.1
1.3
9 .•
I..
1.0
2.1
0.0
05
1.2
5.1
•.1
8.0
1.0
1.4
1.9
0.0
0.2
0.'
1.0
I..
1.2
'"25 17.7
25.1
1.4
12.7
5.0
9.1
11.8
14.8
3.•
5.•
1.1
3.2
3.3
5.3
30 37.2 225 19.7 19.0 8.3 5.1 .5
35 57.8 41.4 42.4 25.2 12.6 10.1 18.7
40 95.7 81.3 100.4 34.' 20.5 18.8 425
4' 172.3 173.3 2975 51.2 35.1 37.7 115.0
'0 347.5 415.1 1153.2 81.3 65.6 87.1 329.10
II /,
/ji
100
Iy
./
./ ./
"c/
V
W
0
./"
V / ~
/' ".~
70\
"¥
7 / / 60
~
/ / !
ra i
oV
/
/ II "Of
!
. 30
1.
~
/ 20!
/
o.
"o' ," ,,"
An91~
,,"
of
,,"
sheoring
,,"
/
,,"
rt'sisl~Jr\ce
,,"
((>/)--......
,," ,," r
50'
~ :U q
ulqU
~rt
\ ---- ----- , ': q
'.......... /./~ qu
0,
8"" 3t---j---i--',II---tJ.r---j
a* =!!!.L
B+L
Table 23.1 and Fig. 23.10 also give the Vesic's values of Nq'.
The equation for local shear failure for strip footing can be wriuen as
where N/, Nq' and Ny' are for rOOuced values of ,', equal to +m'.
Il is difficult to ascertain the limiting oonditions for which local shear failure should be assumed. Bcsi~
the criteria given by Vesic (Fig. 23.9), the following criteria are also used.
(1) For a cohcsionless soil, if ~' is greater than 36°, general shear failure is likely to occur. If ~' is lei
than 29°, local shear would be more probable. For intermediate values of +'
between 29° to 36°, the vaiUIJ
of bearing capacity factors are obtained by interpolation.
For example, if a soil has +'
= 35°, Eq. 23.27 (b) gives +m = 25°.
The bearing capacity factors are as under.
599
BEARING CAPACrfY OF SlI~W FOUNDATIONS
IG
00
,
I
I
I
I
I
10 a
/I
I 777
/77
,V V
_______V;l:Y
' '\,~
';:
~V "'~
. .c.. .... /~
/j
Dg §
'0
----- ..
\
~/
/
~/
/
'?
,)] ~z;.. /
17 /
;)]
---/
;al
he
£ 7
as
~
;al
!8)
0/ 1/
f----
!9) /
es,
II
:ss
.,, ,0 ,
5 30 so
Aog!e 01 I rictio o. V -----...
Fig. 23.10. Dearing Capacity faclOl'5 for Local Shear Failure.
600 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
______u_YLl... __
(a) (b)
Fig. 23.11.
The effective surcharge is reduced as the effective weight below the watet !able is equal to the
submerged unit. 'Therefore,
q-D.. y+ay' ... (23.30)
where D .. = dcpthe of water table below the ground surface,
a = height of water table above the base of footing.
Altematively, Eq. 23.30 can be written as, substituting a - Dr D""
q - y'V, + (y - y')V_ •.. (2331)
Moreover, the unit weight in the third Icon of Eq. 23.25 is equal to the submerged unit weight. Thus Eq.
23.25 becomes
10 BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 60'
q.. - c' N~ + [y' 0, ... (y - y') D ...l N q ... 0.5 'I' B N, ... (2332)
If D... - O(i.e. (.I - DI),
.[2333(a)]
re If a - o(i.e. D, _ D,.,),
~,
q.. - c'Hc +.., DIN q ... O.5y'BN, ... [2333(b)]
Case U Water table k>cated at a depth b below brase [Flg. 1.1.11 (b)]
IT the water table is located at the level of the base of footing or below it, the surcharge term is not
affeded. However, the unit weight in the third term of Eq. 23.25 is modified as
p
c
Terzaghi's lailure
surfaces
--L Meyerhof's
surfaces
failure
11/~
'/
///
/'/
., 7
V
~
.• /'
~~
..-If
/
, / (Aftfr ~rho')
/'
,/ ,,'
/ ,,' , .,
" " " 1'-
" 3~
.'" '"
Fig. 23.13. Mcycmof's Chart.
a number of factors, such as the characteristics of the soil. the stress history of the ground, the method of
construction and physical characteristics of the foundation. The value of K usually lics between the active and
passive earth pressure coefficients. The value of Nl'l is obtained from tbe charts for the given values of K, "
and DIB ratio, assuming the base and shaft as rough. For smooth surfaces, the values of N'N are reduced to
half the values.
(b)~hesln sol19
For robesive soils (+ = 0) Meyerhof's simplified equations is
q.. • ' e N"l :.. y Df ... (23.41)
where N"l is the bearing capacity factor depending upon the DflB ratio of the footing aod on the adhesion 00
the sides of the footing. For example, for a DIB ratio of 2.0, N~ has a maximum value of 8.30 when the
adhesion is zero, and a maximum value of 8.8 when the adhesion is equal to the cohesion (e) of the soil
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
lbe abovc-mentioned equations are for the ultimate bearing capncily oC strip footings. The cqu.'ltions can
also be used for rectangular, square and cirrular footings in conjunction with the empirical shape factors given
by Mcycrhof. The values of NlfJ and N(q mny be obtained from lhe original paper.
.'
N,
N,
O·
5.14
1.0
5·
6.48
1.57
'D·
8.34
2.47
W
10.97
3.94
20·
14.83
6.40
25·
20.72
10.66
30·
30.14
18.40
35·
46.13
33.29
40·
75.32
64.18
45·
133.89
134.85
SO·
266.89
318.96
Ny 0.0 0.'" 0.'" 1.42 354 8.11 18.08 40.69 95.41 240.85 681.84
Shope 0/ FOOlillg
Continuous FOOling (Slrip) 1.0 "
1.0 1.0
RcclDngular Footing 1 + 0.2B/L 1 + 0.2 BtL l-O.4D/L
SqUDrc Footing 1.3 1.2 0.8
Circular footing 1.3 1.2 0.6
1 + 0.35 (DfllJ)
1 + 0.35 (DfIO)
1.00
1 - Z:BL
1 _ lotH
og
he (;,,)'
Shape of Footing
10
"
10
'T
10
Strip
Reccangle 1 + (BIL) (NqlNe) 1 + (BIL) tan,' 1 - 0.4 (BIL)
Circle and square 1 + (NqINc) 1 + tan,' 0.60
The depth factors as proposed by Hansen (1970) are used for DIB :s: 1 as follows.
d. - 1 • 0.4 (DIB) ... [23.46(a)J
606 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
q,... .. ~ c Nt' SC dcic + q (Nq ' - l)sqd'qiq + 0.5 't B Ny' Syd, ~ ,W .. ,(23.50)
The value of the local bearing capacity factors N/, Nq', Ny' are obtained from Table 23.6, for the angle of
mobilised friction as
'.- tan-
t
(t tan+')
In case of oohesionless soils, if the relative density is greater than 70% and the void ratio is less than
0.55, the failure is considered a<; general shear failure. On the other hDnd, if the relative density is smaller
than 20% and the void ratio is greater than 0.75, the failure is local shear failure (or punching failure) and
Eq. 23.50 is used. For a relative density between 20% and 70% and a void ratio between 0.55 and 0.75, the
bearing capacity factom are obtained by interpolation between the general shear failure and the local shear, m
explained below.
For a relative density between 20 to 70% (or 0.55 < e < 0.75). the value of the nct ultimate bearing
BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 607
capacity (q.... ) can be interpolated between the general shear failure and the local shear failure conditions,
depending upon the relative density.
For illustration, Ict us consKler thc case when the relative density is 40% and .' is equal to 30°. The
bearing capacity factors for general shear from Table 23.6 arc as under.
Nc - 30.14; Nq - IB.4O; NT - 22.40
Now .... _ lan- I (213 tan JO O )• 21 D. The corresponding bearing capacity factln for the local shear from
Table 23.6 are
N/ - 16.01, Nq' - 7.25, NT' - 6.49.
Let us find the net ultimate bearing capacity. Let us assume c' _ 0,
2
B - 2m.sq - sl - dq - ~ - 1.0,"1 - 20 kNl m and Df - 1 m, W' - 1.0.
For general shear failure (Dr :to 70%) (Eq. 23.48)
q"" - 0 + 20 X I (lB.4 - 1) + 0.5 X 20 X 2 X 22.40 • 796 kN/m 2
For local shear failure (D, < 20%) ( Eq. 23.50)
q,..: - 0 + 20 X (7.25 - 1) + 0.5 X 20 x 2 x 6.49 _ 254.B kN/m 2
For Dr = 40%, by linear interpolation,
",--,---,-----,---,-----,--,
N, ,!'-/--+----1--+--+--+--I
00
~Ratlo--
Fig. 23.14. S1ccmplOn's Chart.
If the shear strength of the soil for a depth of 2B{3 beneath the footing docs nol. vary by more than about
± 50% of the average value, the value of ell in Eq. 23.55 may be taken as the average value.
23.17. IS CODE METIJOD FOR CODESIVE SOIlS
15 : 6403-1981 gives tbe following equation for the net ultimate bearing capacity of the footing
immediately after construction on a cohesive soil. 1be equation is obtained by substituting N'I = l.0 and NT =
0.0 in Eq. 23.48. Thus
... (23.56)
where He = 5.14 and Sco de and ic are, respectively, the shape. depth and inclination factors (see Sec. 23.15).
The value of e" is obtained from unconfmed compression strength lest or it can be derived from the slatic
oone lest. The stalic cone Icst gives the point resistance (qc) as explained in chapter 17. For nonnally
consolidated clays, tbe point resistance qc is generally less than 2000 kN/m2 and the value of the undrained
cohesion e .. varies between q/18 10 q;15. For over-consolidaled clays, the point resistance is generally
2
greater than 2000 kN/m , and the vaJue of e" varies between qJ26 and qJ22.
fo°-7B I·
8
G
I
I
,
I I
:(
I
Ct!
I
H I I
I
-~
it
I
C
etl
,I
I
F 'D
0·78
-.l
Fig. 23.16.
The ultimate bearing capacity of the continuous foundation can be obtained from Eq. 23.25 ~
q.. " cNf +- N'I1Df
Taking Ne .. 5.7, and Nq .. 1.0,
q,," 5.7c +- yD,
Therefore, qfW .. 5.7c
The net ultimate load is given by Qnu" 5.7 cBl
I)
The factor of safety is given by
Q".. 5.7cBJ
F.S·-Q-BIyH_cH
ES._1-(~)
H y - C/BI
... (2357)
Bjenum and Eide (1956) proposed the following equation for the factor of safety.
eN,
F.S. - 1/i ... [23.58(0»)
If there is a surcharge q, the factor of safely becomes
a
~1 •'v::;:;: :...--
1
9
sqvor~~
~
1B N,
'V
s
,
./
~ tao
1
(Strip)
f--
, S
l! _ _
B
T
1
~It------B - - - - I
Up~ loy~r ~;o
Nc 4
c,
'0) !O)
Fig. 23.18. Layered ColK:sive DeposiL
variation of Nc with C2/CI r<ltio and lIB ratio. It may be IlOted that for C2lcl ratio less than unity, the value
of Nc is smaller than that for a homogeneous soil, (i.e., C2/cl = 1.0). It indicates that the ultimate bearing
caP.'1cily of a clay layer is reduced by the presencc of a soft layer beneath the top hard layer.
23.20. nEARJNG CAI'Acny FROM STANDARD I'ENETRATION TEST
Method I. Ihe ultimate bC<lrinb capacity of cohesionlcss soils may be detennined from the standard
penetration number (N). The standard pcnetrntion test is conducted at a number of selected points in the
vertical direction below the found.1tion level at intervals of 75 em or at point where there is a change of
stmla. An average value of N is obtained between the level of the base of the footing and the depth cqualto
1.5 to 2.0 times the width of the foundation. 'Ille value of " is obtained from the N value as already
discussed (Section 17.22) nnd the bc.1ring capacity factors are found. Fig. 23.7 may also be used to determine
directly the bearing capacity factors from N,
MeUaod II, As the ultimate bearing capacity depends upon " and hence on N, it am be related directly
to N. Tcng (1962) gave the following equation for the net ultimate capacity of a strip footing.
G BEARING CAPACITY OF SlIALLDW FOUNDATIONS 611
)J 2
q"" - ta{3N BWy + 5~100 2
+ N )Df Wq ]
q(l1a.~ .. ~ + ¥ (BI2)
It may by noted that the ecccrrtricity is measured from the centre of fooling.
(2) Determine the effw ive width of the footing. 8' - B-2 e".
(3) Determine the effective size of the fOOling as L xB'.
In the above case, the eccentricity has been assumed only along width. However. if the ea:cntricity is
also in tbe longitudinal direction along length, the eooentricity along the length is given by
The effcctivc length of the footing in that case is L I _ L - 2 el and the effective size is L' x fl'.
The smaller of the two dimensions B' and L' is taken as the" effective width for tbe computation of tbe
ultimate bearing olpacity.
(4) The ultimate bearing capacity can be obtained using Eq. 23.42 as
qll - cN.,$cd~i~ + qNqsqdqiq + O.5yB'NTs.,~i,
lbc shape factors S~I Sq and s,. 3rc obtained from Table 23.7. The inclination factors arc obtained using Eq.
23.47, in which the effective width ll' and effective length L' are used.
For ~pulations of depth factors, Eqs. 23.46 (a) to 23.46(c) are used, but 8' is not substituted for B.
(5) The total ultimate load is computed as
Q• • q. (B' xL') ... (23.64) (M
(6) The factor of safety is given by --f'bl--
I
F, • Q./Q ... (23.65) I
As the eccentricity causes a reduction in the load-carrying I
capacity of a foundation, the colum n is sometimes placed off-
centre of the footing to prooucc a uniform pressure distribution
(Fig. 23.20). If the rolumn is not placed oIT-<:entre. there is a
possibility of tilting of the footing due to higher pressure 00 one
side of the footing. This tendency of tilting can be reduced by
aUO\Ving a larger faaor of safCly.
If the ccccntricity is outside thc middle third, the minimum
soil pressure (Eq. 23.63 b). becomes negative, indicating that
[he tensile stresses develop in soil. As the soil cannot take
tcnsion, there is a separation between the footing and the soil.
1be area of the footmg wbich is in tension is generally
neglected. The maximum pressure in such a atse is given by
If r r r r r r r
Fig. 23.20.
where q = uniformly distributed load, B = characteristic length of the loaded area, Es = modulus of elasticity
of the soil. fA. = Poisson's ratio ( = 0.50 for saturated clay). I = influence foctor.
The value of E. is determined from the stress-strain curve obtained from a triaxial consolidated-undrained
test, with the consolidation pressure. equal to the effcctive pressure at the depth from which the sample Wal
taken, as dL~ussed in chapter II, It is gencraUy taken as the initial tangent modulus or the secant modulus.
For normally consolidated clays, its value varies from 250 c to 500 C, and for over-consolidated clays, from
750 c to WOO c, where c is undrained cohesion.
1:1C value of the influence factor I for a saturated day layer of scr::Ji-infinitc extent can be obtained from
Tabl~ 23.8.
Thble 23.8. Values of Influence Fador I.
Flexible footillg
Shape I- Cel/lre Comer Average
Rigid fOOling
Alternatively, the value of (1 - 1l1/IEr can be determined from the plate load test (Sect. 23.33).
If an incompressible 1..1yer exists at a limited depth bclow the footing, the actual settlement is less Ul3J]
that given by Eq. 23.68. For such a case, Steinbrenner (1936) gave a solution. However, if the depth of the
cl..'ly layer is more than 2 B. the actual settlement would not change much.
If the foundation is rigid, such as a heavy beam and slab raft, the sctUement is about 0.8 times the
settlement at the centre of the corresponding flexible fOWldntion. It is approximately equal to the averag~
settlem.-:nt. Table 23.8 also gives the values of / for rigid footings.
Eq. 23.68 is applicable for the footing located at surface. For the footings embedded in soil, the
settlement would be less than the computed values. Fox (1948) gave corrcction curves. The settlement is
obtained by multiplying the computed settlements by a depth factor, which depends upon (DII~)
ratio.
23.25. IMMEDIATE SE'rrLEMENT OF COIIESIONLESS SOILS
As cohesionicss soils do not follow Hooke's law, immediate settlements are computed using I
semi-empirical approach proposed by Schmenmann and Hartman (1978).
,. I
s; = C 1 C2 (q - q)l~O t i l l ... (23.69)
where C 1 = correction factor for the depth of foundation embedment = 1 - 0.5 {ql@ - q)}.
C 2 = corrcction factor for creep i!l soils [ = I + 0.2 loglo (Lime in yearslO.l)J.
q -= pressure at the level of the found'l1ion, q = surCharge ( = 'Y D,),
E. = modulus of elasticity, lz = stmin innuence factor.
'nlC value of the strain-influence fact.or I z varies linearly for a square or eircular foundation (Pig. 23.21~
The value of lz at depth z = 0, 0.5 Band 2IJ are respectively equal to 0.1, 0.5 and 0.0. For rcctangull
INO IlF..ARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDA'nONS 615
city
ined
was
llus.
'rom
'rom
Fig. 23.21.
foundations, with LiD ratio equal to or greater than to.O, the values al depth Z = 0.0, B, and 48 are,
respectively, 0.2, 0.5 and 0.0. For intermediate values of LIB ratio, between 1.0 and 10.0, interpolation can be
made.
Ulao The value of Ez can be determined from the standard penetration number .(N) using the following
f the equations given by Schmertmann (1970).
E, _ 766N (kN/ m') ... (23.70)
• the Alternatively, it can be estimated from the static cone 'penetration resistance (qc) as
~rage
... (23.71)
, the Procedure. For computation of the immediate setllement, the soil layer is divided. inlo several1ayers of
nt is thickness Az, uplO a depth z = 2B, in case of square footings and z'" 48, in ~ of rectangular footings. The
immediate settlement of each layer is computed using Eq. 23.69, taking oorresponding values of EJ and J: .
• B)
The required immediate settlement is equal to the sum of the settlements of all individual small layers.
23.26. CONSOUDATION SETfLEMENT IN ClAYS
The consolidation settlement (s~) OCOJrs in saturated, Clayey soils when these are subjected to increased
og a
loads caused by the foundation pressure. The methods for computation of the consolidation settlement have
been discussed in chapter 12.
The settlement (s,) at any time t after the application of load may be estimated using Terzaghi's
3.69)
consolidation theory as
Sf" s,· + U Sf ... (23.72)
where U = degree of consolidation, expressed as a ratio,
Sf = final consolidation settlement,
s. = immediate settlement
The degree of consolidation (U) depends upon the time factor Tv, given by
3.21).
Igular Tv - c" tiff . . .. (23.73)
616 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
=ta~~~~lu~ay:( lh~asco~r:r:;:~~ ~ N. 20 -
The avemge value of the cone res~tana: E ~ --::::: 1_ _...'N:!o'£2"'----t-
of each small layer is delennined. n _I. ......- ___ "" . 30
H 00+60 ~ N~60
S - C log" ~o-o- ... (23.75) ~
where C - I.Sqc/~
in which qc = slatic cone resistaoce, 00
= mean effective overburden pressure,
6. 0 = increase in pressure al the centre
of Ihe layer due to the net foundation
pressure and f/ = Ihickness of layer.
The lotal settlement of the entire
layer is equal 10 the sum of settlements WIdth a or lool,ng Im)---'"
of individual layers. Fig. 23.22.
(2) Standurd I'enetratioll Test. Standard penetralion test can be used for the determination of the
scttlement on cohesionlcss soils. IS : 8CX)9 (patt I}-1976 gives a chart for the calculation of settlement per
unit pressure as a function of the width of the fOOling and the standard penetration number (Fig. 23.22). The
setttemeni under any other pressure is computed assuming that the settlement is proportional to the intensity
of pressure.
The selllemenlS arc in metres per unit pressure in kN/m 2•
If the water table is at a shaUow depth. the settlements are divided by the correction factor Wy [Eq. 23.36
(c».
(3) J)lale l...ood Test The selliemcni of the footing can be estimated from the settlement of the plate in
the plate load Icst (Sec. 23.33).
BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 617
buildings. The values for isolated footings and rafts are given in Table 23.9. For further dctails, a reference
may be made to the code.
In actual practice, setllements of the structure at salient points such as the centre, the comer, the lightest
and the heaviest column locations are determined using the methods discussed. The differential settlements
are then determined from the settlements of the various points. Sometimes, the differential settlements are
taken as 75% of the maximum settlement without computing the settlements otber than that at the point where
the maximum settlement is expected to occur. However, for large works, thorough sub-soil invcstigations are
done to determine the charaaeristics of the soil and the differential settlements are determined taking the
properties of the soil into accounL
/
600
~-
/
/
/
,., 0
10
'"
Its "-
Fig. 23.23.
For a settlement of 25 mm,
qll P _ to.2S C ... N (kN/m2)
'"'he The water table correction is determined using the relution
C • • 0.5 + 0.5 DJ(D, + B) ... (23.79)
where D"" = depth of water table below the ground surface, Dr = depth of fooling, D width of footing.
8 + 0.3)'
00
;ts
qnP - 35.0 (N - 3)
(--zn WT Rd ... [23.80(a)J
rd where qllP = safe settlement pressure (kN/m1. N = SP'T number, B = width of Cooting (m),
:or WT = water table correction factor (Eq. 23.36 (e».
8 + 0.3)' . ,-
,m
:hi
q.P = 1.40 (N - 3)
(----w- W, R, , ... [23.8O(b)J
where s = tolerable settlement (mm)
'fe
(3) Meyerhof's equation
'7) Meyerhof proposed equations which are slightly different from Thng's equations. According to him, for a
settlement of 25 mm,
621) SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
where all the terms are the same as in Thng's equatioo, exoept Rd. whicb is given by
R.i - 1 + 0.33 DrB :s 1.33.
and q" p -
03
12.2 N ( D +8 . t W, Rd for B :z: 1.20 .. .[23.82(b))
--
700
t I
--
'1 roo "-
~:~ ~2smm
~
"" ~
"Xl
I
II
200 - N=20
I 100 N,,(\
N,,'i
t
are within the safe limits. However, it is essential to ~
compute the consolidation settlement in all cases of : aoo
heavy structures. ~ "'-
____ : _
~ 600f---t:::::-t':::"'i-_-!!.'-'.!'.~=::::j
N."-
The net safe bearing capacity (qM) depends
~:,~ t~~ '!':r S:=~h O;:~dC': ::nm%~m~.: 1 I~___ I
computations of the ultimate bearing capacity. On .: 400f--1::--+--..:=t==~N"".3:g,0=9===1
A central hole of the size Bp )( Bp is excavated in the pit. 100 depth of the central hole (Dp) is oblained from
the following relation :
Dp/'Bp' DIBf
Dp • (Bp/'Bf ) x Df ... (23.84)
where Br is the width of the pit, and Bp is the size of plate.
For conducting the plate load test, the plate is placed in the central hole and the load is applied by means
o[ a hydraulic jack (Fig. 2l26). The reaaion to the jock is provided by means of a reaction beam.
Sometimes, trusses are used instead of a reaction beam to take up the reaction. Alternatively, a loaded
platform (kcntlc<lge) can be used to provide read ion. A scating load o[ 7 kN/m2 is first applied, which is
I"fleased after some time. The load is then applied in increments of about 20% of the estimated safe lood or
one--tenth of the ultimate load. The settlement is recorded aner I, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60 minutes, and further after
an interval of one hour. These hourly observations are continued for clayey soils until the rate of settlement
is less than 0.2 mm per hour. The test is condLlCted until failure or at least until the settlement of about 25
mm has occurred (IS : 1888).
The u ltimate load for the plate qll (P) is indialted by a break on the log-log plot between the load
illtensity q and the settlements. If the break is not well-defined, the ultimate load is taken us thaI
BEARING CAPACITI OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
rig. 2327.
(1) The ullimatc bearing capacity of the proposed foundalion q.. (f) can be obtained from the following
relations:
(a) For clayey soils, q.. (f) - q.. (P) ... (23.85)
Br
(b) Fo, sandy soils, q. (f) • q.(P) x B, .. (23.86)
L-________________________
~
q
B
Fig. 23.28.
Limitation of the plate load test
The plate load test has the foUowing limitatiollS:
(1) Size effect. The results of the plate load test reflect the strength and the settlement charncteristics of
the soil within the pressure bulbs (Section 11.6). As the pressure bulb depends upon the size of the
loaded area, it is mudl deeper for the actual foundation as compared to that of the plale (Fig. 23.29).
The plate load test does not truly represent Ihe adual conditions if the soil is not homogeneous aoo
isotropic to a large depth.
(2) Scale elTed. The ultimate bearing capacity of saturated clays is independent of the size of the plate
but for oohesionless soils, it increases with the size of the plate (Eq. 23.86). To reduce scale eITed,
il is desirable 10 repeat the plme load test with plates of two or three different sizes and extrapolate
the bearing capacity for the adual foundation and take the average of the values obtained.
(3) TIme effect. A plate load test is essentially a test of short duration. For clayey soils, it docs not give
the ullimate selllement. The load----&ettiement curve is not truly representative.
(4) Interpretation of failure load. The failure load is not well·defincd, except in the case of a genen!
shear failure. An error of personal interpretation may be involved in other types of failure.
(5) Reaction load. It is not practicable to provide a reaction of more than 250 kN. Hence, the test 0118
plale of size larger than 0.6 m width is difficult.
(6) Water table. The level of the water table aITeas the bearing capacily of the sandy soils. If the wilier
table is above the level of the footing, it has to be lowered by pumping before placing the plate. T1r
test should be performed at the water table level if it is within about 1 m below the footing.
BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATION 625
10
ng
;g A FOOTING
>In
~ BULB
Ca)
>0)
to
PRESSURE
BULB
Cb)
Fig. 2329.
". Illustrative Example 23.1. Determine the ultimate bearing capacity of a strip footing, 1.20 /II wide, and
having the depth o//ol/ndation 0/1,0 m. Use Terzaghi's theory and assume general shear failure. Take til' =
aler 35", Y = 18 kN/III], and c' = 15 kN/,,? •
Ibe SoluUon. From Eq. 23.25, q" - c' N~ + y O,Nq + 0.5 YBN,
626 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
For ¢I' = 35°, Table 23.1 gives Ne .. 57.8, N q .. 41.4 and Ny .. 42.4.
Now qu .. 15.0 x 57.8 + 18.0 )C 1.0 x 41.4 + 0.5 x 18.0 x 1.2 x 42.4
.. 2070kN/ ml
lIIustraUye Example 23.2. Determine tile allowable gross load and the nel allowable load for a sqUiJTe
footing of 2m side and with a depth of foundation of 1.0 m. Use Terzaghi's theory and assume local sheilr
failure. Take a factor of safety of 3.0. The soil at the site has 1 = 18 kNlm3, c' :: 15 kN/m2 and if' = 25°,
Solution. From Table 23.1. for 4" = 25°'
N/ .. 14.8, N q ' .. 5.6 and Ny' .. 3.2
From Eq. 23.37, laking em' .. 2/3 c' .. 10 kN/m 2
qu .. 1.2 )( 1.0.0 )( 14.8 + 18 x 1.0 x 5.6 + 0.4 x 18 x 2 x 3.2
.. 325 kN/m 2
/
<0 BEARING CAPACITY OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 627
Therefore, q"" - 1.3 x 20.0 )( (18.4 - 1) )( 1.2 )( 1.11 )( 1.0 + 0.5 )( 20.0
x 2.0 x 22.4 x 0.8 x 1.11 x 0.75
_ 901 kN/m z
Dlustl'lltlve Example 23.S. A square. column founda tion is to be designed for a gross allowable total load
(e) IS Code
From Eq. 23.56, q"" '"' clONes" ~;e
Taking Ne = 5.14, q_ .. 10 X 5.14 X (1 + 0.2 X ( %) tan 45°) )( 1.0
IJ()
Now Q• • q., x Ii'
1200 • 126 (8 • 0.3)' (1 • 0.4/8)
Solving. B _ 2.58 m. adopt B .. 2.60 m
Illustrative Exumple 23.11. A rectangular footing (3 m x 2 m) exerts a pressure of 100 kN/m2 on a
cohesive soil (E, = 5 x 104 kN/m2 and ~ = 0.50). Determine the inmlediate settlement at the cenlre, assuming
(0) 'he footing is flexible,(b) the footing is rigid.
E,
Fig. E-23.12.
,.
Solution. From Eq. 23.69, 51 .. C 1 C 2 (q - q) Lo !..£.'.:l
E,
z
,. I
.. 222.4 ft· Az
,.
The value of ~ (lzIE,) . Az is delecmined as shown in the table below. It is equal to 13.97 x 10-5,
o
BEARING CAPACIIT OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 631
E,
I, (I,/E,) ;,
(kNlm')
Illustrative Example 23.13. Fig. E-23.13 shows the load- .fettlemcnt curve obtained from a plate load test
conducted on a sandy soil. The size of the plate used wtu" 0.3 m x 0.3 m. Determine the size of a square
column footing to carry a net load of 3000 kN with a maximwlI settlement 0/25 mm.
Load {kNlm1)--...
10
20
E
~ 30
~
!
~
40
SO
Fig. E-23.l3.
(~,
5pfrom Fig. sf
BI qo - Ex. 21.13 BflBp frrmaEq. (a)
illustrative Example 23.14. Two-plate load tests at a site gave the following results.
Size of plate Load Settlement
0.305 )( 0.305 In 40 kN 25 mm
0.61 x 0.61 m 40 kN 15 nun
(0) Assuming Poisson's ratio as 0.1, determine the de/ormation modulus of lIIe soil.
(b) If there are two columns, one of the size 2.5 m x 2.5 m, carrying a load of 2700 leN, and the other
of size 3m x 3m, carrying a load of 39()() kN, determine the differential settlement. The columns are 7 In
apart. .
ozo /
.015
V
/
0.01 L SLope.~",.S2X;-o4
E,
."", k--
'0
" qB (kNlm) ""
Fig. E-23.14.
As thc setUemcnt of the plate (0.305 m )( 0.305 m) at a load intensity of 430 kN/m~ is 25 mm, it can be
used for the dctennination of the settlement of columns.
PROBLEMS
A. Numericals
23.1. Determine the ultimate bearing: capacity of a square footing of size 1.2 m if the depth of foundation is 1 m. Take
~' '" 25'. y = 18 JcN/m3 and c =-. 15 IcNJm2• Use Vesic's equation. [Ans. 1050 JcN]
O.Z. A circular foundation is of 2.4 m diameter. If the depth of foundation is 1m, detennine llIe net allowable load.
2
Take y = 19 kN/m3, c' = 30 leN/m , " = 15° and factor of safety as 3.0. Use Tcmghi's equation and assume
local shear failure. [Ans. 418 kN]
23.3. A square footing is to be designed to carry a load of 500 kN. If the depth of foundation is 1.5 m, determine a
suitable size of foundation with a factor of safety of 3Jf The water table is at foundation level. Thke $' = 25°,
3 3
Y = 16 kNJm , Ysat '" 19 kN/m . Use Terzaghi's theory. c' '" 20 IeNJm2. [Ans. 2.10 m]
Assume local shear failure.
23.4. A strip footing is required to carry a net load of 1000 kN at a depth_of 1m. Thking a factor of safety of 3,
determine the width of the footing. Thke +'" 30°.'1 '" 19 JcNJm3, C:: 20 kNJm2 • Use Terzaghi's theory.
Assume general shear failure .[Ans. 2.4 m]
23.5. A strip footing is 2 m wide and founded at a depth of 2m in 8 soil of unit weight 20 JcNJm 3 and a oohesion of
+
10 kNJm 2. Determine the increase in the bepring alpacity when is increased from zoo to 25°. Use Thmghi's
equation. Assume local shear failure . [ADS. 130 kN!m1
3
Z3.6. A purely cohesive soil has a unit weight of 20 kN/m and a cohesion of 150 JcNJm2. Determine the safe bcarin$
capacity for a rectangular fOOling 8m x 2m founded at a deplh of 4 m in clay. (F.S. '" 3.0) [Ans. 448 JcNJm1
Z3.7. A strip fOOling 2 m wide is to be laid at a dCplh of 4 m in a purely cohesive soil (c '" 150 kNJm 2. y :: 19
634 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
kN/m \ Determine the uliim;l\c bcllring capacity frOlll (II) Terlaghi's thoory (b) SkcmplOn's theory.
[Ans. 930 kNhn 2; 1125 kN/m 2J
23.8. E,slim:llc. [he immcdkue sen icme- llt of 11 co ncrete footing. I III X 1m size. fOllnded at a depth of J m in It soil with
£ == 10" kN/m 2• 1..1 = 0.3. The foo tmg is J,ubjccted It) :1 pressure of 20() kN/rn2, Assume the footing [0 be ngid
IAns. 22.2 mmJ
23.9. A square fooli ng 2.5 m Si7.£ is founded at 11 dept h of 1.5 III in a sandy soil deposit which has the corrected N
value o f 30. 1111: water table is :11 II deplh of 2 III fmm the ground surface. Find the net aHowabh! soil pressure
;f
1 ~ 3.0.
(0) the deSIred (;lelor of Mlfety
(b) the permissible seUlemcnl ;s 40 mm.
Use Tens's equations. rAns. 605 kN/m2, 456.5 kN/m2]
23.10. An ellcavallon 3 m wide is to he mooe to deplh of 5 m in soft clay (e u '" 15 kNJm 2, y '" 19 kN/m J ). The ground
surrounding the ex.cav31ion carries a surcharge of 10 kN/nl. Determine the factor of sMety. Use Terzaghi's
equations. (Ans. 1.231
8. Descriptive utld Objective Types
23,11. Define the foll owi ng l erm.~ :
«(.)
Net safe hearing capacity,
(b) Gross safe bearing capacity,
(e) Allowable ~oil prc.~~urc.
23.12. What lire the a~~umptions made in the dt:nvation of Terzaghi's bearing capacity theory? Write the equation fOf
the ultimatc beari ng capacIty.
23.13. Diflerc1l1iatc hetween the ge neral shear failure and the local shc;] r failure . How the ultimate bearing capacity in
local Slll!Mis dctcrmin(!(! "?
23.14. Di sc u ~~ the effect of water table on the bearing capacity of the soil.
23.15. Discuss Meyerhof's bearing C:1P[lCIt)' theory. How docs it ditrer from TeFlaghi's theory'!
23.16. Wnte shon ooles on:
(a) H:msen's beanog capitClty theory,
(b ) Veslc's bcanng capacity theory.
23.17. Describe Skempton's analysis for bearing ca pacity of co hesive ~uils.
23.18. How Ihe bea~ing c,lpacity of looring nn a layered cohesive mil deposit is determined '!
23.19. Discuss th e various methods uf dctemlinarion of th e 'lllowohJc soil pressure. What :u-c their limit:1rions?
23.20. What aTC different types o f settlements which ca.n occur in a foundarion '! How are these esti mated ?
23.21. Discuss the methods for estimm ing immediare settlements of foundmions on clay.
.23.22. How would )'ou estimate the settlements of a found ation on cohesionlcss soils?
23.23. Describe plateiload test. Whot nrc irs lirhitation an d used '!
23.24. Write whelher the followrng ~t(lte lllents are true or (alsq.
(a) A foundn.lion is cun.~ idered shallow if its deplh is less than I m.
(b) Tcrzaghi 's theory is applicable when the base of rhe fooriilg is rough.
(c) For footings on co hesion less soils, the bearing capacity, and not the scttlement, generally governs the design.
(il) TIle plme.load tcst is more useful for cohesion1css soils than for cohesive soils.
(t') The maximum v:lloe of N, is 9.0 by Skemplon's chart.
(j) TIle !)TCsumprive bearing capacit)' is the same as the allowable bearing capacity.
(g) '1te imm(!(!iate selliement of a rigid fnOling is nppro)( imalely equal to Ihe overage scltlement of Ihe flexible
fOUling.
(II) TIle allowable angular distortion in cnsc of steel structures i~ more rhan that for R,C.C. structures.
(i) The differential settlement is generally three· fourths of the maximum scttlement.
lAos. True (b), (t/). (f!), (g), (h), (I)J
",,"?~{I,,~~~
~ ElEVATION ELEVATION
on G PLAN
~~~~
ELEVATION
@]-[QJ PLAN
Fig. 24.4. Strap Footing.
(5) Milt or ran foundations. A mat or raft foundation is a large slab supponing a number of columns
and walls under the entire structure or a large part.of the strudure. A mat is required when the allowable soil
pressure is low or where the columns and walls are so close that individual footings would overlap or nearty
touch each other (Fig. 24.5).
Mat foundations are usefu l in reducing the differential settlements on non-homogeneous soils or where
1here is a large variation in the loads on individual columns.
lhc bearing capacity theories have been discussed in the preceding chapter. 'Ibe design of shallow
found.1l1ons is discussed in this chapter. Ihe design is limited 10 the determination of the depth of footing, area
oC foot.ing, soil pressure, shear force and bending moments. The strudural design of footings is outside the
scope oC this text.
24.2, DElyrll OF FOOTINGS
To perform its funclion properly. a footing must be laid at a suitable depth below the ground surface. lbe
vertical distance between the ground surface and the base of fOOling is known as the depth of footing (Df ).
lhe depth of footing controls the ultimate bearing capacity and the settlement, as discussed in chapter 23.
While fixing the depth of COOling, the following JXlints should lIiso be considered.
(1) Depth of top soil. 100 fooling should be located below the top soil consisting of organic mailers
which eventually decompose. The top soil should be removed over an area slightly larger than the footing.
638 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINE.ERING
ELEVATION
0 0 0
PLAN
Fig. 24.6.
should not encroach upon a frustum of bearing material under the footing having sides making an angle of
30° with the horizontal. Moreover, the minimum distance from the lower edge of the footing 10 the sloping
ground surface should be 90 em. (Fig. 24.7).
(6) Water Table. TIle footing should be placed above the ~
ground water table as far 3S possible. The presence of ground water
wilhin the soil immediately around a footing in undesirable as it G. S.
reduces the bearing capacity of the soil and there arc difficulties
=';!=~truction. The water proofing problems also arise due to t----- O.9m-----l
(7) Scour Depth. The footings located in streams, on water Fig. 24.7.
fronts or other locations where there is a possibility of scouring, should be placed below the potential scour
depth.
(8) Underground Defecl<i. lhe depth of fOOling is also affected by the presence of underground defects,
is
such as faults, caves and mincs. If there are man-made discontinuities, such as sewer lines, water mains,
"
is
underground cables, these should be shifted or the footing relocated.
(9) Root holes. If thcre are root holes or cavities caused by burrowing animals or worms, the footing
should be placed below suc.il u zone of weakened soil.
(10) Minimum. Depth. IS : 1904-1978 specifies that all foundations should extend to a depth of alleast
50 em below the natural ground surface. However, in case of rocks, only the top soil should be removed and
the surface should be cleaned and jf necessary, stepped.
Sometimes, the minimum depth of foundation is determined from Rankine's formula (Eq. 23.19).
D
(,)mln
_ 'l.(~)2
'I 1 + sincp' ... (24.1)
It is dimwit to estimate the live loads accurately. These are specified by local building codes as
uniformly distnbuted equivalent static loads.
(3) Wind Loads. Wind loads act on all exposed surf".ares of structure. These loads depend upon the
velocity of wind and the type of structure. Uke live loads, wind loads are also specified by building codes.
(4) Snow loads. Snow loads occur due to accumulation of snow on roofs and exlerior flat surfaces in
cold climates. The unit weight of snow is usually taken as 1 KN/m2.
(5) Earth pressure. Earth pressures produce lateral force against the structure below the ground surface
or fill surface. 1be earth pressure is delennined using the theories discussed in chapter 19. The earth pressure
is nonnally treated ~ dead load.
(6) Water ~~ Like earth pressure, water pressure also produces a lateral force against the structure
below the water level
Water pressure may also cause an upward force 00 the bottom pf the structure due 10 uplift pressure. It
must be couoteracted by the dead load of the structure.
(7) Earthquake loads. The force due 10 an earthquake may act vertically, laterally or torsionally on a
structure in any direction. The worst oondilion should be anticipated and the relevant code consulted.
The earthquake load is usually assumed as a fraction of the dead load, depending upon Ihe seismicity of
the zone.
Computation of Design loads. TIle dead loads and live loads on columns are usually computed by
tributary area method. in which it is assumed that a oolumn carries aU the load in the floor area enclosed by
lines equidistant from its adjacent columns.
As live loads are temporary and transients. only a (Xlrt of it may ad for a duration thai may induce lhe
settlement. especially in COhesive soils. Moreover. specified maximum live loads do not occur simultaneously
at all the floors. It is usual practice to reduce !he live loads in such cases (IS : 875).
It is the commoo practice to a<iSume thatlhe wind load and earthquake loads do not occur simultaneously.
According 10 IS 1904-1978. foundations should be proportioned for the follOWing combinations of
loods-
(i) Dead load + live load,
(it) Dead load + live load + wind load or seismic load.
The dead load iocludes the weight of column, wall, footings. foundations, the overlying fill but excludes
tbe. weight of the displaced soil. If V is the volume of fOOling. there is a net ~ of load on foundation
of V('t~ - 1), where 1~ is the unit weight of concrete and 1 is the unit weight of soil If the weight Vy~ of
the footiog is included in the dead weight, the dead load needs a reduction equal to Vy, equal to the weight
of the soil displaced.
If wind load (or seismic load) is less than 25% of thaI due 10 dead and live loads, it may be neglcaed
and the foundation should be designed for combinalion (t) given above. However, if wind load (or seismic
load) is more than 25% of thai due to dead and live loads, the foundation should be designed for combination
(it) given above. The foundation pressure should not exceed tbe safe bearing capacity by more than 25% in
the second case.
For foundations resting on coarse-graioed soils, the settlements should be computed using the loads given
in combination (it). as settlements occur in a very short period. However, for fine-grained soils, the
settlements should be canpulocl oorn:spondiog to permanent loads. Generally. one half of the design live load
is taken as pennaneot.
24.4. PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN OF FOOTINGS
Before aclual design. it is essential 10 estimate the dead load, live load and other loads. The frequency
and dural ion or various loads should also be available. The bending moment at the base of column (or wall)
should also be ascertained if it is subjected to an eccentric load or moment.
As the bearing capacity of (he soil depends upon the depth.flf footing and ilS length and width, an
estimate about these dimensions is required before the actual design. For members carrying axial 10.1
DI!SIGN OF SHAlLOW FOUNDXfIONS 64J
combined with bending moments that do OOt change direction, a rectangular fOOling is more suitable than a
square fooling. _.
The investigation of the site should be first carried oul. 111e samplCS should be laken to determine the
engineering properties of the soil. The safe bearing capacity should be calculated on the basis of soil data
obtained from the tcslS using the methods discussed in chapter 23. For cohesionlcss soils, as it is difficult to
obtain undisturbed samples. the bearing C3JX1city is determined from the standard peoctration test number (N)
or from the plate load test The value of NIObe used is the average of the N values from the base of footings
to a depth equal to width of the fOOling.
The fOOling is designed using the following procedure.
(1) TIlC safe bearing cap.1city is determined using the methods discussed in chapter 23. For small,
unimportant structures. these values can be taken as presumptive values (fable 23.10).
(2) The fOOling is proportioned making usc of the safe bearing capacity determined in Step (I).
(3) The maximum settlement of the footing is determined using the methods discussed in chapler 23. An
estimate of the differential sculcment between various footings is made.
(4) Angular distortion is determined between various pans of the structure.
(5) The maximum settlement. the differential settlement and the angular distortion oblaine<! in the step
(3) and (4) arc compared with the given aUowable values (I'able 23.9).
(6) If the values are not within the allowable limi[s, the safe bearing capacity is revised ".od the
procedure repealed.
(7) The stability of the footing is checked against Sliding ana uVcr1urning.
The factor of safety against sliding should not be less [h.m 1.5 when dead load, live load and earth
pressure and wind pressure (or seismic forces) are considered. However, if only dew load, live load and earth
pressure are considered, it should nOt be less than 1.75. 'lhe corresponding factors of snfely ag.ainst
overturning arc 1.50 and 2.00, respectively.
245. PROPORTIONAL FOOTINGS FOR EQUAL SETTLEMENT
'Ib reduce the differential settlement due to live load variations for fOOling; on flOe-grained soils. it is
desirable [0 proportion all the footings in such a way [hat they have equal prcs.sures under the service loads.
Thus all the footings would sctUe by equal amounts and the differential settlement would be considcl"::!bly
reduced.1be following procedure suggcsted by Peck et nl (1974) i .. usually adopted.
(I) The dead load from each column, including the weight of the footing. is determined.
(2) 1he maximum live load to which each footing is SUbjected is detennincd.
(3) 'Ibe ratio of the maximum live load [0 dead load for each footing is oomputcd.
(4) The footing that has the lmgest live lo.1d to dead load rotio is taken as the governing looting.
1he area (Ag) of the governing footing is determined from the relation.
loads are heavy nnd the soil conditions are oot favourable, plain conaetc fooings are not eoonomical.
Reinforced cemenl cooacle footings are more suitable in such cases.
(a) Plain Concrete Footings. The fooling is designed so that the contact pressure on the soil docs not
exceed the allowable bearing pressure. The width (B) of the fOOling is determined [rom the relation
B. ~ ... (245)
......{41-
~I.---B ----l.1
Fig. 24.9. R.C.C. Strip FOOling.
For monolithic walls, the maximum bending moment is given by
M. 'h>(B - b)'/ S ... (24.~
where B width of footing, b =width of wall. q(J =actual soil pressure.
'0 DESIGN OF SHAu..oW FOUND,qIONS 643
aI. For checking the diagonal shear, the critical section is taken at a distance equal to the effective depth (d)
of fOOling from the face of the wan. The diagonal shear is given by
101
F • qo [(B - b)12 - dJ ... (24.8)
,6)
a
'8
(.) (b) (0)
Fig. 24.10.
where qo = actual pres<>ure, B = width of footing, b = width of square column, oq> = safe punching shear.
The depth provided is checked for bending moment, shear and bond.
644 SOIL MECHANICS AND fOUNDA'I1ON ENGINEERING
Mt.t
PlJNCHI NG
'f-¥ -1
Fig. 24.11. R,C.C. Spn:Ad FOOling.
The m<lximum force for bond is given by
Fb = qo I) (LJ - /))/2 ... (24.14)
In the case of rectangular footings, the length <lod the wjulh should be MI <.:h~n 11M the bending
moment in each of the adjacent projcctions is cqunl 10 the moment of rcsist~mcc of the fnoling. For uniform
contact prcs.:>ure distribution, the centre of gravity of the fOOling should coincide with Ihe (;cmrc of gravity of
the column.
Inc fOOling of a circu[.'lr column am be cilher sqUllTC or drcul:.lT. For the design of a sqUlJfC footing for
a circular column. the circular column is gencmlly substituted by an equivalent sqWITC column or Ihe same
area. The design of the fOOling is then done using the procedure already described for a squnTC fOOling. 'JOe
dcsign of the circular footing am also be done using the basic principles. I1ccausc of the curved areas, the
expressions arc morc involved than those for :1 square footing.
The thickness of the fOOling at the edge shall be not less th:1O 15 em for footings on soi l, nor less fh.<rI
30 em above the top of piles for footings on piles.
24.8. DESIGN OF ECCENTRICALLY LOADED SPREAD FOOTINGS
A column is said to be eccentrically loaded when it is subjected 10 a load which is 001 centric or wilen
it is subjected \0 a bending moment in addition to the centric lood. If the centre of gravity of the footing ti
made to coincide with the centre of gravity of the centrically loodcd column, the pressure distribution ti
trope-.widal, with the maximum pressure on one side and the minimum pressure on the other side. However,
if the centre of gravity of the footing is placed eccentric with the centre of gravity of the column, the pressure
distribution becomes unifonn (Sec Fig. 23.20).
The eccentricity (e) of the footing is given by
e_ MIQ ... (24.15)
when M bending moment, and Q = axial 10•.1d.
DESIGN OF SIIAU ..OW FOUNDATIONS 645
If the footing is provided with the above ecccmricity. the resultant of the bearing pressure coincides with
the resultant of the loads. 111e area of the fOOling is given by
A • ;f ... (24.16)
'Ine longer projcction of the footing is designed as a c<lnlilever roc the maximum bending moment at the
face of the column. GeneruUy, the &.1me reinforcement is provided in the smaller projection as well: The
thickncs.<; provided is checked for the diagonal shem and the punching shear.
If the bending momcnt acts temporarily for a shan period, a symmetriaal footing can also be provided.
The maximum pressure is determined using the follow ing equations (sec Sect. 23.21)
1-----'2----1
I·
T
PLAN
Fig. 24.12. Rectangullir Combined FOOling.
1
i .. Q2)( ~Q ... (24.21)
where x2 is the distance between columns.
(4) Dctcrmine thc total length of the footings.
L .. 2 (i + b l l2) ... (24.22)
where b J = width of the exterior column.
(5) Find the width of the fooling.
B .. AIL ... (24.23)
(6) As thc actual Icngth and width that are provided may be slighUy more due to rounding off, the actual
pressure .is given by
... (24.24)
where Ao is the actual area.
(7) Draw the shear force and the bending momcnt diagrams along the length of the fOOling, considering
the pressure qo.
For convenience, the column loads arc lakcn as oonccntrie loads acting at tbe ccntres.
(8) Determine the bending moments at the face of the columns and the maximum bending moment al tile
point of zero shear.
(9) Find the thickness of fOOling for the maximum bending momenl.
Check for diagonal shear and punching shear, as in the case of an isolated footings .
Check. for bond at the point o( contraI1exure.
DESIGN OF SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 647
(10) Determine the longitudinal reinforcement for the maximum bending moment.
For transverse reinforcement. assume a width of (b + d) to take all the bending moment in the shon
diceaion, where b is the column side and d is the effective depth.
24.11. TRAI'EZOIDAL FOO"J1NG
Trapezoidal combined footings are provided to avoid eccentricity of loading with respect to the ba<>e, as
already mcnLioned. Trapezoidal footings are required when the space outside the exterior column is limited
and the exterior column carries thc he:lVier load.
The design procedure consists of the following stcp>:
(1) Odermine the total column loads.
Q - Q, + Q, ... (24.25)
(2) Find the base area of the footing.
A - Q/q..a ... (24.26)
(3) Locate the line of action of resultant of the column loads (Fig. 24.13).
x- Q2~/Q ... (24.27)
INTEROR
T 1"
1 r
Fig. 24.13. Trapezoidal Combined F<:JOI.ing.
(4) Determine the distance x' of the n;<>ullant from the outer face of the exterior column.
x-x+hJI2 .•. (24.28)
A trapezoidal footing is required if
L/3<x<LI2
where L is the length of the trapezoidal footing. determined from Eq. 24.22.
If x' _ LIZ, a rectangular footing is provided. However. if x
< L/3, a combined footing cannot be
provided. In such a case, a stmp fOOling is suitable.
(5) Detennine the widths B J and 8 2 from the following relations.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENG INEERING
ill + 8 2
- 2 - xL .. A ...(24.29)
n2 _ ~
L (~-
L 1) ... (24.31)
Settlements depend qX'm the depth of the soil slralu;n. If a finn stratum exists at a shallow depth below
the raO. the settlements orc small. However, if the sand deposit extends to a grc.'1t depth, the scUlcmcnts
would be large. lhc al10wable soil pressure am be found using the following equations.
The sn[c bearing capacity can be dctcnnincd as (feng, 1962),
q,.., • O.22N2 DWT + 0.67 (100 + N 2) D, Wq ... (24.39)
The safe sctlicmcnt pressure for a sctUemcnl of 2S mm is given by
2
qnp - 17.5 (N - 3) Wy kN/m ... (24.40)
where B = smaller dimension of ran (III), D, = Depth of foundation,
WY' Wq = waler table correction factors.
'Ihe pressures qlU and q"p arc in kN/m2, The smaller of the two values is the allowable soil pressure (q"..).
As stated e.'lrlicr, Teng's equation for the safe sclliemcnl (qllp) is conservative. Using Dowie's equation
[[q. 21.82 (b)]. for a settlement of 25 mm.
q"P .. 12.2 N (n 0
+0 .3 f Rd Wy kN/m2 ... (24.41)
Therefore, ..(24.43)
Taking Rd = 1.00 and s = 50 mm,
2
q"P .. 24.4N Wy kN/m . .. (24.44)
In case of rans, as the width D is very huge, and the pressure bulb is deep, the water table generally
affects the safe settlement pressure.
Taking Wy .. 0.5, q"P .. 12.2 N kN/m 2 ... (24.45)
Pede ct .'II (1974) express Eqs. 24.44 and 24.45) as
q"P .. WN Wy kN/m2 ...
(24.46)
2
and q"P .. ION IcN/m ... (24.47)
.1be above equations are ~pplic.lble for 5 s N ~ 50. If the value of (N) aftcr correctioo is less than 5,
the sand is too loose for a raft foundation. 100 saod should be either rompactoo or a deep foundation, sud!
as pile foundation, should be provided. For values of (N) g~\ter than 50, the above equations give
unconservative results.
Acoording to IS : 6403, for a settlement of 65 mm, the safe settlement pressure is given by
q"P - 25.4 (N - 3) W, ... [24.48(.)J
Talcing W, _ 0.5, q"P _ 12.7 (N - 3) .[24.48(b)J
The safe benringalpocity (q,..-) can also be determined using the equations developed in Chaptcr 23.
Generally, the safe bearing c::lfXIcity is much greatcr than the safe settlement rressurc and is not of mud!.
significance.
As the raft foundations are generally used below basements, tbe foundations are not backfilled. Eq.23.16
can be used. Thus
DESIGN OF SHAllOW FOUNDATIONS 651
.(24.49)
where Q = superimposed load, A = area of raft, Of = depth of foundation.
(b) Rafts on Clay. The net ultimate bearing capacity is generally detennined using Skempton's equations
(Eq.23.55).
q~ - 5 (1 + 0.2 DID) [1 + 0.2 (BI L)] c. . .. (24.50)
where Cu = undrained cohesion.
All other notations have been defined above.
The safe net bearing capacity can be obtained as
qns - q"u lF ... (24.5 1)
where F = factor of safety.
Under nonna! loading conditions, the factor of safety should not be smaller than 3. IS : 6403
recommends a minimum factor of safety of 2.5.
In case of rafts on clay, as the safe bearing capacity is independent of its size. it generally governs the
design. But the safe settlement pressure is also important in some cases. In the case of rafts, the pressure bulb
extends to a much greater depth than that for an isolated footing. The settlements of rafts on nonnaUy
consolidated clays are usually very large. However, in the case of over-consolidated clays, tbe settlements are
small. The setUemenlS arc calculated due to the net increaw in pressure, given by
q.- QI A - YDf ... (24.52)
If the soil stratum extends to a depth greater than about twice the width of the mat, the load on the mat
would tend to act as a point load for the soil at large depths, and the settlements would be the same whatever
be the type of foundation. In such cases, increasing the width of the mat does not help in reducing the
settlements. If the settlements are large, deep foundations, such as piles or drilled caissons, would be more
suitable.
The factor of safety against bearing capacity failure can be written a<; F - q,.,fq".
F _ 5 (1 + O.2D/B)(1 + O.2BIL) C U
... (24.53)
QIA yDf
The settlements of a mat foundation can be reduced by decreasing the net increase in pressure, i.e. , by
inc,easing Df" Foe no yin~;e~~: tbe net pressure, E<j. 24~52
gives I , ~
oe Df - fA .. (24.54) G.5 .
A foundation that satisfies Eq. 24.54 is known as . " ~
fully compensated or a floating fOlmdation. For such a
foundation, tbe settlement is (theoretically) zero. The
factor of safety against bc.'lring capacity failure, as per
Eq. 24.53, becomes theoretically infinite.
24.14. COMMON lYPES OF I\tAT FOUNDATIONS o o o o
'Ibere are several types of mat foundations.
(1) Flat Plate lYpe. In Ihis type of mat foundation,
a mat of uniform thickness is provided (Fig. 24.15). .-.--B---- D -
This type is most suitable when the column loads are
relatively light and tbe spacing of columns is relatively
small and unifonn.
(2) Aut Plute Thickened Under Columns. When o o o o
the column loads are heavy, this type is more suitable Plan
than the flat plate type. A portion of slab under the Fig. 24.15. Flat Plate Type Mll t.
652 SOIL MECIIANICS AN!) FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
rl ~ ~ ~@] @] @] @]
0
0
[~J
0
0
,
,-~
,
0
0
r----;
L___ j
0
0
@] @] @] @] r---..,
L_j L' __ .J, [~J
@] @] @] @] 0 0 0 0
PLAN Pion
Fig. 24.16. 1'1.11 Plalc-Thicknened Under Columns Fig. 24.17. l3cam and Slab Construction.
column is thickened to providc enough thickness for negative bending moment and diagonal shear (Fig. 24.16).
Somctimes. instead of thickening thc slab, a pedcstal is provided under each ooiumn above the slab to
increase the thickness.
(3) Beam and Slab Construction. In this type of construction, the beams run in two perpendicular
directions and ' a slab is provided betwccn the beams. l he rolumns arc located at thc intersection of beams
(Pig. 24.11). This type is suitable when the bending stresses are high because of large column spacing and
unequal column loods.
(4) Box Structun!S. In this type of mat foundation, a box structure is provided in which the basement
walls act a... stiffeners for the mat. Ooxcs may be made of ccUular construction or rigid frames consisting of
slabs and basement walls (fig. 24.18). 'This type of mat foundation can resist very high bending stresses.
(5) Mats placed on Piles. "The mal is supported on piles in this type of construction (Fig. 24.19). This
type of mat is used where the soil is highly compressible and the water table is high. This method of
construction reduces the sett lement and also controls buoy'lOcy.
24,15. DESIGN ME'1l10DS FOR MAT FOUNDATIONS
'Ille methods of design of mnt foundations c.m be classified into 4 categories, depending upon the
assumpiions made.
(I) I~igid Hearn Method. In this method of design, the slab is considered to be infinitely rigid as
compared with the subsoil. 'Inc nexurni deflections of the mat in this case do not influence the contact
pressure distribution acting on the mal. The pressure distribution is assumed to be planar. The centroid of the
soil pressure coincides with the Une of action of Ihe resultant of all the loads acting on Ihe mal.
'111is method is also known as the conventional method of design. The design of combined footing
discussed in Section 24. JO and 24.11 wa.<; aL'>O based on this method.
(2) Simplified Elastic Mcthtlcl. '111is method is b:lscd on the assumption that the soil behaves like an
infinite number of individual im!ercndcnt clastic springs. "flle springs <Ire assumed to !<Ike tension as well as
compression. The assumption was first introduced by Winkler and the foundation model is known as
Winkler:S- model. The mClh<X.l 1,lkes into account Ihe elasticity of the footing. Out as the soil does not behave
exu('1 1y l:lccording to the assumptions made, the method is an approximate one and is a simplification of the
ac\u:li soil bchavio,-!L
'Inc clastic const:mt of the spring is related to the coefficient of subgrade reaction, as defined later.
(3) Eluslic Method. In this method of design. the soil is considered as a homogencous, linearly elastic
half Sp:lcc. "Ille meth{x1 uses the solutions provided by lhe theory of elasticity. As sctu<l1 soils do not behave
as Iincnrly cla'>lic solids. this method also gives approximate solutions. lbe method is complicated and rarely
used in a dcsign officc.
(4) Non-linear Elastic Mdhod. 111e soil is considered to be a non-linearly clastic solid. "Inc method
represents Ihe behaviour of :lctual soil more closely than the clastic method and is more accurate. Numerical
techniques, such as finite clement method, arc required for lhe design (Arora, 1980). The method has nol
developed to a stage that this can be used in a design officc.
In this text. only the first two methods are discussed.
I
= =
whcrc q pressure (kN/m\ z settlement (m), k ::: coefficient of subgmdc reaction (kN/m~.
'Inc cocITicient of subgrade reaction is not a constant for a given soil (ferzaghi, 1955). It depends upon
a number of fadors, such as length, width, depth and shape of foundation (sec Sect. 24.20).
Procedure. The procedure for tbe .
conventional design consists of the
foUowing stcps:
(1) Dctermine the line of action of all
the loads acting on the raft. The sclfweighl T
of the raft is not considered. as it ·is taken
directly by the soil.
(2) Determine. the contact pressure
1 f
distribution as under.
(a) If the resultant passes tbrough thc
centre of the raft, the contact pressure is
given by L
~
(b) If the QIA has an eccentricity
q -rcsuUant
of ex and i!" in x-and y-dircctions [Fig.
24.20 (a)l.
q _ Q. (Q'eJ x.
A Iyy
n In
y ... (24.57) 8,
The maximwn contact pressure should
be less than the allowable soil pressure.
1
(3) Divide the slab into strips (bands)
in x-and y-dircctions. Each strip is
assumed to act a'i independent beam (a)
subjected to the contact pressure and the
column loads.
(4) Draw the shear force and bending
moment diagrams for each strip.
(5) Determine the modified OOlumD
loads as explained below.
It is generally found that the strip
docs not satisfy statics, i.e. the resullant of (b)
Fig. 24.20.
column loads and the resultant of contact
pressure are not equal and they do not act in the same line. The rcason is that the strips do not act
independently as a'iSumed and there is some shear transfer between adjoining strips.
Let us consider the strip carrying column loads Qh Q2 and QJ in Fig. 24.20 (a). Let B J be the width of
the strip. Let the average soil (contact) pressure on the strip be q__ Let B the length of the strip.
Average load on tbe strip.,
AL _ Bid. ,)V'
( 4EJ __ .(24.61)
EJ
<Ii
4 -- yk B ."__ (24.62)
where ).
_(J!"-)V'
4EJ
__ .(24.64)
s~r_._b
A
___ ~, C
I
y
I
Fig. 2421.
656 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDAllON ENGINEERING
Applying the boundary condition<; (Fig. 24.21), (he solution can be expressed as (Winterkorn and Fang,
1975).
PkA
Y"kiJ ... [24.65 (z)]
ee) S~ l pressure 1
~ks I IiI 1 et, 1
Cd) Equivalent pressure
PI
Fig. 24.22.
DFSIGN OF 'SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 657
(3) The soil pressure is continuous [Fig. 24.22 (e)]. However, it can be approximated by steps [Fig. 24.22
(dJ]. For more accurate resulls, it can be represented by straight lines or parabolas.
Replace the soil reactioru; by equivalent concentrated reactions R", Rs. Rc and Ro. as shown in Fig.
24.22 (e).
(4) The fOOling under the applied load and the equivalent reactions should satisfy the equations of
equilibrium, viz.,
IM .. O and IV .. a
Write moment equilibrium eqU(ltions for each panel point. For example, for the point B,
MB .. (a - !: + e) EJ ... (24.66)
Thngential moment, M • _Q
f 4
[A _(I -.)A'j
I TIL' ... (24.70)
Q[ (I - .)A'j
Radial moment, M' '' -4 I.I.AI+~ ... (24.71)
5
1\
~
, 3
Aq V
l 2
VV' I'-- ~
'1-----1:
o r---
- 0'10 -OJ -0-2 -D·' O{l 0'1 0-2 0-3 0 L.
-4--A1 .A-z,A3 ---.
Fig. 24.23.
(6) If the edge of the mat is located in the zone of influence of a column, dctcnninc the moment and
shear along the edge, ussuming that the mal is continuous.
Moment and sbear opposite in sign to those detennined are applied at the edges to satisfy the known
conditions.
(7) If the zones of influence of two or more columns overlap, the method of superposition can be used
to obtain the total moment and shear.
It
t1 t t,
a ,
II l
"
bl b b,
bb
Fig. 24.24.
By solving the simultaneous equations formed, the deflections at all points are determined. A digital
computer is normally required.
After the defiecl.ions have been detennined, the bending moment at any point in each direction can be
found using the equations of the theory of elasticity.
M, - M; + ~ My' •.. (24.71)
wbere MJ(. "" total bending moment in x-direction, MJ(.' "" bending moment in x-direction without including
the effed of bending moment in the transverse y-direction, My' = bending moment in y-direction without
including the effect of bending moment in x-direcLion.
Using the finite difference operators, the total bending moment on a strip in the I~ direction for an
interior point is expressed as.
Value of k
S.No. Type of Soil COlulitiOIl of &iI
J /cN/m]
MNfm
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
~
~WAll
--'- !
. 20mm BARCPl &5cm
lOmm BAR[.Il0cm
580mm 1520mm
fl. 4m---j
Fig. E24.1.
illustrative Example 24.2. Design a square reinforced concrele fooling for the following dnta (Fig.
E·24.2).
Column load == 800 kN
1
Allowable soil pressure = 200kNlm
Size of column =0.4mxO.4m
1.
335mm 275mm
Tl=I.=~2~",=~.II
Fig. E-24.2.
Size of footing. B .. V4 .. 2m
F-'IoBW;b)-d]
04
_ 200 x 2 [(2 -2 . ) - 0.275]- 210kN
t Lt--L...JL...Lt--'.t--,-t. .Lt---11--1-t...J.t-.L-L.Jttm.,
L kNlm
(b) Pressure diagram
+626.2 kN
+ tJBkN
t! ~,1=:=;Clli;;:L+~:::::l2:§:.6J~mL=t:;:::;::7
_271·6kN
-S61.o kN
Ie) S.F. Ologrcm
() -~kN_m~ ~
-IS1.SkN-m
{d} 8 . M. Diogram
Fig. E·243.
Solution. Total load. Q - 600 + 900 - 1500kN
~~1~1========~'~~~.'~m~=======:~1
kN
TMOm T
1.6Sm
1 1~ ~326""/m _ _
1
==
X )42 kNlm
+186
(d)S.F. Diagram
-1814
V'
~V ~
-9) kN_m -42kN_m
(~) B. M. Diagram
Fig. E·24.4.
664 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig.E-24 (d) shows the S.F. diagram. The maximum shear forces under the columns are - 1814 kN and
1417 leN.
t
~_.6_00_'_N_ _ _ 'm _____ -II<ltlOOOkN
~r.,-:.-I--.STRAP_----I~O.4mxo.(m
(a) Strop tooting (2
P o
(b)Pressurt distribution
~560
,20 +
",[;:/7 c:::=-------
440kN
kN (el S. F.
C)
td) a. M. OiogrGm
Fig. E-24.!i.
OJ" H- 3m
,.)
FO,t"" '0,1'" "" 'O'j"""
I ! ! ! II! ! ! ~:~:'~:~"/m
(b) Strip ABFE
+ )0'5.4kN 440.6kN
A)·/O kN .c::::1 d
II c;::::---
'561·6
42.,(/7
(t)S.F, Diagram
.r,
( ) v~160.1~:m
+ 6.'5 ~ M
(d) a.M. Oiogrom
Fig. E-24.6.
Draw 1M S.F. and B.M. diagrams for the strip ABFE.
Solution. Total loads,
Q - 400 + 500 + 300 + 1500 + 20Cl0 + 1200 + 500 + 600 + 400 ... 7400
Taking moments about lhe face AD.
i ... (400 + 1500 + 5(0) x 0.3 + (500 + ~+ 6600)6.3 + (300 + 1200 + 400) 12.3 ... 5.89m
y .. (500 + 600 + 400) )( 0.3 + (1500 + ~~ 12(0) )( 8.3 + (400 + 500 + 300) )( 16.3 .. 7.98 m
From Eq. 24.5S. Q.... .. i (500 + 600 + 4(0) + 395 )C 12.6 )C 4.3] .. 1820 kN
1000 N ,OOON
fh.,oo<m
-+-:::_", <ml
~ Is Ie _'
(0)
T[ ir
l~-:- --~m: ~j
! !
__
t" 'DOD" (b) f p)()()ON
, . f f ,
2:~kxsl04o ~:k:l0t,b C=h:~ tOt,e 2:~;()t,d
«)
Fig. E-24.7.
Solution. k, _ B )( k _ 20 )( 20 - 400 N/ cm 2, h _ 100 em.
Let the settlements at points A, B, C and D be a, b, c and d respectively. Fig. &24.7 shows the
seltlemeolS and the equivalent loads due to soil pressure.
Eq. 24.67 can be used for writing the moment equations. Thking moments about B,
1010
""i'Ct (a - 2b + e) - 1(00 )( 100 - 20 )( lOS 0
0- 2b + e_ 0.1 - 20 .. (I)
Taking moment of forces on len of C about C,
or
b - 2 c + d _ 0.2 - 4 a - 4b ...(u)
Ukewise, laking moment of forces on right of C about C,
PROBLEMS
A. Numerlcals
24.1. A raft (20 m )( 10m) exerts a gross pressure of 200 kN/m 2 at foundation level. The depth of foundation is 2.5
2
m. If the soil is clay W = 0, Cw = 80 kN/m , y = 19 kN/m~, determine the factor of safety. The raft is Cor a
basement. Use Skempton's equntion. [Ans. 3.03]
24.2. Determine the depth below the ground surfDce of a roft foundmion (30 m )( 30 m) to carry a gross load of 150
2
MN. The soil is clay (cw '" 15 kN/m , y '" 19 kN/m1. Thke the factor of safety of 3.
Also determine the depth for a fully compensated foundation . [Ans. 7.15 m;.8.75m]
24.3. Determine the Dllowable soil pressure for a raft (10 m )( 20 m) if the blow wunt (N) over 20 m depth is 20.
Use IS code method. [AIlS. 216 kNlm1
24.4. Determine the allowable soil pressure for a raft (10 m )( 10 m) if the depth is 5 m and the undrained cohesion
is 40 kN/m 2. Thke the factor of safety as 2.5. [AllS. 105.6 kNlm1
24.S. Design a rectangular combined footing to support two adjacent columns (size 40 em )( 40 cm) at a distance of
5 m and carrying loads of 3 MN nnd 4 MN. The lighter column is near the property line. The allowable soil
2
pressure is 400 kN/m . [AIlS. 6.20 )( 2.9 m]
24.6. Design a trapezoidal combined footing for twO columns (30 em )( 30 cm) carrying column lends of 1.2 MN and
0.90 MN, if the spacing between the two columns is 4 m. Take allowable soil pressure as 200 kN/m2 and the
length of footing as 5 m.
24.7. Design the footing in Problem 24.6 as a strap footing if the spacing between the column is 5 m.
24.8. Design a R.C.C. footing to carry a column (50 em )( 50 em) with 2.5 MN load. The allowable soil pressure is
2
250 kN/m .
24.9. Design a R.C.C. footing for a wall 30 em wide and having a 1000 of 80 kN/m. The allowable soil pressure is
2
50 kN/m .
B. DescrlpUve and Objective 'lYpe
24.10. What are different types of shallow foundations? Explain with the help of sketches.
24.11. How would you fix the depth of foundatit)O ? Discuss Rankine's fonnula for the minimum depth.
24.12. Discuss various types of loads thai are to be considered in the design of foundations.
24.13. Describe the general procedure for the design of a shallow foundation.
24.14. Discuss the procedure for proportioning of footings for equal seUlemenl.
24.1S. Explain the procedure for the design of a (a) Strip Footing, (b) Spread FOOI:ing.
24.16. Where do you provide a combined footing ? Discuss the procedure for the design of the following types of
combined footing: (a) Rectangular (b) Trapezoidal.
24.17. Describe the procedure for the design of a strap fOOling.
24.18. What are different types of raft foundmion ? Discuss the procedure for the design of a raft foundation.
24.19. Describe the procedure for the design of a combined footing by elastic line method.
24.20. Explain the method for the design of a raft on Winkler's bed.
24.21. Define the coefficient of subgrade reaction? How is it found? Discuss the various factors affecting its value.
24.2Z. Write whether the following statements are t~e or fnlse.
(0) A spread footing is provided for an isolated column.
(b) The critical section for bending moment in case of spread footing of a monolithic column is at the face of
the column.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(e) A strip footing can be provided for a row of columns closely spaced.
(d) A trapezoidal footing is required when the column near Ihe property line is heavier than the interior
columns.
(e) The strap footings are useful when the two columns are closely spaced.
(/) The ela.,tic Jine method of II combined footing is used for the design bf a flexible footing.
(8) The parameter Ai.. is dimensionless.
(h) The coefficient of suh-grade reaction of a cohcsionless soil is independent or depth.
lAos. True (a). (b), (e), (d), (f), (1)1
C. Multiple Choice Questions
1. Trapezoidal combined footings nre reqU1red when
(a) the space outside the exterior column is limited.
(b) the exterior columns is heavier.
(e) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
2. For the design uf a strap fooling, the following assumption is not made
(1I) The strap is perfectly rigid.
(h) The suil pressure varies linearly.
(e) The interior footing is centrally loaded.
(d) The strap is not suhjCf.:tcd to any direct soil pressure.
3. For conventional <ksign of a rigid combined footing Ai.. should be
(a) less than 0.6 (b) between 0.6 and 3.0
Ie) more than 3.0 (til None of above
where AL is ch:mu;teristic parameter.
4. The coefficient of subgrude reaction depends upon
(a) the size of footing
(b) the shape of footing
(e) the depth of rOOling
(d) allthc above.
5. According to Rankine's formula , the minimum depth of foundation when q:: 180 kNlm2, 1:: 20 kN/m 3 and
,= 30° is
ta) 0.50 m (h) 0.75 m
(e) 1.0 m (e/) 2.0 m
6. When the wind load is more thlln 25% of the combined dead and live load. the safe bearing capacity is usuaUy
increased hy
(a) 15% (h) 20%
(e) 25% (tI) 30%
1. The value of the factor Ai.. when B = 20 em, k:: 20 N/cm 3• £1 10 10 N-cm 2 and L =300 cm is
=
(a) 1.0 (h) 2.0
(e) 3.0 (d) 4.0
[AllS, l. k), 2. (h), 3. (a), 4. (d), 5. (e), 6. (e), 1. (en
25
Pile Foundations
25.1. INTRODUCTION
When the soil at or near the ground surface is not capable of supporting a structure, decp foundations are
required to troosfer the loads to deeper stmta. Deep foundations are, therefore, used when surface soil is
unsuitable for shallow foundation, and a finn stratum is so decp that it cannot be reached economically by
shallow foundations. The most common types of decp foundations are piles, piers and caissons. 100
mechanism of transfer of the load to the soil is essentially the same in all 'fiX'S of deep foundations.
A deep foundation is generally mudl more expensive than a shallow foundation. It should be adoplOO
only when a shallow foundation is not feasible. In certain situations, a fully compensated floating raft may be
more economical than a decp foundation. In some cases, the soil is improved by various methods to make it
suitable for a shallow foundation.
A pile is a slender strudurn) member made of steel, concrete or wood. A pile is either driven into the soil
or fonned in-situ by excavating a bole and filling it with oonC"ele. A pier is a vertical ooiumn of relatively
larger crms-section than a pile. A pice is installed in a dry area by excavating a cylindrical bole of large
diameter to the desired depth and then backfilling it with oonaete. 1be distinction between a cast in-situ pile
and a pier is rather arbitrary. A cast in-situ pile greater than 0.6 m diameter is generally tenned as a pier. A
caiMon is a hollow, watertight box or chamber, which is sunk through the ground for laying found:llion under
water. The caisson subsequently becomes an integral part of the foundation. A pier and a caisson differ
basically only in the method of construction.
Pile foundations are disrussed in this chapter. Piers and caissons are dealt with in chapter 26. Well
foundations, which are special type of caissons, are discussed in chapter 27.
25.2. NECESSITY OF ]'ILE FOUNDATIONS
Pile foundations arc used in the follOWing conditions:
(1) When the stmta al or just below the ground surfa~ is highly compressible and very weak. to support
the load transmitted by the structure.
(2) When the plan of the structure is irregular relative to its outline and load distribution. It would cause
non-unifonn settlement if a shallow fouodatioo b constructed. A pile foundation is required to reduce
differential settlement.
(3) Pile foundations are required for the transmission of structural loads through deep water to a firm
stratum.
(4) Pile foundations are used to resist horizontal forces in addition to support the vertical loads in
earth-retaining structures and tall slruct¥res that are subjected to horizontal forces due to wind and
ear1lKjuake.
(5) Piles are required wbco Ihe soil conditions: are such that a wash oul, erosion or scour of soil may
occur from undemealh a shallow foundatioo.
9)IL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(6) Piles are used for the foundatiOM of some structures, such ~ transmission towers, off-shore
plateforms, which are subjected to uplift.
(7) In case of expansive soils, such as black cotton soil. which swell or shrink as the water content
changes. piles are used to transfer the load below the active zone,
(8) Collapsible soils, such as loess, have a breakdown of structure accompanied by a sudden dcaease in
void ratio when there is an increase in water cootent. Piles are U'iCd to trnnsfer the load beyond the
zone of possible moisture changes in such soils.
depends upon the bearing capacity of the rock. If instead of bed rock. a fairly compact and hard
stratum of soil exists at a reasonable depth, piles c.'m be extended a few metres into the hard stratum.
End-bearing piles are also known as poinl- bearing piles.
The ultimate load carried by the pile (Q ..) is equal to the load carried by the point or bottom end
(Q,).
(il) ."riction piles, Friction piles do not reach the hard stratum. These piles transfer the load through skin
frictioo between the embedded surface of the pile and the surrounding soil. Friction pilcs are used
when a bard stratum docs not exist at a reasonable depth. 1bc ultimate load (Q.. ) carried by the pile
is equal 10 the load transferred by skin friction (Q,).
[Note: The term friction pile is actually a misnomer, as in the clayey soils, the load is transferred by
adhesion and not friction between the pile surface and the soil].
The friction piles are also known as floaling piles, as these do not reach me hard stratum.
(iil) Combined end beuring and friction piles. 'Ibese piles transfer loads by a combination of end
bearing at the bollom of the pile ~md friction along the surface of the pile shaft. The ultimate load
carried by the pile is equal to the sum of the load carried by the pile point (Qp), and the load carried
by the skin friction (Q,),
(3) Classification based on method of installation
Based on the method of construction, Ihe piles may be classified into the following 5 categories:
(I) Driven piles. These piles are driven into the soil by applying blows of a hc.wy hammer on their
lOps.
(il) Driven and Cast-in-situ piles. These piles are formed by driving a casing with a closed bollom end
into the soil. The casing is later fillccl with concrete. The casing mayor may not be withdrawn.
(ii') Bored and Cast-in-sltu piles. These piles are fanned by excavating a bole into the ground and then
filling it with concrete.
'(iv) Screw piles. 'fhese piles are screwccl into the soil.
(v) Jacked piles. These piles are jackccl mto the soil by applying a downward force with the help of a
hydraulic jack.
(4) Classification based on use
The piles can be classified into the following 6 categories, depending upon their usc.
(I) Load bearing piles. lhese piles are used to transfcr the load of the structure to a suitablc stratum
by end bearing, by (riction or by both. These are the piles mainly disrussed in this chapter.
(iI) Compaction plies. These piles are dri~en into loooe granular soils to increase the relative density.
The bearing capacity of the soil is increased due to densificalion caused by vibratioos.
(iii) 'Thnslon piles. These piles are in tension. These piles are used to anchor down structures SUbjected
to hydrostatic uplift forces or overtuming forces.
(iv) Sheet piles. Sheet piles Conn a continuous wall or bulkhead which is . used for retaining earth or
water (see Chapler 20).
(v) Fender piles. Fender piles are sheet piles which are used to protect water-front structures from
impact of ships and vessels.
(VI) Anchor piles. These piles are used 10 provide anchorage for anchored sheet piles. These piles
provide resistan~ against horizootal pull for a sheet pile wall (see Olapter 20).
(5) Classification based on di'iplacement or soil
Based on the volume of the soil displaced during installation, Ihe piles can be classified into 2 categories:
(,) Displacement piles. All driven piles are displacement piles as the soil is diSplaced laterally when the
pile is installed. The soil gets densified. 1bc installation may cause heaving of the surrounding
674 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
ground. Precast concrete pile and closed-end pipe piles are high displacement piles. Steel H-piles are
low displacement piles.
(it) Non-displacement piles. Bored piles nre non-displacement piles. As the soil is removed when the
hole is bored, there is no displacement of the soil during installation. 1be installation of these piles
causes very little change in the stresses in the surrounding soil
25.4. PILE DRIVING
Piles arc driven into the ground by mcam of hammers or by using a vibratory driver. Such piles are
called driven piles. In some special cases, piles are installed by jetting or partial augering.
The follOWing methods are commonly used.
(1) Hammer Driving. Fig. 25.1 shows a pile driving rig. It consists of a hoist mechanism, a guiding
frame and a hammer device. The hammers used for pile driving are of the following types:
(t) Drop hammer. A drop hammer is raised by a winch and al1~wed to drop on the top of Ute pite under
gravity from a certain height. During the driving operation, a cap is fixed to the top of the pile and
a cushion is generally provided betwccn the pile and the cap. AnOlhcr cushion, known as hammer
cushion, is placed on the pile C.1P on which the hammer causes the impact. The drop hammer is the
oldest type of hammer used for pile driving. II is rarely used these days because of very slow rate
of hammer blows.
HAMMER
PILE CAP
PILE
(il/) Diesel hammer. A diesel hammer consists of a ram and a fuel injection system. It is also provided
with an anvi l block at its lower end. The ram is first raised manually and the fuel is injected near
the anvil. As soon as thc hammcr is released, it drops on the anvil and compresses the air-fuel
mixture and ignition lakes place. The pressure so developed pushes the pile downward and rai ses the
ram. The fuel is again injcctcd and the process is repeated.
The ram lifts automatically. It has to be manually raised only 01lCC at the beginning.
Diesel hammers are nor. suitable for driving piles in son soils. In such soils, the downward movement of
the pile is excessive and the upward movement of the ram aner impact is small. The height achieved after
the upward movement o[ the hammer may not be sufficient to ignite the air-fuel mixture.
Diesel hammers are self-contained and self-activated.
(2) Vibratory Pile Driver. A vibratory pile driver consists of two weights,. called exciters, which rotate
in opposite directions. The horizontal components of the ccnlrifugaJ force generated by exciters cancel eadl
other but the vertical romponents add. Thus a sinosoidal dynamic vertical force is applied to the pile, which
forces the pile downward. 11le frequency of vibrnlion is kept equal to the natural frequency of pile-soil system
for bener results.
A vibrntory pile driver is userul only for sandy and gravelly soils. The speed of penetration is good. The
method is used where vibrations and noise of conventional driving methods cannot be permitted.
(3) Jetting Techniques, When the pile is to pcnetr:;Jte a thin hard !.1yer of sand or gravel overlying a
softer soil layer, the pile can be driven through the hard layer by jetting techniques. Water under pressure is
discharged al the pile bottom point by means of a pipe to wash and loosen the hard layer.
(4) Partial Augering Method. Dauer piles (inclined piles) are usually advanced by partial augenng. In
this method, a power auger is used to drill the hole for a part of the depth. lbe pile is then inserted in the
hole and driven with hammers to the required depth.
25.5. CONSTRUCTION OF BOltED PILES
ccmcnt/m 3 of ooncrctc, is poured into a hopper placed at the mouth of the hole.
If the hole cannot be bailed or pumped dry before placing the concrete, the hole is lined with a casing
throughout its depth. A mass of ooncrctc is then deposited at the base of the bole by a lremie pipe. As soon as
the concrete has hardened and formed a plug. the hole is pumped free of water. The casing is then gently turned
aod lifted slightly to break the joint with the plug. The hole is pumped dry. The remainder of tbe coocreting is
done by placing it dry upl O ulb ground surface. The casing is lhcn lined entirely (rom the bore hole.
If the ground water is undcr a high pressure, there will be inllow of water between the concrete plug and
the inside of the casing. The inflow should be stemmed by caulking. 1bc C$ing is cut by oxy-acetylene just
above the plug. The shaH is then coocrelcd and the casing raised. The Cllt portioo of the casing around the
plug is left permanently in place.
Instead of plugging the base of the pile and rona-cting, an alternative method is to concrete Ihe entire
shan under waler using a tremie pipe. Coocrele should be easily workable (slump 12.5 to 17.5 cm) and the
cement content should be at least 400 kg/m l . A rctDrde r, is added to the roncrcte if there is a risk of the
concrete setting before the casing is lifted out. However, the quality of rona-cling done under water is not
good. This method should be avoided as far as possible.
(T) A/plio piles are fonned by driving a steel tube closed with a detacoable cast iron shoe. A
concrete-filled mandrel is driven inside the tube. The mandrel is gradually raised and some concrete
is allowed 10 slump down in the tube. The ooncrcte is refllled in the mandrel and it is driven down
as the lube is raised. Thus a pedestal is fonned. After the formaLion of the pedestal, \.he mandrel is
raised and refilled with oonaete in stages. In each stage. the conaele in the pile shaft is pressed
against tbe soil by the dead weight of the hammer on the mandrel
25.7. LOAD·CARRYING CAPACITY OF PILES
Uke a shallow foundation, a pile foundation should be safe against shear failure and also the settlement
should be within the permissible limits. The methods for cstimating the load-carrying capacity of a pile
foundation can be grouped into the following 4 categories.
(1) Static Methods. The static methods give the ultimate capacity of an individual
pile. depending upon the characteristics of the soil. The ultimate load capacity is given
by
Q. - Q, + Q, ... (25.1)
= =
where Qu ultimate failure lond, Qp point (or base or tip) resistance of the pile (Fig.
25.2), Q, = shaft resistance developed by friction (or adhesion) between the soil and the I
~-
The methods for the determination of Qp and Q, are discussed in Sects. 25.8 and ~
25.9, respectively, for sand and Clay.
The static formulas give a reasonable estimate of the pile capacity if judiciously
applied.
(2) Dynamic Fonnulas. The ultimate capacity of piles driven in cenain types of
soils is related to the resistance against penetration developed during driving operaHon.
The ultimate load capacity formulas are based on lbe principle that the resistance of a
pile to further penetration by driving depends upon the energy imparted to the pile by the Fig. 25.2.
hammer. It is tacitly assumed that lbe load-carrying capacity of lbe pile is equal to the dynamic resistance
during driving.
The dynamic formulas are not much reliable.
(3) In-situ Penetration Tests. 1be pile capacity can be determined from the results of in-situ standard
penetration lesl. Empirical fonnulm are used 10 determine the point resistance and the shaft resislanoe from
the standard penetration number (N). Altcrnatively, the static fannulas can be used after determining the
N-value, as this value is related to the angle of shearing resistance (,).
Cone penetration tests are also used to estimatc the pile capacity.
(4) Pile Load Tests. The most reliable melbod of estimating the pile capacity is to conduct the pile load
test. The test pile is driven and loaded to failure. 1bc pile capacity is related to the ultimate load or the load
at which the settlements do not exceed the permissible limits.
All the above methods are discussed in detail in the following sections.
25.8 STATIC METHODS FOR DRIVEN PILES IN SAND
The ultimate capacity of a single pile driven into sand is obtained using Eq. 25.1, Q.. .. Qp + Qs
where Qp .. qpAp ... (25.2)
and Q, - [,A, ... (253)
In above equations, qp is the ultimate bearing capacity of the soil at the pile tip and and Ap is the area
of tbe pile lip; J, is.the average unit skin friction between the sand and the pile surface, and As is the effective
surfaoe area of the pile in contact. with the soil.
(a) Methods ror determination of Qr The ultimate bearing capacity (qp) of the soil at the pile tip can
678 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENG INEERING
be computed from the bearing capacity equation simiL1f 10 that for a shallow foundation, as discussed in
ch..1plcr 23. For sandy soils,
qp _ qNq ... O.4ylJNy ... (25.4)
where q = effective vertical pressure at the pile tip, B = pile tip width (or diameter).
y = unit weight of Ihe soil in the zone oC the pile tip.
Nq and N, = bearing capacity factors for deep foundations.
In driven piles, the second Icnn of Eq. 25.4 is generally small and is, therefore, neglected. Thus
qp - qNq .. ,(25.5)
V~r llcClI prt'ssvrt' tq)
1
,i,M
Q .. ConSlont ~~~
•
(a> (b)
Fig. 25.3.
In of driven piles, it h..'IS been established thai the effective vertical pressure @ at the pile lip
c.'lSC
incre.'1SCS with depth only until a certain depth of pcnClr::llion. known as Ihe ailical depth (D~). I3clow the
critical depth, the effective vertical pressure remains essentially constant {Fig. 25.3 (a)]. The critical depth
00
/
/
;1
10 "
/
'"
to- "', I
0
~ ~o~ >'!:-."'.... I
/ / / 0)::l; ,k !5:2911 I
'" / / /
l/:/ // o~;/
/
/
/ //
/ .5~~r---
~/
~,
,
~ / // "
- --
/ "
'"
~ ~ ----
?'---
~~
o=-
" Angle
3D
01 sheoring 1'- "
Fig. 25.4.
PILE FOUNDATION 679
depends upon the angle of sheming resistance (.~ of the soil and the width (or diameter) of the pile [Fig.
25.3 (b)]. lIS value can be roughly t.1ken as 10 D for loose sands and 20 D for dC .lSC sands.
The bearing Co1pocity factor Nq depends upon the angie of shearing resistance (,). Vnrious investigators
gave the expressions for Nq based on theoretical analysis. These values vary over a wide range because of
different assumptions made in defining the shear zone near the pile lip. Fig. 25.4 shows the values of Nq
given by various investigators and that given by IS : 2911. lbe values given by Ocre-,lOntzcv arc 'quite
dependable,and arc generally used.
In the derivation of the value of Nil' it has been assumed lhat the soil above the pile tip is similar to the
soil below the pile lip. If the pile penetrates a oompact stratum only slighUy and the soil above the lip is
loose, it would be more appropriate 10 use the value of Nq for a shallow foundation given in chapter 23.
If the pile is of relatively large diameter, the second term in Eq. 25.4 becomes significant. The value of
N, can be conservatively taken as the Nl value used for shallow foundations., given in chapter 23.
Meyerhof's melhod for qP- The point bearing capacity (qp) of a pile generally increases with the depth of
embedment (Db) in the bearing stratum. It reaches a maximum value at an embedment ratio of (Di/B)~,. For a
homogeneous soil, Db is cqualto the actual depth D of the pile, but for a pile which has penetrated ioto a bearing
stmtum for a small length. Do is less than D. Beyond the critical value of (Db/8)er' the value of qp remains
COIlstant, equal to the limiting ql' The criLical ratio (Dt/B).., depends upon the soil friction angle (41) (Fig. 25.5).
Once the value of (Dt/B)u has been detennined, the following procedure is used to estimate qp'
(1) Determine actual (D/>/B) ratio for Ihe pile,
(2) Determine Nq for (Di/o) mtio from Fig. 25.5.
The value of Nq increases linearly with (Di/B) ratio and reaches a maximum value at
D"IB_ ~(D"I8)".
(3) Detennine the point resistance Qp as
Qp - Ap9 N q s Al'ql ... (25.6)
wbere ql - 50 Nq tan •• q =vertical pressure at the pile tip (kN/m1. AI' = orca of the pile tip.
If the pile initially penetrates a loose s.1nd byer and then a dense layer for a depth less than 10 n, the
point resisulnce is given by
[91(2) - ql(IIlDb
qp - q'(l ) + lOB :S q'(2) ... (25.7)
where 1/(1) == limiting unit point resistance of loose sand (= 50 Nql Ian +0
ql(2) = limiting unit poinl resistance of dense sand ( = 50 Nq2 1an +v
Db == depth of penetration in dense sand.
It may be mentioned that the ultimate tip resistance given by Eq. 25.2 is the gross uhimate point
resistancc. The nct tip load is given by
Q,(nct) - Q, - ViA,)
However, in practice, the deduction of qAp is not usually made and Qp (ncl) is taken equal to Qr
In case of H-pilcs and open-cnded pipe piles, the enclosed soil plug should be considered as the part of
the pile for computing the area of Ihe point (Ap). j
(h) Methods of determination of Q•• The frictional resistance Q, is obt.'lincd
from Eq. 25.3 aOcr estimming the unit skin friction (fs). lbe unit skin friction for ~
a stmight-siclcd pile depends upon thc soil pressurc acting norma] to the pilc a:
surface and thc coefficicnt of friction betwccn thc soil and thc pilc material (Fig. "h & t t"
li~ ~ ~
lbc soil pressure normal to thc vcrtical pile surface is horizontal pressure
(01,) and is related to the effective vcrtical soil pressure as Fig. 25.6.
0".,. Kcr"
where K = earth pressure coefficient, 0" = effective vertical pressure at that depth.
Thus unit skin friction (f,) acting at any depth can be written as
J, - o"tan6 [. - Ko"tan6 ... (25.8)
wherc tan 6 = coefficient of friction between sand and the pile material.
Selection of suitable values of 6 and K requires good engineering judgment. Tomilson (1975) gave the
values of 6 and K, as given in Tablc 25.1, based on the studies carried by Droms (1966).
Tuble 25.1. Values of b anti K.
Pile Material K K
(loose salld) (dellsesQJuI)
Steet 20· 0.50 1.0
Concrete 0.75 oj! 1.0 2.0
limber 0.67 oj! 15 4.0
In general, the value of 6 gcnerally varies between 0.5 4' and 0.8 iJ. In most cases, the value of K varies
between 0.6 and 1.25. Meyerhof (1956) recommends that the value of K can be taken as 0.5 for loooe sand
(4' = 30j and as 1.0 for dense sand (iJ = 45j. According to IS : 2911-1979, the value of () may be taken
equal \0 q.. r-or driven piles in loose to medium sands, Ihe recommended value of K is between 1 and 3.
Whether thc sand should be considcred as loose or dcnse depends upon not only on the initial relative
density, but also on the method of installfltion. The larger the volumc of soil displacement, the higher the
value of the result ing friction. For hjgh displacement driven piles, the soil is considered dellSC. For driven
and cast·in place piles, the soil is oonsidered a<; medium dense if the casing is JcO in place or if the coocrcte
is oompaclc.d as thc casing is wilhdmwo. The sand is considered to be loose, if the concrete is noI
compacted. Tapered piles dcvelop greater unit friction lhan the stmight piles. Further, the value of K is
greater if lhe pile is driven into undisturbed soil Ihan the one for installed in a predrilled hole.
PILE FOUNDATION 681
As stated earlier, tbe effcctive vertical pressure (O~) increases with depth only upto the critical depth.
Below the critical depth, the value of o~ remains ronstant.
The frictional resistance (a,) can be expressed as
Q. - qN"" + I
i_I
K(o,,);lan6 (A,); ".(25.10)
to very soft consistency. Fig. 25.7 shows the variation of a with the undrained cohesion c. It may be noted
that for oonnally consolidated clays, with c less Ihan about 50 kN/m2, the value of a is equal to unity.
As c increases, the value of a decreases. For over-consolidated sUIT to hard clays. its value is usually
taken m; 0.3. For tapered piles, the value of a is generally 20% greater than that for a straight pile.
For very long piles (D Ot 25 m). the above method for tttimating the skin friction is very conservative.
For such soils, the unit skin friction also depends upon the elleaive overburden pressure. According 10
Vijayvcrgiya and Focht (1972). the average unit skin friction can be expressed as
t. •
k \0. + 2 c) ... (25.14)
wh~ )., = friction capacity factor, Ov = mean effective vertical stress for the embedment length,
c .. undrained cohesion.
.1 J 00 0.4
0 '-'
I---'
/V
I.OO,nIT-,---,---,----,----, " /
10
"''I----lt~_t_-_t--'L--I-_l
30 I
I
oC
I
O·
BUlb
.., (b,
Fi&:.25.9.
Q... ~ (If»)( (9c) + %(In - If»)/. 9c' ... ac'A/ ... [25.17(b))
n
where = diameter of the pile shaft, DI is the diameter of the bulb. c is the unit cohesion at the tip. and c'
is the unit cohesion at bulb level.
While C1lculllling the surf,lCe area A:.the length of the shan equal to 2 n nbove Ibe bulb is usually
neglected. As the pile settles, there is a possibility of formation of a small gap between Ihe lop of the bulb
and the overlying soil over a lenglh of 2 B, and therefoR; this length of the shaft is ncglcclcd. The little
portion of the shaft projecting below the shaft is nlso neglected while computing A./.
When two or more bulbs arc provided., the ultima~e load is given by
Q" - ~(n2) )( (9c) + ~ (Of - n1 )( (9c') + a COlA ... + COl' A~b ... (25.17(')J
where AI =surface area of shaft obovc the top bulb (ignoring 2 B length). Asb =
surface of the cylinder
circumscribing the bulbs betwccn lOp and bouom bulbs, c.. = average cohesion 00 A, and COl' = average
cohesions on ASI>"
25.11. ALLOWADLE LOAD
The allowable load (Qd,) is obt.:lincd from the ultimate lood (Q .. ) from the relation
Q", - Q./FS ... (25.18)
where FS is the factor of safety. FS generally vuries between 2.5 and 4.0, depending upon the uncertainties
involved in the computation of the ultimate load. According to IS : 2911-1979, the minimum factor of safely
on stalic Connula Sh.111 be 2.5. The fin:ll selection of the vniue of the fador oC safety should take into account
the load settlement characteristics of the structure as a whole,
25.12. NEGATIVE SKIN I'lUCTION
When the soil layer surrounding a portion of the pile shaft settles more than the pile, a downward drag
occurs on the pile. The dr::lg is known as negalive skin friction.
Negntive skin fri(.1ion develops when a soft or loose soil surrounding the pile settles after the pile has
been installed. The negative skin frk"tion occurs in the soil zone which moves downward relative to the pile.
PILE .FOUNDATION
Q. - : :~~ .. .(25.22)
The efficiency "y]" of the drop hammcr is get1erally between 0.7 and 0.9, and that for a single-ading and
a double-acting hammer .is between 0.75 and 0.85. For diesel hammer. it usually lies between 0.80 and 0.90.
A factor of safety of 6 is usually reoommended. However,-tbe pile load tests reveal that the actual fact<r
of safety varies between 2!3 and 30. The formula is, therefore, not ·de~nda~le.
686 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Modined FOrDlulli. The Engineering News Record formula has been modified recently. In the modified
formula. the energy k>sscs in the hammer system and that due to impact are considered. According to this
Connula.
Q _ Wh TlII .(W+e'2 p ) ... (25.21(a)J
.. S+C W+P
where P = weight of pile; e. = coefficient of restitution, and T)Jo = hammer efficiency.
The hammer efficiency (",,) depends upon vario~ factors, such as pile driving equipment, driving
procedure, type of pile and the ground conditions. For drop hammers, il is usually taken between 0.75 Dnd
1.0; for single acting hammers between 0.75 and 0.85; for double-.acting or differential hammer, T)Jo = 0.85
and for diesel hammer, ll" "" 0.85 [0 1.00.
The representative values of the coefficient of restitution (e) are as under.
Broomcd timber pile = 0.0
Good timber pile = 0.25
Driving cap with timber dolly on steel pile = 0.3
Driving cap with plastic dollY ,on steel pile = 0.5
Helmet with composite plastic dolly and packing on R.C.C. pile = 0.4
(2) IDley Fonnulu. Hiley (1925. 1930) gave a formula whkh lakes inlo account various losses.
Wh11b11h
Q. - (S + e/2) ... (25.23)
=
where 1l1t = efficiency of hammer blow, h height of free fall of the ram or hammer (em), S =
final set or
penetration per blow (em). C = sum of temporary elastic compression of the pile, dolly, packings and ground
( = C 1 + C 2 + C~, C 1 temporary compression of dolly and packing ( = 1.77 RIA, when the driving is
without dolly, = 9.05 RIA, when the driving is with short dolly), C 2 = temporary compression of pile (= 0.657
RDIA). C 3 = temporary compression of ground ( = 3.55 RIA). D = length of the pile, A = cross-sectional area
of pile. R = pile resistan<;e (Ionnes).
The efficiency of hammer blow (ll,,) depends upon the weight of hammer (W). weight of pile, anvil 2nd
helmet follower (P) and the coefficient of rcsistution (e).
W ... e2 p
(a) Fc.r W > CPt 11" .. ~ ... (25.24)
2
(b) For W < eP, W+e p (w - ep)' ... (25.25)
11b-W-;P- W+P
The coefficient of resistutioo (e) varies [rom zero for a deteriorated condition of the head of pile to 05
for a steel ram of double-acting hammer striking on steel anvil and driving a reinforced conacte pile. For a
C.1. ram of a single-acting or drop hammer striking on the head of R.C.C. pile, e = 0.4 and that striking on
a well~nditioncd driving cap and helmet with hard wood on R.eC pile, e = 0.25 (IS: 2911-1979).
(3) DUDish Fonnula. According to Danish formula (1929),
W x h X 1111
r ..
Q. - S + 112S. . .. (25.26)
in which So = elastic compression of pile, D = length of pile, A = cross-sectional area, E ::: modulus of
elasticity of pile material
The allowable load is found by taking a factor of safety of 3 to 4.
PILE FOUNDATION 687
Eq. 25.27 can also be used to determine the final set (5) per blow.
Taking Q.. _ 3 Q...
. .. (25.28)
where Q" =< allowable load.
25.14. WAVE EQUATION ANALYSIS
ru the hammer strikes the top of a pile, a stress wave is transmitted through tbe length of the pile. The
wave transmission theory can be used to determine the load carrying capacity of the pile and the maximum
stresses that can occur within the pile during driving operation.
In the wave equation analysis (Smith, 1962), the pile is represented by a series of individual
spring-connectcd weights and spring damping resistance (Fig. 25.11). The weight Wl represents the weight of
the ram, and W 2 represents the weight of the pile cap. Weights W3 to WlO correspond to tbe weigbts of
incremental sections of the pile. The spring constant Xl represents the elasticity of the cap block; the
constants K2 to Ku are for the elasticity of the pile sections. The damping springs R3 to Ru represent tbe
frictional resistance of the soil surrounding the shaft; R 12 represents the soil resistancc at the pile tip.
!L
'3 '"
PILE
" "'7"
...
"
~O
BlOWSlcm~
~,
Fig. 25.11.
The propagation of the elastic wave through the pile is analogous to that caU'ied by an impact on a long
rod. A partial differential equation is written to describe the pile model shown in Fig. 25.11 (0). The equation
is solved with the aid of a digital computer, and the pile capacity is determined. The pile capacity is
expre.o.i>Cd as a function of penetration per blow or blows per an [Fig. 25.11 (b)J.
The major drawback of the wave equation analysis for determination of the dynamiC resistance is its
dependence on a computer. Moreover, tbe field, tests arc required to estimate the equivalent spring constant
and soil-damping values for the pile under study. Further, tbe resuU.s obtained are valid ooly for a particular
pile driven by a specified pile hammer.
Despile the above shortcominw>, the wave equation analysis is a useful tool for detennining the pile
capacity. The resuU.s can also be used for the selection of appropriate pile-driving equipment.
688 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
ANCH(J'I GIRDER OR
RE.6CTlON GlROERS
nner the Install:.llion in sandy soils nnd a period of one month in slils and soft clays. The load is applied in
equal incremenl of about 20% of the allowable load. Settlements should be rcmroed with three dial g.1uges.
Eaeh stage of the loading is maintained till the rate of movement of Ihe pil¢ LOp is not more than 0.1 mm per
hour in sandy soils and 0.02 mm per hour in case of clayey soils or a maximum of two hours (IS :
2911-1979). Under each load increment. settlements are observed at 0.5. 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 60 minutes.
The loading should be continued upto twicc the safe load or the load lit which the total settlement reaches a
specified value. 1be load is removed in. the same decrements at 1 hour interVal and the [rna) rebound is
recorded 24 hours after the entire load has been removed.
Sn
-.;;;:::: . ~NET SETTLEMENT
."."'- .
. ~
LOADlNG
The tcst described above is known as initial te.ft. It is carried out on a test pile to determine the ultimate
load capacity and hence the safe load. lbe pile load test described in this section is a type of load-controlled
test, in which the load is applied in steps. TIle test is aise> known as slow main.tained test.
25.17. OTIIER TYPES OF PILE LOAD TESTS
(I) Constant rate of penetration test. In a constant-rate of penetration lest, the load 00 the pile is
continuously increased to maintain a constant rate of penetration (from 0.25 to 5 mm per minute). The force
required tq achieve that rate of penetration is recorded, and a load-settlemcnt curve is drawn. The ultimate
load can be determined from the curve.
The lest is considerably faster than a lo.1d-controlled test.
(2) Routine Load lest. This test is carried out on a working pile with a view to determine the sctUemenl
corresponding to the allowable 1000. As the WOrking pile would ultimately form a pan of the foundation, the
maximum load is limited to one and a half times the safe load or upto the load which gives a tOlal settlement
of 12 mm.
(3) Cyclic Load test. The test is carried out for scpsr'dtion of skin friction and point resistance of a pile.
In the lest, an incremental load is repc.:1tcdly applied and removed.
(4) Lateral Load test. The lest is conducted to determine the safe lateral load on a pile. A hydraulic jack
is generally introduced between two piles to apply a lateral load. The reaction may also be suitably obtained
from some other support. The test may also be Cllrricd out by applying a lateral pull by a suitable set-up.
(5) 1'ull out test. The test is carried out to detcrminc the safc tC[!Sion for a pile. In the sel-up, the
hydraulic jack rests against a (rame allsched to the top of the test pile such that the pile gelS pulled up.
25.18. GROUP ACTION OF PILES
A pile is not used singularly beneath a column or a wall, because il is extremely difficult 10 drive the pile
absolutely vertical and to place the foundation exactly over its centre line. If ccccntric loading results, the
connection betwcen the pile and the column may break or the
pile may fail structurally because of bending stresses. In actual
practice, structural loads are supported by several piles acting
as a group. For columns, a minimum of three piles in a
triangular pattern are used. For walls, piles are installed in a
staggered arrangement on both sides of its centre line. The
loads are usually transferred to the pile group through a
reinforced concrete slab, structurally tied to the pile tops such
that the piles act as onc unit. TIle slab' is known as a pile cap.
The load acts on the pile cap which distributes the lood to the t <:.~ :
piles (Fig. 25.15).
The load carrying capacity of a pilc group is not t ~l ;i-
necessarily equal to thc sum of the capacity of the individual
piles. Estimation of the load-carrying capaCity of a pile group t :.:-!..:'..: t
is a complicated problem. When the piles are spaced a
sufficient distance apart, the group capacity may approach the t t t tt
sum of the individual capacities. On the other hand, if the piles .
are closely spaced, the s!ressc.s transmitted by [he piles to the Fig. 25.15.
soil may overlap, and this may reduce the load.carrying capacity of the piles (Fig. 25.16). For such a case,
the capacity is lim ited by the group action.
The efficiency (l1s) of a group of piles is defined as the ratio of the ultimate load of the group to the sum
of individu.11 ultimate loads.
PILE 01'
,, \
(',
\
\
\
\
\ (
, \'!) (\'x' \\
1
/ "I ' , (IY... ,) )"
" ---"'/
\ X
---, ---,' ---'
"
)
(a) SINGLE PILE
"'",. _-------_...... ,/
(bJ PILE GROUP
Fig. 25.t6.
or Q'i"(N
11&" Q" x 100
where Q, (,, ) = ultimalc load of the group, Q" = ultimate load of the individual pile,
N = Number of piles in the group.
Thus the groups efficiency is equal to the ratio of the average load per pile in Ihe group al which the
failure occurs 10 the ullimale load of a comparable single pile,
The group efficiency depends upon the spacing of the piles. Ideally, the spacing should be such that the
efficiency is 100%. Generally. the centre to centre spacing is kept between 2.5 Band 3.5 B, where B is the
diameter of the pile.
The methods for Ihe determination of the ultimate load of the individual piles have been discussed earlier.
The methods for the estimation of Ihe ultimate load of the group are explained in the following sections.
25.19. PILE GROUPS IN SAND AND GRAVEL
For piles driven in loose and medium dense cohesionlcss soils, the group efficiency is high. The soil
around and between the piles is compacted due to vibration caused during the driving operation. For better
results, it is essential to start driving the piles at the centre and then work. outward.
The piles and the soil between them move together as a unit when subjccted to loods. The group acts as
a pier foundation baving a base equal to the gross plan area contained between the piles.
(0) End-bearing piles. For drivcn piles bearing on dense, compact sand with a spacing equal to or
greater than 3 B, the group capacity is generally laken equal to the sum of individual capacity. Thus
Q, • N Q" .. .(25.39)
In this case, the load taken by the group is much grealer (TI, > 100%) than the sum of the individual
capacities. and the piles fail as individual piles.
For spacing less than 3 B, the group capacity is (ound for the block of piles group.
(b) Friction plies. The group efficiency of friction plies in sand is obtained (rom the (ollowing
expression:
~ 00 f,(P, D) 100 . . .(25.40)
'1, - NQ" )( I .. NI,(PD) )(
where P, = perimeter or the block. p = perimeter of the individual pile, D = length of pile,.
{, = unit frict ion resistance.
692 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
If the centre-to-centre spacing is large, the group efficiency (11,) may be more than 100%. The piles will
behave as individual piles, and the group capacity is obtained from Eq. 25.39.
If'l1g is less than 100%.
(NQ,J
Q,. TI, 100 ... (25.41)
lhe group efficiency can also be obtained from the Converse- Lebarre equation given below.
", - 1 - [
Cn-l)m+<m-1)nj
mn
e
.-
90
••. (25.42)
where m = number of rows of piles, n = number of pUes in a row, 8 = 180-1 (B/s). 8 ,. diameter of pile, s '"
spacing of pile, centre- to-centre, '1, = group efficiency (expressed as a ratio).
Bored piles. For bored piles in sand at cooventional spacing of 3 B, the group capacity is taken as 2!3
to 3/4 times the sum of individual capacities for both the cnd-bearing and the friction piles. Thus
Q, (u) - (2/3 to 3/4)(N Q,J ... (25.43)
In bored piles, there is limited densification of the sand surrounding the pile group. Consequently, the
efficiency is lower.
25.20. t'lLE GROUPS IN CLAY
As the pile group acts as a block, its ultimate capacity is detennined by adding the b&$C resistance and
the shaft resistance of the block. The capacity of the block having closely spaced piles (s :s 3 B) is often
limited by the behaviour of the group acting as a block. The group capacity of the block is given by
or Q, (u) - qp (A,) + a c (P, D) ... (25.44)
= = =
where qp unit point resistance (Nc - 9.0).A. base area of the block, P, perimeter of tbe block, D =
depth of the block, a = adhesion factor (= 1.0 for soft Clays), c = undrained cohesion.
As discussed earlier. the individual pile capacity is given by Eq. 25.15.
QI/ - qpAp + a C (p )( D) ••• (25.45)
'l11e group capacity core:lidering the piles as individual piles is given by
Q, (u) - N Q. ...(25.46)
The lower of the two values, given by Eqs. 25.44 and Eq. 25.46, is the actual capacity.
25.21. SETI'LEMENT OF PILE GROUPS
TIm
The settlement of a pile group is due \0 elastic shortening of piles and due 10 the settlement of the soil
supporting the piles. It is assumed that the pile group acts as a single large deep foundation, such as a pier
13 D
l~,·-H:
2y
"fT"\'b.,
',\
1 2 I
L.U.U
Fig. 25.17.
PILE FOUNDATION 693
or a mat. The tOial load is assumed to acr. at a depth equal 10 two-thirds the pile length in the case of
frictional piles [Fig. 25.17 (0)1. In the case of end-bearing piles, the lotal load is assumed to act at the pile
tips [Fig, 25.17 (b)J. In the case of combined action, the fricr.ional component ls assumed to act at 2/3 D and
the bearing component at the tip.
For determination of the settlements, the compression characteristics of the soil are required. For clayey
soils, the characteristics are determined from laboratory tests 00 undisturbed samples. For oohcsionless soils,
the characteristiai are obtained from empirical correlations developed from in-situ penetration tests.
(a) Coheslonless soils
(i) Skempton method. The settlement of the pile group is estimated from the settlement of a single pile,
as determined in a pilc--lood test. 1bc settlement of the group is generally very large because the pressure bulb
for the group is much deeper than that of a single pile.
Skemptoll et al (1953) published curves (Fig. 25.18) relating the settlement of the pile group (S6) of a
given total foundation widlh to that of a sirJgle pile (so), The curves can be used for both driven aod bored
piles.
6
'/
00 , 6 , \8
Width
12
olloundot!Dr\
"
lm)~
21
(Aller Skempton.19S3)
Rg.25.18.
(;,) Meyerhot method. Meyerhof (1976) suggests the following empirical relation for lhe elastic
settlement of a pile group in sands and gravels.
where s,
" _ 9.4 q:: I
= seUlement of group (mm), q = load intensity (= Q,IA,), B, = width of the group, , = influence
... (25.47)
factor [= 1 -Dl(S B,) :t 0.5], D = length of pile, N = cocrcct.ed standard penetration number within the scat
of settlement (approximately equal to B, below the tip).
If statk: cone results are available, the selliement of the group can be obtained from Ihe relation,
q8,'
" - Tq; ... (25.48)
where qf = average cone penetration resistance within the seal of settlement.
q; - Q« ... (25.49)
(8, ... Zi) (L~ ... Zi)
where Zi is the distance from the level of the application of the load to the middle of clay layer i.
The settlement of each layer caused by the increased stress is given by (see chapter 12).
'The total consolidation settlement is equal to the sum of the settlement of all layers.
s, _ 1:.6.S(I) ... (25.52)
25.22. SHARING OF LOADS IN A I)ILE GROUP
All the piles in a group share equal l~ld if the load is central.
Q- ~ ... (2553)
However. if the load is eccentric or if Ihe centrol Jo.1d is accompanied hy a moment, the sharing of load
is computed assuming the pile cap as rigid. As the pressure distribution is planar, the pile reactions also vary
linearly with lhe distance from the centroid of the cap (Fig. 25.19). 1be axial load in any pik m al a distance
x from the centroid is given by
Q, (Q,' e.)x
QnJ-N:I:~ ... (25.54)
usual practice to reduce these values to one-half of the normal values if the piles arc short. For large
structures, it is essential to carry out pull out tests on piles 10 determine the safe value of the unit skin friction
or adhesion for uplift forces.
The uplift resistance of piles can be considerably increased in the case of bored piles by under-reaming
or belling oul the bollom. A bulb can also be formed in the case of driven and cast- in place piles to increase
the uplift resistance.
Mayerhof and Adams (1968) gave the following equations for thc pull-out resistance (P,,).
(o}'5hollow pUe
Ip)Deep pile
Fig. 25.20.
p .. = cohesive resislance + frictional resistance
where H "" maximum height of rupture surface (see Table 25.3) (For deep piles H :s; D)
Thble 25.3. Values of HlDI, m and Sf
For purely cohesive solis, as 4' :: 0, the seoond tcnn in Eqs. 25.56 and 25.57 Is zero. for oohcsionlcss
soils, as Co. = 0, the first (enn is zero. The shape factor (sf) is equal 10 1 + mD/BI for short piles, and equal
\0 1 + mll/ 8\ for deep piles, where III is a cocfficJcnt depending on ••
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
TIlWltrative Example 25... A concrete pile, 30 em dlamclcr, is driven into a medium dense sand (+ =
35°, 't '" 21 kNlm 2, K ::z 1.0, tan 0 • 0,70) for (J depth 018 m. Estimate the sale load, taking a fact'" 0/ safety
of 2.50.
... 320.5 ... 1.0 x 0.70 )( ( tx 75.6 x 3.6 + 75.6 II( 4.4 ) )( :t x 0.3
Q, - 320.5 + 309.2 - 629.7 kN
Safe 1000, Q. _ ~ _ 6~7 _ 151.9 kN
lIIuslrative Example 2S.2. Determine the safe load for the pile in IlIwtrQlive Example 25.1, i/ the waler
table rises to 2 m below the ground surface. Take 1...... 10 kNlm J,
Solution. Vertical prusure al the critical depth,
Ov ... 2 )C 21 + 1.6 )( (21 - to) • 59.6 kN/m 2
Therefore, Q• ... 59.6 x (j() )( ;t/4 )( (0.3)2 ... ( t )( 59.6 x 3.6 + 59.6 )( 4.4) x 0.7 )C 11. )C 0.3
Q _ 252.6 + 243.1 - 496.3 kN
Qn • 4~3 • 198.5 kN
Illustrative Example lS.3. A 30 cm diameter concret~ pile is driVttil into a homogeneous cQII.JolidoJed
clay deposit (eN :;:r;. 40 kN/m2, a .. 0.7). If the em.beddt!d IDlgth is 10 m. estinuJII! the safe load (FS. = 2.5).
Solution. From Eq. 25.15, QN - cNeA, ... (leA,
Taking N, - 9.0,
QII • (40 )C 9.0) ,,/4 )( (0.3)2 + 0.7 )C 40 (,,)( 0.3) )( 10 - 289.2 kN
Q. _ ~_ ~~2 _ l1!.7kN
JIIustratlye Exllmple 25.4. A square COrlCTt!t~ pile (30 em side) 10 m long is driven into coorse slJlld (1
'" 18.5 kNlmJ, N = 20). Deli!rmine the allowable load (FS. • 3.0).
Solution From Eq. 25.29, q, - 4ON(DIB) • 400N
In Ihlsease, 4ON(DIB) _ 40.20 (10/0.3) _ 26666.7kN/m'
400N • 400 )( !O • 8flXl kN/m 2
Adopt the lower value of 8CKX} kN/m2
From Eq. 25.30 (Q). J, - 2.0 • Ii _ 2.0 )( 20 • 40 kN/m 2
Therefore,
698 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Q• • ~. I~ _ 400kN
illustrative Example 25.5. A square concrete pile (35 an )( 35 em) is driven into Q homogenecus sand
layer (+ '" 30", Y = 17 kN/mJ) for a depth of 10 In. Calculate the ultimate load Use Meyerhof's method. Take
K::: 13 and 6 = 1Ir.
Solution. From Fig. 25.5, (Dol D)" .. 7.0
Dc .. 7 )( 035 .. 2.45
Also Di/B - 10/0.35 • 28.57
q .. 2.45 x 17 .. 41.7 kN/m 2
From Fig. 25.5, Nq .. 55.0
From Eq. 25.6, Qp .. ApqNq :50 Apq/
In this case, A, ,N, - (0.35 x 0.35) (41.7 x 55) - 280.9 kN
Apq/ .. (0.35 )( 0.35)(50 x 55 tan 30°) .. 194.5 kN
Adopting the lower value, Qp" 194.5 kN
From Eq. 25.8, h" KO v lan6
Therefore, Q, .. K tan 6 (area of Oy diagram) perimeter
.. 1.3 tan 18 0 x (41.712 x 2.45 + 41.7 )( 7.55) )( 4 x 0.35 .. 216.5 kN
Thus Q.. .. 194.5 + 216.5 .. 411 kN
UlustnUve Example 25.6. A concrete pile, 4() em diameter, is driven 25 m into a soft clay (ew = 25.0
1
kN/m2, y = 19 kNlm ). Determine the allowable load using Wjayvugia and Focht method (RS. = 2.5). The
water table is at the ground surface..
Solution. Taking Nc .. ' 9.0,
Qp .. c,.NcAp .. 25 )( 9 )( K/4 x (0.4}2 .. 28.3ItN
From Eq. 25.14, /, .. ). (O~ + 2c)
From Fig. 25.8, for 0 = 25 m, ). = 0.16
Q. - lo;.~.5 _ 412.8 kN
PILE FOUNDATIONS
lliuscratin Exumple 25.8. A precast concrete pile (35 cm x 35 cm) is driven by a single·acting steam
hammer. Es(ima(e the allowable load using (a) Engineering News ,R ecord FormuUl (F.S, :: 6), (b) Hiley
Forlllula (F.S. '" 4) and (c) Danish Formula (F.S. :z: 4).
Use tbe following data.
(I) Maximum rated energy = 3500 kN-cm
(iI) Weight of hammer :: 35 leN
(iiI) Length of pile = 15 m
(ilol) Efficiency of hammer = 0.8
(101) Coefficient oC resistitulioE:l = 0.5
(loll) Weight of pile cap = 3 leN
(viI) No. oC blows for last 25.4 mm =6
(viii) Modulus of elasticit.y of concrete ::: 2 x 107 kN/m2
Assume any other data, if required.
Solution. (0) From Eq. 25.22,
(Wh) x~.
(e) From Eq. 2~.26,
Q.= 5+5,/2
3~OO x 0.8 2800
... (b)
c 2.54/6 + 0.5 S" ~ 0.423 + 0.5 S..
="2XO.8X3.500XI500 =1.8.5cm
3.5 x 35 x 2 x 10' x 10....
0
0.0
'".0
!
J
JI
"0
Ag. &2.1.9
PlLB FOUNDATION 101
Q··t)C7.50 • .500kN
(;1) ~ or load com:sponding to a net settlement or 6 mm.
Ra. £·23.10
_ 0.6533 MN _ 6533 kN
IIIWJtnllve Example 2$,11. A. pile group consists of 9 friction pilu of 30 em dJmw~r and 10 m length
driven in clay (e,. '" 100 kNlm2, y '" 20 kNlmJ), as shown in Fig. E·25.ll. Determine the safe load for the
group (FS :;:: 3, a '" 0.6).
Solution. From Eq. 25.44, Q.(u). qpA. + ac(P.D).
702 SOIL MECIIANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. E-25.lJ.
- (9 )( 100)(1.8 )( 1.8) + 0.6 1100 )( (4 x 1.8 )( 10)
Q, (u) • 7236 kN
From Eq. 25.45, Q.. .. qpAp + ac(p x D)
.. (9 )( 100) )( l't/4 )( (O.3i + 0.6 )( 100 (x )( 0.3) )( 10
Q.. .. 628.8 leN
From Eq. 25.46, ' Q,(u). NQ.
• 9 x 628.8 • 5659.2 kN
As the ultimate load Cor individual pile failure is less than the pile group load, the safe load is given by
Q.. .. 56~.2 _ 1886.4 kN
Illustrative Example 25.12. A 40 em diameter pile, 11 m long, has a bell of 2 m diameter and 1 m
2
height. I{ the soil has • = 25°, ell = 20 kNlm and 'i = 19 kNlm}, estimate the allowable pull out resistance
(FS = 3).
Solution. From Thble 25.3, HIB, - 3.0,
Therefore, H • . 3)( 2.0. 6m
As D > H. the pile is deep.
From Eq. 25.57,
p .. - .. nB,c"H + s"t{1t/2 x B I ) (2D - H) HK.. tan $ + W
where W .. l't/4 X (2.0)2 x 11 x 19 + ltI4 )( (0.4)2 )( 11 x (23 - 19)
or W_662kN
From Table 25.3, sf" 1.3.
PILE fOUNDATION 703
Illustrative Example 25.13. A group of friction pilcs of 30 em diameter is subjected 10 a net load of
2000 !tN, as shown in Fig. E-25.13. Estimate the consolidation settlement.
u~
l':t6kN/m 3
17
I-----
r1!t
L
m
I
,/ ---r--- ---- ,
'1
T
I Loyer
10m ----/--!::'=-=-=-11!!!.~-11
" "'wt"20kN/~ \
/ ~~~g.~~ \
\ ,
"'so1"ZlkNf",l \
cc"o.zo
'0. 0. " __ • __ n _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _' \ ,
\
'I"'"
(Not to 5cot~)
Fig. E·2S.l2.
Solution. 00 at point A, middle of I layer
.. 3 x 16 + 2 )( (19 -- 10) + 8 x 10.0 .. 146 kN/m 2
2
00 at point B, middle of II layer .. 3 x 16 + 2 x 9.0 + 13 x 10.0 + 5 x 11 .. 251 kN/m
2
Cross-sectional area at B .. (2.5 + ' 15 x 2 xi) .. 17.5 m
do .. 17.;~7.5 .. 6.53kN/m
1
704 9'JIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Settlement of I layer • C
~
(...lL)
1 + to
log Co + Aa
CJo
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
25.1. ~ ':::~IIn:~ ~~ t~ ~~9 ~~~1~ =~II)' consolidated clay depo£il IS m thick. ~~: 3~; ~~i
2s.z. A 10 m IonS concrete pile 30 em diameter is driven into a medium dense sond (+ .. JQ-, y '" 20 kN/mJ, K:II
=
1.0, tan 6 005). me D( IB :: 10.0. Estima$C the safe 100<1 (F.s, '" 2..5).
lARs, 130 kN)
6. ~c~~r ~~ls~:.~~;e~~r/~~. :~n~rie:~:~s:~:;\!r~~ ~~~~~;~u:7r~~e~~~C.~io;ls~~~~t;~s ~;~jo deposit. The safc load whcn the
(a) 150.8 kN (h) 105.6 kN
(c) 2 15.4 kN (tl) 2 11.2 kN
IA ns. I. (d. 2. (c), 3. (h), 4. (a), 5. (11), 6. (b)]
26
Drilled Piers and Caissons
26.1. INTRODUcnON
(a) Drilled Pier. A drilcd pier is a large diameter concrete cylinder buill in the ground. For construction
of a drilled pier, a large diameter hole is drilled in the ground and subsequenUy filled with concrete. 'The
difference between a drilled pier and a bored pile is basically of the size. Generally, bored piles arc of
diameter less than or equal to 0.6 m. The shafts of size larger than 0.6 m arc generally dcsignated a$ drillro
piers. A driUed pier is a lype of deep foundation constructed \0 transfer heavy axi'li or lalcralloods to <J deep
strtltum below the wound surface.
(b) Caisson. A caisson is a type of foundmion of the shape of a hollow pri'im:ltic box. which is built
above the ground l(..'Vcl and then sunk to the required depth as a single unit. It is a watertight ch<lmbcr used
[or laying foundations under water, as in rivers, lnkes, harbours, etc. "111e CA.1issons are of three types: (I) Opcn
caissons, (iI) Pneumatic cais.'llns, and (iii) floating caissons.
Open caissons arc hollow chambers, open both at the top and the bottom. The bottom of the caisson ha"
a cutting edge. The caisson is ~unk into place by removing the soil from the inside of the shaft (chnmb::r)
until the bearing Slrntum is reached. Well foundations arc s~ial type of o(X!n caissons used in India,
discussed in chapter 27.
Pneumatic caissons are c1u<;ed at the top, but open at the bottom. A pneumatic caisson has a working
I..:hambcr at its boHom in which compressed air is maintained al the required pressure to prevent entry of
water into the chamber. Thus the excavation is done in dry.
Flooting caisso!1..<; arc open at the top but closed 41\ the bollom. Ihcse caissons are constructed on land and
Ihcn tnmspot1cd to the sitc, and noated 10 the place where these are to be finally installed. These are sunk at
.hat place by filling them wilh s:md, ballast, water or concrete to a levelled beming surface.
This chapter deals with the design and construction of drilled piers and CA.1issons.
26.2. DRILLED PIEUS
'Ine transfer of load 10 the soil from a drilled pier, like a pile, am take place Ihrough cnd bearing, skin
friction or a combination of bOlh. Drilled piers in cohesive soils arc generally belled or under-reamed to
increase the load-carrying capacity. rig. 26.1 (a) shows a straight shaft pier, and Fig. 26.1 (b), (l belled pier.
Belled piers are generally used when the stratum docs r.ot have adequate bearing capacity.
The load-carrying capacity of a drilled pier can be estimated using a method similar to that for piles, as
explained below.
(b) Drilled piers on sand. '[he analysis of drilled piers in sand is similar to 111m for bored piles in sand.
As the excavation for a drilled pier is likely to lead to some loosening of the sand deposit, the strength of the
sand is considerably reduced. "me ullimate load of a drilled pier can be obtained from the following
equations.
DRlIl..ED PIERS AND CAISSONS 707
shallow foundation becmlSoC of the confming prcs.sure of the su:rounding soil. The allowable soil pressure can
be obtained from the Qlrvcs for the shallow foundations given in chapter 23, using the N-values unO)ITcctC(l
for the oonfming pressure. If tbe w3Ier table is high, the water table correction is made as in shallow
foundations.
As the setllcmcnt due to self weight occurs before the pier i.. completed, it is not of much practical
significance. The self weight of the pier is usually subtracted from the total load when determining the
aUowablc load for (he settlement. J-(owevcr, while oompuling the faaor of safety against bearing failure, the
weight of the pier must be oonsidcred. lhc settlement of the pier can be computed using the procedure
developed for shallow footings.
Acrording to Terzaghi and Peck (1967), the settlement of a drilled pier in s.1nd al any depth is about one
half the settlement of an equally loaded footing covering the same area. Eq. 23.83 can be used to determine
the allowoole soil pressure. lbe unit pressure for piers on sand is generally taken twice the value for a fooling
of the same size under identical oonditions, obtained from Eq. 23.83.
(b) Drilled piers on cluy. 'llie analysis of a drilled pier in clay is similar to thut of bored piles in clay.
The ultimate load is given by the following equmions.
Qu .. qpAp + hAs
or Qu" cNtAp + neA, ... (26.2)
where c = undrained cohesion, c= avcrdge undrained cohesion on the shaft, n =
adhesion factor, Nc =
bc.1ring capacity factor.
In the case of drilled piers, the value of the Nt depends upon the DIB t ralio of the picr, whcre DI is the
diameter of the bottom (see Table 26.1).
Table 26.1. Vulues of Nt (After Teng, 1962)
Dllll 4.0 and above
9.0
The value of a genci""dlly varies between 0.15 :md 0.50, depending upon the drilling method and the type
of Ilier. An average value of 0.4 is usually takcn. If the shaft is provided with a bel~ only the straight portion
is oonsidcrcd for (riction (adhesion). For bclled shaft drilled dry, the upper limit of unit adhesion is 40 kN/ml
and that for the belled shuns drilled with slurry is 25 kN/m 1 . For straight shafts excavated dry. the upper limit
is 100 kN/m2.
lbe safe load is dclenn ined by applying a suitable [actor of safety to the ultimate load.
Q, - Q,/FS .. .(26.3)
Gcnerally, a factor of safety (FS) of 3 is taken.
Sometimes, the safe load is obtained by applying a (actor of safety only to the tip resistance. Thus
Q, _ Q,IFS • Q,
(1) Excavation or piers Drilled picrs are gcnernlly excavated using an auger drill or some other type of
driWng equipment. An auger is attached to a shaft and rotated under pressure to dig into the soil. When it is
filled with soil, it is raised above the ground and emptied.
For formation of a bell, the auger is replaced by an under- reaming tool. The tool usually consists of a
cylinder with the cutting blades that are hinged at the top. The OJtting blades are in the folded position when
the under-reamer is lowered into the hole. On reaching the bottom of the hole, the blades arc spread outward
by a mechanism. As the under-reamer is rotated, a bell is formed and the loose soil falls inside the cylinder,
which is raised and emptied. The process is repeated till the bell is completcly formed. TIle diameter of the
bell is kept two to three times the diameter of the shaft. The angle of the bell is 30" to 45" with the vertical.
The above method of drilling is oonvenient for hard clays where the hole can be left open for a few
hours without a support. In cohesionlcss soils below the water table, the hole is prevented from collapsing by
providing a casing or by drilling in Slurry. When rock is encountered during drilling, special machines are
required. For boulders and holes socketed in hard rock, special drilliDg tools are required.
When excavali01,1 is in progress, the soil is exposed at the bottom and sides. It is examined carefully 10
chec\c: that the hole is straight and has been drilled to a stmtum of adequate capacity. As the hole is of a large
diameter, even a man can descend into the shaft for inspection.
2. Providing Supports (a) Chicago method. In this method, a circular hole is excavated upto the depth
at which the soil will stand unsupported (about 0.5 m ror soft clays and 2 m for stiff clay). Venical boards,
known as laggings, are then set in pc6ition around the C"Clvated face and are held tightly against the soil by
-r
steel ring<; [Fig. 26.3 (a)J. The shaft is
tilen excavated further for 1 to 2 m and
another setting of boards and rings is
made. The process is repeated unlit the STEELtf
RINGS
desired level is rc.1ched. The base of the
shaft is then belled oul. LAGGING TELESCOPIC
STEEL CASING
(b) Gow method. In this method,
excavation of the hole is done
manually. Telescopic steel shells are . ,
used to support the soil [Fig. 26.3 (b)].
The telescopiC shells are extended as
/l _______\ J ( \
the hole is deepened. The shells arc
removed as the concreting progresses. "----------.1
One section of the sheU is removed at
one time. The minimum diameter of the
(a) CHICAGO METHOD (b) GOW METHOO
hole in this method is about 1.25 m. Fig. 26.3.
3. Concreting of piers. After the hole has been drilled to the required depth, the shaft is dcwatcrcd and
the bottom is cleaned. The casing, if used, is removed before the concreting is done. The reinforcement cage
is then inserted and concreting is done. As far as possible, concreting should be done in dry. Concreting can
be done in a dry hole by gravity pouring, provided the concrete does not strike the sidcs. However. if
dewatering is not possible or slurry is used to support the shaft sides, concrete is placed using a tremie.
26.4. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF DRILLED PIERS
Drilled piers have the following advantages and disadvantages, as compared with pile foundations;
Advantages.
(1) As a singlc drilled pier can takc up the load of a group of piles, it is more convenicnt .
(2) Drilled picrs have higher resistance to lateral Ioods than piles.
(3) Construction of drilled piers generally requires lighter equipment for drilling than thai for pile
driving.
There is no noise due to hammer blow in the ca<>e of drilled piers.
710 SOlI.. MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(4) Piles driven by a hammer cause ground vibrntions and ground heaving. Such conditions do nOl exist
in the case of drilled piers.
(5) lhc base and the sides of the drilled pier can be inspected. This is not possible in case of driven
piles.
(6) "[be base of a drilled pier enn be enlarged to provide grc;:lIcr bearing capacity and also to provide
greater resistance to uplift.
(7) Drilled piers can be used even when the soil contains boulders. etc.
Disadvantages
(1) The concreting operation requires stricter supervision. lbc quality of concn.:te obtained is generally
inferior to that in prccllSt piles.
(2) Deep excavation of the drilled pier, if not properly supported, can cause substantial subsidence and
damage to adjoining SlructufCS.
(3) Strict supervision of drilling operation is required in drilled piers.
(4) Subsurface investigntions required in the case of drilled fliers arc more than that in piles.
(5) Load tests in the case of drilled piers are difficult.
26.5 DESIGN OF On:N CAISSONS
Caissons are carried to a h.,rd Slr3tum, such ~ compact sand, gravel, hard clay or rock. The
lood-carrying capacity can be estimated as in the ClSC of drilled piers. As a caisson also acts like a rigid mat
foundation, the equ3lions for the bearing capacity given in chapter 24 for mats may also be used. The
aUO'oVable soil pressure (q/W) for an open caisson in COhcsionless soils can be obtained from the following
equation (ES. = 3.0).
q_ _ 0.22N2 BWy + 0.67 (100 + N 2)Df Wq .. (26.5)
where qnQ =allowable soil pressure (kN/m\ N = oorrectcd standard penetration number, B = smaller
dimc,nsion of the caisson, Df = depth of foundation, measured below scour level.
Wl and lVq are water table correction factors.
According 10 IS : 3955, the allowable bearing pressure can be determined lfSing the following formula,
n
q"" .. 0.054 N2 + O. L6 000 + N2 ) Df lcN/m2 .•• [26.3(a)J
If the caisson (well) rests on rock strata. the safe bearing pressure depends upon the crushing strength of
rock. The crushing strength can be determined by taking the oores from the field and testing for compression.
However, there may be fissures, faullS and joints in the rock which would also affect the bearing capacity and
which are not detccted from the core s..,mples.
Teng (1962) has suggested that the allowable bearing pressure of caissons on bed rock should not exceed
that of concrete seal, which is normally taken as 3500 kN/m2 because the concretc seal is usually placed
under water and the quality of concrete is poor.
In case of cohesive SOils, undisturbed samples should be tested to determine the unit cohesion (c). The
ultimate bearing capacity is determined as
qu - cN~ ... (266)
where N~ = bearing capacity factor.
The vertical loads acting on the c.,isson are the Jo.'lds from the superstructure Dnd the self weight. The
buoyant forces should be determined for the lowest water lcvcl Dnd deducted from the downward loads. The
Jatcml londs acting on the caisson are due to earth pressure, wind pressure, water pressure and earthquakes.
The lateral forces may also aCI due to tractive forces from traffic, ice pressure, and currents of flow.
"[be skin friction should !'Ic estimated for the most critical condition when the soil has been removed to
the maximum depLh of scour. 'Ibe 10lal load is assumed to be carried by the base of the caisson if it penetralcs
a relatively shallow depth of soil.
DRlLLED PIERS AND CAISSONS 7\1
G
Besides the above·mentioncd 10<1(15. ;1 caisson may also be subjected to large stresses during the sinking
st
operalion. When Ule cnisson is hung up ncar the top by skin friction, Ibe lower pardon is subjected to tension.
Large stresses aL'>O develop if the cais..~on is dropped suddenly during sinking or when it to; pulled to iL<;
correct position from the inclined position. If the caisson is supported on one side only or on two opposite
corncrs at some stage during sinking, it is subjccted to heavy stresses. 111C Clisson must be s.'lfe against nn
Ie such conditions.
TIle exterior walls of the caisson llre designed to withstand the stresses due to vertlcal loads and the
lateral forces.
Sinking Effort. The U1issons arc designed to have sufficicnI self weight in each lift to overcome the skin
Iy friction. If the self weight is not sufficient, additional ballast is required during sinking. Occao;iOrullly, w:lIer
jelling is used to reduce the friction.
id If it is desired to proportion a circular caisson such that no ballast is required. an expression for the unit
skin friction can be obtained by equaling the weight of concrete Lo the frictional force (Fig. 26.4). lhercforc.
(./4)("; - 01) Dy, _(.D.) D x f ... [26.7(a)l
where Do = extemnl dinmcter of caisson. Di internal dinmcter of c..'lisson . ..,~ ;::: unit weight of concrete (; 24
kN/m 3 above water level. and 14 kN/m 3 below water level), D = deptil of penetra.tion, [= unit skin friction.
og
)]
)f
D.
tel
where I = thickne...-.s of concrete seal. D; = internal diameter, L;.8; = internal length, width. q = unit bearing
pressure at the base. a .. B/L;, 0c = allowable concrete nexural stress (} 3500 kN/m'J.
5) If If is the depth of water above the base (Fig. 26.4). the value of q can be found from the following
equation.
q - ,(.•,11 - '(~ I
where q '" unit bearing pressure (kN/m2) •
and If and t arc in metres.
Taking y~ = 24 kN/m.l and ,(",:: 10 kN/m 3.
to q=1011-241 ... (26.10)
'fhe thickness of the scal should be safe against perimetct shear,
712 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
.
:~; .
SECTIGI
PLAN
W
~ '. :0\" STRAP '.,• . •..• '.: .. : STRAP
.
. 35·
. ' ANCHORS
w······
.'
.. • .- ..
.#0 .... NCHORS
I <.
(a) SHARP EDGE Cb) BLUNT EDGE
Fig. u.s.
Th avoid tearing off the cutung edge or any lower parts of the caisson, the caisson concrete must be anchoroo
or ued to the cutting edge. The lower portion of the cutting edge is provided with a 12 mm thick steel plate
anchored to the concrete by means of steel straps. .
26.6. CONSTRUCTION OF OPEN CAISSONS
The sinking of an open caisson is generally done by penc"trating it in the dry or from a dewatcred
construction area or from an artificial island. An artificial island of sand is made for the pu~ of raising
the ground surface above the water level. Thus a DREDGE WELLS
dry area is obtained for sinking the caisson. The
size of the sand island should be sufficient to
provide working area around the caisson. (Fig;
26.6).
For the construaion of a sand island, a .: '.' SAND '
FILL
wooven wiUow mattress is first sunk to the river
bottom to provide protection against scour. A
timber staging is then constructed around the
periphery of the intended island. Sheet piles are
driven to enclose the island area. The mattress is ..
. r~-"---~l
, ,.:'
'
cut aloog the inside face of the shell fonnoo by
is done much more slowly to prevent caisson dise.1SC. A period of about 30 minutes is necessary for
deromprcssion from a p~ re of 300 kN/m2 to atmospheric pressure.
To prevent the air in the working chamber from beroming stale, fresh air is circulated into the worldng
chamber by opening a valve in the air lock. The workers should not be kept inside the working chamber for
more than two bours at a stretch.
(4) Miscellaneous equipmenL MisceUaneous equipment such as motors., compressors. and pressure pumps
are usually located on the shore. Pressure to the working chamber is applied through compressed air pipe. In
order to cope with an emergency, al least one stand-by unit consisting of all equipment must be provided.
26.8. CONSTRUCrION OF I'NEUMAllC CAISSONS
Uke open caissons., pneumatic caissons may be conslnlctcd at the site or floated and lowered from
barges. Artificial sand islands may also be used. The rutting edge of the caisson is carefully positioned.
Compressed air is introduced in the working chamber to expel water. Afier the working chamber has been
dewatered, workmen descend through the air lock into the working chamber. 1lJe material is excavated by
hand tools in dry. As the excavation progresses. the caisson gradually sinks. Concreling of the caisson is then
done. The air pressure in the caisson is increased to equalise the increase in the head of water as the caisson
goes down. The excavated material is. removed by buckets through the air shaft. In granular SOils, the
excavated material can be removed by the blowout method through the blowo()llt pipe. When the valve in the
blow pipe in opened, the granular material is blown out by high air pressure inside the working chamber.
After the caisson has attained its design deplh, the working chamber is filled with ooncrcte. Precautions
must be taken to ensure full contact between the ooncrele fill and the underside of the roof of the working
chamber. The fresh concrete is [itSt lowered through the air shaft and a slob about 0.6 m thick is fonned on
the bottom and well packed under the rutting edge. The air pressure in the chamber is kept constant till the
concrete has hardened. A stiff mix of concrete is then packed into the working chamber up to the roof level.
Any space left between the roof and the concrete surface is filled with cement grout. There should not be any
empty space left in the chamber, as it would lead to selllement when the caisson is subjected to superimposed
load. After concreling of the working chamber is completed, the shaft lUbeS are dismanlled. The shaft itself is
filled up with a lean concrete.
26.9. ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF PNEUMATIC CAISSONS
Pneumatic caissons have the following advantages and disadvantages, as compared with open caissons.
Advantages
(1) As there is an access to the bottom of the caisson, obstructions can be easily removed.
(2) The soil can be inspected and the soil samples can be taken, if required.
(3) Soil bearing capaCity can be dctennined by oonducting in-situ tests in the working chamber.
(4) Excavation and pouring of concrete is done in the dry.
(5) As the position of the ground water table remains unchanged, there is no flow of soil into the
excavated area.
(6) There is no settlement of the adjoining structures as the water table is not lowered.
Dl..advantages
(1) Pneumatic caissons are highly expensive. Pneumatic caissons should be used only when open
caissons are not feasible.
(2) The penetration deplh below water table is limited to 30 to 40 m.
(3) There is a lot of inconvenience caused to the workmen while working under high pressure. The
workers may develop caisson disease.
(4) In pneumatic caissons, a large amount of manual work is required which inaeascs the cost.
(5) Extreme care is required for the proper working of the system and to maintain the required air
pressure. Any slackness may lead to an accident.
716 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
where I ;;: second moment of area of the plan of the caisson 81. water surface, V;;: volume of water displaced.
___ .m
The metacentric height is computed a<> .. ~~
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMI'LES
lIIustrative Example 26.1. A straight-shaft drilled pier, 1.0 m in dinmeter, is constructed in a deposit
J consisting of loose sand overlying dense sand (Fig. £-26.1). Determine the allowable load (F.!l: := 3.).
'I Solution. Let us take critical depth Dr _ 10 B - 10 m
From Eq. 26.1, Q" _ (qN.,)A, + (Ka"tanb)As
where q = effective vertical pressure at the base
.. 8)( 17 +2)( 21 _ 178kN/m 2
FromFig.26.2,N'l- 140 for, _ 40°.
Therefore, Q" .. 178 )( 140 )( ,v4 )( (1.0)2 .. 0.5 )( (1t )( 1.0) )( 0.58 (i )( 136 )( 8.0 )
LOOSE SANO
T.mG:O·5&
1\:0·50
~ =30'
T Cloy loyer I
Cu=J'S~Nlm2
0( ,,0.)0
'6::111rHf",3
DENSE SAN)
T.iln6=O·14
K=O·l.O
,=4if
I2m
l' .. 17 kH/mJ
Cloy loyrr \I
Cu"IOO kNlm2
,,<,,0.30
1\=21 kHfm 3
"' =18 ~Nlin3
Q. _ 20740.00 kN
Q. _ 20~40 _ 6913 kN
Illustrative Example 26.2. Determine the allowable load for the drilled pier constructed in a clayey
deposit, shown in Fig. £-26.2. Take. F.S. = 3.0.
Solution. DIBI .. 1212 .. 6
From Table 26.1, N~ .. 9.0.
From Eq. 26.2, Qu .. cN~ Ap • neA,
.. 100 x 9.0 x (nI4) x (2.0)2 • (0.3 x 35) (n: x 1.0 x 8.0)
+ (0.3 x 100) (It x 1.0 x 3.0) .. 3374 kN
From Eq. 26.3, Q. _ 33;4 _ 1125 kN
"
Concrete s-eol
Fig. E·26.J.
From equilibrium in the vertical direction (when imtallcd),
Load from superstructure + self weight - frictional resistance - uplift force - base reaction = 0.0
or 50000 + (n:/4)V;(4O) x 24 - (ruJ.,) x 40 x 30 - (;t/4)n; x 40 x 10 - (;t/4)V; x 2(0) .. 0
n; + 3.33Do - 44.23 .. 0 or D., - 5.19m
Let us adopt outside diameter as 6.0 m
Feasibility of sinking
From Eq. 26.7 (a), (rt/4) (D; - £if) x 40 x 24 .. (rt Do) x 40 x f
Taking f .. 30 kN/m 2 and Do" 6 m, we have
36 - df .. 30 D; _2.4m
Thickness of wall .. 6.0 ; 2.4 .. 1.8 m
DRILLI!D PIERS AND CAISSONS 719
11lickness oC seul
from Eq. 26.8, 1= 0.59D,..r;;;;;:
= 0.59 x 2.4 "2000/3500
= I.07m say 1.I0m
Illustrative Example 26.4. Check the stability of a floating caisson 10.5 m high and having a
rectangular base 20 m x 9 m. 111e weight of the caisson' is 9 MN and its centre of gravity is 4.0 m above the
base. If the caisson is unstable, how WQuld you make it stahle? Take unit weight of water as 10.25 leN/mI.
(b) What is the maximwlI pressure on the soil when the caisson has been fully insta/fed ? The base is at
a deplll of 9 m be/ow the water level. The total .. ~ight is 50 MN, which acts' at an eccentricity of 0.1 m.
Solution. (sec fig. E-26.4)
9m
I
1
IG
oM
! 8 d
L - - - - . . . JA-
I 1
Fig. £.26.4.
d .. 10.25 ~ x 9 - 4.88m
lleight of centre of buoyancy B ~lbove base.
All .. 4.88/2 .. 2.44 m
As the distance AG is 4 m, the distance BG is given by
DG .. 4.0 - 2.44 .. 156m
Prom Eg. 26.15, BM .. /IV
qawc .. ;; ( 1 + ¥) . io~9 (1 + 6 )
~.d·l = 296.3 kN/m 1 . -
PROBLEMS
A. Numericul
27.1. INTRODUCTION
Well foundation have their origin in India. Well foundations have been used in India for hundreds of
years for providing deep foundations below the water level for monuments, bridges and aqueducts. Thj Mahal
at Agra (India) has got well foundations.
A well foundation is similar to an open caisson discussed in chapter 26. Well foundations can be
constructed on the dry bed or after making a sand island. At locations where the depth of water is greater
than 5 m to 6 m and the velocity of water is high. wells can be fabricated on the river bank and (hen floated
to the final position and grounded. Great care is to be exercised while groundif'~ a well to ensure that its
position is correct. Once the well bas touched
the bed, sand bags are deposited around it to
WEll CAP
prevent scour. The well may sink into the river
bed by 50 to 60 em under its own weight.
Further sinking operation is similar 10 the
sinking of wells on dry bed. The well is sunk
into the ground to the desired level by
c).cavating through the dredge holes. TOP PLUG
Fig. 27.1. shows the section of a welL A
strong Culling edge is provided to facilitate
sinking. The tapered portion of the well above
the cut Ling edge is known as well curb. The
walls of the well are known as steining. Steining
is made of brick masonry, stone masonry. plain
or reinforced concrete. As the steining later
becomes an integral part of the structure, it
should be properly designed for the imposed
loods. Further, it should be heavy enough to
overcome frictional resistance during sinking.
CURB
After the well has been sunk to the final
position, the bottom plug is fonned by
concreting. The bottom plug serves as the base
of the well. The well is filled with sand partly or
completely. At the top of the well, a top plug is
fonned by concreting. A R.c.c. well alp is
provided at the top to transmit Ihe load of the
superstructure (pier or abutment) 10 tl:!:e well. Fig. 27.1. Well Found/ltion.
WEll. FOUNDATIONS 723
o CD
excessively long, the circular shape becomes
uneconomical. The maximum diameter of
circular wells is generally limited to 9 m.
(2) Double-D wells [Fig. 27.2 (b)] are
generally used for the piers and abutments of (a)CIRCULAR (b) DOUBLE - 0
bridges which are too long 10 be
accommodated 00 a circular well of 9 m
diameter. TIle wells of this shape can also be
sunk easily. However, considerable bending
moments arc caused in the sicining due to the
diffcrenre in pressure between the outside and
00 00
(c) DOUBLE OCT.AGONAL (d) TWIN CIRCULAR
..
3.
5.
Severe Bend
Right-angled Bend or lit nose of Pier
Upstream Nose of Guide Banks
1.75 d'
2.00 d'
2.75 tI
6. Severe Swirls 2.50 d'
According to IS : 3955 - 1967, the depth of foundation should 001 be less than 1.33 times the maximum
scour depth. The depth of the base of the well below the maximum scour level is kept not less than 2 m for
piers and abutments with arches and 1.2 m for piers and abutments supporting other Iypes of structures.
27.4. FORCES ACflNG ON THE WELL FOUNDATION
The following forces should be considered in the design of a well foundation.
(1) Dead loods. 1be dead loads carried by the weU include the weight of lhe superstructure aod tbe self
weight.
(2) Un loads. The design live loads for railway bridges fire taken according to Indian Railway Bridges
Rules. For rood bridges, the live loads as specified by the Indian Road Congress Standard SpecificaLions aM
Code of Practice for Road Bridges--Sect. II should be used.
(3) Impact loads. Impact effect due 10 live load is considered only in the design of pier cap and the
bri~gc seat on the abutment. For all other members of the well, the effed. of impact is ignored.
(4) Wind loads. Wind loads on the live load,. superstructure and the pan of the substructure located
above the water level are calculated according to the provisions of IS : 875, 1be wind load acts on tile
exposed area in elevation and thus it acts laterally on the bridge.
(5) Wilter pressure. Water pressure due to water current acts on the part of substructure which lies
between the water level and the maximum scour level. On piers parallel 10 the direction of the water, the
intensity of water pressure is given by
p • KV' ... (27.5)
where p = intensity of pressure (kN/m1, K = a constant, depending upon the shape of the well (= max. of
G WEU- FOl!.NDAll0NS
I) 0.788 for square ended pier to a minimum of 0.237 for piers with cut and ease water), V = velocity of current
(m/,.,;).
It is assumed that y1 is maximum at the free surface of water and zero at the deepest scour level. The
variation is assumed to be linear. The surface velocity is taken "f2 limes the average velocity.
Even when the flow is pamllel to the pier, a transverse force equal to 20% of thaI acting parclUel to the
pier is taken to allow for oblique flow.
e
If the current makes an angle with the axis of the pier, the pressure along the axis of the pier and
transverse to it are given by
PQ ::: pressure along axis ::: p cas2 (20 0 :t: 9) ... (27.6)
P, = transverse pressure == p sia2 (20 0
± 9) ... (27.7)
(6) Longitudinal Forces. Longitudinal forces occur due to tractive and braking forces. These forces
depend upOn the type of vehicles and bearings. These forces are transmitted to substruaure mainly through
flXed bearings and through friction in movable bearings. According 10 IRe code, a longitudinal force: of JlW
is taken on the free bearing :lOd the balance on the fixed bearing, where W is the total reaction and I-' is the
coefficient of friction.
(7) Centrifugal Forre. A cc~trifugal force is transmitted through bearings if the bridge is curved in plan.
(8) Buoyant Forces. Buoyancy reduces the effective weight of the well. In masonry or concrete steining.
15% buoyancy is considered to acoounl for the porousness.
When the well is founded 00 coarse sand or shingle, full buoyancy equal to the weight of an equivalent
volume of displaced water shOuld be considered. For semi-pervioos foundatiOflS, it is suitably reduced.
(9) Earth Pressure. The earth pressure is calculated acwrding to Rankine's theory or Coulomb's theory.
For the stability of foundations below the soour level. the passive earth pressure of the soil i" oonsidered.
cons-:=:~~~ f~~tr':c~fftbo~ 1~:V!:. placed behind the abutment. an equivalent height of surcbarge is
(10) Thmperature Stresses. Longitudinal forces are induced due 10 temperature changes. The movcmcnts
due to temperature changes are partiaUy restrained in girder bridges because of friction at the moveable end.
(U) Seismic (orces. For the wells constructed in the seismic zone, seismic forces should be considered.
The fo~ act on all components of the structure. The force is usually specified as aW, where W is the
weight of the component and a is the seismic coefficient. The value of a depends upon the seismic zone (IS
: 1893). Its value is generally taken between 0.01 and 0.08. The seismic force acts through the centre of
gravity of the component. Il may act in any direaion, but it is assumed to act in one direction only at a time.
The seismic forces are considered separately along the axis of the pier and traosverse to it,
Resultant Forces. The magnitude,
direction and the point of application of
all the above forces are found under the
worst ~ible combinations. '£be
resultant can be replaced by an
'equivalent vertical force W, and twO
horizontal forces F and Q. as shown in
Fig. 27.3.
The horizontal force Q acting in
the transverse direction gives more
critical condition for the lateral stability
of the welL.
17.5. TERZAGHI'S ANALYSIS
Terzagbi's solution for free rigid ElEVATICN
1 SlOE VIEW
bulkheads can be used for an Fig. 27.3. Focas 0111 pier.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
approximate analysis of the well foundation. When a rigid bulkhead embedded in sand moves parallel 10 its
original position, the sand on its fronl is lransfonncd into passive state whereas that on its re.1r, into active
state. Assuming that both the active and passive resistances are fully mobilised, the net pressure at any depth
z below the ground surface is given by
p - ,z(K, - K.J ... (27.8)
A free rigid bulkhead depends for its stability solely 00 the lateral resistance. Let qm;u' be the horizontal
force per unit length acting on the bulkhead of total height 111 (Fig. 27.4). The pressure distribution 00 both
sides of the bulkhead at the instant of failure may be represented as shown in the figure. The bulkhead rotates
about the point 0 above the base B. As the soil around the well is generally Submerged, the submerged unit
weight l' is used.
q.M' fl, - k" d (K, - Ko) DI3 - k (2,. D) (K, - K.J dj/3
where HI - H + D.
Substituting the value of qrnM.' from Eq. 27.9,
IT'I~
obtained by ~k:i.ng moments about the base.
~
* .
qml.lJl.' HI - &"f'(Kp - KJd x
qm.ax -6'''
1 '(K K)Ii'(D+Z)
p - " --H-
1
- ... (27.12)
,- r-----
UNseOUREO BED
" Z R LEVEL
, ,
w
J \ '
\X~~~g~aRE
\\ DISTRIBUTION
\\
\\
'\l
__ ______ "
I~1D+Z)(Kp .. ~ I
Fig. 27.6. Effect of Su ~h.arge.
Allowable '1h.nsverse Load. The total resisting force for the well is equal to the product of qmrot.' and
the length L of the well. The allowable load (Q,,) is equal to the resisting force divided by a suitable factor
of safety.
Maximum 1'ressure at Base. If Q is the aaual applied transverse horizontal force and Q. is the
allowable equivalent resisting force. the unbalanced force (Q - Q.J aaing at a height of H above the SCOuf
level would produce an overturning moment M B at the base, given by
M8 - (Q - Qo)(/J + D)
The maximum and the minimum pressure at the base are
W M8
qmax - A; + Z;;
W M8
~md qmin - A; - Z;;
where W ::: net vertical load on the well base, aRer making allowance for buoyancy and skin friaion. Ab =
<lroa of the well base, Zb = section modulus of tbe well base.
The maximum pressure should not be more than the allowable soil pressure. 'The minimum pressure
sho~ld not be negative (tensile). It is a general practire not to give any relief due to skin friaion wbile
calculating the maximum pressure in clays, bul to consider it for calculating the minimum pressure.
Maximum Moment in Steining. The maximum moment Mmu on the steining occurs at point S al depth
x below the scour line (Fig. 27.4) where the shear [orce is zero, i.e. the applied force and the earth pressure
just balance each arher. Taking a faaor of safety F,
or x -
P .. "'f?z
p,
P" p"(%(Kp - Kp)
p,
... (27.17)
Net pressure
Fossi.... pressun! /
\ __
\
AChJO
T
pressu
wbcre m .. y(Kp - K..}/pl ... (27.18) ~I P, \
The constant m is known as the coefficient of horizonlal / • ,
soil reaction. It is an empirical coefficient which depends
upon the nature of soil, the size and shape of the loaded 1. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J~
! -----.1
\
area. f--KpYO~--r KoYO ~
(u) Equations of Equilibrium. The stability of the well .
can be checked assuming either no plastic flow or partial FIg. 7:7.7.
plastic flow. The following analysis is based on the assumption of no plastic Dow. For the other case, a
reference mny be made to the original paper. Fig. 27.8 shows a well of length L and width B. acted upon by
,,
\
\
Nolt' : Rototioo Is
excggt'foted
(0)
'0)
Fig. 27.8.
". SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
a horizontal focce P per unit length at a height H above tbe scour tine. The well is embedded to a depth D
below the scour line.
When the well rotates about a point 0 located al a depth Dl below the soour line, the following equations
can be written from statics.
P - PI - P, - ~R •.. (27.19)
PH _ M} +M2 - Ml + ~RD+ ,,(P1-Pll x 812 ... (27.20)
and W - ~ (PI + Pi) + R ... (27.21)
where P :::: horizontal transverse {oree, PI :::: resultant force on the front face, P2 :: resultant passive force on
the rear face, "PI:::: skin friction on the front face. 1.1. P2 :::: sIcin friction on the rear face, R = resultant vertical
soil reaction at the ~ase, "R = frictional resistance of the soil at the base, MJ == momcnt at the scour line due
to Ph M2 = moment at the scour line due to P2. M3 = moment due to the vertical soil reaction at its base.
Let PI :::: horizontal displacement of lbe centre line of the well at the scour level, P2 :::: horizontal displacement
of the centre line of the well at ).he base level, Pl :::: downward vertical displacement of tbe well at the toe,
p'} = upward vertical displacement of the well at the beel(Pl' ... J>3}. P. = uniform vertical displacement of
the well due to resultant vertical force W.
(z - D,)
From Eq. 27.17, P-mz~PI
Moment. M2 - fD ~DJ z (z -D 1) Z dz
D, ,
or ... (2727)
-"-"""-&I~
~
I~ f :
_x--j
I--~ "'I' t--l
fig. 27.11.
2p,
OfP-nX
or ... (Z1.30)
Substituting the value of PJ from Eq. 27.22,
Evaluation or m PI
The maximum soil pressure at depth z below the scour line is given by
(PJ_. y'(1(" - K.) ... (2732)
flo..v
If no plastic is allowed in the soil the horizontal soil reaction p al any depth z must not exceed
(PJIIWI' 1berefore,
...(2733)
The sand sl.arts flowing as soon as the slope of the pressure parabola at scour level becomes equal to the
slope of the line whose abscissa represents the value of (PJmax (see Fig. 27.8 (b»).
6P,
From Eq. 27.24, mpi .. Dr ... (2734)
y(K, - K , , ) . --'.
M1 .. 12D, (3D - 4D J LT + D 1) ... (27.40)
M • K.y(Kp - K,,)
3 m
(-.!L)
12DI
.•• (27.41)
(VI) Determination or Base Pressun:. The total vertical reaction is given by (see Fig. 27.12)
Fig. 27.12-
where PI = pressure at the toe, Plo = pressure at the heel.
Moment M3 can be expressed as
1 B
M3-'2(PI-Ph)x"2x'23 B. 1(2 )
M) _ (PI ;2 hh) BZ ... (27.43)
1be maximum pressure should not be more tban the allowable soil pressure. TIle minimum pressure
should not be negative (tensile).
27.7. SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS FOR HEAVY WELLS
The analysis given in the preceding section is considerably simplified if the well is heavy. For such wens.
the reaction R at base is very high. and. therefore, the sliding at the base does not take place (i.e. P2 = 0).
The well however rotates at its base (Fig. 27.13).
As pz - 0, and D J - D. Eqs. 27.39 and 27.40 give
Pz-O and Mz=O
The equations of equilibrium (Eqs. 27.19 to 27.21)
become
•.. (27.44) SCour level
PH - M) - Ml + FD + ~PI (BI2) ... (VAS)
and W - ~PI +R ... (27.46)
where F = frictional resistance at the base to prevent
Sliding.
Also by substituting D • D J• we have
P, • Y(Kp - K.)v'16 ... (27.47)
M, • y(Kp - K.Jv'112 ... (27.48)
L Rototion txoggerotf"d
I:-=~~-r
and M,. YK. (~ - K.) x IfD ... (27.49)
The above quantities are per unit length of the well
and are applicable for a rectangular well. In case of a Fig. 27.13.
well with a non* rectangular base, the equations, are modified as
PL - PIL - Fl ... (27.50)
PLH - MB - MIL + FID+ ~Pl (BI2)L ...(27.51)
and ... (27.52)
,>4 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
where L = maximum length of the well base, B = width of the well base, MB = total moment induced in the
base due to tilting, FI '" total horizontal reaction at the base, RI ::::t total vertical reaction at the b.'lSe, WT =
total vertical load of the well
The pressures at the toe and heel are given by
RJ MB
P/'"';r;+z; .(2753)
RI M8
and p,,-X;;-Z;; ... (2754)
1
Indian Road Congress (IRC 45- e
. I
1972) gave recommendations for
estimating the resistance of the sOIl M.
below the maximum scour level. 1be t--,- -_-_.Jj
. . . . ." \ - -___
It--~'I .'
the recommendations, elastic theory can
be used to determine the soil pressure at
the side and at the base due to design
loads. However, for cstimation of the
factor of s.'1.fety against shear failure, the
ultimate soil resistance is computed.
1. Elastic TIleory.
100 following assumptions
made in the elastic thoory :
(1) The wcll behaves as a rigid
bOdy.
(2) The ooefficicnt oC horizontal
subgrade reaction KH increases (e)OeIlKtion at base
linearly with depth.
(3) The unit soil reaction incrcnscs [! ) ! !J
linearly with the lateral
(fJPrtssure distribution ot be,.
deflection. Ag.27.14.
WElL FOUNDATIONS
(4) The well is acted upon by an external horizontal force H and a moment Mo at .the scour level
Pressure Distribution on Sides. Fig. 27.14 (a) shows a rigid well with its base at a depth D below the
scour level. TIle well may roLate at a point above the base, or at the base, or below the basco The base moves
toward the centre of rotation if the point of rotation lies above the base and, therefore, the frictional force al
the base acts in the direction of the horizontal force H. However, if the point of rotation lies below the base,
the direction of tbe frictional force is in the direction opposite 10 that of II.
In gcneml, the frictional force is given by
F _ ~ ~W ... (27.58)
where 14 "" roefficient of friction. W III: total downward load, ~ '" a factor, which lies between -1 and + 1,
depending upon the point of rotation.
If tbe well rotates at JX>inl C (Fig. rT.14 (b)1 the horizontal deflection at any depth z is givenpy
PII - (D -,) B ... (n.59)
The horizontal soil reaction at that level is
Oz - KJI(zID) {D - z)8 ... (27.60)
0 .... m K" (zID)(D - z) 8
where m - KlflK.,
Total horizootal soil recation acting on the sides.
P·iLozdz
o
where I" _ L IY 112 '" moment of inertia about the axis passing through the c.g. of the vertical projected area.
Moment of P at the base level is given by
-fo Lmlq,ID)(D-,)'B.u
or Mp - mK"8I,, ... (27.62)
Pressure Distribution at Base. The vertical deflection at a distance (x + x..) from the centre of rotation
is given by [see Fig. 27.14 (c)],
p - (x + Xt) 8
Therefore, vertical soil reaction 0, - 1(., (x + Xt) 8
,an
Moment at the base. M8 - f-8/2 K.J.x. + x..)8xdA
M8 _K~e r B
/2
-8/2
2- dA + K" e[812 xcxM.
-812
As the reference axis is taken through the c.g. of the base, the second term is equal to zero. Therefore,
Ma - K.B1a ...(27.63)
736 roll MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
where Is = moment of inertia of tbe base about an axis passing through the c.g. and perpendicular to the
horizontal force H.
For equilibrium, tbe sum of all the horizontal forces is zero.
Thus H + p~W- PIlIl'P ... P
P(l + P~~') _II + p~W
Kv
e- 18 +mlv~ + 2~'a) ... (27.67)
Kv O .. ¥- ... (27.67)
wb= M-Mo+IID
and I .. Is + mlv{l + ZIl'a) .(27.68)
~ 2mKv91v
From Eqs. 27.61 and 27.64, P - 1 + p~~' - --D--
where
D I
r .. '2' mlv ... [27.69 (b)]
Also If+P~W-7(I+P~~')
On simplification, H + PI-' W - ~ + ~ - 0/:- (1 + PI-' Il')
M 'J
P [I-'W-~ M
--;:-H
!;i_If
or P- r AI ... (27.70)
~W-7 (~~')
As -1 < P< 1, we have
WEll.. FOUNDl\rIONS
Kv Oxc. W ~ fl'P
Therefore, U z .. Kv 0 x + ~
w
(
' P) ... (27.72)
W - p.'P ME
and Ph - A -21 . .. (27.75)
For the soil to remain in elastic stale, the maximum soil pressure at any depth should not exceed the
maxil1.lum passive pressure, i.e., O;t } Pp
mKvO(D - z). .
AI z '" 0, the term - - D - - lS a m3XllIlum.
Vertical force on the element = Rda cos a (lY,.18) and normal force developed on the element
dF,. .. (lY.,.I8)Rda cos a cos a
•
Total normal force, F,. .. 2fo (W.l8)Rcos ada
2
F
,.
-~VI
2
4n'd[ -1~ ~]
+ Ii- tan 2nD'" Ii + 4n2 & ... (21.77)
The moment of resistance of the base about Ibe point of rotation is given by
M. _ (F"tan~)R .. .[21.18 (a)l
[Note. The right-hand side of Eq. 27.78 (0) is multiplied by a shape factor of 0.6 in the case of circular
wells.]
Assuming the point of rotation al a height of 0.2 D above the base. the moment of resistance of the base
is given by
Mb .. eW81an' ... [21.18(b»)
where, = angle of shearing resistance, 8 = width parallel to the dircaion of forces or equal to the diameter
n
in ciro.dar wells. C = coefficient (see Thble .2).
Tuble 27.2. Values of Coefficient C
DlB
Recta/lgular Well
Cin:ularWt'1J
Side-Resisting Moment
Fig. 27.16 shows the ultimate soil pressure distribution at the front and back faces of the welL As the
Fig. 27.16.
WEll. FOUNDt\1l0NS
point of rotation is assumed at a height of 0.2 D above the base, from the similarity of triangles. it can be
shown that Dl - 1/3 D.
Taking moments of the forces about O.
AI: - OJ196n'[yD(Kp - K.)]
AI/ =O.l l d (K,. - KJ per unit length
Taking submerged unit weigHt.,.' - O.ll' rr (Kp - KJ per unillcngth
For a well of lcn£,th L, M, - O.ll' d (Kp - KJ L .. .(27.79)
Resl"ting Moment due to rriction on front and back. races
The f(idional forces on the faces ad in the vertical direction and produce resisting moment M, .
Force/unit width, F .. ¥ l' Jil (Kp - K,,) sin 0
10 the case of a rectangular well of length L,
000ERioUTER
FACE
ANCHOR
FACE
ANCHOR
,
(al SHARP EDGE (b) STUB /'lOSE
Fig. 27.17. Cutting Eage.
The cutting edge should be properly anchored to the well curb.
(1) Well cum. Fig. 27.18 shows the curb of a well Curbs are generally made of reinforced concrete.
During sinking operation, the curb cuts through the soil. The figure shows the forces acting on the curb when
the well bas penetrated to a considerable depth below the scour level.
'--~l~~~
1 I-~"'"
Fig. 27.19.
'"
In case of granular soils, the hoop tension is relieved by active earth pressure around the curb. The net
hoop tension is given by
PI - ~K.. Y' d
.) and Pl' iK.Y' (D_b)2
in which b = height of the curb, D = depth of the curb below the scour level.
.) At the junction of the curb and steining. a moment M .. develops due to the horizontal force H caused by
bevelled action, given by
,)
M" _ H)( bl2 ... (1:1.90)
Suitable reinforcement "is provided at the inner oomer to talee care of this moment and is anchored into
the stcining.
IRe: 21-1972 recommends a minimwn reinforcement of 72 kg/m J in a well curb. 1bc reinforcement
should be properly arranged.
The slope of the inner face of the curb should be such as to push forward easily. .TIle angIe with the
vertical should preferably be not more than 30" in ordinary soil and 45" for sandy soils.
(3) Well Slelning. The thickness of the steining should be adequate for the stresses developed during
S} sinking and after installation. The thickness t of the steining may be obtained from the following equation :
742 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
chances of tilt and shift are reduced. Dewatering is not allowed after the well bas sunk to about 10 m. After
this stage. the sinking is done by usual methods of grabbing, dlisclling, applying kcntledge or blasting.
Great precaution is necessary if dewatering of the well is done when it is al a shallow depth to avoid
blowing of sand from under the culling cdge. If blowing of sand occurs, it rcsulls in the loss of time and
labour in removing the saDd. It also presents danger to the men working inside; as the well may get filled
upto a height of a few metres if the blow is large. The well may also lill suddenly. Scrap gunny bags unci
grass bundles arc placed around the periphery of the well on the outside into the funnel formed. It blocks the
passage through which the blow of sand is laking place.
27.23. MEASURES FOR RECTU'ICATION OF TILTS AND SmFTS
'[be well should be sunk straight and at the correct position. However, it is not an easy task to achieve
this objective. Somctimes, the well tilts on one side or it shifts away from the desired position. The following
precautions must be taken to avoid tillS and shifts.
(1) The outer surfxe of the well curb and steining should be regular and smooth.
The diameter of the curb should be kept about 4 to 8 em lager than the outer diameter of steining, and
the well shoukl be symmetrically placed.
(3) The cutting edge should be of uniform thickness and sharpness.
(4) Dredging should be done uniformly on all sides in a circular well and in both pockelS of a twin well.
TillS and shifts must be Clrefully checked and properly recorded. The correcl measurement of the tilt is an
important field obscrvation required during well sinking. It is nol pnssible 10 specify Ihe permissible limits of
-rl-~_fr
edge. A tilted well in a hard clayey
stratum docs not straighten due to
unbroken hard stratum on the higher
side. If dewatering of the well is
possible, open excavation is done under
the cutting edge. In case dewatering is
~YSLEEPER
not possible, divers can be sent to
loosen the strata.
(5) Inserting wooden Sleeper
'-HOOK
under the cutting edge. Sometimes
wooden sleepers arc inserted (bl
(al
temporarily below tho rutting edge on
the lower side 10 avo~d funher tilt [Pig. Fi .27.24.
27.24 (a)l. AlternatIVely, a hook is g
inserted below the cutting edge on the lower side and pulled with a wire rope and kept strained [Fig. 27.24 (b)].
(6) Pulling .hl: well. If] early stages of sinking, pulling the well towards the higher side, by placing one
or more steel ropes around the well with vertical sleepers packed in-between to distribute the pressure over
lnrger areas of well steining, is quite eITw.ivc (Fig. 27.25).
SLEEPERS
PUll
STEEL RoPE UJ..c~J.L.u..JJ-.;u-j
\
,I
Fig. 27.2.'5 .
(7) Strutting the well. TIle well is strutted on irs tilted side with suitable logs of wood to prevent fuMber
tilt. The well steining is provided with sleepers to distribute the load from the strut. The other ends of the logs
rest agaioot a finn and non-yielding base having driven piles (Fig. 27.26).
SLEEPER
Fig. 27.26.
746 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Fig. 27.1:1.
(8) Pushing the wells by jocks. The till can be rectiflCd by pushing the well with a suitable arrangement
through mechanical or hydraulic jacks. Fig. 27.27 shows a tilled well being pushed by a jack resting against
the venically.sunk well.
In aaua1 practice, a combination of several methods d~ above is gencmlly used.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAM1'LES
Dillstratl"e Example i7.1. A circular well of 6 m erlerMi dianleler and 4 m internal dimnerer is
embedded to a depth of 15 m below the maxImum scour level in Q , sandy soil deposit. The well is subjected
to a horizontill force of 800 kN acting at a height of 8 m above the scour level. Determine the allowable total
equivalent resisting force due to earth pressure, assuming (a) the. rotation is about a point above the base, (b)
the rotation is at the base. Take Y6111 ::: 20 kNlm J, +: :
30°; factor of safety for passive resistance "" 2.0.
Ttr
Use Terzaghi's analysis.
Solution. (See Fig. E·27.1) Kp - 3.0, K(I - 0.333
~~==-~i: T
-.
8m
Scour
II!'~I
SeD r Tzsm
~~~i"'l
(.) (b)
Fig. E-27. 1.
(a) Rotation above the base. 1btal height, HI .. 8 + 15 .. 23 m
Till
H:'j:~m
l~I. I
1--·6~-.I ..l
~
Fig. E-27.2.
Use Banerjee and Gangopadhay's simplified analysis. TaJce I.l. = 0.50; y' = 11 leN/m3; 4' = 30"; K~ -=
25000 kNlm'.
Solution. Area of aoss-sectioo, A~ .. x/4 (62 _ 42) .. 15.70 m2
Moment of inertia, I .. nl64 (6' _ 44) .. 51.03 m4
Section modulus, Z~ .. 51.03 .. 17.0~m3
3.0
m _ l'(Kp-K.)
From &I. 27.18,
p,
_ 11 X (3.0 - 0.333) _ 1466.9
20 x 10. . 3
P l' (Kp - K.)Ii'
From Eq. 27.47, I - 6
.. 11 x (3:0 -60.333) x 8'2 .. 312.9 leN
M l'(K, - K.)Ii'
From &I. 27.48, 1" 12
'48 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
4
.. 11.0 x (3.0 ;20.333) )( 8 .. 1251.7 kN
Solving the above two equations. p, .. 764.65 IcN/m 2; PI. .. 389.65 IcN/m 2
Section modulus
weJ.l. FOUNDATIONS 749
SeOUl" leveL 88 .•
1 c:r::t=JtJtTtt
1--'.15m-..".-- l>'m-l .1
lL5.o
T ----z:u--t-.l-J '252.2 kN/m 2
., T
Fig, B-27.3.
Total vertical load, neglecting buoyancy = 5000.0 + 904.3 = 5904.3 kN
The maximum and minimwn pressures are given by
itt
qrmur. .. 5
3
+ ~ .. 252.2 kN/m 2
Taldng F _ 2,
2 x 2 x 2252.7 ]" 44
x - [ 10 x (6 .105 _ 0.297) x 8.0 ... m
Weight of water ill the well .. (11:/4) )( (4.8)2 )( 10 )( (11.05 - 1.0) .. 1817.7 leN
Weight of intermediate plug (I m) thick
.. (1tI4) )( (4.8)2 x 1.0 x 24 .. 434 kN
Weight of bottom plug (2.5 m thick)
.. it/4 x (4.8)2 x 24 x 2.50 .. 1085.2 leN
Weight of sand fill upto scour level
.. :rtI4 X (4.8)2 x 20 x 7.7 .. 2785.3 kN
Total weight at the base .. 5904.3 + 16398.3 + 1817.7 + 434 + 2785.3 + 1085.2
- 28424.8kN
Buoyancy on well .. :rtI4 x (8.0)2 x 22 x 10 .. 11052.8 leN
752 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
m¥}Y'(K,-K.)
WELL roUND(\TlONS 753
Ultlmule Reslshmce
PROBLEMS
A. Numencals
27.1. A well foundation has the following particulDtS.
QUler diameter '" 5.0 m
Inner diameter '" 3.0 m
Depth below scour level '" 12.0 m
Moment '" 5000 kN·m
Horizontnl force acting at 8 m above the scour level '" 600 kN
Factor of safety '" 2.0
Assumi ng that the well tillS about a certain pein! above the base, compute the allowable, tOlDl equivalent
+'"'
resisting force due 10 earth pressure. Thke Ysflt '"' 20 kN/mJ , 30°. (Ans. 710.5 kN)
27.2. The following data refer to a well foundation:
(a) Ne t downward load, including self.weight '" 12000 kN
(b) Height of poim of application of horizontal force above the scour level :. 4 m
(c) Depth of well below scour level '" 10 m
(d) External diameter = 7.0 m
(e) Internal diameter '" 5.0 m
if) Vertical subgrode reaction '" 3 )( 104 kN/m J
(g) Poisson's rmio :II 0.5
(h) HonzonlllJ deformation of welJ cap at !he scour level (pI) • 20 mm
(i) Allowable soi l pressure • 600 kN/m2
Ihe ::::~~ ~: :~ t~~:jeB;~t=i~;SC' determine the base pressure and lateral load per unit length of
D. Des<rlpllve lYpe
27.3. Discuss the situations where 0 well foundotion is more suituble than the other types of foundmiom.
27.4. What are different shapes of wells? Discuss the characteriSlics of each type.
27.5. Discuss the various forces acti ng o n a well foundation.
27.6. Whot do you under5U\nd by grip length ? Whot is its importance in well foundations?
27.7. Describe vIlriOUS methods for the design of well foundations. What are their relative merits?
27.8. What nre the various comJXlnents of II well foundation? What arc their uses ?
27.9. Descri!;le the proa:dure for construction of wells. Discuss the causes and remedies for tilts and shifts.
27.10. Discuss IRC method for the design of well foundntion.
V.U. Explain Terz.oghi's analysis for rigid bulkhead applied to well foundation.
27.12. DiSQJss Bnne~ee and Gangopadhyay',j method for the design of well foundaTions.
C. Multiple Choke Queslions
1. A well foundation is a type of
(a) open caisson (b) pneumatic caisson
(e) f100ting caisson (d) drilled pier
2. The grip length below the maximum scour level for the rnilWlly bridges is usually
(a) 0.5 R (b) 0.25 R (e) R (d) 2 R
where R is the max im um scour depth.
3. In some well foundation, the following is nO( provided:
(a) R.C.C. well cap (b) Top plug
(e) Bottom plug (e) Curb
4. The most commonly Il5Cd shope of a well foundation is
(a) Double-D well (b) Circular well
(e) Double octagonal well (d) Rectangular well.
S. The thickness of stcining for railway bridges is usually kepc as . ..... . of outside diameter.
(a) one-eight (b) one tenth
(,c) one-sixth (4) one-founh. lAns. \. (a), 2. (a), 3. (b), 4. (b), S. (d)l
28
Machine Foundations
28.1. INTRODUcnON
Foundations subjected to static loads have been discussed in the preceding chapters. In some cases, the
foundations are subjected to dynamic loads. These loads may result from various C1USes such as vibratory
motion of machines, movement of vehicles, impact of hammers, earthquakes, winds, waves, nUCic.1r blasL<;,
mine explosions, and pile driving. The dynamic loads transmitted to the foundations and their effect on the
SIrota below can be delennined using the principles of soil dynamics and theory of vibmtioos. 1be analysis
is, however, very complex.
Machine foundations are subjected to the dynamic forces caused by the machine. lbese dynamic forces
are transmitted 10 the foundation supporting the machine. Although the moving parts of the machine are
genemlly balanced, there is always some unbalance in praclice which causes an eccentricity of rotating parts.
This produces an oscillating force. The machine foundation must satisfy the criteria for dynamic loading, in
addition to that for static loading alrc.'ldy discussed.
Basically, there are three types of machines:
(i) Machines which produce a periodic unbalanced force. such as reciprocating engines and
compressors. The speed of such machines is genernlly less than 600 f.p.m. In these machines, the
rotary molion of the crank is converted into the translatory motion. TIle unbalanced force varics
sinusoidally.
(i1) Machines which produce impact loads, such as forge hammers and punch presses. In these machines,
the dynamic force allains a peak value in a very short time and then dies out gradually. The response
is a pulsating curve. It vanishes before the next pulse. 1be speed is usually between 60 to 150 blows
per minute.
(iiI) High speed machines, such as turbincs and rotary compressors. The speed of such machines is very
high; sometimes, it is even more than 3000 f.p,m.
This chapler is devoted mainly to the design of foundation for the machines of the first type.
28.2. TYPES OF MACHINE FOUNDATIONS
The following 4 types of machine foundations are commonly used.
(1) Block 1)rpe. This type of machine foundation consists of a pedestal resting on a footing rfig. 28.1
(a)]. The foundation has a large mass and a smal1 natural frequency.
(2) Box Type. The foundation consists of a hollow concrete block [Fig. 28.1 (b)]. The mass of lhe
foundation is less than that in the block type and the natural frequency is increased.
(3) Wall1)rpe. A wall type of foundation consists of a pair of walls having a top slab. The machine rests
on the top slab [Fig. 28:1 (c)].
(4) Framed Type. This type of foundation consists of venical oolumns having a horizontal frame at their
tops. The machine is supponcd all the frame [Fig. 28.1 (d)).
7,. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(9) Resonance. When the frequency of the exciting force is equal 10 ooe of the natural frequencies of the
system, the ampliludes of motion become excessively large. This condition is known as resonance.
10. Damping. The resistance to motion which develops due 10 friction and other causes is known as
damping.
Viscous damping is II Iype of damping in which the damping force is proportional \0 Ihe velocity. It is
expressed as
F - c ~ ... (28.2)
(a) (b)
fig. 28.2..
Fig. 28.2. (a) shows a system with one degree of freedom. and Fig. 28.2 (b) shows a system with two
degrees of freedom. An elastic rod has an infinite degree of freedom. However, for convenience, the rod is
divided inlo segmenls. The degree of freedom is made finite by coruiidering the masses of these segments.
(12) Principal modes of vibrations. A system with more than one degree of freedom vibnucs in complex
modes. However, if each point in the system follows a definite pattern of common natural frequency, the
mode is systematic and orderly and is known as the principal mode of vibration.
A system with n degrees of freedom has n principal modes and hence n natural frequencies.
·28.4. DEGREE OF FREEDOM OF A BLOCK FOUNIlATION
A rigid block: foundation has 6 degree of freedom (Fig. 28.3). Any displacement can be resolved into 6
independent displacements as under.
(1) Translation along X·axis, (2) Translation along Y-axis, (3) Trnru;lation along Z-axis, (4) Rotation about
X-axis, (5) Rotation about Y-axis, (6) Rotation about Z-axis.
Translation along Z-axes and rotation about Z-axis can occur independently of any other motion. However.
translations and rotation about X-and Y-axis are coupled. as these cannot occur independent of one another.
X-, y. and Z-axes are caUed, respectively. pitching, rocking and yawing axes.
The discussions in Ihis elementary text are limited 10 one-degree of freedom.
29.5. GENERAL CRHERIA FOR DESiGN OF MACHINE FOUNDATIONS
A good machine foundation should Satisfy the follOWing criteria.
(1) Like ordinary foundations, it should be safe against shear failure caused by superimposed loads. and
758 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
(a)
Fig. 283.
The equation of motion can be written as under.
,p,
nld?- - kz
,p,
nld?+kz-O ... (283)
Substituting these values in Eq. 28.3, -m A ro! sin (00" I + a) + kA sin (00" t + a) _ 0
moo~ _k
or 00" -...[k;;;; ... (28.6)
11 may be noted tbat the greater the mass m, the smaller is the frequency.
If /... is the natural frequency in cycles per second,
(b) Damped Vibrutlon. Fig. 28.6 (a) shows a rigid mass m resting on a spring of stiffness Ie and
connected to a viscous damper with a damping coefficient c. In Ibis case, there is an additional force due to
damping. The equation of motion can be written as
d'z dz
m dr + C di+ kz - 0 ... (28.9)
It can be shown thai tbe general solution is of the form
Z _ C 1 eSt' + Czeszt ... (28.10)
rJI-f!' ~---
motion is aperiodic, If D = I, the system is
critically damped, which also gives aperiodic
motion. If D < 1, the system is underdampcd
and the response is periodic, as shown in Fig.
28.6 (b). Only undcrdampcd systems are of
z ----I
• 0
..·· _
t
where
Eq. 28.10 can be written as
z _ e-Dw.t [c 1
d(1-d)l-J.w"t + cze-i(l-Dllt.\!w.,] .(28.13)
Let us make the following substitution.
w",,-w.~ ... (28.14)
Therefore, z .. e-Dw• t [(C) eiw,..,t + Cze-iw""t]
1be term Wild is known as damped na:u.ral frequency. Sq. 28.1 can also be written as
(.) (b)
Fig. 28.7.
Lei us nssume thnt the exciting force is sinusoidul of the form
F(l) - FI} sinrot
where F" = magnitude of the exciting force>
w = circular frequency of exciting force.
lbus 1/1';:
d,
+ c ~d, + k z - FI} sin ml ... (28.18)
The first pun of the solution is transient nnd dies Oul <lftcr some time. TIle scoond fXlrt is the Steady-state
responsc. Thus
... (28.20)
z - V(k _ /11(02)2 +- C2{J)2
condition, the operating frequency should not be close to the natural frequeocy. For a safe design. the
frequency ratio is nonnally kept outside the critical range of 0.4 to 1.50.
The magnitude of the displacement is given by
1'1- _F_._ _ - - F - . - ... [28.23(a)]
k(!-?) m(";-.,')
In a general case, Iz I _ F,Ik ... [28.23(b)J
";(1 - ?l'+ Hi'?
1be static displacement under a force F" is given by
F.
Z'f - k . .. (28.24)
The ratio of the magnitude of the steady-stale displacement of a forced system to the static displacement
is known ~ magnification factor (M). Thus
1, 1 F,/k
M - z;; - (F.lk) ";(1 _ ,')' + Hi'?
(28.25)
0'
At_ ..;(! -y')' + 4d,'
Thus z - MZ'I
Fig. 28.8 shows the variation of the magnification factor M with' for different values of D. It may be
noted that the magnification is high for the value of r between 04 and 15
,
t,
,
~o . o
, l
, ~o,,~
~~
0
0., I
10 ,., '.0 l-5 ,D ,., 4Jl
Fr~quency ratio Ir}-....-
Ag.28.8.
Force Transmissibility T. A damped forced vibratory system derives its support from the foundation.
The force transmitted can be expressed as
FT - C ~ + Ia ...(28.26)
T .. ~
- MVl + (2D,)' ... (2830)
Lik.e magnification factor (M). the trnnsmissibilily is also a function of rand D. The plot is similar in
shape to that shown in Fig. 28.8.
28.8. VIBRATION ANALYSIS OF A MACHINE FOUNDATION
Although a machine foundation has 6 degree of freedom, it is assumed to have a single degree of
freedom for a simplified analysis. Fig. 28.9 shows a machine foundation supported on a soil mass. In this
case. tbe mass m, of the system Jumps together the mass of the machine and the mass of foundation. lbe total
mass m, acts at the centre of gravity of the system. The mass is under the supporting action of the soil. The
elastic action can be lumped together into a single elastie spring with a stiffness k. Ukewise, aU the resistance
to motion is lumped into the damping coefficient c. lous the machine foundation reduces to a single mass
baving one degree of freedom, as shown in Fig. 28.7. lbe analysis of damped. forced vibration, discussed in
Sect. 28.7, is, therefore, applicable to the machine foundation.
Determination of Parameters. For vibration analysis of a machinC? foundation. the parameters m, c and
Ie are required. lbese parameters can be determined as under.
(1) Mass (m). When a machine vibrates. some portion of the supporting soil mass also vibrales. The
vibrating soil mass is known as the participating mass or in-phase soil mass. 1bcrcfore, the total mass of the
FOUNDATION
\
\
:
t
I
I
Fig. 28.9.
164 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
system is equal to the mass of lhe [ound:ltion block and machine (mf) and the mass (ms) of the participating
soil. Thus
m - /til + /tis ••• (28.31)
Unfortunately, there is no rational method to determine the magnitude of m,. It is usually related to the
mass of the soil in lhc pressure bulb. The value of m, generally varies between zero and m" In other words.,
the total mass (m) varies between m, and 2 In,in mast cases.
(2) Spring stiffness (k). The spring stiffness depends upon the type of soil, embedment of the foundatioo
block, the contact area and the contact pressure distribution. The following methods are commonly used.
(0) Laboratory test. A triax.ial lest with vertical vibrations is conducted 10 dctenninc Young's modulus
E. Alternatively, tho modulus of rigidity (G) is determined by conducting the tcst under torsional vibration,
and E is obtained indirectly from the relation E = 2 G (1 + ~). where ~ is Poisson's ratio.
The stiffness (k) is determined as
k _ A£IL ... (28.32)
=
where A cross-sectional area of the specimen, L =
length of the specimen,
(b) Barkan's method. The stiffness can also be obrnincd from the value of E using the foUowing relation
given by Barkan.
...(28.33)
k - ks . A ... (28.36)
where A = area of foundation,
(d) Resonance test. The resonance frequency (f,,) is obtained using a vibrator of mass m sct up on a steel
plate supported on the ground. The spring stiffness is obtained from the relation '
Ift-~
ItI· f;..fklm
or k - 41r?{"m ... (28.37)
(3) Damping constant e. Damping is duc to dissipation of vibration energy. which Q(X:urs mainly
because of the following reasons.
(I) Internal friction loss due to hysterisis and viscous effects.
(il) Radiational loss due to propagation of waves through soil
The damping factor D for an undcrdamped system can be determined in the laboratory. Vibration
response is ploUed and the logarithmic decrement (, is found from the plot, as
MACHINE FOUNDATIONS 765
Thus . .. (28.45)
W.#
" III
... (28.46)
where e.. '" coefficient of elastic uniform compression, A .: oontaCl area of foundation with soil.
Comparing with Eq. 28.43, k .. C" )( A ... [28.46(0)]
lhe maximum amplitude is given by
z",,- _ _F_·o_ _
... (28.47)
. 11100;(1 -,.2)
where F" '" exciting force .
766 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGI~EERING
The coefficient of clastic unifonn compression (Cit) depends upon the type of soil. It can be obtained
from the following relation.
E 1
C•• 1.13 (I _ "'>
7.t: ... (28.48)
As it is evident. the coefficient varies inversely proportional to the square root of the base area of the
foundation. Thus
(C,J,
(C.),· A,
(A,)" ...
(28.49)
Toole 28.1 gives the recommended value of CIt for A = 10 m2 for different soils (Barkao, 1962).
Thble 28.1. Coefficient of Elastic UnIform Compression
Coe/ficielll of elas/iC
Soil uniform compression
Soil type
Calegory (C..)kNlmJ
Weak soils (clays nod silty days wi th sand in II uplO 150
pla<>lic Slatc; clayey sillS; soils of categories II
nnd III with laminae of organic silts and of peat).
Soils of medium strength (clays and silty clays 15~350
with days and silty dllYs with sand close 10 the
plastic limit; sand)
III Strong soils (clays lind silty clays with SIlnd of 350-500
hard consistency; gravels and gravelly sands;
I~andl~ialsoils).
IV Rocks >500
(7) 1be combined centre of gravity of machine and foundation should be as much below the top of
foundation as possible. In no case, it should be above the top of foundation.
(8) The depth of foundation should be sufficient to provide the required bearing capacity and to ensure
stability against rotation in the vertical plane.
(9) The strcsse.1O in the soil below the foundations should not exceed 80% of the allowable stresses under
static loads. lbc base pressure is limited to half the nonnal allowable pressure (q"J in extreme alSCS.
(10) Where it is not practicnble to design a foundation to give satisfactory dynamic response, the
transmitted vibrations may be reduced by providing anti-vibration mountings either between the machine and
the foundation or between the foundation and the supporting system.
(11) The macpine should be anchored to the foundution block using a base plate and anchor bolts. Bolt
holes should be backfiUed with concrete and the space below the plate should be filled with I : 2 cement
mortar.
(12) A number of similar machines can be erected on Individual pedestals on a common raft. The analysis
for such machines can be made assuming thai each foundalion acts independently with an area of foundation
equal to that ob1.1ined by dividing up the mft into sections corresponding to separate machines.
1. Gas Engines
l---Cylindcr 3.0
2-Cylinder 3.0
4-Cylindcr 2.75
6-Cylinder 2.25
8-Cylincler 2.0
2. Diesel Engines
'2-Cylinder 2.75
4-Cylinder 2.'
6-Cylindcr 2.1
8-Cylincicr 1.9
3. Rotary converter 0.5100.75
4. Vertical compound steam engine coupled 10 generator 3.8
5. Vertical lriple-e"JXInsion stc;Jm cngine coupled to 35
generator
6. lIorizonlnl cross-compound coupled to generator 3.25
7. liorizonlal stcllm turbine coupted to generator 3.0104.0
8. Vertical gas engine coupled to gellerator 3.5
9. Vertical diesel engine coupled to generator 2.6
The amplitude of surface waves (R-waves) reduces with an increase in distance. A considerable reduction
in the amplitude is achieved by locating the foundation at a great depth, as the R-waves also reduce
considerably with an increase in depth.
(2) Additional masses known as dampen; are attached to the foundations of high frequency machines to
make it a multiple degree freedom system and to change the natuml frequency.
In reciprocating machines, the vibnltions are considermly reduced by counterbalancing the exciting
forces by att..-lching counterweights to the sides of the crank.
(3) VibrntioM are considerably reduced by placing absort>er.>, such as rubber mountings, fellS and corks
between the machine and the base.
(4) If an auxiliary mass with a spring is attached to the machine foundation, the system becomes a
two-degree-freedoni systcm. The ' method is especially effective when the system is in resonance.
(5) If the strength of thc soil is increased by chemical or cement stabilisation, it increases the natural
frequency of thc system. The mcthoo is useful for machines of low operating frequency.
(6) 'Inc natund frequency of the system is modified by making struaural changes in foundation, such a')
connecting the adjoining foundations, changing the base area or mass of foundation or use of attached slabs.
(1) The propagation of waves can be reduced by providing sheet piles. screens or trenches.
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
DlustraU"c Example 28.1. Determine the lUllurai frequency of a machine foundation having a base area
2 m x 2 m and a mass of 15 Mg, including the mass of the mochine, Taking e" = 4 x 1(1 kN/mJ.
or w" .. V 1
4 )( 10 X
15 x 1
(~ X 2) .. 103.28 rad/sec
wbere Moo 1
V(1 - r')' + 4Ii'.:'
_ 1 _ 0.45
V[1 - (5/3)'f' + 4 x (0.4)' x (5/3)'
Therefore, I
Fd - 100 x 0.45 V
1 + (2 x 0.4 x 5/3)' _ 15 kN
D1ustratlve Example 28.4. Determine the coefficient of uniform compression if a vibration tQl 011 a
block 1 m X 1 m )( 1 m ga~ a resonance ~ncy of 30 Hz in the vertical directWn. ~ mass of the
oscillator used wos 60 kg.
Solution. Mass of foundation block.
.. (l )( I x 1) x 2400 - 2400kg
Total mass .. 2400 + 60 .. 2460 kg
t- -'-
h
# m
f _ ...L
2"
# . ....!.... y4
m 2:t
X
1
10
3)(103
X 2.5 29.06 Hz
,===:::::;::::;::=====-
V{1- (2~()5 )' r 4•O. (2~ f
1.12
illustrative Example 28,6. In a test block oj the size 1.5 m )( 1.0 m x 0.75 m, resonance occurs at a
frequency of 20 cycles per second in the vertical vibration. Determine the coefficient of elastic uniform
compression (C.J if the mass of oscillator is 70 kg and the force produ.ced by it at J 5 cycles per second is
1000 N. Also compute the maximum amplitude at 15 cycles per second
Solution. W,,'" 2x/,," 2" x 20 .. 4On;
Mass of oscillator :::: 70 kg
Mass of block = 1.5 )( 1.0 x 0.75 x 24.00 = 2700 kg
Total mass '" 70 + 2700 '" 2770 kg
Contact area = 1.5 x 1.0 = 1.5 m2
From Eq. 28.46, 00" .. vc:;A7iii
4Ol't .. ve" x 1.5/2770
or ell .. 29.16 x lcfN/m 2 .. 29.16 )( 103 1eN/ m)
From Eq. 28.47, maximum amplitude
F. 1000
z,.,., - moo; (1 _ Y') - 2770 x (40 x)' [1 - (15120)']
(0" .. V 25000
(30 x 10 /9.81)
~ 1Ii .. 90.42 rad/s
T .. Tn .. 0.069 second
PROBLEMS
A. Numerical
28.1. [)ctermine the natural frequenc.;y of n nmchine foundation having a base area 2 m x 2 m and a mass of 10 Mg,
assum ing thai the soi l mass participating in the vibration is (a) negligible (b) 20% of the mass.
1hke C u '" 104kNlm2. [Ans. 17.43 cps, 15.92 cps]
28.2. Resonance occurs at a frequency of 20 cps in the vertical vibration of a test block (1m )( 1 m )( 1 m). Calculate
the coefficient of clastic uniform compression (Cu). The mass of the oscillator is 50 kg.
4 3
[Ans.. 3.87 x 10 kN/m ]
23.3. In Problem 28.2, if the force produced by the oscillator at 10 <lIS was 1000 kN, compute the maximum
amplitude in the vertical direction at 10 cJls.
2
[Ans. 3.4 x 10- mm]
23.4. The foundation for a gus engine with a vertical cylinder and vertically oscillating parIS has the following data.
Total rn::lSS of engine = 5 Mg
Speed of rotation = 300 r.p.m.
Mass of bloclc ::20 Mg
Mass of participating soi l = 25 Mg
4
Spring stiffness :: 60 X 10 ltN/m
Determine !he naturnl frequency and maximum amplilllde. l11ke D .. 0.1. 100 unbalanced verticil force is 12 kN.
[Ails. 17.43 cps; 0.022 mm]
B. Descriptive Type
28.5. Explain the following terms:
Naturnl frequency; period; resonnnce; magnification.
28.6. Discuss the use of single-degree.frccdom sySlcm in thc analysis of machine foundations. Wh!lt are its
limillltions?
28.1. Describe the methods for the determination of the mass, spring constant, damping factor and the mass of
participating soil.
28.8. Briefly explain the I3arknn method of machine foundation design.
28.9. What is meant by vibration isolation? How is it done ?
28.10. Discuss criteria ror the design of foundation in the follOWing cnses.
(a) Free vibration without damping.
(b) Free vibration with damping.
(C) Focced vibration without damping.
(d) Forced vibration with damping.
of heavy vehicles. 'lbc pavement surface should be even along the longitudinal profile to have least rolling
resistance so thai fast, heavy vehicles c:m move safely and cornforwbly. Unevenness of the surface causes
vertical oscillations and thus increases wear and lear and the fuel oonsurnption ~r vehiclcs. 1t ::'~.:~:) nckls \0 the
discomfort and fatigue to the passengers of fast moving vehicles.
'fbe pavement carries the wheel loads and distributes it over a wide area on the subgradc. Conscqucnlly,
the stresses transferred \0 the subgrndc are considerably smaller than the contact pressure. The distribution of
the lond depends upon the thickness nnd the characteristics of the material used in the pavement. A pavement
lnyer that distributes the wheel lood through the largest area per unit thickness of the layer is the most
efficient.
The pavemcnt laycrs .should not be ovcr-stressed. Evcn for a wcll- dcsigned pavement, there would be a
small, temporary deformmion when loads pass over it. These deformations must be kept within the
permissible limits. If the pavement is not properly designed, rtpc.'lted applications of loa~ may cause
excessive deformations, compaction and consolidation of the subgrade and even failure of the whole
pnvement. .
The pavement may bc constructed over an embankment or in a CUlling. Tbe pavement should be
constructed above the maximum level of the ground water table to keep it dry. Moisture varimion and frost
action are the main causes of deterioration of the subgrade. On the other hand, when the water content is
decreased, shrinkage crackS develop, which cause differential movement in rigid p3vements and cracks in
flexible pavements. The pavemenr.s should be provided wilh a suitable drainge system.
In case of rigid pavemenr.s. the temperature ~md shrinkage stresses should be properly controlled.
In case of flexible pavements, there should be a good bond between the individual p.1niclcs of tbe
materials used and also between the surfacing and the base to check stripping or breaking up of the
pavement.
29.3. FUNCTIONS OF DIFFERENT COMI)ONENTS OF A PAVEM"ENT
Different components of a pavement have the foUowing characteristics and functions.
(1) Subgrade. The subgrndc is a laycr of n:'ltuml soil prepared to receive the layers of the pavement. The
subgrade should be strong enough to take up the stresscs imposed due to loads without shear failure Of
excessive deformations. It is the general practice to compact mIeast ~op 50 em layer of the subgrade under
controlled conditions of optimum water contC£lt at the maximum dry d~nsity (see chapter l4).
It is essential to evaluate the strength properties of the subgradc required. As the loods are ultimatcly
received by the subgrade. if it is weak. it wiU fail. The soil is gcnerally treated to inaease its strength and ID
improve its properties.
(2) Sub-base and Base Courses. 'Ibcsc courses provide a medium to spread the wheel loads to tbe
subgrade. Tbe courses usuaUy consist of broken stones, bricks or aggregates. Boulder stones, bricks on edges
and stabilised soils arc also used for sub-bases. However it is preferable to use small size graded aggregatcs
bcc..'luSC large stones and bricks have a tendency to penetrate the wet soil and cause undulation and
unevenness in the pavement. As the stresses in a sub-base arc much lower than those in the bast; the material
used is inferior to thn! in the base. The sub-base is also known as soling.
The base and sub-base in a flexible pavement improve the lood- supporting capacity of the subgrade by
distributing the load over 8 large area. In a rigid pavement, the base course helps in preventing pumping OUI
of the soil from below. ·lbcse also protect the subgmde against frost action.
(3) Surface Course. The purpose of the surface course, also known as a wearing murse, is to give a
smooth riding surface and to resist pressure exerted by wheels. 'The surface murse also provides a water·tighl
barrier against the infiltration of surface water.
In flexible pavements, a surface course usually consists of a bituminous surfaCing. In rigid pavements, the
cement concrete may act us a base course as well as a surful-c course. .
There are various types of surface tre..1tments. depending upon the availability of materials, and plants and
the magnitude of the load.
PAVEMENT DESIGN 775
The test consists of causing the plunger to penetrate the specimen at the rate of 1.25 mm per minute. The
loads required for a penetration of 2.5 mm aod 5.0 mm are recorded by a proving ring attached to the
plunger. The load is expressed as a percentage of the standard load at tbe respective deformation level, and
is known as the CBR value. Standard load values are for crushed stone and are given in Table 29.1. The CBR
value is determined corresponding to both 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm penetration, and the greater value is used for
the design of flexible pavement.
The load-penetration rurve is drawn as silOwn in Fig. 29.3. The load corresponding to 2.5 mm and 5.0
mm penetratioo values are taken from the plOI curve (1), Hod the value of CBR detennined using Eq. 29.1.
•. of----I--+-~...,,:::< '-+--f----1
6.0+---_+~L-.-+--L--_+=,,~+------j
.~"'~
;~+lS.------"'1_,1'.;;-----""'7.J,.'--*"."o- ---,!I1<.'-----;!ls.Q
LCorretl~d zero Penetration (mm) ----..
Fig. 29.3.
Generally. the CBR for 2.5 mm pene.tration is high. However, if the eBR for 5.0 mm penetration is greater
than that for 2.5 mm penetration, the test is repeated. If tbe results are unchanged, the value for 5.0 mm
penetration is used for defining CBR value.
In some tests. there is an upward concavity of the load- penetration rurve. This may be due to the
following reasons. ..
(I) The plunger surface does not rome in full rontact with the top of specimen.
(i!) The top layer of the soil is very soft.
In the case of the initial upward concavity, the corrected zero is obtained by drawing a tangent to the
curve at the point of the greatest curvature, as shown [or curve-2 in Fig. 293. The points corresponding to
2.5 mm and 5.0 mm penetration are measured from the corrected zero.
To simulate worst conditions in the field, the soil specimen is kept submerged io waler for about 4 days
before testing. If the test is to be conducted on an unsoaked specimen, the moulding water content should be
equal to the equilibrium water content which the soil is likely to attain after tbe construction of the pavement.
To simulate the effect of overlying materials, the specimen is covered with surcharge mass in the test.
PAVEMENT DESIGN 777
The minimum surcharge mass for the tests in the mould is specified if; 45 kg. TIle annular surcharge mass
of 147 mm diameter are used for this purpose.
[See O1apter 30 (Sect. 30.19) foc laboratory experiment1.
29.6. DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENTs
A flexible pavement consists of a number of !aym in whidt the stress is transmitted by point-ta-point
contact. TIle maximum intensity of stress occurs in the top layer of the pavement. 1berefore, the superior
materials are used in the top layer.
There is no perfect rational method for the design of flexible pavements. The design methods can be
classified broodly as empirical or semi-empirical.
1. Empbicaf methods
(a) Group index method. (b) California Bearing Ratio Method, (c) California R·value Methcxl, (d)
McLeod Method.
2. Semi empirical methods
(a) Triaxial test Method, (b) Bunnisler Method.
All these methods are discussed briefly in the following sections.
29.7. GRQUl' INDEX ME'TIIOD
The group index (Gl) is a parameter used in the classification of soils by AASHTO system (Chapter 5).
The group index is used in the grading of soils. The higher the value of the group index, the poorer is the
subgrade.
In tbe group index method (Steel, 1945), the thickness of the base and surfacing is related to the volume
of the traffic. Depending up:>O the number of vehicles, the traffic volume is divided into 3 categories.
Ughl volume : Less than 50 vehicles/day
Medium volume : 50 to 300 yehicles/day
Heavy volume : over 300 vehicles/day
To determine the thickness of the pavement by this method, the group index and the t:nticipated traffic
volumes are frond. The appropriate design curve (8. C or D) is used according 10 the traffic volume (Fig.
29.4) and the total thickness of the pavement (surfacing, base and sub base) is detennined. Curve A gives the
thickness of the sub-base required. Curve E gives the additional base thit;irncss which may be substituted for
sub-base thickness of curve A.
The method is essentially empirical, wbich assumes that the soil with identical group indexes possess
EXCElLENT
(A.l_a) ~-;sfo--;tIOO;;-';'~SO"-;2~OO;"-';2S,",O--+'JO;;;O""'f..so;;-;,~oo;-;!,,"o""s;i,;o;:-o"'S~SO,...,J60'O
THICI(N6S (mm) - - - . . .
Fig. 29.4.
778 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
icientjcal strength after rom pad ion in the field. The method assumes that the subgrade would be compacted
to a density not less than 95% of the maximum Proctor dcmily. For base and sub-base materials. the density
should not be less than 100% of the maximum Proctor density. 1be water table should be at least 1 m below
the surface.
29.8. CRR ME11IOD
In this method, the CBn values are used to determine the total thickness of the flexible pavement and tbe
thickness of various layers. Fig. 29.5 give the design curves for different wheel loads and traffic conditions.
lbe design curves are based on the data CBR ,0/0 ) - "
collected on a large number of pavements
performed satisfactorily. The curves , ,
which
give the required thickness of construction
3 4 '567890 10 :JO 40
""0 '"
above a material of a certain CBR value. As
it is evident, ibe required thickness of 100 II III
-;; ~
construction above a material decreases as
the CDR value increases. Ll9h1tratfic~
1
,L-II
~avy trattlc
appropriate curve. Likewise, the CBR value ('5S.!"] kN \';'heet load)
~~Ie:ncs~~-~~ckn=~i~n'l~= ov~~ ~ 50
+
that material. Obviously, the thickness of
the sub-base is equal to the total thickness
above the subgrade minus the thickness of 600
V;
cooslructioo above the sub-base Li kcwise,
the thickness of tbe base is determined.
The CBR method is based on strength 700
/
parametec of the material and is, therefore. .
more rational than the group index method. FIg. 29.S.
The basic assumption in the method is that a layer of pavement is of superior quality than the Jayer below it.
The shortcoming of the methexl is that it gives the same total thickness above a material irrespective of the
quality of the overlying layers.
mc : 37-1970 gives some important recommendations for the determination of CBR value and its use.
29.9. CALIFORNIA RESISTANCE VALDE METHOD
The method uses the California Resistance value, called the R-value.
The R-value is detennined by placing the specimen in tbe slabilomcter and by applying the lateral and
vertical pressures as specified. The R-vaJue is given by
R _ 100 _ 100
... (29.2)
(2.5/D,)(p"/p, - 1) + 1
where Pv "" vcnical pressure applied (1120 kN/m2), Pit = hori7..ontal pressure transmitted, ~ :: displaremenl of
stabilomeler fluid required to increase the horizontal pressure from 35 kN/m 2 10 700 kN/ml, measured in
numbec of revolutions of the calibrated pump handle.
Hvccm and Carmany (1948) gave the following expression for the total thickness of the pavement
779
PAVEMENT DESIGN
CBR(·'.)~
KT(~~-
1- R) ... (29.3)
0
, , '6 , ~ 20 '0 50 . , , "
where I thickness (em). K =
:=
~V~ ~
resistance. value, C = cohcsiometcr
value, determined from the
cohesiomctcr test. a
~
The traffic index T has been
empirically provi~cd to estimate the V
traffic volume, as I 00 3 Iv
1/ 1/1/'1'<./ V
~
T _ 1.35 (EWlf" ... (29.4) .§
1;:
where EM. = equivalent wheel load. ~ 4 Trorfic classification
~
~ V /VV
excrrding 30kN laden weight
McLeod gave the following
formula Cor the thickness.
1/ V
A 0-15
+--
~ [III
" SO<)
1- Klog,,(PIS) ... (29.5) B 15_1,5
1i.
where I := thickness of grovel base ~ 6
0"J/ C 1,5_1'50
+--
,'1 rl
(an), P = gross wheel load (kN), S
0 ISO _1,50
:= total subgradc support (kN), K =
base course constant (varying 1050 _ 1500
70 E
+--
non-linearly from 75 far bearing
plate of diameter of 12.5 em to 2ID
for diameter of 125 em) 80 a
11/ F
0
ISOO
Abow
'SOO
1,500
+--
The repetitive plate bearing tests
are conducted using plates of
so
(Rrcommrnd by IRC)
different sizes.
The subgmde support (.5) is Fig. 29.6.
determined from tbe unit support measured or computed [or 30 an diameter plate at 0.5 em deflection and
len repetiti~. Fig. 29.7 can be used for dctennining the ratio (7) of the unit sub-grade support (SV for the
Fia·29.7.
700 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEBRINO
design wheel diameter to 5, that on 30 em diameter plate. The OlNes for different deflections between 0.25
em and 1.75 em are shown. Thus
S2" rS, ... (29.6)
TIle design subgrade support S is obtained by multiplying the value of S2 by the contact area of the
wheel. Thus
5 .. 52 x a ... (29.7)
where a = contact area of the wheel (em,.
29.U. TRIAXIAL TEST METDOD
The lriaxial rompression test is conducted on a soil specimen under a lateral pressure of 140 kN/m'2 and
the value of tbe mOdulus of elasticity is determined from the stress-strain curve.
The thickness of the pavement in em am be dctennined using the formula given by the Kansas Highway
DeptL
t
..V/(~)' _ '
21tEtJ. a
where P = wheel load (kN), E = modulus of elasticity (kN/cm1. oX == traffic coefficient (0.5 to 2.0), y •
= = =
saturation coefficient ( 0.5 to 1.0). a area of oontac.1 (cm1, 6 = design deflection ( 0.25 em).
29.12. BURMISTER'S METIIOD
Burmister developed a method considering the pavement as a layered system. 1bc Burmister theory is
based on the following assumptions.
(1) The material in each layer is homogeneous, isotropic and elastic.
(2) The surface layer is infinite in the borizontal direction and finite in the vertical direction. The
underlying layer is infinite in both direaions.
(3) The layers are in continuous contact.
(4) The top layer is free of shearing stresses and normal stresses outside the loaded area.
The displacement equation given by Bunnister can be written as, assuming lA, - lAp - 0.50,
= = = =
where p uniform pressure, a radius of plate, PI deflection factor, and E, modulus of the soiL
Fig. 29.8 gives the values of the deflection factor Fl' II depends upon the ratio of the modulus of the
subgrade (E,) and the modulus of pavement layer Ep- 1bc ratio (h/a) is equal to the thidalcss of the ~ layer
divided by the radius of the load. 11 may be noted that for a single layer, h = 0 and E,IEp = 1.0, and hence
F2 = 1.0 and the solution reduces to Boussinesq's settlement equation.
The design procedure can be summarised as under.
(1) Dctennine E, by conducting a plate bearing lest on a 30 em diameter plate over the subgrade.
E, _ 1.1: po ...(29.11)
0
.S
E!'IEp . 1/2
o. 6
."'- r---.
o. ,
~ ~ ---
1 ,~,\ ,,,,,- ~ I'-.........----- r---- ~
~
- t--r-
.!LlQ.
., ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~
t-- r--
1/100
11100
0.0
M l
o 10
"'-
"'- "-...
i'-....
I----.~
''<00
I'-..... ~~
20
I/SOO
3.0
-- r--...
--- ----
'.0
F::::
' .0
-
r --
6.0
.1J---
Fig. 29.8.
(4) Detennine the oontad radius of the design load, as
... (29.13)
where k = modulus of subgrode reaction (kN/an~, p = pressure (kN/cm\ and !J. = deformation (an)
[Note. In this chapter, k. is also used for k).
The test sct-up for the determination of the coefficient subgrade reaction is similar to that in a plate load
test (chapter 23). It conc>ists of a loading frome which has a hydraulic jack, a proving ring and a react.ioo
beam (Fig. 29.9). 1be dial gauges are used for tbe measurement of the settlement of the plate. These gauges
rest on a separate datum frame. The standard size of the plate is 75 an diameter.
1be test site is levelled and the plate is properly seated 00 the prepared surface. The stiffening plates of
782 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
!1
settlement is about 0.175 an. g' ~
A graph is plotted between the mean beariog
pressure (P) aod the settlement (Fig. 29.10). The pressure =-
corresponding to a settlement of 0.125 em is read from t:. :O.12Scm
the plot, and the value of k is dClcnnincd as
0·'
k - O.i25 leN/an
l
... (29.16) tcm)~
Fig. 29.10.
k - P O~l: kN/ml ... [29.16(a)J
To allow for the efJcct of possible future sofiening of subgrade, the vahle of k obtained is corrected for
full saturation. l\vo specimens are prepared for the consolidation lest, one without soaking and the other
fully soaked. TIle consolidation tests are cooducted and the pressures required for a deformation of 0.125 em
are detennined for the two specimens. The oorrected modulus of subgrade reaction is given by
upon the stiffness of tbe subgrnde and !he Oexura1 strength of the slab. Thus the pressure-deformation
characteristics of a rigid pavement depend upon the relative stiffness of the slab and the subgrade.
Westergaard defined the radius of relative sillIness as
I
- [
Eh.J
12(1 - ~')k
1" ... (29.18)
where I = radius of relative stiffness (an). E = modulus of elasticity of cement concrete (kN/em1. ~ =
Poisson's ratio of cement ooncrete, h = slab thickness (em), k "" modulus of subgrade reaction (kN/em\
As the pavement slab bas a finite length and width, the intensity of maximum slress induced due 10 a
wheel load depcD(1s upon the location of the load. The following three locations are critical.
(1) Interior loading. When the load is applied in the interior of the slab at any point away from all
edges.
(2) Edge loading. When the load is applied on an edge of the slab at any point away from a comer.
(3) Corner loading. When the centre of the load is located on the bisector of the comer angle formed
by two intersecting edges of the slab, and the loaded area is at the comer touching the edges.
Wcstergaard gave the following equations for the critical stresses based on the assumption thal the
cement oona-ete slab is homogeneous arxl has uniform clastic properties. It is further assumed thaI the vertical
subg.:adc reaction is proportional to the deflection.
where P wheel lood (kN), h ::a: slab thickness (an), I ::: radius of effective stiffness (em), a :: radius of wheel
load distribution (em), b = equivalent radius of resisting action (an).
The valueofb is given by b_V1.6a2 +h 2 _O.675h for a< 1.724h .. .[29.22(a)J
and b_a fora<t1.724h ... (29.22(b)J
1bc above equations require trial and error solution if the slab thickness h is to be found for the given
allowable values of stresses. Bradbury gave a simplified solution in the form of charts.
Westergaard's equations as given above have been modified by various invesligatlm. 1he stresses at the
edge and the corner are generally found to be aitical for the design of rigid pavements. IRC recommends the
following equation for the determination of stresses al the edges and the comers.
For edge loading (feller and Sutherland, 1943)
~ ~°hr-+-t-t~~--~r-+-+-+-+-~
LL~~~~~~L-+"~~-L~~8
SlOb thleknu5 (em) - - .
Slob thidness (cm)-----.
Fig. 29.11. Fig. 29.12.
where a coefficient of linear expansion (10 )( 10-6 per 0q and C" and C, are warping stress coefficients (Fig.
29.13).
2. Frictional stresses. If the temperature of the concrete remains constant for a long time. tbe
temperntures of the top surface and the bottom surface become equal. At that stage, there is a uniform
lengthening 01 shortening of tbe slab and there is no warping. As the slab is in contact with tbe subgrade. tbe
slab movements are restrained due to the friction between the bottom surface of the pavemenr: and tbe
subgrade.
The frictional stresses are given by
y,Lf
or - 2 x 104 ... (29.28)
where or = frictional stress (kN/an~. L = length of the slab (m). Yc = unit weight of concrete (kN/cm\ f =
coefficient of subgrade restraint (... 15).
PAVEMENT D,ESlGN 785
.2
.0 '--l-
V
0.8
1 /
:;. 0•
"
.2
I
V
/
II
to I---L~ --------i
-
0
0
~
2 4 G 8 10
~ ( or~)_
" 4
Fig. 29,13.
To reduce temperature stresses, expansion jOints, controction joints and warping joins are provided in the
pavement.
29.16. COMBINED STRESSES IN lUGID PAVEMENTS
For proper design of a rigid pavement, it is necessary to consider the most critical combinations of the
stresses due to loads and te!ppcrature stresses.
(1) During summer, the critical combination for interior and edge regions occurs during mid-day when
the slab tends to warp downward.
Maximum stress at the bottom fibre:: load stress + warping stress - frictional stress . ,.(29.29)
(2) However, during winter. the critical combination for the above regions occurs when the slab contracts
and the slab warps downward during mid-day.
Maximum stress at the bottom fibre = load stress + warping stress + frictional stres,s ... (29.30)
Generally, Eq. 29.29 governs, m the differential temperatures are more in summer than in winter.
(3) For comer regions. the most critical combination occurs during the midnight when the slab warps
upward.
Maximum stress at top fibre = load stress + warping stress .. .(2931)
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
Dlustrative Example 29.1. A sall/ple of subgrode has a group index of 8. Design the pavement for the
anticipated traffic volume of over 300 commerciaJ vehicles per day.
Solution. As the traffic is heavy, curve D of Fig. 29.4 is applimble.
Total thickness = 500 mm
From Curve A, the thickness of sub-hase = 200 mm
lbcrefore, thickness of base and surracing :::: 500 - 200 = 300 mm .
Illustrative Example 29.2. The CBR value of subgrade is 10%. Determine the total thickness of the
pavement using IRC method. There are more than 4500 vehicles per day.
186 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
29.4. Determine the warping stresses for a concrete pavement of thickness 20 cm with tran sverse joints :11 15 m
2
spacing and longiludimll joints at 3.5 m spacing. For concrete. f = 3 x 10~ kN/cm ,/J = 0.15. Take the modulus
3
of subgrade reaction as 30 N/cm . Assume n:mpcrnture differential for day co nditions to be l oe per cm of slab
thickne ss and the cQt:fficient of lincOlr expansion of concrete as 10 x 10- 6 per °C. The radius of load area is
15cm
Some of the more commonLy conducted laboratory experiments are described below.
30.1. Experiment No. 1. To detennlne the water-content or 8 soli sample by oven-drylng method.
1bcory. The water rooteol (w) of a soil sample is equal to the m~ of water divided by the mass of solids,
w _ Ml - M) x 100
M)-MI
where M J = mass of empty container, with lid,
M2 "" mass DC the container with wet soil and lid,
M3 = mass of the container with dry soil and lid.
Equipment. (1) Thermostatically oontrolled oven, maintained al a temperature of llO° :!: SoC; (2)
Weighing balance, with accuracy of 0.04% of the mass of the soil taken; (3) Desiccator, with any suitable
desiccating agent; (4) Airtight container made of oon-cocrodible material. with lid; (5) Tongs.
Soil Specimen. The soil specimen should be representative of the soil mass. The quantity of the specimen
taken would depend upon the gradation and the maximum size of particles. For more than 00% of the
particles passing 425 fA IS sieve, the minimum quantity is 25 g.
Procedure: (1) Clean the container, dry it and weight it with lid (M J).
(2) Take the required quanlily of the wet specimen in the oontainer and close it with lid. Take the mass (Mti.
(3) Place the container, with its lid removed, in the oven till its mass becomes constant (nonnally for 24
hours).
(4) When the soil has dried, remove the container from the oven, using longs.
Replace the lid on the container. Cool it in a desiccator.
Data Sheet for Water content by Oven-drying Method
Determination No.
S.No. ObservaliotlS mid calculalions
Obsen-utions
(I) Container No. 401 402 403
(2) Mass of empty amtainer (MI) 20.12 g
(3) Mass of container + soil (M2) 44.32 g
(4) Mass of container + dry soil (MJ) 41.18 g
Calculations
(5) Mass of waler,M", .. M2 - MJ 3.14g
(6) Mass of solids., M~ .. MJ - MI 21.06 g
(7) Water content, W .. (5)/(6) )( 100 14.91
ResulL 1be water content of the sample = 14.91%.
789
(5) Fmd the mass (M) of the container with lid and dry soil sample.
Observations and calculations. Observations and calculations are shown in the data sheet.
30.2 Experiment No. 2. To detennlne the water content of II soil sample by pycnometer method.
Theory. A pyatometer is a glass jar of about 1 litre capacity, fitted with a brass conical cap by means
of a screw-type rover. TIle cap has a small hole of about 6 mm diameter at its apex.
The water cootent (w) of the sample is obtained as
G.. M2-MI
(M, - M I ) - (M, - M.)
where MI = mass of empty boule;
M2 = mass of the bottle and dry soil;
M3 = mass of boUle, soil and water;
M. = mass of bottle ftlled with wale~ only.
Equipment. (1) 50 mt density bottle with stopper; (2) Oven (105 0 to 110°C); (3) Constant temperature
water bath (2rC); (4) Vaalum desiccator; (5) Vacuwn pump; (6) Weighing balance, aa:uracy 0.001 g; (1)
Spatula.
Procedure.
(1) Wash the density bottle and dry it in an oven at 105°C to 110"C. Cool it in the desiccator.
(2) Weigh the bottle, with stopper, to the nearest 0.001 g (M I ).
(3) Thke 5 to 10 g of the oven·drled soil sample and transfer it to the density bottle.
Weigh the bottle with the stopper and the dry sample (M,).
(4) Add de-aired distilled water to the density bottle just enough to cover the soil. Shake gently to mix
soil and water.
(5) Place the bottle containing the soil and water, after removing the stopper, in tbe vacuum desiccator.
(6) Evacuate the desiccator gradually by operating tbe vacuum pump. Reduce the pressure to about 20
mm of mercury. Keep the bottle in the desiccator for at least I hour or until no further movement of air is
notilXd.
(7) Release the vacuum and remove the lid of the desiccator.
Stir the soil in the boUle carefully with a spatula. Before removing the spatula from the boUle, the
particles of soil adhering to it should be washed off with a few drops of air-free water.
Replace the lid of the desiccator and again apply vacuum.
Repeat the procedure until no more air is evolved from the specimen.
[Note. In case a varuum desiccator is not available, the entrapped air can be removed by beating the density
bottle on a water bath or a sand bath.]
(8) Remove the bollie from tbe desiccator. Add air-free water until the boule is full. Insert the stopper.
(9) Immerse the bottie upto the neck in a constant-temperature bath for approximately I hour or until it
bas attained the coostant temperature.
If there is an apparent d~ in the volume of the liquid in the bottle, remove the stopper and add
more water to the bottle and replace the stopper. Again place the bottle in the water bath. Allow sufficient
lime to ensure that the boule and its content altain the constant temperature.
(to) Take out the bottle from the water bath. Wipe it clean and dry it from outside.
Fill the capillary in the stopper with drops of distilled ·water, if necessary.
(11) Detennine the mass of the bottle and its contents (M~.
(12) Empty the bottle and clean it thoroughly. Fill it with distilled water. Insert the stopper.
(13) Immerse the bottle in the constant-temperature bath for I hour or until it has attained the oonstant
temperature of the bath.
If there is an apparent decrease in the volume of the liquid, remove the stopper and add more water.
Again keep it in the water bath.
(14) Thke out the bottle from the water bath. Wipe it dry and take the mass (M4 ).
Observations
1. Density Bottle No. 301 302 30J
2. Mass of emply density baltle (MI) 41.302 g
3. Ma5s of boltle dry soil (M]) 54.103 g
4. Mass of bottle, soil and water (Ml) 99.002 g
5. Mass of baltic filled with water (M4) 91.112 g
Calculations
6. M2-MI 12.801 g
7. 7.970 g
8. 2.65
Observaliolls
I. Pycnometer No. 401 402 403
2. Room tempcnllute U"C
3. Mnss of empty phcnometcr (M) 580 g
4. Mass of pycnometer and dry soil (M2) 800g
5. Mass or pycnometer, soil and water (M) 1707 g
6. Mass or pycnometer and water (M4) 1570 g
Caicu/miOlls
7. /112 - MI 220 g
8. M) - M, 137&
9. G - (7/~\8) 2.65
p-~-~
where M = mass of the wet soil in the cutter;
V :: internal volume of the cutter; w = water content.
Equipment (I) Cylindrical core cutter, 100 mm internal diameter and 130 mm long; (2) Steel rammer,
mass 9 kg. overall length, with the foot and staff about 900 mm; (3) Steel dolley, 25 mm high and 100 mm
internal diameter, (4) Weighing balance, accuracy I g; (5) Palette knife; (6) Straight edge, steel rule, etc.
Procedure. (1) Determine the inlemul diameter and height of the core cutter to the Dearest 0.25 mm.
(2) Determine the mass (M,) of the cutter to the nearest gram.
Data Sheet for Dry Density by Core Cutter Method
Determination No.
S.NO. ObservaJiollS olld calculatiolls
Observatiolls
l. Core cutter No. 501 502 503
2. Intemaldiameter 100 mm
3. Internal height 129.75 mm
4. Mass of empty corecuner (MI) 1130 g
5. Mass of core Cllilcr with soils (M2) 3120 g
Calculatiolls
6. Mnssofwctsoil,M _ M2 - MI 1990 g
7. Volume of cutter, V 1019.05 ml
Water content (determined as in Experiment 30-1).
8. 17.75 %
"y.
9. DrYdensitY=~ 1.66 gm/m1
p,.~
where M "" mass of the excavated soil; V =volume of the hole; and w =water content.
Equipment. (1) Sand-pouring cylinder; (2) Calibrating container, 100 mm diameter and 150 mm height;
(3) Soil cutting and excavating tools, such as a scraper tool, bent spoon; (4) Glass plate, 450 mm square. 9
mm thick; (5) Metal container to collect excavated soil; (6) Melaltray, 300 mm square and 40 mm deep with
a hole of 100 mm in diameter aI tbe centre; (7) Weighing balance; (8) Moisture content cans; (9) Oven; (10)
Desiccator.
Clean, uniform sand passing I mm IS sieve aDd retained on 600 micron IS sieve in sufficient quantity.
Part-I Calibration
Procedure (1) Determine the internal volume of the calibrating container by filling it with water and
determining the mass of water required. The mass of water in grams is approximately equal to the volume in
millilitres. The volume may also be determined from the measured dimensions of the container.
(2) Fill the sand-pouring cylinder with sand, within about 10 mm of its top. Determine the mass of the
cylinder (M J) to the nearest gram.
(3) Place the sand-pouring cylinder vertically on the calibrating conlainer.
Open the shutter to allow the sand run out from the cylinder into the calibrating container till it fills the
cooe oC the cylinder and the calibrating container. When there is no further movement of the sand in the
cylinder, close the shutter.
(4) un the pouring cylinder from the calibrating conlainer and weigh it to the nearest gram (M).
(5) Again fill the pouring cylinder with sand, within 10 mm of its top.
(6) Open the shutter and aUow the sand to run out of the cylinder. When the volume of the sand let out
is equal to the volume of {he calibrating rontainer, close the shutter.
(7) Place the cylinder over a plane surface, such as a glass plate. Open the shutter. The sand fills the oone
of the cylinder. Qose the shutter when no further movement of sand takes place.
(8) Remove the cylinder. CoUed the sand left on the glass plate.
Determine the mass of sand (Mi) that had filled the cone by weighing lbe collected sand.
(9) Determine the dry density of sand, as-sbO'Nn in the data sheet, part-I.
794 roiL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Obserl'Olion.s
1- \-blume of calibrating cone (V<) 980 mI
2. Mass of pouring cylinder (Mt), filled with sand 11040 g
Mass of puring cylinder after pouring sand into
3. 9120 g
the calibrating container and cone (M)
4. Mass of sand in lhc cone (M2) 450 g
Calculations
5. Mass of sand in the calibrating comBiner
M, _ (2) - (3) - (4) 1470 g
6. Dry density of sand
PI - M</Vc 15 g/ml
ObselWlions
1- Mass of excavated soil (M) 2310 g
2. Mass of pouring cylinder (M.). filled with sand 11040 g
3. Mass of pouring cyliDder after pouring inlO the
8840 g
hole and cone (M.)
CalcuJaJlons
4. Massofsond in the hoIeM, - MI - M. - M2 1750 g
5. \-blume of sand in the hole V _ M,/ p, 1166.67 mI
6. Bulk density, p _ M/V 1.98 glml
7. Water contenl. detennined as In experiment
30-1 (w), say, 15%
30.1. Experiment No. 7. To determine the dry density of a soU sample by water- displacement method.
Theory. A soil specimen of regular shape is coaled with paraifm wax to make it impervious to water.
The total volume (V,) of the waxed specimen is found by determining the volume of water displaced by tbe
specimen. The volume of the specimen (\I) Is 'given by
v_ 11,- (M,-M)
p,
where M, '" mass of waxed specimen; M '" mass of the specimen without wax; Pp '" density of paraffin.
Determination No.
S.No. Observationr and calculations
ObservatjOlIS
1. Mass of specimen (M) 650 g
2. Mass of waxed specimen (M,l 681 g
\blume of waxed specimen by waler.<Jisplacemenl
3. (V,) 362g
Calculatiolls
4. Mnssofwax .. M1-M 31 g
S. \blume of wax (Vp) .. (M, - M)/ pp 34.06 mI
6. \b[ume of specimen (\I) .. V, - Vp 327.06 mt
7. Wnler-O)nlenl, as in experiment 30-1, (w) 13%
30.8. Experiment No. 8. To detennlne lhe particle slu distribution of a soU by sieving.
Theory. The soil is sieved through a set of sieves. The material retained on different sieves is determined.
lbe percentage of material retained on any sieve is given by
PII _ ~)( 100
Result. Percentage finer given in the last column can be used to plot the particle s ize distribution curve
with particle size as abscissa on log scale and the percentage fmer as ordinate.
[Note. IT the fine fradion contains an appreciable amount of clay particles, the wet sieve analys is is requinxl.
Alternatively, the following method may be used.
Before conducting step (1), add the water containing sodium hexa- meta phosphate at the rate of 2 g per
titre of water to the soil fraction. Stir the mix thoroughly and leave for soaking. Wash the soaked specimen
on a 75.-. IS sieve until the water passing the sieve is clear. Thke the fraction retained on the s ieve and dry it
in an oven. Sieve the oven dried soil through the nest of sieves as discussed in step (7). Perfonn further steps,
as before.
Obviously, the mass of material which would have been retained on pan is equal to the original mass of
the soil before washing minus the dry mass of the soil retained on 75J! IS sieve after washing.]
30.9. Experiment No. 9. To detennlne the particle size distribution by the hydrometer method.
Theor-y. Hydrometer method is used to determine the particle size distnbution of fine-grained soils
passing 75J! sieve. 1be hydrometer measures the specific gravity of the soil suspension at the centre of ilS
bulb. The specific gravity depends upon the mass of solids present, which, in lum, depends on the particle
size. The particle size (D) is given by
D - MViiJi
where M = [ g (Go~ YJ ,.. visoosity of water (POise), G ., specific gravity of SOlids; p ... =
density of water (gm/ml); g = 981 cm/sl:.cl, He = effective depth (em); t = time in minutes at which
ot>scrvation is taken, reckoned with respect 10 the beginning of sedimentatioo.
The percentage finer than tbe size D is given by
798 &>IL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
H·-lI+Hh-~)
[Note. The fador VHIA should not be ronsidered when the hydrometer is 001 taken out when taldng readings
after start of the sedimentation at 1/2, 1. 2 and 4 minutes].
(8) Draw a calibration OJrve between H~ and R~. Alternatively. prepare a table between Ho; and R~.
The curve may be used for finding the effective depth H~ corresponding to reading ~.
(13) For the detcnninalion of the compooitc correction (C). insert the hydrometer in the comparison
cylinder containing 100 ml of dispersing agent solution in 1000 mt of distilled water at the same temperature.
Take the reading corresponding 10 the lOp of meniscus. The negative of the reading is the composite
correction.
Data Sheet for Hydrometer- Test
Mass of dry soil (M,) = 50 gj Meniscus correction (C...) = +0.4
Specific gravity of solids (G) = 2.67
Observtllions Calculations
Elapsed Hydrometer Tempera- Composite Corrt:Cted lIeig/u Reading Factor Particle Per-
S.
time(,) keading correction Reading lIdcm) R = M ,iI< centage
No
(R.') (e) Rio" Rh' &' + C D:M filler
Viidi (N)
1. 1/2 minu. 21.80 22.0 -050 22.2 U.8 21.3 1.33 x 10- 0.065 mm 68.10
2. 1
3. 2
4.
5.
6. J5
7. 30
8. 1 h'
9. 2
10. 4
II. 8
12. 12
13. 24
Result. Particle size distribution cUlve can be plolted using the last two columns.
30.10. Experiment No. 10. To determine the liquid limit of a soil specimen.
11100ry. The liquid limit of II soil is the water cootent at which the soil behaves prnctically like II liquid. but
has n small shear strength. It flows to close the groove in just 25 blows in Casagrande's liquid limit device:
As it is difficult to get exactly 25 blows in a test, 3 La 4 tests are oonducted, and the number of blows
(N) required in each test is detennined. A semi·log plot is drawn between log N and the water content (w).
The liquid limit is the water content corresponding to N = 25, as obtained from the plot.
Equipment. (1) C4S3grnndc's liquid limit device; (2) Grooving tools of both Standard and ASTIvltype&i
(3) Oven; (4) Evaporating dish or glass sheet; (5) Spatula; (6) 425 11 IS sieve; (7) Weighing balance, accuracy
om g; (8) Wash boUle.
Procedure. (1) Adjust the drop of the cup of the liquid limit device by relea<;ing the two screws at the
top and by using the handle of the grooving tool or a gauge.
The drop should be exactly 1 em at the point of contact on the base. Tighten the screw after adjustmcnt.
(2) Takc about 120 g of the air-dried soil sample passing 425 "" IS sieve.
(3) Mix tbe sample thoroughly with distilled water in an evaporating dish or a glass plate to fonn a
unifonn paste. Mixing should be continued for about 15 to 30 minutcs, till a unifonn mix is obtained.
(4) Keep the mix under humid conditions for obtaining uniform moisture distribution for sufficient
period. For some fat ClaYS. this maturing lime may be uplo 24 hours.
(S) Take a portion of the matured paste and remix it thoroughly. Place it in the cup of the device by a
spatula and level it by a Sp.:1tula or a straight edge to have a maximum depth of the soil as 1 an at the point
of the maximum thickness.
lABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 801
Obsetvations
No. of blows (N) 15
2. water content can No. 101
3. Mass of empcy can (MI) 25.15 g
4. Mass of can + wet soil (M2) 36.93 g
5. Mass of can ... dry soil (M3) 33.81 g
Calculations
6. Mass of waler .. M2 - 1.13 3.12 g
7. Mass of dry soil .. M3 - Ml 8.66 g
Result. Draw a flow curve between log Nand w. Liquid limil (for N ::: 25) ::
30.11. Experiment No. 11. To detennine the plastic limit of a soli spedmen.
Theory. The plastic limit of a soil is the water content of the soil below which it ceases to be plastic. 11
begins to crumble when rolled into Ihrea~ of 3 mm diameter.
Equipment. (1) Porcelain evaporating dish, about 120 mm diameter or a flat glass plate, 450 mm square
and 10 mm thick; (2) Ground glass plate, about 200 mm x 150 mm; (3) Metallic rod, 3 mm dia. and 100 mm
long; (4) Oven; (5) Spalula or palette knife; (6) Moisture content can.
Procedure. (1) Take about 30 g of air-dried soil from a thoroughly mixed sample of the soil passing
425J.l sieve.
(2) Mix the soil with distilled water in an evaporating dish or on a glass plate to make it plastic enough
to shape into a small ball.
(3) L.eave the plastic soil mass for some time for maturing. For some fal clays, this period may be even
upto 24 hours.
(4) Take aboul 8 g of the plastic soil, and ~roU it with f1Oger.; on a glass plate. The rate of the rolling
8<" SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
should be about 80 [0 90 strokes per minute to fonn a thread of 3 mm diameter, counting one stroke when
the hand moves forward and backwaid to the staring poin!.
(5) If the diameter of the thread becomes less than 3 mm without cracks, it shows that the water content
is more than tbe plastic limit. Knead the soil to reduce the water content, and roll it again into thread.
Repeat the process of altemate rolling and kneading until the thread aumbles, and the soil can no longer
be rolled into thread.
[Note. If the crumbling occurs when the thread has a diameter slightly greater than 3 mm, it may be laken as
the plastic limit, provided the soil had been rolled into a thread of 3 mm diameter immediately before
kneading. Do not attempt to prodlJCC failure cxaclly at 3 mm diameter.}
(6) Collect the piccc::& of the crumbled soil thread in a moisture content oontaincf.
(7) Repeal the procedure at least twice more with fresh samples of plastic soil each time.
Data Sheet for PlasUc Umlt 'lbt
Determination No.
SNo. Obsen'aJiOIlS alia calculatiOlls
ObservaliOIiS
Moisture content container No. 101 102 103
2. Mass of empcy container (MJ) 24.12 g
3. Mass of container -t wet soil (M2 ) 30.28 g
4. Mass of conlaincr -t dry soil (M3) 29.12 g
Ca/cul(lfiollS
5. Mass of waler '" M2 - 1.13 1.16 g
6. Mass of dry soil '" M3 - Mt 5.00 g
where M J == inilial wet mass; VI == initial volume; M, == dry mass; V2 = volume afier drying.
Equipment. (1) Shrinkage dish, having a flat bottom, 45 mm diameter and 15 mm height. (2) 1\Vo large
evaporating dishes about 120 mm diameter. with a pour out and flat bottom; (3) One small mercury dish, 60
mm diameter; (4) 1\vo glass plates. one plain and one with prongs, 7S mm )( 75 mm )( 3 mm size, (5) Glass
cup, 50 mm diameter and 25 mm high; (6) IS sieve 425 ~ ; (7) Oven; (8) Desiccator; (9) Weighing balance.
accuracy 0.01 g; (10) Spatula; (11) Straight edge; (12) Mercury.
Procedure. (I) Thke a sample of mass about 100 g from a thoroughly mixed soil passing 425 ~ sieve.
(2) Thke about 30 g of the soil sample in a large evaporating dish. Mix it with distilled water to make a
creamy paste which can be readily worked without entrapping the air bubbles.
(3) ·fllke the shrinkage dish. CIc.1n it and detennine its mass.
(4) Fill mercury in the shrinkage dish. Remove the excess mercury by pressing the plain glass plate over
the lOp of the shrinkage dish. The plate should be flush with the top of the dish, and no air should be
entrapped.
(5) Transfer the mercury of the Shrinkage dish to a mercury weighing dish and delennine the mass of the
LADORXfORY EXPERIMENTS 803
mercury to an aocurncy of 0.1 g. The volume of the shrinlulge dish is equal to the mass of mercury in grams
divided by the specific grnvity of mercury (viz. 13.6).
(6) Coot the inside of the shrinkage disb with a Ihin layer of silicon grease or vaseline.
Place the soil specimen in the centre of the shrinkage dish, equal 10 about one-third the volume of the
Shrinkage dish.
Tap the shrinkage dish on a finn, cushioned swface and aUow lhe paste to flow to the edges.
(7) Add more soil paste, apprOlcimately equal to the first portion and lap the shrinkage dish as before,
unlil the soil is thoroughly oompacted.
Add more soil and oontinue the lapping till the shrinkage dish is completely filled, and excess soil paste
projects out about its roge.
Strik.e out the top surface of the ~e with a straight edge. Wipe off all soil adhering to the outside of
the shrink.age dish. Determine the mass of the wet soil (M1).
(8) Dry the soil in the shrinkage dish in air until the colour of the pat tums from dark to light. lben dry
the pat in the oven at 105° to 110°C to constant mass.
(9) Cool the dry pat in a ~iccator. Remove the dry pat from the desiccator aftcr cooling, and weigh the
shrinkage dish with the dry pat-io detcrmine the dry mass of the soil (M,).
(10) Place a glass cup in ~ large evaporating dish and fill it with mercury. Remove the excess mercury
by pressing the gla<>s plate with prongs firmly over the top of the cup. Wipe off any mercury adhering to the
outside of the cup.
Remoye the glass cup full of mercury and place il in another evaporating dish, taking care not to spill
any mercury from the gla<;S cup.
(II) Take out the dry pat of the soil from the shrinkage dish and immerse it in the glass cup full of
mercury. Thke care not to entrap air under the pat. Press the plate with prongs on the top of the cup ftrmly.
(12) Colled: the meroJry displaced by the dry pat in tbe evaporating dish, and transfer it to the mercury
weighing dish. Detennioe the mass of the mercury to an accuracy of 0.1 g. The volume of the dry pat (Vi) .
is equal to the mass of the mercury divided by the specific gravity of mercury.
(13) Repeat the test atleasl 3 times.
Data Sheet ror Shrinkage limit 'Jest
Deternu'nntion No.
$.No. ObserwlJions and colculaliDns
Observotions
I. Mass of empty mercury dish 74.2 g
2- Mass of mercry dish, with mercury equal 10
361.1g
volume of the shrinkage dish
3. Mass of mercury .. (2) - (1) 286.9 g
DeJerminaJionNo.
S.No. ObservoJions and caiculaJions
CQ/culations
Il.
Shrinkage limit, WI _ (MI-M,)-(Vl-
M,
Vi)pw) 20.5%
30.13. Experiment No. 13. To determine the permeability or a soli specimen by the constant-head
penneameter.
Theory. "Ibe coefficient of permeability is equal to the rate of flow of water through a unit
cross·sectional area under a unit hydraulic gradient. In the constanl head penncametcr, the bead causing flow
through the specimen remains oonstant throughout the test. The coefficient of permeability (4-) is obtained
from the relation
k-~-ffr
where q ::: discharge; Q = total volwne of water, t = time period; h = head causing Dow; L = length of
specimen; A '" aoss..sectiooal area.
Equipment. (1) Penneameter mould, internal diameter = 100 mm, effective height = 127.3 mm,
capacity::: 1000 mt; (2) Detachable collar, tOO mm tliameter, 60 mm high; (3) Dummy pJate, 108 mm dianeter,
12 mm thick; (4) Drainage base, having a porous disc; (5) Drainage cap, having a porous disc with a spring
attached to the top; (6) Compaction equipment. sud:! as Proctor's mmmer or a static cxxnpactioo equipment; (7)
Constant- head water-supply reservoir; (8) Vacuum pump; (9) Constant-head collecting chamber; (10) Stop
watch; (11) Large funnel; (12) Thermometer; (13) Weighing balance, acruracy 0.1 g: (14) Filter papa.
Procedure. (1) Remove the collar of the mould. Measure the intcmal dimensions of the mould. Weigh
the mould, with dummy plate. to the nearest gram.
(2) Apply a little grease on the inside to the mould.
Clamp the mould between the base plate and tbe extension collar, and place the assembly on a solid base.
(3) Take about 2.5 kg of the soil sample, from a thoroughly mixed wet soi~ in the mould. Compact the
soil at the required dry density, using a suitable compacting device.
(4) Remove the collar and base plate. Trim the excess soil level with the top ot the mould.
(5) Clean the outside of the mould and the dummy plate. Find the mass of the soil in tbe mould.
(6) Thke a small specimen of the soil in a container tor the water mntent determination.
(7) Saturate the porous discs (stones).
(8) Place a porous disc on the drainage base, and keq> a filter paper on the porous disc.
(9) Remove the dummy plate, and place the mould with soil on the drainage base, after inserting a
washer in between.
(10) aean the edges of the mould. Apply grease in the grooves around them.
(11) Place a filler paper. a porous disc and fix the drainage cap using washers.
(12) Connect the water reservoir to the outlet at the base, and allow the water to Dow upwards till it has
saturated the sample. Let the free water mllCCl for a depth of about 100 mm on the top of the sample.
[Alternatively. the soil of low permeability can be saturated by subjecting the specimen to a gradually
increasing vaaJum with bottom outlet cklsc4 so as to remove air from the voids. ~ the vacuum
LABORA1ORY EXPERIMENTS "',
gradually to 700 mm of mercury and maintain it for 15 minutes or more, depe'uting upon the type of soil.
Follow the evacuation by a process of slow saturation of the sample from th.: bottom upward under full
vacuum. When the sample is saturated, close both the top and bottom oullets}.
(13) Fill the empty portion of the mould with deaired water, without disturbing the soil.
(14) Disconnect the reservoir from the ouUet at the bottom.
(15) Connect the constant,bead reservoir to the drainage cap inlet.
(16) Open the siop cock. and allow the water to flow dowoward so that all the air is removed.
(17) Close the stop cock, and allow the water to flow through the soil till a steady state is attained.
(18) Start the stop watch, and collect the water flowing out of the base in a measuring flask for some
convenient time interval.
(19) Repeat this thrice, keeping the interval the same. Cleek that the quantity of water colJected is
approximately the same each time.
(20) Measure the difference of bead (h) in levels between the constant bead reservoir and the outlet in
the base.
(21) Repeat the test for at least 2 more djfferent intcrvals.
Data Sheet for Constant fiend Penneameter
Diameter = 100 mm: Length = 120 mm; \blume = 942.48 rot. G·= 2.67: Area = 7854 mm2 ,
DetermillOlion No.
S.No. Observations tmd calculatiolls
Observations
1. Mass of empty mould with base plate 5101 g
2 Mass of mould, soil and base plate 6918 g
3. Hydraulic bead (h) 150 mm
4. llrne interval (t) 600 s
5. Quantity of flow (Q) 1210 mI
(a) First time in period t 1205 m1
(b) Second time in period t 1215 ml
(e) Third time in period I 1210 mI
Average Q 1210 j( 101 rom3
Calculations
6. Mass of soil'" (2) - (1) 1817 g
7. BuJk density, p - v~ 1.93 gtml
8. Water-«>ntent, W, determined as in Test 30 - 1 14 %
9. Dry density, f>d - ~ 1.69 glmI
where hI = initial head; h2 = final head; t = time inlclVal; a = cross sectional area of the stand pipe, A ::
cross-sectional area of the specimen, L = length of specimen.
EquipmenL Alllhc equipment required for the oonst:lOt-hcad permeability lest (Experiment 30-13), and
tbe following.
(1) Graduated glass stand pipe, 5 to 20 mm diameter.
(2) Supporting frame for tbe stand pipe. and the clamp.
Procedure. Steps 1 to 14, same as in Experiment 3Q..13.
(15) Connect the sumd pipe of suitable diameter to the inlet al the lop. Fill the stand pipe with water.
(16) Open the stop oock at the lop, and allow the water to flow out till all the air in the mould is
rcm()\led.
(17) Oosc the stop cock, and allow the water from the stand pipe 10 flow through the soil specimen.
(18) Select the heights hL and h2 measured above the centre of the outlet such that their difference is
about 3(X) to 400 mm.
Observations
1. Mass of roould ... base plale 5090 g
2. Mass of mould ... base plate ... soil 7120g
3. Inilial head, ht SOOmm
4. Final head, h2 200mm
5. I-lead~ 316 mm
6. TIme Inlerval
hllO V1i1Iii 2S.
V1il1i2 to h2 25,
hi to h2 50,
Calc/.l/arions
7. Mass of soil ,. (2) - (1) '"30 g
LAOORATORY IlXPERIMENTS
Compression index,
(11) Connecl the mould assembly to the water reservoir having the water-level al about the same level as
the soil specimen.
Allow the water to flow into the specimen lill it is fully saturated.
(12) T'dke the initial reading of the dial gauge.
(13) Apply an initiaJ setting load to give a pressure of 5 kN/ml (25 kN/m2 for very son soils) to the
assembly so that there is no swelling.
Allow the selling load to stand lill there is no change in the dial gauge reading or for 24 hours.
(14) Thke the final gauge reading under the initial setting load.
(15) Apply the first load increment to apply a pressure of 10 kN/m2, and start tbe Slop walch.
Record the dial gauge readings at 0, 0.25, 1.0, 2.25, 4.0, 6.25, 9.00, 12.25, 16.00, 20.25, 25.00, 36. 49,
64, 81, 100, 121 , 144, 169, 196. 225, 156, 289, 324, 361, 400, 500, 600 and 1440 minutes.
(16) Increase the load 10 apply a pressure of 20 kNfm2i and repeal the step (15). Ukewise. inaease the
load to apply a pressure of 40, BO, 160, 320 and 640 kN/rn or upto the desired pressure.
(17) After the last load inacment had been applied and the readings taken, decrease the load 10 1/4 of
the last load, and allow it to stand for 24 houl'S. Thke the dial gauge reading aner 24 houl'S.
Further reduce the load to 1/4 of the previous load and repeat the above procedure. Likewise, further
reduce the load to 1/4 of the previous load and repeat the procedure. FinaUy, reduce the load 10 the initial
selling load, and keep it for 24 haul'S, and take the fin.'ll dial gauge reading.
(18) Dismantle the assembly. Take out the ring with the specimen. Wipe out the excess surface water
using a bl()(ting paper.
(19) Thke the mass of the ring with the specimen.
(20) Dry the specimen in the oven for 24 hours, and determine the dry mass of specimen.
Data Sheet for consolidation lest
Specific gravity of solids. G = Diameter of ring =
Area of ring (A) = Volume of ring =
Mass of ring + wet soil = Mass of ring + dry soil ,.
Mass of water = Initial height, Ho =
Water coolent before lest = Mass of dry soil (Ms) =
Plot a curve between a as abscissa and final void ratio (e) as ordinate for determination of a~ and my-
Plot a graph between log 0 as abscissa and flllal void raUo as ordinate for determination of Ceo
LABORAlORY EXPERIMENTS 809
1440
For each load increment, plol Vi as abscissa and the dial gauge reading (R) as ordinate. Determine the
value of 19() from the plot.
Now C, - O.84&iIt,o
30.16. Experiment No. 16. To detennine the shear parameters of a sandy soil specimen by direct shear test.
Theory. Shear strength of a soil is its maximum resistance lo shearing stresses. The shear strength is
expressed as
s_c'+otanfjl'
= = =
where c' effective cohesion; a effective stress; and fjI' effective angle of shearing resistance.
The shear tests can be conducted under three different drainage conditions. The direct shear test is
generally conducted on sandy soils as a consolidated-drained test.
Equipment. (1) Shear box, divided inlo two halves by a horizontal plane, and fitted with locking and
spacing screws; (2) Box container to hold the shear box; (3) Base plate baving cro;s grooves on its top
surface; (4) Grid plates, perforated, 2 nos; (5) Porous stones, 6 mm thick, 2 nos; (6) Loading pad, (1) Loading
frame; (8) Loading yoke; (9) Proving ring, capacity 2 leN: (10) Dial gauges, accuracy 0.Q1 mm, 2 nos.; (1l)
Static or dynamic compaction device; (12) Spatula.
Procedure. (1) Measure the internal dimensions of the shear box. Also detennine the average thickness
of the grid plates.
(2) Fix the upper part of the box to the lower part using the locking screws. Attach the base plate to the
lower part.
(3) Place the grid plate in the shear box keeping the serrations of the grid at right angles 10 Ihe direction
of shear. Place a porous stone over the grid plale.
(4) Weigh the shear box with base plate. grid plale and porous stone.
(5) Place the soil specimen in the box. Tamp it directly in the shear box ·at the required density. When
the soil in the top half of the shear box is filled upto 10 to 15 mm depth, level the soils surface.
(6) Weigh the box with the soil specimen.
(7) Place the box inside the box oontainer. and fix the loading pad on the box. Mount the box container
on the loading frame.
(8) Bring the upper half of the box in contact with the proving ring. Oleck: the contact by giving a slight
movement.
(9) Fill the container with water if the soil i.s to be saturatedi otherwise omit this step.
(10) Mount the loading yoke on the ball placed on the loading pad.
(1l) Mount one dial gauge on the loading yoke to record the vertical displacement and another dial gauge
on the container to record the horizontal displacement.
(12) Place the weights on the loading yoke 10 apply a normal stress of 25 kN/m 2.
810 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Allow the sample to consolidate under the applied nonnal Stress. Note the reading of the vertical
displacement dial gauge.
(13) Remove locking screws. Using the spacing screws, mise the upper part slightly above the lower part
such thai the gap is slightly larger than the maximum particle size.
Remove the spacing screws.
(14) Adju<>t aU the dial gauges to read zero. The proving ring should also read zero.
(15) Apply the horizontal shear load at a constant rate of strain of 0.2 mm/minute.
(16) Record readings of the proving ring. the vertical displacement dial gauge and. the horizontal
displacement dial gauge at regular time intervals. Thke tbe first few readings at closer inlcr. als.
(17) Continue the test till the specimen fails or till 8 strain of 20% is reached.
(18) AI the end of the lest, remove the specimens from the box, and take a reprcsent.1tive sample for the
water rootenl determination.
(19) Repeal the lest 00 identical specimens under the normal stresses of 50, 100, ZOO, 400 kN/m 1, etc.
(The range of stresses selected should correspood to the actual fiekl conditions).
Data Sheet ror Direct Shear lest
Size of box = Area of box =
1bickness of specimen = Volume of specimen =
Mass of soil specimen = Bulk density =
Water content '" Dry density =
Void ratio = . Tare mass of hanger =
Mass on hanger = Total mass =
Nonnal stress =
Mass of box + base plate + pol'OU$ stones + grid plale =
Mass of box + base plate + porous stone + grid plate + soil specimen =
Observalions CalculaJions
S. No. Elapsed lIoriUHllol Vemcal dial P1'rMfl8 Shear Vertical SMar
rim< dial gauge gange ring ""pk=m<nJ di'P~ f-
Use separate data sheet for tests under different nonnaI stresses. Detennine the sbear stress at failure in
each case. Summarise the results as follows.
N~I Shear Slress Shear dlsplacmum/ Initial MXIJer FillQilWller
Test No. 51= aI/ailure aI/Dilure
1. 25 kN/m
2. 50
3. 100
4. 200
5. 400
Plot the Coulomb envelope between the oonnal stress as abscissa and shear stress at failure as ordinate.
Result. From the plot, c' = ; .' =
LADORAJ"QRY EXPERIMENTS 811
30.17. Experiment No. 17. To determine the unconfined compressive strength of a cohesive soli.
TIleory. The unconfined compressivc strcngth (q..) is the load per unit area at which the cylindrical
specimen of a Cohesive soil fails in compression.
'p
q• • A
where P = axial load at failure; A = corrected area _ 1 A-" E' where Ao initial area of thc specimcn: E = axial
strain = change in length/original lenglh.
The undrained shear strength (s) of the soil is equal to one half of the unoonfmed compressive strength,
s - qul2.
Equipment. (1) UnconflOed compression apparatus. proving ring type; (2) Proving ring, capaCity I kN,
accuracy 1 N; (3) Dial gauge, accuracy om mm; (4) Weighing balancc: (5) Oven; (6) Stop watch; (7)
Sampling tubc; (8) Split mould, 38 mm diameter, 76 mm long; (9)Srunple extractor; (10) Knife; (11) Vernier
callipers; (12) Large mould.
Procedure. (I) Prepare the soil specimen at tbe desired water content and density in the large mould.
(2) Push the sampling tube into the large mould, and remove the sampling tube filled with the soil For
undisturbed samples, push the sampling tube into the clay sample.
(3) Saturate the soil sample in the sampling tube by a suitable method.
(4) Coat the split mould lightly with a thin layer of grease. Weigh the mould.
(5) Extrude the &'lmple out of the sampling tube into the splil mould, using the sample extractor and the
knife.
(6) Trim the two ends of thc specimen in the split mould.
Weigh the mould with the specimen.
(1) Remove the specimen from the split mould by splitting the mould into two parts.
(8) Measure the length and diameter of the specimen with a vernier callipers.
(9) Place the specimen on the bollom plate of the compression machine.
Adjust the upper plate to make contact with thc specimen.
(10) Adjust the dial gauge and the proving-ring gauge to zero.
(11) Apply the compression load 10 cause an axial slrain al the rate of 1/2 to 2% per minute.
(12) Record the di<ll gauge reading, and the proving ring reading every thirty seconds upto a strain of
6%. The reading may be taken after every 60 seconds for a strain between 6% 10 12%, and every 2 minutes
or SO beyond 12%.
(13) Continue the test until failure surfaces have clearly developed or until an axial strain of 20% is
reached.
(14) Measure the angle between the failure surface and the horizontal, if possible.
(15) Thke the sample from the failure zone of the specimen for the water content detennination.
Duta Sheet for UnconOned Compression Test
Initial length of the specimen, Lo = Initial diameter of the specimen, Do =
Initial area of the specimen, Ao = Initial volume of the specimen, Vo =
Mass of empty split mould = Mass of split mould + specimen =
Mass of the specimen, M = Bulk density, P = M1Vo
water content, W = Dry density, Pd =
ObSD'Wllion.s Calculations
S. No. Elapsed
Dial gouge Proving ring
S"''"'AL COm!cted
areaA.-AQI
Compressive
stress
rim< Deformation Load E'" Ii)
Reading (H) Reading (P) (I - t) (0) ... PIA
Plot a curve between the compressive stress as ordinate, and axial strain. as abscissa.
Results. From the plot, unoonfined compressivc strength, q.. =
20.18. Experiment No. 18. To determine the compaction characteristics of 8 soU specimen by Proctor's
test.
Theory. Compaction is the process of densification of soil by reducing air voids. The degree of
compaction of a given soil is measured in terms of Its dry densily. 'The dry density is maximum at the
optimum water content. A curve is drawn between the water content and the dry density to obtain the
maximum dry density and the optimum water content.
S. DetermiMliOll No.
ObservaliOfJS and Co/culmions
No.
Obsuvalions
1. Mass of empty mould. base plate 5105 g
2. Mass oC mould ... base plait ... canpaaed soil 6710 g
Cokulotioru
3. Mass of compacted soil, M _ (2) - (1) 1605 g
4. BulK density, P .. %- 1.61 yml
5. Water content, w (Delermined as in Sect. 30-1) 9%
6. Dry density. p-' - 17-; 1.48g1m1.
1. Voidralio,e_~_l 0.80
pd
S. Ory density 8t 100% saturation
(Pd) lheomax = 1 ~;;G :U5g1ml
30.19. Experiment No. 19. To determine the CaliIomla Bearing Ratio (CBR) of a soU specimen.
Theory. The California Bearing Ratio test ~ conducted for evaluating the suitability of the subgracle and
the materials used in sub-b3se and base of a flexible pavement
The plunger in the CBR test penetrates the specimen in the mould at the rnte of 1.25 mm per minute.
The loads required for a penetration of 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm are determined. The penetration toad is expressed
as a percentage of the standard loads at the respective penetration level of 2.5 mm or 5.0 mm.
814
tOO
The CaR value is determined corresponding to both penctratioo levels. The greater of these values ~
used for the design of the pavement.
Equipment. (1) CaR mould, inside diameter = 150 mm, total height = 175 mm, with detachable
extensioo collar, 50 mm high, and detachable base plate, 10 mm thick..
(2) Spacer disc. 148 mm diameter, 47.7 mm high.
(3) Rammers, light compaction, 2.6 kg. drop 310 mmj heavy compaction, 4.89 kg, drop 450 mm.
(4) SloUed masses, annular, 2.5 kg each, 147 mm diameter, with a bole of 53 mm diameter in the centre.
(5) Cutting co~r. sleel. which can fit flush with the mould both outside and inside.
(6) Expansion measuring apparatus, cornisting of a perforated plate. 148 mm diameter, with a thread
screw in tbe centre and an adjustable contact head to be screwed over the stem, and a metal tripod.
(7) Penetration piston, 50 mm diameter, 100 mm long.
(8) Loading deVK:c:, capacity 50 kN t equipped with a movable bead (or base) at a unifonn rate of 1.25
mm minutc.
(9) 1\110 dial gauges, accuracy 0.01 mm.
(to) IS sieves. 4.75 mm and 20 mm s ize.
Procedure. (1) Sieve the sample through 20 mm IS sieve. Thke the material passing 20 mm IS sieve for
the test. However, makc allowance for large size material by replacing plus 20 mm size material by an equal
amount of material which passes 20 mm IS sieve. but is retained on 4.75 mm IS sieve.
(2) Thke about 4.5 to 5.5 kg of the material, as obtained in step (1). Mix it thoroughly with the required
quantity of water.
If the sample is to be compacted at optimum water content aod the corresponding dry density, as found
by oompactioo test (light compaction or heavy compaction), take exact quantity of water and the soil to make
sure thai the water content is equal to the optimum water content.
(3) Fu: the extension collar to the top of the mould. Also fix tbe base plate to the bottom.
(4) Insert the spacer disc over the base, with the central bole of the disc at the lower face. Place coarse
filter paper disc on the lop of the displacer disc.
(5) lake the soil sample in the mould. Compact it using either the light compactioo rammer or the heavy
compaction rammer, as desired. For light compact~n, the soil is to be compacted in 3 equal layers, each layer
is given 56 blows by 2.6 kg rammer with drop of 310 mm. For heavy compaction, the soil is compacted in
5 equal layers, each layer is given 56 blows by 4.89 kg rammer with drop of 450 mm.
(6) Remove the extensioo collar. Trim even the excess compacted soil carefully with a stnlight edge with
tbe top of the mould. Any hole that may form on the surface of the compacted soil by the removal of the
coarse particles should be patched with small size Plrticles and levelled.
(7) Loosen the base plate. Remove the base plate and the spacer disc.
(8) Weigh the mould with the oompacted soil.
(9) Place a fLiter paper disc on the base plate. Invert the mould with the compacted soil Clamp the base
plate. Place a perforated disc fitted with an extension stem 00 the specimen top after placing a fllter disc.
(10) Place annular masses to produce a surcharge equal to the mass of the base material and wearing cost
of the pavement expected. Each 2.5 kg annular mass is equivalent 10 70 mm of coostruction material.
However, a minimum of two annular masses should be placed.
(11) Immerse the mould assembly in a tank full of water. Allow free access of water to the lOp and
bottom of tbe specimen.
(12) Mount the tripod of the expansion measuring device on the edge of the mould, and take the initial
reading of the dial gauge.
(13) Keep the mould in the tank undisturbed for 96 hours. Take the readings of the dial gauge every 24
lABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 815
Date and
time
Dial gouge
reading
Total
expansion
Penet["8tion Test
Surcharge mass used =
Water CQfltenl aftcr penetration test ::
81. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENG INEERING
Plot the load-penetration curve. Find the corrected loads, after zero correction, corresponding to
penetrations of 2.5 mm and 5.0 mm.
Result.
CBR (2.5 mm) _ Corrected ;~!at 2.5 mm )( 100
31.1. INTRODUCTION
Rock mechanics is the science whiCh deals with the properties of rocks and the special methods related
with the design and construction of cngin'eering works on the rock, through the rock and below the rock. The
basic knowledge of rock mechanics is useful for civil engineers. Some of the oommon civil engineering
applications are bridges, dams and buildings oonslructcd on lhe rock foundations, various underground
installations and tunneling, deep cuts for spillways, slone quarries, etc.
Rock mechanics is an inter-disciplinary subject covering various disciplines such as geology, mining,
petroleum industry and civil engineering. As defined in chapter I, rock is the consolidated, coherent and
relatively hard portion of the earth's crust. It is a naturaDy formed, SOlidly bonded mass of mineral matter
which cannot be readily broken by hand, and which does nOI disintegrate on its first wetting and drying cycle.
In general, rocks arc strong materials and can take up much more loads as compared to that by soils.
Howevcr, the strength of the rocks is also limited. 1be rock may fail whcn the loads are excessively high.
The aaual behaviour of a rock mass subjected to a change in stress is governed by the mechanical properties
of the rock material and the geological disoontinuities such as faults, joints, fissures, etc.
large bridges, high dams, tall buildings. long tunnels and deep mines induce large stress manges In the
rock mass. For exact analysis and proper prediction of the rock behaviour, a complete understanding of the
engineering properties and the behaviour of rock masses under different loading conditions is essentiaL This
chapter gives a brief introduction to the engineering properties and behaviour of rocks.
31.2; GEOLOGICAL CLASSIFlCATION OF ROCKS
According to the geological classification, the rocks can be broadly classified into 3 groups.
1. rgneous rocks
2. Sedimentary rocks
3. MetamorphiC rocks.
1. Igneous rocks. Igneous rocks are fonned by solidification of molten or liquid material called magma.
lbe igneous rocks have the minerals augite, feldspar, home blende, mica, quartz, etc. Before solldificatioo.
into rocks, all these mineral arc in the molten state. The igneous rocks may be aystalline or glossy (vitreous)
or a combination of both. The igneous rocks may be further Slbdivided according to the grain size aDd colour.
Example of igneous rocks are grarute, basalt, diorite, etc.
Z. Sedlmenlary rocks. Sedimentary rocks are formed from mineral particles wbich had been transported
by water, wind, etc., or which bad been precipitated in water il:ad then solidified. Thus the sedimentary rocks
are formed .by the deposition of fragments of materials like sand, clay, disintegrated rocks. etc. on the
prc-existing rocks. The process of deposition OOIltinues in regular layers. In due course of time, the deposited
mass becomes a sedimentary rqck. Because the sedimenlS get consolidated in horizontal or nearly horizontal
layers, the sedimentary rocks show characteristic different layers distinctly. !be sedimentary rocks can be
·,, SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
easily split up along the bedding plnnes. Sedimentary rocks come from many sources and include distindly
differeDt families.
Examples of sedimcmary rocks are sand stone, shale, lime slone., etc.
3. Metamoqmlc rocks. Metamorphic rocks are fonned from igneous and sedimentary rocks by very
large heat and pressure. Sometimes, metamorphic rocks are also formed from already existing metamorphic
rocks. The process of change to metamorphic rock due to heat and pressure is called meuunorphism. Due to
metamorphism, the original rocks change their cilarnder and the resulting ma<>s of rock change into a bard
and durable foliated material.
Examples of metamorphic rocks are quartzite, marble, gneiss, slate. schist, etc.
31.3. BASIC TERMINOLOGY
The following terms ' are oommonly used.
l. Rock material. 1nc consolidated aggregate of mineraJ particles which Conn the solid material of the
rock is called rock material. In other words, rock material is the matrix of the solid phase of the rock mass.
2. Intact rock. 'The intact rock consislS of rock material which is free from major discontinuitics. An
intact rock is generally quite slrong. Moreover. it can be readily sampled and tested in the laboratory.
3. Ml\ior discontinuity. The major discontinuity is a relatively large discontinuity in the rock: which is
fairly well-developed and continuous. However. the shear failure along a major discontinuity docs not involve
any shearing of intact rock material.
4. Strudural discontinuity. The structural discontinuity of the rock is a fracture which makes the rock.
mass a discontinuous mass and separates solid blocks of a rock: mass.
The strudural discontinuities are generally is the fonn of joints, bedding planes, fissures, faulls, shear
zones, cleavage planes, and solution cavities. 111ese are planes of weakness due to which the strength or rock:
mass is considerably reduced.
S. Rock mass. The rock mass is defined as the aggregate of regular or irregular blocks of rock: material.
These blocks are separated from one another by structural features sucb as bedding planes, joints, cavities and
flssurcs. The rock: mass has anisotropy and structural discontinuity.
The rock.: mass is ronccived of discrete intact blocks separated by thin joints. 111e behaviour of the rock
m~ is governed by a combination of blocks and joint characteristics.
6. Block size. The block size is defined as the average diameter of a Iypical rock:. It is usually expressed
as a range and a typical values. For example, the block size (1~ em), 25 cm.
The ooocept of block size in rock mechanics is analogous 10 that of grain size on a microscopic scale.
7. Joint Set. A joinl set ronsists of individual joints which have similar physical and mechanical
cbaractelistics and whim occur in a nearly parallel array. The joints or a rock: mass are usually subdivided
into two or more such sets, which together constitute the jointing system. The characteristics of different joint
sets are generally different because of diffcrenl geological origin and history.
8. Faults and shears. 1llese are joints along which there has been shearing movement in the rock. mass.
9. Rock quality designation. Rock quality designation (ROD) is frequently used to indicate the quality
of rock mass. 'The rock quality designation is defined as the swn total of lengths of the cores or the Lecfgth
10 em and longer recovered from the driWng, expressed as a percentage of the total length of tbe hole drilled
(Deere et ai, 1967). Thus
ROD _ Total length of cores in pieces of 10 em and longer )( 100
... (31.1)
. Length of run
Eq. 31.1. is for core sticks of NX cores (57.2 mm di..1meter).
The ROD of a rock mass indicates the quality of the rock:. It is a measure of the degree of fracturing and
the amount of weathering in the rock mass. The rocks with ROD from 100 to 90 are classified as excellent
rocks, and those with ROD from 90 to 75 as good rocks. The rocks with ROD from 75 to 50 are fait rocks,
whereas those with 50 to 25 are poor rocks. The rocks with ROD less than 25 are very poor rocks.
INTRODUCTION TO ROCK MECHANICS 819
10. Joint and Bedding Description. As already mentioned, the strength of a rock mass is considerably
reduced due to the presence of discontinuities. In general, the greater the number of discontinuities, the more
is the reduction in strength. Moreover, the degree of such reduction depends upon the spacing, orientation and
size of the discontinuities.
Table 31.1. gives the general quality of rock ma<>s depending upon the spacing of discontinuities in the
form of joinlS and bedding (Deere, 1968 and Singh, 1900).
Dry unit 29.4 7:1.9 27.1 27.0 26.0 22.1 225 ~.9
wei~t to
(kN/ml 15.7
The dry unit weight can be obtained from the wet unit weight by the relation
8" SOIL MECHANICS AND, FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
The pOt6I!!~ (n) of a ~ock: is defined -as' the ratio of the void space 10 tbe tolal volume .~~ ;~~e .rock.. It is
_txprc,ssc(Las...a_pc~Dtage~ iThuL _ _ ._ . __
)" ll'ln? I vQ . , j ; . l
~ ,,.., ..:!;! n - V )( 100 ... (31.3)
where ~-fs(tW'tf"" voids (or pores) anU-V is the total volume. I" 1
The po~'{fv
l
.9f
depends upon a nUlJlbt r factors. such as particlc!site dlstribution.\o'r dng, gnlin
~e8'~ ] entatidn,.J:lbric, solution effects and\TlinemIogical cOmPoSitiOn. The
porosity is high when ::Ill the particles arc of the same size. However i? the, F of ~guladr ~hapcfl
~ic~t~h~)~Ef~ is
INTRODUcnON ro ROCK MECHANICS
For flow of water at a temperature much different from 2Qoe or flo\\O.ofufhrids GtlbdDthall'lwa1er,llEq:u31\ 6
is modiIied as 'x ~ noonr.qrun: 10'1 .fi11'110-;:- 1)1
K)
(<!1!.) ! r. . .gn:l~a hwf JOloq !){jj .nOC}:)l ot roil,)[:1q
q - -; (dx A ""fd '~';. ~{IJ to l!,1~:lmliib .:1m 11 .1:l!'Jmf,tIl3!b~
, "'1;1''''.
where K is the coefficient of absolute permenbility, with a dimension of (L J. AS alre'ady mentionea in .69fl~E
mm o? mm1 ,"""Oib
where qu is the unconfined oompressivc strength of a cylinder of rock with a length 10 diameter ratio of 2 to
1, and 11(50) is the point load strength conected to a dia6teter of 50 mm. Eq. 31.10 docs not give oorrect
results for weak rocks for whidl special correlation studies are required.
Thble 31.4 gives some typical values of the point load index for different rocks.
2. Change in UquJdity Index. Morgenstern and Eigenbrod (1974) used a water absorption test to
dctennine the amount and ratc of slaking of argillaceous materials. 'Illey came to the conclusion that
non·cemented claystone or shale absorbed water faster than other materials. Moreover, all materials eventually
attained a final water content equal to their liquid limits. It has been established that the material.. with high
liquid limit arc more severely ..ffetied by slaking as compared to those with low liquid limit.
Table 31.6 gives the amount of Slaking for different values of liquid limit.
TABLE 31.6. Amount of slaklng foc- different liquid limits
Liquid Greater than
Limit 140%
Amount Very high
of slaking
The rate of slaking depends upon the change in t.h c liquidity index (A It) after immersion in water for 2
hours from the relation
where V,; is the longitudinal wave velocity in mineral constituent i which ha.<i a volume proportion C j in the
rock and n is the number of such minerals.
Table 31.7. gives the typical values of VI' for ~ few rockS:-
TABLE 31.7. Typical values of longitudinal velocity
Rock Gabbro Basalt, Lime slone Sand stolle, Granite
dolomite quartzite
Longitudinal 7000 6500 - 7000 6000 - 6500 6000 5500 - 6000
Velocity
(11) (m/S)
The actual longitudinal wave velocity (V,) in the rock specimen as determined in the laPoratory is less
than the theoretical velocity (\Ij). The quality index (IQ) is the ratio of the actual velocity to tbe theoretical
velocity. expressed as a percentage. Thus
Founnainlraux established that IQ is affected by pores (spherical holes) in the rock., and can be expressed
as percentage
2. DriD core quality. The drill core quality is related to the rock quality designation (ROD). As already
discussed, the ROD of a rock is determined from the percentage recovery of core in lengths greater than 10
em for NX cores (57.2 mm diameter). For other types of cores, the percentage recovery is detennined in
lengths greater than twice the corresponding diameter.
The rock mass rating increments for drill core quality depend upon the RQD value. The increments vary
from 20 to 3 (see ~ble 31.9).
TABLE 31.9. Rock mass rating .increments for driD core quality
' RQD(%) Less than 25
Rating increment
J. JOint spacing. The rock mass rating depends upon Ute spacing of joints. The rating increment should
reflect the joint set which is the most critical for a particular application. If the rock mass has fewer sets of
joints, the mting is increased.
The rock mass mting increment depends upon the spacing of the most influential joint (fable 31.10). The
increments vary from 30 to 5.
TABLE 31.10. Rock mass,rating increment ror spacing or joints
Joint Less Ihan
spaci/lg(m) 0.005
Ralmgillcremcllt
826 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
4. Joint characteristics. The rock mass mUng also depends upon the characteristics of joints. The condition
of joint sets most likely 10 influence a particular application should be considered foc the rating. 1be increment
of rock mass rating for joint characteristics depends upon the roughness of the joint. The description of joint
SUlface rougness and coaling material is weighed towards the smoothest and weakcstjoint set.
Table 3 t .11 gives the rating iocrcmenlS depending upon tbe joint characteristics. 1be increments vary
from 25 to O.
TABLE 31.11. Rock mass radnu: Increment for joint condition
S.No. JoinJ Description. /lJ1ling increment
1. Very rough surfaa:s of limited extent; hard wall rock: 25
2 Slightly rough surface; aperature tess than 1 mm; hard wall rock
3.
4.
Slightly rough surface; aperature less than 1 mm; soft wall rock
Sroooth surface, or gauge filling 1-5 rom thick: or aperatUl " of 1-5 rom; joints
'"
12
6
extending more than several melers.
5. Open joints filled with more than 5 rom of gouge, or open more than 5 mm;
joint extending more than several metres
S. Ground water condition. Ground water ronditiollS can influence the rock rna-.s behaviour to a large
extent. The rock mass rating depends upon the general condition of tbe rock, which, in lum, depends upon
the ground water. TIle rock: is assigned the category dry, mOist, water under moderate pressure or severe water
problems and the raling increments vary from 10 to 0 (fable 31.12).
The rating increment can also be related to the inflow per 10 m length in lit/min if an exploratory adit
or pilot tunnel is available at the site for measurement of waler inflow. It can also be related 10 the joint water
pressure divided by the major principal stress, as given in Table 31.12. It varies from 10 to I.
TABLE 31.12. Increments of rock mass rating due to ground water condition
S. No. General Inflow per 10 m tUllcl Joint water pre£iUTe Raling
comJiti(ltl length (lit!min) divilkd by major increm,mt
principal stress
Completely dry None 10
2. Moist 25 0.0-02
3. WatcruOOerModcl1ltc 25 - 125 0.2-05
pressure
4. Severe water problems 125 05
6. Orientation or joints. TIle orientatioo of the joints relative the the work. under consideration can have
an effect on the behaviour of the rock.. Accordingly, the sum of the firsl 5 raling numbers discussed above is
adjusted. If the otientation of joints is very favorable for the work under oonsideration, no points are
subtracted from the sum. However, for unfavorable orientations, there are negative ratings as given in Table
31.13. For tunnels, the rating decrements are Crom 0 to 12 and Cor foundation, the rating decrements are from
o 10 25, depending on the orientation of joints. For assessment of influence of orientation of the joints for a
particular work., the advice of nn engineering geologist is usually required.
TABLE 31.13. Adjuslmenl'i in rock mass rating ror joint orientation
Assessment of Influence 01 ' Rating increments Rating incrt:mt:nu for
oriOlta/ion of the work for tUIUlt:ls foundations
Very favourable o o
Favourable -2 -2
Fair -s - 7
Unfavourable - to -IS
Very unfavourable -12 -25
INTRODUcnON TO ROCK MECHANICS 827
Rock mass Rating (RMR). As already mentioned, the rock. ma..s rating is obtained by adding up the
rating increments given in Tables 31.8 to 31.12 and adjusting the sum for orientation of joint as per Table
31.13. Table 31.14 gives tbe geomechanks classification of rock masses based on RMR.
For example, a rock mass with the partia.ilars given below will have the RMR of 84, and the rock will
be cl.a5sified as very good rock: as per Thble 31.14.
1. Point )oad index of 6 MPa = 12 (fable 31.8)
2. ROD of 80% = 17 (fable 31.9)
3. Joint spocing 2 m .., 25 (Thble 31.10)
4. Very rough surface = 25 (fable 31.11)
5. Moist roodition = 7 (Thble 31.12)
Total = 86
6. Favourable orientation for foundation = -2 (fable 31.13)
RMR _ 84
Deere and Miller aLso classified the intact rocks according to the modulus ratio. The modulus ratio is the
ratio of the modulus of elasticity to the uniaxial compressive strength. The modulus of elasticity used in the
classification is the tangent modulus obtained from the stress-strain curve of the specimen in the uniaxial
compression lest at a stress level equal to one half the ultimate strength of the rock. Table 31.16 gives the
classification based on the modulus ratio.
TABLE 31.16. Rock Classification Based on Modulus Ratio
Modulus CI= Descn'ption
ratio
Over 500 H High modulus ratio
200- 500 M Medium modulus ratio
L=1Iu>n 200 Low modulus ratio
828 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
&~~n~hc fl;:~:~' . . p
lik'tijgg'
'&,Ita," ~
~~~ flcxuOO" s(Nngth ,,,,, ~\X1ulus \11, rupture) ~ the;'~ I@ '· '~.';)·;'/; ~i\~: :::>.:~ .~:
W.~l'.im~!1h. tCflSi1e .,§ltf'l§ j aL :ltjl \:. - l?otJ~'J s.!ll'f~ of the oore"-'S1bE "lEW " ELEVATION
~cs~ng !~I tI'\C~Pf:OIk load. J!/n~~ 91rfu}a!q<J ~ro!!11t)e liimP~S r '1 '" •
beam theory assuming that the material remains clastic righ'j 'P"
Ffg.31.6
fJpto ~hc. ~~roe· 'fbe , flc.x%ilt~tre[lgth Jl'.t.r)'lis given by I"
A
L,/ '-TANGENT MOOULUS
P AT P
TANGENT MODULUS
STRAIN ~ ~
Fig. 31.8.
the Slope of the tangent drawn to the ruNe at the aigin. The secant modulus in a partirutar range is obtained
by joining the stress point with tbe origin and determining the slope of that line. The tangent modulus at any
I stress is equal to the slope of the tangent drawn at that point. 1be initial tangent modulus, the secant modulus
and the tangent mooulus are shown in Fig. 31.8. Generally. the modulus of elasticity is taken equal 10 the
50% tangent modulus, i.e. the slope of the tangent drawn at ooe-half the failure strcss.
IS: 7317-1974 givcs a method for the determination of the modulus of elasticity.
Fanner (1968) gave the following three types of elastic behaviour in rocks.
1. Quasi-eJastic behaviour 2. Scmi-elastic behaviour 3. NOfHlastic behaviour
1. The quasi-elastic behaviour is observed in fine-grained compact and massive rocks. The stress-strain
curve in this case is almost linear right upto failure. The initial tangent modulus ranges from 6 x 104
to 11 x 1(1' MPa.
2. TIle semi-elastic behaviour is observed in coarse grained igneous rocks and also in fine-grained
compacted sediments. In this case, the stress-strain curve shows a decrease in slope with increasing
stress. The initial modulus ranges from 4 x 10'4 to 7 X 104 MPa.
3. 1be non-elastic behaviour is observed in rocks which are lcss cohesive and which have large pore
space. The initial modulus is usually less than 5 x let Mfa. Table 31.17 gives some typical values
of modulus of elasticity of some rocks.
TABLE 31.17. l)'pIcal values of the compressive strength and
modulus or elastldty of some rocks.
Type of rock Compressive strength (q..) Modulus rf elasticity (E)
(MPa) (Mfa)
Diabase 490.0 1,00,000
QuMai1c 460 - 200 78,000
DoIerile 330 84,000
Granile 230.0 56,000
Limestooe 225.0 Sl,OOO
Shale 170.0 68,000
Marble lS3-Tl 48,000 - 65,000
Sand ~one 37.0 9,700
2. Pol9son's ratio. 1be Poisson ratio (v) is tbe mtio of the lateral strain to the axial Slrain of a rock. Thus
v _ ~
...
where Ed is the diametric strain (or circumferential strain) of the rock and E.. is the axial strain. The value of
v geoernlly varies between 0.125 and O.34Q. for mail rocks.
10 codes subjected to uniaxial rompressioo, v remains more IX less c:oostaol with an ~ in stress,
and it reacbes the tbcorttical maximum value of 0.50 at failure.
ItITRODUCTION TO ROCK MECHANICS 631
The laboratory uniaxi.1l compression test em be conducted on a rock to obtain the circumferential and
axial strain. For the measurement of strains various devices, such as electrical resistance strain gauge,
compressometer, optical instruments, are used.
IS: 9221·1979 rcrommends that at least . two circumferential strain and Iwo moal strain measurements
should be taken for each increment of lood. Moreover, the gauge length should be at least 5 times the grain
size diameter.
31.15. MODFS OF FAILURE OF ROCKS
The following modes of failure may OCQ.lr in rock (Goodman, 1980):
1. Aexure fa ilure 2. Shear failure
3. Direct tension failure 4. Crushing or compression failure
However, in actual practice, there arc .!l large number of toad configuration and no single mode of failure
predominates. The actual failure pPtlem is usually highly complex in whicb two or more modes of failure
may ocx:ur simultaneously.
1. F1exure fuilure. The flexure failure OCQlrs because of the bending aaion in the rock. Dccause of
bending, tensile eracks develop and propagate and cause failure. For examp~ flexure failure OCOJrs in the
rock layers above the roof of a mine [fig. 31 .9 (aj l . A gap is fonned in the roof of tbe mine and a beam of
......
. . ~ ~ ,: .,
r:=
" ,"
··I~~c:
.. . • (I.)
..: ..... ',::
(b)
': ~:<
'"'
Ag. 31.9. (d)
rock: sags downward under its own weight. As the sag inacases. the tensile cracks at the bottom surface of
the beam propagate upward and the beam ultimately fail. II causes the rock to become loose and fall
2. Shear railure. This type of failure occurs when a surface of rupture is formed in the rock. because of
the shear stresses bec:oming criticaL Mer !.he formation of the rupture surface, there is release of shear
stresses as thc rock suffcrs a displacement along the rupture surface. This type of failure may occur in slopes
cut in weak rocks sucb as weathered clay shale and <rushed rock of fault zones. Fig 31.9 (b) slows shear
failure in a mine which has a sliff ore and a soner (soU-like) roof. 1be shear stresses developing in the roof
or pillar base allow the pillar to punch rewtively upward in the roof. If the floor is weak, the pillar may punch
relatively downward into the floor.
3. Direct tension failure. Direct tension occasionally occurs in rock:. For example. the rock layers resting
on convex upward slope surfaces are subjected to dirca tension [(Pig. 31.9 (c)]. In this case, the layers at the
base of Ihe slope are inclined more steeply than what is allowed by friction. To resist the gravity forces, the
balance of support is provided by the stable part of the slope above by direct pull. As the pull is increased in
tbe rock layers, the tension failure may occur in which two adjacent parts of the rock arc pulled apart.
832 SOIL MECHAN ICS AND FOUNDATION ENqlNEERING
\Vhcn the rock breaks in direct tension, a surface of rupture is formed. TIle rupture surface is quite rough
and free from the crushed rock particles and fragments. The surface is quite different from 111.11 Cound in shear
failure. which is slick and has more powder formed Crom the crushing of rock.
4. Crushing or compression failure. Very high direct compression OOCW'S in intensely shortened rock
when penetrated by a stiff punch. When the compressive stresses reach the limiting value, the crushing failure
may occur,
The crushing failure mode is highly complex. It includes formation of tensile cracks and their growth and
interaction through flexure. Fig. 31.9 (d) shows an example of crushing and tensile cracking which is
followed by shear failure.
31.16. MOHR·COULOMB CRITERION FOR ROCKS
lbe Mohr-Coulomb criterion is commonly used for detennining the Shear strength of rocks. As discussed
in chapler 13, the Mohr-Coulomb criterion represents 8 linear cflvclope which louches all Mohr's circles
drawn ror critical combination or princi~1 stresses (01 and OJ) at which failure occurs (fig. 3l.10). '(be
criterion may be written as (Goodman. 1980).
~~; :~;,::(" ;)":1 "i/~,t . ." ,I, (J;~PI:;~;'i .t~~'iA?,/qi' :I;\I, .~ J') I.;.~', "1
(1! ,J?,:"'T.':! ;;1 ~:, d 01 lp I:'" ';' '(l ',lnt;L ~ ,0,
or.l "j ---ci;- 10 ) .;,,. N(oJ(g..'/:. " .. .(31.24)
INTRODUCTION TO ROCK MECHANICS 833
The constants M and N in Sq. 31.24 can be detcnnined by filting a curve to lhe f~ mily of points drawn
between (o)lq,,) and (o llq,, - l) obtained from the test.
The maximum tension criterion must be superimpooed on the Mohr· Coulomb miction CEq. 31.21). It
means that lhe failure will OCOJr because of tensile SII"CSS wherever the minor principal stress a;} becomes
equal to -To> whotever may be the value of 01.
TESTS-
(1) DIRECT TENSION
(2) BRAZILIAN
(]) UNCONFINED COMPRESSION
(4) TRIAXIAL COMPRESSON
-TO
namely, direct tension lesl, Brazilian Icst, unconfmed compression tcst and triaxial tcst. Fig. 31.11 shows the
empirical failure envelope. The envelope is generally aJrved downward and the shape is in-between a straight
and a parabola.
It may be noted that the empirical failure envelope lies beneath the Mohr-Coulomb aitcrion with the
superimposed tcnsion cutoff (shown dotted). Inside lhe hatched portion, the Mohr·Coulomb criterion with
tension OJloff overestimates the strength. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the tensile strength To and the shear
slrength intercept S; when applyil1g the Mohr-Coulomb criterion to practical problems involving such conditions.
In-situ Stresses
1. Vertical StTe$S. The in-situ vertical stress at any point in the rock can generally De taken equal to tbe
weight of the overlying rock: per umt area. Thus
Venical stress, 0" .. 1 z ... (31.27)
wberez is the depth of the point and 'Y is the unit weight oflhe rock. which is usually taken as 27 kN/ml.
When the ground surface is
horizontal, the principal stress
directions are vertical aod
horizontal at points near the
surface. It is generally assumed
that the directions are the same
even for points at large depths
below the surface.. allhough the
actual directions are somewhat
different. However, tbis assump-
tion is not justified in the case oC
hilly terrains. Beneatb 8 valley
side, there is one principal stress
normal to the slope, which is
equal to zero as the stresses
nonnal to a free sulface cannot
-t- Fig. 31.12
exist. The other two principal stresses lie in the plane of slope (Fig. 31.12). These stresses approach zero
when the rock slope is convex upward, but have high values wben the slope is ooncave upward. In tbe case
of a sleep. V-shaped valleys, these stresses may even approach the failure stress or the strength of the rock.
2. Horizontal stress. The magnitude of the horizontal stress (0,,) is usually estimated from the relation
0" - K 0" ... (31.28)
where K is the lateral stress coefficient.
, In the case of recent sedimentation, the value of K can be taken equal to v/(1 - \f), as obtained from the
theory of elasticity (chapter 11). In general, the value of K usually lies between K" and Kp , where KiJ
corre<iponds 10 conditions for nonnal fauUing and K,. corresponds to oonditions for reverse faulting.
10 the normal faultin& the vertical stress is the major principal stress and failure 0CC1.Ir5 due to borizontal
extension. (This is similar to the active conditions discussed in chapter 19). rusuming Coulomb's law, the
vaJue of ~ is given by
K. - ro"(45'+ +/2)_[(~)cot2(45' + +12)] x ~ ... (31.29)
In the reverse faulting, the vertical stress is the minor principal stress and the failure occurs due to horizontal
compression. (Ibis is similar to the passive conditions discussed in chapter 19). The value of Kp is given by
PROBLEMS
B. Objective Type
Write whether the followmg stntemcnts lire truc or falsc.
(a) Slate is n sedimenwry rock.
(h) Fauils are joints along which there had been shearing movemt':nlS.
(c) The RQD of a rock cannot be greater than 100%.
(c/) TIle point load strength Of a rock specimen is independent of the diameter.
(e) The RMR v;lllle is reduced because of unfavourable joint oriemntion.
if) The shear stren gth of the speci men as determined by the ri ng shear test is equal to P/2A.
(g) Ge nerall y, the modulu s of elasticity of the rock is take n eq ual to the 50% .~ccant modulus.
(II) The empiriclll fnillire envelope is based on fou r different types of tests.
(I) The in-silu l>tresscs in rocks arc TIOt significant for mining operations.
fAns. True (b), (e), (e), lfJ. (/1)1
32
Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering
32.1. INTRODUCfIO/\
An earthquake is sudden shaking of Ihc earth surface caused by a source of disturbance inside the canh.
Earthquakes occur duc to sudden mass shining in bedrock caused by forces within the canh. Shifting in
bedrock occurs along faults. Such earthquakes arc called teclOnic earthquakes. Besides tectOnic earthquakes,
there arc Olher types of earthquakes such as volcanic earthquakes. nuclear explosion earthquakes and mine
collapse earlhquakcs. but such earthquakes aIC small. 1lle discussions herein aTC limited only to tectonic
earthquakes. There is sudden release of strain energy in the ;'.One where the shifting in bedrock occurs. Shock
waves arc generated duc 10 release of energy. These shock waves are propagated outward from the earthquake
source. W~en these waves rench the earth surface. its shilking occOrs.
The movement of the bedrock along the fault
occurs at a point called the fncus (or hypocenter)
(Fig. 32.1). The focus is generally 5 to 50 kill
below the earth surface but may be deeper in some
cases. The epicelller is the point on the earth
surface vertically above the focus. 111e distance
between the epicenter and the focus is C:llIed the
focal depth . The distance between any po.int on the
earth surface and the epicenter is known as the
epicellTmldi.\"f(/l1ce.
Earthquakes cause one of the most dcstrut:tive Fig. 32.1. BUSiC Tcnninology
natural disasters leading to heavy losses of lile and property. Unfortunately. the earthquakes are. so far.
unpredictable and unpreventable. The only course left to engineers is to design and construct the structures in
such a manner that the damages caused by the earthquakes are minimum.
Earthql/{/ke enRineering deals with the design and construction of structures that are earthquake resistant.
TIle various structural components arc designed to withstand the earthquake forces. Geotechnical cllrlhqllllke
ellgilwerillC is a young brant:h of earthquake engineering that developed in the lust two decades or so. It is
concerned wi th geOiechnical aspects of earthquake engineering. such as the type and de pth of foundation soil.
amplilication of earthquake's intensity by SOIl deposits. liquefaction of so ils. etc.
This chapter discusses the basic concepts of the geotechnical earthquake engineering.
32.2. HISTORY OF EARTHQUAKES IN INDIA
India is one or the seismic countries of the world. Some of the severe earthquakes of the world occurred
in India. The earthquake of the highest magnitude, represented as M and defined later, occurred in Assam
(India) on the 12th of June. 1897. The earthquake was of 11 magnitude of 8.7 on Richter's scale. 'Illat earth-
quake caused extensive lhlmages in Assam. .
In the period from 1905 to 1950. fo~r severe earthquakes of magnitude greater than 8.0 occurred in India.
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENG INEERING
8"
__~68~"____~71~"~~~'6~____~80~"____~'4~
" ____~8~8~__~'~i____~'~6__-,
["
~ ~
MAP OF INDIA
SHOWING
SEISMIC ZONES OF INDIA
,," ,i
"
,," 2,
,," '6
0 ZONE
0 ZONE
II
<II
,,"
0 ZONE IV
0 .lONE V
,"
,i "i ,,"
(Redrawn after "
IS : 1893 .2002)
These earthquakes occurred in Kangra in 1905 (M = 8.6). Bihar in 1934 (M = 8.4), Andaman in 194 1 and
Assam in 1950 (M = 8.6). Besides these earthq uakes: there were some less severe earthquakes. In the period
from 1951 to 2000, seven moderate earthquakes of magnilUde between 6 and 7 occurred. These earthquakes
occurred at Anjar in 1956 (M = 6.1), Koynn in 1967 (M = 6.5), Bihar-Nepal border in 1988 (M = 6.6),
Uttarkashi in 1991 (M = 6.4), Kilian (Luur) in 1993 (M = 6.2), Jabalpur in 1997 (M = 6.0), and Chamoli in
1999 (M = 6.6). The Killari (Lal ur) earthquake was the worst, which caused about 10,000 deaths.
In the beginning of this century. on 26th January, 2001, a strong eanhquake with a magnitude of 7.9
occ urred in Shuj (Gujarat), It caused heavy damages and more than 20,000 persons died and about 1.67.000
persons were injured. About 3.00.000 houses were destroyed and huge losses of property occurred.
The Bhuj earthquake ha~ demonstrated the vulnerability of various Indian regions to earthquakes. It has
very clearly shown that most construction in the seismic regions do nOI comply with the required safety
requirements. The general public has become more concerned about earthquakes and the great damage they
can cause. 11 is a major challenge to ensure that OUT constructions arc made earthquake resistanl to limit the
damages in future. .
h
.f
~ L--, / ~eleSei~~
surface w.,es
.!. with time period 20 s
c
~-8
3
I ~~;t~:~e -.---
~3
§ '~ 2
E ./
L I
1 !
0
10 100 1000 10000
Distance in km
Fig. 32.3. Distl1llC'e Correction
M = 10glOA - 2.48 + 2.76 108 !J. ... (32.3)
where !J. is the epicentral distance (km)
For illustration. if the amplitude of the ground motion at a distance of 100 km is 10\lm ( = 10 mm).
From Eq. 32.1, M", log)o 104 = 4.0
From Eq. 32.2 (b), M = 10g lO 10 + 3.0 = 4.0
From Eq. 32.3, M = 10gLO 10 - 2.48 + 2.76 10gLo 100 = 4.04
Table 32.1 gives II typical classification of earthquakes based on their magnitudes. The table also gives
too annual average number of eanhquakes across the Earth in each of these groups.
Table 32.1. Global occurrence of earthquakes of different magnitudes
Magnitude Group AII/II/al average mllnfMr of global occurrence
8 and higher Great
7-7.9 Major IS
6 - 6.9 Strong 120
5-5.9 Moderate 800
4 - 4.9 Light 6200 (estimated)
3-3.9 Minor 49,000 (estimated)
Less than 3 Very Minor Abou 9000 per day ( '" 3.285)( 106 per year)
Earthquakes With a magnuude of 3 or less are not felt. Earthquakes With a magnllude less than 5
nonnalty do not cause significant damage. The maximum magnitude of the earthquake occurred so far was
8.7 (Assam, 1897).
The magnitude corresponding to the origina1 fonnulation proposed by Richter is also called the local
magnitude (Mi). In addition to the local magnitude, three more magnitude scales have been proposed. The
body wave magnitude (Mb) is based on the compressional body waves (or P-waves). The surface wave
magnitude (MI) is based on the surface or Rayleigh (R) waves. The seismic moment magnitude or the wave
energy magnitude (Mw) is ~ased on the seismic moment.
1142 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
For small earthquakes, all the four magnitude scales give almost the same value, but for large earth-
quakes, the values of magnitudes on different scales may be differe nt . For example, for the 1964 Alaska
Earthquake. the estimated magnitudes were Mh =
6.8. M~ =
8.6 and M ... =9.2. Although there are some
advantages in these magnitude scales. probably the Richter scale is still quite popular and is com monly used
in practice.
Energy released in an earthquake
A relmionship between the alllount of the Sltain energy released by an earthquake and its magnitude is
g iven by Richter as
10glO E = 11.4 + 1.5 M ... (32.4)
where E is the energy released in ergs ( I crg = IO~1 1)
and M is the magnitude of the earthquake.
Earthquakes release huge amount of energy. An earthquake of magnitude 6.3 would release energy equal
10 about 8 x 10']J.) ergs, which is equal to that of the atomic bomb dropped at Hiroshima in 1945. Fortunately,
the most o f energy released by an earthquake is dissipated inside the earth into heat and fracturing of rocks.
Only a small fraction of the energy goes into seismic waves that cause shaking of the ground surface.
It may be noted that with an increase of one on the mtlgnilUde scale would result in an increase in
amplitude of len times and an increase in energy o f 3 1.6 times.
The affected area and the durmion of the earthquake increase with an increase in magnitude of the
earthquake. The affected area depends upon a number of factors such as the depth of focus, type of strata,
etc . The affected areas by the earthquakes of magnitudes 6. 7 and 8 respecti vely would be o f the order of
60,000, 120.000 aod 200.000 square kilometres. The corresponding dumtion of eart hquakes would be of the
order of 15, 30 and 45 seconds. For example. the Koyna earthquake of 1967 (M = 6.5) affected an area of
about 400 km radius. with an area of aboU! 126000 sq. km.
32.S. INTENSITY OF EARTHQUAKES
Thc intensity of an earthquake is measured qualitatively in tcrms of damages caused by it at a particular
location. In general, the larger the earthquake, the greater is the intensity. For the same earthquake, the
intensi ty decreases as the epicentral distance o f the location increases. Thus the maximu'm intensity of an
earthquake is ncar its epicenter.
Several intensity scales have been proposed by differen t investigators. Generally, modified Mercalli
Intensity (MM I) scale is used in practice. IS: 1893-2002 a lso recommends the use of Comprehensive Intensity
Scale (MSK 64). Both MMI and MS J<l64 scales are similar. However, MSK 64 scale gives more detailed aod
specific deseriptions of the damages caused. Bolh the seales categorise the damages in twelve classes or
degrees. The intensity is usually expressed in Roman Numerals, I, II , ... XII. Sometimes, the intensity is also
expressed in grades I. 2, ... 12 . In general . the greater the intensity tit a location. the ~reater would be the .t.
damage caused by the earthquake. Table 32 .2 gives
an abridged version of the MMI scale.
An isoseismal map represents Ihe :Jffected
regi ons with the same intensity as- contours.
On~the-spot study of the damages caused by an
earthquake is made soon after ils occ urrence. The
locatio ns with different intensities are marked on
the plan of the area. The isoseismal lines are Ihen
drawn by joining the points of the same intensity.
The procedure is similar to thaI of drawing of
e levation contours from the elevations of different
points. Fig. 32.4 shows the isoscismal mllp of the
Bhuj earthquake of 2001. The maxi mum intensity Fig. 32.4. Isoscisll1111 mop of the 2001 Bhuj (lndin) E~U"thquake
(MSK intensity)
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGIJ'lEER ING
""
Table 32.2. Modified Mcrcal1i IntensIty (MMI) Seale
Imellsit.\' Descrillli(JII Ma.l!ldlude t"IIl
Class Hie/I/er's set/Ie
InSignificant Not felt by humans. detected by instruments only 1-1.9
Very light Felt only by sensitive humans; delicatcly suspended objects may 2-2.9
swing
III Light Felt r1()liceably indoors: small vibratory motion 3 - 3.9
IV Moderdtc Felt by many persons: windows and doors make cracking sounds. 4 - 4.9
V Slightly strong Felt by almost everyone; some panic: minor damages 5 - 5.9
VI Strong Felt by all; many frightened: some damage to ordinary structures 5 - 5.9
VII Very strong E\'erbody run., outdoors; negligible damage to well·buih structures: 5- 5.9
considerable damge to other structures
VIII DeSlructive Slight damage \0 we11-built structures; serious damage \0 ordinary 6- 6.9
observed was X. The contours of intensity IX, VITI, VII are also marked. From the MMI scale, it can be
observed that the earthquake was of intensity classified as disastrous.
The difference between the magnitude and lhe intensity should be carefully noted. While the magnitude
I of an earthquake has a u.nique val ue. the intensity decreases as the distance from the epicenter increases. In
other words. for a cer1ain ear1hquake. the intensity varies with the distance. Sometimes. a sound source (or an
electric bulb) analogy is used 10 demonstrate the difference between the magnitude and the intensity. While
the sirength of the sound source (or electric bulb) is constant. the intensi ty of sound (or light)· decreases as
the observer moves away from the soun;c.
1. Relationship between magnitude and maximum intensity
The Gutenberg-Richter relation is commonly used in practice; according 10 which, the magnitude and
intensity arc approximately related as '
M = 1.3 + 0.6/0 ... (32 .,5)
J where M is the magnitude of the eanhquake, and 10 is the maximum intensity on MMI scale (expressed in
Arabic numemls).
Table 32.3 gives the commonly used values of intensities for different magnitudes of earthquakes.
Ma.{imulII i,l/CIU;/)' (m
MMlscale
of earthquakes.
XI
According to IS: 1893: 2002, the basic zone factors (z) given in the code are reasonable estimates of
effective peak ground acceleration for the design of various structures. Table 32.5 gives the zone factors (or
different seismic lones. The intensity as per MSK 64 broadly associated with the various zones is also given.
Table 32.5. Intensity and Zone factors for different seismic Zones
Seismic Wile
Inertia Force
When the ground motion occurs, the foundation of the structure must also move with it to avoid its
rupture. When the foundation moves, the structure on it tends to stay back because of inertia. ConsequentJy.
the structure is subjected to inertia forces. In the earthquake-resistant design of structures. the inertia forces
due to earthquake are considered in addition to the nOTmal loads and forces.
To get a clear idea about the inertia forces, let us consider thaI a person is sitting upright in a milway
train not in molion. When the train suddenly starts moving. his lower body on the seal moves. with the train
but his upper body tends to stay back because of inertia. An inertia force acts on his upper body in the
backward direction and his head may strike the back of the seat.
According to NeWlOn's second law of motion, the inertia force is equal to the product of the mass and
acceleration, and it acts in a direction oppositc to (hat of the acceleration. Thus the honZOnlal inertia force is
given by the expression
F" =
Mass x acceleration
where A'l is the seismic cocffidcnl in the horizontal direction, nnd W is (he seismk: weight.
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING
Response spedrum
If the building were rigid, then
every point on it would move by _ _ __
the same amount as the ground, EARTHQUAKE SHAKING
and consequently, the inertia force Fig. 32.S. Inenia force on a simple structure
would be equal to the mass multiplied by the ground acceleration. But the bu ildings are flexible, and different
parts move back·and·forth by different amounts during ground shaking.
nle natural period of vibration of a structure is the time period of its undamped. free vibration. The
[undamelllal lIafllral period of vibrati on is that for the first (or fundamental) mode of vibration of that
structure. Each structure has a unique fundamental period of vibration at which it tends to vibrate when it is
allowed to vibrate freely without any external excitation. The fundamental natural period depends upon the
form and configuration of structure, the stiffness (or flexibility) of Ihe various structural members, the type
and material of construction, etc. Methods for the detennination of the fundamental period of a structure are
outside the scope of this lext. However. IS: 1893·2002 gives the empirical formulae for the estimation of
fundamental natural period of vibrmion for huildings that can be used (see Secn.32.8).
For the estimation of seismic forces in structures. the respoose spectra are commonly used in practice.
The response spectrum of a structure shows the maximum response induced in the structure by the ground
motion. It is usually plaited in lemlS of the maximum absolute acceleration against nalural period, although
sometimes the maximum relative velocity or the maximum relative displacements arc also used. While
plouing the response spectrum. it is assumed that the structure has single degree of freedom and it may have
different damping. In other words, the maximum response spectrum represents the maximum acceleration of
an idealised single degree freedom systems having a certain natural period of vibration and damping when it
is subjected to earthquake ground motion.
Fig. 32.6 shows the maximum response spectrum for a typical structura l system with a certain natural
period and damping.
The following points may be noted:
I. The response of the system decreases a... the damping of the system increases.
In buildings. usually 5% damping is a... sumed.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
o.o~~~~
resistant design to
represent the struc-
tural response by the 0·0 '·0 2·0 J·o
response factor or
P~rjod (5)
spectral coefficient in
the normalised form
as S,,/ g. Fig. 32.6. The maximum response ~pcclfum of n typical structural system
4. The response spectrum helps the earthquake engineer to predict how a panicular structure with a
certain natural period will respond to the earthquake.
5. The response spectra are commonly used in Ihe estimation of seismic forces, as discussed later.
32.7. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT DESIGN
Some of the general principles of the design of earthquake-resistant design of structures arc brieny
discussed below. For more details, a reference may be made 10 IS: 1893-2002.
1. Design basis earthquake. In the earthquake-resistant design, it is not the objective to make the
J
structure absolutely eurthquake proof that will not suffer any damage during the rarest of the earthquakes. A
fully earthquake-proof structure will be very huge and highly expensive. Instead. an attempt is made that the
structure should be able to withstand the minor earthquakes that occur frequently in that region. Moreover,
the structure should be able to resist moderate earthquakes. called design basis earthquakes (DB E), without
significant structural damage. Such earthquakes could occur once during the life of the structure. Even a
major earthquake. called the maximum I:onsidered earthquake (MCE). with its intensity greater than that of
the design basis earthquake, would not cause complete collapse <.If a properly designed and constructed
struclUre and the losses would be limited.
2. Pseudo-static analysis. Earthquakes cause dynamic loading on structures. However. for the design of
earthquake-resistant structures, the dyn:unic analysi~ i~ usually not camed out. Instead, a pseudo-static
analysis is used in which the earthquake forl:es arc replaced by equivalent static forces. TIle$e forces are
considered in addition to the normal loads on the structure for iL.. design.
II is assumed that the forces due to earthquake are not likely to occ ur simultaneously with other
occasional forces such as wind loads, maximum !load forces or maximum sea waves forcc....
3. Components of acceleration. Earthqunkes can cause acceleration in any direction. It is the usual prac-
tice to consider the components of acceleration in the vertical direction and in two perpendicular horizontal
direction. Moreover, the acceleration components can be either positive or negative in these three directions.
Since the three components of earthquake acceleration may not act at the same time with their maximum
magnitude, the code recommends that when the maximum r~ponse from one componenl occurs. the response
from lhe other two components can be 30 percent of their maximum values. All possible combinations.
including plus or minus signs, should be considered in the design.
Generally. the horizontal acceleration is the most predominant.
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING 1W7
4. Increase in pel"missibl e s tI"CSSCS. Th~ vertical component of acceleration can incrca!'>c the normal
vertical loads on the st ructure. Because of the provision of adequate factors o f safety used in the nonnal
design of structures, most of the struclUres arc able to resist the additional momentary vertical loads due to
earthquakes.
According to the code, when em1hquake fo rces lire considered along with the normal design forces, the
permissible stresses in materials in th ~ dastic method of design car. tx: increased by (llie-third. H owcv~ r, for
steels having a definite yield str~ss, th~ increased stress llIay bC' limited I() the yield stress, and for steels
without a definite yield point, the stress may he limited 10 110 percell! of the ultimate strength or 0.2 percent
proof strain. whichever is smaller.
5. Increase in allowable bcal"ing pr-eSSUI'l'. The alJowahle hearing pressure in soils c.lO he incleased by
25 to 50%, depending on the type of :.oil and type of foundation as per details given in the code.
However. for soils thai arc liable to liquefaction. :his increase is nOl applicable. Soi ls f:!lling under Indian
Standard Classi fication category SP (i.e .. poorly graded sands), with standard penetration test (SPT) N-v:!lues
less th:m 15 in seismic zones TIL IV and V..and less than 10 in zone II may become liquefied. Suitable
sites for 5% damping. For other valucs ()f 0·0 0·5 t·O 1·5 2·0 2·5 3·0 3-5 '·0
d:unpings, the (.;odc gives the multiplying. PERIOD (s)
factors. The maximum value of S,/g i!. 2.50. (Redrawn alter IS : t893-2002)
NaturAl period
For delemlining the value of (5./,1: ) for a FIg. 32,7. Rcsp()n.~e specll.... for rock ~.ntJ ~oi1 site~ ror S percen.' damping
given structure, its natural period of vitmllion COli/u.n'; The Bureau of Indian SlomJ:ards. New Deihl.
is required. The code gives Ihe following approximate fOllllulae for Ihe (';OJ1lputllti()n of the fundamental
natural period of vibration (I:<).
(a) Momellf-re,"hltillg frame blli/dill!:," lI';tll("" b,.ick inji/-puI/eI.\·
(I) R.c. frame buildings
T, = 0 .075 "O.7~ ... (32.9)
(ii) Sleel frame buildings
T., = 0.085 h01.~ ... (32.10)
(b) All other Imildill!:.I". ;"c/lldi"l: lI/(mlt'lIf-resi.I·lill!: frmlle.l· with brick il/fii-panels
where.
T, = natural period of vibnllion, in seconds.
II = height of building, as specified in Ihe code, in metres.
d = base dimension of Ihe building .11 the plinth level along the direction of the lateral force, in melres.
The code specifics that for any structure with 1'., :s; 0.1 j', the value of Air will not be taken tess than
(m), whatever be the value of fiR.
seismic weight of :my floor. the dead weight of columns lind walls in any storey is equally distributed to the
floors above and nclow them.
The design seismic bilsc shear m.:ting on the structure is equal to the t01a1 design lilterill force and is given
by lhe expression
... (32.12)
where
Ah = design horizontal seismic coefficient
W = seismic weight of the bui ld ing
VB = design hase shear
The design bilse shear is di1>tributed to different floor levels, as specified in the code. The horizontal force
acting 0 11 the foundation is equal to the design base shear.
(b) Design vertical rorce
Since the design vertical coefficient is equal to the two~lh ird s of the design horizontal coefficient (A h ),
the design vcrtical force is given by the ~xprcssion
0·'
soils
0·8
Layer)
'", 0 '6
z
Q 0·5
~
...u~ 0·'
~ 0·3
PERIOD (Seconds)
(Redrawn after Seed et at, 1987)
Fig. 12.':1. Ac.:det<llion 1\':5pOn~ spectra in Muko d ty durinR the 191:15 canhqunke
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING 85'
~
3·00
AI the central markct site
(CAO site), spectral accele-
-0
rations werc amplilicd at zZ
periods of 1.3 s and within thc Q8
~;
range of 3.5 s to 4.5 s. How-
ever. the d:l.ma!les were fairly
minor. since the buildings at
~~
the CAO site did not have
fundamcnlal periods within
Ihese ranges and reson- ance g§
~~
did not occur.
However. ncar the scr
building sites. the soil depo- 0-00
sit's fundamemal period at 0·00 1·00 2·00 3-00
which amplification of spectral PERIOD T ( S~conds 1
acceleration occurred matched
with those of structures and
major damages occurred due
10 resOnance. Fig. 32.10. 1991 USC Normalised' occelcr:l.lion rcspon~e spectra
Uniform Building Code (1991) gives the normalised acceleration response spectra for different site
conditions (Fig. 32.10). The spectral acceleration of a structure can be e!;timat<!d if the following parameters
are known:
(i) System's fundamental period (T)
(ii) Peak ground acceleration of Ihe desig~ earthquake
(iii) Type of the soil at Ihe site.
h may be nOled thaI for fundamental periods greater than about 0.5 s, the spectral accderation for deep
soil sites are considerably higher than that for rock and stirr soils.
32.11_ HAZARDS DUE TO EARTHQUAKES
lllere are many hazards due to earthquakes. The hazards rel;Jted to gtwtcchnical engineering include the
following:
1. Liquefaction of soils. In satur:lled. eohcsionless soils, earthquakes may cause liquefaction (or quick-
sand) conditions when the shear strength is reduced (0 almost zero.
Liquefaction of soils can lead to many types of failures. such as bearing capacity failures, si nking or
tilting of buildings. land slides. laleml spreads. notation of underground structures.
Liquefaction of soils is discussed later.
2. Ground shaking. Shaking of ground occurs during nn earthquake. The intensity. dural ion and wave
form of ground shaking depend upon a number of factors such as the magnitude of earthquake. the depth of
focus. ~he epicemTal distance. the energy absorhing nature of the strata. etc.
The intensity of ground shaking at a given location is usually specified in terms of peak ground accelera·
tion (PGA). There is an approximate re lationship between the PCA and intensity on MMl sc:lIe. as discussed
earlier. To predict the response of soils ,md foundations. the characteristics of ground shaking are required.
3. Surface rupture. For earlhquakcs of small magniludes. the rupture zone occurs deep inside the earth
8S2 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION BNCilNEERING
and il docs not extend to the ground surface. However. for the eanhquakcs of magnitudes greater than about
6.0, the ruplUre surface usually appears al the ground. Moreover. as the magnitude of the earthquake
'increases, the length of rupture surface also increases.
Surface rupture creates a number of problems for buildings, bridges, railways, highways. water supply
lines, etc. thai arc located directly above the fault It is the usual practice to locate the buildings and structures
susceptihle to heavy damage not directly over the active faults.
4. Land slides. Eanhquakes CliO cause land slides and failure of slopes. Even when the slope fai lures do
not occur. tcnsion cracks may appear in the soi l. These tension cmcks may 'lead 10 the formation of water
channe ls. causing softening and saturation of soils.
S. Lateral spreading. Lateral spreadi ng of soil is the massive horizontal movement of soil layers in a
direction parallel to the ground slope. Lateral spreading due to earthquakes is usually observed on very gentJe
slopes.
If the lateral spreading occurs beneath a structure, it can tear it apart, causing heavy damages. In the
design of such structures. suitable provisions <Ire made to withstand tensile slTcsses.
6. Shear (a ilUn;! or Foundations. Seismic loads acting on a structure are transmitted to the ground
through the foundatio n. This results in an increase in the stresses acting on the soil. However, the soils can
withstand seismic stresses without failure if they are not very large. In some cases, when the stresses exceed
the shear strength of the soil. the bearing capacity failure may occur.
However, shear failu res of foundation lire not common so long as liquefaction of the soi l does not occur.
7. Settlements of structures. The earthquakes cause cyclic loading On soils, which may lead to large
sellicments. Loose sandy soils often compact during the earthquake.
DilTerential seulements can also he substantial. Adequate provisions should be made in the design of
structures so that differential sellieme nts do not cause damage.
S. Fail~re of retaining walls. If the muvements caused by the earthquake are large. the retaining walls
may fail. When a retaining wall fails. the support it was provid ing to the soil mass is removed. It may resu lt
in heavy damage to adjaccnt structurcs suc h as ports, etc.
9. Tsunamis and Seiches. A tsunami is' a huge wave generated in thc ocean by an earthquake. These
waves travel very fast and cannot be easily detected in open sea. However, when they approach the beach,
they suddenly appear as tall waves. These tall waves may cause heavy damagcs 10 onshore structures and can
h3d ~oS~~;~It'°~slil~;lilar
in nature 10 a tsunami. but il is of much smaller size and it occurs in lakes or rivers.
The seiche usu3ily occurs when resonant conditions occur in the lake due to an earthquakes, i.t'.• when the
nalum! frequency! of the lake and that of thc earthquake are equal. $omelimes a seiche occurs in a lake when
the rupture surface is beneath the lake bed.
Barly warn ing systems. should be ins1alled so Ihal suil<lble actions may be taken by the people at the
places where tsunamis and seiches can occur.
live .. tress (represcmcd as ct in this chapler) at a depth z below the G.S. is.given hy
rY = yh + 1<", (z-h) - Y~. (z-h)
0' = yh + y' (z-h)
where y' is the submerged density (= '(,,,,-1,,,)
TIle shear strength of a cohesionlcss soil is duc to internal Inclion nn9 is given by
s = a'tnn <\I'
If the soil deposit is subjected to ground vibrations. it lends to comp:lct and decrease in volume.
However, if the drainage of porc water is prcycnled, this tendency to decrease in volume rcsu[ls in an increase
in pore waler pressure. U!I UJ he the excess dynamic pore water pressure developed duc to ground vibration.
The dynamic shear strength is ex pressed as
SJ = (a' - 11,/) Ian $'
For sandy soils, the angle of internal friction 41' in the dynamic conditions is almost equal to that in static
conditions.
The dynamic shear strength (Sd) will become zero when
cr' = lid
~= I
Expressing Il,/ in terms of the dynamic hydraulic head (h J ),
1~'11:: I
Thus liquefaction in a cohesionless soil will occur when Ihe dynamic pore water is equal to the effective
stress.
It may be noted that because of the dynamic pore water pressure, the shear strength of soil is decreased.
It results in transfer of intcrgranular stress to pore water pressure. If this transfer of stress is incomplete, there
is partial loss of strength and partial liquefllclion occurs. However, if the transfer of stress is complete, the
shear strength becomes zero and complete liquefaction occurs. TIle sand-water mixture behaves like a viscous
liquid after complete liquefaction.
Large settlements occur after liquefaction and the struclUres resting on such a soil deposit start sinking.
This sinking process continues till the sand remains in the liquefied stale.
11 may be summarised that for liquefaction to occur, all the following five conditions must be satisfied
(Coduto, 1999).
I. The soil is cohesion less.
2. The soil is loose.
3. The: soil is saturated.
4. There is shaking of ground of the required intensity and duration.
5. The undrained conditions develop in the soil due to its limited permeability.
It is worth noting thai liql;lcfaction can occur in the soil dcposit at any depth whcre Ihese conditions are
satisfied. Once liquefaction occurs at some depth, the flow of watcr occur.; in the upward direction, and it
may cause an indirect liquefaction in the soil layers abovc.
II is observed that liquefaction normally occurs in the soil cla'isificd as SP according to Indian Standard
Classification when the SPT number N is less Ihan 15. However, sometimes liquefaction may also occur in
the soils classified as SW, SM and ML.
Fine·grained soils do not compress readily under dynamic loadings to cause a high dynamic pore water
pres,sure. Moreover, they also posscss the shear strength due 10 cohesion. Therefore, liquefaction does not
occur in the fine-grained soils. However, in quick clays, there is a possibility of liquefaction because their
slr6cture is dcstroyed by shaking.
'54 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
When liquefaction occurs, sand boils (or mud SpoulS or sand foun tains) appear aI the ground surface. A
large number of sand fountains were ohserved during rhe Dhuhri Earthquake in Assam ( 1934), the Bhuj
Earthquake in Gujarat (2001), and nlliny other earthquakes throughout the world.
Liquefaction of soil is responsible for many failures of earlh structures, slopes. foundations. II may also
lead 10 land slides. laICral spreads. sinking of S\fuctures and flotation of underground structures.
32.13. FACTORS AFFECTING LIQUEFACTION
TIle following factors mainly affect the liquefaction of soils in the field.
1. Soil type. As already discussed, liquefaction usually occurs in cohesion less soils, especiall y soils of
type SP.
On the other hand, liquefaction docs nOI occur in fine-grained. cohesive soils. However. highly sensiti ve,
quick clays may liquefy.
2. Particle size and gradation. Fine. uniform sands are more prone to liquefaction than coarse, well-
graded sands. Since the penneabilily of coar~e sands is greater than that of fine sands. lhe pore water pressure
is rapidly dissipated in such sands and liquefaction nOnlmlly docs not occur.
Liquefaction pOiential of sands depends on percentage of fines (size < 0.075 mm) prescnt in it. For il sand
of a given initial relative density, as the percentage of fine increases. the liquefaction potcntial is decreased.
3. Initial relative density. Liquefnction of sands depends to n large extent on the initial relative density
(or density index). In dense sands. both porc water pressure and senlements are considcr.lbly less than those
in loose sands. Hence the proneness of sand to liquefaction is reduced with an increase in relative density
indicated by SPT number (or cone penetration resistance).
4. Length of drainage path. If the length of drainage path is large, a sand deposit would behave as
undrained when the pore water pressure is suddenly increased due to earthquake and the liquefaction may
The length of the drainage path is somet imes reduced by providing drains of highly pervious materials in
sand deposits.
5. Surcharge loads. The initial e ffective stress in the sand deposit can be increased by lhe application of
a surcharge load on it. With an increase in lhe eflccli\lc stress, lhe tronsfer of stress from the soi l particlcs to
the pore water is delayed. Thus the sand deposit would require higher intensity vibrations for grclncr duration
when the surcharge loads are applied to i1.
6. Characteristics of vibration. The m'lin characteristics of vibration are its accelcmtion. frequency.
amplitude and velocity. For liquefaction of soils, the first two characteristics. namely, acceleration and
frequency. are more dominant.
Acceler.ltion during vibration is the most important characteristics affecting liqueraction of soils. In
genera l, the greater tbe acceleration. the greater are the chances of liquefaction. Liquefaction usually occurs
only aftcr a ce rtam number of vibration cycles arc re peated.
Frequency of vibration is important if il is close to the natural frequency of the soil-foundation system
and resonance occurs.
7. Age of soil deposit. If the soil ~eposit is very old. its proneness to liquefaction is relatively low as
compared to thai of a recent soil deposit. In old deposits. somc form of cementation occurs at the contact
points of sand particles and the transfer of intcrparticle stresses to pore water is delayed.
8. Trapped air.- If air is tnlpped in a sand dcposit, a part of the porc water pressure is dissipated 'due 10
its compression. Therefore, the possihilit}! of liquefaction is reduced to some extenl.
9. Miscellaneous factors. Some miscellaneous factors such as soil structure. method of ~oil deformat ions.
e tc. also affect the liquefaction characteristics of soi ls but their effect is not signiticanl.
32.14. ASSESSMENT OF SUSCEPTIllILITY OF A SOIL TO LIQUEFACTION
It is important to known whether the soil III the site is susceptible to liquefact ion or not, so Ihat suitable
measures may be adopted, if required. Recent rcsean:h has necn directed in this dircclion. Various methods
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENG1NEERlt"G
have been proposed by different investignwrs. ·nle cyclic ~are~~ npprolu:h is generull ~ u ~c d in most of the
methods.
The cyclic stress ratiu is derined as the mtio of Ihe cyc lic shear stress (t) to Ihe initial en·cctive slress
(0"0')' llle cyclic stress ratio produced by Ihe earthquake (t/ilo')" is compared with Ihal requircd to induce
liquefaction in the soil (""f/Oo'),. The faclOr of safety (F) against liquefaction is cstimated as
where,
(Ino.u = maximum horizontal accelemtion (MHA) at the ground surfllce
g = acceleration due to gravity (= 9.8 1 m/s2)
0"0 = total vertical stress UI the point of interest
00' = effective vertical stress at the same point
(""f/0"0') ,/ = cyclic stress ratio produced by the design earthquake.
r,/ = stress reduction factor.
The main problem is in the
estimation of the maximum hori-
zontal acceleration, (CXmnx). It
depends upon a number o f raclors
such as the magnitude of the earth-
quake. the rocal depth, the distance
to the fault trace, the response of
the sile, etc.
.,
The energy released by an .,
earthquake :!ttcnuates as the waVeS
travel away from the zone of ·5
-------
.,
"" "-
fracture. Consequently, the maxi-
mum horizontal acceleration dec-
reases as the epiccmral distance ·3 '\.
increases. Fig. 32. [2 shows a
typical aUentualion curve for Ihe
.,
rock sites in the central U.S. .\
regions (Nullli and ·Herrmann,
1989). 0 ~
\ 10 100
The valucs of the maximum
horizontal acceleration (MHA) at EPICENTRAL DISTANCE (km)
(Redrawn after Nu"Ii and Herrmann, 1984)
rock sites get further moditied due Fig. 32.12. MHA 31tcnUlUion rct3tionslllp ror ms=7.S
.,. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEER ING
~"
Range'
(b) Cyclic stress ratio to induce liquefaction in a soil
The cyclic stress ratio (t /oo')/ required [0 induce
liquefaction in a given saturated sand deposit depends
" (Redrawn after Seed, et at, 1971)
Fig. 32. t 3. Vari:llion o r SII'~S.~ r~duclion roctor with dcpU!
upon a number of factors. In lhe simplified analysis
given below. only the fo llowing three fac-
tors arc considered (Seed, e t al.. 1985).
I. The corrected standard penetration
[est (SPT) number indicated as
(NI)6I.), obtained from the SPT
number (N)oo mea... ured in the field .
~ 0·'
(N t )60 = N w ~ 0,
... (32.16) ~
."
expressed as percentage of fines
.~
i.e., percent passing the US No.
2DO sieve ( = 0.075 Il). Alter-
~~ ~~ ~
! 'iJ gg
··
natively, the mean gmin size (D.<,(l)
p., American data Q
can be used. u dat,
J~~ges: d,la 0
Soils with less [han 5 percelll C
0.0
0 10 20 30
fines are 1110st susceptible to lique-
faction. As the percent of fines
(Nll60
" "
~:~las=~. the liquefaction polenlial (Redrawn after Seed el at, 1985)
Fig. 32.14. Cyclic strr:ss ratio to C;!USC hquefaction as:l. function of
correctcd SPT (NI)fil.
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING
3. The dUr.Ition of shaking or the magnitude of the earthquake. As the duration of the earthquake
increases. the susceptibility of a soil to liquefaction also increases. In ()(her words. lhe possibility of
liqucfaction is increased as the magnitude of the earthquake is increased because the duration
increases with the magnitude.
Fig. 32.14. gives relationship hetween the cyclic stress rJ.tio causing liquefaction (Vao'), and the SPT
Number (Nt)w valucs for differem values of fines for an earthquake of magnitude 7.5.
If the magnitude of the earthquake is not 7.5, the value of (t/o:o')/ obtained is to be corrected using the
relation
(t-Jo M
= '" (t-i
0 J.~
... (32.17)
where (t/oO')M is the cyctic stress ratio for the magnitude M and (t/Oo'h.s is that for the magnitude 7.5
ohtained from Fig. 32.14.
\jI is known as the magnitude scaling factor.
Fig. 32.15 gives the value of \jI for differcnt
magniludes as given by various invesl igulors. For
tile earthquakes of magnitude greater than 7.5. - -- Se~d and Idriss (198'2)
generally Ihe value given by Ambrascys is used. as -·-··Ambrast'ys (1983)
il gives the minimum value of IV in most cases. For
the earthquakes of magnitudes less than 7.5. the
value given by Seed and Idriss may bc used liS it
gives conservative v:.lues.
It is more appropriate to use the surface wave g '·0
magnitude (M.•,) for earthquakes of magnitudes ] "5
greater than 6.5.
Once Ihe values of (t/oa'),1 and (t/Oo'), have
been obtained. the f<lclOr of s'lfety against .~, '·0
0·5
liquefaction can be estimated from Eq. 32.13. Thus
the zone where the soi l is likely 10 liquefy can he
I
0·0
located. Sui tnole measures can be adopted to 5
prevcnl liquefaction. if required. Magnitude
32.15. PREVENTION OF LIQUEFACTION
II is extremely difficull and impractical 10 Fig. 32.15. TIle vumlion of scaling f~Clof ItI with the
prevent liquefaotion of soi l in the field when the magnitude or the earthquake.
susceptible zonc extends to a large depth. II is generally best not to construct huildings and other structures
at sites prone to liquct:'lction. Because the remedial ion or the liquefaction hazard is quite expensive, it would
be cost effective on ly lit the sites where the land cost is extremely high.
Remediation is sOlllelin;es necessary al sites that have neen developed and the huildings already exist and
laler it has been found thllt the soi l is prone tn liquef:lclion. 111is generally h"ppens when .. dequ:lIc site
investigations were not made prior to the construction of buildings.
The following me<lsures can be adopted I() prevent liquefnction or to limit the damages caused by
liquefaction. .
I. Providing deep foundations. TIle structures should he supported on deep foulld:ltions, such as piles,
that eKtend through the liqtiel1ahle soil to decpcr .~trong and stahle .~Iratn.
Since such piles will not be able tu resist lateral londs in the liquefiable soil. other measures should he
adopted to resist Inteml londs.
2. Compaction of soils. 1lle liquefaction of a soi l can he prevcnted hy compacting the soil and
increasing its rehttive density. Compm;tion is usually done hy means of vibratory rollers. compaction piles.
SS8 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
Illustrative Example 32. 1. The srmulartl ror.fiOIl sei.\·lI/ogml,i1 record.f {I /race amplitude (If 12.5 mm il/
£-W direcliOIl tw{/ a Imel! WII/Jlilllde of IJA 111111 ill N·S c/irl'l.: rio/l ar (/// l'piN'lIIml di.vf(llIce of /In 1011. /f rlrl!
srarion correctiol/ ;s + 0./, UI;III(l/e rhe I/w{:lIil/lde of rile earthquake.
Solution. From Eq. 32.2 (b).
M = log,oA + distance correction
The distance cOITCction for cpiccntral distance of Il v km is + 3. 1 from Fig. 32.3.
In E-W directl{ln, M = IClglO 12.5 + :U = 4.2
Applying the st:llion correction. M = 4.2 + 0. 1 = 4.3
Similarly. in N-S direction, M = lo!!:!) I 1.4 + 3. 1 + 0.1 = 4.26
Average value of M = 4.3 ; 4.26 ,; ' 4.28. s.ay 4.3
Illustrative Example 32.2. ESlimole 1i11! l!l1erg\" re/e{/.\"C(I by w/ ' ('Orllrq/III/a' of 1I/08"i1tu/e 8. 0.
COli/pan' rlre n /crgy releaull f() ,lrm hy 111(' Hiroshima 010111 bOil/b.
Solution. From Eq. 32.4,
10£IOE = 11.4 + 15M = 11.4 + ' 1.5 x S.n = 23.4
E = 2.51 x J O~ ,l L'l'J.!.f.
2lI
Ene rgy re leased hy the Hiroshim:1 atom hOlllh =Kx In l'l:t:.I".
GEDTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING 85'
25 1 X I 02~
Therefore, equivalent number of atom bombs =: ~;-;oro- := 314
Illustrative Example 32.3. E.ftimate the maxilllllll! illtellsity Oil MMI .feale lind the /II(/x/Illum KlVlllld
acceleratioll due to an earthqlwke of magllitllde 7.0.
Solution. From Eq. 32.5, the maximum intensity 10 on MMI scale is given by
M:=I.3+0.6/0
7.0 =
1.3 + 0.6/0
10 = 9.5
i.e. MM[ intensity will be X.
From Eq. 32.6, the maximum ground ucccleration a is given by
,i
Jog lo (J = t I - 0.5 = t ( 10.0) - 0.50 = 2.R33
From Eq. 32.14, ('rlao')" = 0.65 (a~lV. ) ( ~ ) 1',1 = 0.65 (7) ( 5:';6) (0.96)
[* 1 = 0.17
Illustrative Example 32.S. (ll) A deposit of mtllrated fille .wmd hllS 5% filles. If the corrected SPT
mlntber for the .fOlld is 12. eMili/ate the cyclic .1·tn'Sl· mtio reqllired 10 ctluse liqllefactioll dlle to (Ill earthquake
of mugllitllde 7.5.
(b) If the magnitude of the earthquake "'ere 8.0. what wOlild have beell the required cyclic stress ratio?
Assume a scalillg factor (\II) of 0.65.
Solution. (a) From Fig. 32.14, the cyclic stress ratio to cause liquefaction for (N I )60 = 12. percentage of
fines = 5% and for the magnitude of 7.50 is 0.12.
(b) For the earthquilke of magnitude 8.0. Eq . 32.17 gives
[*1 [*) .,
= 'lI
,ls
= 0.65 (0.12) = 0.08
Illustrative Example 32.6. The maximulII horiwllraillct'elemtioll ill bed mck i.l· e.l·tinUlU(1 to be 0.20 g.
What would be the maximulII IlOrit,mlfal acceleratioll al a project sill.' !ocateel ()I'er
(a) a deposit of deep cohesiolliess soil.
(b) a deposit of deep soft mil lleposit.
Solution. (a) From Fig. 32.8, for a bed rock acccicral iQIl of 0.20 g, the maximum horizontal ground
acceleration for a deep cohesion less soil deposit is 0.18 g.
(b) For soft soil deposit, the maximum horizontal ground acceleration is 0.30 g.
IIIust~tive Example 32.7. ((I) A jil'e.~·torey !mildiIiR. 20 III higlJ, htls .)'fee! ji'tllllel' It'il/wllt brick il/fil
panels. II is corlStrllcled Oil a cleel) soil .vitt' cmui.\·tiIlR of loo.wo ..~tlfllrtlted SlIlId overlyill/: a thick .wiff clay
860 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
deposit. The building is to be desigllt'd 10 re.fi.w (III earthlJlwke of magllitl/de 7.5 with maximum bed mdt.
horizullflll (/cct'lerl1tim: ofO.2{) R. Estill/afe rI,e I't'(/k xrolllulacceiemri(JII tit tile .file.
(b) Estill/me Ihe specfml ,.e'\·IH",~·e IIf the huildillg as I'er 1991 unc
Solution. (tI) From Fig. 32.8. the hcd rOl.:k horizontal acceleration of 0.20 g will be amplified to ahout
0.30 8.
(b) From Eq. 32. 10, the fundnmentnl natural period for sleel framc.
1'.. := 0.085 IP·7~ = 0.085 (20)O,7~ =- 0.80 s
From Fig . 32. 10, as per 1991 UBC, for a period of O.KO s and deep stiff clay, thc ratio
ClTecti:C':~~I~:~cu~:~r~~~~~cratiOn
= I.RD
Therefore, the spectral acceleration = 1.80 x 0.30 g = 0.54 g
Illustrative Example 32.S, Estimme 'he de.l'iRIl horiWlIllI1 seismic coeJJicient (A h ) for a buildillg from Ille
fol/oll'illg dara, m per IS; 1893:2002.
I. HeiR"t of buildi/lg = 30 /II
2. Base (Jimeluiol1 of th(' l)IIildil/X IIlol/X the cOII.l"ide/"et/ direclio/l of the lateral force := 10 III.
3. The buildillR has IIwmelll-rt'.~i.\·ting R.C/mllle with Im'ck injil fJ(l/lel.~.
4. Importal1ce focmr = 1.5
5. Re.f(WI1Se /acwr = 3.0
6. The Il/lildil1~ is ,I'illl(l1e(1 ill sei.Hl/ic ;:o/le (V of II/dia.
7. The .~lIhs".(II(J COIIS;st5 of met/illlll .mi/ (Iy('(' II).
Solulion. From Eq. 32.11. the funtlamc nml nmural period (1'..) is given hy
10 , 180 80
0.94
0.92
0.25
0.24
n.I'
0.14
0.'"
0.58 Liquefiable
12 II 216 <)6 0.90 0.24 0.16 0.67 Liquefiable
14 15 252 112 O.lolt) O.2J 0.2J 1.0 Juslsufe
(COnl1mIL'tJ)
GEOTECHNICAL EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING 861
Conclusion
" Ui2 Not liquefiable
The lone between depth of 4 to 14 III is liquefiable . Below that depth, the soil is nOt lique lillble.
Illustrative Example 32.10. The c,rploraIOl)' boringl' at a project site ~'how that Ihere i.\· (l depo.\·it 5 III
tllick oJ .flItllmted U/I/(I \V;th a SPT vallie of 15 fH'eriyillR a 20 III thick deposit oJ cia)' 0/1 bed mck.
If the IIIILl'imlll1l /wriZ(}/IIl1lllcceieraliml ill bed rock dlle to lIlI earthquake (M = 7.5) i.~ el·timated as 0.06
g. i.\· there all)' possibility oJ liqueJaction inthe ' swut tle/1O.fi,?
Assume the Witter whle i.f III 'he J:mmld mrface. perr:elllage of filles = 10% (1IIt1 Y = 19 kN/m 3.
Solution. Since the sand depn.~jt overlies a thick clay depos it . the maximum horizontal acceleration will
be amplified.
From Fig. 32.8, for a peak horiwllllll m;ceicration of 0.06 8 in bed rock, peak horizontal aceelerJ.tion at
ground surt:ICC will be 0.14 8.
Now for N =
15 and Fines = 10%. the cydic stress rutio (t/Oo')/ n~quired to eause liquefaction from Fig .
. 32.14 for earthquake of 1Tlllgnitude 7.5 is (1.18.
The tutal !>tress 00 at the depth of 5 111 is
.1 0 0 = 5 x 19 = 95kN/m!
The erfective stress lit Ihal depth is
on' = 5(19-9.1:11) = 45.95kN/m 2
Struss reduction f<lctor 1"01 = 1 - O.fMJR x 5 = 0.96
From Eq. 32 .1 4 . the cyclic stress ratio due \tI the eannquakc is given by
(* ), = x(a~",,) [~ )r"
0.65 = 0.65 x (0.14) (4;.~5 ) (0.96) = 0. 18
Fwm Eq. 32. J 3. the factor of s"fcty ag<lms\ liqucfllclion.
F = (t/<Jo')/ = QJ! = 10
(t/Oo')" 0.11:1 .
The soil is just liqueliable. However since the factor of s .. J'eIY is less than 1.25, il not safe. To prevent
liquefaction. suitahle mCitSurcs should be adupted.
PROBLEMS
A. NUMERICAL
.. .J.... 32.1. If 1hc st(lndard torsio n scbrnogmph fCl..·urds (III ilvcmge IlOll'C llmplilude of 17 mm III all epicclllrnJ distance of
100 km, what is the pmb:lble ma[!nhude of the earthquake'? [Ans.4.2J
32.2. Wh:lt .....ould he the magnilude of an earthquake to rcIC:lSC 8 x 101.\ J of energy'? {Ans. 6.31
32.3. A slJl.Sloreyoo buildtng has moment-resisting R.C. rramcs wlthoui brick inlil panels and is 2S m high. What
.....ould be its natural pcriurJ ()f vil'lrnlion'! (ARS. 0.8:' 5)
31.4. Estirmlle ttlt! cydic stress ratio producL'<l hy an earthquake :It a site from the rollowing dala:
Ma:timum horizont:d ~ruuntJ an'derat;on = 0.1 ,~
Strl'~S rcduI; lion f.h.:lOr = 0.Y5
Totul stress at the given deplh >: 120 kN/m2
Effective stress at that depth :=: 66 kN/ml [Ans.0.1I3] .
862 SOIL MECIIANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
32.5. Determine the factor of safety against liquefoction at a depth of 2 m in (1," sand deposil due 10 an c.1rthquake of
magnilude 7.5 for the following site oonditi(lns:
Maltimum horizontal occeleration = 0.18 ~
Saturated unit weight of sand = I g kN/m'
Percentage of fines =
5%
Corrected SPT number = 20
Assume the water table is at a depth of 1.0 m below the ground surfal'C. [An.... 1.39J
32.6. Estimate the design horizontrll seismic cocfticient as per IS: 1893-2002 (or a building with the following sile
co nditions:
Height of building::: 28 m
The building has moment-resisting R.C. frames without brick lolil panels.
Importance factor 1.0=
Response faclor = 3.0
The building is situated in seismic zone V on a subSlrala consisting of son soil (type III). IAns. 0.102 £J
B. DESCRIPTIVE AND OBJECTIVE TYP'E
32.7. Differentiate between the magnitude and intensity of :m earthquake. How would you estimate the lUllxim um
intensity if the magnilUde of the earthquake is known'!
32.8. Explain the following terms:
(0) Focus (b) Epicenlre
(el Focal depth (tl) EpicenlraJ distuncc
32.9. What is an isoseismal map? How ..... ould you prepare an isoseismal for a place after tnc occurrence of the
earthquake.
32.10. What do you understand by Inc earthquake-resistant structure? What are the criteria for its design?
32.11. What is liquefaction of soils? What are the necessary conditions for its occurrence?
32.12. What are the factors Ihal affect liquefaction of soil? Discuss in brief.
32.13. Explain Ihe procedure for the asse.~sment of [he susceptibility of a .~alld depo~il to liquefaction.
32.14. Suggest suitable methods for prevention of liquefaction of soil~.
32.15. What are the various haznrds due to an earthqu<lke? Discuss in brief on ly those hazards reluted to gcotechnical
engineering.
32.16_ Explain the following terms:
(0) Pseudo-slatic anulysis
(h) Attenuation of ground acceleration
(e) Base shear
(tI) Vertical seismic coefficient
(t) Fundamental naturnl period of vibr.uion.
32.17. What is meant by the term site-specilic amplification of horizontal acceleration" Wh:lI is its effect on the
sptClrnl acceleration'!
32.18. State which of the following statements arc false.
«(.I) The inertia forces on a building act in the same direction as the grouruJ acceleration.
(b) As the height of the building increases. its natural perioo of vibmtion increases.
(c) Liquefaction normally occurs in clayey soils.
(d) The earthquake of a 'magnitudl! 8.0 would release 1000 times the energy thill due to an eanhqunke of
magnitude 6.0,
(e) According 10 IS: (89).2002. India i~ divided into four seismic 7.ones.
if) The type of soi l according to t.S. chls,\ification in which liqul!foction is most likely to occur is SW.
[Am;. Fa/.ft! (CI). (el (f))
1. For an earthquake 01 magnitude 8.0. the maximum intensity on MMI ~ca1e would be about
«(I) IX (II) XI
(c ) VIII (d) VI
3. In a sand deposit. the ellcctive str~:.~ at a point is 100 kN/m 2. The dynamic pore waler pressure nead required
to cause liquefaction is about
(a) 4 m (b) 8 m
(c) 10 m (tI) 100 m
4. At 3 depth of 10 III below the ground surface, the stress reduction foctor is about
(al 0.90 (b) 0.92
(e lO.94 (el) 0.96
5. Accnrding 10 IS : 1893-201)2. the vAlue of the horizontal seismic coefficient for any structure with T S O. I s,
CAnnot be les$lh:m
(a)zj2 (b)z}3
(e) z}4 (t!) z
6. According to IS : 1893-2000. the mtio (IIR) shall not be greater than
(tI ) 0.50 (h) 1.0
(e) 1.50 (tl) None of above
7. TsunAmis due to enrthquakes ~lCcur in
(a) Oceans (h) Rivers
(e) L.'lkes «(f) Reservoirs
8. The type of foundlllion generally suitable for buildings on liquefiable soils deposit ;s
(tl) Spread fOOling (M Raft foundation
((oj Well foundation [,I) Pile foundation
~_'.~~~1~~~~~&~~~'~
SELECTED REFERENCES
I. Chen. W.E. (Ed.) (1995). The Cil'il EIIR;/I/!eriIlR Ha"tlbook, CRC Press, Boca Raton, New York.
2. Coduto. Donald P. (1999), Ge/}tt'Clmh~tll EIIR;lIe~riIl8, Prillci,l'e.f tIIul Prt.lclic~. PrcJltice-Uall of India, PY'I. Ltd.,
Ne ..... Deihl.
3. Idriss, I.M. (1990). "Response of Suft Soil Sites During E:lRhquakes'", P/Txeedblgs, H. [JolwlI Seed Memori(lf
Sympo.\·;III1l. J.M . Duncan. Ed; Vol 2. IlP 27]-289, Hi Tech Vanr.:ouver, Be.
4 IS: 1893 (Part I): 2002. Cr;teritl fill' r:.:artllqllake R~s;Sltmt Desigtl "J strl/elllre, Bureau of Indian Standards, New
Delhi
5. Krishna, 1., A. R. Chandr.L~ekarnn and Ch,mdra, B (1994), Elemellts oj Ea"IIqllokJ> Ellgillt'erillg, South Asia
Puhllshers, New Delhi.
6. NUllli, O.W. and Hcrrmnnn, R.B. (]984), "Ground motion of Missis.~ippi Vnlley Earthquakes". J. Tech. TOJl. Civ.
Ellg., ASCE 110: (54-69)
7. Richter. C.F. (l935). '"An in~trumentnl ~1rthquakc sC'Jlc", B. Scism. Soc. Am. 25 (I ): 1· 32.
8. Saran, Swami, (l99lJ) Soil D.I',ulIllie.f amI Machine Fmmtlmiolls, G:algotia Publication pvl. Ltd., New Delhi.
9. Seed, H.B .. And Idriss. I.M. (1971). 'Simplified Procedure for Evaluating Soil Liquefaction Potential'. }ol/mal
oj IIII' Soil Mecltll/!;(:S tIIlll Fowl/ltt/;Ott Dh';Si(III, Vol. 107. No .. SM 9, pp 1249-1274 ASCE.
10. Seed, II . Bailon. Tokimalsu. K .. Harder. L.E, and Chung. Riley M (1985 ), "Inlluence of SIT Procedures in Soil
Liqucl"action Resistance Evaluations," ASCE }ollmal oj Gt'OIt!CIUlical EII.~illt't'''iIlK, Vo l. Ill , No. 12, pp.
1425-1445.
II. Seed. H.B .. Romo, M.P.. Sum. J .. Jaime. A.. and Lysnler, J. (1987) '"Relationships between so;1 conditions and
earthquake gr\,'lllnd motions in Mexico city ;11 the e:1fthquake of Sept, 19, 1985." Etu'lItqtUlke Engineerillg
Rt'sf!wd, Celll,-!!. Report No. UCBIEERC-87!l 5 Universily of Culifumia, Berkeley.
12. U.B.C, (1991), Uoifonn Building Code, U.S.A .
APPENDIX A
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS
Adrorbed water. It is water bound to clay panicles because of the attraction between electrical charges existing on the
clay particles lind warer molecules (dipoles).
Air content. II is the mlio of !he volume of air to the volume of voids in soil.
Alluvial $Oils. These are soils deposited by water. Deposits made in lakes are called lacustrine deJXlSiLS and ttme in sea
(or ocean) called marine deposits.
Aflowable bearing pressure. II is the net allowable bearing pressure which can be used for the design of fouOOalion. It is
the smaller of the net safe bearing capacity and the nct safe seniemenl pressure.
Active pressure. It is the pressure developed when the soil mass stretches due to movement of a retaining wall away from
lhesoi!.
Aquifer. An aquifer is a pervious SU'lllum which contains water that can be easily drained or pumped out. An aquifer is
called an unoonfined aquifer when there is an impervioos stnnum only below it and a confined aquifer when it is
sandwiched between two impervious .strata.
Arching. It is a pheoomeoon is which the stresses are transferred from a yielding part of a soil mDSS to an adjacent
non*yielding (or tess yielding) pan of the soil mass.
Al-~$t pres:w~. It is the lateral pressure in a soil mass when there is 00 movement of the mass.
Atterberg Limits (Consistency limits). The liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limits are known as Aueroerg's limits.
The water conlent al which the soU behaviour changes from the liquid to the plnstic SUIte is called the liquid limit;
from the plastic [() the semi·soIid state is the plastic limit; and from lhe semi-solid to the solid state is the shrinlcage
limit.
Backfill. It is the soil material which Is placed into an area that has been ex.cavated, such as againsl retaining walls and
in pipe trenches.
Bearing Capacity. (Ultimate bearing capacity). It is the pressure at the base of the foundation al which the soil below
fails in shear. II is called the groa ultimate bearing capacity when the gross pressure is considered and the nel
ultimate bearing capacity when the nct inaease in prc&Iure over the elristing overburden pressure is oonsiderC(!.
The safe bearing capacity is the maximum pressure which the soil in the foundation can carry safely. lbc safe
beD.ring capacity can be expressed as gross safe bearing capacity or net safe bearing capacity.
Boring. It is the method of investigating subsurface conditions by drilling a hole into the eanh. Generally, soil samples
are also extracted from the boring for detenninalion of the index and engineering properties.
Borrow. It is soil (or rock) material obtained from another off· site source for use as fill at construction projects.
Braced CUI. This is an excavation which is laterally supported. The vertical sides of excavation ore supported by sheeting
and bracing system:
Bullcheads. These consist of sheel.pile walls COI1SIJ'uC!OO to relain CIlnh. These are relatively flexible retaining walls
c:onstrudcd for water front structures, canal loeb, coffer dams, etc.
BulJcing of sand 1be phenomenon of increase in volume of sand (or 0 cohesionless soil) due 10 dampness is called the
bulking of sand. The effect is predominant when the water content is between 4 and 5%. The increase in volume may
be upto 20 to 25%. If the water content is increased, and the sand becomes saturated, the volume of sand mass is
d = -.
CaiSSotl. It is a type of foundation in which a large chamber (or box) is built above the ground level and then sunk 10
the required depth of a foundation as a single unit. The caisson may be an open caisson, a pneumatic caisson or a
fleeting caisson. Open caissons are also known as well foundations.
GLDSSARY OF COMMON TERMS '1\5
Capillarity. It is the movement of water due to surface tension and other effects but not the grovity effect. Waler moves
in very smull channels beanlSe of the affinity between soil ond water.
Chemical wctIfherillg. It is the process of wetlthering in which chemicol reaaions, such as Lydl'8tion, oxidation, solution,
occur. When chemical weathering or chcmicol decomposition occurs. original rock mincrnls are tnlnsfonncd inlo new
minerols by chemical !'t'action. aay mincrols are formed by cnemiall weathering.
Cloys (clay millerals). These are very small ponicles (usunlly smaller tha n 2~) which have a crystalline stJ).laure
developed as the result of the chemiall weathering of rocks. The clay pnnicles are flat or plate-like in shope. These
are highly surface-aaive particles.
CohesiOll. It is the atU'8ction or bonding force between the panicles of fine-grained soils UUl.: creat(1i shear strength.
Compoction. It is the process of increasing the density (or unit weight) of a soil by rolling, tamping, vibrating. or OIber
mechanical means.
COIJSistency. The consistency ot a fine-grained soil is the physical state is which it exiscs. It is indialled by such terms
as sort, firm or hard, depending upon the degree of firmness.
COIuluit. It is a pipe that is usu:llly buried in a soil mass, or which passes through a soil embankment, and carries water.
electriall cables, telephone albles, etc.
COlISolidation. The compression of a snturnted soil under a Sleady-stnte pressure is known as oonsolidalion. It is due 10
expulsion or wafer from fhe voids.
Initially. the slress imparted inlo the soil is carried by wnter. The water is gmclually forced out and the SireS> is
transferred to the soil skeleton and lhe compres>ion occur:;.
Critir:Oil>oid ratio. The void ratio of the soil at which 00 change in volume occurs when the soil is subjocted 10 shear
strain In a drainett test
Dellsity. The mass per unit volume of soil is allied the density of soil. (Sometimes, the weight per unit volume, which
is the unit weight, is called density).
Dewaterillg. The process of removing waler from II construction area is known as dewatering. The term dewatering is
also used for lowering the wllter table to obtain a dry llre9 in the vicinity of the excavation.
Deep jOlmdOliolL It is the type of found8lion which transfers the load to deep strata below the ground surface. The
ccmmon types are piles, caissons, drilled piers, etc. Generally, the roundation is allied deep foundation if the depth
of foundation is grenter thnn the width of footing.
Dispersi1'e clays. These ate types of c1I1Ys which defiOCClJlate in still water and erode when exposed to II low~ velocity
flow of water. Dispersivily is due to a high concentralion of sodium ions in a clay-pore water system.
Ditch cOIlduits. These are types of conduits whicb are installed in narrow trenches (or ditches) and subsequemly
backfilled with soil.
Drawdown. As soon as the pumping is done from a well, the water table is lowered in its vicinity. This drop in 'Ao7lter
level in the well is allied drawdown.
Drilled pier. 11 is a type of deep foundation in which a large diameter hole is drilled in the ground and subsequently filled
with concrete.
Dynamic campactimL It is II method of compacting surface and near-surface UIOes or soil or fill by dropping a beDvy
weight from a relatively great height. Multiple poundings are usually done at each location.
Earth p~ssure. It is the lateral pressure exerted by a soil mass against an eanh-retaining structure (or on a fictitious
vertical plane located wilhin a soil 1tlIlS».
Depending upon the movement of the earth-retaining sU\lcture, the pressure ltlIly be active, passive or at-rest. When the
structure moves IIWlly from the soil mass, it is aaive pressure; and when towards the soil moss, it is passive pressure.
AI-rest pressure acts when there is 00 movement of structure at all.
The coefficient of eanh pressure is the rolio of laleral pltSS4lre to vertical pressure existing 8t a point in the soil mass.
EfJective siu. It is the size of pnrtide in a soil specimen such that 10 percent of the particles are finer than thi~ size. It
is also called the cfJectil''t! diameter.
Effective stress. It is the nominal stress lransmined through Ihe plrUde to particle conlllct in soil. 11 is equal to the sum
of all the oormal componenlS of load divided by lhe tOlal area of cross-section.
The effective stress controls the sheDr Slrenglh and compressibility of the soil.
It is an abstract quantity which is obtained by subtIDCting the pore water pressure from the total stress.
Electro-osmasis. It is a method of drainage or cohesive soils in which a direcl ament (IX:) is used. Pore water migrates
to the calhode, which is usually a well-point. Electro-osmosis a1.so helps io inaeasing the shear strength of the
cohesive soil.
Expollsive clays. These are types of clays which show a large volume expansion in the presena!: of water and a large
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
volume decrease upon drying. lbe dllYs contain the mineral montmorillonite.
These are highly difficult soils to work with.
Fill. It is canh placed in lin excavation or otncr area to raise the eIcvlllion. It is also called eanh fill or soil fill. If fill i!
required to support structural loading, it is placed in layers and compacted III a suitable water contenl to achieve I
uniform 000 dense soil mass.
Filles or /ine-grail/ed soils. The silt-si7.e and clay-size particles in a soil mass are called fines or fine-grained soils.
Flow lIe t. A flow net consists of two sets of mutually orthogonal lines called the flow lines nnd equipotential lines. The
flow lines indicate the paths of travel followed by the moving water and the equipotential lines indicate the points 01
equal poIenlial (head).
A flow net is a pictOrial representation used to study the floYl of water through soil mass.
FOOling. It is lin enlllrgemc'!t of the base of a column or a wall to spread the load on a large area of the stratum below.
It is a type of foundation ilWalled 01 a shllllow depth.
Frictioll, illJerna/. It is the friction developed in a soil due to soil-to-solid contact. It is responsible for most of the shear
strength developed in a soil, espttially in a cobesionless soil.
The angle of internal friction (,) is used to represent the internal friction of the soil.
Frost boil. It is a phenomenon which occurs when a frozen soil mass thaws <lnd water is liberated. 'Ille strength of soil
is reduced due to the softening coused by an increase in water content.
Frost hCaI'!!. It is the risc in ground surface due to the formotion of ice lenses when the temperlllure fnlls to the freezing
point of water. It may C<luse lifting of light structure built on the ground.
Geofabrics. These are built of synthetic fibers and are used os filters, drains, or reinforcement in eanhwork.
GcoSlatic stress. The stress at a point due to self weight of the soil above when the ground surface is horizontal and the
propcnies of the soil do not change along a horizontal plnne is called the gcosllltic &Tess.
Grip lel/gtlt. The depth of the bottom of the well foundation (or caisson) below the maximum scour level is called the
grip length. For stability, the well should have adequate grip length.
Graded /ilter. It consists of layers of sand nnd gravel which pennit floYl of water. The size of the particles in different
Inyers increases along the direction of flow. Thus the finest layer is near the soil to be protected against piping.
GrOUlld water table. It is the lOp surface of the underground water reservoir where the pressure is atmospheric. The water
pressure below the ground water table is hydrostatic. It is nlso called the phreatic surface.
Grouting. It is a process in which the holes are drilled in soil (or rOCk) 000 a grout (usually cement Ilnd water mixture)
is injected into the holes. It improves the bearing capacity and also reduces the permeability and seepage.
/lead. It is eqUlll to the difference of water levels on the upstream and downstream. The downstream water levels is
usunlly taken lIS datum.
Sometimes, the tenn head is also use<! for the pressure head indicated by a piezometer inserted at the point.
Uydraulic gradient (i). It is equal to the difference of he:Jm between the points divided by the distance between them.
UC(II'e piping. It is the lifting of a large soil mass downstream of a hydraulic structure due to seepage pressure. The entire
soil mass in the affected zone is bloYln out and heave piping failure occurs.
l/ygroscopic water. TIle amount of water retained in an air- dried soil is called hygroscopic water. It depends upon the
type of soil, humidity and lemperature. It is removed byoven-drying.
It is the same as adsorbed water.
In-situ. It refers to soil (or rock) in its noiurnl location in the ground when it is in its natural condition.
Isotropic. II pertains to a soil mnss having the same properties in all directions.
Isobar. It is a curve joining (Xljnts of the same stress intensity.
Lalldslide. It is <I relmively rapid lateral and downhill movement of a well·clcfined earth mass (or land form). It occurs
due to gravitational <lnd seepage forces.
Limiting equilibrium. The soil is in the limiting equilibrium when it is at the verge of failure.
The limiting equilibrium methods involve determining the mobilised shene strength of the soil on an assumed failure
surface ns required to maintain equilibrium (or stability) aoo comparing this value with the available shenr strength.
LiquefoctiOlI. It is a phenomenon which may occur in saturated cohesionless loose soil when il is SUbjected to shocks or
yibration.1be soil particles momentarily lose a>ntacl and the soil behaves lIS a liquid.
Mechanical Analysis. It is the process of dctennining the sizes of various panicles in soil specimen. It is done by the
sieve nnolysis for OOIlTSC particles and the sedimentation analysis for fine particles.
McclulIIical weatherillg. It is the process by which physical forces, such as temperature changes and fr05t action,
breakdown or reduce the rock to smaller fragments and soils. There is no chemicnl change and the properties of the
soil formed are the same as those of the parent rock.
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS 867
Mineral. II is a naturally formed chemical element (or compound) having a definite dH:mical composition.
II usualty has a characteriSlic crySial from .
Negative skin friction. II is a down drag on a pile which occurs when the soil in which lhe pile in driven senles nne
than the pile. The load-carrying capacity of the. pile is reduced becaU§e of negative skin friction.
Nalural frequency. A systcm under frcc conditions vibrates al a frequency calted the nalural frequency. II is the
characterislic of the system. In genernl, the nalural frequency decreases as the mass increases and the spring OOIlSIanl
of the system decreases.
Normally consolidated soil. A soil which had not been subjected to a pressure in the past greater than the present
pressure. It is also called a virgi n soil. The seulements are large in a normally consolidated soil.
Net allowable bearing pressun. It is the net pressure which can be used for Ihe design of a foundation. It is !be smaller
of the net safe seltlement pressure arxl the net safe bellring capacity. For oohe:sionless soils, generally the nel safe
selllement pressure governs; whereas for cohesive soils, genernlly the net safe bearing capacity governs.
Optimum moisture cOlllent. II is the water rontent of soil at which the rnaxil\1um dry density is achieved during
compaction.
Over-consofidated soil. These are Ihe soils which hod been subjeaed to a pressure in the pas! greater than the present
pressure. Over-consolidated soils are also called precOIlSOfidated soils. TIle settlements are small for such soils.
PQl'cmeni. It is a hard crust constructed on the subgrade (soil) for the purpose of providing a stDble Dnd even surface for
the vehicles to move on.
The pavement may be a flexible puvement or a rigid pavement. The rigid pavemenlS are made of cement concrete
ond can take the tensile slresses.
Pile. It is D relatively long, slendcr column used as D deep foundation . The pile is end-bearing (point bearing) pile whcn
it obtains support from the bottom,and it is a friction pile if it develops l1!Sistance due to friction on the sides. 10
rnosl of the cases, il has resistance from bottom as well as side friction.
Piping. It is a phenomenon which occurs due to erosion by sub-surfao: water moving through a soil mass. It resulls in
the fonn!l1ion of continuous tunnels Of pipe-lik.e fonnations through which soil is carried by flooHing water and piping
foilure may occur.
Plwle slrail~ It is a state of strain in which all disptacemenl$ occur in one plane and the displacemenlS perpendicular to
that plane are zero. Generally, plane strain conditions occur under a long retaining wall, strip fOOling, earth dam, etc.
PltlSticiry. 11 is a propeny of fine-grained soils (panicularly clays) due to which n soil having adequote water cootenl is
able 10 flow and con be remoulded without breaking apan.
POissall's ratio. It is the ratio of the lateral strain to the longiludinal slmin due 10 uniaxial stress within the elastic limit.
Pore pressun. II is water pre$ure developed in the voids of a soil mass. TIle shear strength of a soil is reduced due to
pore pressure as the effeaive stress is decreased.
Excess por..! pressun: refers to pressure greater than the normal hydr06tatic pore waler pressure.
Pressure bulb. II is the zone o f the soil mass in which stresses are induced due to superimposed load. Gcnerally, it is
assumed thai the pressure bulb is confined to the zone in which the stresses are more than 20% (or 10%) of the
surfacelood.
PressuremeJer. It is an instrument used 10 determine the in·situ strength of a soil (or rock) zooe. It is bosed on !he
principle of the measurement of the pressure-related lateml expansion of a flexible cylinder inserted in a bore hole.
Projtx:ling conduit. It is a type of conduit over which eonh fill or earlh embankment is placed .
Quick sand condition. When the head causing upward flow in a cohcsionless soil is high, the effective stress is reduced
to zero and the shear strength of the soil becomes zero. TIle condition so developed is. known as quick sand
condition. The critical gradient at which a cohesiontess soil becomes quick is about unity.
Rejnfo~ed earth. It is an carth mas.... strengthened by reinforcemenl. Eanh structures such as embankments, retaining
walls and eanh dams constructed in I.llyers and reinforced with geofabric, metal strip! or fibres 10 inaease the
strength of the soil mass are examples of reinforced earth.
Retaining wall. An eanh-retaining structure constructed to resist the lateral pressure of soil is called a retaining wall.
Re\>etmeli/. It is a facing buill of stone, concrete blocks, Of other durable malerial 10 protect an embankment from the
wave crCfiion. It is also called rip rap.
Rollers. These are types of conslruction equipment used for compaaing the soil by rolling it. The rollers are of different
types.
Sill/d. It is 0 Iype of coarse-grained soil whose jXlrticJe sizes range betwccn about 0.075 mm and 4.75 mm. Sand is
cohesionless !lnd has high internal friction .
Seepage. SeejXIge is flow through an earth mass under pressure. The term is also used 10 indicate the quomity of water
86. SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
The following arc a few Iypical questions which appeared in question papers of the G:ombined
Engineering Services Examination of UPSC .
J. Lists I and (I contain respectively l enns and expressions related 10 soil classification. Match the two
lists and select the correci answer usi ng the codes given below the lists.
List I List II
( I) Liquid limit - WatereQnlcn!
(A) Activity number
Plasticity index
(2) Plasticity index
(B) Liquidity index
Percent finerlhan 2)..1.
(3) Natural water content - Plastic limit
(C) Sensitivity index
Pltl!>licilY index
(4) Unconfined compressive strength of undisturbed sample
Unconfined compressive strength of remoulded soil sample
A C
(0)
(b)
(c)
(,0 (C.E.S. 1993)
2. Match List I with List 11 and select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists.
List I List II
(A) Sheep-foot roller (I) Heaning of earthen dams
(8) Smooth heavy roller (2) Dry sand
(C) Pneumatic roller (3) Ca~ in g of earthen dmns
(D) Vibrating roller (4) Gravel in W.B.M. road
Codes
A C o
(0)
(b)
(c)
(<f) (C.E.S. 1993)
3. Match List I (difterent types of soils) with List II (group symbols of I.S. classification) and select the
correct answer using Ihe codes given below Ihe lisls.
810 SOIL MECHA NICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
List I List II
(A) Well -graded grovel sand mixture wi th I . ML
littl e or no fines
(B) Poorly graded sands or gravelly sands 2. CH
with little or no lines
(C) Inorganic silts and very fine sands or 3. GW
clayey silts with Jow plasticity
(D) Inorganic clays of high plasticity 4. SP
Codes
A C D
(a)
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.S . 1994)
4. Consider the la llowing statements about the properties of the fl ow nets
1. Flow linc$ are perpendicular to equ ipotential lines.
2. No two fl ow lines or equipotential lines start fronl the. same point.
3. No two flow lines cross each other
or thes~ statements :
(a) I. 2 and 3 are correct (b) 2 and 3 are correc t
(e) I and 2 are correct (d) 1 and 3 are correct (C.E.S. 1994)
5. Matc h List I (structure) with List 11 (defonnation) and select the correct answer using the codes
given below the lists.
List I List II
(A) Retaining wall I. The wall moves abom the dredge line as a rigid
structure
(B) Bridge abutment 2. The wall moves in the form of elastic line wilh a
point of I;onlrb.nexure
(C) Cantilever sheet pile 3. 1111: bOllom moves away from the soil
(0) Anchored bulkhead 4. The lOp of the wall moves away from the soil
Cod"
A C D
(a) 3
(b) 3
(e)
(d) (C.E.S. 1994)
6. Malch List I with List n and select the correct answer using the codes given below !.he lists
List I List II
(Type oj pile) (Situorion)
A. Friction pile I. Stiff clay
B. Bauer pi le 2. Loose granular soil
C. Tension pile 3. Lateral load
D. Compaction pile 4. Uplift load
MISCELLANEOUS OBJECfIVE-TYPE QUESTION
Cod",
A C o
(a) 3
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.S. 1994)
7. Match List I with List II and sele(;t the correct answer using the codes given below the lists
List I List n
(Allowable mat. ~'ettll.'lIIc!'" IS: 19(4) (Type 0/ fiJi/ndario" (llid soil fYlle)
(A) 65 to 100 n11n I. Isolated foundat ion on sand
(B) 40 mm 2. Isolated foundation on clay
(C) 65 mm 3. Rafts on sand
(D) 40 to 65 mill 4. Rafts on clay
Codes
A C o
(a) I
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.S. 1994)
8. Consider the following statements regarding confi ned aquifer:
I . The aquifer is bound at lOp and below by impervious strata.
2. 1lle pressure of water is greater than atmospheric pressure.
3. A tu be well sunk in such an aquifer starts n owing always by itself.
4. The aquifer is fully saturated
or the above statements :
(a) I, 2 and 3 Clre correct (b),.,l, 2 and 4 arc correct
(e) 2, 3 and 4 arc correct (d) I, 3 and 4 are correct (C.E.S. 1994)
9. Match List I with List Il and se lect the (;orrect answer using the codes given below the lisls
~I ~U
(Type 0/ suil) (Mode o/transportatioll {llld depositiolt)
(A) Lacustrine soi ls I. Transportation by wind
(B) Alluvial soils 2. Transportation by running water
(C) Aeolian soi ls 3. Deposited at the bottom of lakes
(D) Marine soi ls 4, Deposited in sea water
Code...
A C o
(a)
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.S. 1995)
10. Consider the following assumptions for slope stability an;lysis:
I . Friction is fully mobilised .
2. Effective stress analysis is adopted
3. Total stress analysis is used
4. Resu ltant R passes through the centre of the circle
5. Resu ltant' R is tangential to the friction circle
812 SOIL MECHAN ICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
lhe assumptions necessary for fri ction circle method o f analysis ':Vou 1d include
(ll) I. 3 and 4 (b) 2 and 4
(e) I. 3 and 5 Cd) 2 and 5 (C.E.S. 1995)
I J. Consider the following statements regard ing negative skin friction in piles:
I. It is developed when the pile is driven through a recently deposited clay layer.
2. II is developed when the pile is driven through a layer of dense sand.
3. It is developed due 10 ,I sudden dmwdown of the water table
or these statements :
(tI) I alone is correCt (b) 2 alone is correct
(e) 2 and 3 arc correct (d) I and 3 arc correct (C.E.S . 1995)
[2. Consider the following properties for a soi l sampler :
I. Areil ratio should be low
2. CUlling edge should be thick
3. Inside c learance should be high
4. Outside c learance should be low
The properties necessary for a good quality soil sampler would incl ude
(a) I :rnd 4 (b) 1.2. and 3
(e) 2. 3 and 4 (d) I. 3 und 4 (C.E.5. 1995)
13. Match List r with List II and select the correct answer using the codes given below the lisl$
List I List n
(Soil property measured) (l1I·situ test)
(A) Modulus of subgrade reaction I. Cyclic pilc load test
(8) Relative density and strength 2. Pressure metcr test
(C) Skin friction lind point bearing 3. Plate load tesl
(D) Elastic eonSlalllS 4. Sllindard penetration lest
Codes
A C o
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d) (C.E.S. 1995)
14. Assertion CA) Quick sand is not u type of sand but it is condition arising in a sand mass.
Reason (R) When the upward pressure becomes equal to the pressure due to submerged weight of a
soil , the effe cti ve pressure becomes zero.
Codes
(a) BOlh A and R arc true und R is the correct explanation of A.
(b) Both A and R are true but R is not a correct explanation of A.
(e) A is true but R is false
(d) A is false but R is true (C.E.S. 1996)
15. Assertion (A) The safe height (2 Zo) 10 which an unsupported vertical c ut in clay can be made is
4c/"t.
Reason (R) Active earth pressure of cohesive backfi ll 'shows thai the negative pressure (tension) is
developed aI depth Zo and total net pressure UplO a depth 2 Zo is zero.
Codes
(a) BOlh A and R are true and R is the COrrecl explanation of A
(b) Boch A :md R arc true but R is not a correct explanation of A
MISCElLA.NEOUS OBJECTIVE-TYPE QUESTION
Cod"
A C D
(a) 4
(b)
(e)
(,n (C.E.S. 1996)
18. Consider tile fo llowmg statements
In subsoil explorat ion programme, the lenn significant depth of exploration is upto
1. The width of fou ndation
2. Twice the width o f foundation
3. The depth where the additional stress intensity is less than 20% o f overburden pressure
4. The depth where the ndd itiomil stress intensity is less than 10% of the overburden pressure.
5. Hard rock level
Of these stlltements :
(a) I. 3 and 5 are correct (b) 2, 3 and 5 are correci
(c) I and 4 are correct (eI) 2 and 4 are COrTeel (C.E.S. 1996)
19. Match List I with List II and select the correct answer using the codcs given below the lists
List [ List 11 '
(Effect) (Reasoll)
(A) Excessive seulcmenl I. Rise of watcr table
(8) High expansivily 2. High compressibility
(C) Reduction in rearing capacity 3. MontolllOrrillon ;te
(D) Acceleration o( consolidation 4. Sand dmins
Codes
A C D
(a)
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.S. 1997)
". SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
20. Match List I (property) with List II (slope of the t:urve) and select the correct answer using the codes
given below the lists.
Lisll List n
(A) Coefficient of compressibility I. Stress-deformation
(B) Compression index 2. Stress-void ratio
(C) Coeflicient of suhgrade reaction 3. VOlume-pressure
4. Log slre.ss-void ratio
Codes
A C
(a)
(b)
(e)
«~ (C.E.S. 1997)
21. Consider the following statements regarding undcrrcamcd piles
I. TIley are used in expansive soils.
2. They are of precast reinforced concrete.
3. The ratio of bulb to shaft diameter is usually 2 to 3.
4. Minimum spacing between the piles should not be Jess than 1.5 limes lhe diameter
or these statements :
(ll) I, 2 and 3 arc correct (b) [. 3 and 4 are correct
(c) 2. 3 and 4 arc correct (d) I, 2 and 4 are correct (C.E.S. 1997)
22. Match List I with List II nnd select the correct answer using the codes given below the lists
List I List n
(Fie/dlesl) (Param~lers measured)
(A) Plate load test I. TOlal and frictional resistance
(B) Standard penetration lest 2. Load intensity and settlement values
(C) Static Dutch cone penetration lest 3. Ncd vnlues
(D) Dynamic penetration test 4. SPT values
Cod..
A B C o
(a) 2
(b)
(e)
(d) (C.E.s. 1997)
23. Consider the following slillcmcnls:
I. Constant-head permc:II11cter is best suited for detcrminmion of coefficient of penncability of highly
impenneable soils.
2. Coefficient of penneability of a soil mass decreases with increase in viscosity of the pore fluid.
3. Coefficient of pcnneability of a soil mass increases with increase in temperature of the pore fluid.
Of these statements :
(lI ) I and 2 are correct (b) I and 3 arc correct
(e) 2 and 3 are correct (d) I, 2 and 3 arc correct (C.E.S., 1998)
24. Consider the following statements :
I. Relative compaction is not the ~,1111e as relative density.
2. Vibronoatalioll is 110t effective in the case of highly c()hes(ve soils.
3. 'Zero air void linc' and 100% ~<lluration line ure not identical.
MISCELLANEOUS OBJECTIVE·TYPE QUESTION
Of UJese statements:
(a) I and 2 arc COITeC! (b) I and 3 are con-eel
(e) 2 and 3 are correct (d) 3 alone is com:ct. (CE.S .. 1998)
25. Consider the following Slale!l1ents :
Phrca,ic line in an earth dRm is
l. elliptic in shape
2. an equipotentia l line
3. the lOp most now line with zero water pressure
4. approximately a parabola
Of these statements :
(a) I, 2 and 3 are correct (b) 2, 3 and 4 arc correct
(e) 3 and 4 arc correct (d) I alone is con-ect (C.E.S .. 1998)
26. Consider the following statements:
Rankine's theory and Coulomb's (heory give same values of coefficients of active and passive earth
pressure when
I. the retaining wall hM a venicu) hack
28. Craig, R.F., "Soil Mechanics", van Nostrand Reihnold Co. Ltd., London, 1978.
29. Das. B.M., "Principles of Geot~al Engineering", PWS-KENT Publishing Co., Boslon, 1985.
30. Das, B.M., "Principks of FOIJISdotion Engi1U!ering", Brooks,CoIe Engineering Division, Monterey, 1984.
31. ))as. B.M., 'Advanced Soil M«lwnics", Mc Graw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1985.
32. Das. B.M., "lntrcxblctiOil to Soil Mechanics", Galgotia Publication, New Delhi, 1983.
33. Deete, D.U., "Geological consideration", Chapter in Rock mechanics in Enginuring Practice, edited by Stagg,
M.G. and Zienkiewics, O.C., Wiley, 1968.
34. Deere, O.U., and R.P. Miller, "Engineering Classification and Index Properties for (nina Reck", Tech. Rep. No.
AFWL-rR 65-116, Air Force WeDpo.tIS Lab., KirdDtui Air Base, Ncw Mexico, 1966.
35. Deere, D.U., Hendron, AJ., Patton, F.D., Cording, EJ., "Dc:sign of surface and near05urface coostruclion in
Rock", Proc. 8th Symp. Rock mech. AIM£, Minnesota, 1967.
36. Dunn, 1.S., Anderson, L.R., and Kiefer, F. W., "Fundamental of Geolechnical Engineering", John Wiley &. sons,
New York, 1980.
37. Evans. H.E., "A Note on tne Average Coefficient of Penneability fot a Stratified Soil mass", Geotechnique, Vol.
12, No. 12, London, 1962
38. Fadum, R.E., "Influence Yulucs for Estimatin!l Stresses in Elastic Foundation", 2M Int. Conf on Soil mech &.
Found. Engg., Vol. 3, 1948.
39. Fenske, C.W., "Influence Charts & Vertical Stress Distribution by Westergaard Equation". Bureau of Engg. Res.
Cin:uJar No. 21, University of Texas, Auslio, 1951.
40. Fourmaintraux, D., "Characterization of Rocks, LaIxxaIOfy Thsts", naplct IV :0 LD meconique des rochn
applique and ouvroges du genic civil by Marc Panet elal, Edoe Nalionale des Points et chaussees, Paris, 1976.
41. Franklin, l.A. , and DusseaUl, M.B., "Rock Engineering", Mc Graw-Hill Publishing Co., New York, 1989.
42.- Franklin. lA. and R. Chandra, "The Slake Durability Test", Jnt. J. Rock mech. &: Min sci. Vol. 9, 1972
43. Franklin, lEo and E.' Beach, "The Point-Load SfIenglh Test", 11Il. lnJ. Rock mech. Dnd Min. Sci. \bI. 9, 1972.
44. Goodman, R.F., "Introductory Rock meclumics", Wiley, 1980.
45. Grim, R.E., 'Day Mineralogy", Mc Graw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1968.
46. Gulati, S.Ie., "Enginere.ring PropertU!!1 of Soils", 1'111& McGraw-Hili Publishing Co. LuI. New Delbi, 1978.
47. H.MS.O, "Soil M«hank!l for Road Engineers", London, 1959.
48. Hansen, 1.B., "A General Fonnula for Bearing capacity", Danish GeotecJmjcDI Institute BuJ/etin, 11, 1961.
49. HalT, M.E., "FouNiDtion of TheoreticD/ Soil mechanics", McGraw-Hili Book Co., New York, 1966.
SO. HarT, M.E., "Ground WDter and SeeptJge", McGraw-Hili Book: Co., New York, 1962.
51. Hazen, A, "Some Physical Properties of Sands and Gravels with reference to their use in Filtration", 24 th
Annutll Report, Mossochusells State Board of HeDlth., 1892.
52. Herenyi, M., "Beams on Elastic Foundation", University of Michigan Press. Ann Arbor, 1946.
53. Hiley, A., "Pile Driving calculations with NOleS on Driving FOIUS and Ground Resistance", The Structural
Engineer, \obi. 8, London, 1930.
54. Hilf, 1.W., "Estimating construaion Port Pressure in Rolled Eanh Ooms" , Proc. fill. Conf Soil mech. &: Found.
Engg., Vol. 3, Rotterdam, 1948.
55. Hoek, E. and J.A. FrankJin, "Sample Triaxial cell few Field or laboratory Testing of Rock", TraIlS/SUI. A, Inst
Min Meta~ \obi. 77, 1968.
56. Hough, B.K., "Basic SDils Engineering", Ronald Press Co., New York, 1969.
57. Housel, W.S., "A Practic.al method for the Selection of Foundation Based on Fundamental Researcb in Soil
Mechanics", Research Bulletin, No. 13, UniveniJy Of Michigtm, Ann Arbor, 1929.
58. Huntigtoo, w.e., "Earth Pressure and Retaining Walls", John Wiley &: Sons, New York, 1957.-
59. Hvorslev, MJ., "Subsurface Exploratiol! and Sampling of Soilll for Civil Engineering Purposes". U.S.
Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Miss., 1949.
60. Hvorslev, MJ., "Physical Components of Shear Strength cl Saturated days", Prot;. Resi. Confi. Shear Strength
of Cohesive Soils, ASCi!, 1960.
61. IRC : 6, "StandtJrd Specifications and Code cf Practice for Road Bridges", Sea II-Loads and Stresse5, IRC,
1966.
REFERENCES
'"
62. IRC: 31, "Guidelines for the Design of Flexible Pavements", IRe, 1910.
63. IRC: 58, "Guidelines for the Design 9f Rigid Pavements for Highways", IRC, 1974.
64. IRC: 45, "Rewmmendatioll for Estimr:ltillg the Resistollce of Sofl Below the mmimum Scour Level in the Design
of Well FoundoJiolls", IRC, 1910.
65. Jaeger, J.C. and N.G.W. Cook, "Fulldamentals 0{ Rock Mechanics", Olapman and Hall Ltd. and Science
Paperbacks, 1969.
66. Janbu, N., "An Energy Analysis of Pile Driving with the use of DintensiofIless PartJIMters", Norwegian
Geotechnical Institute, Oslo, Publicatioo No.3, 1953.
61. Jumikis, A.R., "Soil Mechanics", O. Van Nostrand Co., 1965.
68. Kasmalkat, BJ., "Foundation Engineering", hne Vidyatathi Griha Prakashan, Pune, 1983.
69. Khanna, S.K. and C.E.G. Justo, "Highway Engineering", Nem Chand & Bros.. Roorkee, 1984.
10. Lambe, TW. aod R.V. Whitman, "Soil Mechanics" , Wiley Eastern Pvt. LId., New Delhi, 1969.
11. Lambe, T.W., "Soil Testing lor Engi/leers", Wiley Easlern LId., New Delhi, 1977.
72. lambe, T.W. " Slre$ Path method". 1nl. of Soil Mech. ond Found. Engg. ASCE, \bI. 84,1958.
73. Lambe, TW., "The Structure of Compacted clay", 1nl. Soil mech. OM Found. Engg., ASCE, \bI . 84, 1958.
14. Liu, C. and lB. Evett, "SoUs olld FOUIIlMt;O/iS", Prentice Hall Inc. Englewood cliffs, New Jersey, 1981.
15. Loudon, A.G., "The Computation of Penneability for simple soil tests", Geotechllique, Vol. 3, 1952·53.
76. Malter, H., "Numerical Solutions for Beams on Elastic Foundptions", 7hms. ASCE, Vol. 125, 1960.
. '7. Martson, A., "The Theory of Ex/emol Loads on closed conduits in the Light of ulest Experiments" , Bull. 96,
Iowa Engg. Exp. ~alion, Amec, Iowa, 19.30.
78. McCarthy, O.F., "Esselltials of Soil mechanics alut Foundations", Reston Publishing Co. Inc., Reston, 1982.
79. McClelland, 8., "Design of Deep Penetration Pites for ocean structures", 1nL of Geotechllicol Engg. Div.,
ASCE, Vol. 100, No. GT. 17, 1974.
SO. Means, R.E. and lV. Parcher, "Physical Properties of Soils", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhj, 1965.
81. Meyerhof, G .G., "Bearing capacity and Settlement of Pile Foundation", 1nl. GeOl Engg. Div. ASCE, GT 3,
1976. '
82. Meyemor, 0 .0 ., "Penetration TesIs and Bearing capacity of Cohesionless soils", 1nl Soil Meeh.. Found.
Division, ASCE, SMl, 1965 .
83. Meyerhof, G.G. and Adams, J.I.,"The Ultimate Uplift capacity of Foundatioos", Conadit211 G«x, JS(4), 1968.
84. Mitchell, J.K., "Funoomelllals of Soil Behaviour", John Wiley aod Sons, New York, 1976.
85. Morgenstern, N.R. and V.E. Price, 'The Analysis of the Stability of General Slip Surfaces", Geolechnique, \bI.
15, No.1, 1965.
86. Morgenstern, N.R. and Eigenbrod, K.O. "Classifiallion of Argillaceous Soils and Rocks", J. Oear. &gg. Div,
ASCE, \bl. 100, No. GT to, 1974.
87. Newmark, N.M., "Simplified Computation of Vertical Pressure in Elastic Foundation", Univ. 0/1I1inois. Engg.
Exp. Sin., Circular 24, 1935.
88. Newmark, N.M., 'Influence Charts for computation of stresses in Elastic Foundations", Univ. o/Illinois. Bull.
No: 338, 1942.
89. Peck, R.B., W.E. Hanson, and T.H. Thomburn, "Foundotion Enginun'ng", Wiley, New York, 1914.
90. Poulos, H.O. and E. H. Davis, "Elastic Solutions for Soils and RocIc mechanics", Wiley New York, 19'74.
91. Prakash, S., G. Ranjan and S . Saran, "Anolysis and Design of FoundoJions and Retaining Structures", Sarita
Prakashan, Meerut, 1919.
92. Proctor, E.R., " Design and collSlruction of Rolled Earth Dams'" Engg. News Record, \bI. 3, 1933.
93. Purusholhama Raj, P., "Geotechnicol Ellgilleerillg", Thta McGraw-Hili Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi·t995.
94. Raminh, B.K. and L.S. ChikBnngappo, "Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering", Oxford and IBH
Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1981-
95. Reddy, A.S. and RJ. Srinivnsan, "Bearing Capacity of Footings on layered Oay", IN. of SM &. FE, ASCE,
\obI. 98, No. SM 2, 1961.
96. Richart, F.E., " Review of the Theories for Sand Drains", TrQIIS. ASCE, 'rbI. 124, 1959.
SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDA1l0N BNOlNEERJNO
91. Riehnn, F.R, "Foundation Vibrations", Trans. ASCE, \bL 127, Part I, 1962.
98. Richart, F.B., Jr., lR. Hall Jr., and R.D. ~ "librarions of Soils and FoundaJions", Prentice Hall, Engle-
wood Oirr, NJ., 1970.
99. Rowe, P.W., "A.ncbored Sheet Pile Walls", Proc. illst;lulion of Civil EnginurJ, \bI. 1, Pnn I, 1952.
100. SdUt)enm:lM, J.H., "Esrimating the True Consolidation I1ebaviour of day fran I..JlbornIOry Tesc results", Proc.
ASCl; \bI. 79. 1953.
101. $chmenmnM, HI. and Hnnman, J.P., "Improved Strain Influence Faacx- Diagrams", JilL ofG~ecIvIi.c4J Engg.
Division, ASCE, \bI. 104, No. GT 8, 1978.
102. Singh. A., "Soil Engineering in Theory and Practice, \bl. I and II, CBS Publishers &; Distributors Pvt. Ltd.
Delhi. 1994.
103. Singh, A., "Modem G~eclmicaJ EngillCerillg", ens Publishers and DislribulOm. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi, 1990.
104. Singh, A and Punmia, B.C., "Some ExperimenlS with J<Xlhpur Mini- Compactor", Roads DItd Road
COlistructioll, Vol. 41, No. 484, London, 1963.
105. Singh, 13 lind Prakash, S., "Soil Mechallics allli Foulldation Ellgineen'ng", Nem Chand &; Ilros, Roorkee, 1976.
106. Singh, Vijny, "Wells aJld Caissons", Nem Chand and Bros, Rooricee, 1981.
107. Skempton, A.W., The Pore Pressure Coefficients A and 13", GeotecluliqUl!, Vol. 4, 1954.
108. Skempton, A. W. and Bjerrum, Ll., "A Contribution to Settlement Analysis of Foundation on Oay",
Geotec;hnique, \til. 7, No.4, 1957.
109. Skempton, A.W., "Effective Stress in Soils, Conaete, nnd Rocks", ProcofConj. on Pore Pmssure alld Suction.
ill soilo;, Buuerworth, london, 1961.
110. SkemptOD, A.W., Ynssin, A.A. and Gibson, R.E., "Theorie de la (Ola.! portame des pioux dons Ie sable" AIIII.
ItlSt. Teell. Batim, 6, 1953.
111. Smith, G.N., "Elements of Soil MeclumicJ for Cild mid Mining Engineers", Granada, London, 1978.
112. Smith, E.AL., "Pile Driving AnalysiS by the Wove Equations", Trans. ASCE, lbl. 127, 1962.
113. Sowers, G .B. nnd Sowers, O.F., " lnirotWClory Soil Mechmrics IJIId FoundOlions" , Macmillan, New York, 1970.
114. Srinivasulu, and Vnidyaoothan, " lIand Book of Machine Foundmion" Thtll Me Graw-Hill, New Delhi. 1976.
US. Srogg, K.G. nnd D.C. Zienkiewics (Ed.) "Rock M«htJnics in Engin«ring Practice", Jobn Wjley Sons, New
YO<k.
116. TIIyloc, D.W., "Fulllinmentals of Soil Mechanic:r", John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New Ya-k, 1948.
117. "frller, loW. and B.C. Sutherland, "The Structural Design of Coocrete Pavements", Pnn 5, Public Roads, \til.
23, No.8, "Wa$hingtOl"l, 1943.
118. Teng. W.C., "FoulldatiOtI Design", Wiley, New York., 1962.
119. Thnnesses Volley Autoority, "Coelfer Dams on Racks", lVA Tech. monograph 75, Knoxville, Tenn, 1957.
120. Terzaghi, K., "Theoretical Soil Mechmucs", Wiley, 1943.
121. Terzaghi, K., "From Theory to Practice ill Soil rm:cllmtics", Wiley &; Sons, New York., 1960.
122. Terzaghi, K, "General ~dge Theory of Earth Pressure", Trans. ASCE, \bl. 106, 1941.
123. "frrzaghi, K., "Evoluation of Coefficient of Subgrade Reaction", Geotechnique, Vol. 5, No.4, London, 1955.
124. Thrzaghi, K. and Peck, R.B., "Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice", John Wiley &. Sons New York, 1967.
125. lbdd, O.K., "Growlld Water and Seepage", Wiley, New York, 1959.
126. Thmilson, MJ., "Foundation Desigll and Construction", Wiley lnterscience, New York, 1969.
127. Thchebo18rioff, G.P., "Foulldotions, Retailling and Ear1h SlTUctU!'eS", McGraw Hill Book. co. ew York, 1973.
118. U.S. Bureau of RednmD.tion, "Ear1h Manual", Washington, 1960.
129. U.s. Bureau of Redamnlion, "Desigll of SI/IQII Dams", U.s. Government Printing Office, Washington, 1961.
130. Varadarnjan, A and Arora, K..R., "Non·Linear Analysis of strip Footing on &md", GeOCOlt, IGS Conlon
GeoteclUlical Engg. New Delhi, 1978.
131. Varadarajan, A nnd Arora, K.R., "Finite Element Analysis lISing stteSS-pIilth dependenl parameters", Symp. on
Implemenlation of computer pT'OCeduT"eS alld Slren-SIra;n laws in Geot. Engg. ASCE. lllionois sect., 1981.
132. Varadarajan, A. and Arora, K.R., "An intef3Clion StlKly of Strip FooIing-sond btd syssem by Finile Element
Metbod", 3m lilt. COfIj. Drl Numerical Methods in Geomechallic:r, Aachen, 1979.
REFERENCES <XI
133. Yarndarnjan, A, and Arora, K.R., " lnternClion Analysis of circular FOQ(ing-Sand bed sys(em", 4th btl. COllI {JfI
Numerical methods ill gcomedl{lIIics, Edmonton. 1982.
'!i'-
134 . Varshncy, R.$., Gupta, S.C. and GuPta, R.l., "Theory (llid Design 0' [rrigQtion Structures", Vol. I, Nem Chand
and Arre:, R0Otkee, 1979.
1ro<. 135. Vcsic, A.S., "Bennng capacity of Deep Foundations in Sand", Highwoy ReseQrch Board, National Academy of
Scicnuc, Washington, \963.
136. vcsic, A.S., 'Ultimatc Load and scttlemcn: of Deep Foundations in Sand", Proc. Symp. on Bearing capacity
and Seulement of Foundations", Duke Univ., Durham, 1967.
137. Vijayvergia, V.N. and r'OCht, JA, "A new way to Predict capacity of Piles in Oay", 4th Ann. off-share Tech.
COIlf, floustOIl, 1972.
t38. Wagner, A.A., "The use of the unified soil dassilication systcm by the Bureau of Reclamation", Proc. 4th Int.
COli/ SMFE, london, Vol. J, Butterwath, 1957.
139. Westergaard, H.M., "Stresses in Concrete Pavements Computed by Theoretical Analysis", Public Roods, \til. 7,
No.2, 1926.
140. Wcstergnard, H.M., "A Problem of Elasticity Suggested by a problem in Soil mechanics", &lft material
Reinforced by Numerous Slrong Horizontol Sheets", COlllribution /0 the Mechanics of solids, 60th A1I1Iiversary
1'01., Mucmi110n Co, New York, 1938.
141. Wilson, S.D., 'Suggested Methex! of Tcst for Moisrure Density Relation of Soils using Harward Compaction
Apparotus.. Procedures for Testillg soils, AIDf, 1958.
142. Winterkorn, H.F. and Fons, II., "Foundatioll Ellgilleering HQmlbook", Van Nostrond Reinhold Co., New Voa,
1975.
143. Wu, T.H., "Soil Mechanics", Allyn &. I3ooton, Inc, 1966.
14i. Yang, R.N., and D.P. Winterkorn, "Soil Properties alld Behaviour", Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co., Amsler
dom, 1975.
145. Yoder, BJ. ana M.V. Wit7.ak, "Prillciples of Pa\-emellt Desigll", John Wiley &. sons, 1975.
\tI.
S.
07.
73.
Publications of Bureau of Indian Standards,
Manak Shavan, 9, Dahadur Shah Z1Ifar Marg.
New Delhi, 110002.
INDEX
A Capillary tension, 122 Degree of s.a\l,lr~iion , ]5
AASHTO daS&irlCAlion, 92 Cllpillaf)' WRler, 120 Density boule, 30
Absolute specific gravity, 20 CMIIgrnnde'5App;\nttus,70 Densit)' index, 60
Ab60Iute permeability, 145 CMIIgrande', phreatic line, 174 Denison AAmpler, 426
Abbot COOlpRctiOli 1C61, 362 c.ap:rande', piezometer, 432 Depth orexpiOfation, 417
Activity, 81 ~ral1dc:'spll\l;lidlychart,97 Depth or COOIillg, 637
Adsorption, 69,114 Cement labilisation, 377 Depth fllCior, 453
Adsorbed waler, 116 Centriruge methcd, 127 DifTusedouble layer, 114
Aeolian deposits. 6 Chcmicrd stabiliSllthn, 382 I)ilataocy a:>rTeCtioo, 427
Airconlenl,15 CI.,ssjfiC<ltion. I\9, 824 Dispersed struCture, 118
Air entry v~Jue, 321 Coefficient, e~ r~, pressure, 480 Dispersing IIgent, 49
A-tine, 95, 99 Cocfficin ll, .1t-I'C'I-/ pressure, 2:W, 480 J)irectshcarteSi , 314
Air voids., 15 Coefficient, absolute pclmeability, 145 Diteb cooduit, 575
Alien Hazen's formula, 151 Coefficient, comp«!SSibjljty, 265 I)raioogc, 39 1
Allowable soil prcssure, 588, 618 Coefficient, con.~itlation, 270 OrawOOwn, 146, 403
AJluvial soil depollil. 6 CoemL:ient, eurvHture, 59 Drilling methods, 420
Apparenl JlI"C$urec.lillgram, SSI eoefficicOl, elastic uniform oomprcssion, Drilled pier, 706
Anchored sheet pile. 526, 532 7~' Dupuii's lISSumpiioo, 146
Angle of internal friction, 313 CoefTkient, pcrm«lbility, 136 DUl1Ibility of rock, 822
Angle of shearing resistance, 313 Coefficient, percolation, 140 Dutch cone test, 429, 688
Angle of wall friction, 495 Coefficient, $eCOI1tlary consolidation, 28S Dytlllmic rormul~, 68S
AIt:hing in soils, 573 Coefficient, subgrade reaclion, 659, 781
Alomic bonds, 108 CoeffICient, uniformity, 59
CoeffICient, volume change, 26.S Eanb dam, 173, 460
Aquiclude, 146, 402, 401 Earth pressure theories, 478
Aquifer, confined, 146, 402 Coffer dams, 5S6
Colloids,l08 Eccentric footings, 611, 644
Aquifer, uncon£incd, 146,402 EfTective siu" 58
Auger boring, 420 Colluvialooils,7
Combined (OOI:ing, 645 Effective strc.-.s, 189,313
B EIT<x::tivest~principle,l89
Compaction, 357
B:lrbn', method, 764 Compm'lSion, Index, 265 Efficiency of pi Ie group, 690
Base exchange Cllpacity, 114 Compression I1ItiOll, 279 Electrical ~nalogy, 170
Base pIlrabolll, 173 EiectriC<lI charge, 113
Cone of depression, 146
Beam bending lest, 829 Eiectl"O-<lSlllosis, 394
Cool.' penetrometer methOO, 73
Bearing capacity theories, .587 Electrical stAbilisation. 384
Cone penetration test, 429 Elastic line method, 6S5
Bishop's simplifi«i method. 463 Confined aqUifer, 148, 402
Bituminous stabilisation, 381 Elastic plate method, 6S7
Consistency index, 78 Engineering Ne".-s Record (onnula, 68S
Black cottoo soil, 7 Consistency limils, 69
Blanket drain, 397 Excess hydrOl;llltie prc~urc, 269
Con~1idalion, 2.~
Expansion index. 266
Block diagram, J3 Contact pressure, 247
Iloiling oondilion, 201 Conbd stress, 191
Bonds, lOB Contact water, IlA Fadum '5 chftft, 2366
Bored piles, 675, 685 Core drilling, 421 Failure. rocks, 831
Boring. 420 Core amel, 34 Failure pI~ne, 344, 483
Boring log, 437 Counterfoct willi, S23 Failul\'.$, foulldatioos, !i96
Doussinesq's solution, 221 Coulomb's theory, 494 Fail\ll1'.$, slopes, 442
8raced cut, 550 CoYalent bond, 109 Fellenius line, 457
BulkhMds,526 Critical damping, 760 Fenske's chan, 244
Bulking of sand, 131 CTilical gradient, 202 Field COIDJII.lction control, 368
Bulk Density, 16 Critical height, 492 Field compAction methods, 366
Critical void IlIlio,317 Field COIUOIid.,tion curve, 284
C Fidd density measurement, 33, 368
CaiSlORS,706 Culmann', constroclion, SOl
Culmann's method, 448, 696 FIeld identification methods, 101
California bearing IlItio, 775 Filter, 173,207
Dlpillllnty-penneability test, 152 D Finite difference method, 172, 6.~6
Capilllll)' potential, 12.'i Damping raclof, 760 Filling methods, 2n
Capilliit)' rise, 121 Danish fotmulll, 686 Fixed eanb suppon, 535
Capillary aiphoning, 131 Darcy',law,135 Aootingcaisson, 716
INDEX
'"
floccuialCd structure:, 166 Overoonsolidated soils, 261
Flow indell, 78 Jodhpur mini COIllp!ldor, 362 Ovcroonsolid.1.tion IlItio, 267
Flow net, 161 Joint set, 818
Formation of soils, 5 I'
Joint spacing, 825 . Packer test, 150
F()(l:Cd vibllltion 761
Foundations, 587, 636, 611, 122, 155 K l'al1iclesize aMly~is, 45
Free CIIntilcvcr pilt; 527 Kaolinite, 112 Pal1ially saturated soils. 209, 341
Free earth support, 532 KOir.Cny basic pllrabolll, 173 Passiveslaie,418
Free vibration, 159 Kouny Carmlln eq. lSI PIIVCDJeDt design, 13
Friction cil'Cle method, 450, 505 I'cnetrntion test, 427, 610
L Perc:cnlllge filU!r, 55
Frictional Slrcs.st.~ 784 umbe'sstressp.1th,339
Fr06t boil, 129 PerCt:llIage air voids, IS
Laminar now, 141 Percussion drilling, 422
Frost deplh, 638 l...IIplllCt:·S equation, 164
Frost hcIIve, 128 Permeability, 134,820
LIIteral1yloa~pilC8,696 pFvalue, 125
Frost line, 128 Lat.riticsoils,7 Phreatic line, 173
G Lime stabilisation, 380 Pile foundalion, 671
GCOI5l3ticsttt:$$,219 LimilS.AllCriJerg,69 Pile load test, 688
General shear fllilurc, 596 Linearshrinkagc,76 Pipette method, 51
Liquefaction of sa~ 343
~~::'s:~cr,
Geophysical methods, 433
Gcotextilc, J8..'i Liquid limll, 70 • 426
GJacierdc[X)Sitoo soils, 6 Liquidity index, 78 l'laccment watercontenl, 367
Gow's method. 708 LMd test, pl~te, 621 Plant ofequaJ settlement, 579
Grnded filter, 207 Load lest, pile, 690 Plastic equilibrium, 338, 482
Grading of soils, 51 Local shear failure, 596 Plasticity mali. 97, 99
Gr.linsi7..ecurvc,57 Log:1rithm of time mc:thod, 278 l'1asticity indeJ:, 78
Ground waler, 391 Loudon's formllla, 152 Plastic limit, 73
Gravily retaining wall, 520 M Plastic models, 172
Grip length, 723 Plille 10ild 1('111, 621
" Gross SlIfe bcaringcalXlcity, 587
Groe;s footing pressure, 587
Machine foundalJon, 755
Mass spedficgravity, 20
MarinedeposilS,6
Poillt-lood strength, 821
Poisson's ratio, 218
Group actions, piles, 690 PotC~urepllNlmelc:r,333
Mllrtson's theOf)', 583
Growing, 384 Mat COUnd.1Iion, 649 PotC pn:s6l1fC measurement, 321
Positive proje<:ting ooodlli t, 577
II Mccha.nicalanalysis,46
I'«c:nlial function , 165
Ilagt:n-l'oissclliUecq .. 142 Mechanical wbilisation, 376
Mercury control ~yslcm, 320 Porosity, 14, 820
llaoo-carved sample, 426 Pmodtl's IIMlysis, 592
Il~nscn's theory, 004 Mcyerhof's IIl\3lysis, 602, 679
Modified failure envelope, 338 Prccompression, 371
HIIIV~rtl como.1ction telll , 362
Modified Proctor test, 360 Prcconsolidated soil, 267, 283
Heave piping, 205 I'rimary oonsoJidalion, 257
Hiley's formula, 686 Modulus or ela.~ticity, 218
Primary valence bond~, 108
lIaC's method, 463 Moc.Iulus of subgrmle n:oction, 651, 181
Mohr-Coulomb criterion, 337, 832 Proctor lest, 358
History of soU engg. II Prodor needle, 368
HoncY-<Xllllb suucturc, 167 Mobr-Coulomb theory, 312
Moistun: conlent, 15 Pressure bulb, 225
Housel'!> method, 62S Pres.suremctre, 431
Hvorslcv's theory, 342 MOnlmaillonite, 112
Multi...slagtwcll points,393 Presumptive bearing capacity, 621
Hydraulic head, 134
Principal planes, 308
Hydraulic gradient, 135 N Pumping-in t('l;t, 148
Hydrogen bond, 109 Natural frequency, 165 Pumping-C>Ut 1e~1S, 146
Hydrometer, 52 Negative projecting conduit, 580 Punching shear Cailure, 596
Hygroscopic waler, 120 Negative skin friction, 684 Py<:nome1cr, 28, 32
1 Net allowable pre55ure, 587
Net footing pmosUK, !188 Q
lIIiIC,I13 Quick. sand ooodilion, 203
Immediate settlement, 613 Ncwmllrk's c:hatt, 239
Indt:ll properties, 45, 819 Normally consolidated soil, 2Jj7 R
Indian Standard classification, 98 0 R-value,778
Influence dillgram, 226 OctahcdrnJ unit, 111 Rart foundatioo, 653
Initial C()f1solid~lion, 2."i7 Open cajs.o;on~ 710 Rlldius ofreilltive stiffness, 7&3
In-situ 51ress, 219, 834 Open-end tests, 149 Radiation method, 36
looic bonds, lOB Open well s, 407 Rllnkine's 3I1:llysis, 590
Isobar diagram, 22S Optimum waler co&enl, 359 Rankine'scarth pressure, 481
Isoc/tronc:!>,273 Origin of soils, 4 Recompression indu, '1h7
Isomorphous subslilulion, 112 Origin of pllII1C5,308 ReoonMis.sanoe, 417
SOIL MECHAl'lICS AND FOUNDATION ENGiNEERING
Rectangular combinod footing, 645 Slip circle mdhod, 455 TIme factor, 273
Rc:cI3ngular plot method, 459 Slopes. stability lInalysis, 440 TIme·stltJemcnt curve, 2&3
Recuperation test, 408 Slots, 396 Toughness indc:c:, 79
Rehbann's construction, 497 Soil-bitumen,381 Tonion balllnce method, 27
Relative density, 60 Soil-<:ement,377 Trarv;Cormod 5CClion, tSO
Resistivity method, 435 Soil dassification, 89 Transmissibility, 762
Resonance test, 765 Soil dcposits, 7 Trial wedge method, 503
Retaining walls, 517 Soil formation,S Triaxial teSl:, 3]8, 828
Reynold's number, 136 Soilmodcl,171 True angle ol Criction, 342
Richllrt's chart, 758 SoIl srunpler, 424 True cohc.~ion, 342
Right triangle chart, 9Z SoillltruClure, 116 Tunocls,.571
Ring shear lest, 829 Soil suction, 125 Tunocl conduits, S82
Rigid pavemCllts, m, 782 Soil wBter, 120
Rock Mc:chania., 817 - Soldier beams. .553
u
Rock quality designatioo, 818 Sonic velocity, 823 Uitimille bellring capacity, S87
Ultimlltesoil resistance, 737
Rock mass rating, 824 Specific gnlVity, 19
SpecifIC retention, 402 Unconfined CO!l1ptCS1 i on test, 330, 828
Rollers, types, 366
Unconfined aquifec, 146, 401
Rolary drilling, 422 Specific surface, 107
Rowe's correction,.534 Specific yield, 402
Underground oonduits, 575
Rubber balloon method, 35 Splitting test, 828
UndistW'bcd samples, 425
Stabilisation of soils, 376 Unified dRSSification, 92
S Slllbility CMrts, 453 Uniformity coefficient, 58
Samplers, 424, 425 Stability nllmbcr, 453 Unil weight ofsoiJ solids,S
Sample prt:par1Ilion, cohesionlcss SUtbility or $lopes, 440
Unit weight, 17, 819
soil,322 Standard pcnetrntion test, 427, 610, 688 V
S.-l.nd bath method, 29 SUtnWml Proctor ICSI, 358
Sand drains, 291 Vacuum 'Well points, 393
SUttic oonc tCSl, 429, 616 VandcrWlIal"srorces,110
Sand island, 713 Static formula Cor piles, 6n
Sand replacement method, 34 Vane shear test, 332, 431
SlI:ining, 741 Vc:sic's theory, 605
Saturated mass density, 16 SlOkes 18w, 47
Saturated units weight, 18 Vibration, 759
SItC.!;S--stnlin curve, 218, 829 Vibration isolation, 767
Scrap bucket sampler, 425 S~p"th,339
Secondary consolidation, 285 Vibrofiotation, 369
SlI'Uctllt31 units, III Virgin curve, 267
Second:lry valence bonds, 110
Structural water, 120 Void ratio, 14
Sedimentation analysis, 47 Subgrade,774
Seepage anaIy1ois, 163
Volume change measureme,nl, 321
Subgrndc relICtion, 659, 781 Volumetric shrinlutgll, 76
SeeP"b'C line, 173 Sub...surfaceprofile, 437
Seepage pressu~, 197 Submerged density, 16 W
Seepage velocity, 140 Stldd.:n drawdown, 461 Wales,.554
Seismic method, 433 Suction, 125 Warping stresses, 784
Settlement analysis, 612 Suclion plale, 127 Wash boring, 421
Settlement ratio, 578 Surface tension, 120 Water content, 15
Shape of partides, 59 Swedish-drcle method, 455 Waterdisplaccmentmethod,33
Shear box test, 314 Swelling of !!Oils, 129 Wave equation, 687
Shear sm:nglh, 306, &33 Wodgefailure,447
Shrinlulge, ]29 T Wedge thcory,494
Shrinkage iOOcx, 76 Taylor's stability dwls, 453 Wdl roundation, m
Shrinkage limit, 74 Tension cmdc, 491 Wen hydralllics, 401
Shrinkage ratio, 76 Tension pila. 694 Well points, 392
Shallow well, 394 Tensiometer, 127 Weslegaard'i soIulion, 243
Shan,57Q Terminal velocity, 47 Westergaard method for rigid
Sheet pile wall, 526 Terminology of soils, 9, 838 pavements, 782
Shelby tube, 425 Terra-probe. 370 Winkler's bod, 653
Shift, 744 Terzaghi's analY'lis. bearing
Sieve analysill, 46
y
capacity,593
Significant depth, 417 --cQllsoIidlllion, U,7 Yield ol wells, 402
Sinking or 'Wells, 742 -rigid bulkheads, 725 Young's modulus, 218
Site inyestiglltions, 415
SUmploo-Bjenum method, 294
Te:c:11I1l!1 clllssifiClttion, 91
Thermal slabilisation, 383
z
Zero-air voids line, 360
SltemplOll bearing capacity fllctOrs, 007 Thixotropy, 81
Skemptons pore prt:ssure Three-dimensional consolid:ltion, 287
parameters, 333, 462 TIC backs, 554
Slaking, 130,822 lilt, 744
Roller Compacted Concrete Dams
_~ v. K. MF.HROTRA
~ CONTENT~ ISBN-Hl-8014.U22-,
I. INTRODUCTlf):\" 7. t:ONSTIH '("flON I'LANN IS(; AI'O I> 1'ltQCEDUR F,S
II nricfhi~l",,)'{lrrl:um 11 Gcnc.ul
1.2 Need fvr n ,"hanIlC In ,:nnslnJ..:llOn UPllfQI..:h 1.~ R~"('cnllren(ls In re<: dmns
I .J HistoncDI b.1d::groulld ofn.)II~r ('n "'pllCl,-'d "O"('n'l~ 7 ~ Pl:lIlIlInj! III ' "~ ,,(wnrh
1.4 Slote.of- the- "" 111 lI\(xkrn graVity dnms 7.4 Or"',,):), Ilml ll!! ~onstJU~lInn
15 Roller romp;lctoo all1cre l ~ as deli ned 7j 1mllal ~l!n' li.kn.Hi" n_.
Lb Oc,lil(n & con>tn,JoCUon nmsl<lcmlions in (!l lferenl cO\lntri~~ 76 Tcq ~ rnt>.1!lkmcnl
I 7 AppJ",;~!Jon nl rul!~1 cUIIlP/lcied concrete 77 (', , n~r~l.; !,I,.:m~ $Chrdul"
I.R s'::0!)I: of mlkr compacted COn~,.e le (or futur~ dlm' 711 R~. ,·",hltll\'U<.'" anJ plal-"",en\
;z. PLANNING OF RCC DAMS 7'J Wdlcr '1''P'
~ I GcMql 7 Hi Sf><'<' , ~1 jlIOC~'f11 .... I'
12 Sllln~ "rdam II. t'O~.~ I Mt l(TJON t:Qlj1J'Mt:",'"
1.3 Enl.roomem Impa<.1 10.:i\O:~~~Jlc I~'",~~-..;mr r1,l/l1
1..4 E.;en:~r"l'~ brmrs IIJ ~nlchl"lI JI~1 'm~mg rlanl
~.5 OIll<:r henefi,. ',f ,,;~ ,(III~tru<;uon ~"' I "U"'l'flfl:r.j: Jnd , Iu,nr'n~ ""t.hUIl:S
2.6 Role of different orpnll.nuom X ~ 'i,nfi\(.;" "k:t:u::; m...1,!,.""
= . ('n nw .......::"" 'I1n~~.:fll'J!nl 11.6 SllfC..J..,.-, ~tl<ll'l.<k-r'
J. v£.s~h:- I'HJI f> .. ~) PIi ·, X.7 Thic~n~s .."ntrnl h) I ~,>:f',
J I Gen,,!'.: 1I.~ V'bfmOI) j,)."t ~u[t",
3.1 l}:~,;; n ~nl~na ~ Q V,I-r:Il,,..y .' .I!,:,
J.J Expan"on a"c! ",mlrJC11I,n J,,,nls ~.IU i\~l'e)l~le C'~' llng pbnl
j " Lin JOint ~nd III, Ull~l.n'·" ~.II QUonl ity "I \~lu '!'lII ~ nt
J. ~ Wnter swp" 9. 1'N:F.I' \N: ,H I' I" Of' SI'El:lfICATIONS
36 Insp,,::':IIOII ~.,l!~: :c, m.rt 001,. 9. 1 Pmltong '1",~",~.,t,V!,~ 1M ~~
3.7 SC'ep.,~col1lrol 9.2 Ekonent. vi ~1>"lIr'l~(lOlI$
38 FOUnd~lion 9_' rn.o;SIIl!cp.\r.;~lal"'hcadin~&di5CUSSI(\n
3.9 Sl'l ll ~y.; 10. t"!t.LD QI 'AL IT'V CONT ROl,
.U O Outlel IoUlIl.:an:< 10 2 (}Iulu~ ("""vi during in~Slig.llif}n. planning ~nd
3.11 L3q;e ~:illing b;i~'ns. tna<5 ba,·~(jlls. fO\lndlllion of sWl;e proe"""'Il:Il, ,t"ge
tanh. SI01"~~~ Inllks and Ulhtl" SIf",; wres 10.3 p.... ~·"'u"<.:lInn qu;lJi,y cQnU"ol
4. IN\' E....,I(;ATJON AND SELECTION OF MATERIALS 10.J Qu.tlU) ;,vnll'l.1 during ConStfIlCIlO~,
41 GenC' r,1 I('~ 1""I",,!!OnofKi:
J 2 Ce'll"'ntlliou$ mmeri~ l ~ 1I.0A." I!'IISTN:UMENTATION
... 3 AJ;gfej!al<:S II I G~r,cr.l l
J J Woter qU3lity I I "Z T)'flc of mCa,uteme",. & ;n,trurnenls req uITed
J.5 Adml~lurcs II ..' (jen~ ,.al gUI delines on the usc of instrumental Ion
!i. MIX 1'N:OI'OK'1l0NING t'O K ROLLER IIAln'lrllffiCnls ror <cc dJms
COI\1I'ACTED CONCRETE I J..'i Ac!dU'QII31 measurements '11 ~ismic art:3S
52 81ls,~ (or selection 01 mix proflO'"Ons 12. l't:RFORMANCE EVAI.UATION Ot> N:CC
:;.::W::e~rec:ui~enl IZ.IGeneral
SJConsislcncytllSts 12.:.1 MnlenalsllclklviOf
S5Sclecllnllmi~rroflO" 'on5 12. 3SmICHrll~havlOf
S.6 Field OIdju5tment of ml~ J'lIopon ions 12.4 Thermallx:h.:ovlor
S 7 E.t;~mple problem of ml~ design 12.5 Wiliert'ghl~
6. I'N:OPEK'nF.S Ot' ROLtER COMPACTED 1:'..6 EvaluatIon by drilled core.
CONCRETE 13. ROLLER COM PACn:.o CONCRETE,rAST.
6.2 Workability " Rf:'St:NT ANI) HlTURE
6.3 Oensity and yield 13.2 Rille of cement indutry in re<: dcvelopl1l<:nl
6.4 Ptrmc~bili ly 13.3 Ro le of n yosh industry in rcc development
6.S CQmpres~ive strength 13.4 Ult>oralor~ research and full scale trials
6.6 Tt nsile SlTc ngth and slrai n cnpachy 13.5 Neooedre5eilfCh
6.7 Shc.'lr strenglh Il6 Econornlcs of future rcc darns
.6.8 Thermal bth.lvior 14. PR08LF.MS IN R CC
6.9 Thermlll properties 14.2 Wa~atighlness and $Cepage
6.10 Drying shrinkage 14.3 Crockin&:
6.1 1 Autogenousvol l.Illlechanges 14.4 Alknhaggregatereaclion
6.I2Crecp 14.S RCSI$tlUlCC 10 erosion
6.13 Modulus or elasticily PART II -INVESTIGATION, PLANNING. DESIGN"
6. 14 Poiuon's ralio CONSTRUCTION DETAILS OF 102 NON·TYPICAL
6.IS Cavitation. abl1lsion and imp;oc~ RCt: DAMS
6. 16 Durabili~y "ART III-QUEST10NS ANI> A~Wt;RS
(CONTENTS)
Introduelion *
Melhod of Consistont Deformation *
Three Moment Equation *
Siope-Defloction Method
* Momont Distribution Method *
Method of Column Analogy Kini's Method* Stroin Energy Methods * *
Two Hinged and Filled Arches *
Influence l ines *
Suspension Bridges Model Anolysis *
Motri~ Methods *
* Appro~imote Analysis of Framos and Trusses *
Secondory Stresses Appendill *
Pages: 684 + XII Price Rs. 175.00
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
Structural
Analysis A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach
A. GHALI & A.M. NEVILLE
Fourth Edition ISBN 419-21200-0
The fourth e dition of this comprehensivo lelll book combines and develops concurrently
A. _ both classical & malri~-based methods of stru~tural anolysis. The book opens wilh 0 new
OUttv1l1tl ~hopter on the anolysis of statically determinate stru~tures, intended to provide a beller
•
* Usefu l for undergraduate and poslgraduate StudcnL5 and field engineers .
The book covers the syllabus of the subject usually taught al the degree level in various Indian
Universities and technical institutions. The students appearing for AMIE, ICS, IES and various
other competitive examinations will find the book useful. The book is written entfrely in SI units.
However, useful conversion factors are given for the readers interested in M.K.S. and F.P,S.
system of units.
CONTENTS
Part-I : Hydrology, Water Resources, Dam ilnd Water Power Engineering
Introduction * Descriptive Hydrology *Stream Gauging and Hydrograph Analysis * Estimation of Runoff, yield, and
Flood Discharge *Ground Water Hydrology
Planning for Water Resources Development
'**
River Behaviour and Training
Introduction to Dam EngineerIng
* Reservoir Planning
* Gravity Dams
'* *
Flood Control
Embankment
*
Dams * Arch Dams and Buttress Dams *Spillways * Dam Outtets and Sluice ways * Water Power Engineering
Part·1I : Diversion Headworks, Distribution works, Irrigation Practice and Irrigation Management
*
Planning and layout of Diversion Headworks
Headworks * Water Requirements of Crops
Canal Regulation Works *
Cross·Drainage Works
*
Basic Principles of Design of Hydraulic Structures
Planning and Layout of Distribution System
*
'* * Design of Diversion
Design of Channels
Canal Outlets, Escapes, Bridges and Meter Flumes *
lining and
*
Maintenance of canals
of Irrigation Practice *
*Well and lift Irrigation *
Methods of Application of Water
Tank, Bandhara and Inundation Irrigation System
*
*fundamental
Water logging, Drainage and reclamation and irrigation
* *
.
Management Appendix A - Salient Features of Some Typical River Valley Projects Appendix B - Glossary of
Common Terms *Appendix C - Selected References * Appendix D - Publication of Bureau of Standards.
Pages : 1092 + XII Price : Rs. 250.00
I •• I • .
http ://www. standardpubHshers.com